Fanuc Series 0T Operator S Manual

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 0 / 00 / 0-Mate
for Lathe
Operator's Manual
GFZ-61394E/08 June 1998
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thissectiondescribesthesafetyprecautionsrelatedtotheuseof CNCunits. Itisessential thattheseprecautions
beobservedbyuserstoensurethesafeoperationof machinesequippedwithaCNCunit(all descriptionsinthis
sectionassumethisconfiguration). Notethat someprecautions arerelatedonlytospecific functions, andthus
may not beapplicabletocertainCNC units.
Usersmustalsoobservethesafetyprecautionsrelatedtothemachine, asdescribedintherelevantmanual supplied
bythemachinetool builder. Beforeattemptingtooperatethemachineorcreateaprogramtocontrol theoperation
of themachine, theoperator must becomefully familiar withthecontents of thismanual andrelevant manual
suppliedbythemachinetool builder.
Contents
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE s--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS s--3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING s--5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING s--7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE s--9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B--61394E/08
s-2
1
DEFINITIONOFWARNING, CAUTION, ANDNOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. PrecautionsareclassifiedintoWarningandCautionaccordingtotheir bearingonsafety.
Also, supplementary information is described as aNote. Read theWarning, Caution, andNote
thoroughly beforeattemptingtousethemachine.
WARNING
Appliedwhenthereisadanger of theuser beinginjuredor whenthereisadamageof boththeuser
beinginjuredandtheequipment beingdamagedif theapprovedprocedureisnot observed.
CAUTION
Appliedwhenthereisadanger of theequipment beingdamaged, if theapprovedprocedureisnot
observed.
NOTE
TheNoteisusedtoindicatesupplementary informationother thanWarningandCaution.
` Readthismanual carefully, andstoreitinasafeplace.
B--61394E/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s-3
2
GENERAL WARNINGS ANDCAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Never attempt to machine aworkpiece without first checking the operation of themachine.
Beforestartingaproductionrun, ensurethat themachineisoperatingcorrectly byperforming
atrial runusing, for example, thesingleblock, feedrateoverride, or machinelock functionor
by operatingthemachinewithneither atool nor workpiecemounted. Failureto confirmthe
correct operation of themachinemay result inthemachinebehaving unexpectedly, possibly
causingdamagetotheworkpieceand/or machineitself, or injury totheuser.
2. Beforeoperatingthemachine, thoroughly check theentereddata.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possiblycausingdamagetotheworkpieceand/or machineitself, or injurytothe
user.
3. Ensurethat thespecifiedfeedrateisappropriatefor theintendedoperation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximumallowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intendedoperation. Refer tothemanual providedwiththemachinetodeterminethemaximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
user.
4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
user.
5. TheparametersfortheCNCandPMCarefactory--set. Usually,thereisnotneedtochangethem.
When, however, thereisnot alternativeother thantochangeaparameter, ensurethat youfully
understandthefunctionof theparameter beforemakingany change.
Failuretoset aparameter correctly mayresult inthemachinebehavingunexpectedly, possibly
causingdamagetotheworkpieceand/or machineitself, or injury totheuser.
6. Immediatelyafter switchingonthepower, donottouchanyof thekeysontheMDI panel until
thepositiondisplay or alarmscreenappears ontheCNC unit.
Someof thekeys ontheMDI panel arededicated tomaintenanceor other special operations.
Pressinganyof thesekeysmayplacetheCNC unit inother thanitsnormal state. Startingthe
machineinthisstatemay causeit tobehaveunexpectedly.
7. Theoperatorsmanual andprogrammingmanual suppliedwithaCNC unit provideanoverall
descriptionof themachinesfunctions, includinganyoptional functions. Notethattheoptional
functionswill vary fromonemachinemodel toanother. Therefore, somefunctionsdescribed
inthemanualsmaynotactuallybeavailablefor aparticular model. Checkthespecificationof
themachineif indoubt.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B--61394E/08
s-4
WARNING
8. Somefunctionsmayhavebeenimplementedat therequest of themachine--tool builder. When
usingsuchfunctions, refer tothemanual suppliedbythemachine--tool builderfordetailsof their
useandany relatedcautions.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, theyareretainedevenif thepower isturnedoff. Suchdatamaybedeletedinadvertently,
however, or it may prove necessary to delete all datafromnonvolatilememory as part of error
recovery.
Toguardagainst theoccurrenceof theabove, andassurequickrestorationof deleteddata, backup
all vital data, andkeepthebackupcopy inasafeplace.
B--61394E/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s-5
3
WARNINGS ANDCAUTIONS RELATEDTO
PROGRAMMING
This section covers themajor safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to
performprogramming, readthesuppliedthismanual carefullysuchthatyouarefullyfamiliar with
their contents.
WARNING
1. Coordinatesystemsetting
If acoordinate systemis established incorrectly, themachine may behave unexpectedly as a
result of theprogramissuinganotherwisevalidmovecommand.
Suchanunexpectedoperationmaydamagethetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or cause
injury totheuser.
2. Positioningby nonlinear interpolation
Whenperforming positioningby nonlinear interpolation(positioningby nonlinear movement
betweenthestart andendpoints), thetool pathmust becarefully confirmedbeforeperforming
programming.
Positioninginvolvesrapidtraverse. If thetool collideswiththeworkpiece, it may damagethe
tool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or causeinjury totheuser.
3. Functioninvolvingarotationaxis
Whenprogrammingpolar coordinateinterpolationor normal--direction(perpendicular) control,
paycareful attentiontothespeedof therotationaxis. Incorrect programmingmayresult inthe
rotationaxisspeedbecomingexcessively high, suchthat centrifugal forcecauses thechuck to
loseitsgripontheworkpieceif thelatter isnot mountedsecurely.
Suchmishapislikely todamagethetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or causeinjury to
theuser.
4. Inch/metric conversion
Switchingbetweeninchandmetric inputsdoesnotconvert themeasurement unitsof datasuch
as theworkpieceorigin offset, parameter, andcurrent position. Before starting themachine,
therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an
operationwithinvaliddataspecifiedmaydamagethetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or
causeinjury totheuser.
5. Constant surface speedcontrol
Whenanaxissubject toconstant surfacespeedcontrol approaches theoriginof theworkpiece
coordinatesystem, thespindlespeedmay becomeexcessively high. Therefore, it isnecessary
tospecify amaximumallowablespeed. Specifyingthemaximumallowablespeedincorrectly
may damagethetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or causeinjury totheuser.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B--61394E/08
s-6
WARNING
6. Strokecheck
After switchingonthepower, performamanual reference positionreturnasrequired. Stroke
checkisnotpossiblebeforemanual referencepositionreturnisperformed. Notethatwhenstroke
check isdisabled, analarmisnot issuedevenif astrokelimit isexceeded, possiblydamaging
thetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or causinginjury totheuser.
7. Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check isperformed basedonthetool dataspecified duringautomatic
operation. If thetool specificationdoesnotmatchthetool actually beingused, theinterference
check cannot bemadecorrectly, possibly damaging thetool or themachineitself, or causing
injury totheuser.
After switching on thepower, or after selecting atool post manually, always start automatic
operationandspecify thetool number of thetool tobeused.
8. Absolute/incremental mode
If aprogramcreatedwithabsolutevaluesisruninincremental mode, or viceversa, themachine
may behaveunexpectedly.
9. Planeselection
If anincorrectplaneisspecifiedforcircular interpolation, helical interpolation, oracannedcycle,
themachinemaybehaveunexpectedly. Refer tothedescriptionsof therespectivefunctionsfor
details.
10. Torquelimit skip
Beforeattemptingatorquelimit skip, applythetorquelimit. If atorquelimit skipisspecified
without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without
performingaskip.
11. Programmablemirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
12. Compensation function
If acommandbasedonthemachinecoordinatesystemor areferencepositionreturncommand
isissuedincompensationfunctionmode, compensationistemporarilycanceled, resultinginthe
unexpectedbehavior of themachine.
Before issuing any of theabovecommands, therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.
B--61394E/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s-7
4
WARNINGS ANDCAUTIONS RELATEDTOHANDLING
Thissectionpresentssafetyprecautionsrelatedtothehandlingof machinetools. Beforeattempting
tooperateyourmachine, readthesuppliedthismanual carefully,suchthatyouarefullyfamiliarwith
their contents.
WARNING
1. Manual operation
Whenoperatingthemachinemanually, determinethecurrentpositionof thetool andworkpiece,
and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified correctly.
Incorrect operationof themachinemay damagethetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or
causeinjury totheoperator.
2. Manual reference positionreturn
After switching on the power, performmanual reference position return as required. If the
machineisoperated without first performing manual reference positionreturn, it may behave
unexpectedly. Strokecheckisnotpossiblebeforemanual referencepositionreturnisperformed.
Anunexpectedoperationof themachinemaydamagethetool,themachineitself, theworkpiece,
or causeinjury totheuser.
3. Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that themovement axis, direction, and command havebeen specified
correctly, andthat theenteredvaluesarevalid.
Attemptingtooperatethemachinewithaninvalidcommandspecifiedmaydamagethetool, the
machineitself, theworkpiece, or causeinjury totheoperator.
4. Manual handlefeed
Inmanual handlefeed, rotatingthehandlewithalargescalefactor, suchas100, appliedcauses
thetool andtabletomoverapidly. Careless handlingmay damagethetool and/or machine, or
causeinjury totheuser.
5. Disabledoverride
If overrideisdisabled(accordingtothespecificationinamacrovariable) duringthreading, rigid
tapping, orothertapping, thespeedcannotbepredicted, possiblydamagingthetool, themachine
itself, theworkpiece, or causinginjury totheoperator.
6. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when themachine is operating under the
control of aprogram. Otherwise, themachinemaybehaveunexpectedly, possiblydamagingthe
tool, themachineitself, thetool, or causinginjury totheuser.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B--61394E/08
s-8
WARNING
7. Workpiececoordinatesystemshift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate
system. Beforeattemptingtooperatethemachineunder thecontrol of aprogram, confirmthe
coordinatesystemcarefully.
If themachineisoperatedunderthecontrol of aprogramwithoutmakingallowancesforanyshift
intheworkpiececoordinatesystem, themachinemaybehaveunexpectedly, possiblydamaging
thetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or causinginjury totheoperator.
8. Software operators panel andmenuswitches
Usingthesoftwareoperatorspanel andmenuswitches, incombinationwiththeMDI panel, it
ispossibletospecify operations not supportedbythemachineoperatorspanel, suchasmode
change, overridevaluechange, andjogfeedcommands.
Note, however, that if theMDI panel keysareoperatedinadvertently, themachinemaybehave
unexpectedly, possiblydamagingthetool, themachineitself, theworkpiece, or causinginjury
totheuser.
9. Manual intervention
If manual interventionisperformedduringprogrammedoperationof themachine, thetool path
mayvarywhenthemachineisrestarted. Beforerestartingthemachineafter manual intervention,
therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental commandmode.
10. Feedhold, override, andsingleblock
Thefeedhold, feedrateoverride, andsingleblockfunctionscanbedisabledusingcustommacro
systemvariable#3004. Becareful whenoperatingthemachineinthiscase.
11. Dry run
Usually, adryrunisusedtoconfirmtheoperationof themachine. Duringadryrun, themachine
operatesatdryrunspeed, whichdiffersfromthecorrespondingprogrammedfeedrate. Notethat
thedry runspeedmay sometimesbehigher thantheprogrammedfeedrate.
12. Cutter andtool noseradius compensation inMDI mode
Paycareful attentiontoatool pathspecifiedbyacommandinMDI mode, becausecutter or tool
noseradiuscompensationisnotapplied. WhenacommandisenteredfromtheMDI tointerrupt
inautomaticoperationincutter or tool noseradiuscompensationmode, payparticular attention
tothetool pathwhenautomaticoperationissubsequentlyresumed. Refer tothedescriptionsof
thecorrespondingfunctionsfor details.
13. Programediting
If themachineisstopped, after whichthemachiningprogramisedited(modification, insertion,
or deletion), themachinemay behaveunexpectedly if machiningisresumedunder thecontrol
of thatprogram. Basically,donotmodify, insert, ordeletecommandsfromamachiningprogram
whileit isinuse.
B--61394E/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s-9
5
WARNINGS RELATEDTODAILY MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backupbattery replacement
Whenreplacingthememorybackupbatteries, keepthepower tothemachine(CNC) turnedon,
andapply anemergency stoptothemachine. Becausethiswork isperformedwiththepower
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenancetrainingmay performthiswork.
Whenreplacingthebatteries, becareful not totouchthehigh--voltagecircuits(marked and
fittedwithaninsulatingcover).
Touchingtheuncovered high--voltagecircuits presents anextremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
TheCNC usesbatteriestopreservethecontentsof itsmemory, becauseitmust retaindatasuchas
programs, offsets, andparameters evenwhileexternal power isnot applied.
If thebatteryvoltagedrops, alowbatteryvoltagealarmisdisplayedonthemachineoperatorspanel
or CRT screen.
Whenalowbatteryvoltagealarmisdisplayed, replacethebatterieswithinaweek. Otherwise, the
contentsof theCNCsmemory will belost.
Refer tothemaintenancesectionof thismanual for detailsof thebattery replacement procedure.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B--61394E/08
s-10
WARNING
2. Absolutepulsecoder battery replacement
Whenreplacingthememorybackupbatteries, keepthepower tothemachine(CNC) turnedon,
andapply anemergency stoptothemachine. Becausethiswork isperformedwiththepower
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenancetrainingmay performthiswork.
Whenreplacingthebatteries, becareful not totouchthehigh--voltagecircuits(marked and
fittedwithaninsulatingcover).
Touchingtheuncovered high--voltagecircuits presents anextremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
Theabsolutepulsecoder usesbatteries topreserveitsabsoluteposition.
If thebatteryvoltagedrops, alowbatteryvoltagealarmisdisplayedonthemachineoperatorspanel
or CRT screen.
Whenalowbatteryvoltagealarmisdisplayed, replacethebatterieswithinaweek. Otherwise, the
absolutepositiondataheldbythepulsecoder will belost.
Refer tothemaintenancesectionof thismanual for detailsof thebattery replacement procedure.
B--61394E/08
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
s-11
WARNING
3. Fusereplacement
Forsomeunits,thechaptercoveringdailymaintenanceintheoperatorsmanual orprogramming
manual describes thefusereplacement procedure.
Beforereplacing ablownfuse, however, it isnecessary tolocateandremovethecauseof the
blownfuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
trainingmay performthiswork.
Whenreplacingafusewiththecabinet open, becareful not totouchthehigh--voltagecircuits
(marked andfittedwithaninsulatingcover).
Touching an uncovered high--voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
B--61394E/08
Tableof Contents
c- 1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s--1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 GENERAL FLOWOF OPERATIONOF CNCMACHINE TOOL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 NOTESONREADINGTHISMANUAL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II. PROGRAMMING
1. GENERAL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONGWORKPIECE PARTSFIGURE--INTERPOLATION 12 . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 FEED--FEEDFUNCTION 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 PART DRAWINGANDTOOL MOVEMENT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 ReferencePosition(Machine--Specific Position) 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 CoordinateSystemonPart DrawingandCoordinateSystemSpecifiedby CNC -- CoordinateSystem 17
1.3.3 Howto IndicateCommandDimensionsfor MovingtheTool -- Absolute, Incremental Commands 20
1.4 CUTTINGSPEED-- SPINDLE SPEEDFUNCTION 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 SELECTIONOF TOOL USEDFORVARIOUSMACHINING-- TOOL FUNCTION 24 . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 COMMANDFORMACHINE OPERATIONS-- MISCELLANEOUSFUNCTION 25 . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 TOOL FIGURE ANDTOOL MOTIONBY PROGRAM 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE -- STROKE 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. CONTROLLEDAXES 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 CONTROLLEDAXES 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 NAMESOF AXES 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKES 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION) 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 POSITIONING(G00) 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 LINEARINTERPOLATION(G01) 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 CIRCULARINTERPOLATION(G02,G03) 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 POLARCOORDINATE INTERPOLATION(G112,G113) 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION(G107) 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 CONSTANT LEADTHREADING(G32) 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 VARIABLE--LEADTHREADCUTTING(G34) 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 CONTINUOUSTHREADCUTTING 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 SKIPFUNCTION(G31) 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 MULTI--STEP(0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/II) 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11 SKIPFUNCTIONBY TORQUE LIMIT ARRIVAL SIGNAL 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B--61394E/08 Table of Contents
c- 2
5. FEEDFUNCTIONS 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 GENERAL 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 RAPIDTRAVERSE 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 CUTTINGFEED 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 DWELL (G04) 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 DWELL BY TURNINGTIMESOF SPINDLE 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. REFERENCE POSITION 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM 79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 SettingaWorkpieceCoordinateSystem 80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 SelectingaWorkpieceCoordinateSystem 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 ChangingWorkpieceCoordinateSystem 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 WorkpieceCoordinateSystemShift 85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM 86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 PLANE SELECTION 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 ABSOLUTE ANDINCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING(G90, G91) 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 INCH/METRICCONVERSION(G20,G21) 91 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 DIAMETERANDRADIUSPROGRAMMING 94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. SPINDLE SPEEDFUNCTION 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 SPECIFYINGTHE SPINDLE SPEEDWITHA BINARY CODE 96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 SPECIFYINGTHE SPINDLE SPEEDVALUE DIRECTLY (S5--DIGIT COMMAND) 96 . . . . . . . . .
9.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEEDCONTROL (G96, G97) 96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 SPINDLE SPEEDFLUCTUATIONDETECTIONFUNCTION(G25, G26) 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 SPINDLE POSITIONINGFUNCTION 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.1 SpindleOrientation 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.2 SpindlePositioning 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.3 CancelingSpindlePositioning 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.TOOL FUNCTION(T FUNCTION) 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 TOOL SELECTION 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 SIMPLIFIEDTOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2.1 CompensationAppliedto A ProgrammedT code 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 Programof Tool LifeData 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 CountingaTool Life 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.3 SpecifyingaTool GroupinaMachiningProgram 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION(M FUNCTION) 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDSINA SINGLE BLOCK 117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 3
11.3 THE SECONDAUXILIARY FUNCTIONS(BCODES) 118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 OUTPUTTINGSIGNAL NEARENDPOINT 119 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.PROGRAMCONFIGURATION 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 PROGRAM COMPONENTSOTHERTHANPROGRAM SECTIONS 123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 PROGRAM SECTIONCONFIGURATION 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 SUBPROGRAM 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.FUNCTIONS TOSIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 CANNEDCYCLE (G90, G92, G94) 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter CuttingCycle(G90) 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 ThreadCuttingCycle(G92) 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 EndFaceTurningCycle(G94) 142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.4 Howto UseCannedCycles(G90, G92, G94) 145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE (G70TOG76) 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 Stock Removal inTurning(G71) 147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 Stock Removal inFacing(G72) 151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.3 PatternRepeating(G73) 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.4 FinishingCycle(G70) 153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.5 EndFacePeck DrillingCycle(G74) 157 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.6 Outer Ddiameter / Internal Diameter DrillingCycle(G75) 158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.7 MultipleThreadCuttingCycle(G76) 159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.8 NotesonMultipleRepetitiveCycle(G70to G76) 163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 CANNEDCYCLE FORDRILLING(G80TOG89) 164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.1 Front DrillingCycle(G83) / SideDrillingCycle(G87) 167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2 Front TappingCycle(G84) / SideTappingCycle(G88) 170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.3 Front BoringCycle(G85) / SideBoringCycle(G89) 172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.4 CannedCyclefor DrillingCancel (G80) 173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.5 Precautionsto beTakenby Operator 173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.6 RigidTapping 174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.7 Counter RigidTapping 177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 CANNEDGRINDINGCYCLE (0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/II) 178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 TraverseGrindingCycle(G71) 178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2 TraverseDirect Fixed--DimensionGrindingCycle(G72) 179 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.3 OscillationGrindingCycle(G73) 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.4 OscillationDirect Fixed--DimensionGrindingCycle(G74) 181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5 CHAMFERINGANDCORNERR 182 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6 MIRRORIMAGE FORDOUBLE TURRET (G68, G69) 185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7 DIRECT DRAWINGDIMENSIONSPROGRAMMING 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.COMPENSATIONFUNCTION 191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1 TOOL OFFSET 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.1 Tool Geometry Offset andTool Wear Offset 192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.2 T codefor Tool Offset 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.3 Tool Selection 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.4 Offset Number 193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.5 Offset 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 OVERVIEWOF TOOL NOSE RADIUSCOMPENSATION 197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.1 Imaginary Tool Nose 197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.2 Directionof Imaginary Tool Nose 199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.3 Offset Number andOffset Value 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.4 Work PositionandMoveCommand 202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 4
14.2.5 NotesonTool NoseRadiusCompensation 207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 DETAILSOF TOOL NOSE RADIUSCOMPENSATION 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.1 General 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.2 Tool Movement inStart--Up 212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.3 Tool Movement inOffset Mode 214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.4 Tool Movement inOffset ModeCancel 226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.5 InterferenceCheck 229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.6 Overcuttingby Tool NoseRadiusCompensation 234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.7 CorrectioninChamferingandCorner Arcs 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.8 Input CommandfromMDI 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.9 General Precautionsfor Offset Operations 238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4 TOOL COMPENSATIONVALUES, NUMBEROF COMPENSATIONVALUES,
ANDENTERINGVALUESFROM THE PROGRAM (G10) 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.1 Tool CompensationandNumber of Tool Compensation 239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.2 Changingof Tool Offset Value 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.5 AUTOMATICTOOL OFFSET (G36, G37) 241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.CUSTOMMACROA 244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1 CUSTOM MACROCOMMAND 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.1 M98(Singlecall) 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.2 SubprogramCall UsingM Code 245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.1.3 SubprogramCall UsingT code 246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2 CUSTOM MACROBODY 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.1 Variables 247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.2 Kindof Variables 248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.3 OperationInstructionandBranchInstruction(G65) 253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.4 NotesonCustomMacro 258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.CUSTOMMACROB 259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.1 VARIABLES 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES 263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3 ARITHMETICANDLOGICOPERATION 268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.4 MACROSTATEMENTSANDNCSTATEMENTS 272 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5 BRANCHANDREPETITION 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5.1 Unconditional Branch(GOTOStatement) 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5.2 Conditional Branch(IF Statement) 273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.5.3 Repetition(WhileStatement) 274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6 MACROCALL 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.1 SimpleCall (G65) 277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.2 Modal Call (G66) 281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.3 Macro Call UsingGCode 283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.4 Macro Call UsinganM Code 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.5 SubprogramCall UsinganM Code 285 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.6 SubprogramCallsUsingaT Code 286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.6.7 SampleProgram 286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.7 PROCESSINGMACROSTATEMENTS 288 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.8 REGISTERINGCUSTOM MACROPROGRAMS 290 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.9 LIMITATIONS 291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.10 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS 292 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.11 INTERRUPTIONTYPE CUSTOM MACRO 296 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.11.1 SpecificationMethod 297 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 5
16.11.2 Detailsof Functions 298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.PATTERNDATAINPUT FUNCTION 306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.1 DISPLAYINGTHE PATTERNMENU 307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.2 PATTERNDATA DISPLAY 311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17.3 CHARACTERSANDCODESTOBE USEDFORTHE PATTERNDATA INPUT FUNCTION 315 . . .
18.PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERENTRY (G10) 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.MEMORY OPERATIONBY SERIES 10/11TAPE FORMAT 318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.1 ADDRESSESANDSPECIFIABLE VALUE RANGE FORSERIES10/11TAPE FORMAT 319 . . . . .
19.2 EQUAL--LEADTHREADING 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.3 SUBPROGRAM CALLING 321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.4 CANNEDCYCLE 322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19.5 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNEDTURNINGCYCLE 323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.HIGHSPEEDCYCLE CUTTING 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.1 NUMBEROF CONTROL AXES 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2 PULSE DISTRIBUTION 326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3 CONFIGURATIONOF HIGHSPEEDCYCLE CUTTINGDATA 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3.1 Number of RegisteredCycles 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.3.2 Header 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.POLYGONAL TURNING 330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.ROTARY AXIS ROLL--OVER 337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.ANGULARAXIS CONTROL (0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/II) 338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.2SYSTEMS CONTROL FUNCTION(0--TTC) 340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.1 GENERAL 341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.2 WAITINGFORTOOL POSTS 343 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3 TOOL POST INTERFACE CHECK 345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.1 General 345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.2 DataSettingfor theTool Post InterferenceCheck Function 345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.3 SettingandDisplay of InterferenceForbiddenAreasfor Tool Post InterferenceChecking 348 . . . . . .
24.3.4 Conditionsfor MakingaTool Post InterferenceCheck 350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.5 Executionof Tool Post InterferenceChecking 351 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.3.6 Exampleof MakingaTool Post InterferenceCheck 353 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.4 BALANCE CUT (G68, G69) 355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.5 CUSTOM MACROVARIABLESCOMMONTOTOOL POSTS 356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
III. OPERATION
1. GENERAL 359 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING-- AUTOMATICOPERATION 362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 6
1.3 AUTOMATICOPERATION 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 TESTINGA PROGRAM 366 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 Check by RunningtheMachine 366 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2 Howto ViewthePositionDisplay Changewithout RunningtheMachine 367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 EDITINGA PART PROGRAM 368 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 DISPLAYINGANDSETTINGDATA 369 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 DISPLAY 372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1 ProgramDisplay (SeeSectionIII--11.2.1) 372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.2 Current PositionDisplay (SeeSectionIII--11.1.1to 11.1.3) 373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.3 AlarmDisplay (SeeSectionIII--7.1) 373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.4 PartsCount Display, RunTimeDisplay (SeeSectionIII--11.5.3) 374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.5 Graphic Display (SeeSectionIII--12) 374 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 DATA OUTPUT 376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 CRT/MDI PANELS 378 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 FUNCTIONKEYSANDSOFT KEYS 381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 General ScreenOperations 381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 FunctionKeys 382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Key Input andInput Buffer 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 EXTERNAL I/ODEVICES 385 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 FANUC Handy File 387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 FANUC Floppy Cassette 387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 FANUC FA Card 388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4 FANUC PPR 388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5 PortableTapeReader 389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 POWERON/OFF 390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 TurningonthePower 390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Power Disconnection 391 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. MANUAL OPERATION 392 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITIONRETURN 393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 J OGFEED 395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED 397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED 398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ONANDOFF 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION 406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 MDI OPERATION 409 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 DNCOPERATION 414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 SEQUENCE NUMBERSEARCH 415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 PROGRAM RESTART 417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 SCHEDULINGFUNCTION 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 SUBPROGRAM CALL FUNCTION 427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION 429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 MIRRORIMAGE 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 7
5. TEST OPERATION 433 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 MACHINE LOCK ANDAUXILIARY FUNCTIONLOCK 434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 RAPIDTRAVERSE OVERRIDE 436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 DRY RUN 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK 438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP 442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 OVERTRAVEL 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 STROKE CHECK 444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. ALARMANDSELF--DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS 448 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 ALARM DISPLAY 449 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 CHECKINGBY SELF--DIAGNOSTICSCREEN 451 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. DATAINPUT/OUTPUT 453 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 FILES 454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 FILE SEARCH 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 FILE DELETION 457 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT 458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1 InputtingaProgram 458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.2 OutputtingaProgram 460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 OFFSET DATA INPUT ANDOUTPUT 463 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.1 InputtingOffset Data 463 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2 OutputtingOffset Data 464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 INPUTTINGANDOUTPUTTINGPARAMETERS
ANDPITCHERRORCOMPENSATIONDATA 465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.1 InputtingParameters 465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.2 Outputting Parameters 466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTINGCUSTOM MACROBCOMMONVARIABLES 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.1 InputtingCustomMacro B CommonVariables 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.2 OutputtingCustomMacro B CommonVariable 468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 DISPLAYING DIRECTORY OF FLOPPY DISK 469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1 DisplayingtheDirectory 470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2 ReadingFiles 472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.3 OutputtingPrograms 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.4 DeletingFiles 474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. EDITING PROGRAMS 477 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 INSERTING, ALTERINGANDDELETINGA WORD 478 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.1 WordSearch 480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.2 HeadingaProgram 482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.3 InsertingaWord 483 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.4 AlteringaWord 484 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1.5 DeletingaWord 485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 DELETINGBLOCKS 486 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 DeletingaBlock 486 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2 DeletingMultipleBlocks 487 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 8
9.3 PROGRAM NUMBERSEARCH 488 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 DELETINGPROGRAMS 489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.1 DeletingOneProgram 489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.2 DeletingAll Programs 489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4.3 DeletingMorethanOneProgramby SpecifyingaRange 490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 EXTENDEDPART PROGRAM EDITINGFUNCTION 491 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.1 CopyinganEntireProgram 492 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.2 CopyingPart of aProgram 493 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.3 MovingPart of aProgram 494 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.4 MergingaProgram 495 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.5 Supplementary Explanationfor Copying, MovingandMerging 496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5.6 Replacement of WordsandAddresses 498 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 EDITINGOF CUSTOM MACROSB 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7 BACKGROUNDEDITING 501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8 REORGANIGINGMEMORY 503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.CREATING PROGRAMS 504 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 CREATINGPROGRAMSUSINGTHE MDI PANEL 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 AUTOMATICINSERTIONOF SEQUENCE NUMBERS 506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 CREATINGPROGRAMSINTEACHINMODE 508 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 MENUPROGRAMMING 511 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMINGWITHGRAPHICFUNCTION 513 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.SETTING ANDDISPLAYING DATA 517 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1 SCREENSDISPLAYEDBY FUNCTIONKEY
POS
526 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1 PositionDisplay intheWorkpieceCoordinateSystem 527 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 PositionDisplay intheRelativeCoordinateSystem 528 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.3 Overall PositionDisplay 530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.4 Actual FeedrateDisplay 532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.5 Display of RunTimeandPartsCount 533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.6 OperatingMonitor Display 535 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRGRM
(INAUTOMODE ORMDI MODE) 536 . . . . .
11.2.1 ProgramContentsDisplay 536 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 Current Block Display Screen 537 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.3 Next Block Display Screen 538 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.4 ProgramCheck Screen 539 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.5 ProgramScreenfor MDI Operation 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRGRM
(INTHE EDIT MODE) 541 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.1 DisplayingMemory UsedandaList of Programs 541 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MENU
OFSET
544 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.1 SettingandDisplayingtheTool Offset Value 545 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.2 Direct Input of Tool Offset Value 548 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.3 Direct Input of Tool Offset measuredB 550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.4 Counter Input of Offset value 552 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.5 SettingtheWorkpieceCoordinateSystemShiftingAmount 553 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.6 Direct MeasuredValueInput for Work CoordinateSystemShift 555 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.7 Y AxisOffset 557 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.8 DisplayingandSettingtheWorkpieceOriginOffset Value 559 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 9
11.4.9 DisplayingandSettingCustomMacro CommonVariables 560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4.10 DisplayingandSettingTool LifeManagement Data 561 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DGNOS
PARAM
564 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.1 DisplayingandEnteringSettingData 565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.2 SequenceNumber ComparisonandStop 568 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3 DisplayingandSettingRunTime, PartsCount, andTime 570 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.4 DisplayingandSettingParameters 572 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.5 DisplayingandSettingPitchError CompensationData 574 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPR
ALARM 579 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.1 DisplayingOperator Message 579 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.6.2 DisplayingandSettingtheSoftwareOperatorsPanel 580 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7 DISPLAYINGTHE PROGRAM NUMBER, SEQUENCE NUMBER,
ANDSTATUS, ANDWARNINGMESSAGESFORDATA SETTING 582 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.1 DisplayingtheProgramNumber andSequenceNumber 582 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.7.2 DisplayingtheStatusandWarningfor DataSetting 583 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.GRAPHICS FUNCTION 584 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 GRAPHICSDISPLAY 585 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.DISPLAY ANDOPERATIONOF 00--TC/00--GCC 591 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 DISPLAY 592 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 OPERATION 593 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IV. MAINTENANCE
1. METHODOF REPLACING BATTERY 597 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 REPLACINGCNCBATTERY FOR MEMORY BACK--UP 598 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 REPLACING BATTERIESFORABSOLUTE PULSE CODER 599 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX
A. TAPE CODE LIST 603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDTAPE FORMAT 606 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. RANGE OF COMMANDVALUE 610 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. NOMOGRAPHS 613 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1 INCORRECT THREADEDLENGTH 614 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2 SIMPLE CALCULATIONOF INCORRECT THREADLENGTH 616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.3 TOOL PATHAT CORNER 618 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.4 RADIUSDIRECTIONERRORAT CIRCLE CUTTING 621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c- 10
E. STATUS WHENTURNING POWERON, WHENCLEAR
ANDWHENRESET 622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F. CHARACTER--TO--CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE 624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G. ALARMLIST 625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H. OPERATIONOF PORTABLE TAPE READER 644 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I. SERIES 0--DSPECIFICATIONS 649 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J . CORRESPONDENCE BETWEENENGLISHKEY ANDSYMBOLIC KEY 656 . . . . . .
I. GENERAL
GENERAL B--61394E/08 1. GENERAL
3
1
GENERAL
Thismanual consistsof thefollowingparts:
I. GENERAL
Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals,
andnotesfor readingthismanual.
II. PROGRAMMING
Describeseachfunction: Format usedtoprogramfunctionsintheNC
language, characteristics, andrestrictions. Whenaprogramiscreated
throughconversational automatic programmingfunction, refer tothe
manual for the conversational automatic programming function
(Table1).
III. OPERATION
Describesthemanual operationandautomaticoperationof amachine,
procedures for inputting and outputting data, and procedures for
editingaprogram.
IV. MAINTENANCE
Describes alarms, self--diagnosis, andprocedures for replacing fuses
andbatteries.
APPENDIX
Liststapecodes, validdataranges, anderror codes.
This manual does not describe parameters in detail. For details on
parameters mentionedinthismanual, refer tothemanual for parameters
(B--61400E).
This manual describes all optional functions. Look up the options
incorporatedintoyour systeminthemanual writtenbythemachinetool
builder.
Themodelscoveredbythismanual, andtheir abbreviations are:
Product name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 0--TC 0--TC
FANUC Series 0--TF 0--TF
Series 0
FANUC Series 0--TTC 0--TTC
Series 0
FANUC Series 0--GCC 0--GCC
FANUC Series 00--TC 00--TC
Series 00
FANUC Series 00--GCC 00--GCC
Series 00
FANUC Series 0--Mate TC 0--Mate TC Series 0--Mate
FANUC Series 0--TD 0--TD
Series 0--D
FANUC Series 0--GCD 0--GCD
Series 0--D
Series 0--D
FANUC Series 0--TDII 0--TDII
Series 0--DII
Series 0--D
FANUC Series 0--GCDII 0--GCDII
Series 0--DII
Thismanual usesthefollowingsymbols:
P I __
: Indicates acombinationof axessuchasX__ Y__
Z(usedinPROGRAMMING.).
: Indicates theendof ablock. It actually corre-
spondstotheISOcodeLF or EIA codeCR.
;
About this manual
Applicable models
Special symbols
GENERAL 1. GENERAL B--61394E/08
4
ThetablebelowlistsmanualsrelatedtotheFANUCSeries0/00/0--Mate.
Inthetable, thismanual ismarkedwithanasterisk (*).
List of relatedmanuals
Manual name
Specification
number
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate DESCRIPTIONS B--61392E
FANUC Series 0/00 DESCRIPTIONS (Suppelement for Remote buffer) B--61392EN--1
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B--61393E
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B--61393E--2
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate FOR LATHE OPERATORS MANUAL B--61394E *
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate FOR MACHINING CENTER OPERATORS MANUAL B--61404E
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate MAINTENANCE MANUAL B--61395E
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE HANDBOOK B--61397E
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate FOR LATHE PARAMETER MANUAL B--61400E
FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate FOR MACHINING CENTER PARAMETER MANUAL B--61410E
GRAPHIC CONVERSATION FOR MACHINING CENTER
(Series 0--MC, Series 0--MF, Series 0--Mate MF) OPERATORS MANUAL
B--61434E
FANUC PMC--MODEL K/L/M PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) B--55193E
FANUC Series 0/0--Mate PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Macro Compller / Macro Executor)
B--61393E--1
Manual name
Specification
number
FANUC Series 0--TD/MDDESCRIPTIONS B--62542EN
FANUC Series 0--PDCONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B--62973EN
FANUC Series 0--PDOPERATORS MANUAL B--62974EN
FANUC Series 0--PDMAINTENANCE MANUAL B--62975EN
Manual name
Specification
number
Relatedmanuals
D Series 0/00/0--Mate C
D Series 0--D
D Series 0--DII
5
Whenmachiningthepart usingtheCNC machinetool, first prepare
theprogram, thenoperatetheCNC machinebyusingtheprogram.
1) First, prepare theprogramfromapart drawing to operate theCNC
machinetool.
How to prepare the program is described in the Chapter II.
PROGRAMMING.
2) Theprogramis to beread into the CNC system. Then, mount the
workpiecesandtoolsonthemachine, andoperatethetoolsaccording
totheprogramming. Finally, executethemachiningactually.
How to operate the CNC system is described in the Chapter III.
OPERATION.
Part
drawing
Part
program-
ming
CHAPTER II PROGRAMMING CHAPTER III OPERATION
CNC
MACHINE TOOL
Beforetheactual programming, makethemachiningplanfor howto
machinethepart.
Machiningplan
1. Determinationof workpiecesmachiningrange
2. Methodof mountingworkpiecesonthemachinetool
3. Machiningsequenceineverycuttingprocess
4. Cuttingtoolsandcuttingconditions
Decidethecuttingmethodinevery cuttingprocess.
Cutting process
1 2 3
Cutting process
Cutting procedure
End face
cutting
Outer diameter
cutting
Grooving
1. Cutting method:
Rough
Semi
Finish
2. Cutting tools
3. Cutting conditions:
Feedrate
Cutting depth
4. Tool path
1.1
GENERAL FLOW
OF OPERATIONOF
CNC MACHINE
TOOL
GENERAL 1. GENERAL B--61394E/08
6
Workpiece
Outer
diameter
cutting
End
face
cutting
Grooving
Prepare the program of the tool path and cutting condition
according to theworkpiece figure, for each cutting.
NOTE
1 The function of an CNC machine tool systemdepends not
only on the CNC, but on the combination of the machine
tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, the
operators panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the
function, programming, and operation relating to all
combinations. This manual generally describes these from
the stand--point of the CNC. So, for details on a particular
CNC machine tool, refer to the manual issued by the
machine tool builder, which should take precedence over
this manual.
2 Headings areplacedintheleftmarginsothatthereader can
easily access necessary information. When locating the
necessary information, the reader can save time by
searching though these headings.
3 Machiningprograms, parameters, variables, etc. arestored
in the CNC unit internal non--volatile memory. In general,
these contents are not lost bythe switching ON/OFF of the
power. However, it is possible that a statecanoccur where
precious data stored in the non--volatile memory has to be
deleted, because of deletions froma maloperation, or bya
failure restoration. Inorder torestore rapidlywhenthis kind
of mishapoccurs, itis recommended that youcreate acopy
of the various kinds of data beforehand.
4 This manual describes the functions supported by the
series and editions of the FANUC Series 0/00/0--Mate
softwareindicatedbelow. Notethatthefunctions described
inthis manual maynot be supported byseries andeditions
of the software other than those listed below.
For the Functions supported by the Series 0--D, See
Specifications in Appendix I
7
Model Series Edition
FANUC Series 0--TC 0666
0669
Edition 18and later
Edition 01and later
FANUC Series 0--TF 0667 Edition 08and later
FANUC Series 0--TTC 0680
0681
0682
Edition 16and later
Edition 16and later
Edition 16and later
FANUC Series 0--GCC 0861 Edition 07and later
FANUC Series 00--TC 0668 Edition 01and later
FANUC Series 00--GCC 0862 Edition 01and later
FANUC Series 0--Mate TC 0655 Edition 03and later
FANUC Series 0--TD 0672 Edition 01and later
FANUC Series 0--GCD 0881 Edition 01and later
FANUC Series 0--TDII 0673 Edition 02and later
FANUC Series 0--GCDII 0882 Edition 02and later
1.2
NOTES ON
READING THIS
MANUAL
II. PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 1. GENERAL
11
1
GENERAL
PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL B--61394E/08
12
Thetool movesalongstraight linesandarcs constitutingtheworkpiece
partsfigure(SeeII--4).
Explanations
Program
G01X ...;
Tool
Z
X
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1(a) Tool movement alongthestraight linewhichis parallel to
Z--axis
Program
G01X ... Z... ;
Tool
Z
X
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1(b) Tool movement alongthetaper line
Program
G02X ... Z... R ... ;
or
G03X ... Z... R ... ;
Z
X Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1(c) Tool movement alonganarc
1.1
TOOL MOVEMENT
ALONG WORKPIECE
PARTS FIGURE--
INTERPOLATION
D Tool movement alonga
straight line
D Tool movement alongan
arc
13
The terminterpolation refers to an operation in which the tool moves
alongastraight lineor arc intheway describedabove.
Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called the
preparatory function andspecify thetypeof interpolation conductedin
thecontrol unit.
(a) Movement along straight line
G01Z__;
X__Z____;
(b) Movement along arc
G03X__Z__;
Control unit
X axis
Y axis
Tool
move-
ment
Interpolation
a) Movement
along straight
line
b) Movement
along arc
Fig. 1.1(d) Interpolation function
NOTE
Some machines move tables instead of tools but this
manual assumes that tools are moved against workpieces.
Threads can becut by movingthetool insynchronization withspindle
rotation. Inaprogram, specify thethreadcuttingfunctionbyG32.
Program
G32Z__F__;
Z
F
X
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1(e) Straight threadcutting
D Threadcutting
14
Program
G32X__Z__F__;
Z
F
X
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1(f) Taper threadcutting
15
Movementof thetool ataspecifiedspeedforcuttingaworkpieceiscalled
thefeed.
Tool
Workpiece
Chuck
Fig. 1.2 Feedfunction
Feedrates canbespecifiedbyusingactual numerics.
For example, thefollowingcommandcanbeusedtofeedthetool 2mm
whiletheworkpiecemakesoneturn:
F2.0
The function of deciding the feed rate is called thefeed function (See
II--5).
1.2
FEED--
FEEDFUNCTION
16
A CNC machinetool is provided withafixed position. Normally, tool
change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are
performedat thisposition. Thispositioniscalledthereferenceposition.
Reference
position
Tool post
Chuck
Fig. 1.3.1 Referenceposition
Explanations
Thetool canbemovedtothereferencepositionintwoways:
1. Manual referencepositionreturn(SeeIII--3.1)
Referencepositionreturnisperformedbymanual buttonoperation.
2. Automatic referencepositionreturn(SeeII--6)
Ingeneral, manual referencepositionreturnisperformed first after
thepower is turned on. In order to movethe tool to thereference
position for tool change thereafter, the function of automatic
referenceposition returnisused.
1.3
PART DRAWING AND
TOOL
MOVEMENT
1.3.1
ReferencePosition
(Machine--Specific
Position)
17
CNC
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
Part drawing
Program
Coordinate system
Command
Workpiece
Machine tool
Fig. 1.3.2(a) Coordinatesystem
Explanations
Thefollowingtwocoordinatesystemsarespecifiedatdifferentlocations:
(SeeII--8)
1. Coordinatesystemonpart drawing
Thecoordinatesystemiswrittenonthepartdrawing. Astheprogram
data, thecoordinatevaluesonthiscoordinatesystemareused.
2. CoordinatesystemspecifiedbytheCNC
Thecoordinatesystemispreparedontheactual machinetool. This
can be achieved by programming the distance from the current
positionof thetool tothezeropoint of thecoordinatesystemtobe
set.
230
300
Program
zero point
Y
Distance to the zero point of a coor-
dinate systemto be set
Present tool position
Z
Fig. 1.3.2(b) CoordinatesystemspecifiedbytheCNC
1.3.2
CoordinateSystemon
PartDrawingand
CoordinateSystem
SpecifiedbyCNC --
CoordinateSystem
D Coordinatesystem
18
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in
accordance with the command programgenerated with respect to the
coordinatesystemonthepart drawing, andcutsaworkpieceintoashape
onthedrawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the
drawing, thetwocoordinatesystemsmust beset at thesameposition.
Thefollowingmethodisusually usedtodefinetwocoordinatesystems
at thesamelocation.
1. Whencoordinatezeropoint isset at chuck face
X
Z 40
150
40
60
Workpiece
Fig. 1.3.2(c) Coordinates anddimensions onpart drawing
X
Z
Workpiece
Fig. 1.3.2(d) Coordinatesystemonlatheas specifiedbyCNC
(madeto coincidewiththecoordinatesystemonpart drawing)
D Methods of setting the
two coordinatesystems
inthesameposition
19
2. Whencoordinatezeropoint isset at work endface.
X
Z
60 30
30
80
100
Workpiece
Fig. 1.3.2(e) Coordinates anddimensions onpart drawing
X
Z
Workpiece
Fig. 1.3.2(f) Coordinatesystemonlatheas specifiedbyCNC
(madeto coincidewiththecoordinatesystemonpart drawing)
20
Explanations
Coordinatevaluesof commandfor movingthetool canbeindicatedby
absoluteor incremental designation(SeeII--8.1).
The tool moves to a point at the distance from zero point of the
coordinatesystem that istothepositionof thecoordinatevalues.
Tool
Command specifying movement frompoint A to point B
Coordinates of point B
G90X30.0Z70.0;
f 30
A
B
Z
X
70
110
Fig. 1.3.3(a) Absolutecommands
1.3.3
HowtoIndicate
CommandDimensions
for MovingtheTool --
Absolute, Incremental
Commands
D Absolutecommands
21
Specify the distance fromthe previous tool position to the next tool
position.
Distance and direction for
movement along each axis
Tool
Command specifying movement frompoint A to point B
f30
A
B
X
40
f60
U--30.0W--40.0
Fig. 1.3.3(b) Incremental commands
D Incremental comands
22
Dimensionsof theX axis canbeset indiameter or inradius. Diameter
programmingor radiusprogrammingisemployedindependentlyineach
machine.
1. Diameter programming
Indiameter programming, specify thediameter valueindicatedonthe
drawingasthevalueof theX axis.
Coordinate values of points A and B
A(30.0, 80.0), B(40.0, 60.0)
Z
X
60
80
f30
A
B
f40
Workpiece
Fig. 1.3.3(c) Diameter programming
2. Radiusprogramming
Inradiusprogramming, specify thedistancefromthecenter of the
workpiece, i.e. theradiusvalueasthevalueof theX axis.
A(15.0, 80.0), B(20.0, 60.0)
Coordinate values of points A and B
Z
X
60
80
A
B
20
15
Workpiece
Fig. 1.3.3(d) Radius programming
D Diameter programming/
radius programming
23
Thespeedof thetool withrespect totheworkpiecewhentheworkpiece
iscut iscalledthecuttingspeed.
Asfor theCNC, thecuttingspeedcanbespecifiedbythespindlespeed
inrpmunit.
Tool
V: Cutting speed
fD N rpm
Workpiece
v m/min
Fig. 1.4 Cuttingspeed
<When a workpiece 200 mmin diameter should be machined at
a cutting speed of 30 mm/min. >
Thespindlespeedisapproximately 478rpm, whichisobtainedfrom
N=1000v/ D. Hencethefollowingcommandisrequired:
S478;
Commands related to the spindle speed are called the spindle speed
function(SeeII--9).
Thecuttingspeedv(m/min) canalsobespecified directly by thespeed
value. Evenwhentheworkpiecediameter ischanged, theCNCchanges
thespindlespeedsothat thecuttingspeedremains constant.
Thisfunctioniscalledtheconstant surfacespeedcontrol function
(SeeII--9.3).
1.4
CUTTINGSPEED--
SPINDLE SPEED
FUNCTION
Examples
24
When drilling, tapping, boring, milling or the like, is performed, it is
necessarytoselectasuitabletool. Whenanumberisassignedtoeachtool
and the number is specified in the program, the corresponding tool is
selected.
Tool number
01
06
02 05
04 03
Tool post
Fig. 1.5 Tool usedfor various machining
<WhenNo.01isassignedtoaroughingtool>
When thetool is stored at location 01of thetool post, thetool can be
selectedbyspecifyingT0101.
Thisiscalledthetool function(SeeII--10).
1.5
SELECTIONOF TOOL
USEDFORVARIOUS
MACHINING -- TOOL
FUNCTION
Examples
25
Whenmachiningisactually started, it isnecessary torotatethespindle,
andfeedcoolant. Forthispurpose, on--off operationsof spindlemotorand
coolant valveshouldbecontrolled.
Workpiece
Chuck open/close
Coolant on/off
CWspindle rotation
Fig. 1.6 Commandfor machineoperations
Thefunctionof specifyingtheon--off operationsof thecomponentsof the
machineiscalledthemiscellaneousfunction. Ingeneral, thefunctionis
specifiedbyanM code. (SeeII--11)
For example, whenM03isspecified, thespindleisrotatedclockwiseat
thespecifiedspindlespeed.
1.6
COMMANDFOR
MACHINE
OPERATIONS --
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTION
26
A group of commands given to theCNC for operating the machine is
calledtheprogram. Byspecifyingthecommands, thetool ismovedalong
astraight lineor anarc, or thespindlemotor isturnedonandoff.
In the program, specify the commands in the sequence of actual tool
movements.
Block Program
Tool movement sequence
Block
Block
Block
Block
Fig. 1.7 Programconfiguration
A groupof commands at each stepof thesequenceiscalled theblock.
Theprogramconsistsof agroupof blocksfor aseriesof machining. The
number for discriminatingeachblockiscalledthesequencenumber, and
the number for discriminating each program is called the program
number (SeeII--12).
1.7
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
27
Explanations
Theblock andtheprogramhavethefollowingconfigurations.
Nf f f f Gf f Xf f .f Yf f f .f Mf f Sf f Tf f ;
1 block
Sequence
number
Preparatory
function
Dimension word Miscel-
laneous
function
Spindle
function
Tool
func-
tion
End of
block
Fig. 1.7(b) Blockconfiguration
Eachblockstartswithasequencenumber whichidentifiestheblock, and
endswithanend--of--block codewhichindicates theendof theblock.
Thismanual indicatestheend--of--blockcodeby; (LFintheISOcodeand
CR intheEIA code).
;
Of f f f ;
M30;
Programnumber
Block
Block
Block
End of program
Fig. 1.7(c) Programconfiguration
Normally, aprogramnumber isspecifiedafter theend--of--block(;) code
at thebeginningof theprogram, andaprogramendcode(M02or M30)
isspecifiedat theendof theprogram.
D Block
D Program
28
When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a
program, a program for the pattern is created. This is called the
subprogram. Ontheother hand, theoriginal programiscalledthemain
program. When a subprogram execution command appears during
execution of the main program, commands of the subprogram are
executed. When execution of thesubprogramis finished, thesequence
returns tothemainprogram.
Main program
M98P1001
M98P1002
M98P1001
Subprogram#1
Subprogram#2
O1001
M99
Programfor
hole #1
Programfor
hole #2
O1002
M99
D Mainprogramand
subprogram
29
Explanations
Usually, several toolsareusedfor machiningoneworkpiece. Thetools
havedifferent tool length. It isvery troublesometochangetheprogram
inaccordancewiththetools.
Therefore, thelengthof eachtool usedshouldbemeasured inadvance.
Bysettingthedifferencebetweenthelengthof thestandardtool andthe
length of each tool in theCNC (data display and setting : seeIII--11),
machiningcanbeperformedwithoutalteringtheprogramevenwhenthe
tool ischanged. Thisfunctioniscalledtool lengthcompensation.
Standard
tool
Workpiece
Rough
cutting
tool
Finishing
tool
Grooving
tool
Thread
cutting
tool
Fig. 1.8 Tool offset
1.8
TOOL FIGURE AND
TOOL MOTIONBY
PROGRAM
D Tool offset
30
Limit switches areinstalled at theends of each axis onthemachineto
preventtoolsfrommovingbeyondtheends. Therangeinwhichtoolscan
moveiscalledthestroke.
Motor
Limit switch
Table
Machine zero point
Specify these distances.
Tools cannot enter this area. The area is specified by data in memory or
a program.
Besides strokes defined withlimit switches, theoperator can definean
areawhichthetool cannot enter usingaprogramor datainmemory (see
SectionIII--11). Thisfunctioniscalledstrokecheck.
1.9
TOOL MOVEMENT
RANGE -- STROKE
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 2. CONTORLED AXES
31
2
CONTROLLED AXES
PROGRAMMING 2. CONTROLED AXES B--61394E/08
32
Item
0--TC,0--TF,0--GCC
00--TC,00--GCC
0--MateTC
0--TD/II,
0--GCD/II
Number of controlled basic
axes
2 2 2
Increase in number of con-
trolled axes
(excluding PMC axes)
Up to 4 Up to 2 Up to 4
Number of simultaneously
controlled basic axes
2 2 2
Increase in number of si-
multaneously controlled
axes
Up to 2 Up to 2 Up to 4
PMC--based axis control Up to 2(*1) None None
*1 Amount bywhichnumber of controlledaxescanbeincreasedunder
PMC--based axis control. PMC--based axis control can beapplied toa
maximumof four axes.
Item
0--TTC
Item
Tool post1 Tool post2
Number of controlled basic axes 2 2
Increase in number of controlled
axes
(excluding PMC axes)
Up to 4 Up to 3(*1)
Number of simultaneously con-
trolled basic axes
2 2
Increase in number of simulta-
neously controlled basic axes
Up to 4 Up to 3
PMC--based axis control Up to 2(*2) None
*1 IncludingCscontour control axes
*2 Maximum number of controlled axes to which PMC--based axis
control canbeapplied. Itisnotpossibletofurtherincreasethenumber
of axestowhichPMC--basedaxiscontrol isapplied.
NOTE
In manual operation (such as jog feed, incremental feed,
and manual handle feed), the number of simultaneously
controlled axes is 1. Note, however, that this number can
beincreased to3bysettingbit 4of parameter No. 049to1.
2.1
CONTROLLEDAXES
D Series 16
D Series 18
33
Thefollowingfixedaxisnamesareused:
First
axis
Second
axis
Third
axis(*2)
Fourth
axis(*3)
Axis name (absolute programming) X Z C Y
Incremental programming(*1) U W H V
*1 Usedfor incremental programmingwhenG--codesystemA isused
*2 Commandaxisnameforthirdaxis. Thedisplayaxisnamevarieswith
thesettingof bit 0of parameter No. 030.
*3 Commandaxisnamefor fourthaxis. Thedisplay axisnamevaries
withthesettingof bit 4of parameter No. 030.
Axisnamealteration(0--GCC/00--GCC/0--GCD)
Thecommandanddisplayaxisnamesof thethirdandfourthaxescanbe
set toU, V, W, A, B, C , or Y. UsingASCII code, specify theaxisname
of thethirdaxisinparameter No. 210, andtheaxisnameof thefourthaxis
inparameter No. 211. Whentheaxis namealteration function isused,
onlyG--codesystemB or C canbeused.
NOTE
When 0--TTC is used, and axis information such as current
positions isdisplayedontheCRTscreen, thedisplayedaxis
names may have a suffix for indicating a tool post number
(X1 and X2, for example). Such suffixed axis names are
displayed only to help identify the axis to which each tool
post belongs. In actual programming, no suffixes are
attached to axis names, X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C.
2.2
NAMES OF AXES
PROGRAMMING 2. CONTROLED AXES B--61394E/08
34
Theincrementsystemconsistsof theleastinputincrement(forinput)and
least commandincrement (for output). Theleast input increment isthe
leastincrement for programmingthetravel distance. Theleastcommand
incrementistheleastincrementformovingthetool onthemachine. Both
increments arerepresented inmm, inches, or degrees.
Theincrement systemisclassified intoIS--B andIS--C (Tables2.3.2(a)
and 2.3.2 (b)). When IS--C is selected, however, the option for
multiplyingtheincrement systemby1/10isrequired.
Table2.3(a) Increment systemIS--B
Leastinput increment Leastcommandincrement
Metric
system
mm
input
0.001mm(Diameter) 0.0005mm
system
machine
input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.001mm
machine
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch
input
0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.0005mm
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.001mm
0.001deg 0.001deg
Inch
machine
mm
input
0.001mm(Diameter) 0.00005inch
machine
system
input
0.001mm(Radius) 0.0001inch
system
0.001deg 0.001deg
inch
input
0.0001inch(Diameter) 0.00005inch
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.0001inch
0.001deg 0.001deg
Table2.3(b) Increment systemIS--C
Leastinput increment Leastcommandincrement
Metric
system
mm
input
0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.00005mm
system
machine
input
0.0001mm(Radius) 0.0001mm
machine
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
inch
input
0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.00005mm
input
0.0001inch(Radius) 0.0001mm
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
Inch
machine
mm
input
0.0001mm(Diameter) 0.000005inch
machine
system
input
0.0001mm(Radius) 0.00001inch
system
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
inch
input
0.00001inch(Diameter) 0.000005inch
input
0.00001inch(Radius) 0.00001inch
0.0001deg 0.0001deg
2.3
INCREMENT SYSTEM
35
ThemaximumstrokecontrolledbythisCNCisshowninthetablebelow:
Maximumstroke=Least commandincrement 99999999
Table2.4(a) Maximumstroke
Increment system Maximumstrokes
IS--B
Metric machine
system
99999.999 mm
99999.999 deg
IS--B
Inch machine
system
9999.9999 inch
99999.999 deg
IS--C
Metric machine
system
9999.9999 mm
9999.9999 deg
IS--C
Inch machine
system
999.99999 inch
9999.9999 deg
NOTE
1 The unit in the table is a diameter value with diameter
programming andaradius value inradius programming.
2 A command exceeding the maximum stroke cannot
bespecified.
3 The actual stroke depends on the machine tool.
2.4
MAXIMUMSTROKES
PROGRAMMING
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION) B--61394E/08
36
3
PREPARATORYFUNCTION(G FUNCTION)
A number followingaddressGdeterminesthemeaningof thecommand
for theconcernedblock.
Gcodesaredividedintothefollowingtwotypes.
Type Meaning
One--shot G code The G code is effective only in the block in which it is
specified
Modal G code The G code is effective until another G code of the
same group is specified.
(Example)
G01andG00aremodal Gcodes.
G01X___;
Z___;
X___;
G00Z___;
G01 is effective in this range
TherearethreeGcodesystems: A,B, andC (Table3). G--codesystem
A isstandard. G--codesystemsBandCareoptional. Bit 5of parameter
No. 036isusedtospecify whether G--codesystemB or C istobeused.
When 0--GCC or 00--GCC is used, G--code systems B and C are also
standard; whichG--codesystemisusedisspecifiedwithbits1and5of
parameter No. 036. Basically, this manual assumes theuseof G--code
systemA. lnsuchcases, theuseof GcodesystemB or C isdescribed.
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08
(G FUNCTION)
37
Explanations
1. If theCNCenterstheclear state(seebit6(CLER) of parameter 0045)
whenthepower isturnedonor theCNCisreset, thecontinuous--stateG
codeschangeasfollows.
(1) Gcodesmarkedwith in Table3areenabled.
(2) When thesystemis cleared due to power---on or reset,
whichever specified, either G20or G21, remains effective.
(3) G22is set when thesystemis cleared due to power---on.
When thesystemis cleared due to reset, whichever
specified, either G22or G23, remains effective.
(4) Setting bit 0(G01) of parameter (No.011#6) determines
which code, either G00or G01, is effective.
(5) Setting bit 3(G91) of parameter (No.030#7) determines
which code, either G90or G91, is effective.
2. G codes of group 00except G10and G11aresingle---shot G
codes.
3. Alarm010isdisplayedwhenaGcodenot listedintheGcode
list isspecifiedor aG codewithout acorresponding option is
specified.
4. Gcodesof different groupscanbespecifiedinthesameblock.
I f G codes of thesamegorup arespecified in thesameblock,
theG code specified last is valid.
5. I f a G codeof group 01is specified in a canned cyclefor
drilling, thecannedcycleiscanceledinthesamewayaswhen
a G80command is specified. G codes of group 01arenot
affected by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6. When G codesystemA isused for acanned cyclefor drilling
only theinitial level is provided at thereturn point.
7. G codes aredisplayed for each group number.
PROGRAMMING
38
Table3 Gcodelist (1/3)
Gcode
Group Function
A B C
Group Function
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01
01
Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
G02 G02 G02
01
Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G10 G10 G10 00
Data setting
G11 G11 G11 Data setting made cancel
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18
16
ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70
06
Input in inch
G21 G21 G71
06
Input in mm
G22 G22 G22
09
Stored stroke check function on
G23 G23 G23
09
Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25
08
Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
G26 G26 G26
08
Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28
00
Return to reference position
G30 G30 G30
00
2nd reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 01 Thread cutting
G36 G36 G36
00
Automatic tool compensation X
G37 G37 G37
00
Automatic tool compensation Z
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate systemsetting, max. spindle speed setting
G52 G52 G52 00 Local coordinate systemsetting
G53 G53 G53
00
Machine coordinate systemsetting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system1selection
G56 G56 G56
14
Workpiece coordinate system3selection
G57 G57 G57
14
Workpiece coordinate system4selection
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling
G66 G66 G66
12
Macro modal call
G67 G67 G67
12
Macro modal call cancel
(G FUNCTION)
39
Gcode
Function Group
A
Function Group
C B
G68 G68 G68
04
Mirror image for double turrets ON or balance cutting mode
G69 G69 G69
04
Mirror image for double turrets OFF or balance cutting mode
cancel
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle (Other than 0--GCC, 00--GCC and 0--GCD/II)
G71 G71 G73
Stock removal in turning
(Other than 0--GCC, 00--GCC and 0--GCD/II)
G72 G72 G74
00
Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75
00
Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76
End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77
Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78
Multiple threading cycle
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle (For 0--GCC, 00--GCC and 0--GCD/II)
G72 G72 G73
01
Traverse direct constant--demension grinding cycle
(For 0--GCC, 00--GCC and 0--GCD/II)
G73 G73 G74
01
Oscilation grinding cycle
G74 G74 G75
Oscilation direct constant--dimension grinding cycle
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G84 G84 G84
10
Cycle for face tapping
G86 G86 G86
10
Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24
01
Endface turning cycle
G96 G96 G96
02
Constant surface speed control
G97 G97 G97
02
Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94
05
Per minute feed
G99 G95 G95
05
Per revolution feed
G90 G90
03
Absolute programming
G91 G91
03
Incremental programming
G98 G98
11
Return to initial level (See Explanations 6)
G99 G99
11
Return to R point level (See Explanations 6)
G107 G107 G107 00 Cyrindrical interpolation
PROGRAMMING
40
Gcode
Function Group
A
Function Group
C B
G112 G112 G112
21
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
G113 G113 G113
21
Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel
G250 G250 G250
20
Polygonal turning mode cancel
G251 G251 G251
20
Polygonal turning mode
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
41
4
INTERPOLATIONFUNCTIONS
PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS B--61394E/08
42
TheG00commandmovesatool tothepositionintheworkpiecesystem
specifiedwithanabsoluteor anincremental commandatarapidtraverse
rate.
In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is
programmed.
Intheincremental commandthedistancethetool movesisprogrammed.
IP_: For anabsolutecommand, thecoordinates of anend
position, andfor anincremental commnad, thedistance
thetool moves.
G00IP_;
Tool pathgenerally doesnot becomeastraight line.
End position
Non liner positioning.
Start position
TherapidtraverserateintheG00commandisset totheparameter Nos.
518to521for eachaxisindependentlybythemachinetool builder. Inthe
positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speedat thestart of ablock andisdecelerated at theend
of ablock. Execution proceeds to thenext block after confirming the
in--position.
In--position meansthat thefeedmotor iswithinthespecifiedrange.
This range is determined by the machine tool builder by setting to
parameter Nos. 500to503.
4.1
POSITIONING
(G00)
Format
Explanations
43
<Radius programmimg >
G00X40.0Z56.0 ; (Absolute command)
or
G00U--60.0W--30.5; (Incremental command)
Z
56.0
30.5
X
40.0
3
0
.
0
Therapidtraverseratecannot bespecifiedintheaddress F.
Examples
Restrictions
44
Toolscanmovealongaline
IP_ : For anabsolutecommand, thecoordinates of anend
point , andfor anincremental commnad, thedistance
thetool moves.
F_ : Speedof tool feed(Feedrate)
G01IP_F_;
A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate
specifiedinF.
Thefeedratespecified inF iseffectiveuntil anewvalueisspecified. It
neednot bespecifiedfor eachblock.
ThefeedratecommandedbytheF codeismeasuredalongthetool path.
If theF codeisnot commanded, thefeedrateisregardedaszero.
For feed--per--minute mode under 2--axis simultaneous control, the
feedratefor amovement alongeachaxisasfollows:
F

L
f
F

L
f
Feed rate of a axis direction :
L
2

2
G01a a b b
Ff ;
Feed rate of b axis direction :
<Diameter programming >
G01X40.0Z20.1F20 ; (Absolute command)
or
G01U20.0W--25.9F20 ; (Incremental command)
Z
20.1
46.0
f20.0
X
f40.0
End point
Start point
4.2
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
(G01)
Format
Explanations
Examples
D Linear interpolation
45
Thecommandbelowwill moveatool alongacircular arc.
G17
G03
Arc intheXpYpplane
Arc intheZpXpplane
G18
Arc intheYpZpplane
Xp_Yp_
G02
G03
G02
G03
G02
G19
Xp_Zp_
Yp_Zp_
I_J _
R_
F_
I_K_
R_
F_
J _K_
F_
R_
Table4.3 Description of theCommandFormat
Command Description
G17 Specification of arc on XpYp plane
G18 Specification of arc on ZpXp plane
G19 Specification of arc on YpZp plane
G02 Circular Interpolation Clockwise direction (CW)
G03 Circular Interpolation Counterclockwise direction (CCW)
X
p_
Command values of X axis or its parallel axis
(set by parameter Nos. 279and 280)
Y
p_
Command values of Y axis or its parallel axis
Z
p_
Command values of Zaxis or its parallel axis
I_ X
p
axis distance fromthe start point to the center of an arc with
sign or radius value
J _ Y
p
sign
k_ Z
p
sign
R_ Arc radius with sign fixed to radius value.
F_ Feedrate along the arc
4.3
CIRCULAR
INTERPOLATION
(G02,G03)
Format
46
Clockwise(G02) and counterclockwise(G03) on the X
p
Y
p
plane
(Z
p
X
p
planeor Y
p
Z
p
plane) aredefinedwhentheX
p
Y
p
planeisviewed
inthepositive--to--negativedirectionof theZ
p
axis(Y
p
axisor X
p
axis,
respectively) intheCartesiancoordinatesystem. Seethefigurebelow.
Yp
G02
G03
G17 G18 G19
G02
G03
G02
G03
Xp Zp
Xp
Zp Yp
The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is
expressedasanabsoluteor incremental valueaccordingtoG90or G91.
For theincremental value, thedistanceof theendpoint whichisviewed
fromthestart point of thearc isspecified.
Thearccenter isspecifiedbyaddressesI, J , andK for theXp, Yp, andZp
axes, respectively. Thenumerical valuefollowingI, J , or K, however, is
avector component inwhichthearc center isseenfromthestart point,
andisalwaysspecifiedasanincremental valueirrespectiveof G90and
G91, asshownbelow.
I, J , andK must besignedaccordingtothedirection.
End point (x,y)
Center
Start
point
End point (z,x) End point (y,z)
Start
point
Start
point
Center
Center
i
x
y x
z
k
z
y
j
j i
k
I0,J 0, andK0canbeomitted.
WhenXp, Yp, andZpareomitted(theendpoint isthesameasthestart
point) andthecenter isspecified withI, J , andK, a360 arc (circle) is
specified.
G02I_; (for full--circle)
Explanations
D Direction of thecircular
interpolation
D Distance moved onan
arc
D Distance fromthestart
point to thecenter of arc
D Full---circle programming
47
Thedistancebetweenanarcandthecenter of acirclethatcontainsthearc
canbespecifiedusingtheradius, R, of thecircleinsteadof I, J , andK.
Inthiscase, onearcislessthan180, andtheother ismorethan180 are
considered. An arc with a sector angle of 180 or wider cannot be
specified. If Xp, Yp, andZpareall omitted, if theendpointislocatedat
thesamepositionas thestart point andwhenR is used, anarc of 0 is
programmed
G02R ; (Thecutter doesnot move.)
r=50mm
End point
Start point
r=50mm
Y
X
For arc (less than180_)
G02W60.0U10.0R50.0F300.0;
For arc (greater than180_)
Anarc withasector angleof 180_
or wider cannot bespecified
within asingle block.
Thefeedrateincircular interpolationisequal tothefeedratespecifiedby

theF code, andthefeedratealongthearc (thetangential feedrateof the
arc) iscontrolledtobethespecifiedfeedrate.
Theerror between thespecified feedrate andtheactual tool feedrate is
^2%or less. However, thisfeedrateismeasuredalongthearc after the
tool noseradiuscompensationisapplied
If I, J , K, andRaddressesarespecifiedsimultaneously, thearcspecified
byaddress R takesprecedenceandtheother areignored.
If anaxisnot comprisingthespecifiedplaneiscommanded, analarmis
displayed.
For example, whenaZX planeisspecifiedinG--codeBor C, specifying
theX--axisor U--axis(parallel totheX--axis) causesalarmNo. 028tobe
generated.
Whenanarc havingacenter angleapproaching180degrees isspecified
inR, acenter positioncalculationerror mayoccur. Insuchacase, specify
thecenter of thearc withI, J , andK.
D Arc radius
D Feedrate
Restrictions
48
X
Z
K
X
K
Z
Z
R
G02X_Z_I_K_F_; G03X_Z_I_K_F_;
G02X_Z_R_F_;
X--axis
End point
X--axis X--axis
End point
Center of arc
Center of arc
Start point
Start point
(Diameter
programming)
(Diameter
programming)
(Diameter
programming)
(Absolute programming)
(Absolute programming) (Absolute programming)
Z--axis Z--axis Z--axis
X
I
I
(Diameter programming)
G02X50.0Z30.0I25.0F0.3; or
G02U20.0W--020.0I25.0F0.3; or
G02X50.0Z30.0R25.0F0.3 or
G02U20.0W--20.0R25.F0.3;
Z
f50.0
X
100
15.0
30.0
50.0
R25.0
Examples
D Commandof circular
interpolation X, Z
49
Polar coordinateinterpolationisafunctionthatexercisescontour control
inconvertingacommandprogrammedinaCartesiancoordinatesystem
tothemovementof alinear axis(movement of atool) andthemovement
of arotaryaxis(rotationof aworkpiece). Thismethodisuseful incutting
afront surfaceandgrindingacamshaft onalathe.
G112; Starts polar coordinate interpolation mode
Polar coordinate interpolation mode is cancelled G113;
Specify linear or circular interpolation using coordinates
in a Cartesian coordinate systemconsisting of a linear
axis and rotary axis (virtual axis).
G112startsthepolar coordinateinterpolationmodeandselects apolar
coordinateinterpolationplane(Fig. 4.6(a)). Polar coordinate
interpolationisperformedonthisplane.
Rotary axis (virtual axis)
(unit:mmor inch)
Linear axis
(unit:mmor inch)
Origin of the workpiece coordinate system
Fig. 4.4 Polar coordinateinterpolation plane.
When the power is turned on or the systemis reset, polar coordinate
interpolationiscanceled(G113).
Thelinear androtationaxesfor polarcoordinateinterpolationmustbeset
inparameters (Nos. 291and292) beforehand.
CAUTION
Theplaneusedbefore G112is specified(plane selectedby
G17, G18, or G19) is canceled. It is restored when G113
(canceling polar coordinate interpolation) is specified.
When the systemis reset, polar coordinate interpolation is
canceled and the plane specified by G17, G18, or G19 is
used.
4.4
POLAR COORDINATE
INTERPOLATION
(G112,G113)
Format
D Specify G112andG113
inSeparate Blocks
Explanations
D Polar coordinate
interpolation plane
50
In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, program commands are
specifiedwithCartesiancoordinatesonthepolarcoordinateinterpolation
plane. Theaxis address for therotationaxis isusedastheaxisaddress
for the second axis (virtual axis) in the plane. Whether a diameter or
radius is specified for thefirst axis in theplane is the sameas for the
rotationaxisregardless of thespecificationfor thefirst axisintheplane.
Thevirtual axis is at coordinate0immediately after G112isspecified.
Polar interpolationisstartedassumingtheangleof 0for thepositionof
thetool whenG112isspecified.
Specifythefeedrateasaspeed(relativespeedbetweentheworkpieceand
tool) tangential to the polar coordinate interpolation plane (Cartesian
coordinatesystem) usingF.
G01 Linear interpolation . . . . . . . . . .
G02, G03 Circular interpolation . . . . . . .
G04 Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . .
G40, G41, G42 Tool noseradiuscompensation . .
(Polar coordinateinterpolationisappliedtothepath
after cutter compensation.)
G65, G66, G67 Custommacrocommand . .
G98, G99 Feedper minute, feedper revolution . . . . . . .
Theaddressesfor specifyingtheradiusof anarcfor circular interpolation
(G02or G03) inthepolar coordinateinterpolationplanedependonthe
first axisintheplane(linear axis).
I andJ intheXp--Ypplanewhenthelinear axisistheX--axisor anaxis
parallel totheX--axis.
J andK intheYp--Zpplanewhenthelinear axisistheY--axisor an
axisparallel totheY--axis.
K andI intheZp--Xpplanewhenthelinear axisistheZ--axisor an
axisparallel totheZ--axis.
Theradiusof anarc canbespecifiedalsowithanR command.
The tool moves along such axes normally, independent of polar
coordinateinterpolation.
Actual coordinates are displayed. However, theremaining distance to
move in a block is displayed based on the coordinates in the polar
coordinateinterpolationplane(Cartesian coordinates).
Inpolarcoordinateinterpolationmode, themaximumcuttingfeedratecan
be changed fromthat specified with parameter No. 527, used in most
circumstances, tothat specifiedwithspecial parameter No. 663.
D Distance movedand
feedrate for polar
coordinateinterpolation
Theunit for coordinates
onthehypothetical
axis is thesameas the
unit for thelinear axis
(mm/inch)
Theunit for thefeedrate
is mm/minor inch/min
D Gcodes whichcanbe
specified inthepolar
mode
D Circular interpolation in
thepolar coordinate
plane
D Movement alongaxes
not inthepolar
planeinthepolar
mode
D Current positiondisplay
inthepolar coordinate
interpolation mode
D Maximumcutting
feedrate inpolar
mode
51
Before G112 is specified, a workpiece coordinate system) where the
center of therotaryaxisistheoriginof thecoordinatesystemmustbeset.
IntheG112mode, thecoordinatesystemmustnotbechanged(G92, G52,
G53, relativecoordinatereset, G54throughG59, etc.).
Thepolar coordinateinterpolationmodecannot bestartedor terminated
(G112orG113) inthetool noseradiuscompensationmode(G41orG42).
G112or G113must bespecified in thetool noseradius compensation
canceledmode(G40).
For ablock intheG112mode, theprogramcannot berestarted.
Polar coordinate interpolation converts thetool movement for afigure
programmedinaCartesiancoordinatesystemtothetool movementinthe
rotationaxis(C--axis) andthelinear axis(X--axis). Whenthetool moves
closer to the center of the workpiece, the C--axis component of the
feedratebecomes larger andmay exceed themaximumcuttingfeedrate
fortheC--axis(setinparameter No. 527), causinganalarm(seethefigure
below). Toprevent theC--axiscomponentfromexceedingthemaximum
cuttingfeedratefor theC--axis, reducethefeedratespecifiedwithaddress
F or createaprogramsothat thetool (center of thetool whentool nose
radiuscompensationisapplied) doesnot moveclosetothecenter of the
workpiece.
WARNING
L :Distance (in mm) between the tool center and workpiece center when the tool center is the nearest to the
workpiece center
R :Maximumcutting feedrate (deg/min) of the C axis
Then, a speed specifiable with address F in polar coordinate interpolation can be given by the formula below.
Specify a speed allowed by the formula. The formula provides a theoretical value; in practice, a value slightly
smaller than a theoretical value may need to be used due to a calculation error.
L1
L2
L3
3
2
1
X n
Consider lines L1, L2, andL3. Xis thedistance thetool moves per time unit at
thefeedratespecifiedwithaddress F intheCartesiancoordinatesystem. Asthe
tool moves fromL1to L2to L3, the angle at which the tool moves per time unit
correspondingtoXintheCartesiancoordinate systemincreases from 1toQ2
to 3.
Inother words, theC--axis componentofthefeedratebecomes largeras thetool
moves closer to the center of the workpiece. The C component of thefeedrate
may exceed the maximum cutting feedrate for the C--axis because the tool
movement in the Cartesian coordinate systemhas been converted to the tool
movement for the C--axis and the X--axis.
F <L R
180
(mm/min)
Thefeedrate about therotation axis can beclamped by settingbit 2of
parameter No. 399 to 1, such that the value specified for the cutting
feedrate is not exceeded. The tool can thus pass theproximity of the
origin. Thecuttingfeedratemay, however, varyslightlyintheproximity
of thezeropoint.
Restrictions
D Coordinate systemfor the
polar coordinate
interpolation
D Tool noseradius
compensation command
D Programrestart
D Cutting feedratefor the
rotation axis
D Clamping thefeedrate
about therotation axis
52
Exampleof Polar CoordinateInterpolationProgramBasedonX Axis
(Linear Axis) andC Axis(Rotary Axis)
C (hypothetical axis)
C axis
Path after tool nose radius compensation
Programpath
R10
N204
N205
N206
N203
N202 N201
N208
N207
X axis
Zaxis
N200
Tool
R10
40
40
O0001 ;
N010 T0101
N0100 G00 X120.0 C0 Z _ ; Positioning to start position
N0200 G12.1 ; Start of polar coordinate interpolation
N0201 G42 G01 X40.0 F _ ;
N0202 C10.0 ;
N0203 G03 X20.0 C20.0 R10.0 ;
N0204 G01 X--40.0 ; Geometry program
N0205 C--10.0 ; (programbased on cartesian coordinates on
N0206 G03 X--20.0 C--20.0 I10.0 J 0 ; X--C plane)
N0207 G01 X40.0 ;
N0208 C0 ;
N0209 G40 X120.0 ;
N0210 G13.1 ; Cancellation of polar coordinate interpolation
N0300 Z __ ;
N0400 X __C __ ;
N0900M30 ;
X axis is by diameter programming, C axis is by radius programming.
Examples
53
The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once
internally convertedtoadistanceof alinear axisalongtheouter surface
sothatlinear interpolationorcircular interpolationcanbeperformedwith
another axis. After interpolation, suchadistanceisconvertedbacktothe
amount of travel of therotary axis.
Thecylindrical interpolationfunctionallowsthesideof acylinder tobe
developed for programming. So programs such as a program for
cylindrical camgroovingcanbecreatedvery easily.
G107IP r ; Starts thecylindrical interpolation mode
G107IP 0; Thecylindrical interpolation modeis cancelled.
IP: Anaddress for therotation axis
r : Theradius of thecylinder
Specify G107 IP r ; and G107 IP 0; in separate blocks.
Useparameter Nos. 279and280tospecify whether therotationaxisis
theX--, Y--, or Z--axis. SpecifytheGcodetoselect aplanefor whichthe
rotationaxisisthespecifiedlinear axis.
For example, whentherotationaxisisanaxisparallel totheX--axis, G17
mustspecifyanXp--Ypplane, whichisaplanedefinedbytherotationaxis
andtheY--axisor anaxisparallel totheY--axis.
A feedratespecifiedinthecylindrical interpolationmodeisaspeedonthe
developedcylindrical surface.
In thecylindrical interpolation mode, circular interpolation is possible
with the rotation axis and another linear axis. Radius R is used in
commandsinthesameway asdescribedinSection4.3.
Theunit for aradiusisnot degrees but millimeters (for metric input) or
inches(for inchinput).
<Example Circular interpolationbetweentheZaxisandC axis>
For parameter No. 279, 5(axisparallel withtheX axis)
istobeset. Inthiscase, thecommandfor circular interpolationis
G18Z__C__;
G02(G03) Z__C__R__;
For parameter No. 279, 6(axisparallel withtheY axis)
may bespecifiedinstead. Inthiscase, however, thecommandfor
circular interpolationis
G19C__Z__;
G02(G03) Z__C__R__;
To performcutter compensation in thecylindrical interpolation mode,
cancel any ongoing cutter compensation mode before entering the
cylindrical interpolation mode. Then, start and terminate cutter
compensationwithinthecylindrical interpolationmode.
4.5
CYLINDRICAL
INTERPOLATION
(G107)
Format
Explanations
D Planeselection
(G17, G18, G19)
D Feedrate
D Circular interpolation
(G02,G03)
D Cutter compensation
54
Inthecylindrical interpolationmode, theamountof travel of arotaryaxis
specifiedbyanangleisonceinternallyconvertedtoadistanceof alinear
axis on the outer surface so that linear interpolation or circular
interpolation can beperformed with another axis. After interpolation,
suchadistanceis converted back toanangle. For this conversion, the
amount of travel isroundedtoaleast input increment.
Sowhentheradiusof acylinder issmall, theactual amount of travel can
differ fromaspecifiedamountof travel. Note, however, thatsuchanerror
isnot accumulative.
If manual operation is performed in thecylindrical interpolation mode
with manual absolute on, an error can occur for the reason described
above.
Specified value
The actual amount
of travel 2 2 R
MOTION REV

MOTION REV
MOTION REV : The amount of travel per rotation of the rotation axis (360)
: Rounded to the least input increment
: Workpiece radius

2 2 R
R
Inthecylindrical interpolation mode, anarc radius cannot bespecified
withwordaddress I, J , or K.
If the cylindrical interpolation mode is started when tool nose radius
compensation is already applied, circular interpolation is not correctly
performedinthecylindrical interpolationmode.
Inthecylindrical interpolationmode, positioningoperations (including
those that produce rapid traverse cycles such as G28, G30) cannot be
specified. Before positioning can be specified, the cylindrical
interpolationmodemust becancelled. Cylindrical interpolation(G107)
cannot beperformedinthepositioningmode(G00).
Inthecylindrical interpolationmode, aworkpiececoordinatesystem
cannot bespecified.
Inthecylindrical interpolationmode, thecylindrical interpolationmode
cannot bereset. Thecylindrical interpolation modemust becancelled
beforethecylindrical interpolationmodecanbereset.
Canned cycles for drilling, G81 to G89, cannot be specified during
cylindrical interpolationmode.
D Cylindrical interpolation
accuracy
Restrictions
D Arc radius specification
inthecylindrical
interpolation mode
D Circular interpolation
andtool noseradius
compensation
D Positioning
D Coordinatesystem
setting
D Cylindrical interpolation
modesetting
D Cannedcyclefor drilling
duringcylindrical
interpolation mode
55
Exampleof aCylindrical Interpolation Program
O0001(CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION );
N01G00Z100.0 C0T0101;
N02G01G18W0 H0;
N03G07.1 H57299;
N04G01G42Z120.0 D01F250;
N05C30.0 ;
N06G02Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ;
N07G01Z70.0 ;
N08G03Z60.0 C70.0 R10.0 ;
N09G01C150.0 ;
N10G03Z70.0 C190.0 R75.0 ;
N11G01Z110.0 C230.0 ;
N12G02Z120.0 C270.0 R75.0 ;
N13G01C360.0 ;
N14G40Z100.0 ;
N15G07.1 C0;
N16M30;
230 190 150 0
mm
deg
110
90
70
120
30 60 70
270
N05
N06
N07
N08 N09 N10
N11
N12
N13
360
60
Z
C
Examples
C
R Z
56
Taperedscrewsandscroll threadsinadditiontoequal leadatraightthreads
canbecut byusingaG32command.
Thespindlespeedisreadfromthepositioncoder onthespindleinreal
timeandconvertedtoacuttingfeedratefor feed--per minutemode, which
isusedtomovethetool.
L
Fig.4.6(a) Straight Thread
L
L
Fig.4.6 (b) Tapered Screw Fig.4.6(c) Scroll Thread
X
Zaxis
X axis
Z
d
2
Start point
L
a
0
G32IP_F_;
IP_: Endpoint
F_: Leadof thelongaxis
(always radius programming)
Endpoint
Zaxis
d
1
Fig. 4.6(d) Exampleof ThreadCutting
Ingeneral, threadcuttingisrepeated alongthesametool pathinrough
cuttingthroughfinishcuttingforascrew. Sincethreadcuttingstartswhen
the position coder mounted on the spindle outputs a 1--turn signal,
threadingisstartedat afixedpoint andthetool pathontheworkpieceis
unchangedfor repeatedthreadcutting. Notethat thespindlespeedmust
remain constant from rough cutting through finish cutting. If not,
incorrect threadleadwill occur.
4.6
CONSTANT LEAD
THREADING (G32)
Format
Explanations
57
X
LX
a
LZ
Z
LZ LX a 45_ lead is Zaxis direction
LZ LX a 45_lead is LX axis direction
Tapered thread
Fig. 4.6(e) LZandLXof aTaperedThread
In general, the lag of the servo system, etc. will produce somewhat
incorrect leads at the starting and ending points of a thread cut. To
compensatefor this, athreading lengthsomewhat longer thanrequired
shouldbespecified.
Table4.6(a) liststheranges for specifyingthethreadlead.
Table4.6 Ranges of leadsizethat canbespecified
Leastcommandincrement
mminput 0.0001 to 500.0000mm mminput 0.0001 to 500.0000mm
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999inch Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999inch
58
Zaxis
X axis
d
2
d
1
30mm
70
The following values are used in programming :
Thread lead :4mm
d
1
=3mm
d
2
=1.5mm
Depth of cut :1mm(cut twice)
(Metric input, Diameter programming)
G00 U--62.0 ;
G32 W--74.5 F4.0 ;
G00 U62.0 ;
W74.5 ;
U--64.0 ;
(For the second cut, cut 1mmmore)
G32 W--74.5 ;
G00 U64.0 ;
W74.5 ;
1. Straight thread cutting
Zaxis
X axis
d
2
d
1
40
The following values are used in programming :
Thread lead : 3.5mmin the direction of the Zaxis
d
1
=2mm
d
2
=1mm
Cutting depth in the X axis direction is 1mm
(Cut twice)
(Metric input, Diameter programming)
G00 X 12.0 Z72.0 ;
G32 X 41.0 Z29.0 F3.5 ;
G00 X 50.0 ;
Z72.0 ;
X 10.0 ;
(Cut 1mmmore for the second cut)
G32 X 39.0 Z29.0 ;
G00 X 50.0 ;
Z72.0 ; 30
0
f50
f43
f14
2. Tapered thread cutting
Explanations
59
WARNING
1 Feedrate override is effective (fixed at 100%) during thread cutting.
2 itis verydangerous tostopfeeding thethread cutter. This will suddenlyincrease thecutting
depth. Thus, the feed hold function is ineffective while thread cutting. If the feed hold button
is pressed during thread cutting, the tool will stopafter a block not specifying thread cutting
is executed as if the SINGLE BLOCK button were pushed. However, the feed hold lamp
(SPL lamp) lights when the FEED HOLD button on the machine control panel is pushed.
Then, when the tool stops, the lamp is turned off (Single Block stop status).
3 When the FEED HOLD button is again pushed during the first block not specifying thread
cuttingjustafter threadcuttingblockorwhenithas beencontinuouslypushed, thetool stops
at the block not specifying thread cutting.
4 When thread cutting is executed inthe single block status, the tool stops after execution of
the first block not specifying thread cutting.
5 When the mode was changed fromautomatic operation to manual operation during thread
cutting, the tool stops at the first block not specifying thread cutting as when the feed hold
button is pushed as mentioned in Note 3. However, when the mode is changed fromone
automatic operation mode to another, the tool stops after execution of the block not
specifying thread cutting as for the single block mode in Note 4.
6 When the previous block was a thread cutting block, cutting will start immediately without
waiting for detection of the 1--turn signal even if the present block is a thread cutting block.
However, theleadatthepointwheretheblocks joinis incorrect. Toobtainthecorrect
lead, the continuous threading option is required.
G32Z _ F_ ;
Z _; (A 1--turn signal is not detected before
this block.)
G32 ; (Regarded as threading block.)
Z_ F_ ;(One turn signal is also not detected.)
7 Becausetheconstantsurfacespeedcontrol iseffectiveduringscroll threadortaperedscrew
cutting and the spindle speed changes, the correct thread lead may not be cut.
Therefore, do not use the constant surface speed control during thread cutting.
8 Amovement blockpreceding thethreadcuttingblockmustnot specifychamfering or corner
R.
9 A thread cutting block must not specifying chamfering or corner R.
10 The spindle speed override is effective in thread cutting mode.
11 Thread cycle retract function is ineffective to G32.
60
Specifying an increment or a decrement value for a lead per screw
revolutionenables variable--lead threadcuttingtobeperformed.
Fig. 4.7(a) Variable--lead screw
G34IP_F_K_;
IP: Endpoint
F: Leadinlongtitudinal axis direction atthestart point
K: Increment anddecrement of leadper spindlerevolution
Addressother thanK arethesameasinstraight/taper threadcuttingwith
G32.
Table4.7(a) listsarangeof valuesthat canbespecifiedasK.
Table4.7(a) Rangeof validKvalues
Validrangedata
Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Alarm(No. 14) isproduced, for example, whenK suchthat thevaluein
Table 4.7 (a) is exceeded is directed, the maximum value of lead is
exceededasaresultof increaseordecreasebyK ortheleadhasanegative
value.
WARNING
The Thread Cutting Cycle Retractis not effective for G34.
4.7
VARIABLE--LEAD
THREADCUTTING
(G34)
Format
Explanations
61
Thisfunctionfor continuousthreadcuttingissuchthat fractional pulses
outputtoajointbetweenmoveblocksareoverlappedwiththenextmove
for pulseprocessingandoutput (block overlap) .
Therefore, discontinuousmachiningsectionscausedbytheinterruption
of move during continuously block machining are eliminated, thus
making it possible to continuously direct the block for thread cutting
instructions.
Sincethesystemiscontrolledinsuchamanner that thesynchronism
withthespindledoes not deviateinthejoint between blocks wherever
possible, it is possibleto performed special thread cutting operation in
whichtheleadandshapechangemidway.
G32
G32
G32
Fig. 4.8(a) Continuous ThreadCutting
Evenwhenthesamesectionisrepeatedfor threadcuttingwhilechanging
thedepthof cut, thissystemallowsacorrectmachiningwithoutimpairing
thethreads.
NOTE
1 Block overlap is effective even for G01 command,
producing a more excellent finishing surface.
2 When extreme micro blocks continue, no block overlap
may function.
4.8
CONTINUOUS
THREADCUTTING
Explanations
62
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move
followingtheG31command, likeG01. If anexternal skipsignal isinput
during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interruptedandthenext block isexecuted.
Theskipfunctionisusedwhentheendof machiningisnotprogrammed
butspecifiedwithasignal fromthemachine, for example, ingrinding. It
isusedalsofor measuringthedimensionsof aworkpiece.
G31IP_;
G31: One--shotGcode(If is effectiveonlyintheblockinwhich
it is specified)
Thecoordinatevalueswhentheskipsignal isturnedoncanbeusedina
custom macro because they are stored in the custom macro system
variable#5061to#5068, asfollows:
#5061 X axiscoordinatevalue
#5062 Zaxiscoordinatevalue
#5063 3rdaxiscoordinatevalue
#5064 4thaxiscoordinatevalue
WARNING
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration
/deceleration when the feedrate per minute is specified, allowing
for an error in the position of the tool when a skip signal is input.
By setting bit 3of parameter No.015, however, feedrate override,
dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration can be enabled
during movement based on the skip function.These functions are
enabled when the feedrate per rotation is specified.
NOTE
1 If G31commandis issuedwhiletool noseradiuscompensation
is applied, an P/S alarm of No.035 is displayed. Cancel the
cutter compensation with the G40 command before the G31
command is specified.
2 For the high--speed skip option, executing G31 during
feed--per--rotation mode causes P/S alarm 211 to be
generated.
4.9
SKIPFUNCTION
(G31)
Format
Explanations
63
G31 W100.0F100;
U50.0;
U50.0
50.0
100.0
Skip signal is input here
Actual motion
Motion without skip signal
W100
Fig. 4.9(a) Thenextblockis anincremental command
G31 Z200.00F100;
X100.0;
X100.0
X200.0
Actual motion
Fig. 4.9(b) Thenextblockis anabsolutecommandfor 1axis
(300,300)
100 200 300
100
G31 Z200.0F100;
X300.0Z300.0;
Actual motion
X
Z
Fig. 4.9(c) Thenextblockis anabsolutecommandfor 2axes
Examples
D Thenext block to G31is an
incremental command
absolute command for 1
axis
absolute command for 2
axes
64
In ablock specifying P1 to P4 after G31, themulti--step skipfunction
stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal
(4--point) isturnedon. Inablock havingQ1toQ4specifiedafter G04,
adwell operationcanbeskippedbyturningontheskipsignal.
Parameters No. 033and034canbeusedtoselect a4--point skipsignal.
Oneskipsignal canbesettomatchmultiplePnor Qn(n=1,2,3,4) aswell
astomatchaPnor Qnonaone--to--onebasis. Parameters No. 035#0to
#3canbeusedfor dwell.
A skipsignal fromequipment suchasafixed--dimensionsizemeasuring
instrument canbeusedtoskipprograms beingexecuted.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough
machining to spark--out can beperformed automatically by applyinga
skip signal each time rough machining, semi--fine machining,
fine--machining, or spark--out operationiscompleted.
CAUTION
Dwell is not skipped when Qn is not specified and
parameters No. 035#0--#3 are not set.
4.10
MULTI--STEP
(0--GCC, 00--GCC,
0--GCD/II)
65
Thisfunctionskipstheremainingmotionof theblockbythetorquelimitarrival
signal fromtheservomotor. Itcontrolssuchfunctionsaspressingaworkpiece
tothechuck or transferringaworkpiecetoanother axis.
G31 P99 Motion Command F feedrate;
Whencommandingtheabovewithlimitingthetorqueof theservomotor,
theremainingmotionof theblockisskippedbyassertingthetorquelimit
arrival signal fromthemotor, andthenext block isexecuted. Theskip
positionismemorizedintheordinarysystemvariables. G31P99isvalid
onlyonthecommandedblock.
Generally, theservolagisnotzeroaftertheskipbythetorquelimitarrival
signal. Therearetwomethodstomaintaintheservo lag. Oneisleaving
thelagasit is.
Another isretrievingthelagtotheactual positionandmakingit almost
zero. Inthelatter case, theretrieved positionis memorized as theskip
position. Theparameter (No.389#4) selects either.
G00Z500.0; Positioningtothestart point
Mj j ; Limitingthetorqueof servomotor
G31P99W22.0F100.0; Commandingtheskipfunction
G01Z500.0; Re--positioningtothestart point
Mf f ; Releasingthetorqueof servomotor
WARNING
1 The torque limit for the servo motor should be
commanded before G31 P99. The torque limit can be
achieved by using PMC windowfunction. At lease, one
torque limit arrival signal of the connected servo motors
is turned on, the skip is carried out.
2 Thetorquelimitshouldbereleasedatthepointwherethe
workpiece and the axis is not contacting each other.
When resetting the G31 P99, it is interrupted but the
torque limit is not released automatically.
4.11
SKIPFUNCTIONBY
TORQUE LIMIT
ARRIVAL SIGNAL
Format
Explanations
D ProgramExample
66
NOTE
1 The ordinary skip signal is also active in G31 P99.
2 The in--position is not checked at the end of G31 P99.
3 The mirror image should be cancelled before
commanding G31 P99.
4 The nose--R compensation should be cancelled before
commanding G31 P99.
5 G31 P99 should not be commanded successively.
6 Dry--run, feedrate and automatic acc./dec. should be
ignored during G31 P99. (Parameter No.015#5=0)
7 The servo excess error during stop at the axis is not
checked while the torque limit arrival signal turns on.
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 5. FEED FUNCTIONS
67
5
FEEDFUNCTIONS
PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS B--61394E/08
68
Thefeedfunctionscontrol thefeedrateof thetool. Thefollowingtwofeed
functionsareavailable:
1.Rapidtraverse
Whenthepositioningcommand(G00) isspecified, thetool movesat
arapidtraversefeedrateset intheCNC (parameters No. 518to521).
2.Cuttingfeed
Thetool movesat aprogrammedcuttingfeedrate.
Overridecanbeappliedtoarapidtraverserateor cuttingfeedrateusing
theswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel.
Topreventamechanical shock,acceleration/decelerationisautomatically
appliedwhenthetool startsandendsitsmovement (Fig. 5.1(a)).
Rapid traverse rate
0
0
T
R
F
R
T
R
T
C
T
C
F
J
F
C
T
J
T
J
F
L
0
Time
Time
J og feed
F
R
: Rapid traverse rate
T
R
: Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for rapid
traverse rate
F
J
: J og feed rate
T
J
: Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a J og
feed
F
L
: Deceleration stop
speed for jog speed
F
C
: Feedrate
T
C
: Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a cutting
feedrate
Time
Feed rate
Fig. 5.1(a) Automatic acceleration/deceleration (example)
5.1
GENERAL
D Feedfunctions
D Override
D Automatic acceleration/
deceleration
69
If thedirection of movement changes between specified blocks during
cuttingfeed, arounded--corner pathmay result (Fig. 5.1(b)).
0
Programmed path
Actual tool path
X
Z
Fig. 5.1(b) Exampleof Tool PathbetweenTwoBlocks
!Incircular interpolation, aradial error occurs (Fig. 5.1(c)).
r
X
Z
nr : Error
Programmed path
Actual tool path
0
Fig. 5.1(c) Exampleof Radial Error inCircular Interpolation
Therounded--corner pathshowninFig. 5.1(b) andtheerror showninFig.
5.1(c) dependonthefeedrate. So, thefeedrateneedstobecontrolledfor
thetool tomoveasprogrammed.
D Tool pathinacutting
feed
70
G00 IP_ ;
G00: Gcode(group01) for positioning (rapidtraverse)
IP_ ; Dimensionwordfor theendpoint
Thepositioningcommand(G00) positionsthetool byrapidtraverse. In
rapid traverse, the next block is executed after the specified feedrate
becomes0andtheservomotor reachesacertainrangesetbythemachine
tool builder (in--positioncheck).
By setting bit 5of parameter No. 020, however, thein--positioncheck
functioncanbedisabledineachpositioningblock.
A rapidtraverserateisset for eachaxisbyparametersNo. 518to521, so
norapidtraversefeedrateneedbeprogrammed.
Thefollowingoverrides canbeappliedtoarapidtraverseratewiththe
switchonthemachineoperatorspanel:F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allowsafixedfeedratetobeset byparameter No. 533.
For detailedinformation, refer totheappropriatemanual of themachine
tool builder.
Commandvaluerangeof therapidtraverse
Increment system
IS--B IS--C
Metric output
30to 100,000 mm/min
30to 100,000 deg/min
30to 24,000 mm/min
30to 24,000 deg/min
Inchoutput
3.0 to 4,000.0 inch/min
3.0 to 100,000 deg/min
3.0 to 960.0 inch/min
3.0 to 24,000 deg/min
5.2
RAPIDTRAVERSE
Format
Explanations
71
Feedrateof linear interpolation(G01), circular interpolation(G02, G03),
etc. arecommandedwithnumbersafter theF code.
Incuttingfeed, thenextblockisexecutedsothatthefeedratechangefrom
thepreviousblock isminimized.
Twomodesof specificationareavailable:
1. Feedper minute(G98)
After F, specify theamount of feedof thetool per minute.
2. Feedper revolution(G99)
After F, specifytheamount of feedof thetool per spindlerevolution.
Feedper minute
G98; Gcode(group05) for feedper minute
F_ ; Feedratecommand(mm/min or inch/min)
Feedper revolution
G99; Gcode(group05) for feedper revolution
F_ ; Feedratecommand(mm/rev or inch/rev)
Cuttingfeediscontrolledsothat thetangential feedrateisalways set at
aspecifiedfeedrate.
X
End point
Starting
point
X
F F
Center End point
Start
point
Linear interpolation Circular interpolation
Z Z
Fig. 5.3(a) Tangential feedrate(F)
After specifyingG98, theamount of feedof thetool per minuteistobe
directlyspecifiedbysettinganumber after F. G98isamodal code. Once
aG98isspecified, itisvaliduntil G99(feedper revolution) isspecified.
At power--on, thefeedper revolutionmodeisset.
Anoverridefrom0%to150%(in1%steps) canbeappliedto feedper
minutewith theswitch on the machine operators panel. For detailed
information, seetheappropriatemanual of themachinetool builder.
5.3
CUTTING FEED
Format
Explanations
D Tangential speed
constant control
D Feedper minute(G98)
72
Increment system
IS--B IS--C
Metric output
1to 100,000 mm/min
1to 100,000 deg/min
1to 12,000 mm/min
1to 12,000 deg/min
Inchoutput
0.01 to 4,000.00 inch/min
0.01 to 6,000.00 deg/min
0.01 to 480.00 inch/min
0.01 to 600.00 deg/min
The command value ranges indicated in the above table are also
applicablewhenadecimal point is used inthespecificationof afeedrate
for feedper minute. By settingbit 5of parameter No. 077, however, the
command value ranges for those cases where a decimal point is entered
can be modified as indicated below. With 0--GCC and 00--GCC, the
following command value ranges are applicable even if the parameter is
not set. When a feedrate that falls outside the command value ranges
shown belowis required, specify thefeedratewithout entering adecimal
point.
Increment system
IS--B IS--C
Metric output
0.001 to 99,999.999 mm/min
0.001 to 99,999.999 deg/min
0.001 to 12,000.000 mm/min
0.001 to 12,000.000 deg/min
Inchoutput
0.00001to 999.99999inch/min
0.00001to 999.99999deg/min
0.00001to 480.00000inch/min
0.00001to 600.00000deg/min
Feed amount per minute
(mm/min or inch/min)
F
Fig. 5.3(b) Feedper minute
WARNING
No override can be used for some commands such as for
threading.
D Feedrate commandvalue
rangefor feedper minute
D Feedrate decimal point
input for feedper minute
73
AfterspecifyingG99,theamountof feedof thetool perspindlerevolution
istobedirectlyspecifiedbysettinganumberafterF. G99isamodal code.
OnceaG99isspecified, itisvaliduntil G98(feedperminute) isspecified.
Anoverridefrom0%to150%(in10%steps) canbeappliedtofeedper
revolutionwiththeswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel. For detailed
information, seetheappropriatemanual of themachinetool builder.
Feed amount per spindle revolution
(mm/rev or inch/rev)
F
Fig. 5.3(c) Feedper revolution
CAUTION
When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate fluctuation
may occur. The slower the spindle rotates, the more
frequently feedrate fluctuation occurs.
Increment system
IS--B IS--C
Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Inchinput 0.000001to 9.999999inch/rev 0.000001to 9.999999inch/rev
Thefeedratecommandvaluerangesfor feedper rotationindicatedinthe
tableaboveindicatethevaluesthat canbespecified; notethat theactual
feedrateisclampedtoamaximumcuttingfeedrate.
A commonupper limit canbeset onthecuttingfeedratealongeachaxis
withparameter No. 527. If anactual cuttingfeedrate(withanoverride
applied) exceedsaspecifiedupper limit, it isclampedtotheupper limit.
NOTE
Anupper limit is set inmm/minor inch/min. CNC calculation
may involve a feedrate error of 2% with respect to a
specified value. However, this is not true for
acceleration/deceleration. To be more specific, this error is
calculated with respect to a measurement on the time the
tool takes tomove 500mmor more duringthesteadystate:
D Feedper revolution
(G99)
D Feedrate commandvalue
rangefor feedper
rotation
D Cuttingfeedrate clamp
74
Dwell G04X_ ; or G04U_ ; or G04P_ ;
X_ : Specify a time (decimal point permitted)
U_ : Specify a time (decimal point permitted)
P_ : Specify a time (decimal point not permitted)
By specifyingadwell, theexecutionof thenext block isdelayedbythe
specifiedtime.
Table5.4(a) Commandvaluerangeof thedwell time(CommandbyX)
Increment system Commandvaluerange Dwell timeunit
IS--B 0.001 to 99999.999
s
IS--C 0.0001 to 9999.9999
s
Table5.4(b) Commandvaluerangeof thedwell time(CommandbyP)
Increment system Commandvaluerange Dwell timeunit
IS--B 1to 99999999 0.001 s
IS--C 1to 99999999 0.0001 s
NOTE
Dwell and Tool offset can not be commanded in the same
block.
5.4
DWELL (G04)
Format
Explanations
75
Thisfunctionspecifiesthedwell interval byturningtimesof thespindle
insteadof thetimeinterval.
Thisfunctionisenabledbysettingbit0of parameter No. 395accordingly.
(G99) G04
P
X ;
U
The dwell command by designating turning times of the spindle is
possible when commanding G04 during the feed per revolution mode
(G99). Turningtimesof thespindleisdesignatedbyP--code, X--codeor
U--code. Thedwell isperformedwhilethespindlerotatesthedesignated
times. Thesetting unit and range of turning times are as follows. The
decimal point canbeusedinX--codeandU--code.
Unit Range
Standard 0.001 rev 0to 99999.999 rev
Input unit 1/10 0.0001 rev 0to 9999.9999 rev
When commanding G99 G04U2.5;, thedwell is preformed whilethe
spindlerotates 2.5times.
NOTE
1 In spite of the parameter setting, the dwell command
during the feed per minute is regarded as the ordinary
dwell by the time interval.
2 Whensettingtheparameter (No.062#3) to1toexpand
the maximumspindle speed, This function is not used.
5.5
DWELL BYTURNING
TIMES OF SPINDLE
Format
Explanations
Example
PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION B--61394E/08
76
6
REFERENCE POSITION
Thereferencepositionisafixedpositiononamachinetool towhichthe
tool caneasily bemovedbythereferencepositionreturnfunction.
For example, thereference positionisusedas apositionat whichtools
are automatically changed. Up to four reference positions can be
specified by setting coordinates in the machine coordinate systemin
parameters. However, thefirst reference positionmatches themachine
zeropoint.
Machine zero point (1st reference position)
3rd reference position
2nd reference position
4th reference
position
X
Z
Fig. 6(a) Machinezero point andreference positions
General
D Reference position
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 6. REFERENCE POSITION
77
Tools are automatically moved to the reference position via an
intermediatepositionalongaspecifiedaxis. Whenreferenceposition
returniscompleted, thelampfor indicatingthecompletionof returngoes
on.
X
Z
Intermediate position
Reference position
Fig. 6(b) Referencepositionreturn
Thereference positionreturncheck (G27) isthefunctionwhichchecks
whether the tool has correctly returned to the reference position as
specifiedintheprogram. If thetool hascorrectlyreturnedtothereference
positionalongaspecifiedaxis, thelampfor theaxisgoeson.
Format
G28 _ ; P I
G30P2 _ ; P I
Referenceposition return
3rdreferenceposition return
4threferenceposition return
2ndreferenceposition return
P I : Command specifying the intermediate position
(Absolute/incremental command)
G30P3 _ ;
P I
G30P4 _ ; P I
(P2can
beomitted.)
G27 _ ; P I
P I : Command specifying the reference position
(Absolute/incremental command)
Explanations
Positioningtotheintermediateorreferencepositionsareperformedatthe
rapidtraverserateof eachaxis.
Therefore, for safety, thetool noseradius compensation, andtool offset
shouldbecancelledbeforeexecutingthiscommand.
return
returncheck
return
returncheck
return(G28)
PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION B--61394E/08
78
In a systemwithout an absolute--position detector, thefirst, third, and
fourth reference position return functions can be used only after the
referencepositionreturn(G28) or manual referencepositionreturn(see
III--3.1) ismade. TheG30commandisgenerallyusedwhentheautomatic
tool changer (ATC) positiondiffers fromthereferenceposition.
G27commandpositionsthetool atrapidtraverserate. If thetool reaches
thereferenceposition, thereferencepositionreturnlamplightsup.
However, if thepositionreachedbythetool isnotthereferenceposition,
analarm(No. 092) isdisplayed.
Thelampfor indicatingthecompletionof returndoesnotgoonwhenthe
machinelockisturnedon, evenwhenthetool hasautomaticallyreturned
tothereferenceposition. Inthiscase, it isnot checkedwhether thetool
has returned to the reference position even when a G27 command is
specified.
WhentheG28commandisspecifiedwhenmanual returntothereference
positionhasnot beenperformedafter thepower hasbeenturnedon, the
movement fromtheintermediatepointisthesameasinmanual returnto
thereferenceposition.
Inthiscase, thetool movesinthedirectionfor referencepositionreturn
specified in parameter ZMIx (bit 0 to 3 of No. 003). Therefore the
specified intermediate position must be a position to which reference
positionreturnispossible.
Inanoffset mode, thepositionto bereached by thetool with theG27
commandisthepositionobtainedbyaddingtheoffset value. Therefore,
if thepositionwiththeoffsetvalueaddedisnotthereferenceposition,the
lampdoesnotlightup, butanalarmisdisplayedinstead. Usually, cancel
offsetsbeforeG27iscommanded.
Whenthemachinetool isaninchsystemwithmetricinput, the reference
positionreturnlampmay alsolight upevenif theprogrammedposition
isshiftedfromthereferencepositionbyinput unit. Thisisbecausethe
least input increment of themachineissmaller thanits least command
increment.
SeeIII--4.1.
D 2nd, 3rd, and4th
reference positionreturn
(G30)
returncheck (G27)
Restrictions
D Status themachinelock
beingturnedon
D First returnto the
reference positionafter
thepower has been
turnedon(without an
absoluteposition
detector)
returncheck inanoffset
mode
D Lightingthelampwhen
theprogrammedposition
does not coincidewith
thereference position
Reference
D Manual reference
position return
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM
79
7
COORDINATE SYSTEM
ByteachingtheCNCadesiredtool position, thetool canbemovedtothe
position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a
coordinatesystem. Coordinates arespecifiedusingprogramaxes.
When twoprogramaxes, theX--axisandZ--axis, areused, coordinates
arespecifiedasfollows:
X_Z_
Thiscommandisreferred toasadimensionword.
X
a
b
Z
Zero point
Fig. 7 Tool PositionSpecifiedbyXaZb
Coordinates arespecifiedinoneof followingthreecoordinatesystems:
(1)Machinecoordinatesystem
(2)Workpiececoordinatesystem
(3)Local coordinatesystem
Thenumber of theaxesof acoordinatesystemvariesfromonemachine
toanother. So, inthismanual, adimensionwordisrepresented asIP_.
PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM B--61394E/08
80
Thepoint that isspecific toamachineandservesasthereferenceof the
machineisreferredtoasthemachinezeropoint. A machinetool builder
sets a machine zero point for each machine. The machine zero point
matches thefirst referenceposition.
A coordinatesystemwithamachinezeropointsetasitsoriginisreferred
toasamachinecoordinatesystem.
A machine coordinate systemis set by performing manual reference
position return after power--on (see III--4.1). A machine coordinate
system, onceset, remains unchangeduntil thepower isturnedoff.
Format
G53IP _ ;
IP_; Absolutedimensionword
Explanations
Whenacommandisspecifiedbasedonamachinecoordinatesystem, the
tool moves by rapid traverse. G53, which is used to select amachine
coordinatesystem, is aone--shot G code; that is, it is validonly inthe
block inwhichit isspecified. Theabsolutecommand isvalid, but the
incremental command is ignored. When the tool is to be moved to a
machine--specific position such as atool changeposition, programthe
movement inamachinecoordinatesystembasedonG53.
Restrictions
When the G53 command is specified, cancel the tool nose radius
compensationandtool offset.
Since the machine coordinate system must be set before the G53
command is specified, at least onemanual reference position return or
automatic reference position return by the G28 command must be
performed after thepower isturned on. Thisis not necessary whenan
absolute--positiondetector isattached.
Theworkpiececoordinatesystemoption(G54toG59) isrequired.
7.1
MACHINE
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
D Selecting amachine
coordinatesystem(G53)
D Cancel of the
compensation function
D G53specification
immediately after
power--on
81
A coordinatesystemusedfor machiningaworkpieceisreferred toasa
workpiececoordinatesystem. A workpiececoordinatesystemistobeset
withtheNC beforehand(settingaworkpiececoordinatesystem).
A machining programsets aworkpiece coordinatesystem(selectinga
workpiececoordinatesystem).
A set workpiececoordinatesystemcanbechangedbyshiftingitsorigin
(changingaworkpiececoordinatesystem).
A workpiececoordinatesystemcanbeset usingoneof threemethods:
(1) MethodusingG50
A workpiececoordinatesystemissetbyspecifyingavalueafter G50
intheprogram.
(2) Automaticsetting
If bit 7 of parameter No. 010 is set beforehand, a workpiece
coordinate system is automatically set when manual reference
positionreturnisperformed(seePart III--3.1.).
(3) Input usingtheCRT/MDI panel
Six workpiececoordinatesystems can beset beforehand usingthe
CRT/MDI panel (seePart III--3.1.).
To enable theuse of absolute programming, a workpiececoordinate
system must be established using one of the methods described
above.
Format
D Setting aworkpiece
coordinate systemby G50
G50IP_ ;
Explanations
A workpiececoordinatesystemisset sothat apoint onthetool, suchas
thetool tip, isat specifiedcoordinates. If IP isanincremental command
value, the work coordinate systemis defined so that the current tool
position coincides with the result of adding the specified incremental
value to the coordinates of theprevious tool position. If acoordinate
systemisset usingG50duringoffset, acoordinatesysteminwhichthe
positionbeforeoffset matches thepositionspecifiedinG50isset.
7.2
WORKPIECE
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
7.2.1
SettingaWorkpiece
CoordinateSystem
82
Examples
Setting the coordinate systemby the
G50X128.7Z375.1; command (Diameter designation)
Setting the coordinate systemby the
G50X1200.0Z700.0; command (Diameter designation)
Base point
Example 1 Example 2
Z
X
375.1
f128.7
Z
X
700.0
f1200.0
Zero point
Start point
Start point
(standard point)
83
Theuser canchoosefromsetworkpiececoordinatesystemsasdescribed
below. (For information about the methods of setting, see Subsection
7.2.1.)
(1) SelectingaworkpiececoordinatesystemsetbyG50or automatic
workpiececoordinatesystemsetting
Onceaworkpiececoordinatesystemisselected, absolutecommands
work withtheworkpiececoordinatesystem.
(2) Choosingfromsixworkpiececoordinatesystemssetusingthe
CRT/MDI panel
By specifyingaGcodefromG54toG59, oneof theworkpiece
coordinatesystems1to6canbeselected.
G54 Workpiececoordinatesystem1 . . . . .
Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference
positionreturnafter thepower isturnedon. Whenthepoweristurnedon,
G54coordinatesystemisselected.
Examples
X
100.0
40.0
In this example, positioning is made to
positions (X=100.0, Z=40.0) in workpiece
coordinate system2.
G55G00X100.0Z40.0;
Workpiece coordinate system2(G55)
Z
Fig. 7.2.2
7.2.2
SelectingaWorkpiece
CoordinateSystem
84
ThesixworkpiececoordinatesystemsspecifiedwithG54toG59can
bechangedbychanginganexternal workpiecezeropointoffsetvalue
or workpiecezeropoint offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece zero
point offset valueor workpiecezeropoint offset value.
(1) InputtingfromtheCRT/MDI panel (seeIII--11.4.6)
(2) ProgrammingbyG10or G50
(3) Changinganexternal workpiecezero point offset value(refer to
machinetool buildersmanual)
ZOFS2
ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS5
ZOFS1
ZOFS6
EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value
ZOFS1to ZOFS6: Workpiece zero point offset value
EXOFS
Workpiece
coordinate
system1 (G54)
Workpiece
coordinate
system2 (G55)
Workpiece
coordinate
system3 (G56)
Workpiece
coordinate
system4 (G57)
Workpiece
coordinate
system5 (G58)
Workpiece
coordinate
system6 (G59)
Machine zero
Fig. 7.2.3 Changinganexternal workpiecezero point offset valueor workpiecezero point offset value
Format
D Changing by G10
G10L2PpIP _;
p=0 : External workpiecezero point offset value
p=1to 6: Workpiecezero point offset valuecorrespondto
workpiececoordinatesystem1to 6
IP: Workpiecezero point offset valueof eachaxis
D Changing by G50
G50IP _;
7.2.3
ChangingWorkpiece
CoordinateSystem
85
Explanations
With the G10 command, each workpiece coordinate system can be
changedseparately.
By specifyingG50IP_;, aworkpiececoordinatesystem(selectedwitha
code fromG54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate
systemsothatthecurrent tool positionmatchesthespecifiedcoordinates
(IP_).
If IP isanincremental commandvalue, theworkpiececoordinatesystem
is defined so that the currnt tool position coincides with the result of
addingthespecifiedincremental valuetothecoordinatesof theprevious
tool position.
Then, theamountof coordinatesystemshiftisaddedtoall theworkpiece
zero point offset values. This means that all theworkpiececoordinate
systemsareshiftedbythesameamount.
Examples
X X
A
160 100
100
100
200
If G50X100Z100; is commanded when the tool
is positioned at (X=160, Z=200) in G54mode,
workpiece coordinate system1(X -- Z) shifted
by vector A is created.
60
G54workpiece coordinate system
Tool position
Newworkpiece coordinate system
Original workpiece coordinate system
Z
Z
X -- Z Newworkpiece coordinate system
X -- Z Original workpiece coordinate system
A : Offset value created by G50
B,C : Workpiece zero point offset value in the original workpiece
coordinate system
<G54Workpiece coordinate system>
<G55Workpiece coordinate system>
Supposethat aG54workpiece coordinate
system is specified. Then, a G55 work-
piece coordinate systemwhere the black
circle on the tool (figure at the left) is at
(600.0,12000.0) canbesetwiththefollow-
ingcommandif therelative relationshipbe-
tween the G54workpiece coordinate sys-
temandG55workpiececoordinatesystem
is set correctly:G50X600.0Z1200.0;Also,
suppose that pallets are loadedat two dif-
ferent positions. If the relative relationship
of the coordinate systems of the pallets at
the two positions is correctly set by han-
dling the coordinate systems as the G54
workpiece coordinate system and G55
workpiece coordinate system, a coordi-
nate system shift with G50 in one pallet
causes the same coordinate systemshift
in the other pallet. This means that work-
pieces on two pallets can be machined
with the same programjust by specifying
G54or G55.
Z
Z
X
600.0
Z
Z
X
X
A
B
C
A
X
1200.0
1200.0
600.0
D Changingby G10
D Changingby G50
86
Explanations
When the coordinate systemactually set by the G50 command or the
automaticsystemsettingdeviatesfromtheprogrammedworksystem, the
set coordinatesystemcanbeshifted(seeIII--3.1).
Setthedesiredshiftamountintheworkcoordinatesystemshiftmemory.
Z
X
z
x
X--Z: Coordinate systemin programming
x--z : Current set coordinate systemwith shift amount 0
(coordinate systemto be modified by shifting)
O
O
Set the shift amount fromO to Oin the work coordinate systemshift memory.
Shift
Fig. 7.2.4 WorkpieceCoordinateSystemshift
SeeSection 11.1.1of Part III for howto specify thedistance thework
coordinatesystemisshifted.
7.2.4
WorkpieceCoordinate
SystemShift
87
When a programis created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child
workpiececoordinatesystemmay beset for easier programming. Such
achildcoordinatesystemisreferred toasalocal coordinatesystem.
Format
G52IP _; Setting thelocal coordinate system
G52IP 0; Canceling of thelocal coordinate system
IP_ : Originof thelocal coordinatesystem
Explanations
By specifying G52IP_;, alocal coordinate systemcan beset in all the
workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59). Theoriginof each local
coordinatesystemissetatthepositionspecifiedbyIP_ intheworkpiece
coordinatesystem.
Oncealocal coordinatesystemisestablished, thecoordinatesinthelocal
coordinate system are used in an axis shift command. The local
coordinatesystemcanbechangedbyspecifyingtheG52commandwith
the zero point of a new local coordinate system in the workpiece
coordinatesystem.
Tocancel thelocal coordinatesystemandspecifythecoordinatevaluein
the workpiece coordinate system, match the zero point of the local
coordinatesystemwiththat of theworkpiececoordinatesystem.
Workpiececoordinatesystem(G54toG59) isoptional function.
IP_
IP_
(G59 : Workpiece coordinate system6)
(G54 : Workpiece coordinate system1)
G55
G56
G57
G58
Reference point
Machine coordinate systemorigin
(Machine coordinate system)
(Local coordinate system)
(Local coordinate system)
Fig. 7.3 Settingthelocal coordinatesystem
7.3
LOCAL COORDINATE
SYSTEM
88
WARNING
1 Thelocal coordinate systemsettingdoes notchangethe
workpiece and machine coordinate systems.
2 When G50 is used to define a work coordinate system,
if coordinates are not specified for all axes of a local
coordinate system, the local coordinate systemremains
unchanged. If coordinates are specifiedfor anyaxis of a
local coordinate system, the local coordinate systemis
canceled.
3 G52 cancels the offset temporarily in tool nose radius
compensation.
4 Command a move command immediately after the G52
block in the absolute mode.
89
Select the planes for circular interpolation and tool nose radius
compensationbyG--code.
ThefollowingtablelistsG--codesandtheplanesselectedbythem.
Explanations
Table7.4 PlaneselectedbyGcode
Gcode
Selected
plane
Xp Yp Zp
G17 Xp Yp plane
X--axis or an Y--axis or an Z--axis or an
G18 Zp Xp plane
X--axis or an
axis parallel
to it
Y--axis or an
axis parallel
to it
Z--axis or an
axis parallel
to it
G19 Yp Zp plane
to it to it to it
Xp, Yp, Zparedetermined by theaxis address appeared intheblock in
whichG17, G18or G19iscommanded.
WhenanaxisaddressisomittedinG17, G18or G19block, itisassumed
that theaddresses of basic threeaxesareomitted.
Parameters No. 279and280specifies whether 3rdaxis or 4thaxis isa
basicaxis(X--axis, Y--axis, or Z--axis) or anaxisparallel toabasicaxis.
Theplaneis unchanged intheblock inwhichG17, G18or G19is not
commanded.
Whenthepower isturnedon, G18(ZX plane) isselected.
Themovement instructionisirrelevant totheplaneselection.
NOTE
Directdrawingdimensionprogramming, chamfering, corner
R, multiple repetitive canned cycle, and simple canned
cycle are enabled only for the ZX plane.
Specifying these functions for other planes causes PS
alarmNo. 212 to be generated.
Examples
PlaneselectionwhentheX--axisisparallel withtheU--axis.
G17X_Y_; XY plane,
G17A_Y_; AY plane
G18X_Z_; ZX plane
X_Y_; Planeisunchanged(ZX plane)
G17 ; XY plane . .
G18 ; ZX plane . .
G17 A_ ; AY plane
G18Y_ ; ZX plane, Y axismovesregardless without any
relationtotheplane.
7.4
PLANE
SELECTION
PROGRAMMING
8. COORDINATE VALUE
AND DIMENSION B--61394E/08
90
8
COORDINATE VALUE ANDDIMENSION
Thischapter containsthefollowingtopics.
8.1 ABSOLUTE ANDINCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91)
8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION(G20, G21)
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
8.4 DIAMETER ANDRADIUSPROGRAMMING
8. COORDINATE VALUE
AND DIMENSION
91
There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute
command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command,
coordinatevalueof theendpositionisprogrammed; intheincremental
command, movedistanceof thepositionitself isprogrammed. G90and
G91 are used to command absolute or incremental command,
respectively.
Absoluteprogrammingor incremental programmingisuseddepending
onthecommandused. Seefollowingtables.
Gcodesystem A Bor C
Command method Address word G90, G91
Absolutecommand Incremental command
X axis move command
Zaxis move command
C axis move command
Y axis move command
X
Y
C
Z
U
W
H
V
Absolute command
Incremental command
G90 _ ;
G91 _ ;
D GcodesystemB or C
IP
IP
GcodesystemA GcodesystemBor C
Absolute command X400.0 Z50.0 ; G90X400.0 Z50.0 ;
Incremental command U200.0 W--400.0 ; G91X200.0 Z--400.0 ;
f 400
f200
50
450
P
(200, 450)
Q
(400, 50)
Z
X
NOTE
1 Absolute and incremental commands can be used
together in a block.
In the above example, the following command can be
specified :
X400.0 W--400.0 ;
2 When both X and U or W and Z are used together in a
block, the one specified later is effective.
8.1
ABSOLUTE AND
INCREMENTAL
PROGRAMMING
(G90, G91)
Format
D GcodesystemA
Examples
D Tool movement frompoint
P topoint Q(diameter
programming is used for
theX---axis)
PROGRAMMING
8. COORDINATE VALUE
92
Either inchor metric input canbeselected byGcode.
Format
G20;
G21;
Inch input
mminput
This G code must be specified in an independent block before
settingthecoordinate systemat the beginningof theprogram.
After theGcodefor inch/metricconversionisspecified, theunitof input
dataisswitchedtotheleast inchor metric input increment of increment
systemIS--B or IS--C (Section 2.3). Theunit of datainput for degrees
remains unchanged. The unit systems for the following values are
changedafter inch/metric conversion:
-- FeedratecommandedbyF code
-- Positional command
-- Workpiecezeropointoffsetvalue
-- Tool compensationvalue
-- Unitof scalefor manual pulsegenerator
-- Movement distanceinincremental feed
-- Someparameters
When thepower isturnedon, theGcodeisthesameasthat held
before thepower was turned off.
WARNING
1 G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program.
2 When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21)
and vice versa, the tool compensation value must be
re--set according to the least input increment.
CAUTION
Reference position return is performed at a lowspeed for
thefirstG28commandafter theinchinput is switchedtothe
metric input or vice versa.
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command
increment systems are different, the maximum error is
half of the least command increment. This error is not
accumulated.
2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using
setting parameter (inch).
8.2
INCH/METRIC
CONVERSION
(G20,G21)
8. COORDINATE VALUE
AND DIMENSION
93
Numerical valuescanbeenteredwithadecimal point. A decimal point
canbeusedwhenenteringadistance, time, or speed. Decimal pointscan
bespecifiedwiththefollowingaddresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J , K, R, andF.
Explanations
Therearetwotypesof decimal point notation: calculator--typenotation
andstandardnotation.
Whencalculator--typedecimal notationisused, avaluewithoutdecimal
point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inches or sections.
Whenstandarddecimal notationisused, suchavalueisconsideredtobe
specified in least input increments. Select either calculator--type or
standarddecimal notationbyusingthe(bit7of parameter 015).Valuescan
bespecifiedbothwithandwithout decimal point inasingleprogram.
Examples
Programcommand
Pocketcalculator
typedecimal point
programming
Standardtypedecimal
point programming
X1000
Command value with-
out decimal point
1000mm
Unit : mm
1mm
Unit : Least input increment
(0.001 mm)
X1000.0
Command value with
decimal point
1000mm
Unit : mm
1000mm
Unit : mm
WARNING
Ina single block, specifya G code before entering a value.
Thepositionof decimal pointmaydependonthecommand.
Examples:
G20; Input in inches
X1.0G04; X1.0 is considered to be a distance and
processed as X10000. This command is
equivalent to G04 X10000. The tool dwells
for 10 seconds.
G04X1.0; Equivalent toG04X1000. Thetool dwellsfor
one second.
8.3
DECIMAL POINT
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING
8. COORDINATE VALUE
94
NOTE
1 Fractions less than the least input increment are
truncated.
Examples:
X1.2345; Truncated toX1.234whenthe least input
increment is 0.001 mm.
Processed as X1.2345 when the least
input increment is 0.0001 inch.
2 When more than eight digits are specified, an alarm
occurs. If a value is entered with a decimal point, the
number of digits is also checked after the value is
converted to an integer according to the least input
increment.
Examples:
X1.23456789; Alarm003 occurs because more than
eight digits are specified.
X123456.7; If the least input increment is 0.001 mm,
the value is converted to integer
123456700. Because the integer has
more than eight digits, an alarmoccurs.
8. COORDINATE VALUE
AND DIMENSION
95
Since the work cross section is usually circular in CNC lathe control
programming, dimensionsof X axiscanbespecifiedintwoways:
Diameter andRadius
When thediameter is specified, it is called diameter programming and
whentheradiusisspecified, it iscalledradiusprogramming.
Z axis
A
B
D
1
X axis
D
2
R
1
R
2
D
1
, D
2
: Diameter programming
R
1
, R
2
: Radius programming
Radius programming or diameter programming can be specified by
parameter (No.019#2). When using diameter programming, note the
conditionslistedinthetable8.4(a).
Table8.4(a) Notes onspecifyingdiameter value
Item Notes
X axis command Specified with a diameter value
Incremental command Specified with a diameter value
In the above figure, specifies D2minus
D1for tool path B to A.
Coordinate systemsetting (G50) Specifies a coordinate value with a diam-
eter value
Component of tool offset value Parameter (No.001#4) determines either
diameter or radius value
Parameters in canned cycle,
such as cutting depth along X
axis. (R)
Specifies a radius value
Radius designation in circular in-
terpolation (R, I, K, and etc.)
Specifies a radius value
Feedrate along axis Specifies change of radius/rev. or
change of radius/min.
Display of axis position Displayed as diameter value
8.4
DIAMETER AND
RADIUS
PROGRAMMING
Explanations
D Notes ondiameter
programming/radius
programmingfor each
command
PROGRAMMING 9. SPINDLE FUNCTION B--61394E/08
96
9
SPINDLE SPEEDFUNCTION
The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following
address S.
Inaddition, thespindlecanberotatedbyaspecifiedangle.
Thischapter containsthefollowingtopics.
9.1 SPECIFYINGTHE SPINDLE SPEEDWITHABINARY
CODE
9.2 SPECIFYINGTHE SPINDLE SPEEDVALUE DIRECTLY
(S5--DIGIT COMMAND)
9.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEEDCONTROL (G96, G97)
9.4 SPINDLE SPEEDFLUCTUATIONDETECTION
FUNCTION(G25, G26)
9.5 SPINDLE POSITIONING
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 9. SPINDLE FUNCTION
97
This spindlespeed can bespecified by address S followed by 2--digit
code. A block can contain only oneS code. Refer to theappropriate
manual provided by the machine tool builder for details such as the
executionorder whenamovecommandandanS codecommandarein
thesameblock.
Thespindlespeedcanbespecified directly by address S followed by a
five--digitvalue(rpm). Theunitforspecifyingthespindlespeedmayvary
dependingonthemachinetool builder. Refer totheappropriatemanual
providedbythemachinetool builder for details.
Specifythesurfacespeed(relativespeedbetweenthetool andworkpiece)
followingS. Thespindleisrotatedsothat thesurfacespeedisconstant
regardless of thepositionof thetool.
Format
G96 Sf f f f f ;
-Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)
Note : This surface speed unit may change according to
machine tool builders specification.
G97 Sf f f f f ;
-Spindle speed (rpm)
Note : This surface speed unit may change according to
machine tool builders specification.
G50 S_ ; The maximumspindle speed (rpm) follows S.
9.1
SPECIFYING THE
SPINDLE SPEED
WITHABINARY
CODE
9.2
SPECIFYING THE
SPINDLE SPEED
VALUE DIRECTLY
(S5--DIGIT
COMMAND)
9.3
CONSTANT
SURFACE SPEED
CONTROL (G96, G97)
D Constant surface speed
control command
control cancel command
D Clampof maximum
spindlespeed
98
Explanations
G96(constant surfacespeedcontrol command) isamodal Gcode. After
a G96 command is specified, the programenters the constant surface
speedcontrol mode(G96mode) andspecifiedSvaluesareassumedasa
surfacespeed. A G97commandcancels theG96mode.When constant
surface speed control is applied, aspindlespeed higher than thevalue
specified in G50S_; (maximum spindle speed) is clamped at the
maximumspindlespeed. When thepower is turnedon, themaximum
spindlespeedisnotyetsetandthespeedisnotclamped.S(surfacespeed)
commandsintheG96modeareassumedasS=0(thesurfacespeedis0)
until M03(rotatingthespindleinthepositivedirection) or M04(rotating
thespindleinthenegativedirection) appears intheprogram.
The spindle speed (rpm) almost coin-
cides withthesurfacespeed(m/min) at
approx. 160mm(radius).
Fig. 9.3(a) Relationbetweenworkpieceradius, spindlespeed
andsurfacespeed
To executetheconstant surface speed control, it is necessary to set the
workcoordinatesystem, Zaxis, (axistowhichtheconstantsurfacespeed
control applies) becomes zero.
X
Z
0
Fig. 9.3(b) Exampleof theWorkpieceCoordinateSystemfor
Constant SurfaceSpeedControl
control command(G96)
D Setting theworkpiece
coordinatesystemfor
constant surface speed
control
99
G96mode G97mode
Specify the surface speed in m/min
(or feet/min)
G97 command
Store the surface speed in m/min
(or feet/min)
Command for
the spindle speed
Specified
The specified
spindle speed
(rpm) is used
Not specified
Thesurfacespeed(m/minorfeet/
min) is converted to the spindle
speed (rpm)
Commands other than G96
G96 command
The specified
surfacespeed
is used
Command
for the surface
speed
The storedsurface speed(m/min or feet/
min) is used. If no surface speed is
stored, 0 is assumed.
Specified
Not specified
Restrictions
The constant surface speed control is also effective during threading.
Accordingly, it isrecommended that theconstant surface speedcontrol
beinvalidatedwithG97commandbeforestartingthescroll threadingand
taper threading, becausetheresponseproblemintheservo systemmay
not beconsideredwhenthespindlespeedchanges.
D Surface speedspecified
intheG96mode
control for threading
100
In a rapid traverse block specified by G00, theconstant surface speed
control isnotmadebycalculatingthesurfacespeedtoatransient change
of thetool position, butismadebycalculatingthesurfacespeedbasedon
thepositionat theendpoint of therapidtraverseblock, onthecondition
that cuttingisnot executedat rapidtraverse.
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
1050
1475
200
375
500
600
300
400
700
675
Programmed path
Tool path after offset
X
Z
1
2
3
4
N16
N16
N15
N15
N14
N14
N11
N11
Redius value
100
6
0
0
f
4
0
0
f
Example
N8 G00X1000.0Z1400.0;
N9 T33;
N11X400.0Z1050.0;
N12G50S3000; (Designation of max. spindle speed)
N13G96S200;(Surface speed 200m/min)
N14G01Z 700.0F1.0;
N15X600.0Z 400.0;
N16Z ... ;
The CNC calculates the spindle speed which is proportional to the
specified surface speed at the position of the programmed coordinate
valueontheX axis. Thisisnot thevaluecalculatedaccordingtotheX
axiscoordinateafter offset whenoffset isvalid. Attheendpoint N15in
theexampleabove, thespeedat 600dia. (Whichisnot theturret center
but thetool nose) is200m/min. If X axis coordinatevalueisnegative,
theCNC usestheabsolutevalue.
control for rapidtraverse
(G00)
101
Withthisfunction, anoverheatalarm(No. 704) israisedwhenthespindle
speeddeviates fromthespecifiedspeedduetomachineconditions.
This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the
guidebushing.
Format
G26enables spindlespeedfluctuationdetection.
G25disablesspindlespeedfluctuationdetection.
G26PpQqRr ;
G25;
Spindlefluctuation detectionon
Spindlefluctuation detectionoff
p : Time(inms) fromtheissueof anewspindlerotation command (S
command) tothestart of checkingwhether theactual spindlespeedis
sofast that anoverheat canoccur.
Whenaspecifiedspeedisreachedwithinthetimeperiodof P, spindle
speedischeckedat that time.
q: Tolerance(%) of aspecifiedspindlespeed
q
1actual spindlespeed
specifiedspindlespeed
100
If a specified spindle speed lies within this range, it is regarded as
havingreachedthespecifiedvalue. Then, anactual spindlespeedis
checked.
r : Spindlespeedfluctuation(%) at whichtheactual spindlespeedisso
fast that anoverheat canoccur
r
1speedthat cancauseoverheat
specifiedspindlespeed
100
G26enablesthespindlespeedfluctuationdetectionfunction, andG25
disablesthespindlespeedfluctuationdetection.
Evenif G25isspecified, p, q, andr arenot cleared.
9.4
SPINDLE SPEED
FLUCTUATION
DETECTION
FUNCTION(G25, G26)
102
Explanations
Thefluctuationof thespindlespeedisdetectedasfollows:
1. Whenanalarmis issuedafter aspecifiedspindlespeedis reached
Spindle speed
Check Check No check
r
r
q
q d
d
Specification of
another speed
Start of check Alarm
Time
Specified
speed
Actual speed
2. Whenanalarmis issuedbeforeaspecifiedspindlespeedis reached
r
r
d
d
Check
p
No check Check
q
q
Spindle speed
Specification of
another speed
Start of check Alarm
Time
Specified
speed
Actual speed
Specifiedspeed:
(Speedspecifiedbyaddress S andfive--digit value) (spindleoverride)
Actual speed: Speeddetectedwithapositioncoder
p: Timeelapses sincethespecifiedspeedchanges until acheck starts.
q: (Percentagetolerancefor acheck tostart) (specifiedspeed)
r : (Percentagefluctuationdetectedasanalarmcondition) (specified
speed)
d: Fluctuationdetectedasanalarm(specifiedinparameter 4913)
Analarmisissuedwhenthedifferencebetweenthespecifiedspeedand
theactual speedexceeds bothr andd.
103
NOTE
1 Whenanalarmis issuedinautomatic operation, asingle
block stop occurs. The spindle overheat alarm is
indicated on the CRT screen, and the alarm signal
SPALis output (set to 1 for the presence of an alarm).
This signal is cleared by resetting.
2 Even when reset operation is performed after an alarm
occurs, thealarmis issuedagainunless thecause of the
alarmis corrected.
3 Nocheckis made during spindle stopstate(*SSTP =0).
4 By setting the parameter (No. 564), an allowable range
of speed fluctuations can be set which suppresses the
occurrence of analarm. However, analarmisissuedone
second later if the actual speed is found to be 0 rpm.
5 Thespecifiedvalues of p, q, andr are setinthefollowing
parameters. If p, q, or r is omitted from a subsequent
command, the value stored in the corresponding
parameter is used.
p : Parameter No. 712
q : Parameter No. 531
r : Parameter No. 532
6 Theunits for specifyingqor r canbechangedto0.1%by
setting bit 0 of parameter No. 397 accordingly.
104
Inturning, thespindleconnectedtothespindlemotorisrotatedatacertain
speed to rotate the workpiece mounted on the spindle. The spindle
positioningfunctionturnsthespindleconnectedtothespindlemotor by
a certain angle to position the workpiece mounted on the spindle at a
certainangle. Thespindleispositionedabout theC--axis.
Thespindlepositioningfunctioninvolvesthefollowingthreeoperations:
1. Cancelingthespindlerotationmodeandenteringthespindle
positioningmode(spindleorientation)
2. Positioningthespindleinthespindlepositioningmode
3. Cancelingthespindlepositioningmode, andenteringthespindle
rotationmode
Whenspindlepositioningisfirstperformedafterthespindlemotorisused
for normal spindleoperation, or whenspindlepositioningisinterrupted,
thespindleorientationisrequired.
Orientationpermitsthespindletostopat apredetermined position.
Orientation is directed by the M code set in parameter No. 587. The
direction of orientation can be set with a parameter. For the analog
spindle, thedirectionisset inbit 2of parameter 003).
For theserial spindle, it isset inbit 4of parameter 6500.
Thespindlecanbepositionedwithanarbitraryangleorsemi--fixedangle.
AddressMisfollowedbya2--digit numeric. Thespecifiablevaluemay
beoneof thesix values fromMa to M(a+5). Valuea must beset in
parameter No. 589beforehand. Thepositioninganglescorrespondingto
MatoM(a+5) arelistedbelow. Valueb mustbesetinparameter No.590
beforehand.
M--code Positioning angle (Ex.)b=30
Ma b 30
M(a+1) 2b 60
M(a+2) 3b 90
M(a+3) 4b 120
M(a+4) 5b 150
M(a+5) 6b 180
Specify thecommandwithincremental values. Thedirectionof rotation
canbespecifiedinbit 1of parameter 031.
9.5
SPINDLE
POSITIONING
FUNCTION
9.5.1
SpindleOrientation
9.5.2
SpindlePositioning
Positioningwitha
semi--fixed anglespecified
by anMcode
105
Specify thepositionusingaddressC or Hfollowedbyasignednumeric
valueornumericvalues. AddressesCandHmustbespecifiedintheG00
mode.
(Example) C--1000
H450
The end point must be specified with a distance from the program
referenceposition(inabsolutemode) usingaddressC. Alternatively, the
endpointmustalsobespecifiedwithadistancefromthestartpointtothe
endpoint (inincremental mode) usingaddress H.
A numeric withthedecimal point canbeentered.
Thevaluemust bespecifiedindegrees.
(Example) C35.0=C35degrees
Thepositiontowhichthespindleisorientedisassumedastheprogram
reference position. Theprogramreference positioncan bechanged by
settingof acoordinatesystem(G50) or automatic settingof acoordinate
system(#bit 7of parameter 010).
Programreference
position
A
B
180
90
GcodeA GcodeBandC
Commandformat
Ad-
dress
used
Command
A--B inthe
above figure
Address
used and
Gcode
Command
A--B inthe
above figure
Absolute
command
Specify the end
point with a dis-
tance fromthe
programrefer-
ence position.
C C180.0 ; G90C G90C180.0;
Incremen-
tal com-
mand
Specify a dis-
tance fromthe
start point to the
end point.
H H90.0 ; G91C G90C90.0 ;
Thefeedrateduringpositioningequalstherapidtraversespeedspecified
inparameter No. 520. Linear acceleration/deceleration isperformed.
For the specified speed, an override of 100%,50%,25%,and F0
(parameter No. 585) canbeapplied.
Thetool movesat therapidtraversespeedset inparameter No.520until
a sufficient speed for orientation is attained. After the speed for
orientationhasbeenattained, orientationisperformedat thespeedset in
parameter No.586.
Positioningwitha
givenanglespecified by
address C or H
Programreference position
Feedrate for positioning
Feedrate during
positioning
Speedduringorientation
106
When modes are to be switched from spindle positioning to normal
spindlerotation, theM codeset inparameter No. 588isspecified.
WARNING
1 Feed hold, dry run, machine lock, and auxiliary function
lock cannot be performed during spindle positioning.
2 Parameter No. 589 must always be set even when
positioning with a semi--fixed angle specified in an
M--code is not performed. If the parameter is not set,
M--codes fromthe M00 to M05 do not function properly.
NOTE
1 Specify spindle positioning alone in a block. A move
command for the X or Z axis cannot be specified within
thesame block.
2 When emergency stop is applied during spindle
positioning, spindle positioning stops. To resume it,
restart with the orientation step.
3 The serial spindle Cs--axis contour control function and
thespindlepositioningfunctioncannotbeusedatatime.
If both options are speified, the spindle positioning
function has priority.
4 The spindle positioning axis is indicated in pulses in the
machine coordinate system.
9.5.3
CancelingSpindle
Positioning
10. TOOL FUNCTION
(T FUNCTION)
107
TOOL FUNCTION(TFUNCTION)
10
Twotool functionsareavailable. Oneisthetool selectionfunction, and
theother isthetool lifemanagement function.
General
PROGRAMMING
10. TOOL FUNCTION
(T FUNCTION) B--61394E/08
108
By specifying a2--digit/4--digit numerical valuefollowingaddress T, a
codesignal andastrobesignal aretransmittedtothemachinetool. This
ismainly usedtosetect toolsonthemachine.
OneT codecan becommanded in ablock. Refer to themachinetool
buildersmanual for thenumber of digitscommandablewithaddress T
andthecorrespondencebetweentheT codesandmachineoperations.
WhenamovecommandandaT codearespecifiedinthesameblock, the
commandsareexecutedinoneof thefollowingtwoways:
1. Simultaneous executionof themovecommandandT function
commands.
2. ExecutingT functioncommandsuponcompletionof move
commandexecution.
Theselectionof either sequencedepends onthemachinetool builders
specifications. Refer tothemachinetool buildersmanual for details.
Thevalueafter theT codeindicates thedesiredtool. Part of thevalues
isalsousedastheoffset number indicatingthecompensationamountfor
tool offset.
Theabovecanbeusedineither of twoways: bit 0of parameter No. 014
isusedtoselect themethodtobeused.
T f f
Tool offset number
Tool selection
1.Last one digit of T--code designates the offset
number.
(parameter 014#0=1)
2.Last two digits of T--code designate the offset
number.
(parameter 014#0=0)
T f f
Tool offset number
Tool selection
f f
Explanations
Refer tothemachinetool buildersmanual for correspondencebetween
theT--codeandthetool andthenumber of digittospecifytool selection.
Example(T2+2)
N1G00X100.0Z140.0;
N2T0313; .....(Select Tool No. 3andOffset valueNo.13)
N3X40.0Z105.0;
Somemachines usea1--digit valuetospecify tool selection.
10.1
TOOL SELECTION
10. TOOL FUNCTION
(T FUNCTION)
109
By counting the number of M codes (M30 and M02) at the end of a
program, thenumber of partsproducedcanbecounted. Whenthetotal
number of partsreaches aspecifiedvalue(tool life), thetool isassumed
tohavereachedtheendof itsservicelife. Thelifecount isincremented,
and the parts counter is cleared. According to the life count and
parameter--specified compensationvalue, compensationisappliedtothe
programmedT code.
Datadisplay andsetting related to tool lifemanagement
Whenthesimplifiedtool lifemanagement functionisenabled, theoffset
screendisplaysthefollowingtool lifemanagement datapage:
TOOL LI FE DATA O0000 N0000
NO. DATA
3910 TOOL LI FE 300
3911 PARTS COUNT ( LI FE) 283
3912 LI EF COUNT 5
3913 PARTS COUNT ( TOTAL) 1783
ACTUAL POSI TI ON ( RELATI VE)
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
NO. 3910 = S 0 T
MDI
[ TOOLLF] [ ] [ ] [ TOOLFM] [ ]
1 Pressthe
MENU
OFSET
functionkey. Selectthetool lifemanagementdatapage
bypressingthecontinuationmenukey thenthe[TOOL LF] soft
key.
2 Usingthecursor keys and , positionthecursor tothedata
itemtobeset.
Typeinadesiredvalueusingthedatainput keys.
Press the INPUT key. Thevalueisset anddisplayed.
10.2
SIMPLIFIEDTOOL
LIFE MANAGEMENT
PROGRAMMING
10. TOOL FUNCTION
110
No. 3910: Tool lifepartscount
Whentheparts counter (No. 3911) reaches thevalueset withthisitem,
thetool isassumedtohavereachedtheendof itsservicelife.
No. 3911: Partscounter
Thiscounterisincrementedby1eachtimeM02orM30isexecuted. Each
timethetool lifeperiodexpires, thiscounter isclearedto0.
No. 3912: Lifecount
Thiscounter isusedtoindicatehowmany timesthetool lifeperiodhas
expired. Thiscounter isincrementedby1eachtimethetool lifeperiod
expires.
No. 3913: Total partscount
This count is thesameas theparts count displayed on thePOSITION
screen. Usually, thefollowingformulaissatisfied:
(Total partscount) =(tool lifepartscount) x(lifecount) +(partscounter)
A programmed T code, TddVV, consists of atool selection numberdd
andtool offset number VV. Compensationisappliedtoeachnumber for
executionasTDDHH.
Parameter No. 117andNo. 118areusedtospecify compensationvalues
for atool selectionnumber andtool offset number.
(1) Prior to theexpiryof thefirst tool lifeperiod(whenlinecount=0)
Tool offset number HH=VV
Tool selection number DD=dd
(2) After thefirst tool lifeperiod has expired (when lifecount =1)
Tool offset number HH=VV +(offset number compensation value)
Tool selection number DD=dd +(tool selection number compensation value)
(3) Afterthesecondtool lifeperiodhas expired(whenlifecount=2)
Tool offset number HH=VV +(offset number compensation value) x 2
Tool selectionnumberDD=dd +(tool selectionnumber compensationvalue) x 2
(4) After then--thtool lifeperiodhas expired(whenlifecount =n)
Tool offset number HH=VV +(offset number compensation value) x n
Tool selectionnumber DD=dd+(tool selectionnumber compensationvalue) x n
NOTE
1 When the programmed tool offset number and
programmed tool selection number are both 0,
compensation is not applied.
2 When a tool offset number after compensation (HH) or a
tool selection number after compensation (DD) exceeds
its maximumallowable value(setinparameter No.119or
No.120, respectively), the value of HH or DDis replaced
with the remainder resulting from subtracting the
maximumallowable value fromtheHHor DDvalue.
3 When, after compensation, a tool offset number (HH)
exceeds the number of offset pairs, P/S alarmNo. 030
is issued. Accordingly, a value not greater than the
number of offset pairs must be set as the maximumtool
offset number.
4 ATcode(TDDHH), after compensation, isdisplayedinthe
T code all--time display field.
D Explanation of eachdata
item
10.2.1
CompensationApplied
toAProgrammedT
code
10. TOOL FUNCTION
(T FUNCTION)
111
Parameters: Offset number compensationvalue(No. 117) =8
Tool selectionnumber compensationvalue(no. 118) =10
Maximumallowableoffset number (No. 119) =16
Maximumallowabletool selectionnumber (No. 120) =99
Program After first tool After secondtool
lifeperiod lifeperiod
T0101 T1109 T2101
: : :
: : :
T0203 T1211 T2203
: : :
: : :
T0305 T1313 T2305
: : :
: : :
T0100 T1100 T2100
: : :
: : :
T0001 T0009 T0001
Examples
PROGRAMMING
10. TOOL FUNCTION
112
Toolsareclassified intosomegroups. For eachgroup, atool life(time
or frequency of use) isspecified. Eachtimeatool isused, thetimefor
which the tool is used is accumulated. When the tool life has been
reached, thenext tool previously determined inthesamegroupisused.
Thisfunctioniscalledthetool lifemanagement function.
With0--TTC, tool lifemanagement isperformedfor eachtool post
separately. Sotool lifemanagement dataisalsoset for eachtool post.
Format
Toolsusedsequentially ineachgroupandtheir tool lifeareregisteredin
theCNC asfollowingprogramformat of table10.3.1.
Table10.3.1 Programformat of lifemanagement
O_ _ _ _ ; Programnumber
G10L3; Start of setting tool life data
P_ _ _ L_ _ _ _ ; P___ :Group number (1 to 128)
L___ :Tool life (1 to 9999)
T_ _ _ _ ; (1) T :____ Tool number
T_ _ _ _ ; (2)
Tools are selected from
(n) (1)to (2) to ... to (n).
P_ _ _ L_ _ _ _ ;
T_ _ _ _ ; Data for the next group
T_ _ _ _ ;
G11; End of setting tool life data
M02(M30); End of program
Tapeformat Meaning
Forthemethodof registeringtool lifedatainCNC,refer toOPERATION
11.4.10.
10.3
TOOL LIFE
MANAGEMENT
10.3.1
Programof Tool Life
Data
10. TOOL FUNCTION
(T FUNCTION)
113
Explanations
A tool life is specified either as the time of use (in minutes) or the
frequency of use, whichdependsontheparameter settingparameter No.
039#2.
Upto4300minutesintimeor 9999timesinfrequency canbespecified
for atool life.
Thenumber of groupstoberegisteredandthenumber of toolsregistered
per groupcanbecombinedinthreeways. Oneof thethreecombinations
isset byaparameter No.039#0,#1.
No.039#1 No.039#0 Number of groups Number of tools
(1) 0 0 16 16
(2) 0 1 32 8
(3) 1 0 64 4
Inany combination, upto256toolsintotal canberegistered.
If therearenotmorethan16groupsandeachgroupcontainnotmorethan
16tools, for example, select combination(2) (1). Select combinationif
therearenot morethan32groupsandeachgroupcontainnot morethan
eight tools. Tochangethecombination, changel theparameter, thenset
programisexecutedwiththeoldtool groupcombinationset intheNC.
Whenever theparameter ischanged, besuretoreexecutethegroupsetting
program.
Thesametool number mayappear anywhereanytimesintheprogramof
tool lifedata.
Example
O0001;
G10L3;
P001L0150;
T0011;
T0132;
T0068;
P002L1400;
T0061;
T0241;
T0134;
T0074;
P003L0700;
T0012;
T0202;
G11;
M02;
Data of group 1
Data of group 2
Data of group 3
PROGRAMMING
10. TOOL FUNCTION
114
Explanations
ThegroupnumbersspecifiedinP neednot beserial. They neednot be
assignedtoall groups, either. Whenusingtwoor moreoffset numbers
for thesametool inthesameprocess, set asfollows;
P004L0500;
T0101;
T0105;
T0108;
T0206;
T0203;
T0202;
T0209;
T0304;
T0309;
P005L1200;
T0405;
The tools in group 4are used from(1)
to (2) to (3).
Each tool is used 500times (or for
500minutes).
When this group is specified three
times in one process, the offset num-
bers are selected in the following or-
ders:
Tools (1): 010508
Tools (2): 06030209
Tools (3): 0409
Tapeformat Meaning
(3)
(1)
(2)
Explanation
Inthiscase, theperiodduringwhichthetool isactually usedincutting
mode, between thespecification of Tnn99(nn=tool groupnumber)
andthatof thenext tool groupor anordinarytool number inamachining
program, is counted in blocks of 4 seconds. The time taken for
single--blockstoppage, feedhold, rapidtraverse, dwelling, andFINwait
isignored.
Upto4300minutescanbespecifiedfor alife.
Countingisperformedfor eachprocessthat isinitiatedbythecyclestart
of amachiningprogramandendedwhentheNC isreset bytheM02or
M03 command. The counters for tool groups used in a lprocess are
incrementedbyone. Evenwhenthesamegroupisspecified morethan
onceinoneprocess, thecounter isincrementedonlybyone. Upto9999
canbeset for atool life.
Counting of a tool life is performed for each group. The life counter
contents arenot erasedevenwhenthepower of CNC iscut off.
Whenalifeisspecified as thefrequency of use, apply anexternal reset
(ERS) signal totheCNC whenM02or M30isexecuted.
10.3.2
CountingaTool Life
D Whenatool lifeis
specified as thetime
ofuse(inminutes)
D Whenatool lifeis
specified as
thefrequency of use
10. TOOL FUNCTION
(T FUNCTION)
115
In machining programs, T codes are used to specify tool groups as
follows:
Tapeformat Meaning
Tnn99; Ends the tool used by now, and starts to use the tool of
thenngroup. 99distinguishes this specification
fromordinary specification.
Tnn88; Cancels the offset of the tool of the group. 88distin
guishes this specification fromordinary specification.
M02(M300); Ends the machining program.
Explanations
Tapeformat Meaning
T0199; Ends the previous tool, and starts to use the tool of
the 01group.
T0188; Cancels the offset of the tool of the 01group.
T0508; Ends the tool of the 01group. Selects tool number
05and offset number 08.
T0500; Cancels the offset of tool number 05.
T0299; Ends tool number 05, and starts to use the tool of
the 02group.
T0199; Ends the tool of the 02group, and starts to use the
tool of the 01group. If more than one offset number
is specified for the tool, the second offset number is
selected. Otherwise, the previous offset number is
used.
10.3.3
SpecifyingaTool
GroupinaMachining
Program
PROGRAMMING 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B--61394E/08
116
11
AUXILIARYFUNCTION
Therearetwo types of auxiliary functions ; miscellaneous function(M
code) for specifyingspindlestart, spindlestopprogramend, andsoon,
andsecondary auxiliary function(B code) .
Whenamovecommandandmiscellaneous functionarespecifiedinthe
sameblock, thecommandsareexecutedinoneof thefollowingtwo
ways:
i) Simultaneous executionof themovecommandandmiscellaneous
functioncommands.
ii) Executingmiscellaneous functioncommandsuponcompletionof
movecommandexecution.
Theselectionof eithersequencedependsonthemachinetool builders
specification. Refer tothemanual issuedbythemachinetool builder
for details.
General
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION
117
WhenaddressMfollowedby3digitvalueisspecified, acodesignal and
strobesignal aretransmitted. Thesesignalsareusedforturningon/off the
power tothemachine.
Ingeneral, only oneM codeisvalidinablock but uptothreeM codes
canbespecifiedinablock(althoughsomemachinesmaynotallowthat).
ThecorrespondencebetweenMcodesandfunctionsisuptothemachine
tool builder.
All M codesareprocessedinthemachineexcept for M98, M99,M198,
M codesfor callingasubprogram(parameters Nos. 240to242), andM
codesfor callingacustommacro(parameters Nos. 230to239). Refer to
theappropriatemanual issuedbythemachinetool builder.
ThefollowingM codeshavespecial meanings.
Thisindicates theendof themainprogram
Automatic operation is stoppedandtheCNC unit is reset. This differs
with the machine tool builder. After a block specifying theend of the
program isexecuted,control returnstothestart of theprogram. Bit 5of
parameter 019(M02) canbeusedtodisableM02fromreturningcontrol
tothestart of theprogram.
Automatic operationisstoppedafter ablockcontainingM00isexecuted.
When the programis stopped, all existing modal information remains
unchanged. Theautomatic operation can berestarted by actuating the
cycleoperation. Thisdiffers withthemachinetool builder.
SimilarlytoM00, automaticoperationisstoppedafter ablockcontaining
M01is executed. This codeis only effective when the Optional Stop
switchonthemachineoperatorspanel hasbeenpressed.
Thiscodeisusedtocall asubprogram. Thecodeandstrobesignalsare
not sent. Seethesubprogramsection12.3for details.
Thiscodeindicates theendof asubprogram.
M99executionreturnscontrol tothemainprogram. Seethesubprogram
section12.3for details.
NOTE
The block following M00, M01, M02 and M30, is not read
into the input buffer register, if present. Similarly, ten M
codes which do not buffer can be set by parameters (Nos.
111and112). Refer tothemachinetool buildersinstruction
manual for these M codes.
11.1
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION
(MFUNCTION)
Explanations
D M02,M03
(Endof program)
D M00
(Programstop)
D M01
(Optional stop)
D M98
(Callingof sub--
program)
D M99
(Endof subprogram)
118
Sofar, oneblockhasbeenabletocontainonlyoneMcode. However,this
functionallowsuptothreeM codestobecontainedinoneblock.
UptothreeMcodesspecifiedinablockaresimultaneouslyoutputtothe
machine. Thismeansthat comparedwiththeconventional methodof a
singleMcommandinasingleblock, ashorter cycletimecanberealized
inmachining. Beforethisfunctioncanbeused, bit7of parameter No.065
must beset.
CNCallowsuptothreeMcodestobespecifiedinoneblock. However,
someM codes cannot bespecified at thesametimedueto mechanical
operation restrictions. For detailed information about the mechanical
operationrestrictionsonsimultaneousspecificationof multipleMcodes
inoneblock, refer tothemanual of eachmachinetool builder.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified
together withanother M code.
SomeM codesother thanM00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and
M198cannot bespecifiedtogether withother M codes; eachof thoseM
codesmust bespecifiedinasingleblock.
Such M codes includethesewhich direct theCNC to performinternal
operationsinadditiontosendingtheMcodesthemselvestothemachine.
Tobespecified, suchM codesareMcodesfor callingprogramnumbers
9001to9009andM codes for disablingadvancereading(buffering) of
subsequent blocks. Meanwhile, multipleof Mcodesthat direct theCNC
only to send the M codes themselves (without performing internal
operations ) canbespecifiedinasingleblock.
Examples
OneMcommand
inasingle block
MultipleMcommands
inasingleblock
M40;
M50;
M60;
G28G91U0W0 ;
:
:
:
M40M50M60;
G28G91U0W0 ;
:
:
:
:
:
11.2
MULTIPLE M
COMMANDS INA
SINGLE BLOCK
Explanations
119
Indexingof thetableisperformedbyaddressB andafollowing8--digit
number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding
indexingdiffers betweenmachinetool builders.
Refer tothemanual issuedbythemachinetool builder for details.
0to99999999
1. Thedecimal point canbeusedfor input.
Command Output value
B10. 10000
B10 10
2. It ispossibletochangeover thescalefactor of B output, 1000or 1
whenthedecimal point input isomitted, usingtheparameter
(No.015#7).
WhenDPI is1: B1 1000
WhenDPI is0: B1 1
3. It ispossibletochangeover thescalefactor of B output 1000or
10000whenthedecimal point input isomittedintheinchinput
system, usingtheparameter (No.032#5) When015#7=1.
When032#5is1: B1 10000
When032#5is0: B1 1000
Whenthisfunctionsisused, theBaddressspecifyinganaxismovement
disabled.
11.3
THE SECOND
AUXILIARY
FUNCTIONS
(B CODES)
Explanations
D Commandrange
D Commandmethod
Restrictions
120
Thisfunctionoutputsthesignal DEN2whenthetool approaches tothe
end point of arapid traverse (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) block
where a miscellaneous function (M--code) and atolerable distance are
commanded. Asthemiscellaneousfunctioncanbetriggerednear theend
point byusingtheDEN2, it shortenstheexecutiontime.
Motion Command , Q M ;
MotionCommand: Ordinary MotionCommand
,Q : TolerableDistance
M : Ordinary miscellaneous function
G00
G01
Themiscellaneousfunction(M--code) andthetolerabledistance,Qare
commanded on the rapid traverse (G00) or linear interpolation (G01)
block. Thecommand unit of ,Q is theinput increment. Thedecimal
point is permitted in ,Q. When the distance to go of the longest
motionaxisdecreasestothetolerabledistancedefinedby,Q, thesignal
DEN2whichmeansthenearnessof theendpointisoutput. Thetolerable
distanceof thelongest motionisdefinedbythefollowingformula.
Tolerabledistanceof longest motion=
Commandof ,Q
distanceof longest motion
Block distance
G01U60.0W50.0,Q10.0M123;
X
30
Z
DEN2is output
50
8.58
Tolerable distance
=10 =8.58
50
58.3
11.4
OUTPUTTING
SIGNAL NEAREND
POINT
Format
Explanations
ProgramExample
121
NOTE
1 Thespecial M--codes whicharemanagedinternallysuch
as M98 and M99, are not used for M--codes of this
function.
2 This function is not used during the multiple turning
cycles.
3 This function can not be commanded by MDI operation
A.
4 TheDEN2keeps ontill thecompletionsignal (FIN) fothe
miscellaneous function turns on. When the FIN inputs
before reaching the end, the distribution end signal
(DEN) is not output at the end.
5 When the function is used onthe rapid traverse block of
the simultaneous axes motion, there may be the error
between the tolerance distance and the actual point
where the DEN2 is output.
PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION B--61394E/08
122
12
PROGRAMCONFIGURATION
Therearetwoprogramtypes, mainprogramandsubprogram. Normally,
the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a
command calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program,
control is passed to the subprogram. When a command specifying a
return to themain programis encountered in asubprogram, control is
returnedtothemainprogram.
Followthe direction of the
subprogram
Main program Subprogram
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction n
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction n+1
Return to the main program
Fig. 12(a) MainprogramandSubprogram
TheCNC memory canholdupto400mainprograms andsubprograms
(63asstandard). A mainprogramcanbeselectedfromthestoredmain
programs tooperatethemachine.
Mainprogramand
subprogram
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
123
A programconsistsof thefollowingcomponents:
Table12(a) Programcomponents
Components Descriptions
Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a programfile
Leader section Used for the title of a programfile, etc.
Programstart Symbol indicating the start of a program
Programsection Commands for machining
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Tape end Symbol indicating the end of a programfile
Tape start % TITLE;
O0001;
M30;
%
(COMMENT);
Programsection
Leader section
Programstart
Comment section
Tape end
Fig. 12(b) Programconfiguration
A programsectionconsists of several blocks. A programsectionstarts
withaprogramnumber andendswithaprogramendcode.
Programsection Programsection
configuration
Programnumber O0001 ;
Block 1 N1 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0 ;
Block 2 N2 G43 Z--32.0 H01 ;
: :
Block n Nn M2 ;
Programend M30 ;
A block contains informationnecessary for machining, suchas amove
command or coolant on/off command.Specifying a value following a
slash(/) at thestart of ablockdisablestheexecutionof someblocks(see
optional block skip inSection12.2).
Programcomponents
Programsection
configuration
124
Thissectiondescribesprogramcomponentsotherthanprogramsections.
SeeSection12.2for aprogramsection.
% TITLE ;
O0001;
M30;
%
(COMMENT);
Tape start
Programsection
Leader section
Programstart
Comment section
Tape end
Fig. 12.1 Programconfiguration
Explanations
Thetapestart indicates thestart of afilethat containsNC programs.
ThemarkisnotdisplayedontheCRTdisplayscreen. However, if thefile
isoutput,themark isautomatically output at thestart of thefile.
Table12.1(a) Codeof atapestart
Name
ISO
code
EIA
code
Notationinthis manual
Tape start % ER %
Dataenteredbeforetheprograms inafileconstitutesaleader section.
Whenmachiningisstarted, thelabel skipstateisusually set byturning
on the power or resetting the system. In the label skip state, all
informationisignoreduntil thefirst end--of--block codeisread. Whena
file is read into the CNC unit froman I/O device, leader sections are
skippedbythelabel skipfunction.
A leader section generally contains information such as a file header.
Whenaleader sectionisskipped, evenaTV paritycheckisnotmade. So
aleader sectioncancontainany codesexcept theEOB code.
Theprogramstartcodeistobeenteredimmediatelyafter aleadersection,
thatis,immediatelybeforeaprogramsection. Thiscodeindicatesthestart
of aprogram, andisalwaysrequiredtodisablethelabel skipfunction.
Table12.1(b) Codeof aprogramstart
Name
ISO
code
EIA
code
Notationinthis manual
Programstart LF CR ;
12.1
PROGRAM
COMPONENTS
OTHER THAN
PROGRAM
SECTIONS
D Tapestart
D Leader section
D Programstart
125
NOTE
If one file contains multiple programs, the EOB code for
label skip operation must not appear before a second or
subsequent program number. However, an programstart
isrequiredatthestartof aprogramiftheprecedingprogram
ends with %.
Any information enclosed by the control--out and control--in codes is
regardedasacomment. Theusercanenter aheader, comments, directions
totheoperator, etc. inacommentsection. Thereisnolimitonthelength
of acomment section.
Table12.1(c) Codes of acontrol--in andacontrol--out
Name
ISO
code
EIA
code
Notationinthis
manual
Meaning
Control--out ( 2--4--5 ( Start of comment section
Control--in ) 2--4--7 ) End of comment section
When a command tape is read into memory for memory operation,
comment sections, if any, arenotignoredbutarealsoreadintomemory.
Note, however, that codes other than those listed in the code table in
Appendix 6areignored, andthusarenot readintomemory. Whendata
in memory is punched out on paper tapewith thepunch function, the
comment sectionsarealsopunchedout.
Whenaprogramisdisplayedonthescreen, itscommentsectionsarealso
displayed. However, those codes that were ignored when read into
memory arenot punchedout or displayed.
During memory operation in memory command mode, all comment
sectionsareignored.
The TV check function can be used for a comment section by setting
parameter (bit 6of No. 018).
CAUTION
If a long comment section appears in the middle of a
programsection, a move along an axis may be suspended
for a long time because of such a comment section. So a
comment section should be placed where movement
suspension may occur or no movement is involved.
NOTE
If only a control--in code is read with no matching
control--out code, the read control--in code is ignored.
D Comment section
126
A tapeendistobeplacedat theendof afilecontainingNC programs.
Themark isnot displayedontheCRT display screen. However, whena
fileisoutput, themark isautomatically output at theendof thefile.
Table12.1(d) Codeof atapeend
Name
ISO
code
EIA
code
Notationinthis
manual
Tape end % ER %
D Tapeend
127
Thissectiondescribes elements of aprogramsection. SeeSection12.1
for programcomponentsother thanprogramsections.
%
(COMMENT);
% TITLE ;
O0001;
N1 ;
M30;
Programsection
Programnumber
Sequence number
Programend
Fig. 12.2(a) Programconfiguration
A programnumber consisting of address O followed by a four--digit
number is assigned to each program at the beginning registered in
memory toidentify theprogram.
InISOcode, thecolon( : ) canbeusedinsteadof O.
When no program number is specified at the start of a program, the
sequence number (N....) at the start of the programis regarded as its
programnumber. Note, however, that N0cannot beusedfor aprogram
number.
If there is no program number or sequence number at the start of a
program, aprogramnumber mustbespecifiedusingtheCRT/MDI panel
whentheprogramisstoredinmemory(SeeSection9.3inPart III.).
NOTE
Programnumbers 8000 to 9999 may be used by machine
tool builders, and the user may not be able to use these
numbers.
12.2
PROGRAMSECTION
CONFIGURATION
D Programnumber
128
A programconsistsof several commands. Onecommandunitiscalleda
block. Oneblockisseparatedfromanother withanEOB of endof block
code.
Table12.2(a) EOBcode
Name
ISO
code
EIA
code
Notationinthis
manual
End of block (EOB) LF CR ;
At the head of a block, a sequence number consisting of address N
followedbyanumbernotlongerthanfivedigits(1to9999)canbeplaced.
Sequencenumberscanbespecifiedinarandomorder, andanynumbers
canbeskipped. Sequencenumbersmaybespecifiedforall blocksoronly
for desiredblocksof theprogram. Ingeneral, however, it isconvenient
to assign sequence numbers in ascending order in phase with the
machining steps (for example, when a new tool is used by tool
replacement, and machining proceeds to a new surface with table
indexing.)
N300X200.0 Z300.0 ; A sequence number is underlined.
Fig. 12.2(b) Sequencenumber andblock(example)
NOTE
N0must not be usedfor thereason of file compatibility with
other CNC systems.
Programnumber 0cannot beused. So0must not beused
for a sequence number regarded as a programnumber.
A parity check is made for a block on input tape horizontally. If the
number of characters inoneblock (starting withthecodeimmediately
after anEOB andendingwiththenext EOB) isodd, analarm(No.002)
isoutput. NoTV check ismadeonlyfor thosepartsthat areskippedby
thelabel skipfunction. Acommentsectionenclosedinparenthesesisalso
subject to TV check tocount thenumber of characters. TheTV check
function can be enabled or disabled by setting on the MDI unit (See
Subsec. 11.5.1inPart III.).
D Sequence number and
block
D TVcheck (Vertical parity
check alongtape)
129
A block consists of oneor morewords. A wordconsists of anaddress
followedbyanumber somedigitslong. (Theplussign(+) or minussign
(--) may beprefixedtoanumber.)
Word=Address+number (Example: X--1000)
For anaddress, oneof theletters(A toZ) isused; anaddressdefinesthe
meaningof anumber that followstheaddress. Table12.2(b) indicates
theusableaddresses andtheir meanings.
The same address may have different meanings, depending on the
preparatory functionspecification.
Table12.2(b) Major functions andaddresses
Function Address Meaning
Programnumber O
(
*
)
Programnumber
Sequence number N Sequence number
Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc,
etc.)
Dimension word X, Y, Z, U,
V, W, A, B,
C
Coordinate axis move command
I, J , K Coordinate of the arc center
R Arc radius
Feed function F Rate of feed per minute,
Rate of feed per revolution
Spindle speed function S Spindle speed
Tool function T Tool number
Auxiliary function M On/off control on the machine tool
B Table indexing, etc.
Dwell P, X, U Dwell time
Programnumber
designation
P Subprogramnumber
Number of
repetitions
P Number of subprogramrepetitions
Parameter P, Q Canned cycle parameter
NOTE
(*) InISOcode, thecolon ( : ) canalsobe usedas theaddress
of a programnumber.
N_ G_ X_ Z_ F_ S_ T_ M_ ;
Sequence
number
Preparatory
function
Dimension
word
Feed--
function
Spindle
speed
function
Tool
function
Miscellaneous
function
Fig. 12.2(c) 1block(example)
D Blockconfiguration
(wordandaddress)
130
Major addresses andtheranges of valuesspecifiedfor theaddressesare
shownbelow. Notethat thesefigures represent limitsontheCNC side,
which are totally different fromlimits on the machine tool side. For
example, the CNC allows a tool to traverse up to about 100 m(in
millimeter input) alongtheX axis.
However, anactual strokealongtheX axis may belimitedto2mfor a
specific machinetool.
Similarly, theCNCmaybeabletocontrol acuttingfeedrateof upto100
m/min, but themachinetool may not allowmorethan3m/min. When
developingaprogram, theuser shouldcarefully readthemanualsof the
machinetool aswell asthismanual tobefamiliar withtherestrictionson
programming.
Table12.2(c) Major addresses andranges of commandvalues
Function Address Input inmm Input ininch
Programnumber O
(
*
)
1to 9999 1to 9999
Sequence number N 1to 9999 1to 9999
Preparatory function G 0to 99 0to 99
Dimen-
sion
word
Increment
systemIS--B
X, Y, Z,
U, V, W,
A, B, C,
--99999.999 to
+99999.999
--9999.9999 to
+9999.9999
word
Increment
systemIS--C
A, B, C,
I, J , K, R,
--9999.9999 to
+9999.9999
--999.99999 to
+999.99999
Feed
per
minute
Increment
systemIS--B
F 1to 100000mm/
min
0.01 to 4000.00
inch/min
minute
Increment
systemIS--C
1to 12000mm/min 0.01 to 480.00
inch/min
Feed per revolution F 0.0001 to
500.0000
mm/rev
0.000001to
9.999999
inch/rev
Spindle speed function S 0to 20000 0to 20000
Tool function T 0to 9999 0to 9999
Auxiliary function M 0to 999 0to 999
B 0to 99999999 0to 99999999
Dwell Increment
systemIS--B
P, X, U 0to 99999.999s 0to 99999.999s
Increment
systemIS--C
0to 9999.9999s 0to 9999.9999s
Designation of a pro-
gramnumber
P 1to 9999 1to 9999
Number of repetitions P 1to 9999 1to 9999
NOTE
(*) InISOcode, thecolon ( : ) canalsobe usedas theaddress
of a programnumber.
D Major addresses and
ranges of command
values
131
Whenaslashfollowedbyanumber(/n(n=1to9)) isspecifiedatthehead
of ablock, andoptional blockskipswitchnonthemachineoperatorpanel
is set to on, the information contained in the block for which /n
correspondingtoswitchnumbernisspecifiedisignoredintapeoperation
or memory operation.
Whenoptional blockskipswitchnissettooff, theinformationcontained
intheblockforwhich/nisspecifiedisvalid. Thismeansthattheoperator
candeterminewhether toskiptheblock containing/n.
Number 1for /1canbeomitted. However, whentwoor moreoptional
block skip switches are usedfor oneblock, number 1for /1cannot be
omitted.
Example)
(Incorrect) (Correct)
//3 G00X10.0; /1/3 G00X10.0;
Thisfunctionisignoredwhenprogramsareloadedintomemory. Blocks
containing/narealsostoredinmemory, regardless of howtheoptional
block skipswitchisset.
Programs heldinmemory canbeoutput, regardless of howtheoptional
block skipswitchesareset.
Optional block skip is effective even during sequence number search
operation.
Dependingonthemachinetool, all optional blockskipswitches(1to9)
may not beusable. Refer tomanualsof themachinetool builder tofind
whichswitchesareusable.
WARNING
1 Position of a slash
A slash (/) must be specified at the head of a block. If a
slashis placedelsewhere, theinformationfromtheslash
to immediately before the EOB code is ignored.
2 Disabling an optional block skip switch
Optional block skip operation is processed when blocks
are read from memory or tape into a buffer. Even if a
switch is set to on after blocks are read into a buffer, the
blocks already read are not ignored.
NOTE
TV and TH check
Whenanoptional blockskipswitchison. THandTVchecks
are made for theskippedportions inthesamewayas when
the optional block skip switch is off.
D Optional blockskip
132
Theendof aprogramisindicatedbypunchingoneof thefollowingcodes
at theendof theprogram:
Table12.2(d) Codeof aprogramend
Code Meaningusage
M02
For main program
M30
For main program
M99 For subprogram
If oneof theprogramendcodes is executed inprogramexecution, the
CNC terminates theexecutionof theprogram, andthereset stateisset.
When the subprogram end code is executed, control returns to the
programthat calledthesubprogram.
WARNING
Ablockcontaininganoptional blockskipcodesuchas /M02
; , /M30; , or /M99; is notregarded as theendof aprogram,
if the optional block skip switch on the machine operators
panel is set to on.
(See previous itemfor optional block skip.)
D Programend
133
I f a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated
pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a
subprogramin memory to simplify theprogram.
A subprogramcan becalled fromthemain program.
A called subprogramcan also call another subprogram.
Format
O j j j j ;
M99;
Subprogramnumber
(or the colon (:) optionally in the case of ISO)
Programend
One subprogram
M99need not constitute a separate block as indicated below.
Example) X100.0Z100.0M99;
M98 P f f f f f f f f ;
-
Subprogramnumber
-
Number of times the
subprogramis called
repeatedly
When no repetition data is specified, the subprogramis called just once.
Explanations
Whenthemainprogramcallsasubprogram, itisregardedasaone--level
subprogramcall. Thus, subprogramcallscanbenesteduptotwolevels
asshownbelow.
O0001 ;
M98P1000 ;
M30 ;
Main program
O1000 ;
M98P2000 ;
M99 ;
O2000 ;
M98P3000 ;
M99 ;
Subprogram
(One--level nesting) (Two--level nesting)
Subprogram
A singlecall commandcanrepeatedlycall asubprogramupto999times.
For compatibility with automatic programming systems, in the first
block, Nxxxxcanbeusedinsteadof asubprogramnumber that follows
O(or:). AsequencenumberafterNisregisteredasasubprogramnumber.
SeeChapter 10inPart III for themethodof registeringasubprogram.
12.3
SUBPROGRAM
D Subprogram
configuration
D Subprogramcall
Reference
134
NOTE
1 The M98and M99signals are not output to themachine
tool.
2 Ifthesubprogramnumber specifiedbyaddress P cannot
be found, an alarm(No. 078) is output.
Examples
l M98P51002;
l X1000.0M98P1200;
l Execution sequence of subprograms calledfromamainpro-
gram
A subprogramcancall another subprograminthe same way
as a main programcalls a subprogram.
This command specifies Call the subprogram (number
1002) five times in succession. A subprogram call com-
mand (M98P_) can be specified in the same block as a
move command.
This examplecalls thesubprogram(number 1200) after anX
movement.
1 2 3
Main program
N0010;
N0020;
N0030M98P21010;
N0040;
N0050M98P1010;
N0060;
Subprogram
O1010;
N1020;
N1030;
N1040;
N1050;
N1060M99;
135
Special Usage
If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is
terminated, control doesnotreturntotheblockafter thecallingblock, but
returns to the block with the sequence number specified by P. Note,
however,thatPisignoredif themainprogramisoperatinginamodeother
thanmemory operationmode.
Thismethodconsumesamuchlongertimethanthenormal returnmethod
toreturntothemainprogram.
Subprogram
O1010 ;
N1020 ;
N1030 ;
N1040 ;
N1050 ;
N1060M99P0060;
Main program
N0010 ;
N0020 ;
N0030M98P1010;
N0040 ;
N0050 ;
N0060 ;
If M99isexecutedinamainprogram, control returns tothestart of the
mainprogram. For example, M99canbeexecutedbyplacing/M99; at
anappropriatelocationof themainprogramandsettingtheoptional block
skip function to off when executing themain program. When M99is
executed, control returnstothestart of themainprogram, thenexecution
isrepeatedstartingat theheadof themainprogram.
Executionisrepeatedwhiletheoptional blockskipfunctionisset tooff.
If theoptional blockskipfunctionissettoon, the/M99; blockisskipped
; control ispassedtothenext block for continuedexecution.
If/M99Pn ; is specified, control returns not to the start of the main
program, but tosequencenumber n.
N0010 ;
N0020 ;
N0030 ;
N0040 ;
N0050 ;
N0060M99P0030;
N0070 ;
N0080M02;
/
Optional block skip
ON
Optional block skip
OFF
D Specifying thesequence
number for thereturn
destination inthemain
program
D UsingM99inthemain
program
136
A subprogramcanbeexecutedjustlikeamainprogrambysearchingfor
thestart of thesubprogramwiththeMDI.
(SeeSection9.3inPart III for informationabout searchoperation.)
Inthiscase, if ablockcontainingM99isexecuted, control returnstothe
start of the subprogramfor repeated execution. If a block containing
M99Pnisexecuted, control returnstotheblockwithsequencenumber n
inthesubprogramfor repeatedexecution. Toterminatethisprogram, a
block containing /M02 ; or /M30 ; must be placed at an appropriate
location, andtheoptional blockswitchmust beset tooff ; thisswitchis
tobeset toonfirst.
N1010 ;
N1020 ;
N1030 ;
N1040M02;
N1050M99P1020;
/
Optional block skip
ON
D Usingasubprogramonly
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING
137
13
FUNCTIONS TOSIMPLIFYPROGRAMMING
Thischapter explainsthefollowingitems:
13.1 CANNEDCYCLE
13.2 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLE
13.3 CANNEDCYCLE FOR DRILLING
13.4 CANNEDGRINDING CYCLE
13.5 CHAMFERING ANDCORNER R
13.6 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET
13.7 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING
NOTE
Explanatory diagrams in this chapter uses diameter
programming in X axis.
In radius programming, changes U/2 with U and X/2 with X.
General
PROGRAMMING
138
There are three canned cycles : the outer diameter/internal diameter
cuttingcannedcycle(G90), thethreadcuttingcannedcycle(G92), andthe
endfaceturningcannedcycle(G94).
G90X(U)__Z(W)__F__ ;
X/2
Xaxis
Zaxis
2(F)
RRapid traverse
FCutting traverse
Specified by F code
3(F)
1(R)
4(R)
Z W
U/2
Fig. 13.1.1(a) StraightCuttingCycle
Inincremental programming, thesignof thenumbers followingaddress
UandWdependsonthedirectionof paths1and2. Inthecycleof 13.1.1
(a), thesignsof U andWarenegative.
Insingleblock mode, operations1, 2, 3and4areperformedbypressing
thecyclestart buttononce.
13.1
CANNEDCYCLE
(G90, G92, G94)
13.1.1
Outer Diameter/Internal
Diameter CuttingCycle
(G90)
D Straightcuttingcycle
PROGRAMMING
139
G90X(U)__ Z(W)__ R__ F__ ;
Xaxis
R
2(F)
RRapid traverse
FCutting traverse
specified by F code
3(F)
X/2
4(R)
Z
U/2
1(R)
W
Zaxis
Fig. 13.1.1(b) Taper CuttingCycle
In incremental programming, the relationship between thesigns of the
numbersfollowingaddressU, W, andR, andthetool pathsareasfollows:
1. U <0, W<0, R <0
X
2. U >0, W<0, R >0
Z
U/2
3(F)
4(R)
1(R)
2(F)
W
X
Z
U/2
3(F)
4(R)
2(F)
W
1(R)
3. U <0, W<0, R >0
at |R| | |
X
Z
4. U >0, W<0, R<0
at |R| | |
X
Z
W
W
2(F)
2(F)
U/2 U/2
3(F)
3(F)
4(R)
4(R)
1(R)
1(R)
U
2
U
2
R
R
R
R
D Taper cuttingcycle
D Signs of numbers
specifiedinthetaper
cuttingcycle
PROGRAMMING
140
G92X(U)__ Z(W)__ F__ ; Lead(L) is specified.
X/2
X axis
Zaxis
RRapid traverse
FThread cutting
specified by
F code
Z
L
1(R)
2(F)
3(R)
4(R)
Approx. 45,
(The chamfered angle in the left figure
is 45 degrees or less because of the
delay in the servo system.
r
W
Detailed chamfered thread
Fig. 13.1.2(a) StraightThreadCutting
Inincremental programming, thesignof numbersfollowingaddressesU
andWdependsonthedirectionof paths1and2. Thatis, if thedirection
of path1isthenegativealongtheX axis, thevalueof U isnegative.
Therangeof threadleads, limitationof spindlespeed, etc. arethesame
asinG32(threadcutting). Thread chamferingcan beperformed inthis
thread cutting cycle. A signal fromthe machine tool, initiates thread
chamfering. Thechamfering distanceis specifiedin arangefrom0.1L
to 12.7L in 0.1L increments by parameter (No. 5130). (In the above
expression, L isthethreadlead.)
In the single block mode, operations 1, 2, 3, and 4 are performed by
pressingcyclestart buttononce.
13.1.2
ThreadCuttingCycle
(G92)
PROGRAMMING
141
WARNING
Notes on this thread cutting are the same as in thread
cutting in G32. However, a stop by feed hold is as follows
; Stop after completion of path 3 of thread cutting cycle.
CAUTION
The tool retreats while chamfering and returns to the start
point on the X axis then the Z axis, as soon as the feedhold
status is entered during thread cutting (motion 2) when the
Thread Cutting Cycle retractoption is used.
Another feed hold cannot be made during retreat. The
chamfered amount is the same as that at the end point.
Motionat feed
hold
Stop
point
Ordinary
cycle
Rapidtraverse
Feedholdis effectedhere.
PROGRAMMING
142
X axis
(R)Rapid traverse
(F)Thread cutting
(Lead (L)
specified by
F code)
2(F)
4(R)
X/2
1(R)
Zaxis
3(R)
r
L
Z
G92X(U)__ Z(W)__ R__ F__ ;
W
U/2
R
Approx. 45,
(The chamfered angle in the left figure
is 45 degrees or less because of the
delay in the servo system.)
Detailed chamfered thread
Fig. 13.1.2(b) Taper threadcuttingcycle
D Taper threadcutting
cycle
PROGRAMMING
143
G94X(U)__ Z(W)__ F__ ;
X axis
0
4(R)
X/2
3(F)
Zaxis
1(R)
2(F)
U/2
Z
W
(R)Rapid traverse
(F)Cutting traverse
specified by F code
X/2
U/2
Z
Fig. 13.1.3(a) FaceCuttingCycle
Inincremental programming, thesignof numbersfollowingaddressesU
andWdependsonthedirectionof paths1and2. That is, if thedirection
of thepath is in thenegativedirection of theZ axis, the valueof W is
negative.
Insingleblockmode, operations1, 2, 3, and4areperformedbypressing
thecyclestart buttononce.
13.1.3
EndFaceTurning
Cycle(G94)
D Facecuttingcycle
PROGRAMMING
144
X axis
(R) Rapidtraverse
(F) Cuttingtraverse
specifiedby F code
4(R)
X/2
3(F)
Zaxis
1(R)
2(F)
U/2
Z
W
R
Fig. 13.1.3(b)
In incremental programming, the relationship between thesigns of the
numbersfollowingaddressU, W, andR, andthetool pathsareasfollows:
1. U <0, W<0, R <0 2. U >0, W<0, R <0
3. U <0, W<0, R >0
at | R | | W|
4. U >0, W<0, R<0
at | R | | W|
X
Z
U/2
3(F)
4(R)
1(R)
2(F)
W
R
X
Z
W
U/2
4(R)
2(F)
1(R)
3(F)
R
X
Z
W
U/2
1(R)
4(R)
2(F)
3(F)
R
X
Z
U/2
3(F)
4(R)
1(R)
2(F)
W
R
D Taper facecuttingcycle
D Signs of numbers
specifiedinthetaper
cuttingcycle
PROGRAMMING
145
NOTE
1 Since data values of X (U), Z(W) andR duringcannedcycle
are modal, if X (U), Z(W), or R is not newly commanded, the
previously specifieddata is effective. Thus, whenthe Zaxis
movement amount does not vary as in the example below, a
cannedcyclecanberepeatedonlybyspecifyingthemovement
commands for the X--axis.
However, thesedataarecleared, if aone--shot Gcodeexpect
forG04(dwell) oraGcodeinthegroup01exceptforG90,G92,
G94is commanded.
The cycle in the above figure is executed by the following
program.
N030 G90U--8.0W--66.0F0.4;
N031 U--16.0;
N032 U--24.0;
N033 U--32.0;
2 The followingthree applications canbe performed.
(1) If anEOBor zeromovement commands are specifiedfor
theblock followingthat specifiedwithacannedcycle, the
same cannedcycle is repeated.
(2) By specifying a canned cycle in the MDI mode, and
pushingthe cycle start buttonafter the block terminates,
the same canned cycle as the previous one will be
performed.
(3) If the M, S, T functionis commandedduring the canned
cyclemode, boththecannedcycleandM, S, or Tfunction
canbeperformedsimultaneously. If this is inconvenient,
cancel thecannedcycleonceas intheprogramexamples
below(specify G00 or G01) and execute the M, S, or T
command. After the executionof M, S, or T terminates,
commandthe cannedcycle again.
(Example)
N003T0101;
:
:
N010 G90X20.0Z10.0F0.2;
N011 G00T0202;
N012 G90X20.5Z10.0;
Zaxis
0
66
X axis
Workpiece
(Example)
4
8
1
2
1
6
PROGRAMMING
146
An appropriate canned cycle is selected according to the shape of the
material andtheshapeof theproduct.
Shape of material
Shape of product
Shape of material
Shape of product
13.1.4
HowtoUseCanned
Cycles (G90, G92, G94)
D Straightcuttingcycle
(G90)
D Taper cuttingcycle(G90)
PROGRAMMING
147
Shape of material
Shape of product
Shape of material
Shape of product
D Facecuttingcycle(G94)
D Facetaper cuttingcycle
(G94)
PROGRAMMING
148
ThisoptioncannedcyclestomakeCNCprogrammingeasy. Forinstance,
the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough
machining. Andalso, acannedcyclesfor thethreadcuttingisavailable.
Therearetwotypesof stock removalsinturning: TypeI andII.
If afinishedshapeof A toA toB isgivenby aprogramasinthefigure
below, thespecifiedareaisremovedby Dd(depthof cut), withfinishing
allowanceDu/2andDwleft.
B
(F)
(R)
e
A
C
Dd
A
45_
(R)
(F)
Du/2
Dw
N (ns)
F____
S____
T____
N (nf);
Dd : Depth of cut (radius designation)
Designate without sign. The cutting direction depends on the direction
AA. This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 717),
and the parameter is changed by the programcommand.
e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value
is designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter (No. 718),
ns : Sequence number of the first block for the programof finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the programof finishing shape.
Du : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter / radius
designation).
Dw : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
f,s,t : AnyF , S, or T functioncontainedinblocks ns tonf inthe cycleis ignored, and
the F, S, or T function in this G71 block is effective.
G71U(Dd) R(e) ;
G71P(ns) Q(nf) U(Du) W(Dw) F(f ) S(s ) T(t)
Programcommand
(F) : Cutting feed
(R) : Rapid traverse
The move commandbetweenA andB is
specifiedinthe blocks fromsequence
number ns to nf.
Fig. 13.2.1(a) CuttingPathinStockRemoval inTurning(TypeI)
13.2
MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CYCLE
(G70TOG76)
13.2.1
StockRemoval in
Turning(G71)
D TypeI
PROGRAMMING
149
NOTE
1 While both Dd and Du, are specified by address U, the meanings of themare determined
by the presence of addresses P and Q.
2 The cycle machining is performed by G71 command with P and Q specification. F, S, and
T functions whichare specifiedin themove commandbetween points A andB areineffective
and those specified in G71 block or the previous block are effective.
When an option of constant surface speed control is selected, G96 or G97 command
specified in the move command between points A and B are ineffective, and that specified
in G71 block or the previous block is effective.
The following four cutting patterns are considered. All of these cutting cycles are made
paralleled to Zaxis and the sign of Du and Dware as follows:
The tool path between A andA is specified inthe blockwith sequencenumber nsincluding
G00 or G01, and in this block, a move command in the Zaxis cannot be specified. The tool
path between A and B must be steadily increasing or decreasing pattern in both X and Z
axis. When the tool path between A and A is programmed by G00/G01, cutting along AA
is performed in G00/G01 mode respectively.
3 The subprogramcannot be called fromthe block between sequence number nsand nf.
4 Nose radius compensation is disabled during cycle operation. When the imaginary tool
nose number is 0 or 9, however, a nose radius compensation value is added to U and W.
B A
A
U(+)W(--)
A
A
A A
A A
+X
+Z
U(+)W(+)
U(--)W(--) U(--)W(+)
Bothlinear andcircular
interpolationare possible
B
B
B
PROGRAMMING
150
TypeII differs fromtypeI in thefollowing : Theprofileneed not show
monotoneincreaseor decreasealongtheX axis, anditmay haveupto10
concaves(pockets).
1 2 3 10
......
Fig. 13.2.1(b) Number of Pockets inStockRemoval inTurning(TypeII)
Notethat, however, theprofilemusthavemonotonedecreaseor increase
alongtheZaxis. Thefollowingprofilecannot bemachined:
Monotone change is not
observed along the Zaxis
Fig. 13.2.1(c) FigureWhichCannotBeMachinedinStockRemoval in
Turning(TypeII)
The first cut portion need not be vertical ; any profile is permitted if
monotonechangeisshownalongtheZaxis.
Fig. 13.2.1(d) FigureWhichCanBeMachined(Monotonic change) in
StockRemoval inTurning(TypeII)
After turning, a clearance is provided by cutting along the workpiece
profile.
D TypeII
PROGRAMMING
151
e (set by a parameter)
Fig. 13.2.1(e) ChamferinginStockRemoval inTurning(TypeII)
Theclearancee(specified inR) tobeprovidedafter cuttingcan alsobe
set inparameter No. 718.
A samplecuttingpathisgivenbelow:
18
23
28
30
27
26
24
25
22
9
10
2
14
20
7
13
19
5
1
6
11
12
16
17
8
4
21
15
29
3
Fig. 13.2.1(f) CuttingPathinStockRemoval inFacing
DuandDw. Inturning, theoffset of thetool tipradius isassumed tobe
zero.
W=0mustbespecified; otherwise, thetool tipmaycutintoonewall side.
For thefirst blockof arepetitiveportion, twoaxesX(U) andZ(W) must
bespecified. WhenZmotionisnot performed, W0isalsospecified.
Whenonly oneaxisisspecifiedinthefirst block of arepetitiveportion
TypeI
Whentwoaxesarespecifiedinthefirst block of arepetitiveportion
TypeII
Whenthefirst block doesnot includeZmotionandtypeIIisto beused,
W0must bespecified.
(Example)
TYPE I TYPE II
G71U10.0R5.0; G71U10.0R5.0;
G71P100Q200....; G71P100Q200........;
N100X (U)___; N100X (U)___ Z(W)___;
: :
: :
N200..............; N200.........................;
For the Type II, the option of multiple repetitive cycle addition is
necessary.
D Distinctionbetweentype
I andtypeII
PROGRAMMING
152
As shownin thefigurebelow, this cycleis thesameasG71 except that
cuttingismadeby aoperationparallel toX axis.
A
Du/2
Dd
B
(F)
(R)
e
45_
(R)
(F)
A
C
Dw
G72W(Dd) R(e) ;
G72P(ns) Q(nf) U(Du) W(Dw) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;
The meanings of Dd, e, ns, nf, Du,Dw, f, s, andt are the same as
those inG71.
Tool path
Programcommand
Fig. 13.2.2(a) CuttingPathinStockRemoval inFacing
Thefollowing four cutting patternsareconsidered. All of thesecutting
cyclesaremadeparallel toXaxisandthesignof DuandDwareasfollows
:
B
A
A
U(+)W(--)
A
A
A A
+X
+Z
U(+)W(+)
U(--)W(--)
U(--)W(+)
A
A
B
B B
Both linear and circular
interpolation are possible
Fig. 13.2.2(b) Signs of Numbers SpecifiedwithUandWin
StockRemoval inFacing
Thetool pathbetween A and A is specifiedin theblock withsequence
number ns includingG00or G01, andinthisblock, amovecommand
intheX axiscannot bespecified. Thetool pathbetweenA and B must
besteadily increasinganddecreasingpatterninbothX andZaxes.
Whether thecuttingalongAA isG00or G01modeisdeterminedbythe
commandbetweenA andA, asdescribedinitem14.2.1.
13.2.2
StockRemoval in
Facing(G72)
D Signs of specified
numbers
PROGRAMMING
153
This function permits cutting a fixed pattern repeatedly, with apattern
beingdisplacedbitbybit. Bythiscuttingcycle, itispossibletoefficiently
cut work whose rough shape has already been made by a rough
machining, forgingor castingmethod, etc.
Dw
A
Du/2
Di+Du/2
B
(R)
A
D
Dk+Dw
C
Dw
Du/2
Di : Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction (Radius designation).
This designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is
designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter No. 719,
Dk : Distance and direction of relief in the Z axis direction.
d : The number of division
This value is the same as the repetitive count for rough cutting. This
designation is modal and is not changed until the other value is designated.
Also, this value can be specified by the parameter No. 721, and the
parameter is changed by the programcommand.
ns: Sequence number of the first block for the programof finishing shape.
nf : Sequence number of the last block for the programof finishing shape.
nu : Distanceanddirectionof finishingallowance inX direction(diameter/radius
designation)
nw : Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction
f,s,t : AnyF, S, andT functioncontainedintheblocks between sequencenumber
nsand nfare ignored, and the F, S, and T functions in this G73 block are
effective.
The patterncommandedinthe programshouldbe as follows.
AAB
G73U(ni) W(nk) R(d) ;
G73P(ns) Q(nf) U(nu) W(nw) F(f ) S (s ) T(t) ;
N (ns)
F____
S____
T____
N (nf);
The move command between A and B is
specified in the blocks fromsequence
number ns to nf.
Fig. 13.2.3 CuttingpathinPatternRepeating
13.2.3
PatternRepeating
(G73)
PROGRAMMING
154
NOTE
1 While the values Di and Dk, or Du and Dw are specified
by address U and W respectively, the meanings of them
are determined by the presence of addresses P and Q
in G73 block.
When P and Q are not specified in a same block,
addresses U and W indicates Di and Dk respectively.
When P and Q are specified in a same block, addreses
U and Windicates Du and Dwrespectively.
2 The cycle machining is performed by G73 commandwith
P and Q specification. The four cutting patterns are
considered. Take care of the sign of Du, Dw, Dk, and Di.
When the machining cycle is terminated, the tool returns
to point A.
3 Nose radius compensation is disabled during cycle
operation. When the imaginary tool nose number is 0 or
9, however, a nose radius compensation value is added
to U and W.
After roughcuttingbyG71, G72or G73, thefollowingcommandpermits
finishing.
G70P (ns) Q (nf) ; U(Du) W(Dw) ;
(ns) : Sequence number of the first block for the programof
finishingshape.
(nf) : Sequence number of the last block for the programof
finishingshape.
(Du) :Cuttingallowance inX direction(diameter/radius specification)
(Dw) :Cuttingallowance inZdirection
NOTE
1 F, S, and T functions specified in the block G71, G72,
G73 are not effective but those specified between
sequence numbers nsand nfare effective in G70.
2 When the cycle machining by G70 is terminated, the tool
is returned to the start point and the next block is read.
3 In blocks between ns and nf referred in G70 through
G73, the subprogramcannot be called.
4 Nose radius compensation is enabled during a finishing
cycle.
5 Specify cutting allowances U and W when performing
finish machining that involves cutting a finishing
allowance in several steps.
13.2.4
FinishingCycle(G70)
Format
PROGRAMMING
155
f100
0
f40
100
40
10
20 30 10 2
30 20 20
7
2
f140 f100
220
(Diameter designation, metric input)
N010 G50X200.0Z220.0;
N011 G00X160.0Z180.0;
N012 G71U7.0R1.0;
N013 G71P014Q020U4.0W2.0F0.3S550;
N014 G00X40.0F0.15S700;
N015 G01W--40.0;
N016 X60.0W--30.0;
N017 W--20.0;
N018 X100.0W--10.0;
N019 W--20.0;
N020 X140.0W--20.0;
N021 G70P014Q020;
80
StockRemoval inTurning(G71) (TypeI)
X axis
Endpoint
Start point
Zaxis
f60
Examples
PROGRAMMING
156
f80 f40
f160
20 2
88
20
10
60
10 10
190
110
7
N010 G50X220.0Z190.0;
N011 G00X176.0Z132.0;
N012 G72W7.0R1.0;
N013 G72P014Q019U4.0W2.0F0.3S550;
N014 G00Z58.0S700;
N015 G01X120.0W12.0F0.15;
N016 W10.0;
N017 X80.0W10.0;
N018 W20.0;
N019 X36.0W22.0;
N020 G70P014Q019;
StockRemoval InFacing(G72)
X axis
Start point
Zaxis
f120
PROGRAMMING
157
N010 G50X260.0Z220.0;
N011 G00X220.0Z160.0;
N012 G73U14.0W14.0R3;
N013 G73P014Q019U4.0W2.0F0.3S0180;
N014 G00X80.0W--40.0;
N015 G01W--20.0F0.15S0600;
N016 X120.0W--10.0;
N017 W--20.0S0400;
N018 G02X160.0W--20.0R20.0;
N019 G01X180.0W--10.0S0280;
N020 G70P014Q019;
f80
f180
220
B
2
130
16
16
110
14
f160
2 14
0
R20
f120
X axis
Zaxis
PatternRepeating(G73)
40 10 40 10 20 40
PROGRAMMING
158
Thefollowingprogramgeneratesthecuttingpath shownin Fig. 13.2.5.
Chipbreakingispossibleinthiscycleasshownbelow. If X (3) andPare
omitted, operationonly intheZaxisresults, tobeusedfor drilling.
e : Return amount
X : X component of point B
U : Incremental amount fromA to B
Z : Z component of point C
W : Increment amount fromA to C
Di : Movement amount in X direction and radius amount (without sign)
Dk : Depth of cut in Z direction (without sign)
Dd : Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. The sign of Dd is always
plus (+). However, if address X (U) andDi are omitted, the relief direction
can be specified by the desired sign.
f : Feed rate
U/2
W
Dd
i
C
k k k k k
A
(R)
(R)
(F)
(R) (R) (R)
(F)
(F) (F) (F)
i
i
e
B
[0< k k]
X
Z
(R)
[0< i i]
G74R(e) ;
G74X(U)_ Z(W)_ P(ni) Q(nk) R(nd) F(f );
(R)....Rapid traverse
(F))...Cutting feed
Fig. 13.2.5 CuttingPathinEndFacePeekDrillingCycle
NOTE
1 While both e and Dd are specified by address R, the
meanings of them are determined by the present of
address X (U). When X(U) is specified, Dd is used.
X (U) specification.
13.2.5
EndFacePeckDrilling
Cycle(G74)
PROGRAMMING
159
Thefollowingprogramgeneratesthecuttingpath shownin Fig. 13.2.6.
Thisisequivalent toG74except that X isreplacedby Z. Chipbreaking
ispossibleinthiscycle, andgroovinginXaxisandpeckdrillinginXaxis
(inthiscase, Z, W, andQareomitted) arepossible.
W
d
A
(R)
(F)
i
e
Z
k X
(F)
(F)
(R)
(F)
(R)
(R)
(F)
(R)
U/2
G75R(e) ;
G75X(U)_ Z(W)_ P(ni) Q(nk) R(nd) F(f);
(R)....Radius traverse
(F))...Cutting feed
Fig. 13.2.6 CuttingPathinOuter Diameter / Internal Diameter
DrillingCycle
BothG74andG75areusedfor groovinganddrilling, andpermit thetool
to relief automatically. Four symmetrical patterns are considered,
respectively.
13.2.6
Outer Ddiameter /
Internal Diameter
DrillingCycle(G75)
PROGRAMMING
160
ThethreadcuttingcycleasshowninFig.13.2.7(a) isprogrammedbythe
G76command.
W
C
(F)
(R)
A
U/2
d
i
X
Z
r
D
k
(R)
B
(R)....Rapid traverse
(F)....Thread cutting
E
Fig. 13.2.7(a) CuttingPathinMultiplethreadcuttingcycle
13.2.7
MultipleThreadCutting
Cycle(G76)
PROGRAMMING
161
k
D d a
B
d
G76P(m) (r) (a) Q(Ddmin) R(d);
G76X(u) _ Z(W) _ R(i) P(k) Q(Dd) F(L) ;
m; Repetitive count in finishing (1 to 99)
designated. Also this value can be specified by the parameter No. 723, and
the parameter is changed by the programcommand.
r : Chamfering amount
When the thread lead is expressed by L, the value of L can be set from0.0L
to 9.9L in 0.1L increment (2--digit number from00 to 90).
a : Angle of tool tip
One of six kinds of angle, 80, 60, 55, 30, 29, and 0, can be selected,
and specified by 2--digit number.
(Example)
When m=2, r=1.2L, a=60, specify as shown below(L is lead of thread).
P
m r a
02 12 60
Ddmin : Minimumcutting depth (specified by the radius value)
When the cutting depth of one cycle operation (Dd -- Dd --1) becomes smaller
than this limit, the cutting depth is clamped at this value. This designation is
modal and is not changed until the other value is designated. Also this value
can be specified by parameter No. 725, and the parameter is changed by the
programcommand.
d : Finishing allowance (Command with radius amount)
designated. Also this value can be specified by parameter No. 726, and the
parameter is changed by the programcommand.
i : Taper value command with radius amount
If i =0, ordinary straight thread cutting can be made.
k : Height of thread
This value is specified by the radius value.
nd : Depth of cut in 1st cut (Command with radins amount)
L : Lead of thread (same as G32).
Tool tip
1st
2nd
3rd
nth
m, r, and a are specified by address P at the same time.
d n
Fig. 13.2.7(b) Detail of cutting

PROGRAMMING
162
Whenfeedholdisappliedduringthreadinginthemultiplethreadcutting
cycle(G76), thetool quickly retracts in thesameway as inchamfering
performed at theendof thethread cuttingcycle. Thetool goes back to
thestart point of thecycle. When cyclestart is triggered, themultiple
threadcuttingcycleresumes.
Without this retraction function, when feed hold is applied during
threading, thetool goesbacktothestart pointof thecycleafter threading
iscompleted.
Seenotesin13.1.2.
NOTE
1 The meanings of the data specified by address P, Q, and
R determined by the presence of X (U) and X (W).
X (U) and Z(W) specification.
By using this cycle , one edge cutting is performed and
the load on the tool tip is reduced.
Making the cutting depth Dd for the first path, and
Ddn=Dd for the nth path, cutting amountper onecycle
is held constant.
Four symmetrical patterns are considered
corresponding to the sign of each address.
The internal thread cutting is available. In the above
figure, the feed rate between C and D is specified by
address F, and in the other path, at rapid traverse. The
sign of incremental dimensions for the above figure is as
follows :
U, W : minus (determined by the direction of the tool
path AC and CD.)
i : minus (determined by the direction of the tool
path AC.)
k : plus (always)
d : plus (always)
3 Notes on thread cutting are the same as those on G32
thread cutting and G92 thread cutting cycle.
4 The designation of chamfering is also effective for G92
thread cutting cycle.
5 The tool returns to the cycle start point at that time
(cutting depth Ddn) as soon as the feed hold status is
entered during thread cutting when the Thread Cutting
Cycle retractoption is used.
n
D Threadcuttingcycle
retract
PROGRAMMING
163
1.8
3.68
G00X80.0Z130.0;
G76P011060Q100R200;
G76X60.64Z25.0P3680Q1800F6.0;
6
105 25
j60.64
1.8
X axis
0
j68
Zaxis
Multiplerepetitivecycle(G76)
Examples
PROGRAMMING
164
1. Intheblockswherethemultiplerepetitivecyclearecommanded, the
addressesP, Q, X, Z, U, W, andR shouldbespecifiedcorrectly for
eachblock.
2. IntheblockwhichisspecifiedbyaddressPof G71, G72or G73, G00
or G01 group should becommanded. If it is not commanded, P/S
alarmNo.65isgenerated.
3. InMDI mode, G70, G71, G72, or G73 cannot becommanded. If it
is commanded, P/S alarmNo. 67is generated. G74, G75, andG76
canbecommandedinMDI mode.
4. In theblocks inwhich G70, G71, G72, or G73arecommandedand
between the sequence number specified by P and Q, M98
(subprogramcall) andM99(subprogramend) cannotbecommanded.
5. Intheblocksbetweenthesequencenumber specifiedby PandQ, the
followingcommandscannot bespecified.
Oneshot Gcodeexcept for G04(dwell)
01groupGcodeexcept for G00, G01, G02, andG03
06groupGcode
M98/ M99
6. Whileamultiplerepetitivecycle(G70 toG76) isbeing executed, it
is possibletostopthecycleandtoperformmanual operation. But,
when thecycleoperation is restarted, thetool shouldbereturnedto
thepositionwherethecycleoperationisstopped.
If the cycle operation is restarted without returning to the stop
position, themovement inmanual operationisaddedto theabsolute
value, andthetool pathisshiftedbythemovementamount inmanual
operation.
7. When G70, G71, G72, or G73 is executed, the sequence number
specified by address P and Qshould not bespecifiedtwiceor more
inthesameprogram.
8. Donotprogramsothatthefinal movement commandof thefinishing
shapeblock groupdesignatedwithP andQfor G70, G71, G72, and
G73 finishes with chamfering or corner rounding. If it is
specified,P/S alarmNo. 69isgenerated.
13.2.8
Notes onMultiple
RepetitiveCycle(G70
toG76)
PROGRAMMING
165
The canned cycle for drilling simplifies the program normally by
directing themachiningoperation commandedwith afewblocks, using
oneblock includingGfunction.
ThiscannedcycleconformstoJ IS B 6314.
Followingisthecannedcycletable.
Table13.3(a) CannedCycles
Gcode Drilling
axis
Holemachining
operation(-- direction)
Operationinthe
bottomholeposition
Retractionoperation
(+direction)
Applications
G80 ____ _____ _____ ___ Cancel
G83 Zaxis Cuttingfeed/ intermittent Dwell Rapidtraverse Front drillingcycle
G84 Zaxis Cuttingfeed Dwellspindle CCW Cuttingfeed Front tappingcycle
G85 Zaxis Cuttingfeed _____ Cuttingfeed Front boringcycle
G87 X axis Cuttingfeed/ intermittent Dwell Rapidtraverse Side drillingcycle
G88 X axis Cuttingfeed DwellSpindle CCW Cuttingfeed Side tappingcycle
G89 X axis Cuttingfeed Dwell Cuttingfeed Side boringcycle
Explanations
In general, the drilling cycle consists of the following six operation
sequences.
Operation1 Positioningof X (Z) andC axis
C--axisclampM codeoutput (asrequired)
Operation2 Rapidtraverseuptopoint R level
C--axisclampM codeoutput (asrequired)
Operation3 Holemachining
Operation4 Operationat thebottomof ahole
Operation5 Retractiontopoint R level
Operation6 C--axisunclampM codeoutput anddwell (asrequired)
Operation7 Rapidtraversetoinitial point
S S
S
S....Stop position
by signal block
Operation1
Operation2
Operation3
Operation4 Rapidtraverse
Cuttingfeed
Initial level
Point R level Operation6
Operation7
Operation5
Fig. 13.3 DrillingCycleOperationSequence
13.3
CANNEDCYCLE FOR
DRILLING
(G80TOG89)
PROGRAMMING
166
A drillingGcodespecifiespositioningaxesandadrillingaxisasshown
below. TheC--axisandX-- or Z--axisareusedas positioningaxes. The
X-- or Z--axis, whichisnotusedasapositioningaxis, isusedasadrilling
axis.
Although canned cycles include tapping and boring cycles as well as
drillingcycles, inthischapter, only thetermdrillingwill beusedtorefer
tooperationsimplementedwithcannedcycles.
Table13.3(b) Positioningaxis anddrillingaxis
Gcode Positioning plane Drillingaxis
G83, G84, G85 X axis, C axis, Y axis Zaxis
G87, G88, G89 Zaxis, C axis, Y axis X axis
G83 and G87, G84 andG88, andG85 andG89 havethesamefunction
respectively except for axes specified as positioning axes and adrilling
axis.
G83 to G85 / G87 to 89 are modal G codes and remain in effect until
canceled. Whenineffect, thecurrent stateisthedrillingmode.
Oncedrilling datais specified in thedrilling mode, thedatais retained
until modifiedor canceled.
Specifyall necessarydrillingdataatthebeginningof cannedcycles; when
cannedcyclesarebeingperformed, specify datamodificationsonly.
The F--specified feedrate is preserved after the corresponding hole
making cycleis canceled. Q must bespecified for individual blocks as
required. TheC--axisclamp/unclampMcodeismodal. Itcanbecanceled
only by G80.
InGcodesystemA, thetool returnsto theinitial level fromthebottom
of ahole. InGcodesystemBor C, specifyingG98returnsthetool tothe
initial level fromthebottomof aholeandspecifyingG99returnsthetool
tothepoint--R level fromthebottomof ahole.
The following illustrates how the tool moves when G98 or G99 is
specified. Generally, G99isusedfor thefirst drillingoperationandG98
isusedfor thelast drillingoperation.
Theinitial level doesnot changeeven whendrilling isperformed inthe
G99mode.
G98(Return toinitial level ) G99(ReturntopointRlevel)
Initial level
Point R level
D Positioningaxis and
drillingaxis
D Drillingmode
D Returnpointlevel
G98/G99
PROGRAMMING
167
Torepeatdrillingfor equally--spacedholes, specifythenumber of repeats
inK_.
K iseffectiveonly withintheblock whereit isspecified.
Specify thefirst holepositioninincremental mode.
If itisspecifiedinabsolutemode, drillingisrepeatedatthesameposition.
Number of repeats K The maximumcommandvalue =9999
If nospecificationismadefor K, K =1isassumed.
When an M code specified in parameter No.204 for C--axis clamp /
unclamp is coded in aprogram, theCNC issues theM code(parameter
No.204) for C--axisclampafter thetool ispositionedandbeforethetool
isfedinrapidtraversetothepoint--R level. TheCNC alsoissuestheM
code(parameter No. 204+1) for C--axisunclampafter thetool retractsto
thepoint--Rlevel. Thetool dwellsfor thetimespecifiedinparameterNo.
591.
If an M codeother than theclamp M codeset in parameter No. 204 is
specified, theM codeisoutput inoperation1.
Tocancel acannedcycle, useG80or agroup01Gcode.
Group01Gcodes
G00 : Positioning(rapidtraverse)
G01 : Linear interpolation
G02 : Circular interpolation(CW)
G03 : Circular interpolation(CCW)
Subsequent sections explain the individual canned cycles. Figures in
theseexplanationsusethefollowingsymbols:
Dwell specifiedinthe program P1
Positioning(rapidtraverse G00)
Cuttingfeed(linear interpolationG01)
P2
Ma
Mb
Dwell specifiedinparameter No.591
Issuingthe Mcode for C--axis clamp
Issuingthe Mcode for C--axis unclamp
D Repeat
D Mcodeusedfor C--axis
clamp/unclamp
D Cancel
D Symbols infigures
PROGRAMMING
168
The peck drilling cycle or high--speed peck drilling cycle is used
dependingonthesettinginRTCT, bit2of parameter No. 031#4. If depth
of cut for eachdrillingisnot specified, thenormal drillingcycleisused.
Thiscycleperformshigh--speedpeckdrilling. Thedrill repeatsthecycle
of drilling at thecutting feedrateand retracting the specified retraction
distanceintermittently to thebottomof ahole. Thedrill draws cutting
chipsout of theholewhenit retracts.
Format
G83or G87(G98mode) G83or G87(G99mode)
G83X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ M_ ;
or
G87Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ M_ ;
X_ C_ or Z_ C_ : Hole positiondata
Z_ or X_ : Bottomof the hole
W_ or U_ : The distance frompoint R to the bottomof the hole
R_ : The distance fromthe initial level to point R level
Q_ : Depthof cut for eachcuttingfeed
P_ : Dwell time at the bottomof a hole
F_ : Cuttingfeedrate
K_ : Number of repeats (Whenit is needed)
M_ : Mcode for C--axis clamp(Whenit is needed.)
d_ : Clearance specifiedwithparameter No. 592
Initial level
Point R Point R
Point Z Point Z
q
q
q
d
q
q
q
Point R
Ma Ma
Mb
Mb, P2
P2
P1 P1
d
d
d
13.3.1
Front DrillingCycle
(G83) / SideDrilling
Cycle(G87)
D High--speedpeck
drillingcycle(G83, G87)
(parameter No. 031#4=0)
PROGRAMMING
169
Format
G83X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ M_ ;
or
G87Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ M_ ;
Q_ : Depthof cut for eachcuttingfeed
K_ : Number of repeats (Whenit is needed.)
d_ : Clearance specifiedwithparameter No. 592
Initial level
Point R Point R
Point Z Point Z
q
d
q
q
q
d
q
q
Ma
P1 P1
Mb, P2
Ma
d d
Mb, P2
Point R
M51 ; SettingC-axis index modeON
M3S2000; Rotatingthedrill
G83X50.0C0.0Z-40.0R-5.0Q5000F5.0M31; Drillinghole1
C90.0Q5000M31; Drillinghole2
G80M05; Cancelingthedrillingcycleand
stoppingdrill rotation
M50; SettingC-axis index modeoff
D Peckdrillingcycle
(G83, G87)
(parameter No. 031#4=1)
Examples
PROGRAMMING
170
If depthof cut isnot specifiedfor eachdrilling, thenormal drillingcycle
is used. Thetool is then retracted fromthebottomof theholeinrapid
traverse.
Format
G83X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ M_ ;
or
G87Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ M_ ;
Initial level
Point R level
W_ or X_ : The distance frompoint R to the bottomof the hole
Ma Ma
P1 P1
Mb, P2
Mb, P2
Point Z
Point Z
Point R level
G83X50.0C0.0Z-40.0R-5.0P500F5.0M31; Drillinghole1
C90.0M31; Drillinghole2
D Drillingcycle
(G83or G87)
Examples
PROGRAMMING
171
Thiscycleperformstapping.
Inthistappingcycle, whenthebottomof theholehasbeen reached, the
spindleisrotatedinthereversedirection.
Format
G84X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ M_ ;
or
G88Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ M_ ;
Point R
Spindle CW
Initial level
Point R level Point R
Spindle CCW
Spindle CCW
Spindle CW
M_ : Mcode for C--axis clamp(whenit is needed.)
Ma
P1
Ma
Mb, P2
Mb, P2
P1
Point Z Point Z
Explanations
Tappingisperformedbyrotatingthespindleclockwise. Whenthebottom
of theholehasbeenreached, thespindleisrotatedinthereversedirection
for retraction. Thisoperationcreatesthreads.
Feedrateoverridesareignoredduringtapping. A feedholddoesnotstop
themachineuntil thereturnoperationiscompleted.
NOTE
Bit 2 of parameter No. 031 specifies whether the spindle
stop command (M05) is issued before the direction in which
thespindlerotates is specifiedwith M03or M04. For details,
refer to the operators manual created by the machine tool
builder.
13.3.2
FrontTappingCycle
(G84)/ SideTapping
Cycle(G88)
PROGRAMMING
172
Examples
PROGRAMMING
173
Thiscycleisusedtoboreahole.
Format
G85or G89(G98mode)
G85or G89(G99mode)
G85X(U)_ C(H)_ Z(W)_ R_ P_ F_ M_ ;
or
G89Z(W)_ C(H)_ X(U)_ R_ P_ F_ M_ ;
Point R
Initial level
Point R level
Point R
Ma
P1
Mb, P2
Ma
P1
Mb, P2
Point Z
Point Z
Explanations
After positioning, rapidtraverseisperformedtopoint R.
Drillingisperformedfrompoint R topoint Z.
After thetool reachespointZ, itreturnstopoint Rat afeedratetwicethe
cuttingfeedrate.
13.3.3
Front BoringCycle(G85)
/ SideBoringCycle(G89)
Examples
PROGRAMMING
174
G80cancelscannedcycle.
Format
G80;
Explanations
Cannedcyclefor drillingiscanceledtoperformnormal operation.
Point R and point Z are cleared. Other drilling data is also canceled
(cleared).
Evenwhenthecontroller isstoppedbyresettingor emergencystopinthe
courseof drillingcycle, thedrillingmodeanddrillingdataaresaved; with
thismind, therefore, restart operation.
Whendrillingcycleisperformedwithasingleblock, theoperationstops
at theendpointsof operations1, 2, 7inFig. 13.3.
Consequently, it follows that operation isstarted up3 timesto drill one
hole. Theoperationstopsattheendpointsof operations1, 2withthefeed
holdlampON. Theoperationstopsinthefeedholdconditionsat theend
point of operation6if therepeat remains, andit stopsin stopconditions
inother cases.
When Feed Hold is appliedbetween operations3 and5 by G84/G88,
thefeedholdlamplightsupimmediatelyif thefeedholdisappliedagain
tooperation7.
DuringoperationwithG84andG88, thefeedrateoverrideis100%.
13.3.4
CannedCyclefor
DrillingCancel (G80)
Examples
13.3.5
Precautions tobe
TakenbyOperator
D Resetandemergency
stop
D Singleblock
D Feedhold
D Override
PROGRAMMING
175
Tapping cycles(G84, G88) areclassifiedinto floatingtapping andrigid
tapping cycles. As explained in Section 13.3.2, floating tapping is the
conventional tappingmethod. In floatingtapping, thespindleisrotated
either clockwise or counterclockwise, synchronized with the motion
along the Z--axis (X--axis) according to miscellaneous functions M03
(spindleCW rotation), M04 (spindleCCW rotation), and M05 (spindle
stop).
In rigid tapping, the spindle motor is controlled in the same way as a
control motor by distributingpulsestoinstigatemotionalongtheZ--axis
(X--axis) andof thespindle.
In rigid tapping, compensation is applied to motion along the Z--axis
(X--axis) and spindle, so that each turn of the spindlecorresponds to a
certain amount of feed (screw lead) along Z--axis (X--axis). This also
applies to acceleration/deceleration. Thismeans that rigid tappingdoes
not demand theuseof special tappersas inthecaseof floatingtapping,
thusenablinghigh--speed, high--precisiontapping.
Thistext assumestheuseof G--codesystemB.
GVVX (Z)_ _ C_ _ Z(X)_ _ R_ _ P_ _ F_ _ K_ _ (MVV);
C--axis clampMcode
Number of repeats
Cuttingfeedrate
Dwell time observedat the bottom
of a tappedhole
Specifies the positionof point R.
Specifies the positionof the bottom
of a tappedhole.
Specifies the position of tapping.
Front face tappingcycle
Side face tappingcycle
G84
G88
Commandformat
13.3.6
RigidTapping
PROGRAMMING
176
Rigidtappingcanbespecifiedinany of threeways. Inthefirstmethod,
M29S**** isspecifiedbeforethespecificationof atappingcycle. Inthe
secondmethod, M29S**** isspecifiedintheblockspecifyingatapping
cycle. Thethird method allows rigid tapping to be performed without
specifyingM29S****. Whenusingthelastmethod, specifyS**** either
beforeor inaG84(G88) block.
With the specification of rigid tapping, thespindle first stops, then the
specifiedtappingcycleperformsrigidtapping. M29isreferredtoasthe
rigid tapping miscellaneous function. By setting a desired value in
parameter No. 0253, a separate M code can be assigned to the rigid
tappingmiscellaneousfunction. Thismanual, however, usesM29.
Rigid tapping canbecanceledby executingG80;. However, aseparate
cannedcycleGcodeor group01Gcode, thatis, acommandforcanceling
atappingcycle, canalsobeusedtocancel rigidtapping.
When a tapping cycle is terminated by executing a rigid tapping
cancellation command, the spindle stops. (Thespindle analog voltage
changestothesamelevel asthat set whenS0isspecified.)
Rigid tapping can also be canceled by areset (reset button or external
reset). Note, however, that cannedcyclemodecannot becanceled by a
reset.
(1) SpecifyingM29before a G84(G88) block
M29S****;
GVVX(Z)_ _C_ _Z(X)_ _R_ _P_ _F_ _K_ _(MVV);
X(Z)_ _C_ _;
X(Z)_ _C_ _;
G80;
(2) Specifying M29 in a G84 (G88) block (In this case, M29 and M for C--axis
clamping cannot be specified in the same block.)
GVVX(Z)_ _Z(X)_ _R_ _P_ _F_ _K_ _M29S****;
X(Z)_ _C_ _;
X(Z)_ _C_ _;
G80;
(3) Handling G84 (G88) as a G code for rigid tapping (Set bit 3 of parameter
No. 076 to 1.)
GVVX(Z)_ _C_ _Z(X)_ _R_ _P_ _F_ _K_ _S****(MVV);
X(Z)_ _C_ _;
X(Z)_ _C_ _;
G80;
Rigid tapping
mode
Rigid tapping
mode
Rigidtapping
mode
PROGRAMMING
177
NOTE
1 In feed per minute mode, F_ _/S**** specifies a screw
lead. In feed per rotation mode, F_ _ specifies a screw
lead.
2 S**** must specify a value not exceeding those set in
parameter No. 0423 toNo. 0426. Otherwise, a P/S alarm
is issued in a G84 (G88) block.
3 F_ _ must specify a value not exceeding the maximum
allowable cutting feedrate (set in parameter No. 527).
Otherwise, P/S alarmNo. 011 is issued.
4 Neither S nor motion along an axis must be specified
between M29 and G84 (G88). In addition, M29 must not
be specified during a tapping cycle. Otherwise, a P/S
alarmis issued.
5 When both G84 and G88 are specified in rigid tapping
mode, a P/S alarmis issued.
G84(G88) (G98mode) G84(G88) (G99mode)
Initial point
Point Z
Point Z
Point R
P1
G84, G88(tappingcycle)
Spindle stop
Operation 1
Operation 2
Operation 6
Spindle
stop
Operation 3
Operation 5
Point R
Spindle stop
Spindle CW
rotation
Spindle
CCW
rotation
Spindle stop
P1
Spindle stop
Spindle
CCW
rotation
Spindle stop
Operation 4
NOTE
1 Afeedrateoverride of 100%is assumed for feed bypulse
distribution for motion along the Z--axis (X--axis) and the
spindle. A spindle override of 100%is also assumed.
For retraction (operation 5), however, a fixed override of
up to 200% can be applied by setting parameter No.
0254 and bit 4 of parameter No. 063.
2 Single block, feed hold Even during rigid tapping, the
single block and feed hold functions are enabled. By
setting bit 3 of parameter No. 397, these functions can
be disabled during rigid tapping, as in the case of
conventional tapping.
PROGRAMMING
178
Using afeedratealongtheZ--axisof 1000mm/min andaspindlespeed
of 1000rpm, threadingwithaleadof 1mmcanbespecifiedin feedper
minutemode, asindicatedbelow.
O0001;
G94;
M29S1000;
G84Z--100. R--20. F1000.;
G80;
In feed per rotation mode, the same threading operation can
be specified under the same condition, as indicated below.
(In feed per rotation mode, F specifies a screwlead.)
O0002;
G95;
M29S1000;
G84Z--100. R--20. F1.;
G80;
RigidTappingCycle;
G84
G88
M29
G80 ;
S SpindleSpeed P1;
When P1 is commanded on thesameblock of M--code(M29) for rigid
tapping, therigid tapping cycle(G84/G88) thereafter is regarded asthe
counter rigidtappingcycle.
Namely, thespindlerotatesintheoppositedirectiontotheordinaryrigid
tappingcycle. P1isvalidtill therigidtappingcancel.
NOTE
1 The M--code (M29) should be commanded alone.
2 Parameter (No.076#3) is not used for the counter rigid
tapping.
Examples
13.3.7
Counter RigidTapping
Format
PROGRAMMING
179
Therearefour grindingcannedcycles: thetraversegrindingcycle(G71),
traverse direct fixed--dimension grinding cycle, oscillation grinding
cycle, andoscillationdirect fixed--dimensiongrindingcycle.
Withamachinetool thatallowscannedcyclesfor grindingtobeused, the
multiplerepetitivecannedcyclefor turningcannot beused.
(I)
(K)
(I)
(K)
G71A_ B_ W_ U_ I_ K_ H_ ;
A
B
U(dwell)
X
Z
A : First depthof cut
B : Seconddepthof cut
W: Grindingrange
U: Dwell time Maximumspecificationtime : 99999.999seconds
I : Feedrate of A andB
K : Feedrate of W
H: Number of repetitions Settingvalue : 1to 9999
W
(dwell)
A, B, andWaretobespecifiedinanincremental mode.
In the case of a single block, the operations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are
performedwithonecyclestart operation.
A=B=0resultsinaspark--out.
13.4
CANNEDGRINDING
CYCLE
(0--GCC, 00--GCC,
0--GCD/II)
13.4.1
TraverseGrinding
Cycle(G71)
Format
Explanations
PROGRAMMING
180
G72P_ A_ B_ W_ U_ I_ K_ H_ ;
P : Gauge number (1to 4)
A : First depthof cut
B : Seconddepthof cut
W: Grindingrange
U: Dwell time Maximumspecificationtime : 99999.999seconds
I : Feedrate of A andB
K : Feedrate of W
When the multistage skip operation is used, a gauge number can be
specified. Themethodof gaugenumber specificationisthesameasthe
methodof multistageskipfunction. Whenthemultistageskipoperation
isnot used, theconventional skipsignal isvalid.
The same specifications as G71 apply except for gauge number
specification.
1. Whenthetool movesalongtheZ--axistogrindaworkpiece, if askip
signal is input, thetool returns to theZ coordinatewhere thecycle
startedafter thetool reachestheendof thespecifiedgrindingarea.
(Termination)
(Skip signal)
(Skip signal)
(Termination)
2. When thetool cuts aworkpiecealong theX--axis, if askip signal is
input, the tool stops cutting immediately and returns to the Z
coordinatewherethecyclestarted.
(Termination)
(Skip signal)
(Skip signal)
(Termination)
3. The skip signal is valid during dwell, without being affected by
parameters DS1 to DS8 (No. 035#0 to #3). Dwell is immediately
stoppedfor returntotheZaxiscoordinatewherethecyclestarted.
13.4.2
TraverseDirect
Fixed--Dimension
GrindingCycle(G72)
Format
Explanations
D Operationatthetimeof
skipsignal input
PROGRAMMING
181
(B)
(K)
(K)
X
Z
U (dwell) A
U (dwell)
G73A_ (B_) W_ U_ K_ H_ ;
A : Depthof cut
B : Depthof cut
W: Grindingrange
U: Dwell time
K : Feedrate
W
A, B, andWaretobespecifiedinanincremental mode.
Inthecaseof asingleblock, theoperations1, 2, 3, and4 areperformed
withonecyclestart operation.
The specification of B is valid only for a specified block. This is not
associatedwithB of theG71or G72cycle.
13.4.3
OscillationGrinding
Cycle(G73)
Format
Explanations
PROGRAMMING
182
G74P_ A_ (B_) W_ U_ K_ H_ ;
P : Gauge number (1to 4)
A : Depthof cut
B : Depthof cut
W: Grindingrange
U: Dwell time
K : Feedrate of W
When the multistage skip operation is used, a gauge number can be
specified. Themethodof gaugenumber specificationisthesameasthe
methodof multistageskipfunction. Whenthemultistageskipoperation
isnot used, theconventional skipsignal isvalid.
ThesamespecificationsasG73apply totheother items.
1. Whenthetool movesalongtheZ--axistogrindaworkpiece, if askip
signal is input, thetool returns to theZ coordinatewhere thecycle
startedafter thetool reachestheendof thespecifiedgrindingarea.
(Termination)
Skip signal
(Termination)
Skip signal
2. The skip signal is valid during dwell, without being affected by
parameters DS1 to DS4 (No. 6035#0 to #3). Dwell is immediately
stoppedfor returntotheZaxiscoordinatewherethecyclestarted.
NOTE
1 The data items A, B, W, U, I, and K in acanned cycleare
modal values common to G71 through G74. The data
items A, B, W, U, I and K are cleared when a one--shot
G code other than G04 or a 01 group G code other than
G71 to G74 is specified.
2 No B code can be specified in the canned cycle mode.
13.4.4
OscillationDirect
Fixed--Dimension
GrindingCycle(G74)
Format
Explanations
D Operationatthetimeof
skipsignal input
PROGRAMMING
183
A chamfer or corner canbeinsertedbetweentwoblockswhichintersect
at aright angleasfollows:
45_
45_
+x
--x
a
c
b
--i
c
Moves as
adc
(For --X movement, --i)
d
G01Z(W) I (C) i ;
i
Format Tool movement
Specifies movement to point
bwithanabsolute or incremental
commandinthe figure onthe
right.
Whether to use address I or C to
specify chamferingis set using
bit 4of parameter No. 029.
Start point
Fig. 13.5(a) Chamfering(ZX)
G01X(U) _K(C) k;
c c
b
k --k
--z +z
45 45
d
a
(For --Z movement, --k)
b with an absolute or incremental
command in the figure on the
right.
Whether to use address K or C to
specify chamferingis set using
bit 4of parameter No. 029.
Start point
Moves as
adc
Fig. 13.5(b) Chamfering(XZ)
G01Z(W)_Rr ;
+x
--x
a
c
b
c
d
--r
r
right.
Start point
Moves as
adc
(For --X movement, --r)
Fig. 13.5(c) Corner R(ZX)
13.5
CHAMFERINGAND
CORNERR
D Chamfering
Z X
D Chamfering
X Z
D Corner R
Z X
PROGRAMMING
184
G01X(U)_Rr ;
--z +z
c c b
--r
r
d
a
right.
Start point
(For --x movement,
--r)
Moves as
adc
Fig. 13.5(d) Corner R(XZ)
Themovement for chamfering or corner R must bea singlemovement
along theX or Z axis in G01 mode. The next block must be asingle
movement alongtheX or Zaxisperpendicular totheformer block.
Specificationvalueof chamferingor corner--R isradiusvalue.
Notethat thestart point for acommand specifiedin ablock followinga
chamfering or corner--R block is not point c but point bshown inFigs.
13.5(a)to(d). Inincremental programming, specifyadistancefrompoint
b.
f86.0 f26.8
27.0
53.0
N3
C3
N2
R6
N1
Z
NIZ27.0R6.0;
N2X86.0K--3.0;
N3Z0;
X
D Corner R
X Z
Explanations
Examples
PROGRAMMING
185
NOTE
1 The following commands cause an alarm.
1) Chamfering or corner--R is commanded when X and
Zaxes are specified by G01. (alarmNo. 054)
2) Move amount of X or Zis less than chamferingvalue
and corner R value in the block where chamfering
and corner R are specified. (alarmNo. 055)
3) Next block to the block where chamfering andcorner
R were specified, has not G01 command. (alarmNo.
051, 052)
2 A single block stops at point c of Fig. 13.5 (a) to 13.5 (d),
not at point d.
3 Chamfering and corner R cannot be applied to a thread
cutting block.
4 C can be used instead of I or K as an address for
chamfering on the systemwhich does not use C as an
axis name. To set I/K for an address for chamfering, fix
parameter No.029#4 to 1.
5 If both C and R are specified with G01 in a block, the
address specified last is valid.
6 Neither chamfering nor corner--R machining can be
specified in direct drawing dimension programming.
PROGRAMMING
186
G68: Doubleturret mirror imageon
G69: Mirror imagecancel
Mirror imagecanbeappliedtoX--axiswithGcode.
When G68 is designated, thecoordinatesystemis shiftedto themating
turret side, and the X--axis sign is reserved from the programmed
commandtoperformsymmetrical cutting. Thisfunctionisreferredtoas
mirror image of facing tool posts. The user can return to theoriginal
coordinatesystemby specifyingG69.
A block containingG68or G69must not includeany other codes.
To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets to a
parameter (No. 730).
X
60
120
180
120f
120
Z
80f
40f
X40.0Z180.0T0101; Positionturret A at
G68; Shift the coordinate systemby the distance A to B
(120mm), andturnmirror image on.
X80.0Z120.0T0202; Positionturret B at
G69; Shift the coordinate systemby the distance B to A,
andturnmirror image on.
X120.0Z60.0T0101; Positionturret A at
Offset value of
tool post A
Offset value of
tool post B
Tool post A
Tool post B
13.6
MIRRORIMAGE FOR
DOUBLE TURRET
(G68, G69)
Format
Explanations
Examples
D Doubleturret
programming
PROGRAMMING
187
Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, corner rounding values, and
other dimensional valuesonmachiningdrawingscanbeprogrammedby
directly inputting thesevalues. In addition, thechamfering and corner
roundingcanbeinsertedbetweenstraightlineshavinganoptional angle.
Thisprogrammingisonly validinmemory operationmode.
Table13.7 Commands table
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
A
X
Z
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
X
Z
A
1
A
2
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
X
Z
A
1
A
2
R
1
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
X
Z
A
1
A
2
C
1
1
2
3
4
X
2
_ (Z
2
_) A_ ;
or
Z
2
_ A_ ;
A
1_ ;
X
3_
Z
3_
A
2_ ;
X
2
_ Z
2
_ R
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ ;
or
A
1
_ R
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_, A
2
_ ;
X
2
_ Z
2
_ C
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ ;
or
A
1
_ C
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ A
2
_ ;
Commands
Movementof tool
13.7
DIRECTDRAWING
DIMENSIONS
PROGRAMMING
Format
PROGRAMMING
188
(X
1
, Z
1
)
X
Z
A
1
R
1
A
2
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
4
, Z
4
)
R
2
(X
2
, Z
2
)
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
X
Z
A
1
A
2
C
1
(X
4
, Z
4
)
C
2
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
X
Z
A
2
(X
4
, Z
4
)
C
2
A
1
R
1
(X
1
, Z
1
)
(X
3
, Z
3
)
(X
2
, Z
2
)
X
Z
A
1
A
2
C
1
(X
4
, Z
4
)
R
2
5
6
7
8
X
2
_ Z
2
_ R
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ R
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
or
A
1
_ R
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ A
2
_ R
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
X
2
_ Z
2
_ C
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ C
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
or
A
1
_ C
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ A
2
_ C
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
X
2
_ Z
2
_ R
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ C
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
or
A
1
_ R
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ A
2
_ C
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
X
2
_ Z
2
_ C
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ R
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
or
A
1
_ C
1
_ ;
X
3
_ Z
3
_ A
2
_ R
2
_ ;
X
4
_ Z
4
_ ;
Commands Movementof tool
PROGRAMMING
189
A programfor machiningalongthecurveshowninFig. 13.7isasfollows
:
a
1
a
2
A (a
1
) C (c
1
) ;
X (x
3
) Z(z
3
) A (a
2
) R (r
2
) ;
X (x
4
) Z(z
4
) ;
(x
3
, z
3
)
(x
4
, z
4
)
a
3
c
1
(x
2
, z
2
)
(x
1
, z
1
)
X (x
2
) Z(z
2
) C (c
1
) ;
X (x
3
) Z(z
3
) R (r
2
) ;
X (x
4
) Z(z
4
) ;
r
2
+Z
+X
Startpoint
or
Fig. 13.7 MachiningDrawing(example)
For commandastraight line, specify oneor twoout of X, Z, andA.
If only oneis specified, thestraight linemust beprimarily defined by a
commandinthenext block.
To command thedegreeof astraight lineor thevalueof chamferingor
corner R, commandwithfollowingaddress.
A_.....Straight line
C_.....Chamfering
R_.....Corner R
Byspecifying1toparameter No. 029#4onthesystemwhichuseC asan
axisname, thedegreeof astraightlineor thevalueof chamferingorcorner
R canbecommandedwithacommabeforeaddress.
, A_.....Straight line
, C_.....Chamfering
, R_......Corner R
Explanations
PROGRAMMING
190
NOTE
1 The following G codes are not applicable to the same
block as commanded by direct input of drawing
dimensions or between blocks of direct input of drawing
dimensions which define sequential figures.
1) G codes ( other than G04) in group 00.
2) G02, G03, G90, G92, and G94 in group 01.
3) Stock removal in turning (G71) type II
2 Corner rounding cannot be inserted into a threading
block.
3 Neither chamfering and corner rounding commands
specified in 13.5 nor those of direct input of drawing
dimensions can be used concurrently.
4 When the end point of the previous block is determined
in the next block according to sequential commands of
direct input of drawing dimensions, the single block stop
is notdone, butthefeedholdstopis done atthe endpoint
of the previous block.
5 The angle allowance in calculating the point of
intersection in the programbelow is 1. (Because the
travel distance to be obtained in this calculation is too
large.)
1) X_ , A_ ; (If avalue within01or 1801is specified
for the angle instruction, the alarmNo.057 occurs.)
2) Z_ , A_ ; (If a value within 901or 2701is
specified for the angle instruction, the alarmNo. 057
occurs.)
6 An alarmoccurs if the angle made by the 2 lines is within
1when calculating the point of intersection.
7 Chamfering or corner R is ignored if the angle made by
the 2 lines is within 1.
8 Both a dimensional command (absolute programming)
and angle instruction must be specified in the block
following a block in which only the angle instruction is
specified.
(Example)
N1 X_ A_ R_ ;
N2 A_ ;
N3 X_ Z_ A_ ;
(In addition to the dimentional command, angle
instruction must be specified in block No. 3.)
PROGRAMMING
191
22
180
30
145
10
R20
R6
X
f300
Z
(Diameter specification, metric input)
N001 G50 X0.0 Z0.0;
N002 G01 X60.0 A90.0 C1.0 F80;
N003 Z--30.0 A180.0 R6.0;
N004 X100.0 A90.0;
N005 A170.0 R20.0;
N006 X300.0 Z--180.0 A112.0R15.0;
N007 Z--230.0 A180.0;
:
:
R15
f60
f100
PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION B--61394E/08
192
14
COMPENSATIONFUNCTION
Thischapter describesthefollowingcompensationfunctions:
14.1TOOL OFFSET
14.2OVERVIEWOFTOOL NOSERADIUSCOMPENSATION
14.3DETAILSOFTOOL NOSERADIUSCOMPENSATION
14.4TOOL COMPENSATIONVALUES
14.5AUTOMATICTOOL OFFSET
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION
193
Tool offsetisusedtocompensatefor thedifferencewhenthetool actually
used differs from the imagined tool used in programming (usually,
standardtool).
Offset amount
onX axis
Imaginedtool
Actual tool
Offset amount
onZaxis
Fig. 14.1 Tool offset
Tool geometry offset is used to compensate for a tool figure or tool
attachment position difference. Tool wear offset isused tocompensate
for tool tip wear. Theseoffset values can beset separately. When no
distinctionistobemadebetweenthesevalues, setthetotal of thesevalues
asthetool positionoffset.
NOTE
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are optioned.
X axis
geometry
offset
value
X axis
wear
offset
value
Point onthe program
Imaginary tool
Actual
tool
Point onthe program
Offset
amount
onX axis
Offset
amount
onZaxis
Fig. 14.1.1(a) Differencethe
tool geometryoffsetfromtool
wear offset
Fig. 14.1.1(b) Notdifferencethe
wear offset(Themovingis same
as tool wear offset)
Zaxis
wear
offset
value
Zaxis
geometry
offset
value
14.1
TOOL OFFSET
14.1.1
Tool GeometryOffset
andTool Wear Offset
194
TherearetwomethodsforspecifyingaT codeasshowninTable14.1.2(a)
andTable14.1.2(b).
Table14.1.2(a)
Kindof
Tcode
Meaningof Tcode
Parameter settingfor specifying
of offsetNo.
2--digit
command
Whenbit 0of pa-
rameter No.014, is
set to 1, a tool
wear offset num-
ber is specified
withthe last digit
of a T code.
Whenbit 1of
parameter
No.013, is set
to 0, the tool
geometry off-
set number
andtool wear
offset number
4--digit
command
Whenbit 0of pa-
rameter No.014, is
set to 0, a tool
wear offset num-
ber is specified
withthe last two
digits of a T code.
offset number
specifiedfor a
certaintool
are the same.
Table14.1.2(b)
Kindof
Tcode
Meaningof Tcode
Parameter settingfor specifying
of offsetNo.
2--digit
command
Whenbit 0of pa-
rameter No.014, is
set to 1, a tool
wear offset num-
ber is specified
withthe last digit
of a T code.
Whenbit 1of
parameter
No.013, is set
to 1, the tool
geometry off-
set number
andtool wear
offset number
4--digit
command
Whenbit 0of pa-
rameter No.014, is
set to 0, a tool
wear offset num-
ber is specified
withthe last two
digits of a T code.
offset number
specifiedfor a
certaintool
are the same.
Tool selectionismadebyspecifyingtheT codecorrespondingtothetool
number. Refer tothemachinetool builders manual for therelationship
betweenthetool selectionnumber andthetool.
Tool offset number hastwomeanings.
It is specifies the offset distance corresponding to the number that is
selected to begin theoffset function. A tool offset number of 0 or 00
indicatesthat theoffset amount is0andtheoffset iscancelled.
14.1.2
Tcodefor Tool Offset
Format
D Lower digitof T code
specifies geometryand
wear offsetnumber
Tf f
Tool wear andtool
geometry offset
number
Tool selection
Tf f f f
Tool wear andtool
geometry offset
number
Tool selection
D Lower digitof T code
specifies wear offset
number andhigher digit
number specifies tool
selectionnumber and
geometryoffsetnumber
Tf f
Tool wear offset
number
Tool selectionandtool
geometry offset number
Tool wear offset
number
Tool selectionandtool
geometry offset number
Tf f f f
14.1.3
Tool Selection
14.1.4
OffsetNumber
195
Therearetwotypesof offset. Oneistool wear offsetandtheother istool
geometry offset.
The tool path is offset by the X, Y, and Z wear offset values for the
programmed path. The offset distance corresponding to the number
specifiedbytheT codeisaddedtoor subtractedfromtheandpositionof
eachprogrammedblock.
This block contains the offset
commandwithT code
Tool pathafter offset
Programmedpath
Compensationby offset X, Z(offset vector)
Fig. 14.1.5(a) Movementof offset(1)
In Fig.15.1.5(a), thevector with offset X, Y, and Z is called theoffset
vector. Compensationisthesameastheoffset vector.
OffsetiscancelledwhenT codeoffsetnumber 0or 00isselected. Atthe
endof thecancelledblock, theoffset vector becomes0.
N1X50.0Z100.0T0202; Createstheoffset vector corresponding
tooffset number 02
N2X200.0;
N3X100.0Z250.0T0200; Specifyingoffset number 00deletesthe
offset vector.
N1
N2
Tool pathafter offset
Programmedpath
Fig. 14.1.5(b) Movementof offset(2)
Parameter (No.0001#3) canbeset sothat offset will not becancelledby
pressingthereset key or by reset input.
14.1.5
Offset
Explanations
D Tool wear offset
D Offsetvector
D Offsetcancel
196
WhenonlyaT codeisspecifiedinablock, thetool ismovedby thewear
offset valuewithout amovecommand. Themovement is performedat
rapidtraverserateintheG00mode. It isperformedatfeedrateinother
modes.
WhenaT codewithoffsetnumber0or00isspecifiedbyitself, movement
isperformedtocancel theoffset.
By settingbit 4of parameter No. 014, however, anoffset movementcan
bemadetogether withtheaxismovement specifiedby thenext block.
WARNING
When G50 X_Z_T_ ; is specified
Tool is not moved.
The coordinate systemin which the coordinate value of the
tool position is (X,Z) is set. The tool position is obtained by
subtracting the wear offset value correspondingto theoffset
number specified in the T code.
With thetool geometry offset, thework coordinatesystemis shiftedby
the X, Y, and Z geometry offset amounts. Namely, the offset amount
corresponding to the number designated with the code is added to or
subtractedfromthecurrent position.
Programmedpath
Tool pathafter tool
geometry offset
Offset amount by tool
geometry offset inX, Z
axis (offset vector)
Fig. 14.1.5(c) Movementof tool geometryoffset
NOTE
As well as wear offset, the tool can be compensated by
parameter setting (No.013#2) to add or subtract the
programmed end point of each block.
Tool geometry offset is not canceled, even when offset number 0 is
specified. Bysettingbit3of parameter No. 013, however, tool geometry
offset canbecanceledwhenoffset number 0isspecified.
Furthermore, bysettingbit3of parameter No. 001/bit1of parameter No.
014, tool geometry offset canalsobecanceledby areset.
D Tool wear offsetinonly
T codecommand
D Tool geometryoffset
cancel
197
1. Whenatool geometry offset number andtool wear offset number are
specifiedwiththelast twodigitsof aT code
(whenbit 1of parameter No.013, isset 0),
N1X50.0Z100.0T0202; Specifiesoffset number 02
N2Z200.0;
N3X100.0Z250.0T0200;Cancelsoffset
Tool path affer offset
Programmed path
Tool geometry
offset
N1
Tool wear offset
N2
N3
Tool wear offset
cancel
Examples
198
Itisdifficulttpproducethecompensationnecessarytoformaccurateparts
whenusingonly thetool,offset functionduetotool noseroundness. The
tool nose radius compensation function compensates automatically for
theaboveerrors.
Insuficient
deoth of catting
Shape processedwithout tool
nose radius compensation
Tool nose center path of tool position
offset only
R
Workpiece
Programmed
path
Fig. 14.2 Tool pathof tool noseradius compensation
Thetool noseat positionA infollowingfiguredoesnot actually exist.
Theimaginarytool noseisrequiredbecauseitisusuallymoredifficultto
set the actual tool nose radius center to the start position than the
imaginary tool nose(Note).
Alsowhenimaginary tool noseisused, thetool noseradiusneed not be
consideredinprogramming.
Thepositionrelationshipwhenthetool issettothestartpositionisshown
inthefollowingfigure.
A
Start position
Start position
Whenprogrammedusingthe
tool nose center
Whenprogrammedusingthe
imaginary tool nose
Fig. 14.2.1(a) Tool noseradius center andimaginarytool nose
14.2
OVERVIEWOFTOOL
NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION
14.2.1
ImaginaryTool Nose
199
NOTE
In a machine with reference positions, a standard position like the turret center can be placed
over the start position. The distance fromthis standard position to the nose radius center or
the imaginary tool nose is set as the tool offset value.
Setting the distance fromthe standard position to the tool nose radius center as the offsetvalue
is the same as placing the tool nose radius center over the start position, while setting the
distance from the standard position to the imaginary tool nose is the same as placing the
imaginary tool nose over the standard position. To set the offset value, it is usually easier to
measure the distance from the standard position to the imaginary tool nose than from the
standard position to the tool nose radius center.
OFX
(Tool offset
inX axis)
OFX
(Tool offset
inX axis)
OFZ
(Tool offset
inZaxis)
OFZ
(Tool offset
inZaxis)
Settingthe distance fromthe standardposition
to the tool nose center as the tool offset value
Settingthe distance fromthe standardpositionto the
imaginary tool nose center as the tool offset value
The start positionis placedover the tool nose center The start positionis placedover the imaginary tool nose
Fig. 14.2.1(b) Tool offsetvaluewhentheturretcenter is placedover thestartposition
Unless tool nose radius compensationis
performed, the tool nose center pathis the same
as the programmedpath.
If tool nose radius compensationis used, accu-
rate cuttingwill be performed.
Tool nose center path
Programmedpath
Start--up Start--up
Programmedpath
Fig. 14.2.1(c) Tool pathwhenprogrammingusingthetool nosecenter
Without tool nose radius compensation, the
imaginary tool nose pathis the same as the
programmedpath.
Withtool nose radius compensation, accurate
cuttingwill be performed.
Imaginary tool
nose path
Imaginary tool
nose path
Start--up Start--up
Programmedpath
Programmedpath
Fig. 14.2.1(d) Tool pathwhenprogrammingusingtheimaginarytool nose
200
Thedirectionof theimaginarytool noseviewedfromthetool nosecenter
isdeterminedby thedirectionof thetool duringcutting, soitmust beset
inadvanceaswell asoffset values.
Thedirection of theimaginary tool nosecan beselectedfromtheeight
specifications shown in the Fig.14.2.2 below together with their
correspondingcodes.
This Fig14.2.2 illustrates the relation between the tool and the start
position. The following apply when thetool geometry offset and tool
wear offset optionareselected.
Imaginary tool nose number 1 Imaginary tool nose number 2
X
Z
Imaginary tool nose number 0or 9
Fig. 14.2.2 Directionof imaginarytool nose
Imaginary tool nosenumbers0and9areusedwhenthetool nosecenter
coincides with the start position. Set imaginary tool nose number to
addressOFT for eachoffset number.
14.2.2
Directionof Imaginary
Tool Nose
201
Tool nose radius compensationvalue
(Tool nose radius value)
Thisvalueisset fromtheMDI accordingtotheoffset number.
When the options of tool geometry compensation and tool wear
compensationareselected, offset valuesbecomeasfollows:
Table14.2.3(a) Offsetnumber andoffsetvalue
Offset
number
Max32
pairs
OFX
(Offset
valueonX
axis)
OFZ
(Offset
valueonZ
axis)
OFR
(Tool nose
radius
com-
pensation
value)
OFT
(Direction
of imagi-
narytool
nose)
OFY
(Offset
valueonY
axis)
01
02
:
31
32
0.040
0.060
:
0.050
0.030
0.020
0.030
:
0.015
0.025
0.20
0.25
:
0.12
0.24
1
2
:
6
3
0.030
0.040
:
0.025
0.035
When the options of tool geometry compensation and tool wear
compensationareselected, theoffset valuesbecomeasfollows:
Table14.2.3(b) Tool geometryoffset
Geome-
try
offset
number
Max32
pairs
OFGX
(X--axis
geometry
offset
amount)
OFGZ
(Z--axis
geometry
offset
amount)
OFGR
(Tool nose
radius ge-
ometry
offsetval-
ue)
OFT
(Imaginary
tool nose
direction)
OFGY
(Y--axis
geometry
offset
amount)
G01
G02
G03
G04
G05
:
10.040
20.060
0
:
:
:
50.020
30.030
0
:
:
:
0
0
0.20
:
:
:
1
2
6
:
:
:
70.020
90.030
0
:
:
:
14.2.3
OffsetNumber and
OffsetValue
Explanations
D Offsetnumber andoffset
value
202
Table14.2.3(c) Tool wear offset
Wear
offset
number
Max32
pairs
OFGX
(X--axis
wear off-
set
amount)
OFGZ
(Z--axis
wear off-
set
amount)
OFGR
(Tool nose
radius
wear off-
setvalue)
OFT
(Imaginary
tool nose
direction)
OFGY
(Y--axis
wear off-
set
amount)
W01
W02
W03
W04
W05
:
0.040
0.060
0
:
:
:
0.020
0.030
0
:
:
:
0
0
0.20
:
:
:
1
2
6
:
:
:
0.010
0.020
0
:
:
:
In this case, thetool nose radius compensation valueis thesumof the
geometry or thewear offset value.
OFR=OFGR+OFWR
The imaginary tool nose direction may be set for either the geometry
offset or thewear offset.
However, thelast designateddirectionlater iseffective.
A offset number is specified with thesameT codeas that used for tool
offset. For details, see14.1.2.
NOTE
When the geometry offset number is made common to the
tool selection by the parameter (No.013#1) setting and a T
code for which the geometry offset and wear offset number
differ fromeach other is designated, theimaginary tool nose
direction specified by the geometry offset number is valid.
By setting bit 3 of parameter No. 075, however, the
imaginary tool nose direction, specified with a wear offset
number, can be enabled.
Example) T0102
OFR=RFGR
01
+OFWR
02
OFT=OFT
01
Therange of theoffset valueisanfollows:
Incrementsystem metric system Inchsystem
IS--B 0to 999.999mm 0to 99.9999inch
IS--C 0to 999.9999mm 0to 99.99999inch
Theoffset valuecorrespondingtotheoffset number 0isalways0.
Nooffset valuecanbeset tooffset number 0.
D Tool noseradius
compensation
D Imaginarytool nose
direction
D Commandof offsetvalue
D Settingrangeof offset
value
203
In tool nose radius compensation, the position of the workpiece with
respect tothetool must bespecified.
Gcode Workpieceposition Tool path
G40 (Cancel) Movingalongthe programmedpath
G41 Right side Movingonthe left side the programmed
path
G42 Left side Movingonthe right side the programmed
path
Thetool isoffset totheoppositesideof theworkpiece.
Workpiece
G41
G42
X axis
Zaxis
G40
G40
The imaginary tool nose is
onthe programmedpath.
Imaginary tool nose
number 1to 8
Imaginary tool
nose number 0, 9
14.2.4
WorkPositionand
MoveCommand
204
Theworkpiecepositioncanbechangedby settingthecoordinatesystem
asshownbelow.
Workpiece
X axis
Zaxis
G41(the workpiece is
onthe left side)
G42(the workpiece is
onthe right side)
Note
If the tool nose radius
compensationvalue is
negative, the workpiece
positionis changed.
G40, G41, and, G42aremodal.
Dont specify G41whileintheG41mode. If youdo, compensationwill
not work properly.
Dont specify G42whileintheG42modefor thesamereason.
G41 or G42 mode blocks in which G41 or G42 are not specified are
expressedby (G41) or (G42) respectively.
When the tool is moving, the tool nose maintains contact with the
workpiece.
(G42)
(G42)
(G42)
(G42)
(G42) (G42)
Enlarged
diagram
D Tool movementwhenthe
workpiecepositiondoes
notchange
205
The workpiece position against the toll changes at the corner of the
programmedpathasshowninthefollowingfigure.
Workpiece
position
Workpiece
position
G42
G42 G41
G41
A
A
B
C
B
C
Although the workpiece does not exist on the right side of the
programmed path in the above case. the existence of the workpieceis
assumedinthemovementfromA toB. Theworkpiecedirectionmustnot
bechangedintheblock next tothestart--upblock.
Theblock inwhichthemodechangestoG41or G42fromG40iscalled
thestart--upblock.
G40_ ;
G41_ ; (Start--upblock)
Transient tool movementsfor offset areperformedinthestart--upblock.
In theblock after the start--up block, thetool nosecenter is positioned
Vertically totheprogrammedpathof that block at thestart position.
(G42)
G42(Start up)
G40
workpieceposition
changes
D Start--up
206
Theblock inwhichthemodechangestoG40fromG41or G42iscalled
theoffset cancel block.
G41_ ;
G40_ ; (Offset cancel block)
Thetool nosecenter movestoapositionvertical totheprogrammedpath
in theblock beforethecancel block. The tool is positioned at theend
positionintheoffset cancel block (G40) asshownbelow.
G40
(G42)
Endposition
When is specified again in G41/G42 mode , the tool nose center is
positionedvertical totheprogrammedpathof theprecedingblock at the
endpositionof theprecedingblock.
(G42) (G42)
(G42)
G42W--50.0U--50.0;
IntheblockthatfirstspecifiesG41/G42, theabovepositioningof thetool
nosecenter isnot performed.
Whenyouwishtoretract thetool inthedirectionspecifiedby X(U) and
Z(W) cancelling the tool nose radius compensation at the end of
machiningthefirst block inthefigurebelow, specify thefollowing:
G40X(U) _ Z(W) _ I _ K _ ;
G42
G40U_ W_ I_ K_ ;
G40
I, K
U, W
Movingdirectionof tool
TheworkpiecepositionspecifiedbyaddressesI andK isthesameasthat
intheprecedingblock.
G40X_ Z_ I_ K_ ; I, J of tool nose radius compensationcancel
G40G02X_ Z_ I_ K_ ; I, J of circular interpolationcenter
D Offsetcancel
D Specificationof G41/G42
inG41/G42mode
movingdirectionof the
tool inablockwhich
includes aG40
commandis different
fromthedirectionof the
workpiece
207
f120
f200
30 150
0
60
300
Z
X
(1)
(2)
(3)
(G40mode)
1.G42G00X60.0;
2.G01X120.0W--150.0F10;
3.G40G00X300.0W150.0I40.0K--30.0;
Examples
208
1.M05; M codeoutput
2.S210; S codeoutput
3.G04X1.0; Dwell
4.G01U0; Feeddistanceof zero
5.G98; Gcodeonly
6.G10P01X10.0Z20.0R0.5Q2; Offset change
If two or moreof theaboveblocksarespecifiedconsecutively, thetool
nosecenter comes to aposition vertical to theprogrammed path of the
preceding block at theend of thepreceding block. However, if theno
movement commandsis4above, theabovetool motionis attainedonly
withoneblock.
N6 N7
N8
N9
(G42mode)
G91N6W100.0;
N7S21;
N8M04;
U9U--100.0W100.0;
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius compensation with G90 (outer diameter/internal
diameter cuttingcycle) or G94(endfaceturningcycle) isasfollows, :
1.Motionfor imaginarytool nosenumbers
For eachpathinthecycle, thetool nosecenter pathisgenerallyparallel
totheprogrammedpath.
4, 8, 3
5, 0, 7
1, 6, 2
4
8
0
3
7
2
6
1
5
1, 4, 5 8, 0, 6
3, 7, 2
4, 8, 3
5, 0, 7
1, 6, 2
4
8
0
3
7
2
6
1
5
1, 4, 5 8, 0, 6
3, 7, 2
G90 G94
Programmedpath
Inall case
Programmedpath
Inall
case
14.2.5
Notes onTool Nose
Radius Compensation
Explanations
D Tool movementwhen
twoor moreblocks
withoutamove
commandshouldnotbe
programmed
consecutively
D Tool noseradius
compensationwithG90
or G94
209
2.Directionof theoffset
Theoffset directionisindicatedinthefigurebelowregardlessof the
G41/G42mode.
G90 G94
When oneof following cycles is specified, thecycledeviates by atool
nose radius compensation vector. During the cycle, no intersection
calculationisperformed.
G71 (Stock removal inturningor traversegrindingcycle)
G72 (Stock removal infacingor traversedirect constant--dimension
grindingcycle)
G73 (Patternrepeatingor Oscillationgrindingcycle)
When one of following cycles is specified, the tool nose radius
compensationisnot performed.
G74 (Endfacepeck drilling)
G75 (Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling)
G76 (Multiplethreadingcycle)
G78 (Threadingcycle)
Movement after after compensationisshownbelow.
(G42)
(G41)
Programmedpath
D Tool noseradius
compensationwithG71
toG76or G78
D Tool noseradius
compensationwhen
chamferingis performed
210
Movement after compensationisshownbelow.
(G42)
(G41)
Programmedpath
Inthiscase, tool noseradiuscompensationisnot performed.
D Tool noseradius
compensationwhena
corner arc is inserted
D Tool noseradius
compensationwhenthe
blockis specifiedfrom
theMDI
211
Thissectionprovidesadetailedexplanationof themovement of thetool
for tool noseradiuscompensationoutlinedinSection14.2.
Thissectionconsistsof thefollowingsubsections:
14.3.1 General
14.3.2 Tool MovementinStart--up
14.3.3 Tool MovementinOffsetMode
14.3.4 Tool MovementinOffsetModeCancel
14.3.5 InterferenceCheck
14.3.6 Over cuttingbyTool NoseRadiusCompensation
14.3.7 CorrectioninChamferingandCorner Arc
14.3.8 InputCommandfromMDI
14.3.9 General Precautionsfor OffsetOperations
The tool nose radius compensation vector is atwo dimensional vector
equal totheoffsetvaluespecifiedinaT code, andtheiscalculatedinthe
CNC.
Itsdimensionchangesblock by block accordingtotool movement.
This offset vector (simply called vector herein after) is internally crated
bythecontrol unitasrequiredfor proper offsettingandtocalculateatool
pathwithexact offset(by tool nosecompensation) fromtheprogrammed
path.
Thisvector isdeletedby resetting.
Thevector alwaysaccompaniesthetool asthetool advances.
Proper understandingof vector isessential toaccurateprogramming.
Readthedescriptionbelowonhowvectorsarecreatedcarefully.
G40, G41or G42isusedtodeleteor generatevectors.
Thesecodes areused together with G00, G01, G02or G03to specify a
modefor tool motion(Offsetting).
Gcode Function Workpieceposition
G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel Neither
G41 Left offset along tool path Right
G42 Right offset along tool path Left
G41andG42specifyanoff mode, whileG40specifiescancellationof the
offset.
Thesystementersthecancel modeimmediatelyafter thepower isturned
on, when the RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel is pushed or a
programisforcedtoendby executingM02or M30. (thesystemmaynot
enter the cancel mode depending on the machine tool.) In the cancel
mode, the vector is set to zero, and the tool path coincides with the
programmed, path. A programmustendincancel mode. If itendsinthe
offset mode, thetool cannot bepositionedat theend point, and thetool
stopsat alocationthevector lengthaway fromtheendpoint.
14.3
DETAILSOFTOOL
NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION
14.3.1
General
D Tool noseradius center
compensationvector
D G40, G41, G42
D Cancel mode
212
Whenablock whichsatisfiesall thefollowing conditionsis executedin
cancel mode, the systementers the offset mode. Control during this
operationiscalledstart--up.
DG41or G42iscontainedintheblock, or hasbeenspecifiedtosetthe
systementerstheoffsetmode. Control duringthisoperationiscalled
start--up.
DTheoffset number for tool noseradiuscompensationisnot 00.
DX or Zmovesisspecifiedintheblock andthemovedistanceisnot
zero.
A circular command(G02or G03) isnot allowedinstart--up.
If specified, alarm(PS34) will occur. Twoblocksarereadinduringstart--
up. Thefirst block isexecuted, andthesecondblock isentered intothe
tool nose radius compensation buffer. In the single block mode, two
blocksarereadandthefirst block isexecuted, thenthemachinestops.
Insubsequentoperations, twoblocksarereadinadvance, sotheCNChas
theblock currently beingexecuted, andthenext twoblocks.
Whenanangleof intersectioncreatedby tool pathsspecifiedwithmove
commands for two blocks isover 180k, it isreferred toas inner side.
Whentheangleisbetween0k and180k, it isreferredtoasouter side.
a
Workpiece
a
Programmedpath
Inner side
180 a
0 a180
Outer side
Workpiece
Programmedpath
Thefollowingsymbolsareusedinsubsequent figures:
-- S indicatesapositionat whichasingleblock isexecutedonce.
-- SS indicatesapositionat whichasingleblock isexecutedtwice.
-- SSSindicatesapositionatwhichasingleblockisexecutedthreetimes.
-- L indicatesthat thetool movesalongastraight line.
-- C indicatesthat thetool movesalonganarc.
-- r indicatesthetool noseradiuscompensationvalue.
-- Anintersectionisapositionat whichtheprogrammedpathsof two
blocksintersect witheachother after they areshiftedby r.
-- indicates thecenter of thetool noseradius.
D Start--up
D Inner sideandouter side
D Meaningof symbols
213
Whentheoffset cancel modeischanged tooffset mode, thetool moves
asillustratedbelow(start--up):
Explanations
LinearLinear
a
Programmedpath
L S
G42
r
L
LinearCircular
a
S
G42
r
L
Tool nose radius
center path
C
Workpiece
Start position
Start position
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius center path
Work-
piece
r
a
L
S
G42
L
a
S
C
G42
r
r
L
L
L
r
L
LinearLinear
LinearCircular
Workpiece
Start position
Start position
Work-
piece
Programmedpath
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path
Intersection
Intersection
14.3.2
Tool Movementin
Start--Up
D Tool movementaround
aninner sideof acorner
(180_ a)
theoutsideof acorner at
anobtuseangle
(90_ a 180_)
214
G42
L
L L
L
S
r
r
G42
L
L
L
S
r
r
C
L
L
LinearLinear
LinearCircular
Workpiece
Work-
piece
Start position
Start position
Programmedpath
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path
a
a
r
G41
(G41)
L
L
S
Start position
Programmedpath
Less than1deg
If thecommandisspecifiedat start--up, theoffset vector isnot created.
G91G40 ;
:
N6U10.0W10.0;
N7G41U0;
N8W--10.0;
N9W--10.0U10.0;
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path
S
N9
N6
N7
N8
SS
NOTE
For the definition of blocks that do not move the tool, see
Subsection 14.3.3.
theoutsideof anacute
angle(a 90_)
theoutsidelinearlinear
atanacuteangleless
than1degree(a 1_)
D Ablockwithouttool
movementspecifiedat
start--up
215
Intheoffset mode, thetool movesasillustratedbelow:
a
L
L
a
C
S
L
S
C
L S
C
S
C
LinearCircular
LinearLinear
Programmedpath
Intersection
Workpiece
Work-
piece
Tool nose radius
center path
Intersection
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Programmedpath
Intersection
CircularLinear
CircularCircular
Work-
piece
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
Intersection
a
a
14.3.3
Tool Movementin
OffsetMode
Explanations
theinsideof acorner
(180_ a)
216
r
r
S
r
Intersection
Programmedpath
Intersection
Alsoincaseof arc tostraight line, straight linetoarc and arc to arc, the
reader shouldinfer inthesameprocedure.
theinside(a 1_) with
anabnormallylong
vector, linear linear
217
a
L
r
C
S
L
S
C
L
S
L
L
r
L
L
L S
r
r
LinearLinear
LinearCircular
Programmedpath
Intersection
Workpiece
CircularLinear
CircularCircular
Intersection
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
Work-
piece
Intersection
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Work-
piece
Programmedpath
Intersection
Tool nose radius
center path
a
a
a
C
C
S
theoutsidecorner atan
obtuseangle
(90_ a 180_)
218
a
L
L L
L
S r
r
L
L
S
r
r
C
L
L
L
L L
L
S
r
r
L
S
L
S
r
r
L
C
C
L
LinearLinear
Programmedpath
Workpiece
LinearCircular
CircularLinear
CircularCircular
Programmedpath
Work-
piece
Tool nose radius
center path
Workpiece
Programmedpath
Work-
piece
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
a
a
a
theoutsidecorner atan
acuteangle(a 90_)
219
If theendof alineleadingtoanarc isprogrammedastheendof thearc
by mistakeasillustratedbelow, thesystemassumesthattool noseradius
compensationhasbeenexecutedwithrespect toanimaginary circlethat
hasthesamecenterasthearcandpassesthespecifiedendposition. Based
on this assumption, the system creates a vector and carries out
compensation. Theresultingtool noseradiuscenter pathisdifferentfrom
that created by applying tool nose radius compensation to the
programmed path in which the line leading to the arc is considered
straight.
r r
Center of the arc
Imaginary circle
Leadingof the arc
Endthe arc
L
L
L
r
C
S
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path
Work-
piece
The same description applies to tool movement between two circular
paths.
If thetool noseradiuscompensation valueis sufficiently small, thetwo
circular Tool noseradiuscenter pathsmadeafter compensationintersect
at a position (P). Intersection P may not occur if an excessively large
value is specified for tool nose radius compensation. When this is
predicted, alarm33occurs at theendof theprevious block and thetool
is stopped. In theexampleshown below, Tool noseradius center paths
along arcs A and B intersect at P when a sufficiently small value is
specifiedfor tool noseradiuscompensation. If anexcessivelylargevalue
isspecified, thisintersectiondoesnot occur.
Arc B
P
Whenthe tool nose radius
compensationvalue is small
Programmedpath
Center of the arc B Center of the arc A
Arc A
r
r
Whenthe tool nose radius
compensationvalue is large
Alarm(No.033)occurs andthe tod
stops
D Whenitis exceptional
Endpositionfor thearc
is notonthearc
Thereis noinner
intersection
220
If thecenter of the arc is identical with thestart position or end point,
alarm(No. 038) isdisplayed, andthetool will stopat theendpositionof
theprecedingblock.
N5 N6
N7
r
Alarm(No.038)is displayedandthe tool
stops
(G41)
N5G01W10.0;
N6G02W10.0I0J 0;
N7G03U--10.0I--10.0;
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
Theoffset directionis decidedby Gcodes (G41and G42) for tool nose
radiusandthesignof tool noseradiuscompensationvalueasfollows.
Signof offsetvalue
Gcode + --
G41
Left side offset
Right side offset
G42
Right side offset
Left side offset
The offset direction can be changed in the offset mode. If the offset
direction is changed in ablock, avector is generatedat theintersection
of thetool noseradiuscenter path of that block and thetool noseradius
center pathof aprecedingblock. However, thechangeisnot availablein
thestart--upblock andtheblock followingit.
Thecenter of thearc is
identical withthestart
positionor theend
position
D Changeintheoffset
directionintheoffset
mode
221
L
L
L
S
r r
G42
G41
G41
G42
r
r
S
C
r
r
L
C
S
S
G41
G41
G42
G42
C
C
r
r
LinearLinear
LinearCircular
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path
CircularLinear
CircularCircular
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Workpiece
Workpiece
Tool noseradius center
pathwithan
intersection
222
Whenchangingtheoffset directioninblockA toblock BusingG41and
G42, if intersectionwiththeoffsetpathisnot required, thevector normal
toblock B iscreatedat thestart point of block B.
G41 (G42) (G42)
L
L
L
A B
r
r
S
L
S
(G41)
G42
A
B
L
S
r
L
L
G41
C
C
r
r r
(G42)
S
S
Center
(G42)
LinearLinear
LinearCircular
Programmedpath
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Workpiece
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
CircularCircular
Anarc whose endposition
is not onthe arc
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path Center
G42
G41
L
S
Tool noseradius center
pathwithoutan
intersection
223
If thefollowingcommandisspecifiedintheoffsetmode, theoffsetmode
istemporarilycanceledthenautomaticallyrestored. Theoffsetmodecan
becanceledandstartedasdescribedinSubsections14.3.2and14.3.4.
If G28is specifiedin theoffset mode, theoffset modeiscanceled at an
intermediateposition. Offsetmodeisrestoredautomaticallyafter thetool
isreturnedtothereferencepositition.
Reference position
(G42G00)
S
S
S
S
G28
G00
r
r
Theoffset vector canbesettoformarightangletothemovingdirection
in theprevious block, irrespectiveof machining inner or outer side, by
commandingthetool noseradiuscompensationGcode(G41, G42) inthe
offset mode, independently. If this code is specified in a circular
command, correct circular motionwill not beobtained.
Whenthedirectionof offset isexpected tobechangedby thecommand
of tool noseradius compensation G code(G41, G42), refer toChange
intheoffset directionintheoffset mode inSubsec.15.3.3.
LinearLinear
r
A block specifiedby G42
G42mode
r
C
Intersection
S
L
L
S
L
CircularLinear
A block specifiedby G42
Intersection
Programmedpath
G42mode
D Temporarytool nose
radius compensation
cancel
SpecifyingG28
(automatic returntothe
referenceposition) in
theoffsetmode
D Tool noseradius
compensationGcodein
theoffsetmode
224
During offset mode, if G92 (absolute zero point programming) is
commanded,the offset vector is temporarily cancelled and thereafter
offset modeisautomatically restored.
Inthiscase, without movement of offset cancel, thetool movesdirectly
fromtheintersecting point to thecommanded point whereoffset vector
iscanceled. Alsowhenrestoredto offset mode, thetool movesdirectly
totheintersectingpoint.
S
L
L L
L
S
S
N5
N6
N7
N8
G92block
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
(G41)
N5G91G01U70.0W30.0;
N6U--60.0W30.0;
N7G50X20.0Z10.0;
N8G01X80.0Z40.0;
D Workpiececoordinate
systemsetting(G50)
SeeSections 14.1 (G90, G92, G94) and 14.2 (G71to G76) for thetool
noseradiuscompensationisrelatedcannedcycles.
N5
N6
(G41)
N8
S
N9
r
r
S
S
(G42)
N5G01U50.0W--60.0;
N6W--80.0;
N7G90U--60.0Z--80.0I--30.0;
N8G00U120.0W50.0;
N9W50.0;
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
D Commandcancellingthe
offsetvector temporarity
D Cannedcycles
(G90, G92, G94) and
Multiplerepetitivecycles
(G71toG76)
225
Thefollowingblocks haveno tool movement. In theseblocks, thetool
will not moveevenif tool noseradiuscompensationiseffected.
M05; Mcode output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S21; S code output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G04X1.0; Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G10P01X10Z20R10.0; tool nose radius compen-- . . . . . .
sationvalue setting/modification
Y20.0; Move commandnot included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inthe offset plane.
G98; G code only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U0; Move distance is zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Com-
mands
are no
move-
ment.
Whenasingleblock without tool movement iscommandedin theoffset
mode, thevector andTool noseradiuscenter patharethesameasthose
whentheblock is not commanded. This block is executedat thesingle
block stoppoint.
L
N6
N7 N8
L
SS
Programmedpath
Block N7is executedhere.
N6U10.0W10.0;
N7G04X1.0;
N8W10.0;
However, whenthemovedistanceiszero, evenif theblockiscommanded
singly, tool motionbecomesthesameasthat when morethan oneblock
of without tool movement are commanded, which will be described
subsequently.
L
N6
N7 N9
L
SSS
Programmedpath
N6G91U10.0W10.0;
N7S21;
N8G04X1.0;
N9W10.0;
Block N7andN8are
executedhere.
N8
Setting bit 4of parameter No. 395enables thesuccessful applicationof
tool noseradiuscompensation, evenwhentwoor moreblocksthat donot
containtool movement arespecifiedinsuccession.
D Ablockwithouttool
movement
Ablockwithouttool
movementspecifiedin
offsetmode
226
When two or morevectors areproduced at theend of ablock, thetool
moveslinearly fromonevector toanother. Thismovement is calledthe
corner movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement
isnt performedandthelatter vector isignored.
r
DV
x
DV
Y
This vector is ignored, if
DVx DV Limit, and
DV
Y
DV Limit
r
Programmedpath
If nVx nVlimit andnVy nVlimit, thelatter vector isignored. The
nVlimit isset inadvanceby parameter (No. 557).
If thesevectors do not coincide, amoveisgenerated toturn aroundthe
corner. Thismovebelongstothelatter block.
This move belongs to block N7, thus, the feedrate
is equal to that inblock N7.
If the block N7is G00mode, the tool is movedat
G00mode, while if it is G01, G02, G03, G33, the
tool is movedat G01mode.
S
N6 N7
For manual operationduringthetool noseradiuscompensation, refer to
SectionIII--3.5, Manual AbsoluteON andOFF.
D Corner movement
D Interruptionof manual
operation
227
Explanations
a
S
r
L
C
a
L S
G40
r
L
Workpiece
G40
L
Programmedpath
Programmedpath Tool nose radius center path
Work-
piece
LinearLinear
CircularLinear
r
a
L
S
G40
L
Intersection
a
S
C
r
r
L
L
G40
L
LinearLinear
Workpiece
Programmedpath
CircularLinear
Work-
piece
Programmedpath Tool nose radius center path
Intersection
14.3.4
Tool Movementin
OffsetModeCancel
aninsidecorner
(180 a)
anoutsidecorner atan
obtuseangle
(90 a180)
228
G40
L
L L
L
r
r
L
L
S
r
r
C
L
L
L
S
LinearLinear
CircularLinear
Workpiece
Programmedpath
Programmedpath
Work-
piece
a
a
Start position
r
G41
G42
L
L
S
1or less
Programmedpath
When a block without tool movement is commanded together with an
offsetcancel, avector whoselengthisequal totheoffsetvalueisproduced
in a normal direction to tool motion in the earlier block, the vector is
cancelledinthenext movecommand.
L
N6
N7 N8
L
SS
Programmedpath
N6G91U100.0W100.0;
N7G40;
N8U0W100.0;
anoutsidecorner atan
acuteangle
(a 90)
theoutsidelinearlinear
atanacuteangleless
than1degree(a 1)
D Ablockwithouttool
movementspecified
together withoffset
cancel
229
If aG41or G42block precedesablock inwhichG40andI_, J _, K_ are
specified, thesystemassumesthatthepathisprogrammedasapathfrom
theend position determined by theformer block toavector determined
by(I,J ), (I,K), or(J ,K). Thedirectionof compensationintheformerblock
isinherited.
Inthe G42block, the tool nose radius center
moves towards P.
Inthe G40block, the tool nose radius center
moves towards E.
E(a, b)
r
N1(G42mode) ;
N2G40Xa YbI_ K_ ;
(I, J )
r
P
S
N2
N1
G42
Workpiece
Programmedpath
In this case, note that the CNC obtains an intersection of the tool path
irrespectiveof whether inner or outer sidemachiningisspecified
r
P
S
(G42)
E
G40
r
(I, K)
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
When an intersection is not obtainable, the tool comes to the normal
positiontothepreviousblock at theendof thepreviousblock.
E
(I, K)
r
S
G40
P
r
Programmedpath (G42)
D BlockcontainingG40
andI_J _K_
Theprevious block
contains G41or G42
230
Tool overcutting is called interference. Theinterference check function
checksfor tool overcuttinginadvance. However, all interferencecannot
becheckedby thisfunction. Theinterferencecheck isperformedevenif
overcuttingdoesnot occur.
Explanations
Thedirectionof thetool noseradiuspathisdifferent fromthat of
theprogrammedpath(from90degreesto270degreesbetween
thesepaths).
Tool nose radius center path Programmedpath
Programmedpath
The directions of
these two paths are
different (180).
The directions of
these two paths are
different (180).
14.3.5
InterferenceCheck
D Criteriafor detecting
interference
231
Inadditiontothecondition , theanglebetweenthestart pointand
endpoint ontheTool noseradiuscenter pathisquitedifferent from
that between thestart point and end point ontheprogrammedpath
incircular machining(morethan180degrees).
Center
N5
N6
N7
r1
r2
Programmedpath
(G41)
N5G01U20.0W80.0T1;
N6G02U--16.0W32.0I--80.0K--20.0T2;
N7G01U--50.0W20.0;
(Tool compensationvaluecorrespondingtoT1: r
1
=20.0)
(Tool compensationvaluecorrespondingtoT2: r
2
=60.0)
Intheaboveexample, thearc inblock N6isplacedintheonequadrant.
But after tool nose radius compensation, the arc is placed in the four
quadrants.
232
Removal of thevector causingtheinterference
Whentool noseradiuscompensationisperformedfor blocksA, Band
C and vectors V
1
, V
2
, V
3
and V
4
between blocksA andB, andV
5
,
V
6
, V
7
andV
8
betweenB andC areproduced, thenearest vectorsare
checked first. If interference occurs, they are ignored. But if the
vectors to be ignored due to interference arethe last vectors at the
corner, they cannot beignored.
CheckbetweenvectorsV
4
andV
5
Interference V
4
andV
5
areignored. . . . .
CheckbetweenV
3
andV
6
Interference V
3
andV
6
areignored . . . .
CheckbetweenV
2
andV
7
Interference V
2
andV
7
areIgnored . . . .
CheckbetweenV
1
andV
8
Interference V
1
andV
8
arecannotbeignored . . . .
If while checking, a vector without interference is detected,
subsequent vectors are not checked. If block B is a circular
movement, a linear movement is produced if the vectors are
interfered.
(Example1) Thetool moveslinearlyfromV
1
toV
8
C
C
C
r
r
R
V
1
V
2
V
3
V
4
V
5
V
6
V
7
V
8
A
O
1
O
2
Tool nose radius
center path
V
4
, V
5
: Interference
V
3
, V
6
: Interference
V
2
, V
7
: Interference
V
1
, V
8
: No Interference
Programmed
path
D Correctionof
interferenceinadvance
233
(Example2) Thetool moveslinearlyfromV
1
, V
2
, V
7
, toV
8
r
C
C
C
r
R
A
S
V
4
, V
5
: Interference
V
3
, V
6
: Interference
V
2
, V
7
: No Interference
O
1
O
2
V
1
V
2
V
8
V
3
V
6
V
5
V
4
V
7
Programmedpath
Tool nose radius
center path
If theinterferenceoccursafter correction , thetool isstoppedwith
analarm.
If theinterferenceoccursafter correction or if thereareonly one
pair of vectors from the beginning of checking and the vectors
interfere, the alarm (No.41) is displayed and the tool is stopped
immediately after execution of thepreceding block. If theblock is
executedby thesingleblock operation, thetool isstoppedat theend
of theblock.
C
V6
A
B
V5 V2
V1
Stopped
Programmedpath
After ignoring vectors V
2
and V
5
because of interference,
interference also occurs between vectors V
1
and V
6.
The
alarmis displayed and thetool is stopped.
234
Depressionwhichissmaller thanthetool noseradius
compensationvalue
Tool nose radius
center path
A
B
C
Stopped
Programmedpath
There is no actual interference, but since thedirection programmed in
blockBisoppositetothatof thepathafter tool noseradiuscompensation
thetool stopsandanalarm(No.041) isdisplayed.
Groovewhichissmaller thanthetool noseradiuscompensation
value
A B C
Programmed
path
Tool nose radius
center path
Stopped
Like , thedirectionisreverseinblock B.
D Wheninterferenceis
assumedalthoughactual
interferencedoes not
occur
235
Explanations
When the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius,
because the inner offsetting of the cutter will result in
overcuttings, an alarm is displayed and the CNC stops at the
start of the block. I n single block operation, the overcutting is
generated becausethetool is stopped after theblock execution.
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Analarmis generated
andthe operation
stops
Analarmis generatedand
the operationstops here in
single block operation
If the CNC does not
stop, overcuttingoccurs
Sincethetool noseradius compensationforces thepath of thecenter of
thetool tomoveinthereverseof theprogrammeddirection, overcutting
will result. InthiscaseanalarmisdisplayedandtheCNCstopsatthestart
of theblock.
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Analarmis displayedandthe
operationstops
Overcuttingif the operationwouldnot stop
14.3.6
OvercuttingbyTool
NoseRadius
Compensation
D Machininganinside
corner ataradius
smaller thanthetool
noseradius
D Machiningagroove
smaller thanthetool
noseradius
236
Whenmachiningof thestepiscommandedby circular machining inthe
caseof aprogramcontainingastepsmaller thanthetool noseradius, the
pathof thecenter of tool withtheordinary offset becomesreversetothe
programmeddirection. Inthiscase, thefirstvectorisignored, andthetool
moveslinearly tothesecondvector position. Thesingleblockoperation
isstoppedatthispoint. If themachiningisnotinthesingleblockmode,
thecycleoperationiscontinued. If thestepisof linear, noalarmwill be
generatedandcut correctly. However uncut part will remain.
S
The first vector is ignored
Programmedpath
Workpiece
Center of the circular
machining
Anovercuttingwill result if the first vector is not ignored.
However, tool moves linearly.
Linear movement Stoppositionafter executionof a single
block
In chamfering or corner arcs, tool nose radius compensation only be
performedwhenanordinary intersectionexistsat thecorner.
In offset cancel mode, astart--up block or when exchanging theoffset
direction, compensation cannot be performed, an alarm (No.39) is
displayedandthetool isstopped.
Ininner chamferingor inner corner arcs, if thechamferingvalueorcorner
arcvalueissmallerthanthetool noseradiusvalue, thetool isstoppedwith
analarm(No.39) sinceovercuttingwill occur.
Stopped
here
Programmed
path
Tool nose
radius
center path
Tool nose
radius
center path
Programmed
path
Stopped
here
Thevalidinclinationangleof theprogrammedpath intheblocksbefore
and after the corner is 1 degree or less so that the alarm(No.52, 54)
generatedby thecalculatingerror of tool noseradiuscompensationdoes
not occur.
D Machiningastepsmaller
thanthetool noseradius
14.3.7
Correctionin
ChamferingandCorner
Arcs
237
The following example shows a machining area which cannot be cut
sufficiently.
2
r
r
22.5_
Tool nose radius
center path
Programmedpath
withchamfering
Machiningarea
remaining
In inner chamfering, if theportion of theprogrammedpath that is not a
part of thechamfering (intheabovefigure
1
or
2
) is infollowing
range, insufficiently cut arewill exist.
0
1
or
2
rtan22.5 (r : toonoseradius)
Enlargedviewontheremainingmachiningarea
AlarmNo.52or 55isdisplayedinthefollowingcases:
P
1
The alarmis displayed
at this path
Limit of programmedpathwithchamfering
Endpoint P
2
Programmed
path
Tool nose radius
center path
Tool nose center pathwithchamfering
Tool nose center pathwithout
chamfering
Inouter chamferingwithanoffset, alimitisimposedontheprogrammed
path. Thepathduringchamferingcoincides withtheintersectionpoints
P
1
or P
2
without chamfering, therefore, outer chamfering islimited. In
thefigureabove, theend point of thetool center path with chamfering
coincides with the intersection point (P2) of the next block without
chamfering. If the chamfering value is more than the limit value
specified, alarmNo.52or 55will bedisplayed.
D Whenmachiningarea
remains or analarmis
generated
238
Tool nose radius compensation is not performed for commands input
fromtheMDI.
However, when automatic operation using the CNC tape composed of
absolutecommandsistemporarily stoppedby thesingleblock function,
MDI operation is performed, then automatic operation starts again, the
tool pathisasfollows:
Inthiscase, thevectorsatthestartpositionof thenextblockaretranslated
and theother vectors areproduced by thenext two blocks. Therefore,
fromnext block but one, tool nose radius compensation is accurately
performed.
V
B2
V
B1
V
C1
V
C1
V
C2
V
B1
V
B2
P
B
P
A
P
B
P
C
P
D
Command
for MDI
WhenpositionP
A
, P
B
, andP
C
areprogrammedinanabsolutecommand,
tool isstoppedbythesingle blockfunctionafter executingtheblockfrom
P
A
toP
B
andthetool ismovedby MDI operation. VectorsV
B1
andV
B2
aretranslatedtoV
B1
andV
B2
andoffsetvectorsarerecalculatedfor the
vectorsV
C1
andV
C2
betweenblock P
B
--P
C
andP
C
--P
D
.
However, since vector V
B2
is not calculated again, compensation is
accurately performedfrompositionP
C
.
14.3.8
InputCommandfrom
MDI
239
Ingeneral, theoffsetvalueischangedincancel mode, or whenchanging
tools. If theoffset valueischangedinoffset mode, thevector at theend
point of theblock iscalculatedfor thenewoffset value.
Addilionaly, the changing of hypothetical tool nose numer and the
changingof tool positionoffset aresame.
N8 N6
N7
Calculatedfromoffset
value inblock N6
Programmedpath
Calculatedfromoffset
value inblock N7
Whenanegativeoffsetvalueisspecified, theprogramisexecutedfor the
figurewhichiscreatedbyexchangingG41for G42or G42for G41inthe
processsheet.
A tool machininganinner profilewill machinetheoccur profile, andtool
machiningtheouter profilewill machinetheinner profile.
Anexampleisshownbelow. Ingeneral, CNCmachiningisprogrammed
assuming apositiveoffset value. When aprogramspecifiesatool path
as shown in 1, thetool will moveas shown in 2if anegative offset is
specified. Thetool in2will moveasshownin1whenthesignof theoffset
valueisreserved.
Programmedpath
1
2
WARNING
When the sign of the offset value is reversed, the offset
vector of the tool nose is reversed but the imaginary tool
nose direction does not change.
Therefore, do not reverse the sign of the offset value when
starting the machining meeting the imaginary tool nose to
the start point.
14.3.9
General Precautions
for OffsetOperations
D Changingtheoffset
value
D Thepolarityof theoffset
amountandthetool
nosecenter path
240
Tool compensationvaluesincludetool geometry compensation
valuesandtool wear compensation(Fig. 14.4(a)).
Tool compensationcanbespecifiedwithoutdifferentiatingcompensation
for tool geometry fromthat for tool wear (Fig.14.4.(b)).
Inthiscasetheoperationof movingissameasthetool wear offsetvalue
X axis
geometry
offset
value
X axis
wear
offset
value
Point onthe program
Imaginary tool
Actual
tool
Point onthe program
Offset
value on
X axis
Offset
value on
Zaxis
Fig. 14.4(a) Differencethe
wear offset
Fig. 14.4(b) Notdifferencethetool
geometryoffsetfromtool wear
offset
Zaxis
wear
offset
value
Zaxis
geometry
offset
value
Tool compensationvaluescanbeenteredintoCNC memory fromthe
CRT/MDI panel (seesectionIII--9.1) or fromaprogram.
A tool compensationvalueisselected fromtheCNC memory whenthe
correspondingcodeisspecifiedafter addressT inaprogram.
Thevalueisusedfor tool offset or tool noseradiuscompensation.
Seesubsec. 14.1.2for details.
Table14.4.1showsthevalidinput rangeof tool compensationvalues.
Table14.4.1 Validrangeof tool compensationvalues
Increment
Tool compensationvalue
Increment
system
Metric input(mm) Inchinput(inch)
IS--B --999.999to +999.999mm --99.9999to +99.9999inch
IS--C --999.9999to +999.9999mm --99.99999to +99.99999inch
The maximum tool wear compensation can be changed by setting
parameter No.0729.
Thememory canhold16or 32tool compensationvalues.
NOTE
In the Series 0--TTC, the number of specified tool
compensation values equals the number of tool
compensations for each tool post.
14.4
TOOLCOMPENSATION
VALUES, NUMBEROF
COMPENSATION
VALUES, AND
ENTERINGVALUES
FROMTHE PROGRAM
(G10)
14.4.1
Tool Compensation
andNumber of Tool
Compensation
D Validrangeof tool
compensationvalues
D Number of tool
compensation
241
Offset valuescanbeinput by aprogramusingthefollowingcommand:
G10P_ X_ Z_ Y_ R_ Q_ ;
or
G10P_ U_ W_ V_ C_ Q_ ;
P : Offset number
0 : Commandof work coordinate systemshift value
1--32 : Commandof tool wear offset value
Commandvalue is offset number
1000+(1--32) : Commandof tool geometry offset value
(1--32) : Offset number
X : Offset value onX axis (absolute)
Z : Offset value onZaxis (absolute)
Y : Offset value onY axis (absolute)
U : Offset value onX axis (incremental)
W : Offset value onZaxis (incremental)
V : Offset value onY axis (incremental)
R : Tool nose radius offset value (absolute)
C : Tool nose radius offset value (incremental)
Q : Imaginary tool nose number
Inanabsolutecommand, thevaluesspecifiedinaddressesX, Y , Z, and
R areset astheoffsetvaluecorrespondingtotheoffset number specified
by address P. In an incremental command, the value specified in
addresses U, W, V, and C is added to the current offset value
correspondingtotheoffset number.
NOTE
1 Addresses X, Z, Y and U, W, V can be specified in the
same block.
2 Use of this command in a program allows the tool to
advance little by little. This command can also be used
inputoffsetvalues one ata timefromatape byspecifying
this command successively instead of inputting these
values one at a time fromthe MDI unit.
3 With P0 (workpiece coordinate system shift amount
specification), only an X--/Z--axis shift can be entered.
14.4.2
Changingof Tool
OffsetValue
Format
242
When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a
command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the
differencebetweenthecurrent coordinatevalueandthecoordinatevalue
of thecommandmeasurement positionandusesit astheoffset valuefor
the tool. When the tool has been already offset, it is moved to the
measurement position with that offset value. If the CNC judges that
further offset is needed after calculating the difference between the
coordinate values of the measurement position and the commanded
coordinatevalues, thecurrent offset valueisfurther offset.
Refer totheinstructionmanualsof themachinetool builder for details.
When moving the tool to a position for measurement, the coordinate
system must be set in advance. (The work coordinate system for
programmingisusedincommon.)
A movement to ameasurement position is performed by specifying as
followsintheMDI, or AUTOmode:
G36Xx
a
; or G37Zz
a
;
In this case, the measurement position should be x
a
or z
a
(absolute
command).
Execution of this command moves the tool at the rapid traverse rate
toward the measurement position, lowers the feedrate halfway, then
continues to moveit until the approach end signal fromthemeasuring
instrumentisissued. Whenthetool tipreachesthemeasurementposition,
themeasuringinstrument outputsthemeasurement position reachsignal
totheCNC whichstopsthetool.
Thecurrenttool offsetvalueisfurther offsetbythedifferencebetweenthe
coordinate value (a or b) when the tool has reached themeasurement
positionandthevalueof x
a
or z
a
specifiedinG36Xx
a
or G37Zz
a
.
Offsetvaluex=Currentoffsetvaluex+(a--x
a
)
Offsetvaluez=Currentoffsetvaluez+(b--z
a
)
x
a
: ProgrammedX--axismeasurement point
z
a
: ProgrammedZ--axismeasurement point
Theseoffset valuescanalsobealteredfromtheMDI keyboard.
14.5
AUTOMATIC TOOL
OFFSET(G36, G37)
Explanations
D Coordinatesystem
D Movementto
measurementposition
D Offset
243
Thetool, whenmovingfromthestatingpositiontowardthemeasurement
positionpredictedby x
a
or z
a
inG36 or G37, isfed at therapidtraverse
rateacross areaA. Then thetool stops at point T (x
a
--g
x
or z
a
--g
z
) and
moves at the measurement feedrate set by parameter (No.558) across
areasB, C, andD. If theapproachendsignal turnsonduringmovement
acrossareaB, alarmisgenerated. If theapproachendsignal doesnotturn
on before point V, and tool stops at point V and alarm (No.080) is
generated.
e
g
T S (x
s
, z
s
)
X, Z
F
R
F
P
U V
|x
a
--x
s
|. |z
a
--z
s
|
U (x
a
, z
a
)
Startingposition
e
F
R
: Rapidtraverse rate
F
P
: Measurement feedrate (set by parameter(No.558))
A B C D
Predictedmeasurement position
Fig. 14.5 FeedrateandAlarm
Z--axis measurement
position
Programmed
zero point
X--axis
measurement
position
100
800
300
50
380
Offset value Offset value
(Before measurement) (After measurement)
X 100.0 98.0
Z 0 4.0
Tool number T01
G50X760.0Z1100.0; Programmingof absolutezeropoint
(Coordinatesystemsetting)
S01M03T0101; Specifiestool T1, offset number 1, andspindle
revolution
G36X200.0; Movestothemeasurement position
If thetool hasreachedthemeasurement
positionat X198.0; sincethecorrect
measurement positionis200mm, theoffset
valueisalteredby 198.0--200.0=--2.0mm.
D Feedrateandalarm
Examples
244
G00X204.0; RefractsalittlealongtheX axis.
G37Z800.0; MovestotheZ--axismeasurement position.
If thetool hasreachedthemeasurement position
at X804.0, theoffset valueisalteredby
804.0--800.0=4.0mm.
T0101; Further offsetsby thedifference.
Thenewoffset valuebecomesvalidwhentheT
codeisspecifiedagain.
WARNING
1 Measurement speed(Fp), g, and e are set as parameters
(Fp : No.558, g : No.731, 732,
e : No.133, 134) by machine tool builder. e must be
positive numbers so that g>e.
2 Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before G36,
G37.
3 When a manual movement is inserted into a movement
at a measurement feedrate, return the tool to theposition
before the inserted manual movement for restart.
4 When using the optional tool nose radius compensation
function, the tool offset amount is determined
considering the value of tool nose R. Makesure thattool
nose radius value is set correctly.
Example) When the tool nose center coincides with the
start point.
The tool actually moves frompoint A to point B, but the
tool offset value is determined assuming that the tool
moves to point C considering the tool nose radius value.
A
B
C
Tool nose radius value
Measurement position
Actual
movement
Movement coinsidering
tool nose radius value
NOTE
1 When there is no T code command before G36 or G37,
alarmNo. 81 is generated.
2 When a T code is specified in the same block as G36 or
G37, alarmNo.82 is generated.
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 15. CUSTOM MACRO A
245
15
CUSTOMMACROA
A functioncoveringagroupof instructionsisstoredinmemory assame
asasubprogram. Thestoredfunctionispresentedbyoneinstruction, so
that only therepresentativeinstruction need bespecified to executethe
function. Thisgroupof registeredinstructionsiscalledacustommacro
body and the representative instruction is called a custom macro
instruction. Thecustommacrobodymaysimplybecalledamacro. And
thecustommacroinstructionmay becalledamacrocall command.
Regular Program
Custommacro
instruction
Custommacro body
A groupof
instructions for
a certainfunction
Programmers need only remember representative macro instructions
without havingtoremember all theinstructionsinacustommacrobody.
Thethreemostsignificantpointsoncustommacrosarethat variablescan
be used in the custommacro body, operations can be performed on
variables and actual values can be assigned to thevariables in custom
macroinstructions.
PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO A B--61394E/08
246
Thecustommacro command is thecommand to call thecustommacro
body.
Commandformat isasfollows:
M98P__;
CalledmacrobodyprogramNo.
Withtheabovecommand, themacrobody specifiedby P iscalled.
ThesubprogramcanbecalledusingM codeset inparameter.
N_ G_ X_ M98P<p>;
instead of commanding as above, the same operation can be
commanded usingfollowingcommand :
N_ G_ X_ M<m>;
Thecorrespondenceof M code<m> which calls subprogramand
the program number <p> (O9001 to O9003) of the called
subprogramshall beset by parameters (No. 0240 toNo. 0242).
For subprogram call, a maximum of 3 among M03 to M255,
except M30 and M code which does not buffer (parameter No.
111, 112) can beused.
NOTE
1 Similarly to M98, signal MF and Mcode are not output.
2 Delivery of argument is not possible.
3 Subprogramcall M code used in the subprogramwhich
is called by M or T code does not executes subprogram
call but as an ordinal Mcode.
15.1
CUSTOMMACRO
COMMAND
15.1.1
M98(Singlecall)
Format
15.1.2
SubprogramCall Using
MCode
247
Whenparameter (No. 040#5) issetbeforehand, subprogram(O9000)can
becalledusingT code.
N_ G_ X_ T<t>;
the above command results in the same operation of command
of thefollowing2 blocks.
#149=<t>;
N_ G_ X_ M98P9000;
TheT codet__ isstoredinacommonvariable#0149asanargument.
NOTE
1 It is not possible to command with a same block as that
of subprogramcall using Mcode.
2 Subprogramcall T code used in the subprogramwhich
is called by M or T code does not executes subprogram
call but as an original T code.
15.1.3
Tcode
248
Inthecustommacrobody, theCNCcommand, whichusesordinaryCNC
commandvariables, calculation, andbranchcommandcanbeused. The
custommacro body starts fromthe programNo. which immediately
followsOandendsat M99.
O_____________ ; PROGRAMNO.
G65H01.... ; CALCULATION COMMAND
G90G00X#101; CNC COMMANDUSINGVARI-
ABLES
G65H82.... ; BRANCH COMMAND
M99; ENDOF CUSTOMMACRO
Fig. 15.2 Constructionof thecustommacrobody
A variablecan bespecified tomakethemacro flexibleand versatileby
applying the calculated variable when calling the macro or when
executing themacro itself. Multiplevariables areidentified fromeach
other by variablenumbers.
(1) Howto express variables
Variables are expressed by variablenumbers following #as shown
below.
#i (i =100, 101.....)
(Example) #5, #109, #1005
(2) Howto quote variables
A numeral following an address can be replaced by a variable.
Assumethat <Address>#1 or <Address>-- #1 is programmed, and
it means that the variable value or its complement serves as the
commandvalueof theaddress.
(Example)
F#103 F15wascommandedwhen#103=15 . .
Z--#110 Z--250wascommandedwhen#110=250 .
G#130 G3wascommandedwhen#103=3. . .
Whenreplacingavariablenumber withavariable, itisnotexpressed
as ##100, for example, but expressas #9100. That is, 9 next
to#indicatesthesubstituteof thevariablenumber, whilethelower
number tobereplaced.
(Example)
If #100=105and#105=--500, X#9100 indicatesthat X--500was
commanded, andX--#9100indicatesthatX500wascommanded.
NOTE
1 No variable can be quoted at address O and N.
NeitherO#100 nor N#120 can be programmed.
2 It is not possible to command a value exceeding the
maximumcommand value set in each address.
When #30=120, G#30 has exceeded the maximum
command value.
15.2
CUSTOMMACRO
BODY
15.2.1
Variables
249
(3) Display andsettingof variable values
VariablevaluescanbedisplayedontheCRT screen, andavaluecan
beset inavariableby usingtheMDI keys.
Variables are sorted into common variables and system variables
accordingtovariablenumbers, andtheir applicationsandcharactersdiffer
fromeachother.
(1) Commonvariable #100to #149and#500to #531
Common variables arecommon to main programs and each macro
called fromthesemainprograms. That is, #i inamacrois equal to
#i inanother macro.
Commonvariables#100to#149areclearedwhenthepower isturned
off, and reset to 0 just after power was turned on. Common
variables#500to#531arenotcleared, evenif power isturnedoff, and
their valuesremainunchanged.
(2) Systemvariable
The systemvariables are defined as variables whose applications
remainfixed.
(a) Interfaceinput signals#1000to#1015, #1032
Interfacesignalscanbeknown, by readingsystemvariables
#1000to#1015for readinginterfacesignals.
2
15
2
14
2
13
2
12
2
11
2
10
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
#1015
#1014
#1013
#1012
#1011
#1010
#1009
#1008
#1007
#1006
#1005
#1004
#1003
#1002
#1001
#1000
1
0
#1032= #(1000+i) 2
i
i=0
15
Inputsignal Variablevalue
Contact closed
Contact opened
By readingsystemvariable #1032, all the input signals canbe readat once.
NOTE
1 No value can be substituted into systemvariables
#1000 to #1032.
2 Systemvariables #1000 to #1015 can be displayed by
diagnostic function.
No.130 U10 to U17
No.131 U18 to U15
3 Systemvariables #1000to #1032can beused onlywhen
PMC is combined.
15.2.2
Kindof Variables
250
(b) Interfaceoutput signals#1100to#1115, #1132, #1133
A valuecanbesubstitutedintosystemvariables#1100to#1115
for sendingtheinterfacesignals.
2
15
2
14
2
13
2
12
2
11
2
10
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO9 UO8 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
#1115
#1114
#1113
#1112
#1111
#1110
#1109
#1108
#1107
#1106
#1105
#1104
#1103
#1102
#1101
#1100
#1132= #(1100+i) 2
i
i=0
15
Bysubstitutingavalueintosystemvariable#1132, all outputsignals
(UO0toUO15) canbesent out at once.
Outputsignal
Variablevalue
Contact closed
Contact open
32 INTERFACE SIGNALS (UO100 TO UO131) CAN BE
SENT OUT BY #1133 AT
ONCE.
1
0
NOTE
1 If any other number than 0 or 1 is substituted into
systemvariables #1100 to #1115, it is treated as 1.
2 It is possible to read the values of system variables
#1100 to #1133.
3 System variables #1100 to #1115 and #1133 can be
displayed by diagnostic function.
DGNOS No.162 UO0 to UO7
No.163 UO8 to UO15
No.196 UO100 to UO107
No.197 UO108 to UO115
No.198 UO116 to UO123
No.199 UO124 to UO131
4 Systemvariables #1100 to #1133 can beused onlywhen
PMC is combined.
251
(c) Tool offset values#2001to#2932
Offset valuescanbecheckedfromthevaluesof systemvariables
#2001to#2932, usedtoholdtool offset values. By assigninga
valuetosystemvariable#i, anoffset valuecanbemodified.
A tool positionoffset for theX--axisishandledasaradiuswhen
theoffset isdeterminedfromaspecifiedradius. A tool position
offset fortheX--axisishandledasadiameter whentheoffset is
determinedfromaspecifieddiameter.
Tool offset
number
Tool offset
value
Wear offset
value
Geometry
offsetvalue
X 1to 32 #2001to#2032 #2001to#2032 #2701to#2732
Z 1to 32 #2101to#2132 #2101to#2132 #2801to#2832
R 1to 32 #2201to#2232 #2201to#2232 #2901to#2932
T 1to 32 #2301to#2332 #2301to#2332 #2301to#2332
Y 1to 32 #2401to#2432 #2401to#2432 #2401to#2432
(Example) #103=#2005
TheX--axistool positionoffset valueof offset
number 5isassignedtovariable#103. Whenthe
offset is1.5mm, thevalueof #103is1500.
(d) Workpiececoordinatesystemshift amounts#2501, #2601
Theamountsof workpiececoordinatesystemshift canbe
determinedby readingsystemvariables#2501and#2601. The
amountsof workpiececoordinatesystemshift canalsobemodified
by assigningvaluestosystemvariables#i.
Controlledaxis
Workpiececoordinatesystem
shiftamount
X--axis #2501
Z--axis #2601
(e) Clock information#3011, 3012(option)
It ispossibletoknowtheyear, month, day, hour, minute, and
secondby readingsystemvariables#3011, #3012.
Kind Systemvariable
Year, Month, Day #3011
Hour, Minute, Second #3102
(Example) Whenit isMay 20, 19974:175 PM
#3012=19970520,
#3012=161705
252
(f) Number of necessary parts, number of machinedparts
By usingsystemvariables, thenumber of partsrequiredandthe
number of partsmachinedcanbereadandassigned.
Kind Systemvariable
Number of machinedparts #3901
Number of necessary
parts
#3902
(g) Modal information#4001to#4120
It ispossibletoknowthecurrent valuesof modal information
(modal commandgiventill immediately precedingblock) by
readingvaluesof systemvariables#4001to#4120.
NOTE
Do not substifute a negative value.
#4001 G CODE (GROUP 01)
#4109 F CODE
#4113 MCODE
#4114 SEQUENCE NO.
#4115 PROGRAMNO.
#4119 S CODE
#4120 T CODE
Variables Modal information
NOTE
The unit will be the one being used when the command is
given.
253
(h) Positioninformation#5001to#5124
Thepositioninformationcanbeknownby readingsystem
variables#5001to#5124. Theunit of positioninformationis
0.001mminmetric input and0.0001inchininchinput.
System
variables
Positioninformation
Reading
while
moving
Cutter andtool
length
compensation
#5001
#5002
#5003
#5004
Block endpoint positionof X
axis
Block endpoint positionof Z
axis
Block endpoint positionof 3rd
axis (C axis)
Block endpoint positionof 4th
axis (Y axis)
Possible
Not considered.
Programcom-
mandposition
#5021
#5022
#5023
#5024
X axis coordinate position
Zaxis coordinate position
3rdaxis (Cf axis) coordinate
position
4thaxis (Y axis) coordinate
position
Impossi-
ble
Considered.
Positionof tool
reference point
(Machine coor-
dinate)
#5041
#5042
#5043
#5044
Present positionof X axis
Present positionof Zaxis
Present positionof 3rdaxis (Cf
axis)
Present positionof 4thaxis (Y
axis)
Impossi-
ble
Considered.
Positionof tool
reference point
#5061
#5062
#5063
#5064
Skipsignal positionof X axis
Skipsignal positionof Zaxis
Skipsignal positionof 3rdaxis
(Cf axis)
Skipsignal positionof 4thaxis
(Y axis)
Possible
Considered.
Positionof tool
reference point
#5081
#5082
#5084
Tool positionoffset amount or
wear offset amount of X axis
wear offset amount of Zaxis
wear offset amount of 4thaxis
(Y axis)
impossi-
ble
#5121
#5122
#5124
Graphic offset amount of X axis
Graphic offset amount of Zaxis
Graphic offset amount of 4th
axis (Y axis)
impossi-
ble
254
General format:
G65HmP#i Q#j R#k;
m: 01to99. Anoperationinstructionor branchinstructionfunctionis
represented.
#i : Nameof variableusedtoholdtheresult of anoperation
#j : Nameof variableonwhichanoperationistobeperformed.
(A constant canalsobespecified.)
#k :Nameof variableonwhichanoperationistobeperformed.
(A constant canalsobespecified.)
(Meaning) #i=#j #k
Specifiedusingthe Hmoperator
Example
P#100Q#101R#102 #100=#101#102 . .
P#100Q#101R15 #100=#10115 . . . .
P#100Q--100R#102 #100=--100#102 . .
P#100Q120R--50 #100=120--50 . . . .
P#100Q--#101R#102 #100=--#101#012 .
NOTE
1 No decimal point can be put to variable values.
Therefore, the meaning of each valueis thesame as that
designated without decimal point when quoted in each
address.
(Example) #100 =10
X#100 0.01 mm(metric input)
2 Those indicating an angle must be expressed by degree,
and input increment is 1/1000 degree.
(Example) 100 0.1
Table15.2.3
Gcode Hcode Function Definition
G65 H01 Definition, substitution #i =#j
G65 H02 Addition #i =#j +#k
G65 H03 Subtraction #i =#j -- #k
G65 H04 Product #i =#j #k
G65 H05 Division #i =#j #k
G65 H11 Logical sum #i =#j. OR. #k
G65 H12 Logical product #i =#j. AND. #k
G65 H13 Exclusive OR #i =#j. XOR. #k
G65 H21 Square root
#i
#j
G65 H22 Absolute value #i =| #j |
15.2.3
OperationInstruction
andBranchInstruction
(G65)
255
Table15.2.3
Gcode Definition Function Hcode
G65 H23 Remainder #i =#j -- trunc (#j / #k) #k (trunc : Discardfractions less
than1)
G65 H24 ConversionfromBCDto
binary
#i =BIN (#j)
G65 H25 Conversionfrombinary to
BCD
#i =BCD(#j)
G65 H26 Combinedmultiplication/divi-
sion
#i =(#i #j) #k
G65 H27 Combinedsquare root 1
#i
#J
2
#K
2
G65 H28 Combinedsquare root 2
#i
#J
2
#K
2
G65 H31 Sine #i =#j SIN (#k)
G65 H32 Cosine #i =#j COS (#k)
G65 H33 Tangent #i =#j TAN (#k)
G65 H34 Arctangent #i =ATAN (#j / #k)
G65 H80 Unconditional divergence GOTOn
G65 H81 Conditional divergence 1 IF#j =#k, GOTOn
G65 H82 Conditional divergence 2 IF#j #k, GOTOn
G65 H83 Conditional divergence 3 IF#j >#k, GOTOn
G65 H84 Conditional divergence 4 IF#j <#k, GOTOn
G65 H99 P/S alarmoccurrence P/S alarmnumber 500+noccurrence
(a)Definitionandsubstitutionof variable #i =#j
G65H01P#i Q#j ;
[Example] G65H01P#101Q1055; (#101=1005)
G65H01P#101Q#110; (#101=#110)
G65H01P#101Q--#112; (#101=--#112)
(b)Addition#i =#j +#k
G65H02P#i Q#j R#k;
[Example] G65H02P#101Q#102R15; (#101=#102+15)
(c)Subtraction#i =#j -- #k
G65 H03 P#i Q#j R#k;
[Example] G65H03P#101Q#102R#103; (#101=#102--#103)
(d)Product #i =#j #k
G65H04P#i Q#j R#k;
[Example] G65H04P#101Q#102R#103; (#101=#102#103)
D Variablearithmetic
command
256
(e)Division#i =#j #k
G65H05P#i Q#j R#k;
[Example] G65H05P#101Q102R#103; (#101=#102#103)
(f) Logical sum#i =#j.OR.#k
G65H11P#i Q#j R#k;
[Example] G65H11P#101Q102R#103; (#101=#102.OR.#103)
(g)Logical product #i =#j.AND.#k
G65H12P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H12P#101Q#102R#103; (#101=#102.AND.#103)
(h)Exclusive OR #i =#j.XOR.#k
G65H13P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H13P#101Q#102R#103; (#101=#102.XOR.#103)
(i) Square root #i =
G65H21P#i Q#j ;
[Example] G65H21P#101Q#102; (#101= 102)
#j
(j) Absolute value #i =|#j|

G65H22P#i Q#j ;
[Example] G65H22P#101Q#102; (#101=|#102|)
(k)Remainder #i =#j -- trunc (#j/#k)#k
trunc : Discardfractionslessthan1
G65H23P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H23P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101=#102--trunc (#102/#103)#103)
(l) ConversionfromBCDto binary #i =BIN (#j)
G65H24P#i Q#j ;
[Example] G65H24P#101Q#102; (#101=BIN (#102))
(m)Conversionfrombinary to BCD#i =BCD(#j)
G65H25P#i Q#j ;
[Example] G65H25P#101Q#102; (#101=BCD(#102))
(n)Combinedmultiplication/division#i =(#1#j) #k
G65H26P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H26P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101=(#101#102)(#103)
(o)Combinedsquare root 1#i =
G65H27P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H27P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101= )
#j
2
#k
2
#102
2
#103
2
(p)Combinedsquare root 2#i =
G65H28P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H28P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101= )
#j
2
#k
2
#102
2
#103
2
(q)Sine #i =#j SIN (#k) (degree unit)
G65H31P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H31P#101Q#102R#103; (#101=#102 SIN(#103)
257
(r) Cosine #i =#j COS (#k) (degree unit)
G65H32P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H32P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101=#102 COS (#103)
(s)Tangent #i =#j TAN (#k) (degree unit)
G65H33P#i Q#j R#k ;
[Example] G65H33P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101=#102 TAN (#103)
(t) Arctangent #i =ATAN (#j/#k) (degree unit)
G65H34P#i Q#j R#k ; (0 #i <360)
[Example] G65H34P#101Q#102R#103;
(#101=ATAN (#102/ #103))
NOTE
1 Angle in (q) to (t) must be indicated by degree and the
least input increment is 1/1000 degree.
2 If either Q or R necessary for each arithmetic operation
was not indicated, its value is calculated as 0.
3 All figures below decimal point are truncated if each
arithmetic result includes decimal point.
(a)Unconditional branch
G65H80Pn; n: Sequencenumber
[Example] G65H80P120; (DivergetoN120)
(b) Conditional divergence 1(#j=#k)
G65H81PnQ#j R#k ; n: Sequencenumber
[Example] G65H81P1000Q#101R#102;
#101=#102, gotoN1000
#101 #102, gotonext
(c) Conditional divergence 2(#j #k)
[Example] G65H82P1000Q#101R#102;
#101 #102, gotoN1000
#101=#102, goto
(d) Conditional divergence 3(#j>#k)
[Example] G65H83P1000Q#101R#102;
#101>#102, gotoN1000
#101 #102, gotonext
(e) Conditional divergence 4(#j<#k)
[Example] G65H84P1000Q#101R#102;
#101<#102, gotoN1000
#101 #102, gotonext
(f) Conditional divergence 5(#j #k)
[Example] G65H85P1000Q#101R#102;
#101 #102, gotoN1000
#101<#102, gotonext
D Branchinstruction
258
(g) Conditional divergence 6(#j #k)
[Example] G65H86P1000Q#101R#102;
#101 #102, gotoN1000
#101>#102, gotonext
(h) P/S alarmoccurrence
G65H99Pn; AlarmNo. : 500+n
[Example] G65H99P15; P/S alarm515occurrence
NOTE
1 If positive numbers were designated as sequence
numbers at branch designations, they are searched
forward first and then, backward. If negative numbers
were designated, they are searched backward first and
then, forward.
2 Sequence number can also be designated by variables.
(Example) G65 H81 P#100 Q#101 R#102 ;
When conditions are satisfied,
processing branches to the block having
the sequence number designated with
#100.
259
1) Howtoinput #
When /#EOB key is depressed after
address, #codeis input
2) It isalsopossibletogiveamacroinstructionintheMDI
mode. However addressdataother thanG65arenot
displayedby keyingoperation.
3) AddressH, P, QandRof Theoperationandbranchinstructionsmust
alwaysbewrittenafter G65. AddressOandN only arewritable
beforeG65.
H02G65P#100Q#101R#102; Error .
N100G65H01P#100Q10; Correct . . . .
4) Singleblock
Generally, theTheoperation andbranch instructionsblock doesnot
stopevenif singleblock stopisturnedon. However, by setting
parameter No. 011#5, it ispossibletomakesingleblock effective.
Thisisusedfor macro
testing.
5) Variablevaluescanbetakenwithinarangeof --2
31
to
2
31
--1, but they arenot displayedcorrectly, exceptfor --99999999to
99999999. If they exceed the above range, they are displayed
as *********.
6) It ispossibletonest subprogramsuptofour times.
7) Sinceaninteger only isemployableasthevariablevalue, incasethe
operationresultswithdecimal numbers, thefiguresbelowdecimal
point truncated, if anarithmetic result containsafractionpart.
Particularly becareful withthearithmetic sequence, accordingly.
[Example]
When #100=35, #101=10, #102=5, thefollowingresults.
#110=#100#101(=3)
#111=#110#102(=15)
#120=#100#102(=175)
#121=#120#101(=17)
#111=15and #121=17
8) When acustommacrois loaded fromapaper tapein theEI A
code, & codeis treated as #, becausethereis no# codein
theEIA code.
15.2.4
Notes onCustom
Macro
PROGRAMMING 16. CUSTOM MACRO B B--61394E/08
260
16
CUSTOMMACROB
Although subprograms areuseful for repeating thesame operation, the
custommacrofunctionalsoallowsuseof variables, arithmetic andlogic
operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general
programssuchaspocketinganduser--definedcannedcycles.Amachining
programcan call a custommacro with a simple command, just like a
subprogram.
O0001;
:
:
:
G65P9010R50.0L2;
:
:
M30;
Machiningprogram Custommacro
O9010;
#1=#18/2;
G01X#1Z#1F0.3;
G02X#1Z--#1R#1;
:
:
:
M99;
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 16. CUSTOM MACRO B
261
AnordinarymachiningprogramspecifiesaGcodeandthetravel distance
directly withanumeric value; examplesareG100andX100.0.
Withacustommacro, numeric values canbespecifieddirectly or using
avariablenumber. When avariablenumber is used, thevariablevalue
canbechangedby aprogramor usingoperationsontheMDI panel.
#1=#2+100;
G01X#1F0.3;
Explanation
When specifying a variable, specify a number sign (#) followed by a
variablenumber. Personal computers allowanameto beassigned toa
variable, but thiscapability isnot availablefor custommacros.
Example: #1
Anexpressioncanbeusedtospecify avariablenumber. Insuchacase,
theexpressionmust beenclosedinbrackets.
Example: #[#1+#2--12]
Local andcommonvariablescanhavevalue0or avalueinthefollowing
ranges:
--10
47
to--10
--29
0
+10
--29
to+10
47
If theresult of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarmNo. 111 is
issued.
Whenavariablevalueisdefinedinaprogram, thedecimal point canbe
omitted.
Example:
When#1=123; isdefined,theactual valueof variable#1is123.000.
Whenthevalueof avariableisnotdefined, suchavariableisreferredto
asanull variable. Variable#0is alwaysanull variable. It cannot be
writtento, but it canberead.
16.1
VARIABLES
D Variablerepresentation
D Rangeof variablevalues
D Omissionof thedecimal
point
D Undefinedvariable
262
Variablesareclassifiedintofour typesby variablenumber.
Table16.1Types of variables
Variable
number
Typeof
variable
Function
#0 Always
null
This variable is always null. No value can
be assignedto this variable.
#1-- #33 Local
variables
Local variables canonly be usedwithina
macro to holddata suchas the results of
operations. Whenthe power is turnedoff,
local variables are initializedto null. When
a macro is called, arguments are assigned
to local variables.
#100-- #149(#199)
#500-- #531(#999)
Common
variables
Commonvariables canbe sharedamong
different macro programs. Whenthe power
is turnedoff, variables #100to #149are
initializedto null. Variables #500to #531
holddata evenwhenthe power is turned
off. As anoption, commonvariables #150
to #199and#532to #999are also avail-
able. However, whenthese values are us-
ing, the lengthof the tape that canbe used
for storage decreases by 8.5m.
#1000 -- System
variables
Systemvariables are usedto readand
write a variety of NC data items suchas the
current positionandtool compensationval-
ues.
NOTE
Common variables #150 to #199 and #532 to #999 are
optional.
Toreferencethevalueof avariableinaprogram, specifyawordaddress
followedby thevariablenumber. Whenanexpressionisusedtospecify
avariable, enclosetheexpressioninbrackets.
Example: G01X[#1+#2]F#3;
A referenced variable value is automatically rounded according to the
least input increment of theaddress.
Example:
WhenG00X#1;isexecutedona1/1000--mmCNCwith12.3456assigned
tovariable#1,theactual commandisinterpretedasG00X12.346;.
Toreversethesignof areferencedvariablevalue, prefix aminussign(--)
to#.
Example: G00X--#1;
Whenanundefinedvariableisreferenced, thevariableisignoreduptoan
addressword.
Example:
Whenthevalueof variable#1is0,andthevalueof variable#2isnull,
executionof G00X#1Z#2; resultsinG00X0;.
D Types of variables
D Referencingvariables
263
Inthe0--TTCmacrovariablesareprovidedfor eachtool post. Specifying
bit 5 or 6 of parameter Nos.047 and 218 allows someof thecommon
variablestobeusedfor all tool posts.
Limitations
Programnumbers, sequencenumbers, and optional block skipnumbers
cannot bereferencedusingvariables.
Example:
Variablescannotbeusedinthefollowingways:
O#1;
/#2G00X100.0;
N#3Z200.0;
D Custommacrovariables
commontotool posts
(0--TTC)
264
Systemvariablescanbeusedtoreadandwriteinternal NC datasuchas
tool compensationvaluesandcurrent positiondata. Note, however, that
somesystemvariablescan only beread. Systemvariables areessential
for automationandgeneral--purposeprogramdevelopment.
Explanations
Signalscanbeexchangedbetweentheprogrammablemachinecontroller
(PMC) andcustommacros.
Table16.2(a) Systemvariables for interfacesignals
Variable
number
Function
#1000to #1015
#1032
A 16--bit signal canbe sent fromthe PMC to a custom
macro. Variables #1000to #1015are usedto reada
signal bit by bit. Variable #1032is usedto readall 16bits
of a signal at one time.
#1100to #1115
#1132
A 16--bit signal canbe sent froma custommacro to the
PMC. Variables #1100to #1115are usedto write a signal
bit by bit. Variable #1132is usedto write all 16bits of a
signal at one time.
#1133 Variable #1133is usedto write all 32bits of a signal at
one time froma custommacro to the PMC.
Note, that values from--99999999to +99999999canbe
usedfor #1133.
Whenthesystemdoesnotdifferentiatetool geometrycompensationfrom
tool wear compensation, usevariablenumbersfor wear compensation.
Table16.2(b) Systemvariables for tool compensationmemoryC
Compensa-
tionnumber
Xaxis tool
position
Zaxis tool
position
Tool nose
radius
compensation
value
Imaginary
tool nose
positionT
Yaxis current
positionoffset
Wear Geom-
etry
Wear Geom-
etry
Wear Geom-
etry
Wear Geom-
etry
1
:
32
#2001
:
#2032
#2701
:
#2732
#2101
:
#2132
#2801
:
#2832
#2201
:
#2232
#2901
:
#2932
#2301
:
#2332
#2401
:
#2432
#2451
:
#2482
Table16.2(c) Systemvariablefor macroalarms
Variable
number
Function
#3000 Whena value from0to 200is assignedto variable #3000,
the NC stops withanalarm. After anexpression, analarm
message not longer than26characters canbe described.
The CRT screendisplays alarmnumbers by adding500to
the value invariable #3000alongwithanalarmmessage.
16.2
SYSTEMVARIABLES
D Interfacesignals
D Tool compensation
values
D Macroalarms
265
Example:
#3000=1(TOOL NOTFOUND);
Thealarmscreendisplays501TOOL NOTFOUND.
Timeinformationcanbereadandwritten.
Table16.2(d) Systemvariables for timeinformation
Variable
number
Function
#3001 This variable functions as a timer that counts in1--millisecondincrements at all
times. Whenthe power is turnedon, the value of this variable is reset to 0. When
65535milliseconds is reached, the value of this timer returns to 0.
#3002 This variable functions as a timer that counts in1--hour increments whenthe cycle
start lampis on. This timer preserves its value evenwhenthe power is turnedoff.
When1145324.612hours is reached, the value of this timer returns to 0.
#3011 This variable canbe usedto readthe current date (year/month/day) (This is option).
Year/month/day informationis convertedto anapparent decimal number. For ex-
ample, March28, 1997is representedas 19970328.
#3012 This variable canbe usedto readthe current time (hours/minutes/seconds).
Hours/minutes/seconds informationis convertedto anapparent decimal number.
For example, 34minutes and56seconds after 3p.m. is representedas 153456.
Thecontrol stateof automatic operationcanbechanged.
Table16.2(e) Systemvariable(#3003) for automatic operationcontrol
#3003 Singleblock
Completionof anauxiliary
function
0 Enabled To be awaited
1 Disabled To be awaited
2 Enabled Not to be awaited
3 Disabled Not to be awaited
Whenthepower isturnedon, thevalueof thisvariableis0.
Whensingleblock stopisdisabled, singleblock stopoperationisnot
performedevenif thesingleblock switchisset toON.
When await for thecompletion of auxiliary functions (M, S, and T
functions) is not specified, programexecution proceeds to the next
block before completion of auxiliary functions. Also, distribution
completionsignal DEN isnot output.
Table16.2(f) Systemvariable(#3004) for automatic operationcontrol
#3004 Feedhold FeedrateOverride
0 Enabled Enabled
1 Disabled Enabled
2 Enabled Disabled
3 Disabled Disabled
D Timeinformation
D Automatic operation
control
266
Whenthepower isturnedon, thevalueof thisvariableis0.
Whenfeedholdisdisabled:
Whenthefeedholdbuttonishelddown, themachinestops inthe
singleblock stop mode. However, singleblock stop operationis
not performed when the single block mode is disabled with
variable#3003.
Whenthefeedhold buttonis pressedthen released, thefeedhold
lampcomeson, butthemachinedoesnotstop; programexecution
continuesandthemachinestopsat thefirst blockwherefeedhold
isenabled.
When feedrate override is disabled, an override of 100% is always
appliedregardlessof thesettingof thefeedrateoverrideswitchonthe
machineoperatorspanel.
Settings can be read and written. Binary values are converted to
decimals.
#9(TAPEF) : Whether to use the FS15tape format conversioncapability
#5(SEQ) : Whether to automatically insert sequence numbers
#2(INCH) : Millimeter input or inchinput
#1(ISO) : Whether to use EIA or ISO as the output code
#0(TVON) : Whether to make a TV check
#15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8
TAPEF
Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SEQ INCH ISO TVON
Setting
#3005
Thenumber(targetnumber)of partsrequiredandthenumber(completion
number) of machinedpartscanbereadandwritten.
Table16.2(g) Systemvariables for thenumber of parts requiredandthe
number of machinedparts
Variablenumber Function
#3901 Number of machinedparts (completionnumber)
#3902 Number of requiredparts (target number)
NOTE
Do not substitute a negative value.
D Settings
D Number of machined
parts
267
Modal information specified in blocks up to theimmediately preceding
block canberead.
Table16.2(h) Systemvariables for modal information
Variable
number
Function
#4001
#4002
#4003
#4004
#4005
#4006
#4007
#4008
#4009
#4010
#4011
#4012
#4014
#4015
#4016
:
#4022
#4109
#4113
#4114
#4115
#4119
#4120
G00, G01, G02, G03, G33, G34 (Group01)
G96, G97 (Group02)
(Group03)
G68, G69 (Group04)
G98, G99 (Group05)
G20, G21 (Group06)
G40, G41, G42 (Group07)
G25, G26 (Group08)
G22, G23 (Group09)
G80-- G89 (Group10)
(Group11)
G66, G67 (Group12)
G54--G59 (Group14)
(Group15)
G17-- G19 (Group16)
: :
(Group22)
F code
Mcode
Sequence number
Programnumber
S code
T code
Example:
When#1=#4001; isexecuted, theresultingvaluein#1is0, 1, 2, 3, 33or 34.
Positioninformationcannot bewrittenbut canberead.
Table16.2(i) Systemvariables for positioninformation
Variable
number
Position
information
Coordinate
system
Tool
com-
pensa-
tionval-
ue
Read
operation
during
movement
#5001to #5004 Block endpoint Workpiece
coordinate
system
Not
included
Enabled
#5021to #5026 Current position Machine
coordinate
system
Included Disabled
#5041to #5046 Current position Workpiece
coordinate
#5061to #5064 Skipsignal position
coordinate
system Enabled
#5081to #5084 Tool offset value Disabled
#5101to #5104 Deviatedservo
position
Thefirst digit (from1to8) representsanaxisnumber.
D Modal information
D Currentposition
268
Tool position offset information represents the valuebeing used for
execution, not thepreviousvalue.
Skipsignal positioninformationrepresentsthepositionwheretheskip
signal isturnedoninaG31(skipfunction) block.
If theskipsignal isnot turnedoninaG31block, skipsignal position
informationrepresentstheendpoint of thespecifiedblock.
When read duringmovement isdisabled, thismeans that expected
valuescannot bereadduetothebuffering(preread) function.
Workpieceoriginoffset valuescanbereadandwritten.
Table16.2(j) Systemvariables for workpieceoriginoffsetvalues
Variable
number
Function
#2550
#2551
:
#2556
X--axis external workpiece originoffset value
X--axis workpiece originoffset value 1(G54)
:
X--axis workpiece originoffset value 6(G59)
#2650
#2651
:
#2656
Z--axis external workpiece originoffset value
Z--axis workpiece originoffset value 1(G54)
:
Z--axis workpiece originoffset value 6(G59)
#2750
#2751
:
#2756
C--axis external workpiece originoffset value
C--axis workpiece originoffset value 1(G54)
:
C--axis workpiece originoffset value 6(G59)
#2850
#2851
:
#2856
Y--axis external workpiece originoffset value
Y--axis workpiece originoffset value 1(G54)
:
Y--axis workpiece originoffset value 6(G59)
NOTE
Variables #2550 to #2856 are optional variables for the
workpiece coordinate systems.
D Workpiececoordinate
systemcompensation
values (workpieceorigin
offsetvalues)
269
TheoperationslistedinTable16.3(a) canbeperformedonvariables. The
expression to the right of the operator can contain constants and/or
variablescombinedby afunctionor operator. Variables#j and#K inan
expressioncanbereplacedwithaconstant. Variablesontheleft canalso
bereplacedwithanexpression.
Table16.3(a) Arithmetic andlogic operation
Function Format Remarks
Definition #i=#j
Sum
Difference
Product
Quotient
#i=#j+#k;
#i=#j--#k;
#i=#j*#k;
#i=#j/#k;
Sine
Cosine
Tangent
Arctangent
#i=SIN[#j];
#i=COS[#j];
#i=TAN[#j];
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k]
;
Anangle is specifiedinde-
grees. 90degrees and30
minutes is representedas
90.5degrees.
Square root
Absolute value
Roundingoff
Roundingdown
Roundingup
#i=SQRT[#j];
#i=ABS[#j];
#i=ROUND[#j];
#i=FIX[#j];
#i=FUP[#j];
OR
XOR
AND
#i=#j OR #k;
#i=#j XOR #k;
#i=#j AND#k;
A logical operationis per-
formedonbinary numbers
bit by bit.
ConversionfromBCDto BIN
ConversionfromBIN to BCD
#i=BIN[#j];
#i=BCD[#j];
Usedfor signal exchange
to andfromthe PMC
Explanations
Theunitsof anglesusedwiththeSIN, COS, TAN, andATAN functions
aredegrees. For example, 90 degrees and30 minutesis representedas
90.5degrees.
After theATAN function, specify thelengths of twosides separatedby
aslash. A result isfoundwhere0 result 360.
Example:
When#1=ATAN[1]/[--1],thevalueof #1is135.0
When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic
operationcommand, IF statement, or WHILE statement, theROUND
functionroundsoff at thefirst decimal place.
Example:
When#1=ROUND[#2];isexecutedwhere#2holds1.2345,thevalue
of variable#1is1.0.
When the ROUND function is used in NC statement addresses, the
ROUNDfunctionroundsoff thespecifiedvalueaccordingtotheleast
input increment of theaddress.
16.3
ARITHMETIC AND
LOGIC OPERATION
D Angleunits
D ATAN function
D ROUND function
270
Example:
Creationofadrillingprogramthatcutsaccordingtothevaluesof
variables#1and#2,thenreturnstotheoriginal position
Supposethattheincrementsystemis1/1000mm,variable#1holds
1.2345,andvariable#2holds2.3456. Then,
G00G91X--#1; Moves1.235mm.
G01X--#2F300; Moves2.346mm.
G00X[#1+#2];
Since1.2345+2.3456=3.5801,thetraveldistanceis3.580,which
doesnotreturnthetool totheoriginal position.
Thisdifferencecomesfromwhetheradditionisperformedbeforeor
after rounding off. G00X--[ROUND[#1]+ROUND[#2]] must be
specifiedtoreturnthetool totheoriginal position.
WithNC, whentheabsolutevalueof theinteger producedbyanoperation
onanumberisgreaterthantheabsolutevalueof theoriginal number, such
anoperationisreferredtoasroundinguptoaninteger. Conversely, when
theabsolutevalueof theinteger produced by an operationon anumber
islessthan theabsolutevalueof theoriginal number, such anoperation
isreferredtoasroundingdowntoaninteger. Beparticularlycareful when
handlingnegativenumbers.
Example:
Supposethat#1=1.2and#2=--1.2.
When#3=FUP[#1]isexecuted,2.0isassignedto#3.
When#3=FIX[#1]isexecuted,1.0isassignedto#3.
When#3=FUP[#2]isexecuted,--2.0isassignedto#3.
When#3=FIX[#2]isexecuted,--1.0isassignedto#3.
Whenafunctionisspecifiedinaprogram, thefirst twocharactersof the
functionnamecanbeusedtospecify thefunction.
Example:
ROUNDRO
FIXFI
Functions
Operationssuchasmultiplicationanddivision(*, /, AND)
Operationssuchasadditionandsubtraction(+, --, OR, XOR)
Example) #1=#2+#3*SIN[#4];
, , and indicate the order of operations.

D Roundingupanddown
toaninteger
D Abbreviations of
arithmetic andlogic
operationcommands
D Priorityof operations
271
Bracketsareusedtochangetheorder of operations. Bracketscanbeused
toadepthof fivelevelsincludingthebracketsusedtoencloseafunction.
Whenadepthof fivelevelsisexceeded, alarmNo. 118occurs.
Example) #1=SIN [ [ [#2+#3] *#4+#5] *#6] ;
to indicate the order of operations.

Limitations
Brackets ([, ]) areused toencloseanexpression. Notethat parentheses
areusedfor comments.
Errorsmay occur whenoperationsareperformed.
Table16.3(b) Errors involvedinoperations
Operation
Average
error
Maximum
error
Typeof error
a =b*c 1.5510
--10
4.6610
--10
a =b / c 4.6610
--10
1.8810
--9
1.2410
--9
3.7310
--9
a =b +c
a =b -- c
2.3310
--10
5.3210
--10
a =SIN [ b ]
a =COS [ b ]
5.010
--9
1.010
--8
a =ATAN [ b ] / [ c ] (*4) 1.810
--6
3.610
--6
NOTE
1 The relative error depends on the result of the operation.
2 Smaller of the two types of errors is used.
3 The absolute error is constant, regardless of the result of
the operation.
4 Function TAN performs SIN/COS.
D Bracketnesting
D Brackets
D Operationerror
a b
Relative error(*1)
Min
(*2)
,

e
Absolute error(*3)
degrees
272
Theprecisionof variablevaluesisabout 8decimal digits. Whenvery
largenumbersarehandledinanadditionor subtraction, theexpected
resultsmay not beobtained.
Example:
Whenanattemptismadetoassignthefollowingvaluestovariables#1
and#2:
#1=9876543210123.456
#2=9876543277777.777
thevaluesof thevariablesbecome:
#1=9876543200000.000
#2=9876543300000.000
Inthiscase,when#3=#2--#1;iscalculated,#3=100000.000results.(The
actual result of this calculation isslightly different because it is
performedinbinary.)
Also beawareof errors that can result fromconditional expressions
usingEQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, andLT.
Example:
IF[#1EQ#2]iseffectedbyerrorsinboth#1and#2,possiblyresulting
inanincorrectdecision.
Therefore,insteadfindthedifferencebetweenthetwovariableswith
IF[ABS[#1--#2]LT0.001].
Then,assumethatthevaluesofthetwovariablesareequal whenthe
differencedoesnotexceedanallowablelimit(0.001inthiscase).
Also, becareful whenroundingdownavalue.
Example:
When#2=#1*1000;iscalculatedwhere#1=0.002;,theresultingvalue
of variable#2isnotexactly2but1.99999997.
Here,when#3=FIX[#2];isspecified,theresultingvalueofvariable#1
isnot2.0but1.0. Inthiscase,rounddownthevalueafter correcting
theerror sothattheresultisgreater thantheexpectednumber,or
rounditoff asfollows:
#3=FIX[#2+0.001]
#3=ROUND[#2]
Whenadivisor of zeroisspecifiedin adivision or TAN[90], alarmNo.
112occurs.
D Divisor
273
Thefollowingblocksarereferredtoasmacrostatements:
Blockscontaininganarithmeticor logicoperation(=)
Blockscontainingacontrol statement(suchasGOTO, DO, END)
Blockscontainingamacrocall command(suchasmacrocallsby
G65, G66, G67, or other Gcodes, or byMcodes)
Anyblockother thanamacrostatementisreferredtoasanNCstatement.
Explanations
Evenwhensingleblockmodeison, themachinedoesnotstop. Note,
however, that themachinestops inthesingleblock modewhen bit 5
of parameter No.061#5is1.
Macroblocksarenot regardedasblocksthat involvenomovementin
thetool noseradiuscompensationmode (seeSection16.7).
NC statements that include a subprogram call command (such as
subprogramcalls by M98 or other M codes, or by T codes) andalso
include an O, N, P, or L address have the same property as macro
statements.
16.4
MACROSTATEMENTS
ANDNC STATEMENTS
D Differences fromNC
statements
D NC statements thathave
thesamepropertyas
macrostatements
274
In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO
statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition
operationsareused:
Branchandrepetition GOTO statement (unconditional branch)
IF statement (conditional branch: if ..., then...)
WHILE statement (repetitionwhile ...)
A branchtosequencenumber noccurs. Whenasequencenumberoutside
of therange1to99999isspecified, alarmNo. 128 occurs. A sequence
number canalsobespecifiedusinganexpression.
GOTO n;
n: Sequence number (1to 99999)
Example:
GOTO1;
GOTO#10;
Specify a conditional expression after IF. If the specified conditional
expression is satisfied, a branch to sequence number n occurs. If the
specifiedconditionisnot satisfied, thenext block isexecuted.
IF [#1GT 10] GOTO 2;
N2G00G91X10.0 ;
:
If the value of variable #1 is greater than 10, a branch to sequence number
N2occurs.
If the condition
is not satisfied
Processing If the conditionis satisfied
Explanations
A conditional expressionmust includeanoperator inserted betweentwo
variables or between a variable and constant, and must be enclosed in
brackets([, ]). Anexpressioncanbeusedinsteadof avariable.
16.5
BRANCHAND
REPETITION
16.5.1
Unconditional Branch
(GOTOStatement)
16.5.2
Conditional Branch
(IFStatement)
D Conditional expression
275
Operatorseachconsist of twolettersandareusedtocomparetwovalues
todeterminewhether theyareequal or onevalueissmalleror greaterthan
theother value. Notethat theinequality signcannot beused.
Table16.5.2 Operators
Operator Meaning
EQ Equal to(=)
NE Not equal to( )
GT Greater(>)
GE Greater thanor equal to( )
LT Less (<)
LE Less thanor equal to( )
Sampleprogram
Thesampleprogrambelowfindsthetotal of numbers1to10.
O9500;
#1=0; Initial value of the variable to holdthe sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#2=1; Initial value of the variable as anaddend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N1IF[#2GT 10] GOTO 2; BranchtoN2whentheaddendis greater than10 .
#1=#1+#2; Calculationto findthe sum . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#2=#2+1; Next addend . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GOTO 1; Branchto N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N2M30; Endof program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify a conditional expression after WHILE. While the specified
conditionis satisfied, theprogramfromDOto ENDis executed. If the
specified condition is not satisfied, programexecution proceeds to the
block after END.
WHILE [conditional expression] DO m; (m=1,2,3)
ENDm ;
:
Processing
If the condition
is not satisfied
If the condition
is satisfied
Explanations
Whilethespecifiedconditionissatisfied, theprogramfromDOtoEND
after WHILE is executed. If the specified condition is not satisfied,
programexecutionproceedstotheblockafter END. Thesameformatas
for theIF statementapplies. A number after DOandanumber after END
are identification numbers for specifying the range of execution. The
numbers1, 2, and3canbeused. Whenanumber other than1, 2, and3
isused, alarmNo. 126occurs.
D Operators
16.5.3
Repetition
(WhileStatement)
276
Theidentification numbers (1 to 3) in aDO--END loop can be used as
manytimesasdesired. Note, however, whenaprogramincludescrossing
repetitionloops(overlappedDOranges), alarmNo. 124occurs.
1. The identification numbers
(1 to 3) can be used as many
times as required.
WHILE [ ] DO 1;
END1;
:
WHILE [ ] DO 1;
END1;
WHILE [ ] DO 1;
END1;
:
WHILE [ ] DO 2;
END2;
WHILE [ ] DO 1;
WHILE [ ] DO 2;
:
WHILE [ ] DO 3;
:
END3;
:
END2;
:
END1;
WHILE [ ] DO 1;
END1;
IF [ ] GOTO n;
Nn
WHILE [ ] DO 1;
END1;
IF [ ] GOTO n;
Nn ;
:
2. DO ranges cannot overlap.
Processing
Processing
Processing
Processing
Processing
3. DO loops can be nested to a
maximumdepthof three levels.
4. Control canbetransferredtothe
outside of a loop.
5. Branches cannot be made toa
locationwithina loop.
Limitations
When DO mis specified without specifying theWHILE statement, an
infinitelooprangingfromDOtoENDisproduced.
When abranch to thesequencenumber specified inaGOTOstatement
occurs, thesequencenumber issearchedfor. For thisreason, processing
inthereversedirectiontakesalonger timethanprocessingintheforward
direction. UsingtheWHILE statement for repetitionreducesprocessing
time.
Inaconditional expressionthatusesEQor NE, anull valueandzerohave
different effects. In other types of conditional expressions, anull value
isregardedaszero.
D Nesting
D Infiniteloops
D Processingtime
D Undefinedvariable
277
Sampleprogram
Thesampleprogrambelowfindsthetotal of numbers1to10.
O0001;
#1=0;
#2=1;
WHILE[#2LE 10]DO1;
#1=#1+#2;
#2=#2+1;
END1;
M30;
278
A macroprogramcanbecalledusingthefollowingmethods:
Macro call Simple call ((G65)
Modal call (G66, G67)
Macro call withG code
Macro call withMcode
Subprogramcall withMcode
Subprogramcall withT code
Limitations
Macrocall (G65) differsfromsubprogramcall (M98)asdescribedbelow.
WithG65, anargument(datapassedtoamacro)canbespecified. M98
doesnot havethiscapability.
When an M98 block contains another NC command (for example,
G01X100.0M98Pp), thesubprogramiscalled after thecommandis
executed. Ontheother hand, G65unconditionally callsamacro.
When an M98 block contains another NC command (for example,
G01X100.0M98Pp), themachinestopsinthesingleblockmode. On
theother hand, G65doesnot stopsthemachine.
With G65, thelevel of local variables changes. WithM98, thelevel
of local variablesdoesnot change.
WhenG65isspecified, thecustommacrospecifiedataddressP iscalled.
Data(argument) canbepassedtothecustommacroprogram.
G65 P p L <argument--specification>;
P : Number of the programto call
: Repetitioncount (1by default)
Argument : Data passedto the macro
O0001;
:
G65P9010L2A1.0B2.0;
:
M30;
O9100;
#3=#1+#2;
IF [#3GT 360] GOTO 9;
G00X#3;
N9M99;
Explanations
After G65, specify at address P theprogramnumber of thecustom
macrotocall.
Whenanumber of repetitionsisrequired, specifyanumber from1to
9999after addressL. WhenL isomitted, 1isassumed.
Byusingargumentspecification, valuesareassignedtocorresponding
local variables.
16.6
MACROCALL
Differences betweenmacro
calls andsubprogram
calls
16.6.1
SimpleCall (G65)
D Calll
279
Two types of argument specification are available. Argument
specification I uses letters other than G, L, O, N, and P once each.
Argument specificationII usesA, B, andC onceeachandalsousesI, J ,
andK uptotentimes. Thetypeof argumentspecificationisdetermined
automatically accordingtothelettersused.
ArgumentspecificationI
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
#1
#2
#3
#7
#8
#9
#11
I
J
K
M
Q
R
S
#4
#5
#6
#13
#17
#18
#19
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#20
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
Address Address Address Variable
number
Variable
number
Variable
number
AddressesG, L, N, O, andP cannot beusedinarguments.
Addressesthat neednot bespecifiedcanbeomitted. Local variables
correspondingtoanomittedaddressareset tonull.
ArgumentspecificationII
Argument specificationII usesA, B, andC onceeachand usesI, J , and
K uptotentimes. Argument specificationII isusedtopassvaluessuch
asthree--dimensional coordinatesasarguments.
A
B
C
I
1
J
1
K
1
I
2
J
2
K
2
I
3
J
3
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#11
K
3
I
4
J
4
K
4
I
5
J
5
K
5
I
6
J
6
K
6
I
7
#12
#13
#14
#15
#16
#17
#18
#19
#20
#21
#22
J
7
K
7
I
8
J
8
K
8
I
9
J
9
K
9
I
10
J
10
K
10
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
#29
#30
#31
#32
#33
Address Variable
number
Address Variable
number
Address Variable
number
Subscripts of I, J , and K for indicating the order of argument
specificationarenot writtenintheactual program.
Limitations
G65must bespecifiedbeforeany argument.
The NC internally identifies argument specification I and argument
specification II. If amixtureof argument specification I and argument
specificationII isspecified, thetypeof argument specificationspecified
later takesprecedence.
The units used for argument data passed without a decimal point
correspondtotheleast input increment of eachaddress. Thevalueof an
argument passed without a decimal point may vary according to the
systemconfigurationof themachine. It isgood practiceto usedecimal
pointsinmacrocall argumentstomaintainprogramcompatibility.
D Argumentspecification
D Format
D Mixtureof argument
specifications I andII
D Positionof thedecimal
point
280
Callscanbenestedtoadepthof four levelsincludingsimplecalls(G65)
andmodal calls(G66). Thisdoesnot includesubprogramcalls(M98).
Local variablesfromlevel 0to4areprovidedfor nesting.
Thelevel of themainprogramis0.
Eachtimeamacroiscalled(withG65or G66), thelocal variablelevel
isincrementedbyone. Thevaluesof thelocal variablesattheprevious
level aresavedintheNC.
When M99 is executed in a macro program, control returns to the
callingprogram. At that time, thelocal variablelevel isdecremented
by one; thevalues of thelocal variables saved when the macro was
calledarerestored.
O0001 ;
:
#1=1 ;
G65 P2 A2 ;
:
:
M30 ;
O0002 ;
:
:
G65 P3 A3 ;
:
:
M99 ;
O0003 ;
:
:
G65 P4 A4 ;
:
:
M99 ;
O0004 ;
:
:
G65 P5 A5 ;
:
:
M99 ;
O0005 ;
:
:
:
:
:
M99 ;
#1 1
: :
#33
#1 2
: :
#33
#1 3
: :
#33
#1 4
: :
#33
#1 5
: :
#33
#100--, #500--
Main program
(level 0)
Macro (level 1) Macro (level 2) Macro (level 3)
Macro
(level 4)
Local variables
(level 0)
(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) (Level 4)
Commonvariables
Variables that can be read fromand written to by
macros at different levels
D Call nesting
D Local variablelevels
281
Movethetool beforehandalongtheX--andZ--axestothepositionwhere
adrillingcyclestarts. Specify Zor Wfor thedepth of ahole, K for the
depthof acut, andF for thecuttingfeedratetodrill thehole.
Z W
K
Cutting
Rapidtraverse
G65 P9100 Kk Ff ;
Zz
Ww
Z : Holedepth(absolutespecification)
W : Holedepth(incremental specification)
K : Cuttingamount per cycle
F : Cuttingfeedrate
O0002;
G50X100.0Z200.0;
G00X0Z102.0S1000M03;
G65P9100Z50.0K20.0F0.3;
G00X100.0Z200.0M05;
M30;
Sampleprogram
(Drill cycle)
D Callingformat
D Programcallingamacro
program
282
O9100;
#1=0; Clear thedatafor thedepthof thecurrent hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#2=0; Clear thedatafor thedepthof theprecedinghole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF[#23NE #0] GOTO1; I fincremental programming,specifiesthejumpto
N1.
IF[#26EQ#0] GOTO8; I f neither Znor Wis specified, an error occurs.
#23=#5002---#26; Calculates thedepth of a hole. . . . . .
N1 #1=#1+#6; Calculates thedepth of thecurrent hole. . . . . . . . .
IF[#1LE #23] GOTO2; Determineswhether theholetobecut istoo
deep.?
#1=#23; Clamps at thedepth of thecurrent hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N2 G00W---#2; Movesthetool to thedepth of theprecedinghole . . . . . . . . .
at thecuttingfeedrate.
G01W--- [#1---#2] F#9; Drills thehole. .
G00W#1; Moves thetool to thedrillingstart point. . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF[#1GE #23] GOTO9; Checks whether drillingis completed.
#2=#1; Stores thedepth of thecurrent hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GOTO1;
N9 M99;
N8 #3000=1(NOTZORUCOMMAND)
OnceG66isissuedtospecify amodal call amacroiscalledafter ablock
specifying movement along axes is executed. Thiscontinues until G67
isissuedtocancel amodal call.
O0001;
:
G66P9100L2A1.0B2.0;
G00G90X100.0;
X125.0;
X150.0;
G67;
:
M30;
O9100;
:
G00Z--#1;
G01Z--#2F0.3;
:
:
:
:
M99;
G66 P p L <argument--specification>;
P : Number of the programto call
: Repetitioncount (1by default)
Argument : Data passedto the macro
Explanations
After G66, specify at addressP aprogramnumber subjecttoamodal .
call.
Whenanumber of repetitionsisrequired, anumberfrom1to9999can
bespecifiedat addressL.
As with a simple call (G65), data passed to a macro programis
specifiedinarguments.
WhenaG67codeisspecified, modal macrocallsarenolongerperformed
insubsequent blocks.
D Macroprogram
(calledprogram)
16.6.2
Modal Call (G66)
D Call
D Cancellation
283
Callscanbenestedtoadepthof four levelsincludingsimplecalls(G65)
andmodal calls(G66). Thisdoesnot includesubprogramcalls(M98).
Modal callscanbenestedbyspecifyinganother G66codeduringamodal
call.
Limitations
InaG66block, nomacroscanbecalled.
G66needstobespecifiedbeforeany arguments.
No macros can becalled in ablock which containsacodesuch asa
miscellaneousfunctionthatdoesnotinvolvemovementalonganaxis.
Local variables(arguments) canonly beset inG66blocks. Notethat
local variablesarenot set eachtimeamodal call isperformed.
Sampleprogram
Thisprogrammakesagrooveat aspecifiedposition.
U
30
50
80
Tool
Workpiece
f60
X
Z
G66P9110UuFf ;
U: Groovedepth(incremental specification)
F : Cuttingfeedof grooving
O0003;
G50X100.0Z200.0;
S1000M03;
G66P9110U5.0F0.5;
G00X60.0Z80.0;
Z50.0;
Z30.0;
G67;
G00X00.0Z200.0M05;
M30;
O9110;
G01U--#21F#9; Cutstheworkpiece. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G00U#21; Retractsthetool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M99;
D Call nesting
D Modal call nesting
D Callingformat
D Programthatcalls a
macroprogram
D Macroprogram
(programcalled)
284
BysettingaGcodenumber usedtocall amacroprograminaparameter,
the macro programcan be called in thesame way as for a simplecall
(G65).
O0001;
:
G81X10.0Z--10.0;
:
M30;
O9010;
:
:
:
N9M99;
Parameter 220=81
Explanations
By setting aG codenumber from1 to255 usedto call acustommacro
program(9010to9019) inthecorrespondingparameter (220to229), the
macroprogramcanbecalledinthesameway aswithG65.
For example, whenaparameter isset sothat macroprogramO9010can
becalled withG81, auser--specific cyclecreated usingacustommacro
canbecalledwithout modifyingthemachiningprogram.
O9010
O9011
O9012
O9013
O9014
O9015
O9016
O9017
O9018
O9019
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
Programnumber Parameter number
As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from1 to 9999 can be
specifiedat addressL.
Aswithasimplecall, twotypesof argument specificationareavailable:
Argument specification I and argument specification II. The type of
argument specification is determined automatically according to the
addressesused.
Limitations
InaprogramcalledwithaGcode, nomacroscanbecalledusingaGcode.
A GcodeinsuchaprogramistreatedasanordinaryGcode. Inaprogram
calledasasubprogramwithanMor Tcode, nomacroscanbecalledusing
aGcode. AGcodeinsuchaprogramisalsotreatedasanordinaryGcode.
16.6.3
MacroCall Using
GCode
D Correspondence
betweenparameter
numbers andprogram
numbers
D Repetition
D Nestingof calls usingG
codes
285
BysettinganMcodenumberusedtocall amacroprograminaparameter,
themacro programcan becalled in thesameway as withasimplecall
(G65).
O0001;
:
M50A1.0B2.0;
:
M30;
O9020;
:
:
:
M99;
Parameter 230=50
Explanations
By settinganM codenumber from1to255usedtocall acustommacro
program(9020to9029) inthecorrespondingparameter (230to239), the
macroprogramcanbecalledinthesameway aswithG65.
O9020
O9021
O9022
O9023
O9024
O9025
O9026
O9027
O9028
O9029
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
Aswithasimplecall, twotypesof argument specificationareavailable:
Argument specification I and argument specification II. The type of
argument specification is determined automatically according to the
addressesused.
Limitations
-- AnMcodeusedtocall amacroprogrammustbespecifiedatthestart
of ablock.
-- InamacrocalledwithaGcodeorinaprogramcalledasasubprogram
withanM or T code, nomacroscanbecalledusinganM code. An
M codeinsuchamacroor programistreatedasanordinary Mcode.
16.6.4
MacroCall Using
anMCode
D Correspondence
betweenparameter
numbers andprogram
numbers
D Repetition
286
BysettinganMcodenumber usedtocall asubprogram(macroprogram)
inaparameter, themacroprogramcanbecalledinthesameway aswith
asubprogramcall (M98).
O0001;
:
M03;
:
M30;
O9001;
:
:
:
M99;
Parameter 240=03
Explanations
By settinganM codenumber from1to255usedtocall asubprogramin
aparameter (240to242), thecorrespondingcustommacroprogram(9001
to9003) canbecalledinthesameway aswithM98.
O9001
O9002
O9003
240
241
242
Argument specificationisnot allowed.
An M code in a macro programthat has been called is treated as an
ordinary M code.
Limitations
InamacrocalledwithaGcodeorinaprogramcalledwithanMor Tcode,
no subprograms can becalled using an M code. An M codein such a
macroor programistreatedasanordinary M code.
16.6.5
anMCode
D Correspondence
betweenparameter
numbers andprogram
numbers
D Repetition
D Mcode
287
By enablingsubprograms(macroprogram) tobecalledwithaT codein
a parameter, a macro programcan be called each time the T code is
specifiedinthemachiningprogram.
O0001;
:
T0203;
:
M30;
O9000;
:
:
:
M99;
Bit 5of parameter 040=1
By settingbit 5of parameter 040to1, themacroprogramO9000canbe
called when aT codeisspecified inthemachiningprogram. A T code
specifiedinamachiningprogramisassignedtocommonvariable#149.
InamacrocalledwithaGcodeorinaprogramcalledwithanMor Tcode,
nosubprogramscanbecalledusingaT code. A T codeinsuchamacro
or programistreatedasanordinary T code.
By usingthesubprogramcall functionthatusesMcodes, thecumulative
usagetimeof eachtool ismeasured.
Thecumulativeusagetimeof eachof tool numbers1to5ismeasured.
Thetimeisnot measuredfor toolswhosenumber is6or more.
The following variables are used to store the tool numbers and
measuredtimes:
#501
#502
#503
#504
#505
Cumulative usage time of tool number 1
UsagetimestartsbeingcountedwhentheM03commandisspecified
and stops when M05 is specified. Systemvariable#3002is usedto
measurethetimeduring which thecyclestart lamp is on. Thetime
during which themachine is stopped by feed hold and singleblock
stop operation is not counted, but thetimeused to changetools and
palletsisincluded.
Set 3inparameter 240, andset 05inparameter 241.
Set 0invariables#501to#505.
16.6.6
SubprogramCalls
UsingaTCode
Explanations
D Call
Limitations
16.6.7
SampleProgram
Conditions
Operationcheck
D Parameter setting
D Variablevaluesetting
288
O0001;
T0100M06;
M03;
M05; Changes#501. . . . . . . . .
T0200M06;
M03;
M05; Changes#502. . . . . . . . . .
T0300M06;
M03;
M05; Changes#503. . . . . . . . . .
T0400M06;
M03;
M05; Changes#504. . . . . . . . . .
T0500M06;
M03;
M05; Changes#505. . . . . . . . . .
M30;
O9001(M03); Macrotostart counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF[FIX[#4120/100]EQ0]GOTO9; Notool specified . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF[FIX[#4120/100]GT5]GOTO9; Out--of--range tool . . . . . . . . . . .
number
#3002=0; Clearsthetimer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N9M03; Rotates thespindleinthe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
forwarddirection.
M99;
O9002(M05); Macrotoendcounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M01;
IF[FIX[#4120/100]EQ0]GOTO9; Notool specified . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF[FIX[#4120/100]GT5]GOTO9; Out--of--rangetool . . . . . . . . . . . .
number
#[500+FIX[#4120/100]]=#3002+#[500+FIX[#4120/100]];
Calculatescumulativetime. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N9M05; Stopsthespindle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M99;
D Programthatcalls a
macroprogram
Macro program
(programcalled)
289
For smooth machining, the NC prereads the NC statement to be
performednext. Thisoperationis referredto asbuffering. In tool nose
radiuscompensation mode(G41, G42), theNC prereads NC statements
two or three blocks ahead to find intersections. Macro statements for
arithmetic expressionsandconditional branchesareprocessedassoonas
theyarereadintothebuffer. BlockscontainingM00, M01, M02, orM30,
blocks containing M codes for whichbuffering issuppressed by setting
parameters111to112, andblockscontainingG31arenot preread.
N1G31X100.0;
N2#100=1
:
>
>:Block beingexecuted
NC statement
execution
Macro statement execution
Buffer
N1
N2
N1X100.0; >
>: Block beingexecuted
j : Block readinto the buffer
NC statement
execution
Macro statement
execution
Buffer
N1
N2 N3
N4
N2#1=100;
N3#2=200;
N4Z100.0;
:
N4
WhenN1isbeingexecuted, thenext NC statement (N4) isread intothe
buffer. Themacrostatements(N2, N3) betweenN1andN4areprocessed
duringexecutionof N1.
16.7
PROCESSING
MACRO
STATEMENTS
Explanations
D Whenthenextblockis
notbuffered
(Mcodes thatarenot
buffered, G31, etc.)
D Bufferingthenextblock
inother thantool nose
radius compensation
mode(G41, G42)
(normallyprereadingone
block)
290
N1G01G41G91Z100.0F100T0101; >
V : Blocks readinto the buffer
NC statement
execution
Macro statement
execution
Buffer
N1
N2
N3
N2#1=100;
N3X100.0;
N4#2=200;
N5Z50.0;
:
N4
N5
N3
WhenN1isbeingexecuted, theNCstatementsinthenexttwoblocks(up
toN5) arereadintothebuffer. Themacrostatements(N2, N4) between
N1andN5areprocessedduringexecutionof N1.
N1G01G41X100.0G100T0101; >
V : Blocks readinto the buffer
N1
N2
N3
N2#1=100;
N3Z50.0;
N4#2=200;
N5M08;
N6#3=300;
N7X200.0;
:
N4
N3
N5
N6
N7
NC statement
execution
Macro statement
execution
Buffer
WhentheNC1blockisbeingexecuted, theNCstatementsinthenexttwo
blocks(uptoN5)arereadintothebuffer. SinceN5isablockthatinvolves
nomovement, anintersectioncannot becalculated. Inthiscase, theNC
statements in the next three blocks (up to N7) are read. The macro
statements (N2, N4, and N6) between N1 and N7 areprocessed during
executionof N1.
D Bufferingthenextblock
intool nose radius
compensationmode
(G41, G42)
D Whenthenextblock
involves nomovementin
tool noseradius
compensationC (G41,
G42) mode
291
Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be
registered and edited in the same way as subprograms. The storage
capacityisdeterminedbythetotal lengthof tapeusedtostorebothcustom
macrosandsubprograms.
16.8
REGISTERING
CUSTOMMACRO
PROGRAMS
292
WhenitisMDI operationB, themacrocall commandcanbespecifiedin
MDI modetoo. During automatic operation, however, it isimpossible
toswitchtotheMDI modefor amacroprogramcall.
A custommacroprogramcannot besearchedfor asequencenumber.
Evenwhileamacroprogramisbeingexecuted, blockscanbestoppedin
thesingleblock mode(except blocks containingmacro call commands,
arithmetic operationcommands, andcontrol commands).
A block containingamacrocall command(G65, G66, or G67) doesnot
stopevenwhenthesingleblockmodeison. Blockscontainingarithmetic
operation commands and control commands can be stopped in single
block modeby settingSBKM (bit 5of parameter 011) to1.
Singleblock stopoperationisusedfor testingcustommacroprograms.
Notethatwhenasingleblockstopoccursatamacrostatementintool nose
radius compensation mode, thestatement is assumed to beablock that
does not involve movement, and proper compensation cannot be
performed in some cases. (Strictly speaking, the block is regarded as
specifyingamovement withatravel distance0.)
A / appearing in themiddleof an <expression>(enclosed in brackets [
] on the right--hand side of an arithmetic expression) is regarded as a
divisionoperator; it isnot regardedasthespecifier for anoptional block
skipcode.
Registeredcustommacroprogramsandsubprogramsshouldbeprotected
frombeingdestroyedby accident. Bysetting(bit4of parameter 010) to
1, deletion and editing are disabled for custommacro programs and
subprograms with programnumbers 9000 to 9999. When the entire
memoryiscleared(bypressingthe
RESET
and
DELETE
keysatthesametime
to turn on the power), the contents of memory such as custommacro
programsaredeleted.
When memory is cleared with a reset operation, local variables and
commonvariables#100to#149areclearedtonull values. They canbe
preventedfrombeingclearedby setting, (bits7and6of parameter 040).
Systemvariables#1000to#1133arenot cleared.
A reset operationclearsany calledstatesof custommacroprogramsand
subprograms, andanyDOstates, andreturnscontrol tothemainprogram.
As with M98, the M and T codes used for subprogramcalls are not
displayed.
Whenafeedholdisenabledduring executionof amacro statement, the
machinestopsafter executionof themacrostatement. Themachinealso
stopswhenareset or alarmoccurs.
+0.0000001to+99999999
--99999999to--0.0000001
Thenumber of significantdigitsis8(decimal). If thisrangeisexceeded,
alarmNo. 003occurs.
16.9
LIMITATIONS
D MDI operation
D Sequencenumber
search
D Singleblock
D OperationinEDIT mode
D Reset
D Displayof thePROGRAM
RESTART page
D Feedhold
D Constantvalues thatcan
beusedin<expression>
293
Inadditiontothestandardcustommacrocommands, thefollowingmacro
commands are available. They are referred to as external output
commands.
- BPRNT
- DPRNT
- POPEN
- PCLOS
Thesecommands areprovided to output variablevalues and characters
throughthereader/punchinterface.
Specify thesecommandsinthefollowingorder:
Opencommand: POPEN
Before specifying a sequence of data output commands, specify this
commandtoestablishaconnectiontoanexternal input/output device.
Dataoutput command: BPRNTor DPRNT
Specify necessary dataoutput.
Closecommand: PCLOS
When all data output commands have completed, specify PCLOS to
releaseaconnectiontoanexternal input/output device.
POPEN
POPEN establishes a connection to an external input/output device. It
must bespecifiedbeforeasequenceof dataoutput commands. TheNC
outputsaDC2control code.
BPRNT [ a #b [ c ] ]
Number of significant decimal places
Variable
Character
TheBPRNT commandoutputscharactersandvariablevaluesinbinary.
(i) Specified characters are converted to corresponding ISO codes
accordingtothesetting(ISO) that isoutput at that time.
Specifiablecharactersareasfollows:
- Letters (AtoZ)
- Numbers
- Special characters (*, /, +, -, etc.)
Anasterisk (*) isoutput by aspacecode.
(ii) All variables are stored with a decimal point. Specify a variable
followed by the number of significant decimal places enclosed in
brackets. A variable value is treated as 2--word (32--bit) data,
includingthedecimal digits. It isoutputasbinarydatastartingfrom
thehighest byte.
(iii)When specified data has been output, an EOB code is output
accordingtotheISOcodesettingsontheparameter screen.
(iv) Null variablesareregardedas0.
16.10
EXTERNAL OUTPUT
COMMANDS
Explanations
D OpencommandPOPEN
D Dataoutputcommand
BPRNT
294
Example)
BPRINT[C** X#100[3]Z#101[3]M#10[0]]
Variablevalue
#100=0.40596
#101=--1638.4
#10=12.34
LF
12(0000000C)
M
--1638400(FFE70000)
Z
406(00000196)
X
Space
C
DPRNT [ a #b [ c d] ]
Number of significant decimal places
Number of significant digits inthe integer part
Variable
Character
TheDPRNT commandoutputs charactersand eachdigit inthevalueof
avariableaccordingtothecodeset inthesettings(ISO).
(i) For anexplanationof theDPRNT command, seeItems(i), (iii), and
(iv) for theBPRNT command.
(ii) When outputting a variable, specify #followed by the variable
number, thenspecify thenumber of digitsintheinteger part andthe
number of decimal placesenclosedinbrackets.
Onecodeisoutputfor eachof thespecifiednumber of digits, starting
with thehighest digit. For eachdigit, acodeisoutput accordingto
thesettings(ISO). Thedecimal point isalsooutput usingacodeset
inthesettings(ISO).
Eachvariablemustbeanumericvalueconsistingof uptoeightdigits.
Whenhigh--order digitsarezeros, thesezerosarenot outputif bit1of
parameter 040is1. If it is0, aspacecodeisoutput eachtimeazero
isencountered.
Whenthenumber of decimal placesisnotzero, digitsinthedecimal
part arealways output. If thenumber of decimal placesis zero, no
decimal point isoutput.
Whenbit 1 of parameter 040is 0, aspacecodeisoutput toindicate
apositivenumber insteadof +; if it is1, nocodeisoutput.
D Dataoutputcommand
DPRNT
295
Example)
DPRNT[X#2[53]Z#5[53]T#30[20]]
Variablevalue
#2=128.47398
#5=--91.2
#30=123.456
(1) Parameter No.040#1=0
(2) Parameter No.040#1=1
sp
sp sp sp
sp
sp
L F
T
Z--
X
91.200
128.474
23
sp
sp
LF
T23
Z--91.200
X128.474
PCLOS ;
ThePCLOS commandreleases aconnection toan external input/output
device. Specify this command when all data output commands have
terminated. DC4control codeisoutput fromtheCNC.
Specifythechannel usefor settingI/O. Accordingtothespecificationof
thisparameter, set dataitems(suchasthebaudrate) for thereader/punch
interface.
I/Ochannel 0: bit 0, 2, 7of parameter No.002. Parameters No.552
Specifyparameter sothat thereader/punchinterfaceisusedastheoutput
device for punching. (Never specify output to the Fanuc Cassette or
floppy disks.)
Toindicatetheendof alineof datainISOcode, specify whether touse
only anLF .
D ClosecommandPCLOS
D Requiredsetting
296
NOTE
1 It is not necessary to always specify the open command
(POPEN), data output command (BPRNT, DPRNT), and
close command (PCLOS) together. Once an open
command is specified at the beginning of a program, it
does not need to be specified again except after a close
command was specified.
2 Be sure to specify open commands and close
commands in pairs. Specify the close command at the
end of the program. However, do not specify a close
command if no open command has been specified.
3 When a reset operation is performed while commands
are being output by a data output command, output is
stopped and subsequent data is erased. Therefore,
when a reset operation is performed by a code such as
M30 at the end of a programthat performs data output,
specify a close command at the end of the programso
that processing such as M30 is not performed until all
data is output.
4 Abbreviated macro words enclosed in brackets [ ]
remains unchanged. However, note that when the
characters in brackets are divided and input several
times, the second and subsequent abbreviations are
converted and input.
5 O can be specified in brackets [ ]. Note that when the
characters in brackets [ ] are divided and input several
times, O is omitted in the second and subsequent inputs.
Notes
297
When a programis being executed, another programcan be called by
inputtinganinterrupt signal (UINT) fromthemachine. This functionis
referred to as an interruption typecustommacro function. Programan
interrupt commandinthefollowingformat:
M96Pf f f f ;
M97;
Enables custommacro interrupt
Disables custommacro interrupt
Useof theinterruptiontypecustommacrofunctionallowstheuser tocall
a programduring execution of an arbitrary block of another program.
Thisallowsprogramstobeoperatedtomatchsituationswhichvaryfrom
timetotime.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the
abnormality isstartedby anexternal signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another
machining operation without the cancellation of the current
operation.
(3) At regular intervals, informationoncurrent machiningisread.
Listed aboveareexamples likeadaptive control applications of the
interruptiontypecustommacrofunction.
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)
Interrupt
signal
(UINT)*
M96Pxxxx;
Nf f f f ;
M97
;
M99(Pf f f f );
Oxxxx;
Fig. 16.11 Interruptiontypecustommacrofunction
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program
operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to
executetheprogramspecifiedby Pxxxx.
When the interrupt signal (UINT, marked by * in Fig. 16.11 is input
duringexecutionof theinterrupt programor after M97 isspecified, it is
ignored.
16.11
INTERRUPTIONTYPE
CUSTOMMACRO
Format
Explanations
298
A custommacrointerrupt isavailableonlyduringprogramexecution. It
isenabledunder thefollowingconditions
- Whenmemoryoperationor MDI operationis selected
- WhenSTL (start lamp) is on
- Whenacustommacrointerruptis notcurrentlybeingprocessed
Generally, thecustommacrointerruptfunctionisusedbyspecifyingM96
toenabletheinterrupt signal (UINT) andM97todisablethesignal.
OnceM96isspecified, acustommacro interrupt can beinitiated by the
input of theinterrupt signal (UINT) until M97 isspecified or theNC is
reset. After M97 is specified or the NC is reset, no custommacro
interrupts are initiated even when theinterrupt signal (UINT) is input.
The interrupt signal (UINT) is ignored until another M96 command is
specified.
1
0
M96 M97 M96
Interrupt signal
(UINT)
Effective interrupt
input signal
WhenUINT is kept on
Theinterrupt signal (UINT) becomesvalidafter M96isspecified. Even
whenthesignal isinputinM97mode, itisignored. Whenthesignal input
inM97modeiskept onuntil M96isspecified, acustommacrointerrupt
is initiated as soon as M96 is specified (only when thestatus--triggered
schemeisemployed); whentheedge--triggeredschemeisemployed, the
custommacrointerrupt isnot initiatedevenwhenM96isspecified.
NOTE
For the status--triggered and edge--triggered schemes, see
ItemCustom macro interrupt signal (UINT) of Subsec.
16.11.2.
16.11.1
SpecificationMethod
Explanations
D Interruptconditions
D Specification
299
There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram--type
interruptsandmacro--typeinterrupts. Theinterrupt typeusedisselected
by MSB (bit 5of parameter 056).
(a) Subprogram--typeinterrupt
Aninterrupt programiscalledasasubprogram. Thismeansthatthe
levels of local variables remain unchanged before and after the
interrupt. This interrupt is not included in the nesting level of
subprogramcalls.
(b) Macro--typeinterrupt
An interrupt programis called asacustommacro. This meansthat
thelevelsof local variableschangebeforeandafter theinterrupt. The
interrupt is not included in thenesting level of custommacro calls.
Whenasubprogramcall or acustommacrocall is performedwithin
the interrupt program, this call is included in the nesting level of
subprogramcallsor custommacrocalls. Argumentscannotbepassed
fromthecurrent programevenwhenthecustommacrointerrupt isa
macro--typeinterrupt.
In general, custommacro interrupts are controlled by M96 and M97.
However, theseMcodes, mayalreadybeingusedforother purposes(such
asanM functionor macroM codecall) by somemachinetool builders.
For this reason (bit 4 of parameter 056) is provided to set M codes for
custommacrointerrupt control.
Whenspecifyingthisparameter tousethecustommacrointerruptcontrol
M codesset by parameters, set parameters246and247asfollows:
Set theM codetoenablecustommacrointerruptsinparameter 246, and
set theM codetodisablecustommacrointerruptsinparameter 247.
Whenspecifyingthatparameter--setMcodesarenot used, M96andM97
areusedasthecustommacrocontrol M codes regardlessof thesettings
of parameters246and247.
The M codes used for custommacro interrupt control are processed
internally (they arenot output toexternal units).
When performing a custom macro interrupt, the user may want to
interrupt theNC statement being executed, or theuser may not want to
performtheinterruptuntil theexecutionof thecurrentblockiscompleted.
Bit2of parameter 056isusedtoselectwhether toperforminterruptseven
inthemiddleof ablock or towait until theendof theblock.
16.11.2
Details of Functions
Explanations
D Subprogram--type
interruptandmacro--type
interrupt
D Mcodes for custom
macrointerruptcontrol
D Custommacrointerrupts
andNC statements
300
(i) When theinterrupt signal (UINT) is input, any movement or dwell
beingperformedisstoppedimmediatelyandtheinterrupt programis
executed.
(ii) If thereareNC statementsintheinterrupt program, thecommandin
the interrupted block is lost and the NC statement in the interrupt
programis executed. When control is returned to the interrupted
program, the program is restarted from the next block after the
interruptedblock.
(iii)If there are no NC statements in the interrupt program, control is
returned to the interrupted programby M99, then the programis
restartedfromthecommandintheinterruptedblock.
Executionin
progress
Normal program
Interruptedby macro interrupt
Executionin
progress
Interrupt signal (UINT) input
CNC commandrestart; when
there are no NC statements
inthe interrupt program
Custommacro
interrupt
(i)If theblock beingexecutedisnotablockthat consistsof several cycle
operations such as a drilling canned cycleand automatic reference
positionreturn(G28), aninterrupt isperformedasfollows:
When an interrupt signal (UINT) is input, macro statements in the
interrupt programareexecutedimmediately unlessan NC statement
is encountered in the interrupt program. NC statements are not
executeduntil thecurrent block iscompleted.
(ii) If theblock being executed consists of several cycle operations, an
interrupt isperformedasfollows:
When the last movement in the cycle operations is started, macro
statements in the interrupt program are executed unless an NC
statement isencountered. NC statementsareexecutedafter all cycle
operationsarecompleted.
Executionin
progress
Normal program
Executionin
progress
Interrupt signal (UINT) input
Custommacro
interrupt
NC statement inthe
interrupt program
Programis interruptedby the signal
TypeI
(whenaninterrupt is
performedeveninthe
middleof ablock)
TypeII
(whenaninterrupt is
performedat theendof
theblock)
301
Theinterrupt signal becomes valid after executionstarts of ablock that
containsM96for enablingcustommacrointerrupts. Thesignal becomes
invalidwhenexecutionstartsof ablock that containsM97.
While an interrupt program is being executed, the interrupt signal
becomes invalid. The signal become valid when the execution of the
blockthatimmediatelyfollowstheinterruptedblockinthemainprogram
isstartedafter control returnsfromtheinterruptprogram. IntypeI, if the
interrupt programconsistsof only macrostatements, theinterrupt signal
becomes valid when execution of the interrupted block is started after
control returnsfromtheinterrupt program.
Evenwhencycleoperationis inprogress, movement is interrupted, and
theinterrupt programis executed. If theinterrupt programcontainsno
NCstatements, thecycleoperationisrestartedafter control isreturnedto
the interrupted program. If there are NC statements, the remaining
operations in theinterrupted cycleare discarded, and thenext block is
executed.
When the last movement of the cycle operation is started, macro
statementsintheinterrupt programareexecutedunlessanNCstatement
is encountered. NC statements are executed after cycle operation is
completed.
D Conditions for enabling
anddisablingthecustom
macrointerruptsignal
D Custommacrointerrupt
duringexecutionof a
blockthatinvolves cycle
operation
For typeI
For typeII
302
Therearetwo schemesfor custommacro interrupt signal (UINT) input:
The status--triggered scheme and edge-- triggered scheme. When the
status--triggeredschemeisused, thesignal isvalidwhenit ison. When
theedgetriggeredschemeisused, thesignal becomesvalidontherising
edgewhenit switchesfromoff toonstatus.
Oneof thetwoschemesisselectedwith(bit 3of parameter 056). When
thestatus--triggeredschemeisselectedbythisparameter, acustommacro
interrupt isgeneratedif theinterrupt signal (UINT) ison at thetimethe
signal becomes valid. By keeping theinterrupt signal (UINT) on, the
interrupt programcanbeexecutedrepeatedly.
Whentheedge--triggeredschemeisselected, theinterrupt signal (UINT)
becomesvalidonly on itsrising edge. Therefore, theinterrupt program
isexecutedonlymomentarily(incaseswhentheprogramconsistsof only
macro statements). When acustommacro interrupt is to beperformed
just oncefor theentireprogram(inthiscase, theinterrupt signal maybe
kept on), theedge--triggeredschemeisuseful.
Except for the specific applications mentioned above, use of either
schemeresults in the sameeffects. The timefromsignal input until a
custom macro interrupt is executed does not vary between the two
schemes.
1
0
Interrupt signal (UINT)
Interrupt
execution
Interrupt
execution
Interrupt
execution
Interrupt
execution
Interrupt
execution
Status--triggered
scheme
Edge--triggered
scheme
Intheaboveexample, aninterruptisexecutedfour timeswhenthestatus
triggeredschemeisused; whentheedge-- triggered schemeis used, the
interrupt isexecutedjust once.
signal (UINT)
303
To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interrupted
program, specify M99. A sequencenumber in theinterruptedprogram
canalsobespecifiedusingaddressP. If thisisspecified, theprogramis
searchedfromthebeginningfor thespecifiedsequencenumber. Control
isreturnedtothefirst sequencenumber found.
Whenacustommacrointerrupt programisbeingexecuted, nointerrupts
aregenerated. Toenableanother interrupt, executeM99. WhenM99is
specifiedalone, itisexecutedbeforetheprecedingcommandsterminate.
Therefore, acustommacro interrupt is enabledfor thelast commandof
theinterrupt program. If this is inconvenient, custommacro interrupts
shouldbecontrolledby specifyingM96andM97intheprogram.
Whenacustommacrointerruptisbeingexecuted, noother custommacro
interrupts are generated; when an interrupt is generated, additional
interruptsareinhibitedautomatically. Executing M99makes it possible
for another custommacro interrupt to occur. M99 specified alone in a
block isexecutedbeforethepreviousblock terminates. Inthefollowing
example, aninterrupt isenabledfor theGxx block of O1234. Whenthe
signal is input, O1234 isexecuted again. Aninterrupt isnot enabledin
Gxx block of O5678 becauseof M97, and it is enabled after control is
returnedtoO1000.
M99;
GxxXxxx;
O1234
O1000;
M96P1234;
M96P5678
M97
O5678
GxxXxxx;
M96;
M99;
M97
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
D Returnfromacustom
macrointerrupt
304
NOTE
When an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, or
M, this block is regarded as belonging to the previous block
in the program. Therefore, a single--block stop does not
occur for this block. In terms of programming, the following
(1) and (2) are basically the same. (The difference is
whether Gf f is executed before M99 is recognized.)
(1)Gf f Xf f f ;
M99 ;
(2)Gf f Xf f f M99 ;
305
A custommacrointerrupt isdifferent fromanormal programcall. It is
initiated by an interrupt signal (UINT) during programexecution. In
general, any modifications of modal information madeby theinterrupt
programshouldnot affect theinterruptedprogram.
For thisreason, evenwhenmodal informationismodifiedbytheinterrupt
program, the modal information before the interrupt is restored when
control isreturnedtotheinterruptedprogramby M99.
When control is returned fromtheinterrupt programto theinterrupted
programby M99 Pxxxx, modal information can again becontrolled by
theprogram. In thiscase, thenewcontinuousinformation modifiedby
theinterruptprogramispassedtotheinterruptedprogram. Restorationof
theold modal information present beforethe interrupt is not desirable.
This is because after control is returned, some programs may operate
differently depending on the modal information present before the
interrupt. Inthiscase, thefollowingmeasuresareapplicable:
(1) Theinterrupt programprovides modal information to beusedafter
control isreturnedtotheinterruptedprogram.
(2) After control is returned to the interrupted program, modal
informationisspecifiedagainasnecessary.
ODDDD
M96Pxxx
Nf f f f ;
M99(Pf f f f );
Oxxx;
Interrupt signal (UINT)
(Without P specification)
Modify modal information
Modal
informationremains
unchangedbefore and
after the interrupt.
(WithP specification)
The new modal information modifiedby the inter-
rupt programis present.
Themodal information present beforetheinterrupt becomesvalid. The
new modal information modified by the interrupt program is made
invalid.
Thenewmodal information modified by theinterrupt programremains
validevenafter control isreturned. Theoldmodal informationwhichwas
valid in the interrupted block can be read using custommacro system
variables#4001to#4120.
Notethat whenmodal informationismodifiedby theinterrupt program,
systemvariables#4001to#4120arenot changed.
andmodal information
Modal informationwhen
control is returnedby
M99
Modal informationwhen
control is returnedby
M99Pf f f f
306
Thecoordinatesof point A canbereadusingsystemvariables#5001
andupuntil thefirst NC statement isencountered.
Thecoordinatesof pointA canbereadafter anNCstatement withno
movespecificationsappears.
Themachinecoordinates and workpiececoordinates of point B can
bereadusingsystemvariables#5021andupand#5041andup.
B
B
A
A
Interrupt generated
Offset vector
Programmedtool path
When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt programis
called, thecustommacromodal call iscanceled(G67). However, when
G66 is specified in theinterrupt program, thecustommacro modal call
becomesvalid. Whencontrol is returnedfromtheinterrupt programby
M99, themodal call isrestoredtothestateit was inbeforetheinterrupt
wasgenerated. Whencontrol isreturnedby M99Pxxxx;, themodal call
intheinterrupt programremainsvalid.
Whentheinterruptsignal (UINT) isinputwhileareturnoperationisbeing
performed in the dry run mode after the search operation for program
restart, theinterrupt programis called after restart operation terminates
for all axes. This means that interrupt typeII is used regardless of the
parameter setting.
D Systemvariables
(positioninformation
values) for theinterrupt
program
andcustommacro
modal call
andprogramrestart
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 17. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION
307
17
PATTERNDATAINPUTFUNCTION
Thisfunctionenablesuserstoperformprogrammingsimplybyextracting
numeric data(patterndata) fromadrawingandspecifyingthenumerical
valuesfromtheCRT/MDI panel.
Thiseliminatestheneedfor programmingusinganexistingNClanguage.
With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can prepare the
programof a hole machining cycle (such as a boring cycle or tapping
cycle) usingthecustommacrofunction, andcanstoreitintotheprogram
memory.
Thiscycleisassigned patternnames, suchas BOR1, TAP3, andDRL2.
Anoperator canselectapatternfromthemenuof patternnamesdisplayed
onthescreen.
Data (pattern data) which is to be specified by the operator should be
createdinadvancewithvariablesinadrillingcycle.
Theoperator can identify thesevariables using names such asDEPTH,
RETURNRELIEF, FEED, MATERIAL or otherpatterndatanames. The
operator assignsvalues(patterndata) tothesenames.
PROGRAMMING 17. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION B--61394E/08
308
Pressing the
MENU
OFSET key and the soft key [MENU] is displayed on the
followingpatternmenuscreen.
1. BOLT HOLE
2. GRI D
3. LI NE ANGLE
4. TAPPI NG
5. DRI LLI NG
6. BORI NG
7. POCKET
8. PECK
9. TEST PATRN
10. BACK
MENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000
SELECT = S 0 T
10: 01: 29 MDI
[ OFFSET] [ ] [ WKSFT] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ]
HOLEPATTERN : Thisisthemenutitle. Anarbitrary character string
consistingof upto12characterscanbespecified.
BOLTHOLE : Thisisthepatternname. Anarbitrary character
stringconsistingof upto10characterscanbe
specified, includingkatakana.
Themachinetool builder shouldspecifythecharacter stringsfor themenu
titleandpatternnameusingthecustommacro, andloadthecharacter
stringsintoprogrammemory asasubprogramof programNo. 9500.
17.1
DISPLAYINGTHE
PATTERNMENU
309
Menutitle: C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C
8
C
9
C
10
C
11
C
12
C
1
,C
2, ,
C
12:
Charactersinthemenutitle(12characters)
Macroinstruction
G65H90P
p
Q
q
R
r
I
i
J
j
K
k :
H90:Specifiesthemenutitle
p: Assumea1anda2tobethecodesof charactersC1andC2. Then,
Pf f f f f f
Codea2of character C2
Codea1of character C1
q: Assumea
3
anda
4
tobethecodesof charactersC
3
andC
4
. Then,
q=a
3
10
3
+a
4
r : Assumea
5
anda
6
5
andC
6
. Then,
r=a
5
10
3
+a
6
i : Assumea
7
anda
8
7
andC
8
. Then,
i=a
7
10
3
+a
8
j : Assumea
9
anda
10
9
andC
10
. Then,
j=a
9
10
3
+a
10
k : Assumea
11
anda
12
11
andC
12
.Then,
k=a
11
10
3
+a
12
Example) If thetitleof themenuisHOLE PATTERN then themacro
instructionisasfollows:
G65H90P072079Q076069R032080
HO LE P
I065084J 084069K082078;
AT TE RN
For codescorrespondingtothesecharacters, refer tothetable
in17.3.
D Macrocommands
specifyingthemenu
title
310
Pattern name: C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C
8
C
9
C
10
C
1,
C
2,
,C
10
: Charactersinthepatternname(10characters) . . .
Macroinstruction
G65H91P
n
Q
q
R
r
I
i
J
j
K
k
;
H91: Specifiesthemenutitle
n: SpecifiesthemenuNo. of thepatternname
n
=
1to10
q: Assumea
1
anda
2
1
andC
2
. Then,
q=a
1
10
3
+a
2
r : Assumea
3
anda
4
3
andC
4
. Then,
r=a
3
10
3
+a
4
i : Assumea
5
anda
6
5
andC
6
. Then,
i=a
5
10
3
+a
6
j : Assumea
7
anda
8
7
andC
8
. Then,
j=a
7
10
3
+a
8
k : Assumea
9
anda
10
9
andC
10
. Then,
k=a
9
10
3
+a
10
Example) If thepatternnameof menuNo. 1isBOLT HOLE thenthe
macroinstructionisasfollows.
G65H91P1Q066079R076084I032072J 079076K069032;
BO LT H OL E
Toselect apatternfromthepatternmenuscreen, enter thecorresponding
patternNo. Thefollowingisanexample.
1 INPUT
The selected pattern No. is assigned to systemvariable #5900. The
custommacro of theselected pattern can bestarted by starting afixed
program (external program No. search) with an external signal then
referringtothesystemvariable#5900intheprogram.
NOTE
If each characters of P, Q, R, I, J , and K are not specified in
a macro instruction, two spaces are assigned to each
omitted character.
D Macroinstruction
describingthepattern
name
D PatternNo. selection
311
Custommacrosfor themenutitleandholepatternnames.
1. BOLT HOLE
2. GRI D
3. LI NE ANGLE
4. TAPPI NG
5. DRI LLI NG
6. BORI NG
7. POCKET
8. PECK
9. TEST PATRN
10. BACK
MENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000
SELECT = S 0 T
10: 01: 29 MDI
[ OFFSET] [ ] [ WKSFT] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ]
O9500 ;
N1G65 H90 P072 079 Q076 069 R032 080 I 065 084 J 084 069 K082 078; HOLE PATTERN
N2G65 H91 P1 Q066 079 R076 084 I 032 072 J 079 076 K069 032 ; 1.BOLT HOLE
N3G65 H91 P2 Q071 082 R073 068 ; 2.GRID
N4G65 H91 P3 Q076 073 R078 069 I 032 065 J 078071 K076069 3.LINE ANGLE
N5G65 H91 P4 Q084 065 R080 080 I 073 078 J 071 032 ; 4.TAPPING
N6G65 H91 P5 Q068 082 R073 076 I 076 073 J 078 071 ; 5.DRILLING
N7G65 H91 P6 Q066079 R082073 I 078 071 ; 6.BORING
N8G65 H91 P7 Q080 079 R067 075 I 069 084 ; 7.POCKET
N9G65 H91 P8 Q080069 R067075 ; 8.PECK
N10G65 H91 P9 Q084 069 R083 084 I032 080 J 065 084 K082 078 ; 9.TEST PATRN
N11G65 H91 P10 Q066 065 R067 0750 ; 10.BACK
N12M99 ;
Example
312
When a pattern menu is selected, the necessary pattern data is
displayed.
NO. NAME DATA COMMENT
500 TOOL 0
501 KI J UN X 0 *BOLT HOLE
502 KI J UN Y 0 CI RCLE*
503 RADI US 0 SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL 0 DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO 0 NO. 500- 505.
506 0
507 0
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
VAR. : BOLT HOLE O9501 N0014
NO. 500 = S 0 T
10: 00: 48
[ OFFSET ] [ ] [ WKSFT ] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ]
- -
BOLTHOLE : Thisisthepatterndatatitle. A character string
consistingof upto12characterscanbeset.
TOOL : Thisisthevariablename. A character string
consistingof upto10characterscanbeset.
*BOLTHOLE
CIRCLE* : Thisisacomment statement. A character string
canbedisplayedconsistingof upto8lines, 12
charactersper line.
(It ispermissibletousekatakanainacharacter stringor line.)
Themachinetool builder shouldprogramthecharacter stringsof pattern
datatitle, patternname, andvariablenameusing thecustommacro, and
loadthemintotheprogrammemory asasubprogramwhoseNo. is9500
plusthepatternNo. (O9501toO9510).
17.2
PATTERNDATA
DISPLAY
313
Menutitle : C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C
8
C
9
C
10
C
11
C
12
C
1
,C
2,,
C
12:
Charactersinthemenutitle(12characters)
Macroinstruction
G65H92P
n
Q
q
R
r
I
i
J
j
K
k ;
H92: Specifiesthepatternname
p: Assumea
1
anda
2
1
andC
2
. Then,
p=a
1
10
3
+a
2
See17.3for character codes.
q: Assumea
3
anda
4
3
andC
4
. Then,
q=a
3
10
3
+a
4
r : Assumea
5
anda
6
5
andC
6
. Then,
r=a
5
10
3
+a
6
i : Assumea
7
anda
8
7
andC
8.
Then,
i=a
7
10
3
+a
8
j : Assumea
9
anda
10
9
andC
10
. Then,
j=a
9
10
3
+a
10
k : Assumea
11
anda
12
11
andC
12
. Then,
k=a
11
10
3
+
a
12
Example) AssumethatthepatterndatatitleisBOLT HOLE.Themacro
instructionisgivenasfollows:
G65H92P066079Q076084R032072I079076J 069032;
BO LT H OL E
Variablename : C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C
8
C
9
C
10
C
1,
C
2,,
C
10:
Charactersinthevariablename(10characters)
Macroinstruction
G65H93P
n
Q
q
R
r
I
i
J
j
K
k ;
H93: Specifiesthevariablename
n: SpecifiesthemenuNo. of thevariablename
n=1to10
q: Assumea
1
anda
2
1
andC
2
. Then,
q=a
1
10
3
+a
2
r : Assumea
3
anda
4
3
andC
4
. Then,
r=a
3
10
3
+a
4
i : Assumea
5
anda
6
5
andC
6
. Then,
i=a
5
10
3
+a
6
j : Assumea
7
anda
8
7
andC
8
. Then,
j=a
7
10
3
+a
8
k : Assumea
9
anda
10
9
andC
10
. Then,
k=a
9
10
3
a+a
10
Example) Assumethat thevariablenameof thevariableNo. 503is
RADIUS. Themacroinstructionisgivenasfollows:
G65H93P503Q082065R068073I085083;
RA DI US
D Macroinstruction
specifyingthepattern
datatitle
(themenutitle)
D Macroinstruction
specifyingthevariable
name
314
CAUTION
Variable names can be assigned to 32 common variables
#500 to #531, which are not cleared when the power is
turned off.
Onecomment line: C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C
5
C
6
C
7
C
8
C
9
C
10
C
11
C
12
C
1,
C
2,
, C
12
: Character stringinonecomment line(12characters)
Macroinstruction
G65H94P
n
Q
q
R
r
I
i
J
j
K
k ;
H94: Specifiesthecomment
p: Assumea
1
anda
2
1
andC
2
. Then,
p=a
1
10
3
+a
2
See17.7for character codes.
q: Assumea
3
anda
4
3
andC
4
. Then,
q=a
3
10
3
+a
4
r : Assumea
5
anda
6
5
andC
6
. Then,
r=a
5
10
3
+a
6
i : Assumea
7
anda
8
7
andC
8
. Then,
i=a
7
10
3
+a
8
j : Assumea
9
anda
10
9
andC
10
. Then,
j=a
9
10
3
+a
10
k : Assumea
11
anda
12
11
andC
12.
Then,
k=a
11
10
3
+a
12
A comment canbedisplayedinuptoeightlines. Thecommentconsists
of thefirstlinetotheeighthlineintheprogrammedsequenceof G65H94
for eachline.
Example) Assumethat thecomment isBOLT HOLE. Themacro
instructionisgivenasfollows:
G65H94P042066Q079076R084032I072079J 076069;
*B OL T HO LE
D Macroinstructionto
describeacomment
315
Macroinstructiontodescribeaparameter title, thevariablename, anda
comment.
NO. NAME DATA COMMENT
500 TOOL 0
501 KI J UN X 0 *BOLT HOLE
502 KI J UN Y 0 CI RCLE*
503 RADI US 0 SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL 0 DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO 0 NO. 500- 505.
506 0
507 0
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
VAR. : BOLT HOLE O9501 N0014
NO. 500 = S 0 T
10: 00: 48
[ OFFSET ] [ ] [ WKSFT ] [ MACRO ] [ MENU ]
- -
O9501 ;
N1G65 H92 P066 079 Q076 084 R032 072 I 079 076 J 069 032; VAR:BOLT HOLE
N2G65 H93 P500 Q084 079 R079076; #500 TOOL
N3G65 H93 P501 Q075 073 R074 085 I078 032 J 088 032 ; #501 KIJ UN X
N4G65 H93 P502 Q075 073 R074 085 I 078 032 J 089 032 ; #502 KIJ UN Y
N5G65 H93 P503 Q082 065 R068 073 I 085 083 ; #503 RADIUS
N6G65 H93 P504 Q083 046 R032 065 I 078 071 J 076 032; #504 S.ANGL
N7G65 H93 P505 Q072 079 R076 069 I 083 032 J 078 079 K046 032 ; #505 HOLES NO
N8G65 H94; Comment
N9G65 H94 P042 066 Q079 076 R084 032 I072 079 J 076 069 ;
*
BOLT HOLE
N10G65 H94 R032 067 I073 082 J 067 076 K069 042 ; CIRCLE
*
N11G65 H94 P083 069 Q084 032 080 065 I084 084 J 069 082 K078 032 ; SET PATTERN
N12G65 H94 P068 065 Q084 065 R032 084 I079 032 J 086 065 K082046 ; DATA NOVAR.
N13G65 H94 P078 079 Q046 053 R048 048 I045 053 J 048 053 K046 032 ; No.500-- 505
N14M99 ;
Examples
316
Table. 17.3(a) Characters andcodes tobeusedfor thepattern
datainput function
Char-
acter
Code Comment
Char-
acter
Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 034 Quotation mark
H 072 # 035 Hash sign
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 039 Apostrophe
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 : 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 Plus sign
Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 -- 045 Minus sign
S 083 . 046 Period
T 084 / 047 Slash
U 085 : 058 Colon
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
X 088 = 061 Equal sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
0 048 @ 064 Atmark
1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 ^ 092
3 051 093 Yen sign
4 052 ] 094 Right squar bracket
5 053 _ 095 Underscore
17.3
CHARACTERSAND
CODESTOBE USED
FORTHE PATTERN
DATAINPUT
FUNCTION
317
Table17.3(b)Numbers of subprograms employedinthepatterndatainput function
SubprogramNo. Function
O9500 Specifies character strings displayedonthe patterndata menu.
O9501 Specifies a character stringof the patterndata correspondingto patternNo.1
Table. 17.3(c)Macroinstructions usedinthepatterndatainput function
Gcode Hcode Function
G65 H90 Specifies the menutitle.
G65 H91 Specifies the patternname.
G65 H92 Specifies the patterndata title.
G65 G93 Specifies the variable name.
G65 H94 Specifies the comment.
Table. 17.3(d)Systemvariables employedinthepatterndatainput function
Systemvariable Function
#5900 PatternNo. selectedby user.
PROGRAMMING
17. PROGRAMABLE PARAMETER
ENTRY (G10) B--61394E/08
318
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERENTRY(G10)
18
Thevalues of parameters can beentered in aprogram. This functionis
used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are
changed or themaximumcutting feedrateor cutting time constants are
changedtomeet changingmachiningconditions.
Format
G10L50; Parameter entry mode setting
N_P_; For parameters entry
G11; Parameter entry mode cancel
N_: Parameter No. (4digids)
P_: Parameter settingvalue (Leadingzeros canbe omitted.)
Meaningof command
Format
Explanations
Donot useadecimal point inavalueset inaparameter (P_).
adecimal point cannot beusedinacustommacrovariablefor P_either.
WARNING
1 Do not fail to perform reference point return manually
after changing the pitch error compensation data or
backlash compensation data. Without this, the machine
position can deviate fromthe correct position.
2 The canned--cycle mode must be cancelled before
entering of parameters. When not cancelled, the drilling
motion will be activated.
NOTE
1 Other NC statements cannot be specified while in
parameter input mode.
2 Parameter input (G10) cannot be specified during axis
movement according to PMC axis control.
General
D Parameter setting
value(P_)
19. MEMORY OPERATION BY SERIES
10/11TAPE FORMAT
319
19
MEMORYOPERATIONBYSERIES 10/11TAPE FORMAT
Programs in the Series 10/11 tape format can be operated by setting
parameter TAPEF. Operationarepossiblefor thefunctionswhichusethe
sametapeformat asthat for theSeries10/11aswell asfor thefollowing
functionswhichuseadifferent tapeformat:
Equal--leadthreading
Subprogramcalling
Cannedcycle
Multiplerepetitivecannedcycle
NOTE
Registration to memory and memory operation are possible
only for the functions available in the Series 0.
PROGRAMMING
19. MEMORY OPERATION BY
SERIES 10/11TAPE FORMAT B--61394E/08
320
Someaddresseswhichcannot beusedfor theSeries0canbeusedinthe
Series10/11tapeformat. Thespecifiablevaluerangefor theSeries10/11
tapeformat is basically thesameas that for theSeries 0. Sections19.2
to19.5describetheaddresseswithadifferentspecifiablevaluerange. If
avalueout of thespecifiablevaluerangeisspecified, analarmisissued.
19.1
ADDRESSESAND
SPECIFIABLE VALUE
RANGE FORSERIES
10/11TAPE FORMAT
10/11TAPE FORMAT
321
Format
G32IP_F_Q_;
or
G32IP_E_Q_;
IP: Combinationof axis addresses
F: Leadalongthe longitudinal axis
E: Leadalongthe longitudinal axis
Q: Shigt of the threadingstart angle
Explanations
Although theSeries 10/11 allows theoperator to specify thenumber of
threads per inch with address E, theSeries 10/11 tapeformat does not.
AddressesE andF areusedinthesamewayfor specifyingtheleadalong
thelongitudinal axis. ThethreadleadspecifiedwithaddressE istherefore
alsoassumedasacontinuous--statevaluefor addressF.
Specify Qfor theshift angleof thethreadingstartangleinstepsof 0.001
degrees. A decimal point must not bespecified.
Address for threadlead mminput inchinput
E
0.0001to 500.0000mm 0.000001to
9.999999inch
F
Commandwitha
decimal point
0.0001to 500.0000mm 0.000001to
9.999999inch
F
Commandwithout
a decimal point
0.01to 500.00mm 0.0001to 9.9999inch
Address for feedrate mminput inchinput
Feed
per min-
ute
Increment
system(IS--B)
1to 100000
mm/min
0.01to 4000.00
inch/min
F
per min-
ute
Increment
system(IS--C)
1to 12000
mm/min
0.01to 480.00
inch/min
Feedper rotation 0.01to 500.00
mm/rev
0.0001to 9.9999
inch/rev
WARNING
Specify the feedrate one more time when switching
between feed per minute and feed per rotation.
19.2
EQUAL--LEAD
THREADING
D Address
D Specifiablevaluerange
for thethreadlead
for thefeedrate
PROGRAMMING
322
Format
M98Pf f f f Lf f f f ;
P : Subprogramnumber
L : Repetitioncount
Explanation
AddressL cannot beusedintheSeries 0tapeformat but canbeusedin
theSeries10/11tapeformat.
Thespecifiablevaluerangeisthesameasthatfor theSeries0(1to9999)
TherepetitioncountL canbespecifiedintherangefrom1to9999. If no
repetitioncount isspecified, 1isassumed.
19.3
SUBPROGRAM
CALLING
D Address
D Subprogramnumber
D Repetitioncount
10/11TAPE FORMAT
323
Format
Outer / inner surface turningcycle (straight cuttingcycle)
G90X_Z_F_;
Outer / inner surface turningcycle (taper cuttingcycle)
G90X_Z_I_F_;
I:Lengthof the taper sectionalongthe X--axis (radius)
Threadingcycle (straight threadingcycle)
G92X_Z_F_Q_;
F:Threadlead
Q:Shift of the threadingstart angle (ignoredif specified)
Threadingcycle (taper threadingcycle)
G92X_Z_I_F_;
I:Lengthof the taper sectionalongthe X--axis (radius)
Endsurface turningcycle (front taper cuttingcycle)
G94X_Z_F_;
Endsurface turningcycle (front taper cuttingcycle)
G94X_Z_K_F_;
K:Lengthof the taper sectionalongthe Z--axis
AddressesI andK cannot beusedfor acannedcycleintheSeries0tape
format but canbeusedintheSeries10/11tapeformat.
Sameasthat for equal--leadthreadinginsection19.2 Seesection19.2.
19.4
CANNEDCYCLE
D Address
for thefeedrate
PROGRAMMING
324
Format
Outer / inner surface turningcycle
G71P_Q_U_W_I_K_D_F_S_T_;
I : Lengthanddirectionof cuttingallowance for finishingthe rough
machiningcycle alongthe X--axis (ignoredif specified)
K : Lengthanddirectionof cuttingallowance for finishingthe rough
machiningcycle alongthe Z--axis (ignoredif specified)
D: Depthof cut
Endsurface roughmachiningcycle
I : Lengthanddirectionof cuttingallowance for finishingthe rough
machiningcycle alongthe X--axis (ignoredif specified)
K : Lengthanddirectionof cuttingallowance for finishingthe rough
machiningcycle alongthe Z--axis (ignoredif specified)
D: Depthof cut
Closed--loopturningcycle
I : Lengthanddirectionof clearance alongthe X--axis (radius)
K : Lengthanddirectionof clearance alongthe Z--axis
D: Number of divisions
Endsurface cutting--off cycle
G74X_Z_I_K_F_D_;
or
G74U_W_I_K_F_D_;
I : Distance to be traveledalongthe X--axis
K : Depthof cut alongthe Z--axis
D: Clearance of the tool at the endof the cuttingpath
Outer / inner surface cutting--off cycle
G75X_Z_I_K_F_D_;
or
G75U_W_I_K_F_D_;
I : Distance to be traveledalongthe X--axis
K : Depthof cut alongthe Z--axis
D: Clearance of the tool at the endof the cuttingpath
Multiple repetitive threadingcycle
G76X_Z_I_K_D_F_A_P_Q_;
I : Difference of radiuses at threads
K : Height of threadcrest (radius)
D: Depthof the first cut (radius)
A : Angle of the tool tip(angle of ridges)
P : Methodof cutting
Q: Shift angle of threadcuttingstart angle
19.5
MULTIPLE
REPETITIVE CANNED
TURNINGCYCLE
10/11TAPE FORMAT
325
If thefollowing addresses arespecified intheSeries10/11 tapeformat,
they areignored.
I andK for theouter/inner surfaceroughmachiningcycle(G71)
I andK for theendsurfaceroughmachiningcycle(G72)
AddressP for specifyingthemethodof cuttingfor themultiplerepetitive
threading cycle(G76) is always P1 (constant depth of cut with asingle
edge), P2 (constant amount of cut, zigzag cutting). BeforeP2 can be
specified, however, theoptional function for multiplerepetitiveturning
canned cycle addition must beselected. Address A for specifying the
angle of the tool tip can be specified only with 0,29,30,55,60, and 80
degrees. If other valuesarespecified, alarm062isissued.
Table19.5(a)liststhespecifiablevaluerangefor addressD(depthof cut
andclearance).
Table19.5(a) Specifiablevaluerangefor address D
(depthof cutandclearance)
Increment
system
mminput inchinput
IS--B 99999.999to 99999.999mm 9999.9999to 9999.9999inch
IS--C 9999.9999to 9999.9999mm 999.99999to 999.99999inch
The spcifiable value range for the feedrate is the same as that for
equal--leadthreading. Seesection19.2.
D Addresses and
specifiablevaluerange
PROGRAMMING 20. HIGH SPEEDCYCLE CUTTING B--61394E/08
326
20
HIGHSPEEDCYCLE CUTTING
Thisfunctioncanconvert themachiningprofiletoadatagroup that can
bedistributed as pulses at high--speed by the macro compiler or macro
executor. The function can also call and execute the data group as a
machiningcycleusingtheCNC command(G05command).
Format
G05P10f f f Lf f f ;
P10f f f is number of the machiningcycle to be calledfirst:
P10001to P10999
Lf f f is repetitioncount of the machiningcycle
(L1applies whenthis parameter is omitted.) :
L1to L999
Call andexecutethedatafor thehighspeedcuttingcyclespecifiedbythe
macrocompiler andmacroexecutor usingtheabovecommand.
Cycledatacan beprepared for up to 999 cycles. Select themachining
cycleby address P. Morethan onecyclecanbecalledand executedin
seriesusingthecycleconnectiondataintheheader.
Specify therepetitioncount of thecalledmachining cycleby addressL.
Therepetitioncount intheheader canbespecifiedfor eachcycle.
Theconnectionof cyclesand their repetition count areexplainedbelow
withanexample.
Example) Assumethefollowing:
Cycle1 Cycleconnectiondata2 Repetitioncount 1
G05P10001L2;
Thefollowingcyclesareexecutedinsequence:
Cycles1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2, 2, and3
General
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 20. HIGH SPEEDCYCLE CUTTING
327
Four axesmaximum(Four axescanbecontrolledsimultaneously.).
Set thenumber of pulsesper cycleinparameter 055#4to #6as amacro
variable(#20000to#85535) for highspeedcyclecuttingusingthemacro
compiler andmacroexecutor.
Theunit for thenumber of pulsesistheleast input increment.
20.1
NUMBEROF
CONTROL AXES
20.2
PULSE
DISTRIBUTION
328
Datafor thehighspeedcyclecuttingisassignedtovariables (#20000to
#85535) for the high speed cycle cutting by the macro compiler and
macroexecutor.
Configurationof the highspeedcuttingcycle data
Number of registeredcycles
Header of cycle 1
Header of cycle 2
#20000
#20001
#20017
#20033
Header of cycle 3
Data groupof cycle 1
Specify the number of cycles (number of headers) of high--speed
machiningcycledata. Valuesfrom1to999canbespecified.
The header for high--speed cycle machining data has the following
configuration:
Empty
Total number of fixeddata items for the 4thaxis
Cycle repetitioncount
#20001/20017/20033..
Cycle connectiondata
#20002/20018/20034..
Number of data items
#20003/20019/20035..
Data type
#20004/20020/20036..
Variable assignedto the 1st axis data
#20005/20021/20037..
#20006/20022/20038..
#20007/20023/20039..
#20008/20024/20040..
#20009/20025/20041..
#20010/20026/20042..
#20011/20027/20043..
#20012/20028/20044..
#20013/20029/20045..
#20014/20030/20046..
#20015/20031/20047..
Header configuration
#20016/20032/20048..
Variable assignedto the 2ndaxis data
Variable assignedto the 3rdaxis data
Variable assignedto the 4thaxis data
Empty
Empty
Total number of fixeddata items for the 1st axis
Total number of fixeddata items for the 2ndaxis
Total number of fixeddata items for the 3rdaxis
Empty
20.3
CONFIGURATIONOF
HIGHSPEEDCYCLE
CUTTINGDATA
20.3.1
Number of Registered
Cycles
20.3.2
Header
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 20. HIGH SPEEDCYCLE CUTTING
329
Explanations
Specify therepetition count for this cycle. Valuesfrom0to 32767can
bespecified. When0or 1isspecified, thecycleisexecutedonce.
Specifythenumber (1to999) of thecycletobeexecutedafter thiscycle.
Whennoconnectioncycleexistsbecauseof thelast cycle, specify 0.
Specify thenumber of dataitems per cycle. Validvalues arefrom1to
32767.Whenafixeddataitemisspecified, thefixeddatais repeatedfor
thespecifiednumber of timesinonecycle.
-- -- -- -- -- -- r4 r3 r2 r1 t4 t3 t2 t1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-- --
The bits fromt1 to t4, corresponding to the 1st to 4th axes, havethe
followingmeanings:
0: Distributiondataisalwaysconstant.
1: Distributiondataisvariableor fixed.
When the distribution data is variable or fixed, the bits fromr1 to r4,
correspondingtothe1st to4thaxes, havethefollowingmeanings:
0: Distributiondataisreadforward.
1: Distributiondataisreadbackwards.
Becausethedataconsists of bits, it is necessary to use abinary--coded
decimal value when setting it using the macro compiler and macro
executor.
Example)
Whenconstant dataisassignedtothe1st and2ndaxesandvariabledata
isassignedtothe3rdand4thaxes, #20004=12; (t4andt3: 1, t2andt1:
0)
Constantdata
When the corresponding data type bit (t4 to t1) is 0, specify
distributiondatavalue.
Variabledata
Whenthecorrespondingdatatypebit(t4tot1) is1andthetotal number
of fixeddataitems=0, specify(StoringstartdatavariableNo. of the
distributiondata)/10.
Fixeddata
Whenthecorrespondingdatatypebit(t4tot1) is1andthetotal number
of fixeddataitemsisother than0, specify (Storingstart datavariable
No. of thedistributiondata)/10.
The applicable value for the variable data and fixed datais 2001 to
8553. It is not possibleto start storing dataintheexecutableformat
fromavariableNo. that isnot amultipleof 10.
Toreadthedistributiondatabackwards, setthevariableNo. of thedata
to be distributed last. For example, to read the distribution data in
#25000 to #25999 backwards, set 25000 as the data assignment
variable.
D Cyclerepetitioncount
D Cycleconnectiondata
D Number of dataitems
D Datatype
D Variables assignedto
datafor the1stto4th
axes
330
Set thelengthof thefixeddatafor thecycle.
The first address of the fixed data must be specified by the data
assignment variable. Whenthetotal number of fixeddataitems=0and
thecorresponding datatypebit (t4 to t1) is 1, thedatais regarded as a
variabledata.
NOTE
1 When the high--speed machining function is used,
expanded RAMis required, the lengthof tapethat canbe
specified is limited to 80 meters.
2 An alarm is issued if the function is executed in the
G41/G42 mode.
3 Single block stop, dry run/feedrate override, automatic
acceleration/deceleration and handle interruption are
disabled during high--speed cycle machining.
4 Set the total number of distribution data items for one
cycle to a multiple of the following values, according to
the distribution cycle. This does not apply when the
distribution cycle is 16 ms, 8 ms or 4 ms.
If the total number is not a multipleof oneof thefollowing
values, movement in the remaining cycle becomes zero.
Example)
Whenall 41dataitems (distributioncycle: 1ms) are
specified, movementis zerointheremaining3ms.
Distributioncycle 2ms: Multipleof 2
Distributioncycle 1ms: Multipleof 4
Alarms
Alarm
number
Descriptions
115 The contents of the header are invalid. This alarmis issuedin thefollow-
ing cases.
1. The header corresponding to the number of the specified
call machining cycle was not found.
2. A cycle connection data value is not in the valid range
(0 to 999).
3. The number of data items in the header is not in the valid
range (1 to 32767).
4. The first variable No. for storing data in the executable
format is not in the valid range (#20000 to #85535).
5. The last variable No. for storing data in the executable
format exceeds the limit (#85535).
6. The first variable No. for start data in the executable
format overlaps with a variable No. used in the header.
178 High--speed cycle machining was specified in the G41/G42 mode.
179 The number of control axes specified in parameter 597 exceeds the
maximumnumber.
D Total number of fixed
dataitems for thefirstto
4thaxes
PROGRAMMING B--61394E/08 21. POLYGONAL TURNING
331
21
POLYGONAL TURNING
Polygonal turning means machining apolygonal figureby rotating the
workpieceandtool at acertainratio.
Workpiece
Tool Workpiece
Fig. 21(a) Polygonal turning
Bychangingconditionswhicharerotationratioof workpieceandtool and
number of cutters,the machining figure can be changed to a squareor
hexagon. The Machining time can be reduced as compared with
polygonal figuremachiningusingC and X axes of thepolar coordinate.
The machined figure however, is not exactly polygonal. Generally,
polygonal turningisusedfor theheadsof squareand/or hexagonboltsor
hexagonnuts.
Fig. 21(b) Hexagonbolt
Format
G251 P_Q_;
P,Q: Rotationratioof spindleandYaxisSpecify
range:Intefer 1to9for bothPandQWhenQis a
positivevalue, Yaxis makes positiverotation.
WhenQis anegativevalue, Yaxis makes
negativerotation.
G250 Cancel of polygonal turningmode.
PROGRAMMING 21. POLYGONAL TURNING B--61394E/08
332
Explanations
Tool rotationfor polygonal turningiscontrolledbyCNC controlledaxis.
Thisrotary axisof tool iscalledY axisinthefollowingdescription.
TheY axis is controlled by G251 command, so that therotationspeeds
of the workpiece mounted on the spindle (previously specified by
S--command) andthetool becomt thespecifiedratio.
(Example) Rotationratioof workpiece(spindle) toY axisis1:2, andthe
Y axismakespositiverotation.
G251P1Q2;
When simultaneous start is specified by G251, the one--rotation signal
sent fromthe position codes set on the spindleis detected. After this
detection. theY axisrotationiscontrooledaccordingtotherotationratio
(P:Q) whilesynchronizing with thespindlespeed. Namely, the Y axis
rotationiscontrolledsothat thespindleandY axisstandinarelationof
P:Q. This relation will bemaintained until theplygonal turningcancel
commandisexecuted(G250or resetoperation). Thedirectionof Y axis
rotationisdeterminedby thecode
Qandnot affectedby thedirectionof thelpositioncoder rotation.
Synchronixation of thespindleand Y axis is canceled by thefollowing
commnad:
G250;
When G250 is specified, synchronization of the spindle and Y axis is
canceledandtheY axisstops.
Thissynchronizationisalsocanceleddinthefollowingcasset:
i) Power off
ii) Emergency stop
iii) Servoalarm
iv) Reset (external reset signal ERS, reset/rewindignal RRW, and
RESET key ontheCRT/MDI panel)
v) Occurrenceof P/S alarms217to221
Example
G00X100. 0Z20.0S1000.0M03; Workpiecerotationspeed1000rmp
G251P1Q2; Tool rotationstart(tool rotationspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2000rpm)
G01X80.0F10.0; X axisinfeed . . . . . . . . . . . .
G04X2. ;
G00X100.0; X axisescape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G250; Tool rotationstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M05; Spindlestop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify G250andG251alwaysinasingleblock.
333
The principle of polygonal turning is explained below. I n the
figure below the radius of tool and workpiece are A and B, and
the angular speeds of tool and workpiece area and b. Theorigin
of XY cartesian coordinates is assumed to be the center of the
workpiece.
Simplifying the explanation, consider that the tool center exists
at theposition
Po (A,0) on the workpiece periphery, and the tool nose starts
fromposition Pto(A---B, 0).
A
(0, 0)
Pto
Po
Angular speeda
Angular
speedb
Tool
Workpiece
Y
X
A ; Workpiece radius
B ; Rool radius
a ; Workpiece angular speed
b ; Tool angular speed
Po (A, 0)
Pto (A---0, 0)
B
I nthiscase, thetool nosepositionPt (Xt,Yt) after timetisexpressedby
equation1:
(0, 0)
at
bt
A
Po
Start point
Pt (Xt, Yt)
B
Xt Acos t Bcos

)
t
(Equation 1)
Yt Asin t Bsin

)
t
Assuming that the rotation ration of workpiece to tool is 1:2,
namely, b=2a, equation1ismodifiedasfollows
D Principleof
PolygonalTurning
334
Xt Acos t Bcos t
(
A B
)
cos t
(Equation 2)
Yt Asin t Bsin t
(
A B
)
sin t
Equation 2 indicates that the tool nose path draws an ellipse
with longer diameter A+B and shorter diameter A---B.
Then consider thecase when one tool is set at 180 symmetrical
positions, for atotal of two. I t is seen that a square can be
machined with thesetools as shown below.
Tool
Workpiece
I f three tools are set at every 120 the machining figure will be
ahexagon as shown below.
Tool
Workpiece
335
WARNING
1 For the maximumrotation speed of tool, refer to the manual published by the MTB. Do not
specify a spindle speed or ratio to spindle speed exceeding the maximumrotation speed of
the tool.
2 An absolute position detector cannot be set on the Y axis.
3 The following signals become either valid or invalid in relation to the Y axis in polygonal
turning.
Valid signals in relation to Y axis:
machine lock
servo off
Invalid signals in relation to Y axis:
feed hold
interlock
ovrride
dry run
(During a dry run, however, there is no wait for a revolution signal in the G251 block.)
4 J ogging or handle feeding is invalid when the Y axis is in polygonal turning.
5 The starting point of the threading process becomes inconsistent when performed during
polygonal turning.
Cancel the polygonal turning by executing G250 when threading.
6 The Y axis in polygonal turning is not included in the number of axis controlled
simultaneously.
336
CAUTION
Unlike the other controlled axes, theleast commandincrement of the Y axis is not 0.001degree
since an axis move command is unnecessary for the Y axis. The least command increment
of the Y axis is related to parameters such as feedrate.
Therefore, pay attention to these parameters upon machine adjustment.
L: Move distance (deg) per motor rotation
Q: Number of pulses per pulse coder rotation
CMR: Command multiply
DMR: Detection multiply
When the least command increment of the Y axis is 0.12 deg, the parameters concerning the
feedrate of the Y axis should be set in unit of 120 deg/min (Thousandfold of least command
increment ), not in 1 deg/min.
L CMR
Q DMR
L
Q DMR
Least command increment
Detection unit
Move distance per Y axis rotation =
Least command increment
(Parameter No.778)
For example, incase of L=720deg, Q=3000pulses, CMR=2,the move
distance is as follows;
Least commandincrement :0.12deg
Detectionunit:0.12deg
Move distance per Y axis rotation:3000
0.12deg
Detector
0.12deg
*
+
Motor
Error register
Amplifier
(Detection unit)
DMR
2
3000p/re
v
(Least command
increment)
1
=Least command increment
CMR
360
337
NOTE
1 The Y axis, unlike the other controlled axes, cannot be specifiied a move command as Y----.
That is, an axis move command is unnecessary for the Y axis. Because, when G251
(polygonal turning mode) is specified, it is only necessary to control the Y axis so that the
tool rotates at a certain ratio to thespindle rotationspeed. However, onlythe referencepoint
return command (G28V0;) can be specified since the Y axis rotation is stopped at the
unstable position when G250 (polygonal turning mode cancel command) is specified. If the
tool rotation start position is unstable , a problemmay occur, for example, when the same
figure is machined with a finishing tool after once machined with a roughing tool.
Specification of G28V0; for Y axis is equal to the orientation command for the spindle. In
the other axes, unlike the manual reference point return, G28 usually makes reference point
return without detecting the deceleration limit. However, with G28V0; for the Y axis,
reference point return is executed by detecting the deceleration limit, like manual reference
point return.
To machine a workpiece into the same figure as the previous one, the tool and the spindle
must be in the same position as the previous time when the tool starts rotating. The tool is
set start rotation when the one--rotation signal of the position coder set on the spindle is
detected.
2 The Y axis used to control tool rotation for polygonal turning uses the 4th axis. However,
by setting parameters,
(No.069#1) the 3rd axis may also be used. In this case, that axis must be named C axis.
3 Among the position display of the Y axis, the display for the machine coordinate value
(MECHINE) will change froma range of 0 tothe parameter setting (theamount of movement
per revolution) as the Y axis moves. Absoluteor relativecoordinate values are notrenewed.
PROGRAMMING 22. ROTARY AXIS ROLL--OVER
B--61394E/08
338
22
ROTARYAXIS ROLL---OVER
The roll--over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from
overflowing. The roll--over function is enabled by setting bit 1 of
parameter 388to1.
Explanations
For an incremental command, thetool moves theanglespecified inthe
command. For an absolutecommand, thecoordinates after thetool has
moved are values set in parameter No.788, and rounded by the angle
correspondingtoonerotation. Thetool movesinthedirection inwhich
thefinal coordinatesareclosest whenbit 2of parameter No.388issetto
0. Displayedvaluesfor relativecoordinatesarealsoroundedbytheangle
correspondingtoonerotationwhenbit 3of parameter No.388isset to1.
Examples
Assumethat axisC istherotatingaxisandthat theamount of movement
per rotation is 360.000 (parameter No.788 = 360000). When the
followingprogramisexecutedusingtheroll--over functionof therotating
axis, theaxismovesasshownbelow.
C0;
Sequence
number
Actual
movement
value
Absolutecoordinate
valueafter movement
end
N1C--150.0; N1 --150 210
N2C540.0; N2 --30 180
N3C--620.0; N3 --80 100
N4H380.0; N4 +380 120
N5H--840.0; N5 --840 0
Relative
coordinate value
--720
--0
--360
--0 --0
--0 360
--0
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
210(Absolute)
180
100
120
Absolute
coordinate value
General
23. ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL
(0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/II)
339
23
ANGULARAXIS CONTROL
(0---GCC, 00---GCC, 0---GCD/II)
When the X--axis makes an angle other than 90 with the Z--axis, the
inclined axis control function controls the distancetraveled along each
axis according to the inclination angle. A program, when created,
assumesthattheX--axisandZ--axisintersectatrightangles. However, the
actual distancetravelediscontrolledaccordingtoaninclinationangle.
+X
+X
Programcoordinate system
Coordinate systemactually used
+Z
q
q : Inclinationangle
Explanations
The distance traveled along each axis is controlled according to the
formulasdescribedbelow.
The distance to be traveled along the X--axis is determined by the
followingformulawhenit isspecifiedwithadiameter :
X
Xp
2cos
Thedistancetraveledalong theZ--axis iscorrected by theinclinationof
theX--axis, andisdeterminedby thefollowingformula:
Za Zp
1
2
Xptan
The feedrate is determined as described below. The speed component
alongtheX--axisisdeterminedby thefollowingformula:
Fa
Fp
cos
Xa, Za, Fa:Actual distanceandspeed
Xp, Zp, Fp:Programmeddistanceandspeed
Parameter (No.036#0) enables or disables the inclined axis control
function. If thefunctionisenabled, thedistancetraveledalongeachaxis
iscontrolledaccordingtoaninclinationangle(No.755).
Parameter (No.036#2) enablesX--axismanual referencepoint returnonly
withadistancealongtheX--axis.
General
D Methodof use
PROGRAMMING
23. ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL
(0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/II) B--61394E/08
340
An absolute and a relative position are indicated in the programmed
Cartesiancoordinatesystem. Machinepositiondisplay
A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinate
system where an actual movement is taking place according to an
inclinationangle.
WARNING
1 After inclined axis control parameter setting, be sure to
performmanual reference point return operation.
2 If a movement along the Z--axis occurs in X--axis manual
reference point return operation, be sure to perform
reference point return operation starting with the X--axis.
3 If an inclination angle close to 0 or 90 is set, an error
can occur. A range from20 to 60 should be used.
4 Before a Z--axis reference point return check (G37) can
be made, X--axis reference point return operation must
be completed.
D Absoluteandrelative
positiondisplay
D Machinepositiondisplay
24. 2SYSTEMS CONTROL
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
341
24
2SYSTEMS CONTROL FUNCTION(0---TTC)
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION (0--TTC) B--61394E/08
342
Series0--TTC isCNC systemthat cancontrol twosystems; theseseries
aredesignedfor thoselathesthat operatetwotool postsindependentlyof
each other to enablesimultaneous cutting processing with the two tool
posts.
Series 0--TTC can be used for a lathe that machines one workpiece
attachedtoonespindlewithtwotool postssimultaneously.
For example, whileonetool post isperformingouter surfacemachining,
theother tool post can performinner surfacemachining, thus reducing
machiningtimedramatically.
Spindle
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
chuck
workpiece
Fig. 24.1(a) Applicationtolathes withonespindleandtowtool posts
Series0--TTCcanbeusedfor alathethat machinesaworkpieceattached
toeachof twospindleswithtwotool postssimultaneously. Inthiscase,
eachtool post operatesindependently of eachother asif twolatheswere
used, thusimprovingproductivity.
Spindle 1
Tool post 1
Spindle 2
Tool post 2
chuck 1
workpiece 1
chuck 2
workpiece 2
Fig. 24.1(b) Applicationtolathes withtwospindles andtwotool posts
24.1
GENERAL
D Applicationtolathes
withonespindleand
twotool posts
D Applicationtolathes
withtwospindles and
twotool posts
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
343
Theoperationsof twotool postsareprogrammedindependently of each
other, andeachprogramisstoredinprogrammemory for eachtool post.
Whenautomatic operationistobeperformed, eachtool post isactivated
after selecting aprogramfor machining with tool post 1and aprogram
for machining with tool post 2 fromthe programs stored in program
memoryfor eachtool post. Thentheprogramsselectedfor thetool lposts
areexecutedindependently at thesametime. Whentool post1andtool
post2needtowait for eachother duringmachining, thewaitingfunction
isavailable(Section23.2)
CRT/MDI panel
0--TTC
Reader/
punch
interface
Program
memory for
tool post 1
Program
memory for
tool post 2
Tool post 1
control
(such as
interpolation
and axis
control)
Tool post 2
control
(such as
interpolation
and axis
control)
Programfor tool
post 1
Programfor tool
post 2
X
1
axis
Z
1
axis
C axis
Y axis
X
2
axis
Z
2
axis
Fig. 24.1(c) Controllingtwotool posts independentlyatthesametime
J ust one CRT/MDI panel is provided for the two tool posts. Before
operation and display on the CRT/MDI panel, the tool post selection
signal isusedtoswitchbetweenthetwotool posts.
D Controllingtwotool
posts independentlyat
thesametime
PROGRAMMING
344
Explanations
Control based on M codesis usedto causeonetool post towait for the
other during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining
programfor eachtool post, thetwo tool posts canwait for each other at
aspecifiedblock. WhenanMcodefor waitingisspecifiedinablockfor
onetool post duringautomatic operation, theother tool postwaitsfor the
sameMcodetobespecifiedbeforestaringtheexecutionof thenextblock.
Thisfunctioniscalledthetool post waitingfunction.
A range of M codes used as M codes for waiting is to be set in the
parameters(No.047#4and243) beforehand.
Example
M300toM399areusedasM codesfor waiting.
Parameter setting: No.047#4=0
No.243=3
N1300 ;
G00X Z T0505;
N1399 ;
M303;
01357;
G50X Z ;
G00X Z T0101;
S1000M03;
M300;
N1100G01X Z F ;
N1199 ;
M301;
M302;
Tool post 1program
02468;
G50X Z ;
G00X Z T0202;
S2000M03;
M300;
N2100G01X Z F ;
N2199 ;
M301;
Tool post 2program
Simultaneous,independent
operationof tool post 1
(N1100toN1199) andtool
post 2(N2100to N2199)
N2200S3000;
G00X Z T0202;
N2299 ;
M302;
N2300 ;
G00X Z T0707;
N2399 ;
M303;
M30; M30;
Operationof tool post 2
(N2200to N2299) only
Simultaneous,independent
operationof tool post 1
(N1300toN1399)andtool
post 2(N2300to N2399)
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Endof program
<Waiting(M302)>
<Waiting(M301)>
24.2
WAITINGFORTOOL
POSTS
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
345
NOTE
1 An Mcode for waiting must always be speifiedin asingle
block.
2 If one tool post is waiting because of an M code for
waiting specified, and a different M code for waiting is
specified with the other tool post, an alarm(No. 160) is
raised, In this case, both tool posts stop operation.
3 PMC--CNC interface
Mcodes for waiting, unlike other Mcodes, do nothave
a code signal and strobe signal output.
Waiting ignore signal NOWT#1 (G133#1), NOWT#2
(G1333#1) By using the waiting ignore signal, an M
code for waiting specified in a machining programcan
be ignored. The waiting ignore signal is used to
operate only one tool post.
Waiting--in--progress signals WATO#1 (F160#6),
WATO#2 (F1360#6)While waiting is in progress (from
specification of an M code for waiting with one tool
post until specification of the same Mcode for waiting
with the other tool post), the waiting tool post outputs
the waiting--in--progress signal.
Refer to the FANUC Series0/00/0--Mate
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)
(B--61393E--2) for detailed information about each
signal.
PROGRAMMING
346
When two tool posts machine the sameworkpiece simultaneously, the
tool posts can approach each other very closely. If thetwo tool posts
interferewitheachother duetoaprogramerror or anyother settingerror,
aseriousdamagesuchasatool or machinedestructioncanoccur.
The function tool post interference check is available which can
decelerateandstopthetwotool postsbeforethetool postsinterferewith
eachother duetoan incorrect command.
Tool post 1
Tool post 2
Spindle
Chuck
Workpiece
Thecontours of thetwo tool posts arechecked todeterminewhether or
not aninterferenceoccurs.
To makeatool post interferencecheck, dataincluding therelationships
betweenthetwotool postsandinterferenceforbiddenareas(that is, tool
shapes) needs to be set. Themethod of such datasetting is described
below.
Withthetool postinterferencecheckfunction, whetheror notthetwotool
posts interfere with each other is determined by checking if the
interferenceforbiddenareas(basedontheinterferenceforbiddenareasof
thecurrently selectedtools) of thetool postsoverlapeachother after the
movement of thetool posts.
Explanations
Whenreferencepointreturnoperationiscompletedwithall axes(X1,Z1,
X2, Z2), thereferencepoint of tool post 1 isset at theoriginof theZX
planecoordinatesystem. At thistime, thepositionof thereferencepoint
of tool post2isset inaparameter. Thenext itemdescribesthereference
points.
24.3
TOOL POST
INTERFACE CHECK
24.3.1
General
24.3.2
DataSettingfor the
Tool PostInterference
CheckFunction
D Positionsettingfor
referencepoints of two
tool posts
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
347
Tool post 2
Tool post 1
+X
+Z
z
e
In theZX planecoordinatesystemat theorigin of which thereference
point of tool post 1isset, set theX coordinate(e) of thereferencepoint
of tool post 2inparameter No.768, anditsZcoordinate(z) inparameter
No.769.
Theunit of setting is theleast command increment. For an axissubject
todiameter specification, adiameter valueistobespecified.
Measure(e) and(z) when referencepoint return oprtation iscompleted
with the four axes (X1, Z1, X2, Z2). When the relative coordinate
parameters (Nos.768 and 769) of thetwo tool posts areto beupdated,
referencepoint returnoperationmust alwaysbecompletedwith thefour
axes beforehand. Otherwise, the internally memorized relational
positionsof thetool postsarenot updatedtonewparameter values.
PROGRAMMING
348
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TY1 TY0 048
TY0, TY1:Set therelationshipbetweenthecoordinatesystemsof the
twotool posts, withtool post 1usedasthereference.
WhenTY1=0 andTY0=0
Z
Tool post 1
Tool post 2
WhenTY1=0 andTY0=1
X X
Z Z
X
WhenTY1=1andTY0=0
X
Z
X
Z
WhenTY1=1and TY0=1
Z
X
Z
X
Tool post 2 Tool post 1
Tool post 1 Tool post 1
Tool post 2
Tool post 2
An interference forbidden area is set using a combination of two
rectangular areas. Someexamples areshown below. Thedashedlines
indicateinterferenceforbiddenareas.
Area 2
Area 1
(Example1)
(Example2)
or
Area 2
Area 2
Area 1
Area 1
D Settherelationship
betweenthecoordinate
systems of thetwotool
posts
D Settingof interference
forbiddenarea
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
349
The coordinates of the upper and lower ends (points A and B shown
below) of eachof tworectangles areset, withthereferencepoint of the
tool post set astheorigin.
X
Z
Reference point
A(X, Z)
B(I, K)
X>I
Z>K
SeeSection23.2.3for informationaboutthecoordinatesettingprocedure.
Explanations
Display and set tool shapedata(interferenceforbidden areas) according
totheprocedurebelow.
Pressthe
MENU
OFSET
functionkey.
Pressthecontinuationmenukey ( ), thenpressthe[TOOLFM]
soft key.
Withthetool post selectionsignal, select atool post for which
interferenceforbiddenareasfor tool post interferencecheckingare
tobedisplayedandset.
Displaythescreenincludingatool number for whichdataistobeset.
Method1:Select thescreenby usingthepagekeysandcursor keys.
Meshod2:Pressthe NO. key, thenenter thedesiredtool number.
Then, pressthe INPUT key.
24.3.3
SettingandDisplayof
InterferenceForbidden
Areas for Tool Post
InterferenceChecking
PROGRAMMING
350
TOOL FORMDATA HEAD1 : O0000 N0000
OFFSET NO. = 01
AREA1 AREA2
X = 20. 000 X = 40. 000
Z = 70. 000 Z = 70. 000
I = - 10. 000 I = 20. 000
K = - 50. 000 K = 30. 000
OFFSET NO. = 02
AREA1 AREA2
X = 160. 000 X = - 200. 000
Z = 170. 000 Z = - 60. 000
I = - 200. 000 I = - 280. 000
K = - 120. 000 K = - 120. 000
ADRS. S 0 T
MDI
[ WEAR ] [ GEOM] [ W. SHFT] [ MACRO ] [ ]
Withthenumeric keys, enter thecoordinatesof point A or B.
(Fractiondigitscanbeentered.)
X
Z
A(X, Z)
B(I, K)
X>I
Z>K
By pressingthesoft key INPUT , theenteredcoordinatesareset.
NOTE
Tool number
The tool geometry data must be set for each tool number.
The tool number here refers to the offset number. When
both tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are used, the
tool number corresponds to the wear offset number. To use
twoor moreoffset numbers for thesame tool, the samedata
for the tool must be set two or more times in the tool
geometry data.
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
351
A tool post interferencecheck ismadewhenall conditionslistedbelow
aresatisfied.
(1) Parameter (No.048#4) for enablingthetool post interferencecheck
functionisset to0.
(2) After power isturnedon, referencepoint returnoperationis
completed withall axes(X1,Z1, X2, Z2).(Whenan
absolute--positiondetector isused, thematchingbetweena
machinepositionandabsolute--position detector positionmust be
completed.)
(3) Offset numbersother than0arespecifiedusingT codesfor two
tool posts.
(4) Whenmanual modeisused,parameter No.048#3for enablingthe
tool post interferencecheck functioninmanual modeisset to1.
Whenall conditionsfor makingatool post interferencecheck are
satisfied, thetool post interferencecheck inprogresssignal is
output tothePMC.
24.3.4
Conditions for Making
aTool Post
InterferenceCheck
PROGRAMMING
352
whenall conditionsdescribedinSection 24.3.4aresatisfied, atool post
interferencecheckisstarted. Whenatool postinterferencecheckismade,
an interferenceforbidden areais set for thetwo tool posts by usingthe
offset shapedatacorrespondingtothecurrently selectedoffsetnumbers.
Thenwhether theareasinterferewitheachother ischecked.
Explanations
Tool post 1
Tool post 2
Spindle
Workpiece
Wheninterfaceforbiddenareas(tool shapes) asindicatedby dashedlines
are set for tool posts 1 and 2 as shown above, a check is made by
determining whether the two interference forbidden areas indicated by
dashedlinesoverlapeachother after themovement of thetool posts.
If thetwoareasinterferewitheachother analarm(No. 508or No. 509)
israised;thetwotool postsaredeceleratedandstopped.
If aninterferencealarmisraised, atool post interferencealarmsignal is
output tothePMC.
If aninterferencealarmisraisedbytheinterferenceof thetwotool posts
duringautomaticoperation, switchtomanual modetomovethetool posts
out of theinterferencestate. Thenreleasethealarmby areset.
Theinterferencecheck functioncanbeenabledeveninmanual modeby
setting the parameter (No. 048#3) to 1. This allows the tool posts
interfering with each other to be moved along the axes only in such
directions that clear theinterference. With this capability, the two tool
posts interfering with each other in automatic operaion cannot be
manually movedby mistakefurther intotheinterferenceforbiddenareas
after themodeisswitchedtomanual modetoclear theinterference, thus
providingsafety.
24.3.5
Executionof Tool Post
InterferenceChecking
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
353
WARNING
When an alarm is raised, the CNC system and machine
systemstop with some delay in time. So an actual stop
position can be closer to the other tool post beyond an
interference forbidden position specified using tool shape
data. So, for safety, tool shape data a little larger than the
actual shape should be set. The extra distance, L,
required for this purpose is calculated forma rapid traverse
feedrate as follows
For example, when a rapid traverse feedrate of 15 m/min is
used, L=2mm.
L (Rapidtraversefeedrate)
1
7500
CAUTION
When parameters and interface forbidden areas (Subsec
24.3.2) are set to use the interference check function,
besure to check that correct interference gorbidden areas
are set. For this purpose, set manual mode, and cause the
tool posts to interfere with each other in various directions.
PROGRAMMING
354
Explanations
140mm
80mm
100mm
120mm
115mm 170mm
215mm
75mm
115mm
115mm
T1515
Tool post 2 (T1515)
200mm 400mm
Tool post 1 (T0202)
+Z
+X
Coordinatesystemof
tool post 2
0
+Z
+X
Coordinatesystemof
tool post 1
0
Metric input withmetric machine tool
60mm 170mm
Thecoordinatesystemsshownontherightof thefigureabovearetheZX
planecoordinatesystemsof tool posts1and2. For clarity, thecoordinate
systems areshifted;actually, theorigins of thecoordinate systems must
matchthemachinezeropoints.
Assumethemachineconfigurationshownabove. Assumealsothatoffset
number 02isassignedtotool post 1, andoffsetnumber 15isassignedto
tool post 2.
Suppose that the figure represents the state of reference point return
operation completed with all axes (X1,Z1, X2, Z2). Then set --800
mm(diameter) and--200mminparameterNos. 768and769, respectively.
The positional relationship of the two tool posts matches type
indicatedinitemSettherelationshipbetweenthecoordinatesystemsof
thetwo tool posts in Subsec. 24.3.2. So set parameters No.048#1and
No.048#0asfollows:
Parameter No.048#1=1
Parameter No.048#0=1
Thenset tool shapedata(interferenceforbiddenarea) for eachtool post.
24.3.6
Exampleof Makinga
Tool PostInterference
Check
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
355
Thefigures belowshowthesettingof datafor tool number 02assigned
totool post 1andfor tool number 15assignedtotool post 2.
TOOL FORMDATA
O0001 N0001
OFFSET NO. =01
AREA1
X=
Z= 70.000
I= --10.000
K= --50.000
OFFSET NO. =02
AREA1
X= 80.000
Z= 170.000
I= --100.000
K= --120.000
AREA2
X= 40.000
Z= 70.000
I= 20.000
K= 30.000
AREA2
X= --100.000
Z= --60.000
J = --140.000
K= --120.000
NO. SRH
INPUT
MEM
* * * * * * * * * *
12: 02: 08 HEAD1
_
S 0T0000
INPUT
20.000
TOOL FORMDATA
O0001 N0001
OFFSET NO. =15
AREA1
X=
Z= 170.000
I= --115.000
K= --115.000
OFFSET NO. =16
AREA1
X= 0.000
Z= 0.000
I= 0.000
K= 0.000
AREA2
X= --75.000
Z= --115.000
I= --115.000
K= --215.000
AREA2
X= 0.000
Z= 0.000
I= 0.000
K= 0.000
NO. SRH
+INPUT
MEM
* * * * * * * * * *
12: 02: 36 HEAD2
_
S 0T0000
INPUT
115.000
Setdatafor other toolssimilarly. A preparationfor aninterferencecheck
iscompletedwhendatahasbeensetfor all tools. Turnonpower. Then,
aninterferencecheckisstartedwhenaT codeisspecifiedwitheachtool
post
after referencepointreturnoperationiscompletedwithall of thefouraxes
(X1, Z1, X2, Z2).
PROGRAMMING
356
When athin workpieceis to be machined as shown below, aprecision
machiningcanbeachievedbymachiningeachsideof theworkpiecewith
a tool simultaneously;this function can prevent the workpiece from
warpagethat canresultwhenonlyonesideismachinedat atime. When
bothsidesaremachinedatthesametime, themovement of onetool must
be in phase with that of theother tool. Otherwise, the workpiececan
vibrate, resultinginpoor machining. Withthisfunction, the movement
of onetool postcanbeeasilysynchronizedwiththatof theother tool post.
Fig. 24.4(a) Balancecut
Explanations
WhenG68isspecifiedintheprogramsfor bothtool post 1andtool post
2, thepulsedistribution of tool post 1 is synchronized with that of tool
post 2tostart balancecutting. Thusthetwotool postscanmoveexactly
at thesametimetoallowbalancecutting.
Gcode Meaning
G68 Balance cut mode
G69 Balance cut mode cancel
Inthebalancecut mode, balancecuttingisperformedonlywhenamove
commandis specifiedfor bothtool posts. Balancecutting isperformed
evenwhendifferentaxesarespecifiedforeachtool postoranoffsetmove
commandisspecified. G68or G69must bespecified inasingleblock.
(Otherwise, a P/S alarm (No. 163) is raised. When G68 or G69 is
specified with one tool post, the tool post does not move until the
executionfor theother tool post proceedstoG68or G69. And if cutting
isspecifiedwithonetool postinthebalancecutmode, thetool postdoes
notmoveuntil theexecutionof or theother tool postproceedstoacutting
command.
CAUTION
Balance cut only starts cutting feed on both tool posts atthe
same time; it does not maintain synchronization thereafter.
To synchronize all the movements of both tool posts, the
setting for both tool posts, such as the travel distance and
feedrate, must be the same.
24.4
BALANCE CUT
(G68, G69)
FUNCTION (0--TTC)
357
Example
Tool post 1program Tool post 2program
G68 ; G68 ; Balance cut mode
G01Z100.0 ; G01Z100.0 ; Balance cut
Z0 ; Z0 ; Balance cut
G69 ; G69 ; Balance cut mode
cancel
CAUTION
1 Balance cutting is not performed in dry run or machine
lock state.
2 When rapid traverse operation is specified, balance cut
processing is not performed.
3 A workpiece for whichthread cuttinghas beenperformed
in the balance cut mode cannot be subjected to thread
cutting in the cancel mode. Thread cutting starts at a
different position.
NOTE
1 Time delay before the pulsedistribution of both tool posts
is started is 2 msec or shorter.
2 In the balance cut mode, synchronization is established
at the start of a move block, so movement can
momentarily stop.
3 If feed hold operation is performed during balance
cutting using both tool posts, balance cut processing is
not performed at restart time, it is performed when the
next move command is specified for both tool posts.
4 The cancel mode (G69) is set by a reset.
5 When the option mirror image for double turrets is
selected, the balance cut function cannot be used.
Someor all of thecustommacrocommonvariables(#100to#149, #500
to#531) canbemadecommonlyusablebybothtool post 1andtool post
2;suchvariablescanbewrittentoor readfromeither tool post. See Item
Typesof variables inSection16.1.
24.5
CUSTOMMACRO
VARIABLES
COMMONTOTOOL
POSTS
III. OPERATION
OPERATION B--61394E/08 1. GENERAL
361
1
GENERAL
OPERATION 1. GENERAL B--61394E/08
362
Explanations
TheCNC machinetool hasapositionwhichismachinesown.
This position is called thereferenceposition, wherethetool isreplaced
or thecoordinateareset. Ordinarily, after thepower isturnedon, thetool
ismovedtothereferenceposition.
Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference
positionusingswitchesandpushbuttonslocatedontheoperatorspanel.
Reference position
Tool
Machine operators panel
Fig. 1.1(a) Manual referencepositionreturn
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program
commands.
Thisoperationiscalledautomatic referencepositionreturn (SeeSection
II--6).
1.1
MANUAL
OPERATION
D Manual reference
positionreturn(See
SectionIII--3.1)
363
Using machine operators panel switches, push buttons, or themanual
handle, thetool canbemovedalongeachaxis.
Tool
Machine operators panel
Manual
pulse
generator
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1(b) Thetool movementbymanual operation
Thetool canbemovedinthefollowingways:
(i) J ogfeed(SeeSectionIII--3.2)
Thetool movescontinuously whileapushbuttonremainspressed.
(ii) Incremental feed(SeeSectionIII--3.3)
Thetool movesby thepredetermineddistanceeachtimeabuttonis
pressed.
(iii)Manual handlefeed(SeeSectionIII--3.4)
By rotatingthemanual handle,thetool movesby thedistance
correspondingtothedegreeof handlerotation.
D Thetool movementby
manual operation
364
Automatic operation is to operatethemachineaccording to thecreated
program. It includes memory, DNC and MDI operations. (SeeSection
III--4).
Program
Tool
01000 ;
M_S_T_ ;
G50_X_ ;
G00... ;
G01...... ;
.
.
.
.
Fig. 1.2(a) Tool MovementbyProgramming
Explanations
After theprogramisonceregisteredinmemoryof CNC, themachinecan
be run according to theprograminstructions. This operation is called
memory operation.
CNC Machine
Memory
Fig. 1.2(b) MemoryOperation
Themachinecanoperatebyreadingaprogramdirectlyfromaconnected
I/O device, without registering the programinto CNC memory. This
functionisuseful whenaprogramistoolargetoberegisteredintoCNC
memory. Thisfunctioncanalsobeusedwhenremotebuffersareusedfor
high--speedmachining.
1.2
TOOL MOVEMENT
BYPROGRAMING --
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
D Memoryoperation
D DNC operation
365
After the programis entered, as an command group, from the MDI
keyboard, the machine can be run according to the program. This
operationiscalledMDI operation.
CNC MDI keyboard
Manual program
input
Machine
Fig. 1.2(c) MDI operation
D MDI operation
366
Explanations
Select theprogramused for theworkpiece. Ordinarily, oneprogramis
prepared for one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory,
selecttheprogramtobeused, bysearchingtheprogramnumber (Section
III--9.3).
G50
O1001 Programnumber
M30
G50
O1002
G50
M30
Programnumber
Programnumber
search
Automatic
operation
O1003
------------------------
M30
------------------------
------------------------
Work--1program
Work--2program
Programnumber
Work--3program
Inmemory or ona tape
Fig. 1.3(a) ProgramSelectionfor Automatic Operation
Pressing the cyclestart pushbutton causes automatic operation to start.
Bypressingthefeedholdor resetpushbutton, automaticoperationpauses
or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination
command in the program, the running will stop during automatic
operation. When one process machining is completed, automatic
operationstops.
Cycle start
Feedhold
Reset
Programstop
Programend
Stopcaused
by program
Start
Stop
Automatic operation
Fig. 1.3(b) StartandStopfor Automatic Operation
1.3
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
D Programselection
D Startandstop
(SeeSectionIII--4)
367
Whileautomaticoperationisbeingexecuted, tool movement canoverlap
automatic operationby rotatingthemanual handle.
Z
X
Workpiece
Programmed
depthof cut
Depthof cut by
handle interruption
Toolposition
after handle
interruption
Tool position
duringautomatic
operation
Fig. 1.3(c) HandleInterruptionfor Automatic Operation
D Handleinterruption(See
SectionIII--4.6)
368
Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be
executed. Itcheckswhether thecreatedprogramcanoperatethemachine
as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine
actually or viewing the position display change (without running the
machine) (SeeSectionIII--5).
Explanations
Removetheworkpiece, checkonlymovementof thetool. Select thetool
movement rateusingthedial ontheoperatorspanel.
Tool
Work
(Remove)
Fig. 1.4.1(a) Dryrun
Check theprogramby changingtheprogramof feedratecommand.
Tool
Feedrate of program: 50mm/
min.
Feedrate after feedrate
override :10mm/min.
Workpiece
Fig. 1.4.1(b) FeedrateOverride
1.4
TESTINGA
PROGRAM
1.4.1
CheckbyRunningthe
Machine
D Dryrun
(SeeSectionIII--5.4)
D Feedrateoverride
369
When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one
operationthenstops. By pressingthecyclestart again, thetool executes
thenext operationthenstops. Theprogramischeckedinthismanner.
Cycle start
Cycle start
Cycle start
Cycle start
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.4.1(c) SingleBlock
Explanations
Tool
CRT/MDI
X
Y
The tool remains stopped, andonly the
positional displays of the axes change.
Workpiece
Fig. 1.4.2 MachineLock
Whenautomatic runningisplacedintotheauxiliary function lock mode
during themachinelock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindlerotation,
tool replacement, coolant on/off, etc.) aredisabled.
D Singleblock
1.4.2
HowtoViewthe
PositionDisplay
Changewithout
RunningtheMachine
D Machinelock
(SeeSections III--5.1)
D Auxiliaryfunctionlock
370
After acreatedprogramisonceregisteredinmemory, itcanbecorrected
or modifiedfromtheCRT/MDI panel (SeeSectionIII--9).
This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit
function.
Programregistration
CRT/MDI
CNC CNC
Programcorrectionor modification
Tape reader
CNC tape (program)
Fig. 1.5 PartProgramEditing
1.5
EDITINGAPART
PROGRAM
371
The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal
memory by key operationontheCRT/MDI screen(SeeIII--11).
Data setting
CRT/MDI
Data display
ScreenKeys
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6(a) DisplayingandSettingData
Explanations
Tool offset number1 12.3 25.0
Tool offset number2 20.0 40.0
Tool offset number3

Setting
Display
CNC memory
ScreenKeys
CRT/MDI
Geometry offset Wear offset
Fig. 1.6(b) DisplayingandSettingOffsetValues
Thetool hasthetool dimension(length, diameter). Whenaworkpieceis
machined, thetool movement valuedependsonthetool dimensions.
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand,
automatically generates tool routes that permit any tool to cut the
workpiecespecified by theprogram. Tool dimension datais calledthe
offset value (SeeSectionIII--11.4.1).
1.6
DISPLAYINGAND
SETTINGDATA
D Offsetvalue
372
X-axis ffset value
of the tool
Z-axis offset value of the tool
Workpiece
Tool
Fig. 1.6(c) OffsetValue
Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in
operation. Thisdatacausesmachinecharacteristicstochange.
For example, thefollowingdatacanbeset:
Inch/Metric switching
Selectionof I/Odevices
Theabovedataiscalledsettingdata (SeeSectionIII--11.4.7).
Setting
Displaying Screen Keys
Settingdata
Inch/Metric switching
Selectionof I/O device
CNC Memory
Program
Automatic
operation
Operational
characteristics
Movement of
the machine
Fig. 1.6(d) DisplayingandSettingOperators settingdata
D Displayingandsetting
operators settingdata
373
The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in
characteristicsof variousmachines.
For example, CNC canspecify thefollowing:
Rapidtraverserateof eachaxis
Whether increment systemisbasedonmetric systemor inchsystem.
Howtoset commandmultiply/detect multiply (CMR/DMR)
Datato maketheabovespecification iscalled parameters (SeeSection
III--11.5.1).
Parametersdiffer dependingonmachinetool.
CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Parameter
Rapidtraverse rate
Positioncontrol
Reference positionreturn
Backlashcompensationdata
Pitcherror compensation
data

Program
Operational
characteristics
Setting
Display
Screen Keys
Automatic
operation
Movement
of the
machine
Fig. 1.6(e) Displayingandsettingparameters
A key calledthedataprotectionkeycanbedefined. It isusedtoprevent
part programs frombeing registered, modified, or deleted erroneously
(SeeSectionIII--11).
Program
CNC memory
Editionof program
ScreenKeys
CRT/MDI
ProtectionKey
Registration/ modificationinhibition
Fig. 1.6(f) DataProtectionKey
D Displayingandsetting
parameters
D Dataprotectionkey
374
Thecontentsof thecurrently activeprogramaredisplayed. Inaddition,
theprogramsschedulednext andtheprogramlist aredisplayed.
PROGRAM O0001 N0000
O0001 T0101 ;
S550 M08 ;
M45 ;
N010 G50 X200. Z200. ;
N011 G00 X160. Z180. ;
N012 G71 U7. R1. ;
N013 G71 P014 Q020 U4. W2. F0. 3 S550 M03 ;
N014 G00 X40. F0. 15 S700 ;
<
16: 09: 08 EDI T
[ PRGRM] [ LI B ] [ FLOPPY ] [ ] [ C. A. P. ]
Activeprogramnumber
Activesequencenumber
Currently executedprogram
Thecursor indicatesthecurrentlyexecutedlocation
Program
content
PROGRAM O0001 N0000
SYSTEMSDI TI ON 0666 - 21
PROGRAMNO, USED : 24 FREE : 39
MEMORY AREA USED : 24960 FREE : 97920
PROGRAMLI BRARY LI ST
O0021 O0041 O0615 O0651 O0601 O0645
O0613 O0021 O1041 O1051 O0010 O2011
O2505 O0011 O3511 O3148 O3153 O4011
O4048 O5221 O5111 O5766 O6032 O0001
<
16: 11: 12 EDI T
[ PRGRM] [ CONDNS ] [ ] [ ] [ C. A. P. ]
1.7
DISPLAY
1.7.1
ProgramDisplay
(SeeSectionIII--11.2.1)
375
Thecurrent position of thetool isdisplayed withthecoordinatevalues.
Thedistancefromthecurrent positionto thetarget positioncan alsobe
displayed.
X
X
Workpiece coordinate system
Z
Z
ACTUAL POSI TI ON ( ABSOLUTE) O0001 N0023
PART COUNT 1786
RUN TI ME 2H47M CYCLE TI ME 0H1M47S
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M
16: 14: 02 AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 220. 000
X 200. 000
Whenatroubleoccursduringoperation, errorcodeandalarmmessageare
displayedonCRT screen. SeeAPPENDIX 7for thelistof error codesand
their meanings.
ALARMMESSAGE O0001 N0011
010 P/ S ALARM
S 0 T0101
16: 20: 30 ALARM BUF MDI
[ ALARM] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ ] [ ]
1.7.2
CurrentPosition
Display(SeeSection
III--11.1.1to11.1.3)
1.7.3
AlarmDisplay
376
When option is selected, twotypes of run timeand number of partsare
displayedonthescreen.
PART COUNT 1786
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M S 0 T0101
16: 14: 02 BUF AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 220. 000
X 200. 000
Thegraphic canbeusedtodrawatool pathfor automatic operationand
manual operation, thereby indicating the progress of cutting and the
positionof thetool.
S 0. 41 O0001 N0013
X164. 000
Z 182. 000
C 0. 000
Y 0. 000
S 0 T0101
16: 44: 53 AUTO
[ GRAPH ] [ G. PRM] [ ZOOM ] [ NORMAL ] [ AUX ]
X
Z
0--TC
1.7.4
Parts CountDisplay,
RunTimeDisplay
(SeeSectionIII--11.5.3)
1.7.5
Graphic Display
(SeeSectionIII--12)
377
HEAD2 : O0210N2930
S 0 T
15: 33: 55 BUF AUTO
X
Z
0--TTC
378
Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory canbe
output to paper tape, cassette, or afloppy disk for saving. After once
output toamedium, thedatacanbeinput intoCNC memory.
Memory
Program
Offset
Parameters
Reader/puncher
interface
Portable tape reader
CNC
Automatic programmingsystem
Floppy disk
FANUC Floppy
cassette adaptor
FANUC cassette
SYSTEM P
FANUC PPR
Paper tape
.
.
.
Fig. 1.8 DataOutput
1.8
DATAOUTPUT
OPERATION B--61394E/08 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
379
2
OPERATIONAL DEVICES
Theperipheral devicesavailableincludetheCRT/MDI panel attachedto
the CNC, machine operators panel and external input/output devices
suchastapereader, PPR, floppy cassette, andFA card.
OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B--61394E/08
380
Figs. 2.1(a) to2.1(f) showtheCRT/MDI.
9 small monochromeCRT/MDI (withsoft key) Fig.2.1(a) . . . .
9 full key monochromeCRT/MDI (withsoft key) Fig.2.1(b) . .
External view
Fig. 2.1(a) 9small monochromeCRT/MDI (withsoftkey)
Fig. 2.1(b) 9full keymonochromeCRT/MDI (withsoftkey)
2.1
CRT/MDI PANELS
381
Explanationof thekeyboard
CRT (9amber)
Reset key Data input key
Function key
Cursor move key
Page change key
Programedit key
Start/output key
Input key
Fig. 2.1(c) 9small monochromeCRT/MDI panel (withsoftkey)
Table2.1 Explanationof theMDI keyboard
Number Name Explanation
1 Power ON and OFF buttons Press theses buttons to turnCNC power ON andOFF.
2 RESET key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel analarm, etc.
3 HELP key, START key Usedto start MDI or automatic operation. The use of this key depends onthe
machine tool builder. Refer to the manual of the machine tool builder. This key is
usedalso to output data to anI/O unit.
4 Soft keys
(option)
The soft keys have various functions, accordingto the Applications. The soft key
functions are displayedat the bottomof the CRT screen.
5 Address andnumeric
keys
Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, andother characters.
6 SHIFT key Some keys have two characters ontheir keytop. Pressingthe <SHIFT>key
switches the characters. Special character is displayedonthe screenwhena
character indicatedat the bottomright corner onthe keytopcanbe entered.
(This key is not onstandardtype MDI keyboard)
7 INPUT key Whenanaddress or a numerical key is pressed, the data is input to the buffer,
andit is displayedonthe CRT screen. To copy the data inthe key input buffer to
the offset register, etc., press the <INPUT>key. This key is equivalent to the [IN-
PUT] key of the soft keys. This operationis same as usingI/O devices.
f OFF | ON
RESET
OUTPT
START
)
N
4
SHIFT
INPUT
382
Table2.1 Explanationof theMDI keyboard
Number Explanation Name
8 Cancel key Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer.
Whenthe key input buffer displays
9 Programedit keys Press these keys wheneditingthe program.
10 Functionkeys Press theses keys to switchdisplay screens for eachfunction.
See sec. 2.2for detailas of the functionkeys.
11 Cursor move keys There are two different cursor move keys.
:This key is usedto move the cursor ina downwardor forwarddirection.
: This key is usedto move the cursor inanupwardor reverse direction.
11 Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are describedbelow.
: This key is usedto changeover the page onthe CRT screeninthe
forwarddirection.
: This key is usedto changeover the page onthe CRT screeninthe
reverse direction.
In the Series 0--TTC, be sure to select the tool post for which data is
specified, usingthetool--post selectionswitchonthemachineoperators
panel. Then, perform keyboard operation, such as displaying or
specifyingvariousdataitems, andeditingaprogram.
CAN
ALTER INSRT DELET
ALTER
DELET
INSRT
: Alteration
: Insertion
: Deletion
POS PRGRM

CURSOR
PAGE
Explanations
D Keyboardoperationinthe
Series 0--TTC
383
1 Press afunctionkey ontheCRT/MDI panel. Thechapter selection
soft keysthat belongtotheselectedfunctionappear.
2 Press one of the chapter selection soft keys. The screen for the
selected chapter appears. If thesoft key for a target chapter is not
displayed, pressthecontinuousmenukey (next--menukey).
Insomecases, additional chapterscanbeselectedwithinachapter.
3 To redisplay the chapter selection soft keys, press the return menu
key.
Thegeneral screendisplay procedureisexplained above. However, the
actual display procedurevaries fromonescreento another. For details,
seethedescriptionof individual operations.
If soft keysarenot provided, pressthekey withtheidentical functionto
selectadesiredchapter. Thedescriptionof thesoftkeysisautomatically
displayedaccordingtotheoptional configuration. Thedescriptionof the
soft keyscanbedisplayedregardless of theoptional configuration if bit
7of parameter 048isset accordingly.
2.2
FUNCTIONKEYS
ANDSOFTKEYS
2.2.1
General Screen
Operations
MENU
OFSET
PRGRM
POS
AUX
GRAPH
OPR
ALARM
DGNOS
PARAM
Functionkeys
Chapter selection
soft keys
Returnmenu
key
Continuous menu
key
384
Function keys areprovided to select thetypeof screento bedisplayed.
ThefollowingfunctionkeysareprovidedontheCRT/MDI andpanels:
Pressthiskey todisplay thepositionscreen.
Pressthiskey todisplay theprogramscreen.
Pressthiskey todisplay theoffset/screen.
Press this key to display the setting screen / parameter screen /
diagnosis screen.
Press this key to display the alarm screen/operator message
screen.
Pressthiskey todisplay thegraphics screen.
2.2.2
FunctionKeys
POS
PRGRM
MENU
OFSET
DGNOS
PARAM
OPR
ALARM
AUX
GRAPH
385
When an address and a numerical key are pressed, the character
corresponding to that key is input onceinto thekey input buffer. The
contents of thekey input buffer is displayed at the bottomof theCRT
screen.
Key input buffer display
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Key input buffer display af-
ter address input
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Address
Numeric X
Fig. 2.2.3 Keyinputbuffer display
Onthestandardkey panel, thesamekey isusedtoinputbothanaddress
andanumeric value.
When thekey input buffer begins with ADDRESS, pressing that key
inputs the address. When the key input buffer begins NUMERIC,
pressingthat key inputsthenumeric value.
[ ]
[ ]
4
X
[ ]
[ ]
4
X
Address
Numeric X
Numeric X
Numeric X 4
Press key Press key
2.2.3
KeyInputandInput
Buffer
Explanations
D For standardkey
386
Dataof oneword(address+numeric value) canbeenteredinto thekey
input buffer at onetime. Thefollowingdatainputkeysareusedtoinput
addresses. Each timethe key is pressed, the input address changes as
shownbelow:
C A
K
I
H
J
Q
P
NO.
B
A
C
Y
V
D B
H I Y K
J Q V P L
Pressing the
CAN
key deletes all thedatainput to thekey input buffer.
Whenbit7of parameter0394issetto1, eachpressof the
CAN
keydeletes
only the most recently entered character during data input using the
parameter, diagnostic, or offset screen.
When an address and a numerical key are pressed, the character
corresponding to that key is input onceinto thekey input buffer. The
contents of thekey input buffer is displayed at the bottomof theCRT
screen.
A < is displayed at theend of thekey input dataindicating theinput
positionof thenext character.
Key input buffer display
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
N001X100Z<
Fig. 2.2.3(b) Keyinputbuffer display
Toinputthelower character of thekeysthathavetwocharactersinscribed
onthem, first pressthe
SHIFT
key andthenthekey inquestion.
WhentheSHIFT key ispressed, < indicating thenext character input
positionchangesto . Nowlowercasecharacterscanbeentered(shift
state).
When a character is input in shift status the shift status is canceled.
Furthermore, if the
SHIFT
key is pressed in shift status, theshift status is
canceled.
Itispossibletoinput upto32charactersatatimeinthekey inputbuffer.
Pressthe
CAN
key tocancel thelast character or symbol input in thekey
input buffer.
(Example)
Whenthekeyinputbuffer displays
N001X100Z<
andthecancel keyispressed, Z iscanceledand
N001X100<
isdisplayed.
D For full key
387
Five types of external input/output devices are available. This section
outlines each device. For details on these devices, refer to the
correspondingmanualslistedbelow.
Table2.3(a) External I/Odevice
Devicename Usage Max.
storage
capacity
Reference
manual
FANUC Handy File Easy--to--use, multi function
input/output device. It is de-
signedfor FA equipment
anduses floppy disks.
3600m B--61834E
FANUC Floppy Cas-
sette
Input/output device. Uses
floppy disks.
2500m B--66040E
FANUC FA Card Compact input/output de-
vice. Uses FA cards.
160m B--61274E
FANUC PPR Input/output device consist-
ingof a paper tape reader,
tape punch, andprinter.
275m B--58584E
Portable Tape Reader Input device for readingpa-
per tape.
______ Appendix H
Thefollowing datacan beinput/output to or fromexternal input/output
devices:
1. Programs
2. Offsetdata
3. Parameters
4. Custommacrocommonvariables
For howdataisinput andoutput, seeChapter 8.
2.3
EXTERNAL I/O
DEVICES
388
Parameter
Beforean external input/output devicecanbeused, parameters must be
set asfollows.
Series 0
MEMORY CARD REMOTE BUFFER
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
M5 M74
RS--422 RS--232--C RS--232--C
M77 M77
RS--232--C
Reader/
puncher
Host
computer
Host
computer
Reader/
puncher
I/O =0
or
I/O =1
I/O =2 I/O =3 I/O =3
Series 16/18 has three channels of reader/punch interfaces. The
input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel
connectedtothat deviceinsettingparameter I/O.
Thespecifieddata, suchasabaudrateandthenumber of stopbits, of an
input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in
parametersfor that channel inadvance.
For channel 1, twocombinationsof parameterstospecifytheinput/output
devicedataareprovided.
Thefollowingshowstheinterrelationbetweenthereader/punchinterface
parametersfor thechannels.
I/O
Specifyachannel for an
input/outputdevice.
I/O
=0: Channel 1
=1: Channel 1
=2: Channel 2
=3: Channel 3
I/O=0
(channel 1)
Stop bitand other data
Number specified for the
input/outputdevice
Baud rate
I/O=1
(channel 1)
input/outputdevice
Baud rate
I/O=2
(channel 2)
I/O=3
(channel 3)
Selection of protocol
and other data
SelectionofRS-- 422or
RS-- 232C, and other
data
Parameter Number
input/outputdevice
Baud rate
input/outputdevice
Baud rate
0002
0038#6, #7
0052
0012
0038#6, #7
0553
0050
0038#4, #5
0250
0051
0038#1, #2
0251
0055#2
0055#3
389
The Handy File is an easy--to--use, multi function floppy disk
input/outputdevicedesignedfor FA equipment. ByoperatingtheHandy
File directly or remotely from a unit connected to the Handy File,
programscanbetransferredandedited.
The Handy File uses 3.5--inch floppy disks, which do not have the
problemsof paper tape(i.e., noisyduringinput/output, easilybroken, and
bulky).
One or more programs (up to 1.44M bytes, which is equivalent to the
memorycapacityof 3600--mpaper tape)canbestoredononefloppydisk.
RS--232--C or
RS--422 Interface
(Punch panel, etc.)
FANUC
HandyFile
RS-- 232-- C
Interface
RS-- 422
Interface
When theFloppy Cassetteis connectedto theNC, machiningprograms
stored in the NC can be saved on a Floppy Cassette, and machining
programssavedintheFloppy CassettecanbetransferredtotheNC.
RS--232--C Interface
(Punch panel, etc.)
FANUC
ON
OFF
POWER
2.3.1
FANUC HandyFile
2.3.2
FANUC Floppy
Cassette
390
AnFA Cardisamemory cardused asan input mediumintheFA field.
It iscompact, but hasalargememory capacity withhigh reliability, and
requiresnospecial maintenance.
When an FA Card is connected to the CNC via the card adapter, NC
machining programs stored in theCNC can betransferredto andsaved
in an FA Card. Machining programs storedon anFA Cardcan alsobe
transferredtotheCNC.
(Punch panel, etc.)
READY
EJ ECT
READ
WRITE
ALARM
RESET
FANUC
TheFANUCPPRconsistsof threeunits: Aprinter, papertapepunch, and
paper tapereader.
When thePPR is used alone, datacanbereadfromthetapereader and
printedor punchedout. ItisalsopossibletoperformTHandTV checks
ondatathat wasread.
(Punch panel, etc.)
2.3.3
FANUC FACard
2.3.4
FANUC PPR
391
Theportabletapereader isusedtoinput datafrompaper tape.
}
+ +
(Punch panel, etc.)
2.3.5
PortableTapeReader
392
Procedureof turningonthepower
1 Check that theappearanceof theCNC machinetool isnormal.
(For example, check that front door andrear door areclosed.)
2 Turn on thepower according to the manual issued by themachine
tool builder.
3 After the power is turned on, check that the position screen is
displayed. If thescreenshowninSection2.4.2isdisplayed, asystem
failuremay haveoccurred.
If the machine tool is in the emergency stop state, the software
configurationscreen, shownin2.4.2, appears.
Press the POS function key on theCRT/MDI panel, or releasethe
machinefromemergency stop.
The position screen then appears. If the position screen is not
displayed, asystemfailuremay haveoccurred.
PART COUNT 1786
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M S 0 T0101
16: 14: 02 BUF AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 220. 000
X 200. 000
4 Check that thefanmotor isrotating.
WARNING
When pressing the <POWER ON>key. Until the positional
or alarmscreenis displayed, do nottouch keys of CRT/MDI
panel. Some keys are used for the maintenance or special
operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected
operation may be caused.
2.4
POWERON/OFF
2.4.1
TurningonthePower
393
Display of software
configuration
O666 -- 24
CNC control software
SERVO : 9030--01
SUB : xxxx--xx
OMM : yyyy--yy
PMC : zzzz--zz
Digital servo ROM
Sub CPU (remote buffer)
Order--made macro/macro
compiler
PMC
Procedurefor Poser Disconnection
1 Check that theLEDindicatingthecyclestartisoff ontheoperators
panel.
2 Check that all movablepartsof theCNC machinetool isstopping.
3 If anexternal input/outputdevicesuchastheHandyFileisconnected
totheCNC, turnoff theexternal input/output device.
4 ContinuetopressthePOWER OFF pushbuttonfor about 5seconds.
NOTE
Refer to the machinetool builders manual for turning off the
power to the machine.
2.4.2
Power Disconnection
OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION B--61394E/08
394
3
MANUAL OPERATION
MANUAL OPERATION arefour kindsasfollows:
1. Manual referencepositionreturn
2. J ogfeed
3. Incremental feed
4. Manual handlefeed
5. Manual absoluteon/off
OPERATION B--61394E/08 3. MANUAL OPERATION
395
Thetool isreturnedtothereferencepositionasfollows:
The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter (bit0 to 3 of
No.0003) for each axis with thereferenceposition return switch onthe
machineoperatorspanel. Thetool movestothedecelerationpoint atthe
rapidtraverserate, thenmovestothereferencepositionat theFL speed.
TherapidtraverserateandFL speedarespecifiedinparameters(No. 0518
to0521, 0533, 0544).
Foursteprapidtraverseoverrideiseffectiveduringrapidtraverse.
When the tool has returned to the reference position, the reference
positionreturncompletionLEDgoeson. Thetool generally movesalong
only asingleaxis, but can movealong threeaxes simultaneously when
specifiedsoinparameter (bit4of No.0049).
Rapidtraverse rate
(rapidtraverse override is
effective)
Rapidtraverse motion
Decelerated
motion
FL speed
Reference
position
Deceleration
point
Procedurefor Manual ReferencePositionReturnOperation
1 Pressthereferencepositionreturnswitch, oneof themode
selectionswithces.
2 Todecereasethefeedrate, pressarapidtraverseoverrideswitch.
3 Pressthefeedaxisanddirectionselectionswitchcorrespondingtothe
axisanddirectionfor referencepositionreturn. Continuepressingthe
switchuntil thetool returnstothereferenceposition. Thetool canbe
movedalongthreeaxessimultaneously whenspecifiedsoinan
appropriateparameter setting. Thetool movestothedeceleration
pointattherapidtraverserate, thenmovestothereferencepositionat
theFL speedset inaparameter.
When thetool has returned to the referenceposition, thereference
positionreturncompletionLEDgoeson.
4 Performthesameoperationsfor other axes, if necessary.
Theaboveisanexample. Refer totheappropriatemanual providedby
themachinetool builder for theactual operations.
X Z C Y
PRO-
GRAM
STOP
M02/
M30
MANU
ABS
NC? MC?
ZEROPOSITION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TOOL NUIMBER
3.1
MANUAL
REFERENCE
POSITIONRETURN
REMOTE MDI MEMORY EDIT
ZERO
RETURN
TEACH J OG HANDLE
MODE
50 100 25 F0
RAPIDTRAVERSE
OVERRIDE (%)
+C +X +Y
+Z ---Z
---C ---Y ---X
RAPID
AXIS DIRECTION
396
Explanation
Bit7 of parameter No.0010 is used for automatically setting the
coordinate system. When ZPR is set, the coordinate system is
automatically determined when manual reference position return is
performed.
Whena andg aresetinparameter 0708to0711, theworkpiececoordinate
systemisdeterminedsothat thereferencepoint onthetool holder or the
position of the tip of the reference tool is X=a,Z=gwhen reference
positionreturnisperformed.
Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED
lights at the completion of reference position return, the tool does not
move unless the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN switch is turned
off.
The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED is
extinguishedby either of thefollowingoperations:
-- Movingfromthereferenceposition.
-- Enteringanemergency stopstate.
For thedistance(Not in thedeceleration condition) to returnthetool to
the reference position, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool
builder.
D Automaticallysetting
thecoordinatesystem
Restrictions
D Movingthetool again
D Referenceposition
returncompletionLED
D Thedistancetoreturnto
referenceposition
397
Inthejogmode, pressingafeedaxisanddirectionselectionswitchonthe
machineoperatorspanel continuously movesthetool alongtheselected
axisintheselecteddirection.
Thejogfeedrateisdescribedfollowingtable3.2.
Table3.2 J ogFeedrate
Rotary
switch
Feedrate Rotary
switch
Feedrate
switch
position
Metric input
(mm/min)
Inchinput
(inch/min)
switch
position
Metric input
(mm/min)
Inchinput
(inch/min)
0 0 0 8 50 2.0
1 2.0 0.08 9 79 3.0
2 3.2 0.12 10 126 5.0
3 5.0 0.2 11 200 8.0
4 7.9 0.3 12 320 12
5 12.6 0.5 13 500 20
6 20 0.8 14 790 30
7 32 1.2 15 1260 50
Note The feedrate error (about 3%) affects onthe feedrate in
the table above.
Thejogfeedratecanbeadjustedwiththejogfeedrateoverridedial.
Pressing the rapid traverse switch moves the tool at the rapid traverse
feedrateregardlessof thepostiotionof thejogfeedrateoverridedial.
Manual operationisallowedfor oneaxisatatime. 3axescanbeselected
at atimeby parameter J AX (No.0049#4).
v mm/min
Z
X
While a switchis pressed, the
tool moves inthe direction
specifiedby the switch.
Tool
Workpiece
3.2
J OGFEED
REMOTE MDI MEMORY EDIT
ZERO
RETURN
TEACH J OG HANDLE
MODE
398
Procedurefor J ogFeedOperation
1 Pressthejogswitch, oneof themodeselectionswitches.
2 Pressthefeedaxisanddirectionselectionswitchcorrespondingtothe
axisanddirectionthetool istobemoved. Whiletheswitchispressed,
the tool moves at the feedrate described table3.2. The tool stops
whentheswitchisreleased.
3 Thejogfeedratecanbeadjustedwiththejogfeedrateoverrideswitch.
4 Pressing the rapid traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and
direction selection switch moves the tool at therapid traverserate
whiletherapidtraverseswitchispressed. Rapidtraverseoverrideby
therapidtraverseoverrideswitchesiseffectiveduringrapidtraverse.
Theaboveisanexample. Refer totheappropriatemanual provided
by themachinetool builder for theactual operations.
Accerleration/deceleration method and time constant for rapid traverse
arethesameasG00inprogrammedcommand.
Changing the mode to the jog mode while pressing a feed axis and
directionselectionswitchdoesnot enablejog feed. Toenablejogfeed,
enter the jog mode first, then press afeed axis and direction selection
switch.
If reference position return is not performed after power--on, pushing
RAPID TRAVERSE button does not actuatethe rapid traverse but the
remains at the J OG feedrate. This function can bedisabled by setting
parameter (No.0010#0).
+C +X +Y
+Z ---Z
---C ---Y ---X
RAPID
AXIS DIRECTION
0 1260
J OGFEEDRATE OVERRIDE
50 100 2
5
F0
RAPIDTRAVERSE
OVERRIDE (%)
Restrictions
D Acceleration/decelera--
tionfor rapidtraverse
D Changeof modes
D Rapidtraverseprior to
referencepositionreturn
399
In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction
selectionswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel movesthetool onestep
alongtheselectedaxisintheselecteddirection. Theminimumdistance
thetool ismovedistheleast input increment. Eachstepcanbe10, 100,
or 1000timestheleast input increment.
Thismodeiseffectivewhenamanual pulsegenerator isnot
connected.
Tool
Eachtime a switchis
pressed, the tool moves
one stepinthe direction
specifiedby the switch.
Workpiece
Z
X
Procedurefor Incremental FeedOperation
1 PresstheINC switch, oneof themodeselectionswitches.
2 Select thedistancetobemovedfor eachstepwiththe
magnificationdial.
3 Pressthefeedaxisanddirectionselectionswitchcorrespondingto
theaxisanddirectionthetool istobemoved. Eachtimeaswitch
ispressed, thetool movesonestep. Thefeedrateisthesameasthe
jogfeedrate.
4 Pressingtherapidtraverseswitchwhilepressingafeedaxisand
directionselectionswitchmovesthetool at therapidtraverserate.
Rapidtraverseoverrideby therapidtraverseoverrideswitchis
effectiveduringrapidtraverse.
Theaboveisanexample. Refer totheappropriatemanual
providedby themachinetool builder for theactual operations.
Explanation
The distance the tool travels along the X--axis can bespecified with a
diameter.
3.3
INCREMENTAL FEED
X10 X100
X1 X1000
+C +X +Y
+Z ---Z
---C ---Y ---X
RAPID
AXIS DIRECTION
D Travel distance
specifiedwitha
diameter
400
In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the
manual pulsegenerator onthemachineoperatorspanel. Select theaxis
along which thetool is to bemoved withthehandlefeed axisselection
switches.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse
generatorisrotatedbyonegraduationisequal totheleastinputincrement.
Or the distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
rotatedby onegraduationcanbemagnifiedby 10timesor by oneof the
twomagnificationsspecifiedby parameters(No. 0121and0699).
Manual pulse generator
X
Z
Procedur for Manual HandleFeedOperation
1 PresstheHANDLE switch, oneof themodeselectionswitches.
2 Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved by pressing a
handlefeedaxisselectionswitch.
3 Select themagnification for thedistancethetool is tobemovedby
pressingahandlefeedmagnificationswitch. Theminimumdistance
thetool ismovedwhenthemanual pulsegenerator isrotatedbyone
graduationisequal totheleast input increment.
4 Movethetool alongtheselectedaxisbyrotatingthehandle. Rotating
thehandle360degreesmovesthetool thedistanceequivalent to100
graduations.
Theaboveisanexample. Refer totheappropriatemanual provided
by themachinetool builder for theactual operations.
Explanation
Parameter (bit0of No. 0013) enablesor disablesthemanual handlefeed
intheJ OGmode.
Whentheparameter ( bit 0of No. 0013) isset 1,bothmanual handlefeed
andincremental feedareenabled.
3.4
MANUAL HANDLE
FEED
REMOTE MDI
MEMORY
EDI
T
ZERO
RETURN
TEACH
J OG
MODE
HANDLE
Manual pulsegenerator
D Availabilityof manual
handlefeedinJ ogmode
401
Parameter (bit6of No. 0002) enablesor disablesthemanual handlefeed
intheTEACH IN J OGmode.
Parameter (bit 4of No. 0060) specifiesasfollows:
SET VALUE 0: Thefeedrateisclampedat therapidtraverserate
andgeneratedpulsesexceedingtherapidtraverserateare
ignored.(Thedistancethetool ismovedmay
not matchthegraduationsonthemanual pulsegenerator.)
SET VALUE 1: Thefeedrateisclampedat therapidtraverserateand
generatedpulsesexceedingtherapidtraverseratearenot
ignoredbut accumulatedintheCNC.
(Nolonger rotatingthehandledoesnot immediately stop
thetool. Thetool ismovedbythepulsesaccumulatedinthe
CNC beforeit stops.)
Parameter (No.0386#0 to 3) switches the direction in which the tool
movesalonganaxis, correspondingtothedirection inwhich thehandle
of themanual pulsegenerator isrotated.
Uptotwomanual pulsegeneratorscan beconnected, onefor eachaxis.
Thetwomanual pulsegeneratorscanbesimultaneously operated.
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such
as x100 moves the tool too fast. The feedrate is clamped
at the rapid traverse feedrate.
NOTE
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations
per second or lower. If the manual pulse generator is
rotated at a rate higher than five rotations per second, the
tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer
rotated or the distance the tool moves may not match the
graduations on the manual pulse generator.
D Availabilityof manual
handlefeedinTEACHIN
J OGmode
D AcommandtotheMPG
exceedingrapidtraverse
rate
D Movementdirectionof
anaxis totherotationof
MPG
Restrictions
Number of MPGs
402
Whether thedistancethetool ismoved by manual operationis addedto
thecoordinatescanbeselectedby turningthemanual absoluteswitchon
or off onthemachineoperatorspanel. Whentheswitchisturnedon, the
distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the
coordinates. Whentheswitchisturnedoff, thedistancethetool ismoved
by manual operationisnot addedtothecoordinates.
O
P1
P2
X axis
Zaxis
Manual operation
The coordinates values change by the amount of manual operation.
Fig. 3.5(a) Coordinates withtheswitchON
Z2
Z1
X1
X2
P1
P2
O1
O2
The coordinates do not change.
Fig. 3.5(b) Coordinates withtheswitchOFF
3.5
MANUAL ABSOLUTE
ONANDOFF
403
Explanation
The following describes the relation between manual operation and
coordinateswhenthemanual absoluteswitchisturnedonor off, usinga
programexample.
G01
X200.0Z150.0
X100.0Z100.0F010
X300.0Z200.0
;
;
;
Thesubsequent figuresusethefollowingnotation:
Movement of thetool whentheswitchison
Movement of thetool whentheswitchisoff
Thecoordinatesafter manual operationincludethedistancethetool
ismovedbythemanual operation. Whentheswitchisoff, therefore,
subtract thedistancethetool ismovedby themanual operation.
Coordinates when block has been executed after manual operation
(X--axis+20.0, Z--axis+100.0) at theendof movement of block .
X
Z
(120.0 , 200.0)
(220.0 , 250.0)
(200.0 , 150.0)
SwitchOFF
SwitchON
(100.0 , 100.0)
Manual
operation
Coordinateswhenthefeedholdbuttonispressedwhileblock isbeing
executed, manual operation(X--axis+75.0) is performed, and thecycle
start buttonispressedandreleased
(375.0, 200.0)
(300.0, 200.0)
(200.0, 150.0)
(150.0, 125.0)
(225.0, 125.0)
(275.0, 150.0)
X
Z
SwitchOFF
SwitchON
Manual
operation
D Manual operationafter
theendof block
D Manual operationafter a
feedhold
404
Coordinateswhenthefeedholdbuttonispressedwhileblock isbeing
executed, manual operation(Y--axis+75.0) isperformed, thecontrol unit
isreset withtheRESET button, andblock isreadagain
(375.0, 200.0)
(200.0,150.0)
(300.0, 200.0)
(225.0, 125.0)
(275.0,150.0)
(150.0, 125.0) (100.0, 100.0)
X
Z
SwitchOFF
SwitchON
Manual
operation
When there is only one axis in the following command, only the
commandedaxisreturns.
Manual
operation
N2
N1
N3
N1G01X100.0Z100.0F500;
N2Z200.0;
N3X150.0;
X
Z
(100.0, 100.0)
(100.0, 200.0)
(150.0, 200.0)
SwitchOFF
SwitchON
Whenthefollowing commandsareincremental commands, operationis
thesameaswhentheswitchisOFF.
WhentheswitchisOFF
After manual operation is performed with the switch OFF during tool
noseradius compensation, automatic operationis restartedthen thetool
moves parallel to the movement that would have been performed if
manual movement had not been performed. Theamount of separation
equalstotheamount that wasperformedmanually.
Manual
operation
Tool nose radius path
Programmedpath
Cutter pathafter
manual operation
D Whenresetafter a
manual operation
followingafeedhold
D Whenamovement
commandinthenext
blockis onlyoneaxis
D Whenthenextmove
blockis anincremental
D Manual operation
duringtool noseradius
compensation
405
WhentheswitchisONduringtool noseradiuscompensation
Operationof themachineuponreturntoautomaticoperationaftermanual
intervention with the switch is ON during execution with an absolute
command programin the tool nose radius compensation mode will be
described. Thevectorcreatedfromtheremainingpartof thecurrentblock
andthebeginningof thenextblock isshiftedinparallel. A newvector is
created basedon thenext block, theblock following thenext block and
the amount of manual movement. This also applies when manual
operationisperformedduringcornering.
Manual operationperformedinother thancornering
Assumethatthefeedholdwasappliedat pointP
H
whilemovingfromP
A
toP
B
of programmedpathP
A
, P
B
, andP
C
andthat thetool wasmanually
moved to P
H
. Theblock end point P
B
moves to the point P
B
by the
amount of manual movement, andvectorsV
B1
andV
B2
at P
B
alsomove
toV
B1
andV
B2
. VectorsV
C1
andV
C2
betweenthenext twoblocksP
B
-- P
C
andP
C
-- P
D
arediscarded andnewvectorsV
C1
andV
C2
(V
C2
=
V
C2
inthisexample) areproducedfromtherelationbetweenP
B
-- P
C
and
P
C
-- P
D
. However, sinceV
B2
is not anewly calculated vector, correct
offset isnot performedat block P
B
-- P
C
. Offset iscorrectly performed
after P
C
.
V
C1
V
C2
P
A
P
D
P
C
P
H
P
B
V
B2
V
B1
V
B2
V
C1
P
H
V
B1
P
B
Tool nose radius
pathafter
manual operation
Programmedpath
(absolute com-
mand)
Tool nose radius
pathbefore
manual operation
Manual operation
406
Manual operationduringcornering
Thisisanexamplewhenmanual operationisperformedduringcornering.
V
A2
, V
B1
, andV
B2
arevectorsmovedinparallel withV
A2
, V
B1
andV
B2
by theamount of manual movement. The newvectors arecalculated
from V
C1
and V
C2
. Then correct tool nose radius compensation is
performedfor theblocksfollowingPc.
V
B2
V
B1
V
C1
V
C2
P
A
P
C
P
B
V
C1
V
A1
V
A2
V
A2
V
A1
P
H
P
H
P
A
V
B1
V
B2
Tool nose radius
pathafter
manual operation
Programmedpath
(absolute command)
Tool nose radius
pathbefore
manual operation
Manual operation
Manual operationafter singleblockstop
Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was
terminatedby singleblock stop.
Vectors V
B1
and V
B2
are shifted by the amount of manual operation.
Sub--sequent processingisthesameas caseadescribedabove. AnMDI
operation can also be interveneted as well as manual operation. The
movement isthesameasthat by manual operation.
V
B2
V
B1
V
C1
V
C2
P
C
P
B
V
C1
V
B2
V
B1
P
B
P
A
Tool noseradius path after
manual operation
Manual
operation
Programmedpath
(absolute command)
Tool nose radius
pathbefore
manual operation
OPERATION B--61394E/08 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
407
4
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Programmedoperationof aCNCmachinetool isreferredtoasautomatic
operation.
Thischapter explainsthefollowingtypesof automatic operation:
MEMORYOPERATION
Operationby executingaprogramregisteredinCNC memory
MDI OPERATION
Operationby executingaprogramenteredfromtheMDI panel
DNC operation
Functionfor operatingthemachinebyreadingaprogramfromthe
I/Ounit
Searchfor asequencenumber
Functionfor startingoperationfromasequencenumber inthe
middleof aprogram
PROGRAMRESTART
Restartingaprogramfor automatic operationfromanintermediate
point
SCHEDULINGFUNCTION
Scheduledoperationby executingprograms(files) registeredinan
external input/output device(Handy File, Floppy Cassette, or FA
Card)
SUBPROGRAMCALL FUNCTION
Functionfor callingandexecutingsubprograms(files) registered
inanexternal input/outputdevice(HandyFile, Floppy Cassette, or
FA Card) duringmemory operation
MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION
Functionfor performingmanual feedduringmovement executed
by automatic operation
MIRRORIMAGE
Functionfor enablingmirror--imagemovement alonganaxis
duringautomatic operation
OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B--61394E/08
408
Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of these
programsisselectedandthecyclestartswitchonthemachineoperators
panel ispressed, automatic operationstarts, andthecyclestart LEDgoes
on.
When the feed hold switch on themachine operators panel is pressed
during automatic operation, automatic operationis stoppedtemporarily.
When the cycle start switch is pressed again, automatic operation is
restarted.
When the reset switch on the CRT/MDI panel is pressed, automatic
operationterminatesandthereset stateisentered.
For the 0--TTC, the programs for the two tool posts can be executed
simultaneously so the two tool posts can operate independently at the
sametime.
Thefollowing procedureis given as an example. For actual operation,
refer tothemanual suppliedby themachinetool builder.
Procedurefor MemoryOperation
1 PresstheAUTOmodeselectionswitch.
2 Selectaprogramfromtheregisteredprograms. Todothis, followthe
stepsbelow.
2--1 Press
PRGRM
todisplay theprogramscreen.
2--2 Pressaddress O .
2--3 Enter aprogramnumber usingthenumeric keys.
2--4 Pressthe soft key.
For the 0--TTC, select the program for the tool post to be
operated. Whenoperatingthetwotool postsat thesametime,
select aprogramfor eachtool post.
3 For the0--TTC, select thetool post tobeoperatedwiththetool post
selectionswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel.
4 Press the cycle start switch on the machine operators panel.
Automatic operation starts, and thecyclestart lampgoes on. When
automatic operationterminates, thecyclestart lampgoesoff.
5 To stop or cancel memory operation midway through, follow the
stepsbelow.
a. Stoppingmemory operation
Pressthefeedholdswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel. The
feedholdlampgoesonandthecyclestart lampgoesoff. The
machinerespondsasfollows:
(i) Whenthemachinewasmoving, feedoperationdecelerates
andstops.
(ii) Whendwell wasbeingperformed, dwell isstopped.
(iii) WhenM, S, or T wasbeingexecuted, theoperationisstopped
after M, S, or T isfinished.
4.1
MEMORY
OPERATION
409
Whenthecyclestart switchonthemachineoperatorspanel
ispressedwhilethefeedholdlampison, machineoperation
restarts.
b. Terminatingmemory operation
Pressthe
RESET
key ontheCRT/MDI panel.
Automatic operationisterminatedandthereset stateisentered.
Whenareset isappliedduringmovement, movement decelerates
thenstops.
Explanation
Memoryoperation
After memory operationisstarted, thefollowingareexecuted:
A one--block commandisreadfromthespecifiedprogram.
Theblock commandisdecoded.
Thecommandexecutionisstarted.
Thecommandinthenext block isread.
Bufferingisexecuted. That is, thecommandisdecodedtoallow
immediateexecution.
Immediatelyafter theprecedingblockisexecuted, executionof the
next block canbestarted. Thisisbecausebufferinghasbeen
executed.
Hereafter, memoryoperationcanbeexecutedbyrepeatingthesteps
to .
Stoppingandterminating
memoryoperation
Memory operationcanbestoppedusingoneof two methods: Specify a
stopcommand, or pressakey onthemachineoperatorspanel.
-- ThestopcommandsincludeM00(programstop), M01(optional
stop), andM02andM30(programend).
-- Therearetwokeystostopmemory operation: Thefeedholdkey
andreset key.
Memory operation is stoppedafter ablock containingM00 isexecuted.
When the programis stopped, all existing modal information remains
unchanged as in singleblock operation. Thememory operation canbe
restarted by pressing the cycle start button. Operation may vary
dependingonthemachinetool builder. Refer tothemanual suppliedby
themachinetool builder.
Similarly toM00, memory operation isstopped after ablock containing
M01 is executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop
switchonthe machineoperatorspanel issettoON. Operationmayvary
dependingonthemachinetool builder. Refer tothemanual suppliedby
themachinetool builder.
When M02 or M30 (specified at theend of the main program) is read,
memory operationisterminatedandthereset stateisentered.
In somemachines, M30 returns control to thetop of theprogram. For
details, refer tothemanual suppliedby themachinetool builder.
D Programstop(M00)
D Optional stop(M01)
D Programend
(M02, M30)
410
WhenFeedHoldbuttonontheoperatorspanel ispressedduringmemory
operation, thetool deceleratestoastopat atime.
Automatic operation can bestopped and thesystemcan bemadetothe
reset stateby using
RESET
key on theCRT/MDI panel or external reset
signal. When reset operation is applied to the systemduring a tool
movingstatus, themotionissloweddownthenstops.
Whentheoptional block skipswitch onthemachineoperators panel is
turnedon, blockscontainingaslash(/) areignored.
For the0--TTC, acyclestart switchis providedfor eachtool post. This
allows theoperator to activateasingletool poststo operatethemat the
sametimeinmemory operationor MDI operation. Ingeneral, selectthe
tool posttobeoperatedwiththetool postselectionswitchonthemachine
operators panel and then press the cycle start button to activate the
selected tool post. (The procedure may vary with the machine tool
builder. Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool
builder.)
A file(subprogram) in anexternal input/output devicesuchas aFloppy
Cassette can be called and executed during memory operation. For
details, seeSection4.5.
D Feedhold
D Reset
D Cyclestartfor the
0--TTC
D Callingasubprogram
storedinanexternal
input/outputdevice
411
IntheMDI mode, aprogramcanbeinputtedinthesameformatasnormal
programsandexecutedfromtheMDI panel.
MDI operationisusedfor simpletest operations.
Thefollowing procedureis given as an example. For actual operation,
refer tothemanual suppliedby themachinetool builder.
Procedurefor MDI Operation-- A
Exampleof X10.5Z200.5;
One command block can be entered from the CRT/MDI for
execution.
1 PressMDI key onthemodeselect switch.
2 Pressthe
PRGRM
button.
3 Presssoft key [MDI] todisplay ascreenwithMDI at thetopleft.
PROGRAM O0001 N0020
( MDI ) ( MODAL)
G00 F 0. 3000
G97 M 003
G69 S 00550
G99 T 0101
G21
G40 WX 0. 000
G25 WZ 0. 000
G22 SRPM550
G54 SSPM0
SMAX 32767
SACT 0
ADRS. S 0 T0101
16: 49: 30 MDI
[ PRGRM] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ MDI ] [ RSTR ]
4 Input X 10.5 by address/numeric key.
5 Press INPUT key.
Thedata, X10.5, isinputanddisplayed. If youareawareof anerrorin
thekeyed--innumber beforepressingthe INPUT key , press the
CAN
key andkey inX andthecorrect number again.
6 Input Z200.5 by address/numeric key.
7 Press INPUT key.
The data, Z200.5 is input and displayed. If you pressed wrong
number keys, correct the operation following the instruction
describedabove.
4.2
MDI OPERATION
412
PROGRAM O0001 N0020
( MDI ) ( MODAL)
. X 10. 500 G00 F 0. 3000
. Y 200. 500 G97 M 003
G69 S 00550
G99 T 0101
G21
G40 WX 0. 000
G25 WZ 0. 000
G22 SRPM550
G54 SSPM0
SMAX 32767
SACT 0
ADRS. S 0 T0101
16: 51: 13 MDI
8 Pressthe
OUTPT
START
key.
Pressthecyclestart buttononthemachineoperatorspanel
(dependingonthemachinetool).
TomodifyX10.5Z200.5toX10.5, cancel Z200.5, byfollowingthesteps
describedbelow:
1 Press Z
CAN
INPUT keys.
2 Pressthe
OUTPT
START
or thecyclestart buttononthemachineoperators
panel.
NOTE
Modal G codes cannot be cancelled. Enter the correct data
again.
A singleMDI operationexecutesasingleinput block. Twoor more
blockscannot beexecutedat onetime.
Theend--of--block symbol (;) neednot beentered.
A subprogramcall or macrocall cannot bespecified.
Theinput block isclearedwhentheMDI operationiscompletedor
whenareset isspecified.
Cancel beforepressingthe
START button
Limitations
413
Procedurefor MDI Operation-- B
1 PresstheMDI modeselectionswitch.
For the 0--TTC, select the tool post for which a programis to be
createdwiththetool postselectionswitch. Createaseparateprogram
for eachtool post.
2 Press the
PRGRM
function key on the CRT/MDI panel to select the
programscreen. Thefollowingscreenappears:
PROGRAM O0001 N0020
O0000
%
( MODAL)
G01 G69 G21 G25
G97 G99 G40 G22
F 0. 1500 S00700
M003 T0101
< S 0 T0101
16: 54: 29 MDI
Programnumber O0000isenteredautomatically.
3 Prepareaprogramto beexecuted by an operationsimilar tonormal
programediting. M99specifiedinthelastblockcanreturncontrol to
thebeginning of theprogramafter operation ends. Wordinsertion,
modification, deletion, word search, address search, and program
search are available for programs created in the MDI mode. For
programediting, seeChapter 9.
4 To entirely erase a programcreated in MDI mode,use one of the
followingmethods:
a. Enter address O , thenpressthe
DELET
key ontheMDI panel.
b. Alternatively, pressthe
RESET
key. Inthiscase, set bit 7of
parameter 0057to1inadvance.
5 Toexecuteaprogram, setthecursorontheheadof theprogram. (Start
fromanintermediatepoint ispossible.) PushCycleStart buttonon
theoperatorspanel. Bythisaction, thepreparedprogramwill start.
(For the0--TTC, select thetool posttobeoperatedwiththetool post
selectionswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel beforehand.)
When the program end (M02, M30) or ER(%) is executed, the
preparedprogramwill beautomaticallyerasedandtheoperationwill
end.
By command of M99, control returns to the head of the prepared
program.
414
PROGRAM( MDI ) O0001 N0001
O0000 G00 X10. Z200. ;
N10 M03 ;
N20 G01 Z120. F500 ;
N30 M93 P9010 ;
N40 G00 Z0 ;
%
( MODAL)
G01 G69 G21 G25
G97 G99 G40 G22
F 0. 1500 S00700
M003 T0101
< S 0 T0101
16: 54: 29 MDI
6 To stop or terminateMDI operation in midway through, followthe
stepsbelow.
a. StoppingMDI operation
Pressthefeedholdswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel.
Thefeedholdlampgoesonandthecyclestart lampgoesoff.
Themachinerespondsasfollows:
(i) Whenthemachinewasmoving, feedoperationdecelerates
andstops.
(ii) Whendwell wasbeingperformed, dwell isstopped.
(iii) WhenM, S, or Twasbeingexecuted, theoperationisstopped
after M, S, or T isfinished.
Whenthecyclestartswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel is
pressed, machineoperationrestarts.
b. TerminatingMDI operation
Pressthe
RESET
key ontheCRT/MDI panel.
Automatic operationisterminatedandthereset stateisentered.
Whenaresetisappliedduringmovement, movement decelerates
thenstops.
Thepreviousexplanationof howtoexecuteandstop memory operation
also applies toMDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30does
not return control to the beginning of the program,M99 performs this
function.
ProgramspreparedintheMDI modewill beerasedinthefollowingcases:
InMDI operation, if M02, M30or ER(%) isexecuted.
InAUTOmode, if memory operationisperformed.
InEDITmode, if any editingis performed.
Backgroundeditingisperformed.
After theeditingoperationduringthestop of MDI operation wasdone,
operationstartsfromthecurrent cursor position.
Explanation
D Erasingtheprogram
D Restart
415
Restrictions
ProgramscreatedinMDI modecannot beregistered.
A programcan have as many lines as can fit on one pageof theCRT
screen.
A programconsistingof uptosix linescanbecreated. Whenparameter
(No.0028#3) isset to0tospecify amodethat suppressesthedisplay of
continuous--stateinformation, aprogramof upto10linescanbecreated.
If thecreatedprogramexceeds thespecified number of lines, %(ER) is
deleted(preventsinsertionandmodification).
Callstosubprograms(M98) canbespecifiedinaprogramcreatedinthe
MDI mode. This means that a programregistered in memory can be
called and executed during MDI operation. In addition to the main
programexecutedbyautomaticoperation, uptotwolevelsof subprogram
nestingareallowed(whenthecustommacrooptionisprovided, uptofour
levelsareallowed).
Mainprogram Subprogram
One--level nesting Two--level nesting
O0000;
M98P 1000;
M30;
O1000; O2000;
M98P M98P 2000; 3000;
M99; M99;
Subprogram
Fig. 4.2(a) NestingLevel of Subprograms CalledfromtheMDI Program
Whenthecustommacrooptionisprovided, macroprogramscanalsobe
created, called, and executed in the MDI mode. However, macro call
commands cannot beexecuted whenthemodeis changedto MDI mode
after memory operationisstoppedduringexecutionof asubprogram.
Whenaprogramis createdin theMDI mode, an empty areainprogram
memory isused. If programmemoryisfull, noprogramscanbecreated
intheMDI mode.
D Programregistration
D Number of lines ina
program
D Subprogramnesting
D Macrocall
D Memoryarea
416
DNC operationenablesmachineoperationby readingaprogramdirectly
fromthe connected I/O unit. The programis not registered in CNC
memory. This method is useful when a programis too large to be
registered in CNC memory. This operationis alsoused for high--speed
machiningwitharemotebuffer. For theDNC operationwiththeFloppy
Cassettedirectorydisplayfunction(theFloppyCassettedirectorydisplay
function is incorporated and theFloppy Cassetteis specified as theI/O
unit), seeChapter 9.
Operatingprocedurefor DNC operation
1 SelecttheMDI modeandsetthechannel of theconnectedI/Ounitin
theI/Ofieldonthesettingscreen.
2 Select theAUTOmode.
3 Call thebeginningof theprogramintheI/Ounit.
4 Input theDNCI signal. (For theactual operation, refer tothe
manual of themachinetool builder.)
5 PresstheCYCLE START button.
DNC operation is started. Operation can bestarted andresumed inthe
samemanner describedfor memory operation.
The programrunning under DNC operation can call a subprogram
frommemory.
The programrunning under DNC operation can specify a custom
macro. However, repeat and branch instructions cannot be
programmed.
Theprogramrunningunder DNC operationcancall amacroprogram
frommemory.
In DNC operation, no sequence number can be specified in the
commandfor returningcontrol fromthecalledsubprogramor macro
programtothecallingprogram(M99P****).
InDNCoperationwithI/Ochannel 1or 2, theDC3codeisoutputand
readingis stoppedat theend of each block (each timeEOB isread).
To read blocks continuously, specify bit 7 of parameter 0390
accordingly.
To enable a programto be resumed in DNC operation, set bit 7 of
parameter 0387accordingly.
DuringDNCoperation, noprogramcanbedisplayed; only thecurrent
block andnext block canbedisplayed.
During DNC operation, F isdisplayed astheaddressof theprogram
number at thetopright corner of theCRT screen.
With the Series 0--TTC, DNC operation cannot be simultaneously
executedonbothtool posts.
4.3
DNC OPERATION
Explanations
417
Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a
sequence number in the middle of a programso that execution can be
startedor restartedat theblock of thesequencenumber.
Example) Sequencenumber 02346inaprogram(O0002)issearchedfor.
Program
O0001;
N01234X100.0Z100.0;
S12;
:
O0002;
N02345X20.0Z20.0;
N02346X10.0Z10.0;
:
O0003;
:
Selectedprogram
Target sequence
number is found.
This sectionis
searchedstartingat
the beginning.
(Searchoperationis
performedonly withina
program.)
Procedurefor sequencenumber search
1 Select AUTOmode.
2 Press
PRGRM
.
3 If the programcontains a sequence number to be searched for,
performtheoperations4to7below.
If theprogramdoesnot containasequencenumber tobesearched
for,select the programnumber of theprogramthat contains the
sequencenumber tobesearchedfor.
4 Key inaddress N .
5 Key inasequencenumber tobesearchedfor.
6 Pressthecursor key.
7 Uponcompletionof searchoperation, thesequencenumber searched
for isdisplayedintheupper--right corner of theCRT screen.
ThoseblocksthatareskippeddonotaffecttheCNC. Thismeansthatthe
dataintheskippedblockssuchascoordinatesandM, S, andT codesdoes
not alter theCNC coordinatesandmodal values.
So, inthefirstblockwhereexecutionistobestartedor restartedbyusing
asequencenumber searchcommand, besuretoenter requiredM, S, and
T codes and coordinates. A block searched for by sequence number
search usually representsapointof shiftingfromoneprocesstoanother.
When ablock inthemiddleof aprocess must besearchedfor torestart
executionat theblock, specify M, S, andT codes, Gcodes, coordinates,
andsoforthasrequiredfromtheMDI after closelycheckingthemachine
tool andNC statesat that point.
4.4
SEQUENCE NUMBER
SEARCH
Explanations
D OperationduringSearch
418
Duringsearchoperation, thefollowingchecksaremade:
Optional block skip
P/S alarm(No. 003to010)
To ignoreaP/S alarm(Nos. 003 to010) duringasearchfor asequence
number, set bit 1of parameter 0051accordingly.
Duringsequencenumber searchoperation, M98Pxxxx (subprogramcall)
isnot executed. Soanalarm(No.060) israisedif an attempt is madeto
search for a sequence number in a subprogramcalled by the program
currently selected.
O1234
:
:
M98P5678;
:
:
Mainprogram Subprogram
O5678
:
N88888
:
M99;
:
If an attempt is made to search for N8888 in the example above, an alarmis raised.
Alarm
Number Contents
60 Commandsequence number was not foundinthe se-
quence number search.
D Checkingduringsearch
Limitations
D Searchingin
sub--program
419
ThisfunctionspecifiesSequenceNo. of ablocktoberestartedwhenatool
isbrokendownor whenit isdesiredtorestart machiningoperationafter
adayoff, andrestartsthemachiningoperationfromthatblock. Itcanalso
beused asahigh--speedprogramcheck function.
There are two restart methods: the P--type method and Q--type
method.
P TYPE
Operation can be restarted anywhere. This restart method is
usedwhenoperationis stoppedbecause of a brokentool.
Programstart point (machiningstart point)
Restart position
Returnoperation
Q TYPE
Before operationcanbe restarted, the machine must be moved
to the programmedstart point (machiningstart point)
Programstart point
(machiningstart point)
Returnoperation
Restart position
4.5
PROGRAMRESTART
420
Procedurefor Programrestartoperetion
1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary,
changetheoffset. (Gotostep2.)
1 Whenpower isturnedONor emergencystopisreleased, performall
necessary operations at that time, including the reference position
return.
2 Movethemachinemanuallytotheprogramstartingpoint(machining
start point), and keep themodal dataand coordinatesystemin the
sameconditionsasat themachiningstart.
3 If necessary, modify theoffset amount.
1 Turntheprogramrestartswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel ON.
2 Press
PRGRM
ontheCRT/MDI panel todisplay thedesiredprogram.
3 Findtheprogramhead.
4 [Ptype]
Input address P and the sequence number of the block to be
resumedinthat order. Then, pressthe cursor key.
[Qtype]
Input address Q and the sequence number of the block to be
resumedinthat order. Then, pressthe cursor key.
If two or more identical sequence numbers are used, specify the
sequencenumber of theblock fromwhich theprogramisresumed.
Todothis, specify thepositionof that number prior to thesequence
number.
f f f f
Sequence number
f f f f
Ordinal
number
[Ptype] P
f f f f f f f f
[Qtype]
Q
Sequence number Ordinal
number
Procedure1
[ P TYPE ]
[ Q TYPE ]
Procedure2
421
5 Thesequencenumber issearchedfor, andtheprogramrestartscreen
appearsontheCRT display.
PROGRAMRESTART O0001 N0013
( DESTI NATI ON) M008 045 *** *** ***
X 160. 000 *** *** *** *** ***
Z 180. 000 *** *** *** *** ***
C 0. 000 *** *** *** *** ***
Y 0. 000 *** *** *** *** ***
*** *** *** *** ***
( DI STANCE TO GO) *** *** *** *** ***
4 X - 40. 000
3 Z - 40. 000 T 0101 ****
2 C 0. 000 S 00550
1 Y 0. 000
S 0 T0101
17: 05: 48 BUF AUTO RSTR
[ PRGRM] [ CURRNT ] [ NEXT ] [ CHECK ] [ RSTR ]
DESTINATION showsthepositionat whichmachiningistorestart.
DISTANCE TOGO showsthedistancefromthecurrent tool position
tothepositionwheremachiningistorestart. A number totheleftof
eachaxisnameindicatestheorder of axes(determinedbyparameter
(No.0124to0127)) alongwhichthetool movestotherestartposition.
M: Tirty--fifthmost recently specifiedM codes
T: Twomost recently specifiedT codes
S: Most recently specifiedS code
6 Turntheprogramre--start switchOFF. At thistime, thefigureatthe
left sideof axisnameDISTANCE TO GO blinks.
7 Checkthescreenfor theM, S, andT codestobeexecuted. If theyare
found, enter theMDI mode, thenexecutetheM, S and T functions.
After execution, restorethepreviousmode.
8 CheckthatthedistanceindicatedunderDISTANCE TOGOiscorrect.
Also check whether thereis thepossibility that thetool might hit a
workpiece or other objects when it moves to the machining restart
position. If such a possibility exists, movethe tool manually to a
position from which the tool can move to the machining restart
positionwithout encounteringany obstacles.
9 Pressthecyclestart button. Thetool movestothemachiningrestart
position at thedry run feedratesequentially along axesin theorder
specifiedby parameter settings. Machiningisthenrestarted.
422
Restrictions
Under any of the following conditions, P--type restart cannot be
performed:
Whenautomatic operationhasnot beenperformedsincethepower
wasturnedon
Whenautomatic operationhasnot beenperformedsincean
emergency stopwasreleased
Whenautomatic operationhasnot beenperformedsincethe
coordinatesystemwaschangedor shifted(changeinanexternal
offset fromtheworkpiecereferencepoint)
Theblock to berestarted need not betheblock which was interrupted;
operationcanrestart withany block. WhenP--typerestart isperformed,
therestart block must usethesamecoordinatesystemaswhenoperation
wasinterrupted.
When single block operation is ON during movement to the restart
position, operationstopsevery timethetool completes movement along
an axis. When operation is stopped in the single block mode, MDI
interventioncannot beperformed.
Duringmovementtotherestartposition, manual interventioncanbeused
toperformareturnoperationfor anaxisif it hasnot yet beenperformed
for theaxis. A returnoperationcannotbedonefurther onaxesfor which
areturnhasalready beencompleted.
Never reset during the time fromthe start of a search at restart until
machiningisrestarted. Otherwise, restartmust beperformedagainfrom
thefirst step.
Regardless of whether machining has started or not, manual operation
must beperformedwhenthemanual absolutemodeison.
If no absolute--position detector (absolute pulse coder) is provided, be
sureto performreferencepositionreturn after turning onthepower and
beforeperformingrestart.
Number Contents
094 P type cannot be specifiedwhenthe programis restarted. (After the
automatic operationwas interrupted, the coordinate systemsetting
operationwas performed.)
automatic operationwas interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.)
automatic operationwas interrupted, the workpiece offset amount
changed.)
097 P type cannot be directedwhenthe programis restarted. (After pow-
er ON, after emergency stopor P/S alarm94to 97were reset, no
automatic operationwas performed.)
098 A commandof the programrestart was specifiedwithout the refer-
ence positionreturnoperationafter power ON or emergency stop,
andG28was foundduringsearch.
099 After completionof searchinprogramrestart, a move commandis
givenwithMDI.
D P--typerestart
D Restartblock
D Singleblock
D Manual intervention
D Reset
D Manual absolute
D Referenceposition
return
423
WARNING
As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position
under the following conditions.
Special care must be taken in the following cases since
none of themcause an alarm:
Manual operation is performed when the manual
absolute mode is OFF.
Manual operation is performed when the machine is
locked.
When the mirror image is used.
When manual operation is performed in the course of
axis movement for returning operation.
When the programrestart is commanded for a block
between the block for skip cutting and subsequent
absolute command block.
When programrestart specified for an intermediateblock
for a multiple repetitive canned cycle
424
The schedule function allows the operator to select files (programs)
registered on a floppy--disk in an external input/output device (Handy
File, Floppy Cassette, or FA Card) and specify theexecution order and
number of repetitions(scheduling) for performingautomatic operation.
It is also possible to select only one file fromthe files in theexternal
input/output deviceandexecuteit duringautomatic operation.
Thisfunctionisenabledwhenthefunctionfor displayingthedirectoryof
theFloppy CassetteisincorporatedandFloppy Cassetteisset astheI/O
unit.
FILE DIRECTORY
FILE NO. FILE NAME
0001 O0010
0002 O0020
0003 O0030
0004 O0040
Set file number and
number of repetitions.
ORDERFILE NO REPETITION
01 0002 2
02 0003 1
03 0004 3
04 0001 2
Schedulingscreen
Executingautomatic operation
List of files inanexternal input/output device
Procedurefor SchedulingFunction
1 Press theAUTO switchon themachineoperatorspanel, thenpress
the
PRGRM
functionkey ontheMDI panel.
2 Press therightmost soft key (continuous menu key), then press the
[FL. SDL]softkey. A listof filesregisteredintheFloppyCassetteis
displayed on screen No. 1. To display more files that are not
displayedonthisscreen, pressthepagekey ontheMDI panel. Files
registeredintheFloppy Cassettecanalsobedisplayedsuccessively.
4.6
SCHEDULING
FUNCTION
Procedurefor executing
onefile
425
FI LE DI RECTORY O0001 N0013
CURRENT SELECTED: SCHEDULE
NO. FI LE NAME ( METER) VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER 87. 1
0002 ALL. PROGRAM 87. 1
0003 O0001 1. 9
0004 O0021 7. 1
0005 O0041 7. 1
0006 O0615 5. 8
0007 O0651 9. 1
0008 O0601 7. 1
S 0 T0101
17: 08: 08 AUTO
[ SELECT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SCHDUL ]
Screen No.1
3 Press the[SELECT] soft keys to display SELECT FILE NO. (on
screenNo. 2). Enter afilenumber, thenpressthe[EXEC] softkeys.
Thefilefor theenteredfilenumber is selected, and thefilenameis
indicatedafter CURRENT SELECTED:.
Screen No.2
CURRENT SELECTED: O0001
0000 SCHEDULE
0003 O0001 1. 9
0004 O0021 7. 1
0005 O0041 7. 1
0006 O0615 5. 8
0007 O0651 9. 1
0008 O0601 7. 1
S 0 T0101
17: 09: 45 AUTO
[ SELECT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SCHDUL ]
4 InputDNCsignal, thenpressthecyclestartswitch. Theselectedfile
is executed. For details on the DNC signal, refer to the manual
supplied by the machine tool builder. The selected file number is
indicated at the upper right corner of the screen as an F number
(insteadof anOnumber).
426
CURRENT SELECTED: O0001
S 0 T0101
17: 12: 19 AUTO
[ SELECT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SCHDUL ]
Screen No.3
1 Displaythelistof filesregisteredintheFloppyCassette. Thedisplay
procedureisthesameasinsteps1and2for executingonefile.
2 OnscreenNo. 2, pressthe[SELECT] soft keystodisplaySELECT
FILE NO.
3 Enter filenumber 0, andpressthe[EXEC]softkeys. SCHEDULE
isindicatedafter CURRENT SELECTED:.
4 Pressthe[SCHDUL] soft key. ScreenNo. 4appears.
ORDER FI LE NO. REQ. REP CUR. REP
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
NUM. S 0 T0101
17: 15: 43 AUTO
[ ] [ ] [ CLEAR ] [ ] [ DI R ]
Screen No.4
5 Input the DNC signal, then press the start switch. The files are
executed in thespecified order. When afileis being executed, the
cursor ispositionedat thenumber of that file.
Thecurrent number of repetitionsCUR.REP isincreasedwhenM02
or M30isexecutedintheprogrambeingrun.
D Procedurefor executing
theschedulingfunction
427
SCHEDULE O0001 N0013
ORDER FI LE NO. REQ. REP CUR. REP
01 _0003 5 0
02 0007 12 0
03 0010 LOOP 0
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
NUM. S 0 T0101
17: 14: 42 AUTO
[ ] [ ] [ CLEAR ] [ ] [ DI R ]
Screen No.5
Explanations
If nofilenumber isspecifiedonscreenNo. 4(thefilenumber fieldisleft
blank), programexecution is stopped at that point. To leave the file
number fieldblank, pressnumeric key
0
then INPUT .
If a negative value is set as the number of repetitions, <LOOP> is
displayed, andthefileisrepeatedindefinitely.
Whenthe[CLEAR], and[EXEC] soft keys arepressed onscreen No. 4,
all data is cleared. However, these keys do not function whilea fileis
beingexecuted.
Whenthesoft keyof leftside(returnmenukey) ispressedonscreenNo.
1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, theprogramscreenisdisplayed.
Restrictions
Upto9999canbespecifiedasthenumber of repetitions. If 0isset for a
file, thefilebecomesinvalidandisnot executed.
BypressingthepagekeyonscreenNo. 4, upto20filescanberegistered.
WhenM codesother thanM02andM30 areexecuted inaprogram, the
current number of repetitionsisnot increased.
Duringtheexecutionof file, thefloppy directory display of background
editingcannot bereferenced.
To resume automatic operation after it is suspended for scheduled
operation, pressthereset button.
Theschedulingfunctioncanbeusedonly for asingletool post.
D Specifyingnofile
number
D Endless repetition
D Clear
D Returntotheprogram
screen
D Number of repetitions
D Number of files
registered
D Mcode
D Displayingthefloppy
diskdirectoryduringfile
execution
D Restartingautomatic
operation
D Schedulingfunctionfor
the0--TTC
428
AlarmNo. Description
086 Anattempt was made to execute a file that was not regis-
teredinthe floppy disk.
210 M198andM099were executedduringscheduledopera-
tion, or M198was executedduringDNC operation.
Alarm
429
Thesubprogramcall functionisprovidedtocall andexecutesubprogram
files stored in an external input/output device (Handy File, FLOPPY
CASSETTE, FA Card) duringmemory operation.
When thefollowing block in aprograminCNC memory is executed, a
subprogramfileintheexternal input/output deviceiscalled:
To execute this function the optional function of directory display for
floppy cassetteisneed.
Format
1. FS0tapeformat
M198 Pf f f f LDDDD ;
Number of repetitions
File number for a file inthe I/O device
I/O devices call instruction
2. FS10/11tapeformat
M198 Pf f f DDDD ;
Number of repetitions
I/O devices call instruction
File number for a file
inthe I/O device
Explanation
Thesubprogramcall functionisenabledwhentheinput/output deviceis
set to FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FileMate. When thecustom
macrooptionisprovided, either format1or 2canbeused. A differentM
code can be used for a subprogramcall depending on the setting of
parameter No.0248. Inthiscase, M198isexecutedasanormal M code.
The file number is specified at address P. Depend on the bit (bit 2) of
parameter No.0063, a programnumber can be specified. When a file
number isspecifiedat addressP, Fxxxx isindicated insteadof Oxxxx at
upper right of CRT screen.
Programs inmemory
executionmode
N1 ;
N2 ; 0123.... File number
N3M198P00030123;
N4 ;
N5 ;
: First call/return
: Secondcall/return
: Thirdcall/return
Programinthe external
input/output device
Fig. 4.7 ProgramFlowWhenM198is Specified
4.7
SUBPROGRAMCALL
FUNCTION
430
Restrictions
For the0--TTC, subprogramsinafloppy cassettecannot becalledfor the
twotool postsat thesametime.
NOTE
1 When M198 in the programof the file saved in a floppy
cassette is executed, a P/S alarm (No.210) is given.
When a program in the memory of CNC is called and
M198 is executed during execution of a programof the
file saved in a floppy cassette, M198 is changed to an
ordinary M--code.
2 When MDI is intervened and M198 is executed after
M198 is commanded in the AUTO mode, M198 is
changed to an ordinary M--code. When the reset
operation is done in the MDI mode after M198 is
commanded in the AUTO mode, it does not influence on
the memory operation and the operation is continued by
restarting it in the AUTO mode.
431
Themovement by manual handleoperationcan bedoneby overlapping
it withthemovement by automatic operation intheautomatic operation
mode.
Programmed
depthof cut
Depthof cut
by handle in-
terruption
Tool position
after handle
interruption
Tool position
duringauto-
matic operation
X
Z
Work
Fig. 4.8 Manual HandleInterruption
Handleinterruptionaxisselectionsignals
For thehandleinterruptionaxisselectionsignals, refer tothemanual
suppliedby themachinetool builder.
Duringautomatic operation, handleinterruptionisenabled for an axisif
thehandle interruption axis selection signal for that axis is on. Handle
interruption is performed by turning the handle of the manual pulse
generator.
WARNING
The travel distance by handle interruption is determined
according to the amount by which the manual pulse
generator is turned and the handle feed magnification (x1,
x10, xM).
Since this movement is not accelerated or decelerated, it is
very dangerous to use a large magnification value for
handle interruption.
NOTE
The travel distance caused by a handle interrupt has the
same units as for output.
To change this distance to input units, set bit 2 of parameter
0052 accordingly. In this case, acceleration/deceleration is
also performed for travel caused by a handle interrupt.
4.8
MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION
432
Explanations
Thefollowingtableindicatestherelationbetween otherfunctionsandthe
movement by handleinterrupt.
Signal Relation
Machine lock
Machine lock is effective. The tool does not move even
whenthis signal turns on.
Interlock
Interlock is effective. The tool does not move evenwhen
this signal turns on.
Mirror image
Mirror image is not effective. Interrupt functions onthe
plus directionby plus directioncommand, evenif this
signal turns on.
Thefollowingtableshows therelation betweenvarious positiondisplay
dataandthemovement by handleinterrupt.
Display Relation
Absolute coordinate
value
Handle interruptiondoes not change absolute coor-
dinates.
Relative coordinate
value
Handle interruptiondoes not change relative
coordinates.
Machine coordinate
value
Machine coordinates are changedby the travel dis-
tance specifiedby handle interruption.
Themoveamount by thehandleinterruptisdisplayedonthe4thpageof
theposition display screen. Thefollowing 4kinds of dataaredisplayed
concurrently.
HANDLE I NTERRUPTI ON O0001 N0013
( I NPUT UNI T) ( OUTPUT UNI T)
X 0. 228 X 0. 228
Z - 0. 177Z Z - 0. 177
C 0. 000 C 0. 000
Y 0. 102 Y 0. 102
( RELATI VE) ( DI STANCE TO GO)
U 220. 000 X 0. 000
W 220. 000 Z 0. 000
H 0. 000 C 0. 000
V 0. 000 Y 0. 000
PART COUNT 1796
RUN TI ME 3H12M CYCLE TI ME 0H 0M1S
ACT. F 0 MM/ M S 0T0101
17: 21: 01 MDI
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
(a) INPUT UNIT : Handleinterrupt moveamount ininput unit system
Indicatesthetravel distancespecifiedby handle
interruptionaccordingtotheleast input
increment.
(b) OUTPUT UNIT : Handleinterrupt moveamount inoutput unit
system
Indicatesthetravel distancespecifiedby handle
interruptionaccordingtotheleast command
increment.
D Relationwithother
functions
D Positiondisplay
D Travel distancedisplay
433
(c) RELATIVE : Positioninrelativecoordinatesystem
Thesevalueshavenoeffect onthetravel distance
specifiedby handleinterruption.
(d) DISTANCE TO GO : Theremainingtravel distanceinthecurrent
block hasnoeffect onthetravel distance
specifiedby handleinterruption.
Thehandleinterrupt moveamount isclearedwhenthemanual reference
positionreturnor thefirst referencepositionreturn by G28 whenpower
isturnedonendsevery axis.
434
During automatic operation, themirror imagefunction can be used for
movementalonganaxis. Tousethisfunction, setthemirror imageswitch
toON onthemachineoperatorspanel.
Z
X--axis mirror image goes on.
Programmedtool path
Tool pathafter the mirror
image functionis used
Tool
X
Fig. 4.9 Mirror Image
Procedure
For operationprocedure, refer tothemanual suppliedby themachine
tool builder.
Restrictions
The mirror image function is not offective in theof movement during
manual operation, the movement from an intermediate point to the
referencepositionduringautomatic referencepositionreturn.
4.9
MIRRORIMAGE
OPERATION B--61394E/08 5. TEST OPERATION
435
5
TESTOPERATION
The following functions are used to check before actual machining
whether themachineoperatesasspecifiedby thecreatedprogram.
1. MachineLockandAuxiliaryFunctionLock
2. FeedrateOverride
3. RapidTraverseOverride
4. DryRun
5. SingleBlock
OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION B--61394E/08
436
To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use
machinelock.
In addition, auxiliary function lock, which disables M, S, and T
commands, is availablefor checking a programtogether with machine
lock.
CRT/MDI
X
Z
The tool does not move but the
positionalongeachaxis changes
onthe display.
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 5.1 Machinelock
Procedurefor MachineLockandAuxiliaryFunctionLockOperation
Pressthemachinelock switchontheoperatorspanel. Thetool doesnot
movebutthepositionalongeachaxischangesonthedisplayasif thetool
weremoving.
After anautomatic operationisexecutedwiththemachinelockfunction,
therelationshipinpositionbetween workpiececoordinates andmachine
coordinates prior to the automatic operation may be changed. If the
relationship is changed, reset the workpiece coordinate system by
specifying the command for setting the coordinate system or by
performingamanual referenceposition return. Refer to theappropriate
manual providedby themachinetool builder for machinelock.
Presstheauxiliaryfunctionlockswitchontheoperatorspanel. M, S, and
T codesaredisabledandnot executed. Refer totheappropriatemanual
providedby themachinetool builder for auxiliary functionlock.
M, S, andT commandsareexecutedinthemachinelock state.
WhenaG27, G28, or G30commandisissuedinthemachinelockstate,
the command is accepted but the tool does not move to the reference
positionandthereferencepositionreturnLEDdoesnot goon.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, M198 and M199 commands are
executedevenintheauxiliary functionlock state.
5.1
MACHINE LOCKAND
AUXILIARY
FUNCTIONLOCK
D MachineLock
D AuxiliaryFunctionLock
Restrictions
D M, S, T commandbyonly
machinelock
D Referenceposition
returnunder Machine
Lock
D Mcodes notlockedby
auxiliaryfunctionlock
437
A programmedfeedratecanbereducedor increasedbyapercentage(%)
selectedby theoverridedial.Thisfeatureisusedtocheck aprogram.
For example, whenafeedrateof 100mm/minisspecifiedintheprogram,
settingtheoverridedial to50%movesthetool at 50mm/min.
Tool Check the machining
by alteringthe feedrate
fromthe value speci-
fiedinthe program.
Feedrate 100mm/min
(Specifiedby programmed)
Feedrate 50mm/minafter
feedrate override 50%
Workpiece
Fig. 5.2 Feedrateoverride
Procedurefor FeedrateOverrideOperation
Set the feedrate override dial to thedesired percentage(%) on the
machineoperatorspanel, beforeor duringautomatic operation.
Onsomemachines, thesamedial isusedfor thefeedrateoverridedial
andjogfeedratedial. Refertotheappropriatemanual providedbythe
machinetool builder for feedrateoverride.
Restrictions
Theoverridethatcanbespecifiedrangesfrom0to150%(10%step). For
individual machines, the range depends on the specifications of the
machinetool builder.
During threading, the override is ignored and the feedrate remains as
specifiedby program.
5.2
FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE
0 150
J OG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE
D OverrideRange
D Overrideduringthread
438
Anoverrideof four steps(F0, 25%, 50%, and100%)canbeappliedtothe
rapidtraverserate. F0isset by aparameter (No. 0533).
Rapidtraverse
rate10m/min
Override
50%
5m/min
Fig. 5.3 Rapidtraverseoverride
Procedurefor RapidTraverseOverrideOperation
Selectoneof thefourfeedrateswiththerapidtraverseoverrideswitch
during rapid traverse. Refer totheappropriatemanual providedby
themachinetool builder for rapidtraverseoverride.
Explanation
The following types of rapid traverse are available. Rapid traverse
overridecanbeappliedfor eachof them.
1) Rapidtraverseby G00.
2) Rapidtraverseduringacannedcycle.
3) RapidtraverseinG27, G28andG30.
4) Manual rapidtraverse.
5) Rapidtraverseof manual referencepositionreturn
5.3
RAPIDTRAVERSE
OVERRIDE
100
25 50
LOW
Rapidtraverseoverride
439
Thetool is movedat thefeedratespecifiedby aparameter regardlessof
thefeedratespecifiedintheprogram. Thisfunctionisusedfor checking
themovement of thetool under thestatetaht theworkpieceisremoved
fromthetable.
Tool
Chuck
X
Z
Fig. 5.4 Dryrun
Procedurefor DryRunOperation
Press the dry run switch on the machine operators panel during
automatic operation.
Thetool moves at thefeedratespecified in aparameter. Therapid
traverseswitchcanalsobeusedfor changingthefeedrate.
Refer totheappropriatemanual providedbythemachinetool builder
for dry run.
Explanation
Thedryrunfeedratechangesasshowninthetablebelowaccordingtothe
rapidtraverseswitchandparameters.
Rapidtra-
versebutton
Programcommand
versebutton
Rapidtraverse Feed
ON Rapidtraverse rate Max. cuttingfeedrate
OFF J ogfeedrate or rapidtra-
verse rate *1)
J ogfeedrate
*1: J obfeedratewhenparameter (bit 6of No. 0001) is1.
Rapidtraverseratewhenparameter is0.
5.4
DRYRUN
D Dryrunfeedrate
DRY
RUN
MC
LOCK
SINGLE
BLOCK
OPT
STOP
MST
LOCK
BLOCK
SKIP
WORK
LIGHT
440
Pressingthesingleblock switchstartsthesingleblock mode. Whenthe
cyclestart buttonispressedinthesingleblockmode, thetool stopsafter
asingleblockintheprogramisexecuted. Checktheprograminthesingle
block modeby executingtheprogramblock by block.
Stop
Workpiece
Cycle start Cycle start
Cycle start
Cycle start
Tool
Stop
Stop
Stop
Fig. 5.5 Singleblock
Procedurefor SingleBlockOperation
1 Pressthesingleblock switchon themachineoperatorspanel. The
execution of the program is stopped after the current block is
executed.
2 Pressthecyclestart buttontoexecutethenextblock. Thetool stops
after theblock isexecuted.
Refer totheappropriatemanual providedbythemachinetool builder
for singleblock execution.
5.5
SINGLE BLOCK
441
Explanation
If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at the
intermediatepoint.
Inacannedcycle, thesingleblock stoppointsare as
follows.
l G90
(Outer/inner turningcycle)
1
2
3
4
S
1
2
3
4
S
Straight cutting cycle Taper cutting cycle
Tool path Explanation
Tool path1
to 4is as-
sumedas
one cycle.
After 4is fin-
ished, a stop
is made.
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed S : Single block
l G92
(Threadingcycle)
1
2
3
4
S
1
2
3
4
S
Straight threading cycle Taper threading cycle
Tool path1
to 4is as-
sumedas
one cycle.
After 4is fin-
ished, a stop
is made.
l G94
(Endsurface turningcycle)
Straight end surface cutting cycle Taper end surface cutting cycle
Tool path1
to 4is as-
sumedas
one cycle.
After 4is fin-
ished, a stop
is made.
1
2
3
4
S
1
2
3
4
S
l G70
(Finishingcycle)
Tool path1
to 7is as-
sumedas
one cycle.
After 7is fin-
ished, a stop
is made.
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
l G71
(Outer surface rough
machiningcycle)
G72
(Endsurface roughmachining
cycle)
Eachtool
path1to 4,5
to 8,9to 12,
13to 16and
17to 20is
assumedas
one cycle.
After each
cycle is fin-
ished, a stop
is made.
S
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
This figure shows the case for G71. G72is the same.
S
S
S
Fig. 5.5(a) Singleblockduringcannedcycle(1/2)
D Referenceposition
returnandsingleblock
D Singleblockduringa
cannedcycle
442
l G73
(Closed--loopcuttingcycle)
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed S : Single--block stop
Tool path1
to 6is as-
sumedas
one cycle.
After 10is
finished, a
stopis
made.
l G74
(Endsurface cutting--off cycle)
G75
(Outer/inner surface cutting--off
cycle)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
This figure shows the case for G74. G75is the
same.
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
S
l G76
(Multiple repetitive threading
cycle)
Tool path1
to 4is as-
sume as
one cycle.
After 4is fin-
ished, a stop
is made.
S
Tool path1
to 10is as-
sumedas
one cycle.
After 10is
finished, a
stopis
made.
Tool path Explanation
S
Fig. 5.5(b) Singleblockduringcannedcycle(2/2)
SingleblockstopisnotperformedinablockcontainingM98P_;. or G65.
However, single block stop is even performed in ablock with M98P_
command, if theblock containsanaddressother thanO, N or P.
D Subprogramcall and
singleblock
OPERATION B--61394E/08 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
443
6
SAFETYFUNCTIONS
To immediately stop themachine for safety, press the Emergency stop
button. To prevent thetool fromexceeding thestrokeends, Overtravel
check andStrokecheckareavailable. Thischapter describesemergency
stop, overtravel check, andstrokecheck.
OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTION B--61394E/08
444
If youpressEmergency Stopbuttononthemachineoperatorspanel, the
machinemovement stopsinamoment.
EMERGENCY STOP
Red
Fig. 6.1 Emergencystop
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the
machinetool builder, thebuttoncanusually beunlockedby twistingit.
Explanation
EMERGENCY STOP interruptsthecurrent tothemotor.
Causesof troublemust beremovedbeforethebuttonisreleased.
6.1
EMERGENCYSTOP
445
When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the Z axis
direction tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of
workingthelimit switchandanOVER TRAVEL isdisplayed.
X
Z
Decelerationandstop
Limit switch
(* +LZ)
Fig. 6.2 Overtravel
Explanation
Presstheresetbuttontoresetthealarmafter movingthetool totheZaxis
minus direction by manual operation. For details onoperation, refer to
theoperatorsmanual of themachinetool builder.
No. Message Description
520 Overtravel: +Z The tool has exceededthe hardware--spe-
cifiedovertravel limit alongthe positive zth
axis.
Theovertravel limitsignal (*+LZ) canbeenabledor disabled, depending
onbit2of parameter0015. For details, refer tothemanual of themachine
tool builder.
6.2
OVERTRAVEL
D Releasingovertravel
D Alarm
446
Thereareaswhichthetool cannot enter canbespecifiedwithstored
strokecheck 1/2, storedstrokecheck 3, andstoredstrokecheck 4.
(I ,J ,K)
(I ,J ,K)
:Forbiddenarea for the tool
Storedstroke check 1/2
Storedstroke check 3
Storedstroke check 4
Fig. 6.3(a) Strokecheck
When thetool exceeds astoredstrokecheck, an alarmis displayedand
thetool isdeceleratedandstopped.
Whenthetool entersaforbiddenareaandanalarmisgenerated, thetool
canbemovedinthereversedirectionfromwhichthetool came.
Explanation
Parameters (Nos.0700 to 0707 or Nos.0770 to 0777) set boundary.
Outsidetheareaof theset limits isaforbiddenarea. Themachinetool
builder usuallysetsthisareaasthemaximumstroke. Theparameter used
dependsonthesignal fromthemachine.
Parameters(Nos.0747to0754)or commandssettheseboundaries. Inside
or outsidetheareaof thelimitcanbesetastheforbiddenarea. Parameter
(No.024#4) selectseither insideor outsideastheforbiddenarea.
Incaseof programcommandaG22commandforbidsthetool toenterthe
forbidden area, and a G23 command permits the tool to enter the
forbidden area. Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded
independently of another commandsinablock.
Thecommandbelowcreatesor changestheforbiddenarea:
6.3
STROKE CHECK
D Storedstrokecheck1/2
D Storedstrokecheck3
(Extendedstoredstroke
check)
447
G 22X_Z_I _K_;
A(X,Z)
X>I,Z>K
X--I>z
Z--K>z
B(I ,K)
mm
Fmmmin
7500
Fig. 6.3(b) Creatingor changingtheforbiddenareausingaprogram
Whensettingtheareaby parameters, pointsA andB inthefigurebelow
must beset.
B(X
2,
Z
2
)
X
1
>X
2
,Z
1
>Z
2
X
1
--X
2
>z
Z
1
--Z
2
>z
A(X
1,
Z
1
)
mm
Fmmmin
7500
Fig. 6.3(c) Creatingor changingtheforbiddenareausingaparameters
In check 3, evenif youmistaketheorder of thecoordinatevalueof the
twopoints, arectangular, withthetwopointsbeingtheapexes, will beset
asthearea.
When you set the forbidden area X
1
,Z
1
,X
2
,and Z
2
through parameters
(Nos.0747to0754), thedatashouldbespecifiedby thedistancefromthe
referenceposition intheleast command increment. (Output increment)
If set theforbiddenareaXZIK by aG22 command, specify thedata by
thedistancefromthereferencepositionintheleastinputincrement(Input
increment.) Theprogrammeddataarethen convertedinto thenumerical
values in the least command increment, and the values are set as the
parameters.
Whenpower ison, it becomesG22mode.
Set theboundary withparametersNo.0760to0767. Theareainsidethe
boundary becomestheforbiddenarea.
Optionof extendedstoredstrokecheck isrequired.
D Storedstrokecheck4
448
Theparameter setting or programmed value (XZIK) depends on which
part of thetool or tool holder ischeckedfor enteringtheforbiddenarea.
Confirmthecheckingposition(thetopof thetool or thetool chuck)before
programmingtheforbiddenarea.
If pointC(Thetopof thetool) ischeckedinFig. 6.3(d) , thedistancec
shouldbeset as thedatafor thestoredstrokelimit function. If point D
(Thetool chuck) ischecked, thedistanced must beset.
The position of the
tool after reference
position return
Area boundary
d
c
D
C
Fig. 6.3(d) Settingtheforbiddenarea
Areacanbeset inpiles.
Storedstroke
check 3
Stored storoke check 1/2
Fig. 6.3(e) Settingtheforbiddenareaover lapping
Unnecessary limitsshouldbeset beyondthemachinestroke.
Themaximumamount of overrun L (mm), relativeto thestored stroke
check, iscalculatedusingthefollowingformula, whereF(mm/min) isthe
maximumrapidtraverserate:
L =F/7500
WhenL isset, thetool canenter apreviously set inhibitedareaby upto
L mm. Youcanalsoset bit 7of parameter No. 0076to stopthetool up
toL mmoutsidethesetinhibitedarea. Inthelatter case, thetool doesnot
enter theinhibitedarea.
Each limit becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual
referenceposition return or automatic referenceposition return by G28
hasbeenperformed.
After thepower isturnedon, if thereferencepositionisintheforbidden
areaof eachlimit, analarmisgeneratedimmediately. (OnlyinG22mode
for storedstrokecheck 3).
D Checkpointfor the
forbiddenarea
D Forbiddenareaover--
lapping
D Amountof overrun
relativetostoredstroke
check
D Effectivetimefor a
forbiddenarea
449
Whenastrokecheck alarmis issued, manually movethetool out of the
inhibited area, in the direction opposite to that indicated in the alarm
message. Then, press thereset key to releasethealarm. If thetool has
entered two inhibited areas at the same time, such that it cannot be
manually moved out of either area, apply emergency stop, changethe
strokecheckparameterstoreleasethealarm, thenmanuallymovethetool
out of theinhibitedareas.
WhenG23isswitchedtoG22intheforbiddenarea, thefollowingresults.
1Whentheforbiddenareaisinside, analarmisinformedinthenext
move.
2Whentheforbiddenareaisoutside, analarmisinformedimmediately.
For the0--TTC, set aforbiddenareafor eachtool post.
NOTE
Insetting aforbidden area, if thetwo points to beset arethe
same, the area is as follows:
1. When the forbidden area is check 1/2, all areas are
forbidden areas.
2. When the forbidden area is check 3 or check 4 all
areas are movable areas.
Alarms
Number Message Contents
5n0 OVER TRAVEL:
+n
Exceededthe n--thaxis) +side storedstroke
check 1/2.
5n1 OVER TRAVEL:
--n
Exceededthe n--thaxis side stored
stroke check 1/2.
5n2 OVER TRAVEL:
+n
Exceededthe n--thaxis (1to 8) +side stored
stroke check 2.
5n3 OVER TRAVEL:
--n
Exceededthe n--thaxis (1to 8) side
storedstroke check 2.
5n4 OVER TRAVEL:
+n
Exceededthe n--thaxis (1to 8) +side stored
stroke check 3.
5n5 OVER TRAVEL:
--n
Exceededthe n--thaxis (1to 8) side
storedstroke check 3.
D Releasingthealarms
D ChangefromG23to
G22inaforbiddenarea
D Settingtheforbidden
areafor the0--TTC
OPERATION
7. ALARM ANDSELF--DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS B--61394E/08
450
7
ALARMANDSELF---DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
Whenanalarmoccurs, thecorrespondingalarmscreenappearstoindicate
thecauseof thealarm. Thecausesof alarmsareclassifiedby error codes.
The systemmay sometimes seemto beat ahalt, although no alarmis
displayed. Inthiscase, thesystemmay beperformingsomeprocessing.
Thestateof thesystemcanbecheckedusingtheself--diagnosticfunction.
OPERATION B--61394E/08
FUNCTIONS
451
Whenanalarmoccurs, thealarmscreenappears.
ALARMMESSAGE O0001 N0011
511 OVER TRAVEL : - X
S 0 T0101
18: 46: 03 ALARM MDI
[ ALARM] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ ] [ ]
Insomecases, thealarmscreendoesnotappear, butanALMblinksatthe
bottomof thescreen.
PARAMETER O0001 N0013
( SETTI NG 1)
TVON= 0
I SO = 1 ( 0: EI A1: I SO )
I NCH= 0 ( 0: MM 1: I NCH)
I / O = 0
SEQ = 1
CLOCK 94/ 03/ 17
18: 46: 45
NO. TVON S 0 T0101
18: 46: 36 ARARM MDI
[ PARAM] [ DGNOS ] [ ] [ SV- PRM] [ ]
Inthiscase, display thealarmscreenasfollows:
Procedurefor displayingthealarmscreen
1. Pressthefunctionkey
OPR
ALARM
.
2. Pressthesoft key [ALARM].
7.1
ALARMDISPLAY
Explanations
D Alarm screen
D Another methodfor
alarmdisplays
OPERATION
452
Error codesandmessagesindicatethecauseof analarm. Torecoverfrom
analarm, eliminatethecauseandpressthereset key.
Theerror codesareclassifiedasfollows:
No. 000to250: Programerrors*1
No. 3n0to3n8: Absolutepulsecoder (APC) alarms*2
No. 3n9: Serial pulsecoder (SPC) alarms*2
No. 400to495: Servoalarms
No. 510to581: Overtravel alarms
No. 600to607: PMC alarms
No. 700to704: Overheat alarms
No. 910to998: Systemalarms
*1) For analarm(No. 000to250) that occursinassociationwith
backgroundoperation, theindicationxxxBP/S alarm isprovided
(wherexxx isanalarmnumber). Only aBP/S alarmis providedfor
No. 140.
*2) nisnumber of control axis.
Seetheerror codelistintheappendixGfor detailsof theerror codes.
D Resetof thealarm
D Error codes
FUNCTIONS
453
Thesystemmay sometimes seemto beat ahalt, althoughno alarmhas
occurred. Inthis case, thesystemmay beperforming someprocessing.
Thestateof thesystemcanbecheckedbydisplayingtheself--diagnostic
screen.
Procedurefor Diagnostic
1 Pressthefunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
.
2 Pressthesoft key[DGNOS].
3 Thediagnosticscreenhasmorethan1pages. Selectthescreenby
thefollowingoperation.
(1) Changethepageby the1--pagechangekey.
(2) -- Press NO. key.
--Key input thenumber of thediagnostic datatobedisplayed.
--Press INPUT key.
DI AGNOSTI C O0001 N0011
NO. DATA N0. DATA
0000 00000001 0010 00000000
0001 00000000 0011 00000000
0002 00000000 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
0004 10000000 0014 00000000
0005 00000000 0015 00000000
0006 00000000 0016 00100010
0007 00000000 0017 00100000
0008 00000000 0018 10100000
0009 00000000 0019 00000000
NO. 0000
18: 48: 34 AUTO
For the0--TTC, thediagnostic screen for thetool post selectedwith
the tool post selection switch is displayed. When displaying the
diagnosticscreenfor theothertool post, specifythetool postwiththe
tool post selectionswitch.
7.2
CHECKINGBYSELF--
DIAGNOSTIC
SCREEN
OPERATION
454
Dataof self---Diagnosis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CSCT CITL COVZ CINP CDWL CMTN CFIN 0700
Whenadigit is1, thecorrespondingstatusiseffective.
CFIN : TheM, S, O, or T functionisbeingexecuted.
CMTN : A movecommandinthecycleoperationisbeingexecuted.
CDWL : Dwell isbeingexecuted.
CINP : Anin--posiitoncheck isbeingexecuted.
COVZ: Overrideisat 0%.
CITL : Interlock signal (STLK) isturnedon.
CSCT : Speedarrival signal of spindleisturnedon.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRST 0701
CRST : One of the following : The reset button on the MDI panel,
emergency stop, or remotereset ison.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
STP REST EMS RSTB CSU 0712
Indicatesautomaticoperationstopor feedholdstatus. Theseareusedfor
troubleshooting.
STP : Theflagwhichstopstheautomaticoperation. Thisisset atthe
followingcondition.
External reset signal isturnedon.
Emergency stopsignal isturnedon.
Feedholdsignal isturnedon.
Reset buttonontheCRT/MDI panel isturnedon.
Themodeischangedtothemanual mode, suchasJ OG,
HANDLE/STEP, TEACH INJ OG, TEACH IN HANDLE.
Other alarmisgenerated.
REST : This is set when oneof theexternal reset, emergency stop, or
reset buttonisset on.
EMS : Thisisset whentheemergency stopisset on.
RSTB : Thisisset whenthereset buttonison.
CSU : Thisisset whentheemergency stop isturned on, or whenthe
servoalarmhasbeengenerated.
OPERATION B--61394E/08 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
455
8
DATAINPUT/OUTPUT
NC dataistransferredbetweentheNC andexternal input/outputdevices
suchastheHandy File.
Thefollowingtypesof datacanbeenteredandoutput :
1.Program
2.Offset data
3.Parameter
4.Pitcherror compensationdata
5.Custommacrocommonvariable
Before an input/output device can be used, the input/output related
parametersmust beset.
For howtoset parameters, seeChapter 2OPERATIONAL DEVICES.
FANUC
HandyFile
RS---422
interface
RS---232---C
interface
RS--232--C or
RS--422 interface
(Punch panel etc...)
OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT B--61394E/08
456
Of theexternal input/outputdevices, theFANUCHandyFileandFANUC
Floppy Cassetteusefloppy disks as their input/output medium, andthe
FANUC FA CardusesanFA cardasitsinput/output medium.
In this manual, an input/output mediumis generally referred to as a
floppy. However, when the description of one input/output medium
varies from the description of another, the name of the input/output
mediumisused. In thetext below, afloppy represents afloppy disk or
FA card.
UnlikeanNCtape, afloppyallowstheuser tofreelychoosefromseveral
typesof datastoredononemediumonafile--by--filebasis.
Input/output is possiblewith dataextending over morethan onefloppy
disk.
Theunit of data, whichisinput/output betweenthefloppy and theCNC
by oneinput/output operation (pressingthe[READ]or[PUNCH] key), is
called a[file]. Wheninputting CNC programs from, or outputtingthem
tothefloppy, for example, oneor all programswithintheCNC memory
arehandledasonefile.
Filesareassignedautomatically filenumbers1,2,3,4andsoon, withthe
leadfileas1.
File 1 File n Blank File 2 File 3
Whenonefilehasbeen enteredover twofloppies, LEDson theadaptor
flash alternately on completion of data input/output between the first
floppyandtheCNC, promptingfloppyreplacement. Inthiscase, takethe
firstfloppyoutof theadaptorandinsertasecondfloppyinitsplace. Then,
datainput/output will continueautomatically.
Floppy replacement is prompted when the second floppy and later is
requiredduring filesearch--out, datainput/output betweentheCNC and
thefloppy, or filedeletion.
Floppy 1
File 1 File 2 File 3 File (k--1)
File k
Floppy 2
Continuation
of file k
File (k+1) File n Blank
Since floppy replacement is processed by the input/output device, no
special operation is required. TheCNC will interrupt datainput/output
operationuntil thenext floppy isinsertedintotheadaptor.
When reset operation is applied totheCNC during arequest for floppy
replacement, theCNC is not reset at once, but reset after thefloppy has
beenreplaced.
8.1
FILES
Explanations
D What is aFile
D Request for floppy
replacement
457
Thefloppyisprovidedwiththewriteprotectswitch. Settheswitchtothe
writeenablestate. Then, start output operation.
Writeprotect switch
(2) Write---enabled (Reading,
writing, and deletion arepos-
sible.)
Writeprotect switch of a cassette Write protect switchof a card
(1) Write---protected
(Only reading is
possible.)
(1) Write---protected
(Only reading is
possible.)
(2) Write---enabled (Reading,
writing, and deletion arepos-
sible.)
Fig. 8.1 Protectswitch
Oncewritteninthecassetteor card, datacansubsequently bereadoutby
correspondence between the data contents and file numbers. This
correspondence cannot be verified, unless the data contents and file
numbersareoutput totheCNC and displayed. Thedatacontents canbe
displayedwithdisplay functionfor directory of floppy disk
(SeeSection8.8).
To display the contents,write the file numbers and thecontents on the
memocolumnwhichistheback of floppy.
(Entry exampleonMEMO)
File1 NC parameters
File2 Offset data
File3 NC programO0100

File(n--1) NC programO0500
Filen NC programO0600
D Protect switch
D Writing memo
458
Whentheprogramisinput fromthefloppy, thefiletobeinput firstmust
besearched.
For thispurpose, proceedasfollows:
File 1
File searchingof the file n
File n Blank File 2 File 3
Procedurefor FileHeadingOperation
1 PresstheEDIT or AUTOswitchonthemachineoperatorspanel.
2 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
3 Enter address N .
4 Enter thenumber of thefiletosearchfor.
N0
Thebeginningof thecassetteor cardissearched.
Oneof N1toN9999
Of thefileNos. 1to9999, adesignatedfileissearched.
N--9999
Thefilenext tothat accessedjust beforeissearched.
N--9998
WhenN--9998isdesignated, N--9999isautomatically inserted
eachtimeafileisinput or output. Thisconditionisreset by the
designationof N1,N1to9999, or N 9999or reset.
5 Presssoft key INPUT .
Thesameresult is obtained both by sequentially searching the files by
specifyingNos. N1toN9999andby first searchingoneof N1toN9999
and then using the N--9999 searching method. The searching time is
shorter inthelatter case.
No. Description
86
The ready signal (DR) of aninput/output device is off.
Analarmis not immediately indicatedinthe CNC evenwhen
analarmoccurs duringheadsearching(whena file is not
found, or the like).
Analarmis givenwhenthe input/output operationis performed
after that. This alarmis also raisedwhenN1is specifiedfor
writingdata to anempty floppy. (Inthis case, specify N0.)
8.2
FILE SEARCH
Explanation
D FilesearchbyN--9999
Alarm
459
Filesstoredonafloppy canbedeletedfileby fileasrequired.
Procedurefor FileDeletion
1 Insert thefloppy into theinput/output device so that it is ready for
writing.
2 PresstheEDIT switchonthemachineoperatorspanel.
3 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
. Display programscreen.
4 Enter address N .
5 Enter thenumber (from1to9999) of thefiletodelete.
6 Presssoft key
OUTPT
START
Thefilespecifiedinstep5isdeleted.
When a file is deleted, the file numbers after the deleted file areeach
decrementedbyone. Supposethatafilenumberedkwasdeleted. Inthis
case, filesarerenumberedasfollows:
Beforedeletion after deletion
1to(k--1) 1to(k--1) . . . . . . .
k Deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(k+1) ton k to(n--1) . . . . . . .
Set thewriteprotect switchtothewriteenablestatetodeletethefiles.
8.3
FILE DELETION
Explanations
D Filenumber after thefile
is deleted
D Protect switch
460
ThissectiondescribeshowtoloadaprogramintotheCNCfromafloppy
or NC tape.
Procedurefor InputtingaProgram
1 Makesuretheinput deviceisready for reading.
For the0--TTC, selectthetool postfor whichaprogramtobeinputis
usedwiththetool post selectionswitch.
3 When using a floppy, search for the required fileaccording to the
procedureinSection8.2.
4 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
5 After enteringaddressO, specifyaprogramnumber tobeassignedto
the program. When no program number is specified here, the
programnumber usedonthefloppy or NC tapeisassigned.
6 Presssoft key INPUT
Theprogramisinputandtheprogramnumber specifiedisassignedto
theprogram.
7 Tostopinput operationhalfway, pressthe
RESET
key.
If aprogramisinputwhilethedataprotectkey onthemachineoperators
panel turns ON, theprogramloaded intothememory is verifiedagainst
thecontentsof thefloppy or NC tape.
If amismatchis foundduring collation, thecollationis terminatedwith
analarm(P/S No. 79).
If the operation above is performed with the dataprotection key turns
OFF, collationisnot performed, but programsareregisteredinmemory.
Whenatapeholdsmultipleprograms, thetapeisreaduptoER (or %).
O1111 M02;
ER(%)
O2222 M30; O3333 M02;
8.4
PROGRAM
INPUT/OUTPUT
8.4.1
InputtingaProgram
Explanations
D Collation
D Inputtingmultiple
programs fromanNC
tape
461
VWhenaprogramisenteredwithout specifyingaprogramnumber.
TheO--number of theprogramontheNC tapeisassignedtothe
program. If theprogramhasno O--number, theN--number in thefirst
block isassignedtotheprogram.
Whentheprogramhasneither anO--number nor N--number, the
previousprogramnumber isincrementedby oneandtheresult is
assignedtotheprogram.
VWhenaprogramisenteredwithaprogramnumber
TheO--number on theNC tapeis ignoredand thespecified number is
assignedtotheprogram. Whentheprogramisfollowed by additional
programs, thefirst additional programisgiventheprogramnumber.
Additional programnumbersarecalculatedby addingonetothelast
program.
Thesoft keyscanbeusedtoinput aprogram.
Thisoperationisenabled if thefloppy disk directory display functionis
not supportedor , if thefunctionissupported, theFloppyCassetteisnot
specifiedastheI/Odevice.
Procedurefor progarminputwiththesoftkeys
1 DisplaytheprogramscreeninEDIT modeor backgroundeditmode.
2 Pressthe[I/O] soft key.
3 Inputaddress O , thentheprogramnumber. If thisstepisskipped,
theprogramnumber ontheNC tapeisautomatically selected.
4 Pressthe[READ] soft key. Toabandoninput at any point, pressthe
[STOP] soft key.
5 After input hasbeencompleted, pressthe[CAN] soft key todisplay
theprogramscreenagain.
PROGRAM O0615 N0000
SYSTEMEDI TI ON 0671 - 04
PROGRAMNO. USED : 24 FREE : 39
O0001 O0010 O0011 O0021 O0041 O0601
O0613 O0615 O0645 O0651 O1021 O1041
O1051 O2011 O2505 O3148 O3153 O3511
O4011 O4048 O5111 O5221 O5766 O6032
<
EDI T
[ PUNCH ] [ READ ] [ CAN ] [ ] [ STOP ]
D Programnumbers ona
NC tape
D Inputwiththesoftkeys
462
Programinputisidentical tothatinforegroundeditmode. If the
RESET
key
is pressedto abandoninput inthebackgroundwhileaprogramisbeing
executed, however, the programexecution is also halted. To input a
programinbackgroundedit mode, usethesoft keys.
No. Description
70 The size of memory is not sufficient to store the input pro-
grams
73 Anattempt was made to store a programwithanexistingpro-
gramnumber.
79 The verificationoperationfounda mismatchbetweena pro-
gramloadedinto memory andthe contents of the programon
the floppy or NC tape.
A programstoredinthememory of theCNCunit isoutput toafloppyor
NC tape.
Procedurefor OutputtingaProgram
1 Makesuretheoutput deviceisready for output.
Forthe0--TTC, selectthetool postforwhichaprogramtobeoutputis
2 TooutputtoanNCtape, specifythepunchcodesystem(ISOor EIA)
usingaparameter. Tooutput tofloppy, specify ISO.
4 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
5 Enter address O .
6 Enter aprogramnumber. If --9999isentered, all programsstoredin
memory areoutput.
To output multipleprogramsat onetimewithfull MDI key, enter a
rangeasfollows:
ODDDD,OVVVV
ProgramsNo.DDDD toNo.VVVV areoutput.
7 Presssoft key
OUTPT
START
Thespecifiedprogramor programsareoutput.
D Programinputin
backgroundeditmode
Alarm
8.4.2
OutputtingaProgram
463
Whenoutputisconductedtothefloppy, theprogramisoutputasthenew
fileafter thefilesexistinginthefloppy. Newfilesaretobewrittenfrom
the beginning with making the old files invalid, use theabove output
operationafter theN0headsearching.
WhenP/S alarm86occursduringprogramoutput, thefloppy isrestored
totheconditionbeforetheoutput.
Whenprogramoutputisconductedafter N1toN9999headsearching, the
newfileisoutput asthedesignatedn--thposition. Inthis case, 1 ton--1
files areeffective, but thefiles after theoldn--th onearedeleted. If an
alarmoccursduringoutput, only the1ton--1filesarerestored.
Toefficiently usethememory inthecassetteor card, output theprogram
bysettingparameter (No.0002#7, 0012#7, 0050#7, or 0051#7) to1. This
parameter makesthefeedisnot output, utilizingthememoryefficiently.
Head searching withafileNo. isnecessary whenafileoutput fromthe
CNC tothefloppy isagaininput totheCNC memory or comparedwith
thecontent of theCNC memory. Therefore, immediately after afileis
output fromtheCNC tothefloppy, recordthefileNo. onthememo.
A programisoutput topaper tapeinthefollowingformat:
ER
(%)
Program ER
(%)
Feed of 3 feet
Feed of 3 feet
If three--feetfeedingistoolong, pressthe
CAN
keyduringfeedpunching
tocancel thesubsequent feedpunching.
A spacecodefor TV check isautomatically punched.
WhenaprogramispunchedinISOcode, twoCRcodesarepunchedafter
anLF code.
LF CR CR
Toset LF codeonly, set parameter bit 7of No.0070.
Pressthe
RESET
key tostoppunchoperation.
All programsareoutput topaper tapeinthefollowingformat.
ER
(%)
Program Program Program
ER
(%)
Feed of 1---feet
Feed of 3---feet
Thesequenceof theprogramspunchedisundefined.
Thesoft keyscanbeusedtoinput aprogarm.
not supportedor, if thefunctionis supported, theFloppy Cassetteisnot
specifiedastheI/Odevice.
Explanations
(Output to afloppy)
D Fileoutputlocation
D Analarmwhilea
programis output
D Outputtingaprogram
after fileheading
D Efficientuseof memory
D Onthememorecord
Explanations
(Output to anNC tape)
D Format
D TVcheck
D ISOcode
D Stoppingthepunch
D Punchingall programs
D Outputwiththesoftkeys
464
Procedurefor programoutputwiththesoftkeys
1 Display theprogramscreeninEDIT mode.
2 Pressthe[I/O] soft key.
3 Input address O , thentheprogramnumber. If--9999isenteredas
theprogramnumber, all programsinmemory areoutput.
To output multiple programs by full MDI key at onetime, enter a
rangeasfollows:
Onnnn, Oj j j j
ProgramsNo. nnnn toNo.j j j j areoutput.
4 Pressthe[PUNCH]softkey. Toabandoninputatanypoint, pressthe
[STOP] soft key.
5 After input hasbeencompleted, pressthe[CAN] soft key todisplay
theprogramscreenagain.
PROGRAM O0615 N0000
O0001 O0010 O0011 O0021 O0041 O0601
O0613 O0615 O0645 O0651 O1021 O1041
O1051 O2011 O2505 O3148 O3153 O3511
O4011 O4048 O5111 O5221 O5766 O6032
<
EDI T
[ PUNCH ] [ READ ] [ CAN ] [ ] [ STOP ]
Programinputisidentical tothatinforegroundeditmode. If the
RESET
key
is pressedto abandoninput inthebackgroundwhileaprogramisbeing
executed, however, theprogramexecutionisalsohalted. A programthat
iscurrently selectedintheforegroundcanalso beoutput.
NOTE
Some machines also use the key, used to start
punching of the CNC tape in the background, as the cycle
start key to start automatic operation. If such a machine is
being used, punch the CNC tape in a mode other than
automatic operation mode. (To check whether the key is
used for both purposes, refer to the manual provided by the
machine tool builder.)
OUTPT
START
D Programoutputin
backgroundeditmode
465
Offset datais loadedinto thememory of theCNC fromafloppy or NC
tape. Theinput format isthesameasfor offset valueoutput. Seesection
8.5.2. Whenanoffset valueisloadedwhichhasthesameoffsetnumber
as an offset number already registered inthememory, theloadedoffset
datareplacesexistingdata.
Procedurefor InputtingOffsetData
1 Makesuretheinput deviceisready for reading
For the0--TTC, selectthetool postfor whichoffsetdatatobeinputis
4 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
, anddisplay offset screen.
6 Theinputoffsetdatawill bedisplayedonthescreenafter completion
of input operation.
8.5
OFFSETDATA
INPUTANDOUTPUT
8.5.1
InputtingOffsetData
466
All offset dataisoutput inaoutput format fromthememoryof theCNC
toafloppy or NC tape.
Procedurefor OutputtingOffset Data
Forthe0--TTC, selectthetool postforwhichoffsetdatatobeoutputis
2 Specify thepunchcodesystem(ISOor EIA) usingaparameter.
Tooutput tofloppy, specify ISO.
4 Pressfunctionkey OFSET , anddisplay offset screen.
5 Presssoft key
OUTPT
START
.
Offset dataisoutput intheoutput format describedbelow.
Output format isasfollows:
Format
G10P_X_Y_Z_R_Q_;
P: Offset number
:P=0 Work sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:P=Wear offset number For wear offset amount . . . . . . . . . . .
:p=10000+geometry offset number For geometry offset amount . .
X:Offset valueonX axis
Y: Offset valueonY axis
Z:Offset valueonZaxis
Q:Imaginary tool nosenumber
R:Tool noseradiusoffset value
TheL1commandmaybeusedinsteadof L11for format compatibilityof
theconventional CNC.
Whenthefloppy disk directory display functionisused, thenameof the
output fileisOFFSET.
8.5.2
OutputtingOffsetData
Explanations
D Output format
D Outputfilename
467
Pitcherror compensationdataispart of theparameter data. Thesame
input/output operationasfor other parameterscanbeusedfor pitch
error compensationdata. Thissectiondescribesthemethodof
parameter input/output operation.
Parametersareloadedintothememory of theCNCunit fromafloppyor
NCtape. Theinputformat isthesameastheoutput format. SeeSection
8.6.2. Whenaparameter isloadedwhichhasthesamedatanumber asa
parameter already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter
replacestheexistingparameter.
Procedurefor InputtingParameters
1 Makesuretheinput deviceisready for reading.
For the0--TTC, select thetool post for whichparameterstobeinput
areusedwiththetool post selectionswitch.
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operators
panel.
4 Pressfunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
, anddisplay parameter screen.
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for PWE (writing parameters).
AlarmP/S100appears.
Parameters are read into memory. Upon completion of input, the
INPUTindicator atthelower--rightcorner of thescreendisappears.
7 Enter 0inresponsetotheprompt for PWE (writingparameters).
8 Turnthepower totheNC back on.
9 ReleasetheEMERGENCY STOP button onthemachineoperators
panel.
NOTE
For afull keyboard, beforeperformingthis procedure, set bit 3of
parameter No. 0038to 1.
8.6
INPUTTINGAND
OUTPUTTING
PARAMETERSAND
PITCHERROR
COMPENSATION
DATA
8.6.1
InputtingParameters
468
All parametersareoutput in thedefined format fromthememory of the
CNC toafloppy or NC tape.
Procedurefor OutputtingParameters
For the0--TTC, select thetool post for whichparameterstobeinput
areusedwiththetool post selectionswitch.
Tooutput afloppy, specify ISO.
4 Pressfunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
, anddisplay parameter screen.
5 Presssoft key
OUTPT
START
.
All parameters(pitcherror compensationisinclded) areoutput inthe
definedformat.
Output format isasfollows:
N_P_;
N_ Parameter No.
P_ Parameter settingvalue.
output fileisPARAMETER.
8.6.2
Outputting Parameters
Explanations
D Output format
D Outputfilename
469
Thevalueof acustommacroBcommonvariable(#500to#999) isloaded
intothememoryof theCNCfromafloppyor NCtape. Thesameformat
used to output custommacro common variables is used for input. See
Section8.7.2. For acustommacrocommonvariabletobevalid, theinput
datamustbeexecutedbypressingthecyclestartbuttonafterdataisinput.
Whenthevalueof acommonvariableisloadedintomemory, thisvalue
replacesthevalueof thesamecommonvariablealreadyexisting(if any)
inmemory.
Procedurefor InputtingCustomMacroB CommonVariables
1 Input theprogramaccordingtotheprocedureinSubsection8.4.1.
2 Press the AUTO switch on the machine operators panel upon
completinginput.
3 Pressthecyclestart buttontoexecutetheloadedprogram.
4 Display themacrovariablescreento chek whether thevalues of the
commonvariableshavebeenset correctly.
Thecommonvariables(#500to#531) canbeinput andoutput.
Whentheoptionfor addingacommonvariableisspecified, valuesfrom
#500 to #999 can beinput and output. Common variables#100 to199
cannot beinput or output.
8.7
INPUTTING/
OUTPUTTING
CUSTOMMACROB
COMMONVARIABLES
8.7.1
InputtingCustom
MacroB Common
Variables
Explanations
D Commonvariables
470
Custommacro common variables (#500 to #999) stored in thememory
of theCNC canbeoutput inthedefinedformat toafloppy or NC tape.
Procedurefor OutputtingCustomMacroCommonVariable
Tooutput afloppy, specify ISO.
4 Pressfunctionkey OFSET , anddisplay macrovariablescreen.
5 Presssoft key
OUTPT
START
.
Commonvariablesareoutput inthedefinedformat.
Theoutput format isasfollows:
%
;
#500=[25283*65536+65536]/134217728 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#501=#0; 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#502=0; 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#503= ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
#531 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M02;
%
1. Theprecisionof avariableismaintainedbyoutputtingthevalueof the
variableas<expression>.
2. Undefinedvariable
3. Whenthevalueof avariableis0
output fileisVMACROVARW.
Thecommonvariables(#500to#531) canbeinput andoutput.
Whentheoptionfor addingacommonvariableisspecified, valuesfrom
#500to#999canbeinput andoutput.
Commonvariables#100to#199cannot beinput or output.
8.7.2
OutputtingCustom
MacroB Common
Variable
Explanations
D Outputformat
D Outputfilename
D Commonvariable
471
Onthefloppydirectory displayscreen, adirectory of theFANUCHandy
File, FANUCFloppyCassette, orFANUCFACardfilescanbedisplayed.
Inaddition, thosefilescanbeloaded, output, anddeleted.
DI RECTORY( FLOPPY) O0001 N0000
S 0 T0101
19: 00: 57 EDI T
[ SRHFI L ] [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [ DELETE ] [ ]
supportedandtheFloppy Cassetteisspecifiedastheinput/output unit.
Additionally, Incaseof 0--TTC, thoseareenabledonlyinthesideof tool
post 1.
8.8
DISPLAYING
DIRECTORYOF
FLOPPYDISK
472
Displayingthedirectoryof floppydiskfiles
Usethefollowingproceduretodisplayadirectoryof all the
filesstoredinafloppy:
2 Pressfunction
PRGRM
key .
3 Presssoft key [FLOPPY].
4 Presspagekey or .
5 Thescreenbelowappears.
0003 O0001 1. 9
0004 O0021 7. 1
0005 O0041 7. 1
0006 O0615 5. 8
0007 O0651 9. 1
0008 O0601 7. 1
0009 O0645 5. 8
S 0 T0101
19: 02: 33 EDI T
[ SRHFI L ] [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [ DELETE ] [ ]
Fig. 8.8.1(a)
6 Pressapagekey againtodisplay another pageof thedirectory.
8.8.1
DisplayingtheDirectory
Procedure1
473
Usethefollowingproceduretodisplayadirectoryof files
startingwithaspecifiedfilenumber :
2 Pressfunction
PRGRM
key.
3 Presssoft key[FLOPPY].
4 Presssoft key[FSRH].
5 Enter afilenumber, andpress INPUT key.
6 Presssoft key[EXEC].
7 Pressapagekey todisplay another pageof thedirectory.
8 Press soft key [CAN] to return to thesoft key display shown inthe
screenof Fig8.8.1(a).
0010 O0613 5. 2
0011 O1021 3. 9
0012 O1041 3. 2
0013 O1051 3. 2
0014 O0010 2. 6
0015 O2011 3. 9
0016 O2505 7. 1
0017 O0011 6. 5
0018 O3511 3. 2
SEARCH
_FI LE NO. = 10
NUM S 0 T0101
19: 04: 05 EDI T
[ EXEC ] [ CAN ] [ ] [ ] [ STOP ]
Fig. 8.8.1(b)
NO :Displaysthefilenumber
FILE NAME:Displaysthefilename.
(METER) :Convertsandprintsout thefilecapacity to
paper tapelength.Youcanalsoproduce(FEET)bysetting
theINPUT UNIT toINCH
of thesettingdata.
VOL. :Whenthefileismulti--volume, that stateis
displayed.
C01
C02
L03
C(number)means CONTINUE . . . .
L(number)means LAST . . . .
number number of floppies or cards . . . . . . . . .
(Ex.) Floppy or cardA
Floppy or cardB
Floppy or cardC
Procedure2
Explanations
D Screenfields andtheir
meanings
474
Thecontentsof thespecifiedfilenumber arereadtothememory of NC.
Readingfiles
2 Pressfunction
PRGRM
key.
4 Presssoft key [READ].
0010 O0613 5. 2
0011 O1021 3. 9
0012 O1041 3. 2
0013 O1051 3. 2
0014 O0010 2. 6
0015 O2011 3. 9
0016 O2505 7. 1
0017 O0011 6. 5
0018 O3511 3. 2
SEARCH
_FI LE NO. = 10 PROGRAMNO. =
NUM S 0 T0101
19: 06: 32 EDI T
[ EXEC ] [ CAN ] [ ] [ ] [ STOP ]
5 Enter afilenumber.
6 Pressfunction INPUT key .
7 Tomodifytheprogramnumber, entertheprogramnumber, thenpress
function INPUT key.
8 Presssoft key[EXEC]. Thefilenumber indicatedin thelower--left
corner of thescreenisautomatically incrementedby one.
9 Presssoft key[CAN] toreturntothesoft key display shownin
thescreenof Fig. 8.8.1.(a).
8.8.2
ReadingFiles
Procedure
475
Any programin thememory of theCNC unit canbeoutput to afloppy
asafile.
Outputtingprograms
2 Pressfunction
PRGRM
key.
4 Presssoft key [PUNCH].
PUNCH
FI LE NO. = _PROGRAMNO. = 3257
NUM S 0 T0101
19: 08: 01 EDI T
[ EXEC ] [ CAN ] [ PRG- NO ] [ ] [ STOP ]
5 Enteraprogramnumber. Towriteall programsintoasinglefile, enter
--9999 in the programnumber field. In this case, the file name
ALL.PROGRAMisregistered.
6 Pressfunction INPUT key .
TowritetheprogramsNo.nnnn to VVVV without steps5and6,
enter arangeasfollws:
Soft key[PRGNo.], VVVV andsoft key[PRGNo.].
7 Presssoft key[EXEC]. Theprogramor programsspecifiedinstep5
arewrittenafterthelastfileonthefloppy. Tooutputtheprogramafter
deleting files starting with an existing file number, key in the file
number, thenpressfunction INPUT key followedby soft key[EXEC].
thescreenof Fig.8.8.1(a).
8.8.3
OutputtingPrograms
Procedure
476
Thefilewiththespecifiedfilenumber isdeleted.
Deletingfiles
2 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
4 Presssoft key [DELETE].
0003 O0001 1. 9
0004 O0021 7. 1
0005 O0041 7. 1
0006 O0615 5. 8
0007 O0651 9. 1
0008 O0601 7. 1
0009 O0645 5. 8
DELETE
FI LE NO. = 3
NUM S 0 T0101
19: 22: 01 EDI T
[ EXEC ] [ CAN ] [ ] [ ] [ STOP ]
5 Specify thefiletobedeleted.
Whenspecifyingthefilewithafilenumber, typethenumber and
pressfunction INPUT key.
6 Presssoft key[EXEC].
Thefilespecifiedinthefilenumber fieldis deleted. Whenafileis
deleted, thefilenumbersafter thedeleted fileareeachdecremented
by one.
thescreenof Fig. 8.8.1(a).
If
CAN
+ INPUT keys are pressed without key inputting file number and
programnumber, filenumber or programnumber shows blank. When
0isenteredfor filenumbersor programnumbers, 1isdisplayed.
Tousechannel 1for theinput/output unit, set thedeviceof bits6 and7
of parameter 038totheFloppyCassette. Tousechannel 2, set thedevice
of bits4and5of parameter 038totheFloppy Cassette. To usechannel
3, set thedeviceof bits1and2of parameter 038totheFloppyCassette.
8.8.4
DeletingFiles
Procedure
Restrictions
D Inputtingfilenumbers
andprogramnumbers
withkeys
D I/Odevices
477
For thenumeral input inthedatainput areawithFILE NO. and
PROGRAM NO., only lower 4digitsbecomevalid.
Whenthedataprotectionkey onthemachineoperatorspanel
isON, noprogramsarereadfromthefloppy. They areverifiedagainst
thecontentsof thememory of theCNC instead.
No. Contents
71
Aninvalidfile number or programnumber was entered.
(Specifiedprogramnumber is not found.)
79
Verificationoperationfounda mismatchbetweena program
loadedinto memory andthe contents of the floppy
86
The dataset--ready signal (DR) for the input/output device is
turnedoff. (The no file error or duplicate file error occurredon
the input/output device because aninvalidfile number, pro-
gramnumber, or file name was entered.
Youcanchangethenameof afilehavingaspecifiedfilenumber.
Procedurefor changingthefilename
2 Pressthe
PRGRM
functionkey.
3 Pressthe[FLOPPY] soft key.
4 Pressthe[RENAME] soft key.
5 Positionthecursor toFILE NO., enter thenumber of thefilewhose
namewill bechanged, thenpressthe INPUT key.
6 Positionthecursor toNAME, enter anewfilename, thenpressthe
INPUT key.
7 Pressthe[EXEC] soft key.
8 To return to the previously displayed screen without changing the
name, pressthe[CAN] soft key.
D Significant
digits
D Collation
ALARM
D Changingafilename
Procedure
478
RENAME
FI LE NO. = NAME=
NUM. S 0 T0101
21: 59: 53 EDI T
O0001 N0000
( METER) VOL
FI LE DI RECTORY
NO. FI LE NAME
0001 PARAMETER 87.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 87.1
0003 O0001 1.9
0004 O0021 7.1
0005 O0041 7.1
0006 O0615 5.8
0007 O0651 9.1
0008 O0601 7.1
0009 O0645 5.8
EXEC
CAN STOP
Usechannel 1or2foranI/Odevice. SetINTERFACEfor thedevice.
Notethat someI/Odevicescannot beusedevenif connected.
WhenusingthestandardMDI keys, enter afilenameasaddress +
value.
Limitations
OPERATION B--61394E/08 9. EDITING PROGRAMS
479
9
EDITINGPROGRAMS
Thischapter describeshowtoedit programsregisteredintheCNC.
Editingincludestheinsertion, modification, deletion, andreplacementof
words. Editingalsoincludesdeletionof theentireprogramandautomatic
insertion of sequence numbers. The extended part program editing
function can copy, move, and merge programs. This chapter also
describes program number search, word search, and address search,
whichareperformedbeforeeditingtheprogram.
1) Programnumber search:
2) Wordsearch:
3) Address search:
1) Inserting, altering, and deleting a word:
2) Replacing words and addresses:
3) Deleting blocks:
4) Copying, moving, and merging programs:
5) Deleting programs:
Searchfor part
of programto be
edited
Inserting, altering,
and deleting pro-
grams
Registration
Editing
Output
Execution
See Section9.3.
See Section 9.1.1.
See Section9.1.1.
See Sections 9.1.3 to 9.1.5.
See Section 9.6.6.
See Sections 9.2.
See Sections 9.6.1 and 9.6.5
See section 9.5.
General
OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS B--61394E/08
480
Thissectionoutlinestheprocedurefor inserting, modifying, anddeleting
awordinaprogramregisteredinmemory.
Procedurefor inserting, alteringanddeletingaword
1 Select EDITmode.
2 Pressfunction
PRGRM
key and display theprogramscreen.
3 Select aprogramtobeedited.
If aprogramtobeeditedisselected, performtheoperation4.
If a programto be edited is not selected, search for the program
number.
4 Searchfor awordtobemodified.
Scanmethod
Wordsearchmethod
5 Performanoperationsuchasaltering, inserting, or deletingaword.
Explanation
A wordisanaddressfollowedbyanumber. WithacustommacroB, the
concept of wordisambiguous.
Sotheeditingunit isconsideredhere.
Theeditingunitisaunitsubjecttoalterationor deletioninoneoperation.
Inonescanoperation, thecursor indicatesthestart of aneditingunit.
Aninsertionismadeafter aneditingunit.
Definitionof editingunit
(i) Programportionfromanaddresstoimmediately beforethenext
address
(ii) Anaddressisanalphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=,or; (EOB).
Accordingtothisdefinition, awordisaneditingunit.
The word word, when used in the description of editing, means an
editingunit accordingtotheprecisedefinition.
Toinsert or modify awordduringediting, thefollowingdataisentered.
Whenthestandardkeypanel is beingused
Oneword(asinglealphabetic character followedby anumeric value
or symbol) isentered.
EditingB withthestandardkeypanel
Evenif thestandardkey panel isbeingused, editingB canbeenabled
by specifyingbit 7of parameter 018accordingly. Twoor more
addressescanbeinput at onetime. If the INPUT key ispressedafter
asingleword(asinglealphabetic character followedby anumeric
valueor symbol) isinput, another wordcanbeinput. After all datahas
beenentered, presstheedit key tostart editing.
ToenableeditingB, notethefollowing:
9.1
INSERTING,
ALTERINGAND
DELETINGAWORD
D Conceptof wordand
editingunit
D Datainputduringediting
481
The INPUT key isusedtoidentify abreakpoint betweenwords.
A programcannot beinput or output whileaprogramisdisplayed.
Input or output aprogramontheprogramdirectory screen.
Input aprogramnumber asonewordcontainingaddressO.
Upto32characterscanbeenteredat onetime.
Eachtimethe
CAN
key ispressed, only themost--recently entered
character isdeleted.
Whenthefull keypanel is beingused
Twoor morewords, or adesiredcharacter string, canbeinput at one
time.
WARNING
The user cannot continue programexecution after altering,
inserting, or deleting data of the program by suspending
machining in progress by means of an operation such as a
single block stop or feed hold operation during program
execution. If such a modification is made, the programmay
not be executed exactly according to the contents of the
program displayed on the screen after machining is
resumed. So, when the contents of memory are to be
modified by part programediting, be sure to enter the reset
state or reset the systemupon completion of editing before
executing the program.
482
A wordcanbesearchedfor bymerely movingthecursor throughthetext
(scanning), by wordsearch, or by addresssearch.
Procedurefor scanningaprogram
1 Pressthecursor key
Thecursor movesforwardwordby wordonthescreen; thecursor is
displayedat aselectedword. Thecursor ispositionedtotheaddress
of theselectedword.
2 Pressthecursor key
Thecursor movesbackwardwordby wordonthescreen; the
cursor isdisplayedat aselectedword.
Example) WhenZ1250.0isscanned
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
;
3 Holding down the cursor key or scans words
continuously.
4 Pressing thepagekey displays thenext pageand searchesfor
thefirst wordof thepage.
5 Pressingthepagekey displaysthepreviouspageandsearches
for thefirst wordof thepage.
6 Holding down thepage key or displays one pageafter
another.
9.1.1
WordSearch
483
Procedurefor searchingaword
Example)of Searchingfor S12
PROGRAM
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
N1234is being
searchedfor/
scannedcurrently.
S12is searched
for.
1 Key inaddress S .
2 Key in 1 2 .
S12cannot besearchedfor if only S1iskeyedin.
S09cannot besearchedfor by keyinginonly S9.
Tosearchfor S09, besuretokey inS09.
3 Pressingthecursor key startssearchoperation.
Uponcompletionof searchoperation, thecursor isdisplayedat
S of S12. Pressingthecursor key rather thanthecursor
key performssearchoperationinthereversedirection.
Procedurefor searchinganaddress
Example)of Searchingfor M03
PROGRAM
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
N1234is being
searchedfor/
scannedcurrently.
M03is searched
for.
1 Key inaddress
M
.
2 Pressthecursor key .
Uponcompletionof searchoperation, thecursor isdisplayedat
M of M03. Pressingthe key rather thanthe key
performssearchoperationinthereversedirection.
484
Alarm
Alarmnumber Description
71 The wordor address beingsearchedfor was not found.
Thecursor canbejumpedtothetopof aprogram. Thisfunctioniscalled
heading theprogrampointer. Thissectiondescribesthetwomethodsfor
headingtheprogrampointer.
Procedurefor HeadingaProgram
1 Press
RESET
when the programscreen is selected in EDIT mode.
Whenthecursor hasreturnedtothestartof theprogram, thecontents
of theprogramaredisplayedfromitsstart onthescreen.
1 Select AUTOor EDITmode.
2 Pressfunction
PROG
key and display theprogram.
3 Presstheaddresskey O .
9.1.2
HeadingaProgram
Method1
Method2
485
Procedurefor insertingaword
1 Searchfor or scanthewordimmediatelybeforeawordtobeinserted.
2 Key inanaddresstobeinserted.
3 Key indata.
4 Pressthe
INSRT
key.
Exampleof InsertingT15
1 Searchfor or scanZ1250.0.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
;
Z1250.0is
searchedfor/
scanned.
2 Key in T 1 5 .
3 Pressthe
INSRT
key.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0 T15 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
T15is inserted.
9.1.3
InsertingaWord
Procedure
486
Procedurefor alteringaword
1 Searchfor or scanawordtobealtered.
2 Key inanaddresstobeinserted.
3 Key indata.
4 Pressthe
ALTER
key.
Exampleof changingT15toM15
1 Searchfor or scanT15.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0 T15
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
;
T15is searched
for/scanned.
2 Key in
M 1 5 .
3 Pressthe
ALTER
key.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0 Z1250.0 M15 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
T15is changedto
M15.
9.1.4
AlteringaWord
Procedure
487
Procedurefor deletingaword
1 Searchfor or scanawordtobedeleted.
2 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Exampleof deletingX100.0
1 Searchfor or scanX100.0.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 X100.0
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
X100.0is
searchedfor/
scanned.
Z1250.0 M15 ;
2 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 Z1250.0 M15 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
X100.0is deleted.
9.1.5
DeletingaWord
Procedure
488
A block or blockscanbedeletedinaprogram.
The procedure below deletes a block up to its EOB code; the cursor
advancestotheaddressof thenext word.
Procedurefor deletingablock
1 Searchfor or scanaddressN for ablock tobedeleted.
2 Key in
EOB
.
3 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Exampleof deletingablockof No.1234
1 Searchfor or scanN1234.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 Z1250.0 M15 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
N1234is
searchedfor/
scanned.
2 Key in
EOB
.
3 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
Block containing
N1234has been
deleted.
9.2
DELETING
BLOCKS
9.2.1
DeletingaBlock
Procedure
489
Theblocksfromthecurrentlydisplayedwordtotheblockwithaspecified
sequencenumber canbedeleted.
Procedurefor deletingmultipleblocks
1 Searchfor or scanawordinthefirstblock of aportiontobedeleted.
2 Key inaddress N .
3 Key inthesequencenumber for thelast block of theportiontobe
deleted.
4 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Exampleof deletingblocks fromablockcontainingN01234toablockcontainingN56789
1 Searchfor or scanN1234.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 Z1250.0 M15 ;
S12 ;
N56789 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
N1234is
searchedfor/
scanned.
2 Key in N 5 6 7 8
.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
N1234 Z1250.0 M15 ;
S12 ;
N5678 M03 ;
M02 ;
%
Underlined
part is de-
leted.
3 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Program
O0050 N1234
O0050 ;
M02 ;
%
Blocks fromblock
containingN1234
to block contain-
ingN5678have
beendeleted.
9.2.2
DeletingMultiple
Blocks
Procedure
490
Whenmemory holdsmultipleprograms, aprogramcanbesearchedfor.
Therearetwomethodsasfollows.
Procedurefor programnumber search
1 Select EDITor AUTOmode.
2 Press
PRGRM
key todisplay theprogramscreen.
3 Key inaddress O .
4 Key inaprogramnumber tobesearchedfor.
6 Uponcompletionof searchoperation, theprogramnumber searched
for isdisplayedintheupper--right corner of theCRT screen
If theprogramisnot found, P/S alarmNo. 71occurs.
1 Select EDITor AUTOmode.
2 Press
PRGRM
3 Key inaddress O .
Inthiscase, thenext programinthedirectory issearchedfor .
No. Contents
59
The programwiththe selectednumber cannot be searched
duringexternal programnumber search.
71
The specifiedprogramnumber was not foundduring
programnumber search.
9.3
PROGRAMNUMBER
SEARCH
Method1
Method2
491
Programsregisteredinmemorycanbedeleted,either oneprogrambyone
programor all at once. Also, Morethanoneprogramcanbedeletedby
specifyingarange.
A programregisteredinmemory canbedeleted.
Procedurefor deletingoneprogram
1 Select theEDITmode.
2 Press
PRGRM
3 Key inaddress O .
4 Key inadesiredprogramnumber.
5 Pressthe
DELET
key.
Theprogramwiththeenteredprogramnumber isdeleted.
All programsregisteredinmemory canbedeleted.
Procedurefor deletingall programs
2 Press
PRGRM
3 Key inaddress O .
4 Key in--9999.
5 Pressedit key
DELET
todeleteall programs.
9.4
DELETING
PROGRAMS
9.4.1
DeletingOneProgram
9.4.2
DeletingAll Programs
492
Programswithinaspecifiedrangeinmemory aredeleted.
Procedurefor deletingmorethanoneprogrambyspecifyingarange
2 Press
PRGRM
3 Enter therangeof programnumberstobedeletedwithaddressand
numeric keysinthefollowingformat:
OXXXX,OYYYY
whereXXXX isthestartingnumber of theprogramstobedeleted
andYYYY istheendingnumber of theprogramstobedeleted.
4 Pressedit key
DELET
todeleteprogramsNo. XXXX toNo. YYYY.
ThisfunctionisasuablewhenMDI full key isused.
9.4.3
DeletingMorethanOne
Programby Specifyinga
Range
Restrictions
493
Withtheextendedpartprogrameditingfunction, theoperationsdescribed
below can be performed using soft keys for programs that have been
registeredinmemory.
Followingeditingoperationsareavailable:
All or part of aprogramcanbecopiedor movedtoanother program.
Oneprogramcanbemergedat freepositionintoother programs.
A specifiedwordor addressinaprogramcanbereplacedwithanother
wordor address.
9.5
EXTENDEDPART
PROGRAMEDITING
FUNCTION
494
A newprogramcanbecreatedby copyingaprogram.
A
Oxxxx
A
Oxxxx
After copy
A
Oyyyy
Copy
Before copy
Fig. 9.5.1 CopyinganEntireProgram
InFig. 9.5.1, theprogramwithprogramnumber xxxxiscopiedtoanewly
created programwith programnumber yyyy. The programcreated by
copy operation is thesameas theoriginal programexcept theprogram
number.
Procedureof copyinganentireprogram
1 Enter theEDITmode.
2 Pressfunction
PRGRM
3 Pressthecontinuousmenukey .
4 Presssoft key [EX-EDT].
5 Check that thescreenfor theprogramtobecopiedisselected
andpresssoft key [COPY].
6 Presssoft key [ALL].
7 Enter thenumber of thenewprogram(withonly numeric keys)
andpressthe INPUT key.
8 Presssoft key [EXEC].
9.5.1
CopyinganEntire
Program
Continuous menukey
0 9
Numeric keys
~
(EX--EDT)
COPY
ALL
EXEC
495
A newprogramcanbecreatedby copyingpart of aprogram.
B
Oxxxx Oxxxx
After copy
B
Oyyyy
Copy
Before copy
A
C
B
A
C
Fig. 9.5.2 CopyingPartof aProgram
InFig. 9.5.2, part Bof theprogramwithprogramnumber xxxx iscopied
to anewly created programwith programnumber yyyy. Theprogram
whichNo.isxxxx remainsunchangedafter copy operation.
Procedurefor copyingpartof aprogram
1 Performsteps1to5insubsection9.5.1.
2 Movethecursor tothestart of therangetobecopiedandpresssoft
key [CRSR~].
3 Movethecursor totheendof therangetobecopiedandpresssoft
key [~CRSR] or [~BTTM] (inthelatter case, therangetotheendof
theprogramiscopiedregardlessof thepositionof thecursor).
9.5.2
CopyingPart
of aProgram
CRSR
A
0 9 ~
~BTTM
EXEC
Numeric keys
~CRSR
496
A newprogramcanbecreatedby movingpart of aprogram.
B
Oxxxx Oxxxx
After copy
B
Oyyyy
Copy
Before copy
A
C
A
C
Fig. 9.5.3 MovingPartof aProgram
InFig. 9.5.3, part B of theprogramwithprogramnumber xxxx ismoved
toanewly createdprogramwithprogramnumber yyyy; partB isdeleted
fromtheprogramwithprogramnumber xxxx.
Procedurefor movingpartof aprogram
2 Check that thescreenfor theprogramtobemovedisselectedand
presssoft key [MOVE].
3 Movethecursor tothestart of therangetobemovedandpress
soft key [CRSR~].
4 Movethecursor totheendof therangetobemovedandpresssoft
key [~CRSR] or [~BTTM] (inthelatter case, therangetotheendof
theprogramiscopiedregardlessof thepositionof thecursor).
9.5.3
MovingPartof a
Program
CRSRA
EXEC
0 9
Numeric keys ~
ACRSR ABTTM
MOVE
497
Another programcan be inserted at an arbitrary position in thecurrent
program.
Oxxxx
Before merge
B
Oyyyy
Merge A
Oxxxx
After merge
B
Oyyyy
B
A
C
C
Merge
location
Fig. 9.5.4 Mergingaprogramataspecifiedlocation
InFig. 9.5.4, theprogramwith programnumber XXXX is mergedwith
the program with program number YYYY. The OYYYY program
remainsunchangedafter mergeoperation.
Procedurefor mergingaprogram
2 Check that thescreenfor theprogramtobeeditedisselectedand
presssoft key [MERGE].
3 Movethecursor tothepositionat whichanother programistobe
insertedandpresssoft key [~CRSR] or [~BTTM] (inthelatter
case, theendof thecurrent programisdisplayed).
4 Enter thenumber of theprogramtobeinserted(withonly numeric
keys) andpressthe INPUT key.
Theprogramwiththenumber specifiedinstep4isinsertedbefore
thecursor positionedinstep3.
9.5.4
MergingaProgram
EXEC
0 9 ~
ACRSR ABTTM
MERGE
Numeric keys
498
Explanations
Thesettingof aneditingrangestart pointwith[CRSR~]canbechanged
freely until aneditingrangeendpoint isset with[~CRSR] or [~BTTM].
If anediting rangestart point is set after anediting rangeend point, the
editingrangemust bereset startingwithastart point.
Thesettingof aneditingrangestartpointandendpointremainsvaliduntil
anoperationisperformedtoinvalidatethesetting.
Oneof thefollowingoperationsinvalidatesasetting:
Anedit operationother thanaddresssearch, wordsearch/scan, and
searchfor thestart of aprogramisperformedafter astart point or end
point isset.
Processingisreturnedtooperationselectionafter astart point or end
point isset.
In copying programandmoving program, if [EXEC] is pressedwithout
specifying a programnumber after an editing rangeend point is set, a
programwith programnumber O0000 is registered as awork program.
ThisO0000programhasthefollowingfeatures:
Theprogramcanbeeditedinthesameway asageneral program.
(Donot runtheprogram.)
If a copy or move operation is newly performed, the previous
informationisdeletedatexecutiontime, andnewlyset information(all
or part of the program) is re--registered. (In merge operation, the
previous information is not deleted.) However, the program, when
selected for foreground operation, cannot be re--registered in the
background. (A BP/S140 alarmis raised.) When the programis
re--registered, afreeareaisproduced. Deletesuchafreeareawiththe
RESET
key.
Whentheprogrambecomesunnecessary, deletetheprogramby a
normal editingoperation.
Whenthesystemiswaitingfor aprogramnumber tobeentered,
noedit operationcanbeperformed.
Restrictions
If aprogramnumber is specified by 5 or moredigits, aformat error is
generated.
9.5.5
Supplementary
Explanationfor
Copying, Movingand
Merging
D Settinganeditingrange
D Withoutspecifyinga
programnumber
D Editingwhenthesystem
waitingfor aprogram
number tobeentered
D Number of digits for
programnumber
499
Alarm
Alarmno. Contents
70
101
Memorybecameinsufficient whilecopying orinserting
a program. Copy or insertion is terminated.
Thepowerwasinterruptedduringcopying, moving, or
insertingaprogramandmemory usedfor editingmust
be cleared. When this alarmoccurs, press the key
while pressing function key .
Only the programbeing edited is deleted.
PROG RESET
500
Replaceoneor morespecifiedwords.
Replacement canbeappliedtoall occurrencesor just oneoccurrenceof
specifiedwordsor addressesintheprogram.
Procedurefor hangeof words or addresses
2 Presssoft key [CHANGE].
3 Enter thewordor addresstobereplaced.
4 Presssoft key [BEFORE].
5 Enter thenewwordor address.
6 Presssoft key [AFTER].
7 Presssoft key [EXEC] toreplaceall thespecifiedwordsor
addressesafter thecursor.
Presssoft key [1-EXEC] tosearchfor andreplacethefirst
occurrenceof thespecifiedwordor adressafter thecursor.
Presssoft key [SKIP] toonly searchfor thefirst occurrenceof the
specifiedwordor addressafter thecursor.
9.5.6
Replacementof
Words andAddresses
EXEC
BEFORE
CHANGE
AFTER
1--EXEC SKIP
501
Examples
[CHANGE] X 1 0 0
[BEFORE] Z 2 0 0
[AFTER][EXEC]
[CHANGE] X 1 0 0 Z 2 0 0
[BEFORE] X 3 0
[AFTER][EXEC]
[CHANGE]
I F [BEFORE]
W H I L E [AFT
ER] [EXEC]
[CHANGE] X [BEFOR]
,
C 1 0
[AFTER][EXEC]
Explanation
ThefollowingcustommacroB wordsarereplaceable:
IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, BPRNT, DPRINT, POPEN, PCLOS
Theabbreviationsof custommacrowordscanbespecified.
When abbreviations are used, however, the screen displays the
abbreviations as they arekey input, even after soft key [BEFORE] and
[AFTER] arepressed.
Restrictions
Upto15characterscanbespecifiedforwordsbeforeor afterreplacement.
(Sixteenor morecharacterscannot bespecified.)
Wordsbeforeor afterreplacementmuststartwithacharacterrepresenting
anaddress.(A format error occurs.)
D ReplaceX100withZ200
D ReplaceX100Z200with
X30
D ReplaceIF withWHILE
D ReplaceXwith,C10
D Replacingcustom
macros
D Thenumber of
characters for
replacement
D Thecharacters for
replacement
502
Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro B programs are modified,
inserted, or deletedbasedoneditingunits.
CustommacroB wordscanbeenteredinabbreviatedform.
Full key isrequiredfor editionof custommacrosB.
Explanations
When editingacustommacro B already entered, theuser can movethe
cursor toeacheditingunit thatstartswithany of thefollowingcharacters
andsymbols:
(a) Address
(b) #locatedat thestart of theleft sideof asubstitutionstatement
(c) /, (,=, and;
(d) First character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, POPEN, BPRNT,
DPRNT andPCLOS
OntheCRT screen, ablank isplacedbeforeeachof theabovecharacters
andsymbols.
(Example) Headpositionswherethecursor isplaced
N001X--#100;
#1=123;
N002/2X[12/#3] ;
N003X--SQRT[#3/3*[#4+1]] ;
N004X--#2Z#1;
N005#5=1+2--#10;
IF[#1NE0] GOTO10;
WHILE[#2LE5] DO1;
#[200+#2] =#2*10;
#2=#2+1;
END1;
WhenacustommacroBwordisalteredorinserted, thefirsttwocharacters
or morecanreplacetheentireword.
Namely,
WHILEWH GOTOGO XORXO ANDAN
SINSI COSCO TANTA ATANAT
SQRTSQ ABSAB BCDBC BINBI
FIXFI FUPFU ROUNDRO ENDEN
POPENPO BPRNTBP DPRNTDP PCLOSPC
(Example) Keyingin
WH [AB [#2] LE RO[#3] ]
hasthesameeffect as
WHILE [ABS [#2] LE ROUND[#3] ]
Theprogramisalsodisplayedinthisway.
9.6
EDITINGOFCUSTOM
MACROSB
D Editingunit
D Abbreviations of custom
macroB word
503
Editingaprogramwhileexecutinganother programiscalledbackground
editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing
(foregroundediting).
Duringbackgroundediting, all programscannot bedeletedat once.
Procedurefor backgroundediting
1 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
, display programscreen.
2 Presssoft key at theright side, andpresssoft key [BG-EDT].
The background editing screen is displayed (PROGRAM
(BG--EDIT) isdisplayedat thetopleft of thescreen).
3 Edit aprogramonthebackgroundeditingscreeninthesamewayas
for ordinary programediting.
4 After editingiscompleted, presssoft key [BG-EDT].
Explanation
Alarms that may occur during background editing do not affect
foreground operation. Conversely, alarms that may occur during
foreground operation do not affect background editing. In background
editing, if an attempt is madeto edit aprogramselected for foreground
operation, a BP/S alarm(No. 140) is raised. On the other hand, if an
attempt is made to select a programsubjected to background editing
duringforegroundoperation(bymeansof subprogramcallingorprogram
number searchoperation usinganexternal signal), aP/Salarm(Nos. 059,
078) is raised in foreground operation. As with foreground program
editing, P/Salarmsoccur inbackgroundediting. However, todistinguish
thesealarmsfromforegroundalarms, BP/S isdisplayedinthedatainput
lineonthebackgroundeditingscreen.
9.7
BACKGROUND
EDITING
D Alarms during
backgroundediting
504
CAUTION
1 If the available part programstorage is 80 mor less, free
space in memory is used for background editing. A
programto be subjected to background editing is copied
into the free area in memory, then the original program
is deleted. Subsequently, editing starts.
Background editing can be executed if the part program
storage has sufficient free area to which the target
program can be copied and if program registration is
allowed in terms of number. If background editing is
repeated, the number of deleted areas will increase.
To use these deleted areas efficiently, memory must be
reorganized.
2 If the available part programstorage is 120 mor more,
background editing can be executed while leaving the
registered programs as is. Such editing may create an
unused area in memory. The unused area can be
deleted by reorganizing the memory however.
3 If the reset key is pressed to abandon programinput or
output in background editing, the machining in the
foreground will also be halted. To input or output a
programin the background, therefore, use the soft keys.
To halt the input or output, press the [STOP] soft key.
4 If a reset by M02/M30 of the machining programin the
foreground is executed during programinput or output in
background editing, program input or output is halted.
Program input or output can be prevented from being
halted by the reset in the foreground if bit 2 of parameter
076 is specified accordingly.
5 In background editing, program input or output by the
external activation signal (MINP) or input/output unit
external control is inhibited.
505
If the available part program storage is 120 m or more, or if the
backgroundeditingfunction issupported, repeatedprogrameditingwill
create many small, unused areas in memory. Reorganizing memory
arrangestheseunusedareasintoasingle, contiguousareathatcanbeused
by programs.
Procedurefor ReorganigingMemory
Presstheemergencystop, external reset, or reset key. Theprocedure
for reorganizingmemory isautomatically started.
1 Select EDITmode.
2 Pressthe
PRGRM
key todisplay theprogram.
3 Pressthe[LIB] soft key.
4 Pressthe[REORGANIZE] soft key.
CAUTION
1 One memory is reorganized, the systemsearches for the
beginning of the selected program and the cursor is
returned to that point.
2 If the power is turned off during the memory
reorganization, alarm 101 occurs when the power is
subsequently turned on. Before turning the power off
after resetting an alarm, first check whether memory
reorganization has been completed. While memory
reorganization is being performed, EDIT blinks at the
bottomright corner of the screen.
3 As described in procedure 1, above, the memory
reorganization procedure is automatically started when
a reset is performed. Memory reorganization can be
prevented from being started by a reset if bit 0 of
parameter 056 is specified accordingly.
4 Memory reorganization cannot be executed during
background editing.
9.8
REORGANIGING
MEMORY
Procedure1
(RESET key)
Procedure2
(softkey)
OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS B--61394E/08
506
10
CREATINGPROGRAMS
Programscanbecreatedusingany of thefollowingmethods:
MDI keyboard
PROGRAMMING IN TEACH IN MODE
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING INPUT WITH GRAPHIC
FUNCTION
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION
AUTOMATIC PROGRAM PREPARATION DEVICE (FANUC
SYSTEM P)
Thischapter describescreating programsusing theMDI panel, TEACH
IN mode, andconversational programmingwith graphic function. This
chapter alsodescribestheautomatic insertionof sequencenumbers.
OPERATION B--61394E/08 10. CREATING PROGRAMS
507
Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the programediting
functionsdescribedinChapter 9.
Procedurefor CreatingPrograms UsingtheMDI Panel
2 Pressthe
PRGRM
key, anddisplay programscreen.
3 Pressaddresskey O andenter theprogramnumber.
4 Pressthe
INSRT
key.
5 Createa programusing theprogramediting functions described in
Chapter 9.
Explanation
Commentscanbewrittenbyfull keyinaprogramusingthecontrol in/out
codes.
Example)O0001(FANUC SERIES 0) ;
M08 (COOLANT ON) ;
Whenthe
INSRT
key ispressedafter thecontrol--out code(,
comments, andcontrol--incode) havebeentyped, thetyped
commentsareregistered.
Whenthe
INSRT
key ispressedmidway throughcomments, toenter
therest of commentslater, thedatatypedbeforethe
INSERT
key ispressedmay not becorrectly registered(not entered,
modified, or lost) becausethedataissubject toanentry check which
isperformedinnormal editing.
Notethefollowingtoenter acomment:
Control--incode) cannot beregisteredby itself.
Commentsenteredafter the
INSERT
key ispressedmust not beginwith
anumber, space, or addressO.
If anabbreviationfor amacroisentered, theabbreviationisconverted
intoamacrowordandregistered(seeSectionIII--9.7).
AddressOandsubsequent numbers, or aspacecanbeenteredbut are
omittedwhenregistered.
10.1
CREATING
PROGRAMSUSING
THE MDI PANEL
Procedure
D Comments inaprogram
508
Sequencenumbers can beautomatically inserted in each block when a
programiscreatedusingtheMDI keysintheEDIT mode.
Set theincrement for sequencenumbersinparameter 0550.
Procedurefor automatic insertionof sequencenumbers
1 Set 1for SEQUENCE (seesubjection11.4.3).
3 Press
PRGRM
4 Searchfor or register thenumber of aprogramtobeeditedandmove
thecursor totheEOB (;) of theblock after whichautomaticinsertion
of sequencenumbersisstarted.
Whenaprogramnumber isregisteredandanEOB (;) isenteredwith
the
INSRT
key, sequencenumbers areautomatically insertedstarting
with0. Changetheinitial value, if required, accordingtostep10, then
skiptostep7.
5 Pressaddresskey N andenter theinitial valueof N.
6 Press
INSRT
.
7 Enter eachwordof ablock.
8 Press
EOB
.
9 Press
INSRT
. TheEOBisregisteredinmemoryandsequencenumbers
areautomaticallyinserted. For example, if theinitial valueof Nis10
and the parameter for the increment is set to 10, N20 inserted and
10.2
AUTOMATIC
INSERTIONOF
SEQUENCE
NUMBERS
Procedure
509
displayedbelowthelinewhereanewblock isspecified.
PROGRAM O0040 N0020
O0040 ;
N10 G50 X0 Z0 ;
N20
%
< S 0 T0101
19: 24: 50 EDI T
10 Intheexampleabove, if N20isnot necessary inthenext block,
pressingthe
DELET
key after N20isdisplayeddeletesN20.
Toinsert N100inthenext block insteadof N20, enter N100and
press
ALTER
after N20isdisplayed. N100isregisteredandinitial
valueischangedto100.
510
When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN J OG mode and
TEACHINHANDLEmodeareadded. Inthesemodes, amachineposition
along the X, Z, and Y axes obtained by manual operation is stored in
memory asaprogrampositiontocreateaprogram.
Thewordsother thanX, Z, andY, whichincludeO, N, G, R, F, C, M, S,
T, P, Q, andEOB, canbestoredin memory in thesameway as inEDIT
mode.
Procedurefor CreatingPrograms inTEACHINMode
Theproceduredescribed belowcanbeusedto storeamachineposition
alongtheX, Z, andY axes.
1 Select theTEACHINJ OGmodeor TEACHINHANDLE mode.
2 Movethetool tothedesiredpositionwithjogor handle.
3 Press
PRGRM
key todisplay theprogramscreen. Searchfor or register
the number of a programto be edited and move the cursor to the
position where the machine position along each axis is to be
registered(inserted).
4 Key inaddress X .
5 Press the
INSRT
key. Then a machine position along theX axis is
storedinmemory.
(Example) X10.521 Machineposition(for mminput)
X10521 Datastoredinmemory
6 Similarly, key in Z , then press the
INSRT
key. Then amachine
positionalongtheZaxisisstoredinmemory. Further, key in
Y
,
thenpressthe
INSRT
key. ThenamachinepositionalongtheY axisis
storedinmemory.
All coordinatesstoredusingthismethodareabsolutecoordinates.
10.3
CREATING
PROGRAMSIN
TEACHINMODE
511
Examples
O1234;
N1G50X100000Z200000;
N2G00X14784Z8736;
N3G01Z103480F300;
N4M02;
X
Z
P1
P2
(100.0,200.0)
(14.784, 103.480)
P0
(14.784,8.736)
1Set thesettingdataSEQUENCE NO. to1(on). (Theincremental
valueparameter (No. 0550) isassumedtobe1.)
2Select theTEACHINHANDLE mode.
3Makepositioningat positionP0by themanual pulsegenerator.
4Select theprogramscreen.
5Enter programnumber O1234asfollows:
O 1 2 3 4
INSRT
Thisoperationregistersprogramnumber O1234inmemory.
Next, pressthefollowingkeys:
EOB INSRT
AnEOB (;) isenteredafter programnumber O1234. Becauseno
number isspecifiedafter N, sequencenumbersareautomatically
insertedfor N0andthefirst block (N1) isregisteredinmemory.
6Enter theP0machinepositionfor dataof thefirst block asfollows:
G 5 0
INSRT
X
INSRT
Z
INSRT EOB INSRT
ThisoperationregistersG50X100000Z200000; inmemory. The
automatic sequencenumber insertionfunctionregistersN2of the
secondblock inmemory.
7Positionthetool at P1withthemanual pulsegenerator.
8Enter theP1machinepositionfor dataof thesecondblock asfollows:
G 0 0
INSRT
X
INSRT
Z
INSRT EOB INSRT
ThisoperationregistersG00X14784Z8736; inmemory. The
automatic sequencenumber insertionfunctionregistersN3of the
thirdblock inmemory.
9 Positionthetool at P2withthemanual pulsegenerator.
512
10 Enter theP2machinepositionfor dataof thethirdblock asfollows:
G 0 1
INSRT
Z
INSRT
F 3 0 0
INSRT EOB INSRT
ThisoperationregistersG01Z103480F300; inmemory.
Theautomaticsequencenumber insertionfunctionregistersN4of the
fourthblock inmemory.
11 Register M02; inmemory asfollows:
M 0 2
INSRT EOB INSRT
N5indicatingthefifthblockisstoredinmemoryusingtheautomatic
sequencenumber insertionfunction. Pressthe
DELET
keytodeleteit.
Thiscompletestheregistrationof thesampleprogram.
Explanations
Thecontentsof memorycanbecheckedintheTEACHINmodebyusing
thesameprocedureasinEDITmode.
PROGRAM O0040 N0020
( RELATI VE) ( ABSOLUTE)
U 14. 784 X 14. 784
W 103. 408 Z 103. 408
H 0. 000 C 0. 000
V 0. 000 Y 0. 000
O1234 ;
N10 G50 X100. Z200. ;
N20 G00 X14784 Z8736 ;
N30 G01 Z103408 F300 ;
N40 M02 ;
%
ADRS. S 0 T0101
19: 35: 36 TJ OG
[ PRGRM] [ LI B ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Whenavalueiskeyedinafter keyinginaddress X , Z , or
Y
,
then the
INSRT
key ispressed, thevaluekeyedin for amachineposition
is added for registration. This operation is useful to correct amachine
positionby key--inoperation.
Commands to be entered before and after a machine position must be
enteredbeforeandafter themachinepositionis registered, by usingthe
sameoperationasprogrameditinginEDITmode.
D Checkingcontents of the
memory
D Registeringaposition
withcompensation
D Registeringcommands
other thanposition
commands
513
WhenaprogramiscreatedinEDIT mode, theGcodemenuisdisplayed
onthescreen.
Procedurefor MenuProgramming
1 Select EDIT modethen pressthe
PRGRM
function key. Theprogram
screenisdisplayed.
2 Press theaddress key
G
. TheG codemenu is displayed inthe
lower half of thescreen.For example, if Giskeyedinafter inserting
N30, thefollowingGcodemenuisdisplayed:
PROGRAM O0040 N0020
O100 ;
N10 G50 X100. Z0 ;
N20 G00 X25. 0 Z- 5. 0 ;
N30
%
G00 : POSI TI ONI NG
G01 : LI NEAR I PL
G02 : CI RCULAR I PL CW
G03 : CI RCULAR I PL CCW
G04 : DWELL
G < S 0 T0101
19: 47: 26 EDI T
3 TheGcodemenuafter G05canbesequentiallyindicatedbypushing
thepagekey.
10.4
MENU
PROGRAMMING
514
4 WhenaGcodeselectedfromthemenuisinput, Thestandardformat
of theoneblock correspondingtotheGcodeisindicated.
For example, when selecting G01, key in 0 and 1, and then press
INSRT
key. G01isinserted tothememory as shownbelow, andthe
standardformat of theG01block isindicatedonthescreen.
PROGRAM O0040 N0020
O100 ;
N10 G50 X100. Z0 ;
N20 G00 X125. Z- 5. ;
N30 G01
%
G01 X( U) - - - Z( W) - - - F- - - M- - - S- - - T- - -
< S 0 T0101
19: 47: 57 EDI T
5 Observingthisformat, enter anaddressandnumericvalue, thenpress
the
INSRT
key. Repeatthisstepasmany timesasnecessarytoinserta
block. If thefollowingiskeyedin, for example:
X 3 0 .
INSRT
Z -- 6 0 .
INSRT
F 5 0 0
INSRT
T 1 2
EOB INSRT
thefollowingscreenisdisplayed:
PROGRAM O0040 N0020
N10 G50 X100. Z0 ;
N20 G00 X25. Z- 5. ;
N30 G01 X30. Z- 60. F500 T12 ;
N40
%
< S 0 T0101
19: 49: 38 EDI T
515
Programs can becreated block after block on theconversational screen
whiledisplayingtheGcodemenu.
Blocksinaprogramcanbemodified, inserted, ordeletedusingtheGcode
menuandconversational screen.
Procedurefor Conversational ProgrammingwithGraphic Function
2 Press
PRGRM
. If no program is registered, the following screen is
displayed. If aprogramisregistered, theprogramcurrentlyselectedis
displayed.
PROGRAM O0000N0000
< S 0 T0101
19: 50: 33 EDI T
3 Keyintheprogramnumber of aprogramtoberegisteredafterkeying
in address O, then press
INSRT
. For example, when a programwith
program number 100 is to be registered, key in
O 1 0 0
, then press
INSRT
. This registers a new
programO0100.
4 Pressthe[C.A.P] soft key. ThefollowingGcodemenu isdisplayed
onthescreen.
If soft keysdifferent fromthoseshowninstep2aredisplayed, press
themenureturnkey todisplay thecorrect soft keys.
10.5
CONVERSATIONAL
PROGRAMMING
WITHGRAPHIC
FUNCTION
Procedure1
Creatingaprogram
516
PROGRAM O0100 N0000
G01 : LI NEAR I PL.
G02 : CI RCULAR I PL. CW
G03 : CI RCULAR I PL. CCW
G04 : DWELL
G10 : OFFSET VALUE SETTI NG <0>
G20 : I NCH
G21 : METRI C
G22 : STORED STOROKE CHECK ON <0>
G23 : STORED STOROKE CHECK OFF <0>
G25 : SPI NDLE SPEED DETECT OFF
G26 : SPI NDLE SPEED DETECT ON
ADRS.
19: 52: 32 EDI T
[ MENU ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
5 Key in theG codecorresponding to a function to beprogrammed.
When thepositioning function is desired, for example, the G code
menuliststhefunctionwiththeGcodeG00. Sokey inG00. If the
screendoesnotindicateafunctiontobeprogrammed, pressthepage
key to display the next G code menu screen. Repeat this
operationuntil adesiredfunctionappears. If adesiredfunctionisnot
aGcode, key innodata.
6 Pressthesoftkey[MENU]todisplayadetailedscreenfor akeyedinG
code. Thefigurebelowshowsanexampleof detailedscreenforG00.
PROGRAM O0100 N0000
G00 G G G
_X U
Z W
C H
M
S
T
B
;
19: 56: 25 EDI T
[ G. MENU ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
( X, Z)
W
U
X
Z
Whennokeysarepressed, thestandarddetailsscreenisdisplayed.
517
PROGRAM O0100 N0000
STANDARD FORMAT
_G G G G
X U
Z W
A C
F H
I K
P Q
R M
S T
;
19: 57: 38 EDI T
[ G. MENU ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
7 Movethecursor totheblock tobemodifiedontheprogramscreen.
8 Enter numericdatabypressingthenumerickeysandpress INPUT key.
Thiscompletestheinput of onedataitem.
9 Repeat thisoperationuntil all datarequiredfor theenteredGcodeis
entered.
10 Press the
INSRT
key. This completes theregistration of data of one
blockinprogrammemory. Onthescreen, theGcodemenuscreenis
displayed, allowingtheuser toenter datafor another block. Repeat
theprocedurestartingwith5asrequired.
11 After registeringall programs, pressthe key(Retarnmenukey)
at the left side. The registered programs are converted to the
conversational format anddisplayed.
12 Pressthe
RESET
key toreturntotheprogramhead.
1 Movethecursor to theblock to bemodified ontheprogramscreen
andpressthe[C.A.P]soft key. Or, pressthe[C.A.P] softkey firstto
display theconversational screen, thenpressthe or page
key until theblock tobemodifiedisdisplayed.
2 Whendataother thanaGcodeistobealtered, justmovethecursorto
thedataandkey inadesiredvalue, thenpress INPUT key.
3 WhenaGcodeistobealtered, pressthesoftkey[G.MENU]. Thenthe
Gcodemenuappears. SelectadesiredGcode, thenkeyinthevalue.
For example, to specify a cutting feed, since the G code menu
indicates G01, key in G01. Then press thesoft key [MENU]. The
detailedscreenof theGcodeisdisplayed, soenter thedata.
4 After dataischangedcompletely, pressthe
ALTER
key. Thisoperation
replacesanentireblock of aprogram.
Procedure2
Modifyingablock
518
1 Ontheconversational screen, displaytheblockimmediately beforea
newblock istobeinserted, by usingthepagekeys. Ontheprogram
screen, move the cursor with the page keys and cursor keys to
immediately beforethepoint whereanewblock istobeinserted.
2 Pressthesoftkey[G.MENU]todisplaytheGcodemenu. Thenenter
newblock data.
3 Wheninputof oneblockof dataiscompletedinstep2, pressthe
INSRT
key. Thisoperationinsertsablock of data.
1 On theconversational screen, display thecontents of ablock to be
deleted, thenpressthe
DELET
key.
2 The contents of the block displayed are deleted from program
memory. Then thecontents of thenext block aredisplayed on the
conversational screen.
Procedure3
Insertingablock
Procedure4
Deletingablock
OPERATION B--61394E/08 11. SETTING ANDDISPLAYING DATA
519
11
SETTINGANDDISPLAYINGDATA
TooperateaCNCmachinetool, variousdatamustbesetontheCRT/MDI
panel. Theoperatorcanmonitorthestateof operationwithdatadisplayed
duringoperation.
Thischapter describeshowtodisplay andset datafor eachfunction.
Thischapter describestheprocedure, assumingthatthesoftkeysareused
toselectadesiredchapter. If thesoftkeysarenotsupported, pressthekey
having the equivalent function two or moretimes to select thedesired
chapter.
The screen transition for when each function key on theMDI panel is
pressedisshownbelow. Thesubsectionsreferencedfor each screenare
alsoshown. Seetheappropriatesubsectionfor detailsof eachscreenand
thesetting procedureon thescreen. Seeother chapters for screens not
describedinthischapter.
See Chapter 12 for the screen that appears when function key
AUX
GRAPH
is
pressed.
Themachinemay have adata protection key to protect part programs.
Refer tothemanual issuedbythemachinetool builder for wherethedata
protectionkey islocatedandhowtouseit.
General
Explanations
Screentransitionchart
MDI functionkeys
(Shadedkeys ( ) are described
inthis chapter.)
PRGR
M
POS
MENU
OFSET
DGNOS
PARAM
OPR
ALARM
AUX
GRAPH
D Dataprotectionkey
OPERATION 11. SETTING ANDDISPLAYING DATA B--61394E/08
520
POS
Screentransitiontriggered bythe functionkey POS
POSITION DISPLAY SCREEN
Current position screen
Position display of
work coordinate
system
See subsec. 11.1.1.
Display of run
time and parts
count
See subsec. 11.1.5.
Display of actual
speed
See subsec. 11.1.4.
Position displays
relative coordinate
system
See subsec. 11.1.2.
Total position dis-
play of each coor-
dinate system
See subsec.11.1.3.
Manual handle in-
terruption
See sec. 4.8.
ABS REL ALL HNDL
Display of actual
speed
See subsec. 11.1.4.
Display of actual
speed
See subsec. 11.1.4.
Setting of relative
coordinate values
See subsec. 11.1.2.
Display of
distance to go
See subsec. 11.1.3.
Display of actual
speed
See subsec. 11.1.4.
Display of run
time and parts
count
See subsec. 11.1.5.
Display of run
time and parts
count
See subsec. 11.1.5.
Display of run
time and parts
count
See subsec. 11.1.5.
Current position screen
MONI
Display of
operating monitor
See subsec. 11.1.6.
521
Screen transition triggered by the function key
in the AUTO or MDI mode
Programscreen
Display of pro-
gramcontents
See subsec. 11.2.1.
Display of current
block and modal
data
See subsec. 11.2.2.
PRGRM CHECK CURRNT NEXT
PRGRM
PROGRAM SCREEN
AUTO (MDI)
*
Display of current
block and next
block
See subsec. 11.2.3.
Programbeing executed
Absolute / relative
coordinate value
Distance to go
modal values
See subsec. 11.2.4.
Display of pro-
gramnumber and
sequence number
Seesubsec.11.7.1.
FL.SDL
Command
for MDI operation
See subsec. 11.2.5.
[SCHDUL]
Setting of
schedule
See sec. 4.6.
Programscreen
PRGRM
(MDI)*
RSTR
Programrestart
See subsec. 4.5.
*
*
**
AUTO
BG--EDT
**
Back ground
editing screen
See sec. 9.7.
DisplayedinMDI mode
Not displayedinMDI mode
522
Programediting
screen
See chapter 9
Programmemory
and programdi-
rectory
See subsec. 11.3.1.
PRGRM LIB C.A.P.
EDIT
Conversational
programming
screen
See chapter 10.5
EDIT
Back ground
editing screen
See sec. 9.7.
Programscreen
PROGRAM SCREEN
in the EDIT mode
Programscreen
PRGRM
PRGRM
FLOPPY
I/O
File directory
screen for floppy
disks
See sec. 8.8.
BG--EDT EX--EDT
Extended part
programediting
See sec. 9.5.
*
*
**
*
**
Displayedif the floppy disk directory display optionis supportedandif the Floppy Cas-
sette is specifiedas the input/output unit
Displayedif the above conditions are not satisfied
523
Tool offset value
WEAR
OFFSET
GEOM
MENU
OFSET
MENU
OFSET
Tool offset value
MACRO W. SHFT
TOOLLF WEAR GEOM
OFFSET SCREEN
Display of tool off-
set value (wear)
See subsec. 11.4.1.
Display of tool off-
set value (geome-
try)
See subsec. 11.4.1.
Display of work
shift amount work
coordinate system
See subsec. 11.4.5.
Setting of macro
variables
See subsec. 11.4.9.
Setting of tool off-
set data (wear)
See subsec. 11.4.1.
Setting of work shift
amount / work coordi-
nate system
See subsec. 11.4.5.
Tool length
measurement
See subsec. 11.4.2.
Display of macro
variables
See subsec. 11.4.9.
Setting of tool offset
value (geometry)
See subsec. 11.4.1.
Display of data
for tool life man-
agement
See subsec. 11.4.10.
Display of Y axis
tool offset value
(Wear)
See subsec. 11.4.7.
Setting of Y axis
tool offset value
(Geometry)
See subsec. 11.4.7.
Setting of Y axis
tool offset value
(Wear)
See subsec. 11.4.7.
Display of Y axis
tool offset value
(Geometry)
See subsec. 11.4.7.
Pre---set of data
for tool life man-
agement
See subsec. 11.4.10.
524
Setting of pitch
error compensation
data
see Subsec.11.5.5
Parameter screen
PARAM DGNOS
PARAMETER/DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN
Display of param-
eter screen
see Subsec.11.5.4
Setting of parameter
see Subsec.11.5.4
Display of diag-
nosis screen
See Sec. 7.2
Screen transition triggered by the function
key
DGNOS
PARAM
DGNOS
PARAM
SV--PRM
Display of Servo
setting screen
see Subsec. 11.5.1
*
Display of Servo
adjustment
screen
Display of setting
data
Setting of setting
data
see Subsec. 11.5.1
* The servo setting/adjustment screencanbe suppressedif bit 0
of parameter 0389is specifiedaccordingly.
Setting of Sequence
Number Comparison
and Stop
see Subsec. 11.5.2
Setting of parts count
see Subsec. 11.5.3
Display of Run
time, Parts count
see Subsec. 11.5.3
see Subsec. 11.5.3
Display of time
and setting
525
OPR
ALARM
OPR
Display of alarm
screen
see sec. 7.1
see Subsec.
11.6.2
ALARM
Display of software
operators panel
ALARMSCREEN
Alarmscreen
ALARM OPR MSG
Display of opera-
tors message
see Subsec.
11.6.1
see Subsec. 11.6.2
Setting of software
operators panel
switch
526
Thetablebelowliststhedataset oneachscreen.
Table11 Settingscreens anddataonthem
No. Settingscreen Contents of setting
Reference
item
1 Tool offset value Tool offset value
Tool nose radius compensa-
tionvalue
Subsec.
11.4.1
Direct input of tool offset val-
ue
Subsec.
11.4.2
Direct input of tool offset val-
ue measuredB
Subsec.
11.4.3
Counter input of offset value Subsec.
11.4.4
Y axis offset Subsec.
11.4.7
2 Workpiece coordinate sys-
temsetting
Workpiece coordinate sys-
temshift value
Subsec.
11.4.5
Workpiece originoffset val-
ue
Subsec.
11.4.8
3 Settingdata (handy) Parameter write
TV check
Punchcode (EIA/ISO)
Input unit (mm/inch)
I/O channel
Automatic insert of Se-
quence No.
Conversionof tape format
Subsec.
11.5.1
Sequence number compari-
sonandstop
Subsec.
11.5.2
4 Settingdata (mirror image) Mirror image Subsec.
11.5.1
5 Settingdata (timer) Parts required Subsec.
11.5.3
6 Macro variables Custommacro common
variables
(#100to #149) or
(#100to #199)
(#500to #531) or
(#500to #599)
Subsec.
11.4.9
7 Parameter Parameter Subsec.
11.5.4
Pitcherror compensation
data
Subsec.
11.5.5
D Settingscreens
527
Table11 Settingscreens anddataonthem
No.
Reference
item
Contents of setting Settingscreen
8 software operators panel Mode selection
J ogfeedaxis selection
J ograpidtraverse
Axis selectionfor Manual
pulse
generator
Multiplicationfor manual
pulse
generator
J ogfeedrate
Feedrate override
Rapidtraverse override
Optional block skip
Single block
Machine lock
Dry run
Protect key
Feedhold
Subsec.
11.6.2
9 Tool life data
(Tool life management)
Life count Subsec.
11.4.10
10 Current positiondisplay
screen
Reset of relative coordinate
value.
Subsec.
11.1.2
528
Pressfunctionkey
POS
todisplay thecurrent positionof thetool.
Thefollowingthreescreensareusedtodisplaythecurrentpositionof the
tool:
Positiondisplayscreenfor theworkcoordinatesystem.
Positiondisplayscreenfor therelativecoordinatesystem.
Overall positiondisplayscreen.
Theabovescreenscanalsodisplaythefeedrate, runtime, andthenumber
of parts.Function key
POS
can also be used to display the screen for
displayingthedistancemovedbyhandleinterruption. SeeSection4.8for
detailsonthisscreen.
11.1
SCREENS
DISPLAYEDBY
FUNCTIONKEY
POS
529
Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate
system. Thecurrent positionchangesasthetool moves. Theleastinput
increment is used as theunit for numeric values. Thetitleat thetopof
thescreenindicatesthat absolutecoordinatesareused.
Displayprocedurefor thecurrentpositionscreenintheworkpiececoordinatesystem
1 Pressfunctionkey
POS
.
2 Presssoft key [ABS].
PART COUNT 1786
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M
16: 14: 02 BUF AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 220. 000
X 200. 000
D Displaywith0--TC
ACTUAL POSI TI ON ( ABSOLUTE) HEAD1
O0555
1 N5555
1
1
1
O0222
2 N0222
2
ACT. F 0 MM/ M
14: 57: 19 AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
X 211. 680
Z 185. 247
X 163. 710
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 295. 868
D Displaywith0--TTC
Tool compensation values and other values aredisplayed on thescreen
displaying a position in the workpiece coordinate system. The
programmedpoint (positionof thetool tip) isalsodisplayed.
11.1.1
PositionDisplayinthe
WorkpieceCoordinate
System
Explanations
D Displayincluding
compensationvalues
530
Displays thecurrent position of thetool in arelativecoordinatesystem
basedonthecoordinatessetbytheoperator. Thecurrentpositionchanges
asthetool moves. Theincrement systemisusedastheunit for numeric
values. Thetitleatthetopof thescreenindicatesthatrelativecoordinates
areused.
Displayprocedurefor thecurrentpositionscreenwiththerelativecoordinatesystem
1 Pressfunctionkey
POS
.
2 Presssoft key [REL].
ACTUAL POSI TI ON ( RELATI VE) O0001 N0023
PART COUNT 23
RUNTI ME 3H30M CYCLE TI ME 0H 2M14S
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M
20: 03: 21 AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
V 0. 000
H 0. 000
W 220. 000
U 200. 000
D Displaywith0--TC
ACTUAL POSI TI ON ( RELATI VE) HEAD1
O0555
1 N5555
1
1
1
O0222
2 N0222
2
ACT. F 0 MM/ M
14: 59: 02 J OG
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
U - 47. 040
W 166. 990
U 37. 374
V 0. 000
H 0. 000
W 145. 341
D Displaywith0--TTC
11.1.2
PositionDisplayinthe
RelativeCoordinate
System
531
Thecurrent position of thetool in therelativecoordinatesystemcanbe
reset to0or preset toaspecifiedvalueasfollows:
Proceduretoresettheaxis coordinatetoaspecifiedvalue
1 Key in the address of the axis name (X, Y, etc.) on the relative
coordinatescreen. Theenteredaxisaddressblinks. Twoor moreaxis
namescanbeinput.
2 Pressthe
CAN
key. Therelativecoordinatesof theaxishavingthe
blinkingaddressarereset to0.
Proceduretopresetavaluefor aspecifiedaxis
1 Key in the desired axis name and value on the relativecoordinate
screen. Theenteredaxisaddressblinks.
2 Press the INPUT key. The relative coordinate of the axis with the
blinkingaddressispreset tothespecifiedvalue.
Toenablethisoperation, specify bit0of parameter 0064accordingly. In
thismode, aresetcannotbeperformedfor thespecifiedaxis. Toresetthe
coordinate, key in0asthepreset value.
Bit1of parameter 0001canbeusedtoselectwhetherthedisplayedvalues
includetool lengthoffset andcutter compensation.
Bit1of parameter 0002isusedtospecifywhether thedisplayedpositions
in therelativecoordinatesystemarepreset to thesamevaluesas inthe
workpiececoordinatesystemwhen acoordinatesystemis set by aG50
commandor whenthemanual referencepositionreturnismade.
Explanations
D Settingtherelative
coordinates
D Displayincluding
compensationvalues
D Presettingbysettinga
coordinatesystem
532
Displays thefollowing positionson ascreen : Current positions of the
tool intheworkpiececoordinatesystem, relativecoordinatesystem, and
machinecoordinatesystem, andtheremainingdistance.
Procedurefor displayingoverall positiondisplayscreen
1 Pressfunctionkey
POS
.
2 Presssoft key [ALL].
ACTUAL POSI TI ON O0100 N0000
U 0. 000 X 200. 179
W 0. 000 Z 220. 000
H 0. 000 C 0. 000
V 0. 000 Y 0. 000
( MACHI NE) ( DI STANCE TO GO)
X - 118. 170 X 0. 000
Z - 21. 470 Z 0. 000
C 0. 676 C 0. 000
Y 0. 046 Y 0. 000
PART COUNT 23
ACT. F 0 MM/ M
20: 04: 37 AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
D Displaywith0--TC
ACTUAL POSI TI ON HEAD1 : O0555N5555
U1 0. 000 X1 200. 179
W1 0. 000 Z1 220. 000
H1 0. 000 C1 0. 000
V1 0. 000 Y1 0. 000
( MACHI NE)
X1 - 118. 170
Z1 - 21. 470
C1 0. 676
Y1 0. 046
PART COUNT 23
ACT. F 0 MM/ M
15: 00: 48 AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
D Displaywith0--TTC
Thecurrent positionsof thetool inthefollowingcoordinatesystemsare
displayedat thesametime:
Current position in the relative coordinate system
(relative coordinate)
Current position in the work coordinate system
(absolute coordinate)
Current position in the machine coordinate system
(machine coordinate)
Distance to go (distance to go)
11.1.3
Overall Position
Display
Explanations
D Coordinatedisplay
533
Thedistanceremaining is displayed in the AUTO or MDI mode. The
distancethetool isyet tobemovedinthecurrent block isdisplayed.
Theleast commandincrement isusedastheunit for values displayedin
themachinecoordinatesystem. However, theleast input increment can
alsobeusedby settingbit 0of parameter 0063.
D Distancetogo
D Machinecoordinate
system
534
Theactual feedrateon themachine(per minute) can bedisplayed on a
current position display screen or programcheck screen by setting bit 2
of parameter 0028.
Displayprocedurefor theactual feedrateonthecurrentpositiondisplayscreen
1 Pressfunctionkey
POS
todisplayacurrentpositiondisplayscreen.
PART COUNT 1786
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M
16: 14: 02 BUF AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 220. 000
X 200. 000
Actual feedrateisdisplayedafter ACT.F.
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or
inch/min(dependingonthespecifiedleastinputincrement) underthe
display of thecurrent position.
Theactual rateiscalculatedby thefollowingexpression:
Fact
n
i 1
(fi)
2
where
n : Number of axes
fi : Cutting feed ratein thetangential direction of each axis or rapid
traverserate
Fact : Actual feedratedisplayed
Thedisplay unit: mm/min(metric input).
inch/min(Inchinput).
In thecaseof feed per revolution andthread cutting, theactual feedrate
displayedisthefeedper minuterather thanfeedper revolution.
Inthecaseof movement of rotary axis, thespeedisdisplayedinunitsof
deg/minbutisdisplayedonthescreeninunitsof inputsystematthattime.
Theprogramcheck screenalsodisplaystheactual feedrate.
11.1.4
Actual Feedrate
Display
Explanations
D Actual feedratevalue
D Actual feedratedisplay
of feedper revolution
of rotaryaxis
ontheother screen
535
Theruntime, cycletime, andthenumber of machinedpartsaredisplayed
onthecurrent positiondisplay screens.
Procedurefor displayingruntimeandparts countonthecurrentpositiondisplayscreen
1 Pressfunctionkey
POS
todisplayacurrentpositiondisplayscreen.
PART COUNT 1786
ACT. F 3000 MM/ M
16: 14: 02 BUF AUTO
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ ]
Y 0. 000
C 0. 000
Z 220. 000
X 200. 000
The number of machined parts (PART COUNT), run time (RUN
TIME), and cycle time (CYCLE TIME) are displayed under the
current position.
Indicatesthenumber of machinedparts. Thenumberisincrementedeach
timeM02, M30, or anM codespecifiedby parameter 0219isexecuted.
Thenumber isresetto0when
CAN
keyispressedafteraddress P key
ispressed.
I ndicates the total run time during automatic operation,
excludingthestopandfeedholdtime.
Thenumber isresetto0when
CAN
keyispressedafteraddress R key
ispressed.
Indicatestheruntimeof oneautomaticoperation, excludingthestopand
feed hold time. This is automatically preset to 0 when acycle start is
performedat reset state. It ispreset to0evenwhenpower isremoved.
Details of therun timeandthenumber of machinedparts aredisplayed
onthesettingscreen. SeeSubsec 11.5.3.
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current
positiondisplay screens. They canbeset onthesettingscreen.
11.1.5
Displayof RunTime
andParts Count
Explanations
D PART COUNT
D RUNTIME
D CYCLE TIME
D Displayontheother
screen
D Parameter setting
536
Bit 3(PCM) of parameter 0040isusedtospecify whether thenumber of
machined parts is incremented each time M02, M03, or an M code
specified by parameter 0219 is executed, or only each timean M code
specifiedby parameter 0219isexecuted.
D Incrementingthenumber
of machinedparts
537
This function displays theload of basic feed axes and 1st spindlewith
serial interface. Andalso, itispossibletodisplaythespeedof 1stspindle
withserial interface.
Thisfunctionisbasic.
1 Thepositionscreenisselectedby pressingthefunctionkey
POS
.
2 Therightmost key [>] onthesoft--keysispressed.
3 Thesoft--key [MONI] ispressed.
By the above operation, the operating monitor screen is displayed.
Pressing thepagekeys can display thescreeninstead of the
aboveoperation(2) and(3).
OPERATI NG MONI TOR O0001 N0000
( LOAD METER)
X: ********** 0% S1: ********** 0%
Z: ********** 0%
( SPEED METER
RPM
)
S1: ********** 0%
[ MONI ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(1) LOADMETER (X toZ)
Theloadof theaxisisdisplayedby percentagestotheratedtorqueof
theaxis.
One* marksonthebar graphdenotes10%.
(2) LOADMETER (S1)
Theloadof 1stspindleisdisplayedbypercentagestotheratedpower
of thespindle.
One* marksonthebar graphdenotes20%.
(3) SPEEDMETER (S1)
Thespeedof 1st spindleisdisplayedby RPM. One* marksonthe
bar graphdenotes10%of themaximumspeedof thespindle.
NOTE
1 The loads of only the basic axes are displayed.
2 The load and speed of only 1st spindle with serial
interface are displayed.Those for the 2nd serial spindle
and analog interface spindle are not displayed.
3 This function is enabled by setting bit 5 of parameter No.
060 to 1. This function cannot be used with the 0--TTC.
11.1.6
OperatingMonitor
Display
Explanations
D Operation
D OperatingMonitor
Screen
538
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key
PRGRM
in AUTO or MDI mode.The first four of the following screens
display theexecution statefor theprogramcurrently being executed in
AUTOor MDI modeandthelastscreendisplaysthecommandvaluesfor
MDI operationintheMDI mode:
1. Programcontents display screen
2. Current block display screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Programcheck screen
5. Programscreen for MDI operation
Function key
PRGRM
can also be pressed in AUTO modeto display the
programrestart screenandschedulingscreen.
SeeSection4.5for theprogramrestart screen.
SeeSection4.6for theschedulingscreen.
Displaystheprogramcurrently beingexecutedinAUTOmode.
Procedurefor displayingtheprogramcontents
1 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
todisplay aprogramscreen.
2 Presschapter selectionsoft key [PRGRM].
Thecursor ispositionedat theblock currently beingexecuted.
PROGRAM O0100 N0013
S550 M08 ;
M45 ;
N010 G50 X200. Z200. ;
N011 G00 X160. Z180. ;
N012 G71 U7. R1. ;
N013 G71 P014 Q020 U4. W2. F0. 3 S550 M03
;
N014 G00 X40. F0. 15 S700 ;
20: 06: 48 AUTO
11.2
SCREENS
DISPLAYEDBY
FUNCTIONKEY
(INAUTOMODE ORMDI
MODE)
PRGRM
11.2.1
ProgramContents
Display
539
Displaystheblockcurrentlybeingexecutedandmodal dataintheAUTO
or MDI mode.
Procedurefor displayingthecurrentblockdisplayscreen
1 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
2 Presssoft key [CURRNT].
Theblock currently beingexecutedandmodal dataaredisplayed.
PROGRAM O0001 N0013
( CURRENT) ( MODAL)
G71 U 4. 000 G00 F 0. 3000
W 2. 000 G97 M 003
F 0. 3000 G69 S 00550
M 003 G99 T 0101
S 00550 G21
P 14 G40 WX 0. 000
Q 20 G25 WZ 0. 000
G22 SRPM 550
G54 SSPM 0
SMAX 32767
SACT 0
20: 07: 48 AUTO
11.2.2
CurrentBlockDisplay
Screen
540
Displaystheblockcurrently beingexecutedandtheblocktobeexecuted
next intheAUTOor MDI mode.
Procedurefor displayingthenextblockdisplayscreen
1 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
2 Presschapter selectionsoft key [NEXT].
Theblock currently beingexecutedandtheblock tobeexecuted
next aredisplayed.
PROGRAM O0100 N0000
( CURRENT) ( NEXT)
G71 U 4. 000 G71. X 140. 000
W 2. 000 G97 M - 20. 000
F 0. 3000
M 003
S 00550
P 14
Q 20
20: 10: 39 AUTO
11.2.3
NextBlockDisplay
Screen
541
Displays the programcurrently being executed, current position of the
tool, andmodal dataintheAUTOmode.
Procedurefor displayingtheprogramcheckscreen
1 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
2 Presssoft key [CHECK].
Theprogramcurrently beingexecuted, current positionof thetool,
andmodal dataaredisplayed.
PROGRAM O0100 N0000
N013 G71 P014 Q020 U4. W2. F0. 3 S550M03
;
N014 G00 X40. F0. 15 S700 ;
N015 G01 W- 40. ;
( RELATI VE) ( DI ST TO GO) ( G)
U - 72. 000 X 0. 000 G00 G99 G25
W - 76. 000 Z 0. 000 G97 G21 G22
H 0. 000 C 0. 000 G69 G40 G54
V 0. 000 Y 0. 000 SPRM 550
SSPM 0
F 0. 3000 S00550 SMAX 32767
M003 T0101 SACT 0
ACT. F 0 MM/ M
20: 11: 37 BUF AUTO
For the programcurrently being executed, the block currently being
executedisdisplayedfirst.
Theposition in the workpiececoordinate systemor relativecoordinate
systemandtheremainingdistancearedisplayed. Theabsolutepositions
andrelativepositionsareswitchedby parameter (No.0028#0).
11.2.4
ProgramCheckScreen
Explanations
D Programdisplay
D Currentpositiondisplay
542
Displays the programinput fromtheMDI and modal datain theMDI
mode.
Procedurefor displayingtheprogramscreenfor MDI operation
1 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
2 Presssoft key [MDI].
Theprograminput fromtheMDI andmodal dataaredisplayed.
(1) MDI operation-- A
PROGRAM O0001 N0020
( MDI ) ( MODAL)
G00. X 100. 000 G00 F 0. 3000
G80. Z 200. 000 G97 M 003
G69 S 00550
G99 T 0101
G21
G40 WX 0. 000
G25 WZ 0. 000
G22 SRPM 550
G54 SSPM 0
SMAX 32767
SACT 0
ADRS.
20: 17: 19 MDI
(2) MDI operation-- B
PROGRAM( MDI ) O0100 N0001
O0000 G00 X100. Z200. ;
N10 M03 ;
N20 G01 Z120. F500 ;
N30 M98 P9010 ;
N40 G00 Z0 ;
%
( MODAL)
G00 G69 G21 G25
G97 G99 G40 G22
F 0. 3000 S00550
M003 T0101
<
20: 14: 17 MDI
SeeSection4.2for MDI operation.
The modal data on the MDI operation B is displayed when bit 3 of
parameter 0028isset to1.
11.2.5
ProgramScreenfor
MDI Operation
Procedure
Explanations
D MDI operation
D Modal information
543
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key
PRGRM
in the EDIT mode. Function key
PRGRM
in the EDIT mode can
display the program editing screen and the library screen (displays
memory usedandalist of programs). Pressingfunctionkey
PRGRM
inthe
EDIT mode can also display theconversational graphics programming
screenandthefloppyfiledirectoryscreen. SeeChapter 9for theprogram
editing screen and conversational graphics programming screen. See
Chapter 8for thefloppy filedirectory screen.
Displaysthenumber of registeredprograms, memory used, andalist of
registeredprograms.
Procedurefor displayingmemoryusedandalistof programs
For the 0--TTC, select the tool post for which a programis to be
displayedwiththetool post selectionswitch.
2 Pressfunctionkey
PRGRM
.
3 Presssoft key [LIB].
PROGRAM O0615 N0000
O0001 O0010 O0011 O0021 O0041 O0601
O0613 O0615 O0645 O0651 O1021 O1041
O1051 O2011 O2505 O3148 O3153 O3511
O4011 O4048 O5111 O5221 O5766 O6032
< S 0 T0101
20: 28: 10 EDI T
[ PRGRM] [ CONDNS ] [ ] [ ] [ C. A. P. ]
11.3
SCREENS
DISPLAYEDBY
FUNCTIONKEY
(INTHE EDIT MODE)
PRGRM
11.3.1
DisplayingMemory
UsedandaList
of Programs
544
PROGRAMNO. USED
PROGRAM NO. USED : Thenumber of theprogramsregistered
(includingthesubprograms)
FREE : Thenumber of programswhichcanbe
registeredadditionally.
MEMORY AREAUSED
MEMORY AREAUSED : Thecapacity of theprogrammemory in
whichdataisregistered(indicatedby the
number of characters).
FREE : Thecapacity of theprogrammemory which
canbeusedadditionally (indicatedby the
number of characters).
ProgramNos. registeredareindicated.
Also, theprogramnamecanbedisplayedintheprogramtablebysetting
parameter (No. 0040#0) to1.
PROGRAM O0615 N0000
STSTEMEDI TI ON 0666 - 24
PROGRAMNO. USED : 24 FREE :39
O0001 ( TEST- PRO)
O0010 ( MI LLI NG)
O0011 ( THREADI NG)
O0021 ( TURNI NG- ROUGH- 1)
O0041 ( TURNI NG- ROUGH- 2)
O0601 ( GROOVI NG)
O0613 ( TURNI NG- FI NE- 1)
O0615 ( TURNI NG- FI NE- 2)
< S 0 T0101
20: 26: 56 EDI T
[ PRGRM] [ CONDNS ] [ ] [ ] [ C. A. P. ]
Always enter a programname between the control out and control in
codesimmediately after theprogramnumber.
Up to 31 characters can be used for naming a program within the
parentheses. If 31characters areexceeded, theexceeded charactersare
not displayed.
Only programnumber isdisplayedfor theprogramwithout anyprogram
name.
(DDDDD) f VVVV ;
Programnumber Programname (up to 31 characters)
Softwareseriesof thesystemisdisplayed.
It isusedfor maintenance; user isnot requiredthisinformation.
Programs aredisplayed in thesameorder that they areregistered inthe
programlibrary list. However, if bit 4 of parameter 0040 is set to 1,
programsaredisplayedintheorder of programnumber startingfromthe
smallest one.
Explanations
D Details of memoryused
D Programlibrarylist
D Programname
D Softwareseries
D Order inwhichprograms
aredisplayedinthe
programlibrarylist
545
Immediatelyafter all programsarecleared(byturningonthepowerwhile
pressingthe
DELETE
key), eachprogramisregisteredafter thelastprogram
inthelist.
If some programs in the list were deleted, then a new program is
registered, thenewprogramisinserted in theempty locationin thelist
createdby thedeletedprograms.
Example) Whenbit4(SOR)of parameter 3107is0
1. Afterclearingallprograms,registerprogramsO0001,O0002,O0003,
O0004,andO0005inthisorder. Theprogramlibrarylistdisplaysthe
programsinthefollowingorder:
O0001,O0002,O0003,O0004,O0005
2. Delete O0002 and O0004. The programlibrary list displays the
programsinthefollowingorder:
O0001,O0003,O0005
3. RegisterO0009.Theprogramlibrarylistdisplaystheprogramsinthe
followingorder:
O0001,O0009,O0003,O0005
Unused areas resulting frombackground editing areincluded when the
number of programsor memory areasusediscounted. After memoryis
reorganized, theunusedareabecomesafreearea.
D Order inwhichprograms
areregistered
D Freearea
546
Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
todisplay or set tool compensation valuesand
other data.
Thissectiondescribeshowtodisplay or set thefollowingdata:
1. Tool offset value
2. Workpiece origin offset value or workpiece coordinate system
shift value
3. Custommacro common variables
4. Software operators panel
5. Tool life management data
Thissectionalsodescribesfollowingfunctions.
DDirect input of tool offset value
DDirect input of tool offset valuemeasuredB
DCounter input of offset value
DDirect input of workpiececoordinatesystemshift
DY axisoffset
Thefollowingfunctionsdependonthespecificationsof themachinetool
builder. Seethemanual issuedby themachinetool builder for details.
DDirect input of tool offset value
DDirect input of tool offset valuemeasuredB
DSoftwareoperatorspanel
DTool lifemanagement data
11.4
SCREENS
DISPLAYEDBY
FUNCTIONKEY
MENU
OFSET
547
Dedicated screens are provided for displaying and setting tool offset
valuesandtool noseradiuscompensationvalues.
Procedurefor settinganddisplayingthetool offsetvalueandthetool noseradius
compensationvalue
1 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
.
For the 0--TTC, select the tool post for which tool compensation
valuesaretobedisplayedwiththetool post selectionswitch.
2 Presssoft key [OFFSET], [WEAR], [GEOM].
Different screensaredisplayeddependingonwhether tool geometry
offset, wear offset, or neither isapplied.
OFFSET O0001 N0013
NO. X Z R T
01 1. 350 5. 230 0. 0000
02 - 2. 580 13. 540 0. 0000
03 5. 843 - 10. 256 0. 0000
04 50. 245 100. 235 0. 0000
05 - 3. 124 36. 520 0. 3003
_06 - 16. 369 53. 248 0. 2504
07 - 10. 587 0. 000 0. 0000
08 - 0. 258 - 12. 354 0. 0000
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS. S 0 T0101
21: 02: 14 MDI
[ OFFSET ] [ ] [ W. SHFT ] [ MACRO ] [ ]
Withouttool geometry/wear offset
OFFSET / GEOMETRY O0001 N0001
NO. X Z RT
G_01 30. 500 50. 300 0. 0000
G 02 - 23. 580 - 100. 300 0. 0000
G 03 123. 850 10. 200 0. 0000
G 04 55. 300 - 150. 600 0. 0000
G 05 - 56. 800 25. 700 0. 3003
G 06 - 148. 300 35. 700 0. 2504
G 07 45. 800 200. 500 0. 0000
G 08 - 159. 600 0. 400 0. 0000
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS. S 0 T0101
20: 55: 34 MDI
[ WEAR ] [ GEOM ] [ W. SHFT ] [ MACRO ] [ ]
Withtool geometryoffset
11.4.1
SettingandDisplaying
theTool OffsetValue
548
OFFSET / WEAR O0001 N0001
NO. X Z RT
W01 1. 350 5. 230 0. 0000
W02 - 2. 580 3. 542 0. 0000
W03 0. 843 - 0. 542 0. 0000
W04 0. 245 0. 235 0. 0000
W05 - 3. 124 1. 520 0. 0353
W06 - 6. 369 3. 248 0. 0854
W07 - 0. 587 0. 000 0. 0000
W08 - 0. 258 - 0. 354 0. 0000
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS. S 0 T0101
20: 54: 16 MDI
Withtool wear offset
3 Movethecursor tothecompensationvaluetobesetor changedusing
page keys and cursor keys, or press NO. key and enter the
compensation number for the compensation value to be set or
changedandpress INPUT key.
4 Toset acompensationvalue, enter avalueandpresssoft INPUT key.
TIP isthenumber of thevirtual tool tip(seeProgramming).
Number of the virtural tool tip may be specified on the geometry
compensationscreenor onthewear compensationscreen.
A decimal point canbeusedwhenenteringacompensationvalue.
An external input/output devicecan beused to input or output acutter
compensationvalue. SeeChapter 8.
Tool lengthcompensationvaluescanbeset usingthefollowingfunctions
described in subsequent subsections: direct input of tool offset value,
direct--input function B for tool offset measured, and counter input of
offset value.
16groupsareprovidedfor tool compensation. Thenumber of groupscan
beoptionallyextendedto32. Forthe0--TTC, theabovenumber of groups
can be used for each tool post. Tool geometry compensation or wear
compensationcanbeselectedfor eachgroup.
In somecases, tool wear compensation or tool geometry compensation
valuescanbeprohibitedcannot beinput becauseof thesettingsinbits0
and1of parameter 0078.
TheradiusandTIP arenot displayed if thetool tip radiuscompensation
optionisnotdisplayed. SpecifytheradiususingaddressRandthenumber
of thevirtual tool tipusingaddressT.
Explanations
D Decimal pointinput
D Other method
D Tool offsetmemory
D Disablingentryof
compensationvalues
D Displayingradius and
number of thevirtural
tool tip
549
Whenoffset valueshavebeenchangedduringautomatic operation, bit2
and of parameter 0013 and bit 4 of parameter 0014 can be used for
specifying whether new offset values become valid in the next move
commandor inthenext T codecommand.
0013
#2
0014
#4
Whengeometrycompensa-
tionvalues andwear com-
pensationvalues aresepa-
ratelyspecified
Whengeometrycompensa-
tionvalues andwear com-
pensationvalues arenot
separatelyspecified
0 0
Become validinthe next T
code block
code block
1 0
code block
code block
0 1
code block
Become validinthe next
move command
1 1
move command
move command
To enable the setting of compensation values, press an incremental
commandaddresskey (suchas u ) tosetincremental inputmode. In
this mode, the previous compensation value and the entered value are
summedtogivethenewcompensationvalue.
D Changingoffsetvalues
duringautomatic
operation
D Incremental input
550
To set the difference between the tool reference position used in
programming(thenoseof thestandardtool, turretcenter, etc.)andthetool
tippositionof atool actually usedasanoffset value
Procedurefor directinputof tool offsetvalue
1 Cut surfaceA inmanual modewithanactual tool.
Supposethat aworkpiececoordinatesystemhasbeenset.
a
b
X
Z
Surface A
Surface B
2 Releasethetool inX axisdirectiononly, without movingZaxis
andstopthespindle.
3 Measuredistanceb fromthezeropoint intheworkpiece
coordinatesystemtosurfaceA.
Set thisvalueasthemeasuredvaluealongtheZ--axisfor the
desiredoffset number, usingthefollowingprocedure:
OFFSET O0001 N0013
NO. X Z R T
01 1. 350 5. 230 0. 0000
02 - 2. 580 13. 540 0. 0000
03 5. 843 - 10. 256 0. 0000
04 50. 245 100. 235 0. 0000
05 - 3. 124 36. 520 0. 3003
_06 - 16. 369 53. 248 0. 2504
07 - 10. 587 0. 000 0. 0000
08 - 0. 258 - 12. 354 0. 0000
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS. S 0 T0101
21: 02: 14 MDI
3--1 Press the function key
MENU
OFSET
or the soft key [OFFSET],
[WEAR], or [GEOM] to display the tool compensation
screen.
3--2 Movethecursor totheset offset number usingcursor keys.
11.4.2
DirectInputof Tool
OffsetValue
D Settingof Zaxis offsetvalue
551
3--3 Pressaddress
M
keyandpresstheaddresskey Z tobe
set.
3--4 Key inthemeasuredvalue(b).
3--5 Pressthe INPUT key.
Thedifferencebetween measured valueb and theabsolute
coordinateisset astheoffset value.
4 Cut surfaceB inmanual mode.
5 Releasethetool in theZ--axis direction without moving theX--axis
andstopthespindle.
6 Measurethediameter a of surfaceB.
Set thisvalueasthemeasuredvaluealongtheX--axisfor thedesired
offset number in thesameway as when setting thevaluealong the
Z--axis.
7 Repeataboveprocedurethesametimeasthenumberof thenecessary
tools. Theoffset valueisautomatically calculatedandset.
For example, incasea=69.0whenthecoordinatevalueof surfaceB
inthediagramaboveis70.0, set
M X 69.0 INPUT atoffsetNo.2.
Inthiscase, 1.0isset astheX--axisoffset valuetooffset No.2.
Enter diameter valuesfor thecompensationvaluesfor X axis.
If measuredvaluesareset onthetool geometrycompensationscreen, all
compensationvaluesbecomegeometrycompensationvaluesandall wear
compensationvaluesareset to0. If measured valuesareset on thetool
wear compensation screen, the differences between the measured
compensation values and the current geometry compensation values
becomethenewcompensationvalues.
If arecordbuttonisprovidedonthemachine, after thetool retractsalong
twoaxesoffsetsettingcanbeusedwhenbit4of parameter 0015issetand
therecordsignal isused. Refer to theappropriatemanual issued by the
Toenablethedirectinputof atool offsetvalue, setbit 5of parameter 010
accordingly.
D Settingof Xaxis offsetvalue
Explanations
D Compensationvalues for
aprogramcreatedinX
axis
valueandtool wear
offsetvalue
D Retractingalongtwo
axes
D Enablingor disablingthe
directinputof atool
offsetvalue
552
Thedirect input function B for tool offset measured is used to set tool
compensationvaluesandworkpiececoordinatesystemshift values.
Procedurefor settingthetool offsetvalue
Tool positionoffset valuescanbeautomatically setby manuallymoving
thetool until it touchesthesensor.
Refer to theappropriatemanual issued by the machinetool builder for
actual operation.
1 Executemanual referencepositionreturn.
Byexecutingmanual referencepositionreturn, amachinecoordinate
systemisestablished.
Thetool offset valueiscomputedonthemachinecoordinatesystem.
2 Set theoffset writingmodesignal to1.
(Refer totheappropriatemanual issuedby themachinetool builder
for actual operation.)
TheCRT display is automatically changed to thetool offset screen
(geometry), and the OFST indicator starts blinking in the status
indication areain the bottomof thescreen, which informs that the
offset writingmodeisready.
3 Select atool tobemeasured.
4 Whenthecursor isnotcoincidedwiththetool offset number desired
tobeset, movethecursortothedesiredoffsetnumber bypagekeyand
cursor key.
Besidesthecursor canalsobecoincidedwiththetool offsetnumber
desired to set automatically by thetool offset number input signals
(whenparameter (No.0024#6)=1).
Inthiscase, thepositionof thecursor cannot bechangedonthetool
compensationscreenusingpagekeysor cursor keys.
5 Near thetool tothesensor by manual operation.
6 Placethetool edgeto acontacting surfaceof thesensor by manual
handlefeed.
Bringthetool edgeincontact withthesensor. Thiscausestheoffset
writingsignals(+MIT1, --MIT1, +MIT2or --MIT2) toinput toCNC.
Theoffset writingsignal isset to1, andthe:
DTheaxisisinterlockedinthisdirectionanditsfeedingisstopped.
DThe tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool
geometry offset value) which corresponds to the offset number
shownby thecursor isset up.
7 For both X--axis and Z--axis, their offset value are set by the
operations5and6.
8 Repeat operations3to7for necessary tools.
9 Set theoffset writingsignal modeto0.
ThewritingmodeiscanceledandtheblinkingOFSTindicatorlight
goesoff.
11.4.3
DirectInputof Tool
OffsetmeasuredB
553
Procedurefor settingtheworkcoordinatesystemshiftamount
Tool positionoffset valuescanbeautomatically setby manuallymoving
thetool until it touchesthesensor.
Refer to theappropriatemanual issued by the machinetool builder for
actual operation.
1 The tool compensation values are then calculated based on the
machinecoordinatesof thetool.
2 Executemanual referencepositionreturn.
By executing manual reference position return, the machine
coordinatesystemisestablished.
Theworkpiececoordinatesystemshiftingamountiscomputedbased
onthemachinecoordinatesystemof thetool.
3 Set theworkpiececoordinatesystemshiftingamount writingsignal
modeto1.
TheCRT display isautomatically switchestotheworkpieceshifting
screen, theWFST indicator starts blinking at the status indicator
area in the bottomof the screen, which informthat theworkpiece
coordinatesystemshiftingamount writingmodeisready.
4 Select atool tobemeasured.
5 Check tool offset numbers.
The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for
measurement, shall beset intheparameter (No.122) inadvance.
Besidesthetool offsetnumber canbeset automaticallyby settingthe
tool offset number input signal (withparameter (No.0024#6)=1).
Refer totheappropriatemanual issuedbythemachinetool builderfor
details.
6 Manually approachthetool toanendfaceof theworkpiece.
7 Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece by
manual handlefeed.
Theworkpiececoordinatesystemshifting amount on the Z--axis is
automatically set.
8 Feedthetool.
9 Set theworkpiececoordinatesystemshiftingamount writingsignal
modeto0.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking WSFT indicator
light goesoff.
554
By moving the tool until it reaches the desired reference position, the
correspondingtool offset valuecanbeset.
Procedurefor counter inputof offsetvalue
1 Manually movethereferencetool tothereferenceposition.
2 Resettherelativecoordinatesalongtheaxesto0(seesubsec. 11.1.2).
3 Movethetool for which offset values areto beset to thereference
position.
4 Select thetool compensation screen. Movethecursor to theoffset
valuetobeset usingcursor keys.
OFFSET O0001 N0013
NO. X Z R T
01 1. 350 5. 230 0. 0000
02 - 2. 580 13. 540 0. 0000
03 5. 843 - 10. 256 0. 0000
04 50. 245 100. 235 0. 0000
05 - 3. 124 36. 520 0. 3003
_06 - 16. 369 53. 248 0. 2504
07 - 10. 587 0. 000 0. 0000
08 - 0. 258 - 12. 354 0. 0000
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS. S 0 T0101
21: 02: 14 MDI
5 Pressaddresskey X (or Z ) andthe INPUT key.
When the above operations are performed on the tool geometry
compensation screen, tool geometry compensation values areinput and
tool wear compensationvaluesdonot change.
Whentheaboveoperationsareperformedonthetool wear compensation
screen, tool wear compensation values are input and tool geometry
compensationvaluesdonot change.
Bit 6of parameter No. 008isusedtoenable/disablethisfunction.
11.4.4
Counter Inputof Offset
value
Explanations
D Geometryoffsetand
wear offset
D Enabling/disablingthe
function
555
The set coordinate systemcan be shifted when the coordinate system
which has been set by a G50 command (or G92 command for G code
systemB or C) or automatic coordinatesystemsettingis different from
theworkpiececoordinatesystemassumedat programming.
Procedurefor settingtheworkpiececoordinatesystemshiftingamount
1 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
.
2 Presssoft key [WK.SHFT].
WORK SHI FT O0001 N00013
( SHI FT VALUE) ( MEASUREMENT)
X - 2. 605 X 63. 587
Z - 79. 582 Z 120. 946
C 0. 000 C 0. 000
Y 0. 000 Y 0. 000
U 66. 192 W 119. 448
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS. S 0 T0101
21: 12: 37 J OG
[ WEAR ] [ GEOM ] [ WORK ] [ MACRO ] [ ]
3 Move the cursor using cursor keys to the axis along which the
coordinatesystemistobeshifted.
4 Enter theshift valueandpress INPUT key.
X
Z
O
Z
X
O
Shift
11.4.5
SettingtheWorkpiece
CoordinateSystem
ShiftingAmount
556
Shift valuesbecomevalidimmediately after they areset.
Settingacommand(G50or G92) for settingacoordinatesystemdisables
theset shift values.
Example WhenG50X100.0Z80.0; isspecified, thecoordinatesystem
isset sothat thecurrent tool referenceposition isX =100.0,
Z=80.0regardlessof theshift values.
If the automatic coordinate system setting is performed by manual
referencepositionreturnafter shiftamount setting, thecoordinatesystem
isshiftedinstantly.
Whether the shift amount on the X axis is diameter or radius value
dependsonthat specifiedinprogram.
Whentheactual positionof thereferencepoint isX =f 121.0
(diameter), Z=69.0withrespect totheworkpieceoriginbut it should
beX =f 120.0, Z=70.0, set thefollowingshift values:
X=1.0, Z=--1.0
X
Z
69.00
f121.0
Start position
(Standardposition)
Pressan incremental command addresskey, suchas theaddress key for
theaxisfor whichtheshiftistobeset, tosetincremental inputmode. In
thismode, thepreviousshiftandtheenteredvaluearesummedtogivethe
newshift.
Explanations
D Whenshiftvalues
becomevalid
D Shiftvalues and
coordinatesystem
settingcommand
D Shiftvalues and
coordinatesystem
setting
D Diameter or radius value
Examples
D Incremental input
557
When the work coordinate system set with a G50 command or the
automatic coordinate system setting function is different from the
coordinate systemused in programming, the coordinatesystemcan be
shiftedby storingthemeasureddistancedirectly asfollows.
X
Z
O
z
x
Shift
O
a
b
Surface B
Zero point in
programming
Surface A
1 Cut theworkpiecealongsurfaceA usingthestandardtool inmanual
operation.
2 Releasethetool only inX axisdirectionwithout movingZ axisand
stopthespindle.
3 Measuredistanceb, distancebetweenzeropointtosurfaceA, inthe
figureabove. Andstorethisvalueintheworkcoordinatesystemshift
memory.
3--1 Pushfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
, andsoftkey[W. SHT] thendisplay
theWORK SHIFT screen.
3--2 Pushaddresskey
M
toinput measureddistance.
3--3 Pushaddresskey Z .
3--4 Input measureddistance(b)
WORK SHI FT O0001 N00013
( SHI FT VALUE) ( MEASUREMENT)
X - 2. 605 X 63. 587
Z - 79. 582 Z 120. 946
C 0. 000 C 0. 000
Y 0. 000 Y 0. 000
U 66. 192 W 119. 448
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS.
21: 12: 37 J OG
[ WEAR ] [ GEOM ] [ WORK ] [ MACRO ] [ ]
11.4.6
DirectMeasuredValue
Inputfor Work
CoordinateSystem
Shift
558
3--5 Push INPUT button.
4 Cut surfaceB inmanual mode.
5 Releasethetool inZaxisdirection without moving X axis andstop
thespindle.
6 Measurethediameter aat surfaceB. And input this distance as X
valueinthework coordinatesystemmemory.
Theshiftamount, 0 to0, isautomaticallyset totheworkcoordinate
systemmemory. Thework coordinatesystemisshiftedimmediately
andcoincideswiththecoordinatesystemexpectedat programming.
If theoffset amount of thestandardtool iszero, itissaidthat awork
coordinatesystemisset, wherethecoordinatevaluesof thetool tipis
X=0.0andZ=0.0whenthetipof thestandardtool ispositionedatthe
zeropoint of thecoordinatesystem.
NOTE
when the tool offset amount (x, z) has already been set on
the standard tool as in the figure above and the tool offset
function is effective and the direct measured value input for
the work coordinate system shift is performed, a work
coordinate systemis set in which the coordinate values of
the standard point are X=0.0 and Z=0.0 when the standard
point is positioned at the zero point in the work coordinate
system.
Standard point
x/2
z
559
Tool positionoffsetvaluesalongtheY--axiscanbeset. Counter inputof
offset valuesisalsopossible.
Directinputof tool offsetvalueanddirect inputfunctionBfor tool offset
measuredarenot availablefor theY--axis.
Procedurefor settingthetool offsetvalueof theY axis
1 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
.
2 Pressthecontinuousmenukey , andswitchsoft keys.
3 Presssoft key [OFST], [WEAR], or [GEOM].
TheY axisoffset screenisdisplayed.
When[OFST] isspressed;
OFFSET O0001 N0013
NO. Y
01 1. 350
02 - 2. 580
03 5. 843
04 50. 245
05 - 3. 124
06 - 16. 369
07 - 10. 587
08 - 0. 258
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS.
21: 04: 41 MDI
[ TOOLLF ] [ OFFSET ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Whensoft key [WEAR] or [GEOM] ispressed;
OFFSET / WEAR O0001 N0001
NO. Y
01 1. 350
02 - 2. 580
03 5. 843
04 50. 245
05 - 3. 124
06 - 16. 369
07 - 10. 587
08 - 0. 258
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS.
20: 57: 16 MDI
[ TOOLLF ] [ WEAR ] [ GEOM ] [ ] [ ]
11.4.7
Y Axis Offset
560
Whensoft key [GEOM] ispressed;
OFFSET / GEOMETRY O0001 N0001
NO. Y
01 30. 500
02 - 23. 580
03 123. 850
04 55. 300
05 - 56. 800
06 - 148. 300
07 45. 800
08 - 159. 600
U 0. 000 W 0. 000
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
ADRS.
20: 58: 05 MDI
[ TOOLLF ] [ WEAR ] [ GEOM ] [ ] [ ]
4 Positionthecursor attheoffsetnumber tobechangedby usingeither
of thefollowingmethods:
DMovethecursor totheoffsetnumber tobechangedusingpagekeys
andcursor keys.
DPress NO. key andtypetheoffset number andpress INPUT key.
5 Typetheoffset value.
6 Press INPUT key. Theoffset valueisset anddisplayed.
Procedurefor counter inputof theoffsetvalue
Toset relativecoordinatesalongtheY--axisasoffset values:
1 Movethereferencetool tothereferencepoint.
2 Reset relativecoordinateY to0(seesubsec. 11.1.2).
3 Movethetool for whichoffset valuesaretobeset tothereference
point.
4 Movethecursor tothevaluefor theoffset number tobeset, press
Y
, INPUT .
RelativecoordinateY (or V) isnowset astheoffset value.
561
Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate
system(G54toG59) andexternal workpieceoriginoffset. Theworkpiece
originoffsetandexternal workpieceoriginoffsetcanbesetonthisscreen.
Procedurefor DisplayingandSettingtheWorkpieceOriginOffsetValue
1 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
.
2 Presschapter selectionsoft key [W.SHIFT] and[WORK].
Theworkpiececoordinatesystemsettingscreenisdisplayed.
WORK COORDI NATES O0001 N0013
NO. ( SHI FT) NO. ( G55)
00 X - 2. 605 02 X - 153. 480
Z - 79. 582 Z - 304. 600
C 0. 000 C 0. 000
Y 0. 000 Y 0. 000
NO. ( G54) NO. ( G56)
01 X - 125. 300 _03 X - 211. 350
Z - 251. 200 Z - 295. 470
C 0. 000 C 0. 000
Y 0. 000 Y 0. 000
ADRS.
21: 17: 11 MDI
3 Thescreenfor displayingtheworkpieceoriginoffset valuesconsists
of two or more pages. Display a desired page in either of the
followingtwoways:
Pressthepageup or pagedown key.
Press NO. key and enter the workpiece coordinate system
number (0: external workpieceorigin offset, 1 to6: workpiece
coordinatesystemsG54toG59) andpress INPUT key.
4 Movethecursor totheworkpieceoriginoffset tobechanged.
5 Pressaddresskeytosetandenter adesiredvaluebypressingnumeric
keys, then press INPUT key. The entered value is specified in the
workpieceoriginoffset value.
6 Repeat 4and5tochangeother offset values.
11.4.8
DisplayingandSetting
theWorkpieceOrigin
OffsetValue
562
DisplayscommonvariablesontheCRT. Whentheabsolutevaluefor a
commonvariableexceeds99999999, ******** isdisplayed. Thevalues
for variablescanbeset on thisscreen. Relativecoordinatescan alsobe
set tovariables.
Procedurefor displayingandsettingcustommacrocommonvariables
1 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
.
2 Soft key [MACRO].Thefollowingscreenisdisplayed:
VARI ABLE O0001 N0013
NO. DATA NO. DATA
100 01000. 000 108 00000. 000
101 00000. 000 109 40000. 000
102 - 50000. 000 110 00. 150846
103 01000. 000 111 00001. 000
104 1238501. 0 112 02000. 000
105 01000. 000 113 00071. 232
106 01000. 000 _114 00024. 864
107 01000. 000 115 00000. 000
U 71. 232 W 24. 864
H 0. 000 V 0. 000
NO. 144= S 0 T0101
21: 19: 59 MDI
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the
followingmethods:
-- Press NO. key andenter thevariablenumber andpress INPUT key.
-- Movethecursor tothevariablenumber tosetbypressingpagekeys
and/or andcursor keys and/or .
4 Enter datawithnumeric keysandpress INPUT key.
5 Toset arelativecoordinateinavariable, pressaddresskey X or
Z withpressing
EOB
key, thenpress INPUT key.
6 Toset ablank inavariable. Press INPUT key after pressing
CAN
key.
Thevaluefieldfor thevariablebecomesblank.
11.4.9
CustomMacro
CommonVariables
563
Tool lifedatacanbedisplayedtoinformtheoperator of thecurrentstate
of tool life management. Groups which require tool changes are also
displayed. The tool life counter for each group can be preset to an
arbitrary value. Tool data (execution data) can be reset or cleared. To
register or modify tool lifemanagement data, aprogrammust becreated
andexecuted. SeeExplanationsinthissectionfor details.
Procedurefor displayandsettingthetool lifemanagementdata
1 Pressfunctionkey
MENU
OFSET
.
2 Pressthecontinuousmenukey todisplay chapter selection
soft key [TOOLLF].
3 Presssoft key [TOOLLF].
4 Onepagedisplays dataon two groups. Pressing pagekey or
successively displaysdataonthefollowinggroups.
TOOL LI FE DATA : O0001 N0001
SELECTED GROUP 001
GROUP 001 : LI FE 9800 COUNT 6501
*0034 *0078 *0012 *0056
*0090 *0076 *0032 *0098
@0054 0010 0099 0087
0077 0065 0043 0096
*0011 *0022 *0201 *0144
*0155 #0066 0176 0188
0019 0234 0007 0112
0156 0090 0016 0232
TO BE CHANGED : 006 012 013 014 - - - >
NUM. S 0 T0101
21: 28: 37 MDI
5 Todisplay thepagecontainingthedatafor agroup, Press NO. key
andenter thegroupnumber andpress INPUT key.
Thecursor canbemovedtoanarbitrarygroupbypressingcursor key
or .
6 Tochangethevalueinthelifecounter for agroup, movethecursorto
thegroup, enter anewvalue(four digits), andpress INPUT . Thelife
counter for thegroupindicatedby thecursor is preset to theentered
value. Other datafor thegroupisnot changed.
11.4.10
Tool LifeManagement
Data
564
7 Toresetthetool data, movethecursoronthegrouptoreset, thenpress
the--9999 INPUT keysinthisorder.
All execution data for thegroup indicated by thecursor is cleared
together withthemarks(@, #, or *).
Thetool lifemanagement datamust beexecutedtoregister itintheCNC
memory.
Part program
storage &
editingarea
1.EDIT mode
Editing Display
Counter
presenting
2. AUTO mode
Tool life data area
Memory
Memory
Display
1 Loadtheprogramfortool lifemanagementintheEDITmode, aswith
anordinary CNC tape.
Theprogramwill beregisteredinthepart programmemory andwill
bemadeready for display andediting.
2 PerformacyclestartoperationintheAUTOmodetoruntheprogram.
Thedatawill bestoredinthetool lifedataareaof thememory; atthe
same time, the already existing tool life dataof all groups will be
cancelledandthelifecounterswill becleared. Dataoncestoredisnot
erasedby turningthepower off.
TOOL LI FE DATA : O0001 N0001
SELECTED GROUP 001
*0034 *0078 *0012 *0056
*0090 *0076 *0032 *0098
@0054 0010 0099 0087
0077 0065 0043 0096
*0011 *0022 *0201 *0144
*0155 #0066 0176 0188
0019 0234 0007 0112
0156 0090 0016 0232
TO BE CHANGED : 006 012 013 014 - - - >
NUM. S 0 T0101
21: 28: 37 MDI
Explanations
D Registeringtool life
managementdata
D Displaycontents
565
Thefirst lineisthetitleline.
In the second line the group number of the current command is
displayed.
Whenthereisnogroupnumberof thecurrentcommand, 0isdisplayed.
Inlines3to7thetool lifedataof thegroupisdisplayed.
Thethirdlinedisplaysgroupnumber, lifeandthecount used.
Thelifecountischosenbyparameter (No.0039#2)aseitherminutes(or
hours) or number of timesused.
In lines 4 to 7, tool numbers are displayed. In this case, the tool is
selectedintheorder, 0034 0078 0012 056 0090...
Themeaningof eachmark beforethetool numbersis:
* : Showsthelifehasfinished.
#: Showsthat theskipcommandhasbeenaccepted.
@: Showsthat thetool iscurrently beingused.
Thelifecounter countsfor tool with@.
* is displayed when the next command is issued by the group to
whichit belongs.
Lines8to12arenext grouplifedatatothegroupdisplayedinlines3
to7.
Inthethirteenthlinethegroupnumber whenthetool changesignal is
being emitted is displayed. The group number display appears in
ascending order. When it cannot becompletely displayed, ------> is
displayed.
566
When the CNC and machineare connected, parameters must be set to
determinethespecificationsandfunctionsof themachineinorder tofully
utilizethecharacteristicsof theservomotor or other parts.
This chapter describes how to set parameters on the MDI panel.
Parameterscanalsobeset withexternal input/output devicessuchasthe
Handy File(seeChapter 9).
In addition, pitch error compensation data used for improving the
precisioninpositioningwiththeball screwonthemachinecanbesetor
displayed. The setting data for operating the machine can also be
displayedandset.
SeeChapter 7 for thediagnostic screens displayedby pressingfunction
key
DGNOS
PARAM
.
11.5
SCREENS
DISPLAYEDBY
FUNCTIONKEY
DGNOS
PARAM
567
DatasuchastheTV check flagandpunchcodeisset onthesettingdata
screen. On this screen, theoperator can also enable/disableparameter
writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence numbers in
program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number
comparisonandstopfunction.
SeeChapter 9for automatic insertionof sequencenumbers.
Seesubsec11.5.2for thesequencenumber comparisonandstopfunction.
Thissubsectiondescribeshowtoset data.
Procedurefor settingthesettingdata
1 Select theMDI mode.
2 Pressfunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
.
3 Presssoft key [W.PRM].
Thisscreenconsistsof several pages.
4 Press NO. key, andpress
0
key, INPUT ley.
Toswitcheachscreenof settingdata, presspagekey or .
( SETTI NG 1)
TVON = 1
I SO = 1 ( 0: EI A1: I SO )
I NCH = 0 ( 0: MM 1: I NCH)
I / O = 0
SEQ = 1
CLOCK 97/ 05/ 16
12: 11: 52
NO. TVON
21: 35: 25 MDI
11.5.1
Displayingand
EnteringSettingData
568
( SETTI NG 2)
_PWE = 0 ( 0: DI SABLE 1: ENABLE)
TAPEF= 0
( SEQUENCE STOP)
PRGNO= 0
SEQNO= 0
PART TOTAL = 23
PART REQUI RED = 0
PART COUNT = 23
RUN TI ME 3H36M CYCLE TOME 0H 0M0S
NO. PWE
21: 36: 25 MDI
5 Movethecursor to theitemto bechanged by pressing cursor keys
, .
6 Enter anewvalueandpress INPUT key.
SettingtoperformTV check.
0: NoTV check
1: PerformTV check
Settingcodewhendataisoutput throughreader puncher interface.
0: EIA codeoutput
1: ISOcodeoutput (Tooutput tofloppy cassette, besuretoset to1.)
Settingaprograminput unit, inchor metric system
0: Metric
1: Inch
Usingchannel of reader/puncher interface.
0: Channel 1
1: Channel 1
2: Channel 2
3: Channel 3
Settingof whether toperformautomaticinsertionof thesequencenumber
or not at programedit intheEDIT mode.
0: Doesnot performautomatic sequencenumber insertion.
1: Performautomatic sequencenumber insertion.
Settingwhether parameter writingisenabledor disabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled(P/S alarmNo.100isdisplayed.)
Contents of settings
D TVON
D ISO
D INCH
D I/O
D SEQUENCE STOP
D PWE
569
SettingtheF10/11tapeformat conversion.
0: Tapeformat isnot converted.
1: Tapeformat isconverted.
SeePROGRAMMINGfor theF10/11tapeformat.
Tosetthetime, movethecursortodate/time, enter desireddata, thenpress
the INPUT key. Thedateisdisplayedintheyear/month/day format. The
time is displayed in the hour:minute:second format (24--hour clock
format).
D TAPEF
D Time
570
If ablockcontainingaspecifiedsequencenumber appearsintheprogram
being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is
executed.
Procedurefor sequencenumber comparisonandstop
2 Pressfunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
.
3 Presschapter selectionsoft key [PARAM].
4 Press NO. key andpress
0
key, INPUT key.
5 Presspagekey todisplay thefollowingscreen.
( SETTI NG 2)
TAPEF= 0
( SEQUENCE STOP)
PRGNO= 0
SEQNO= 0
PART TOTAL = 23
PART REQUI RED = 0
PART COUNT = 23
NO. PWE
21: 36: 25 MDI
6 Enter in(PRGNO) for SEQUENCE STOP thenumber (1to9999) of
theprogramcontaining thesequence number with which operation
stops.
7 Enter in (SEQNO) for SEQUENCE STOP (with four or lessdigits)
thesequencenumber withwhichoperationisstopped.
8 Whenautomatic operationisexecuted, operationenterssingleblock
modeat theblock containing thesequencenumber which has been
set.
11.5.2
SequenceNumber
ComparisonandStop
571
After thespecifiedsequencenumber isfoundduringtheexecutionof the
program, the sequence number set for sequence number compensation
andstopisdecrementedbyone. Whenthepower isturnedon, thesetting
of thesequencenumber is0.
If thepredetermined sequencenumber is found in a block in which all
commands are those to be processed within the CNC control unit, the
executiondoesnot stopat that block.
Example
N1#1=1;
N2IF[#1EQ1]GOTO08;
N3GOTO09;
N4M98P1000;
N5M99;
In theexampleshown above, if the predetermined sequence number is
found, theexecutionof theprogramdoesnot stop.
If thepredetermined sequencenumber is found in a block which has a
canned--cycle command, the execution of the programstops after the
returnoperationiscompleted.
If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a
program, theexecutionof theprogramstopsafter theblockinwhichthe
predeterminedsequencenumber isfoundfor thefirst timeisexecuted.
If thepredeterminedsequencenumber isfoundinablock whichistobe
executedrepeatedly, theexecutionof theprogramstopsafter theblockis
executedspecifiedtimes.
Explanations
D Sequencenumber after
theprogramis executed
D Exceptional blocks
D Stopinthecannedcycle
D Whenthesame
sequencenumber is
foundseveral times in
theprogram
D Blocktoberepeateda
specifiednumber of
times
572
Various run times, thetotal number of machined parts, number of parts
required, andnumber of machinedpartscanbedisplayed. Thisdatacan
beset by parametersor onthisscreen.
Procedurefor DisplayingandSettingRunTime, Parts CountandTime
2 Pressfunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
.
3 Presschapter selectionsoft key [PARAM].
4 Presspagekey todisplay thefollowingscreen.
( SETTI NG 2)
TAPEF= 0
( SEQUENCE STOP)
PRGNO= 0
SEQNO= 0
PART TOTAL = 23
PART REQUI RED = 0
PART COUNT = 23
NO. PWE
21: 36: 25 MDI
5 Tosetthenumberof partsrequiredandpartscount, movethecursorto
PARTS REQUIRED or PARTS COUNT and enter the number of
parts, andpress INPUT key.
6 Toset theoperationgtimeor cuttingtime, movethecursor toDATE
or TIME, enter anewhour/minute/second, thenpress INPUT key.
ThisvalueisincrementedbyonewhenM02, M30, or anMcodespecified
by parameter 219 is executed. This valuecannot beset on thisscreen.
Set thevalueinparameter 0779.
It isusedfor settingthenumber of machinedpartsrequired.
Whenthe0 is set to it, thereisno limitationto thenumber of parts.
Also, itssettingcanbemadeby theparameter (NO. 0600).
ThisvalueisincrementedbyonewhenM02, M30, or anMcodespecified
by parameter 219 is executed. In general, this value is reset when it
reachesthenumber of partsrequired. Refer tothemanual issued by the
machinetool builder for details.
11.5.3
RunTime, Parts Count,
andTime
Display items
D PARTS TOTAL
D PARTS REQUIRED
D PARTS COUNT
573
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the
stopandfeedholdtime.
Indicatestheruntimeof oneautomaticoperation, excludingthestopand
feed hold time. This is automatically preset to 0 when acycle start is
performedat reset state. It ispreset to0evenwhenpower isremoved.
When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of
machinedpartsandthenumberof machinedpartsareincrementedbyone.
Therefore, createtheprogramsothatM02or M30isexecutedeverytime
theprocessing of onepart is completed. Furthermore, if anM codeset
totheparameter (NO. 219) isexecuted, countingis madein thesimilar
manner. Also, it is possibleto disablecounting evenif M02or M30is
executed(parameter (No. 0040#3) issetto1). For details, seethemanual
issuedby machinetool builders.
D OPERATINGTIME
D CYCLE TIME
Explanations
D Usage
574
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to
determinethespecificationsandfunctionsof themachineinorder tofully
utilizethecharacteristics of theservo motor. Thesetting of parameters
depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the
Normally, theuser neednot changeparameter setting.
Procedurefor displayingandsettingparameters
1 Pressfunctionkey
DGNOS
PARAM
.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display theparameter
screen.
NO. DATA NO. DATA
0001 00000000 0011 00000000
0002 00000001 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
0004 01110111 0014 00000100
0005 01110111 0015 00000000
0006 01110111 0016 00000000
0007 01110111 0017 11111111
0008 00000000 0018 00000000
0009 00000000 0019 10000000
0010 11100000 0020 00000000
NO. 0001 =
21: 39: 31 MDI
3 Movethecursor to theparameter number to be set or displayed in
either of thefollowingways:
Press NO. key andenter theparameter number andpress INPUT
key.
Movethecursor to the parameter number using the pagekeys,
and , andcursor keys, , .
4 Tosettheparameter set1for PWE(PARAMETERWRITE)toenable
writing. Seetheprocedurefor settingdatawritingdescribedbelow.
5 Enter anewvaluewithnumeric keysandpress INPUT keyintheMDI
mode. The parameter is set to the entered value and the value is
displayed.
6 Set 0for PWE (PARAMETERWRITE) todisablewriting.
7 Toreleasethealarm, pressthe
RESET
key.
11.5.4
Parameters
575
SeeChapter 8 for setting parameters with external input/output devices
suchastheHandy File.
Someparameters arenot effectiveuntil the power is turned off and on
againafter theyareset. Settingsuchparameterscausesalarm000. Inthis
case, turnoff thepower, thenturnit onagain.
Explanations
D Settingparameters with
external input/output
devices
D Parameters thatrequire
turningoff thepower
576
If pitcherror compensationdataisspecified, pitcherrorsof eachaxiscan
becompensatedper axis.
Pitch error compensation datais set for each compensation point at the
intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the
referencepositiontowhichthetool isreturned.
Thepitcherror compensationdataisset accordingto thecharacteristics
of themachine. Thecontentof thisdatavariesaccordingtothe machine
model. If it ischanged, themachineaccuracy isreduced.
Inprinciple, theenduser must not alter thisdata.
Pitcherror compensationdatacanbesetwithexternal devicessuchasthe
Handy File (see Chapter 8). Compensation data can also be written
directly withtheMDI panel.
Thefollowingparametersmust beset for pitch error compensation. Set
thepitcherror compensationvalueby theseparameters.
Inthefollowingexample, 33isset for thepitcherror compensationpoint
at thereferenceposition.
1
2
3
33 32 31 34 35 36 37
--1
--2
j 035 j 036 j 037 j 038 j 032 j 033 j 034
+3 --1 --1 +1 +2 --1 --3
34 35 36 37 31 32 33
Reference position
Pitcherror compensationvalue (absolute value)
Compensationnumber param-
eter for the reference position
(No.V000)
Compensation interval parameter
(No. 712 to 715)
V : Axis number
Compensationmagnification
parameter (No. 011#0, #1)
Parameter
Compensation
positionnumber
Compensation
value to be set
Number of thepitcherror compensationpoint atthereferenceposition
(V : axisnumber) : Parameter No. V000
Pitcherror compensationmagnification: Parameter No. 011#0, #1
Interval of thepitch error compensation points: Parameter No. 0712
to0715
Settingcompensationvalue: Parameter No. V001+compensation
points
11.5.5
PitchError
CompensationData
577
128 compensation points fromNo. 0to 127areavailablefor eachaxis.
Specify thecompensationnumber for thereferencepositionof eachaxis
inthecorrespondingparameter (Parameter n000, n: axisnumber).
Specify the compensation value in the corresponding parameter
(Parameter n001+compensationpoint number, n: axisnumber).
Compensationvaluescanbesetwithintherangefrom--7xcompensation
magnification (output unit) to +7 x compensation magnification
(detectionunit). Thecompensationmagnificationcanbeset1, 2, 4, 8in
parameter No. 011#0, #1. Theunits of the compensation value can be
changed to the detection units if bit 7 of parameter 035 is specified
accordingly.
The pitch error compensation points are arranged with equally spaced.
Set the space between two adjacent positions for each axis to the
parameter (No. 712to715).
Validdatarangeis0to99999999.
Theminimuminterval betweenpitcherror compensationpointsislimited
andobtainedfromthefollowingequation:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation points = maximum
feedrate(rapidtraverserate) / 1875
Unit: mm, inches, deg, andmm/min, inches/min, deg/min
For therotating axis, theinterval between thepitch error compensation
pointsshall besettooneperinteger of theamountof movement(normally
360) per rotation. Thesumof all pitcherror compensation amountsper
rotationmust bemadeto0.
Notethat thepitcherror isnot compensatedinthefollowingcases:
Whenthemachineisnot returnedtothereferencepositionafter
turningonthepower. If anabsolute--positiondetector isprovidedand
if thereferencepositionhasbeendetermined, pitcherror
compensationiscarriedout.
If theinterval betweenthepitcherror compensationpointsis0.
Explanations
D Compensationpoint
number
D Compensationvalue
Restrictions
D Compensationvalue
range
D Intervals of
compensationpoints
D Pitcherror compensation
of therotaryaxis
D Conditions wherepitch
error compensationis
notperformed
578
Machinestroke: --400mmto+800mm
Interval betweenthepitcherror compensationpoints: 50mm
No. of thecompensationpoint of thereferenceposition: 40
If theaboveisspecified, theNo. of thefarthest compensationpoint inthe
negativedirectionisasfollows:
No. of thecompensationpointof thereferenceposition-- (Machinestroke
onthenegativeside/Interval betweenthecompensationpoints) +1
=40-- 400/50+1=33
No. of the farthest compensation point in the positive direction is as
follows:
No. of thecompensationpointof thereferenceposition+(Machinestroke
onthepositiveside/Interval betweenthecompensationpoints)
=40+800/50=56
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensationpoint No. isasfollows:
33 39 40 41 42 56
--400 --350 --100 --50
0
50 100 750 800
Machine
coordinate (mm)
Compensation
point number.
Compensationvaluesareoutput at thepositionsindicatedby .
Therefore, set theparametersasfollows:
Parameter Settingvalue
1000: Compensationnumber for the reference position 40
011#0, #1: Compensationmagnification #0=0, #1=0
0712: Interval betweenpitcherror compensationpoints 50000
The compensation amount is output at the compensation point No.
correspondingtoeachsectionbetweenthecoordinates.
Thefollowingisanexampleof thecompensationamounts.
Compensation
value
Compensation
position number
1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042
+2 +1 +1 --2 0 --1 0 --1 +2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050
+1
0 --1 --1 --2 0 +1 +2
1057
1
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
56
Parameter
Parameter
Compensation
position number
Compensation
value
Examples
D For linear axis (Xaxis)
579
--400
--300 --200
--100
100 200 300 400
(mm) 0
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
--1
--2
--3
--4
+1
+2
+3
+4
Pitch error compensation value
(absolute value)
Reference
position
X
Amount of movement per rotation: 360
Interval betweenpitcherror compensationpoints: 45
No. of thecompensationpoint of thereferenceposition: 60
If theaboveisspecified, theNo. of thefarthest compensationpoint inthe
negative direction for the rotating axis is always equal to the
compensationpoint No. of thereferenceposition.
TheNo. of thefarthest compensationpoint inthepositivedirectionisas
follows:
No. of thecompensationpointof thereferenceposition+(Moveamount
per rotation/Interval betweenthecompensationpoints)
=60+360/45=68
The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the
compensationpoint No. isasfollows:
0.0
45.0
90.0
135.0
180.0
225.0
270.0
315.0
(68)
(60)
(67)
(66)
(65) (64)
(63)
(62)
(61)
(+)
Reference position
Compensationvalues are output at the positions indicatedby .
D For rotaryaxis (C axis)
580
If thesumof thecompensationvaluesfor positions61to68isnot0, pitch
error compensation values are accumulated for each rotation, causing
positional deviation.
Thesamevaluemust beset for compensationpoints60and68.
Therefore, set theparametersasfollows:
Parameter Settingvalue
4000: Compensationnumber for the reference posi-
tion
60
011#0, #1: Compensationmagnification #0=0, #1=0
715: Interval betweenpitcherror compensationpoints 45000
Thefollowingisanexampleof compensationamounts.
(deg)
0
61 62 63 64 65 66 67
68
(60)
-- 1
-- 2
-- 3
-- 4
+1
+2
+3
+4
Pitch error compensation value
(absolute value)
Reference position
45 90 135180225 270315
61 62 63 64 65 66 67
45 90 135180225 270315
0
61 62
45 90
68
(60)
4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069
+1 --2 +1 +3 --1 --1 --3 +2 +1
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
Parameter
Compensation
value
Compensation
position number
C
581
Thealarmmessageandoperatormessagecanbedisplayedbypressingthe
OPR
ALARM key. The software operators panel can also be displayed and
specified. For detailsof howto display thealarmmessage, seeChapter
7.
Theoperator messagefunctiondisplaysamessageonthePMC screen.
Procedurefor DisplayingOperator Message
1 Pressfunctionkey
OPR
ALARM
2 presssoft key [MSG].
OPERATOR MESSAG O0000 N0000
11: 09: 56 MDI
[ ALARM] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ ] [ ]
NO. 2001
COOLANT ON
DIf theoperator messagedisplay functionisenabled, thescreenis
automatically switchedtotheoperator messagescreen.
DA PMC commandcanalsobeusedtoclear theoperator message.
DFor detailsof thecontentsof theoperator message, andhowtoclear the
message, refer tothemanual providedby themachinetool builder.
11.6
SCREENS
DISPLAYEDBY
FUNCTIONKEY
OPR
ALARM
11.6.1
DisplayingOperator
Message
Explanations
582
With this function, functions of theswitches on themachineoperators
panel canbecontrolledfromtheCRT/MDI panel.
J ogfeedcanbeperformedusingnumeric keys.
Procedurefor displayingandsettingthesoftwareoperators panel
1 Pressfunctionkey
OFFSET
SETTING
.
2 Presschapter selectionsoft key [OPR].
3 Thescreenconsistsof several pages.
Presspagekey or until thedesiredscreenisdisplayed.
OPERATOR S PANEL O0001 N0001
_MODE : MDI J AUTO EDI T HNDL J OG ZRN
HANDLE AXI S : J HX HZ
HANDLE MULT. : J *1 *10 *100
RAPI D OVRD. : J 100% 50% 25% F0
J OG FEED : 500 MM/ MI N
* *
FEED OVERD : 90%
* * * * * *
ACTUAL POSI TI ON ( ABSOLUTE)
X 164. 000 Z 182. 000
C 0. 000 Y - 30. 500
21: 37: 41 MDI
[ ALARM] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ MACRO ] [ ]
OPERATOR S PANEL O0001 N0001
_BLOCK SKI P : J OFF J ON
SI NGLE BLOCK : J OFF J ON
MACHI NE LOCK : J OFF J ON
DRY RUN : J OFF J ON
PROTECT KEY : J PROTECT RELEASE
FEED HOLD : J OFF J ON
X 164. 000 Z 182. 000
C 0. 000 Y - 30. 500
21: 38: 35 MDI
[ ALARM] [ OPR ] [ MSG ] [ ] [ ]
4 Movethecursor tothedesiredswitchbypressingcursor key or
.
11.6.2
theSoftware
Operators Panel
583
5 Push thenumerical key or to match themark J toan
arbitrary positionandset thedesiredcondition.
6 Pressoneof thefollowingarrowkeystoperformjogfeed. Pressthe
5
key together withanarrowkey toperformjograpidtraverse.
1
8
2
4 5 6
9 7
6
Thevalid operations onthesoftwareoperators panel areshownbelow.
Whether to usetheCRT or machineoperators panel for each groupof
operationscanbeselectedby parameter 0017.
Group1 : Modeselection
Group2 : Selectionof jogfeedaxis, jograpidtraverse
Group3 : Selectionof manual pulsegenerator feedaxis, selectionof
manual pulsemagnificationx1, x10, x100
Group4 : J ogfederate, federateoverride, rapidtraverseoverride
Group5 : Optional block skip, singleblock, machinelock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feedhold
The groups for which the machine operators panel is selected by
parameter 0017arenot displayedonthesoftwareoperatorspanel.
WhentheCRT indicatesother thanthesoftwareoperators panel screen
anddiagnostic screen, jogfeedisnot conductedevenif thearrowkey is
pushed.
Thefeed axis and direction corresponding to thearrowkeys can beset
withparameters(Nos. 0130to0137).
Eight optionally definableswitchesareaddedasanextendedfunctionof
thesoftwareoperatorspanel. Thenameof theseswitchescanbesetby
parametersascharacter stringsof max. 8characters. For themeaningsof
theseswitches, refer tothemanual issuedby machinetool builder.
Explanations
D Validoperations
D Display
D Screens onwhichjog
feedis valid
D J ogfeedandarrowkeys
D General purpose
switches
584
The program number, sequence number, and current CNC status are
alwaysdisplayedonthescreenexcept whenthepower is turnedon or a
systemalarmoccurs.
This section describes the display of the program number, sequence
number, andstatus.
Theprogramnumber andsequencenumber aredisplayedatthetopright
onthescreenasshownbelow.
PROGRAM O0001 N0000
O0001 T0101 ;
S550 M08 ;
M45 ;
N010 G50 X200. Z200. ;
N011 G00 X160. Z180. ;
N012 G71 U7. R1. ;
N013 G71 P014 Q020 U4. W2. F0. 3 S550 M03 ;
N014 G00 X40. F0. 15 S700 ;
<
16: 09: 08 EDI T
Theprogramnumber andsequencenumber displayeddependonthe
screenandaregivenbelow:
OntheprogramscreenintheEDIT modeonBackgroundedit screen:
TheprogramNo. beingeditedandthesequencenumber justprior tothe
cursor areindicated.
Other thanabovescreens:
TheprogramNo. andthesequenceNo. executedlast areindicated.
Immediately after program number search or sequence number
search:
Immediatelyafter theprogramNo. searchandsequence No. search, the
programNo. andthesequenceNo. searchedareindicated.
11.7
DISPLAYINGTHE
PROGRAMNUMBER,
SEQUENCE
NUMBER, AND
STATUS, AND
WARNING
MESSAGESFOR
DATASETTING
11.7.1
DisplayingtheProgram
NumberandSequence
Number
585
The current mode, automatic operation state, alarmstate, and program
editing state are displayed on the next to last line on the CRT screen
allowingtheoperator toreadily understandtheoperationconditionof the
system.
NOT READY S 500 T0101
11: 53: 05 ALARMBAT BUF EDI T I NPUT
(Di spl ay sof t keys)
MDI : Manual datainput
AUTO : Automatic operation
RMT : Automatic operation(Tapeoperation, or suchlike)
EDIT : Memory editing
HNDL : Manual handlefeed
J OG : J ogfeed
TJ OG : TEACH IN J OG
THND : TEACH IN HANDLE
STEP : Manual incremental feed
ZRN : Manual referencepositionreturn
ALARM : Indicatesthat analarmisissued.
BAT : Indicatesthat thebattery islow.
hh:mm:ss -- Hours, minutes, andseconds
INPUT : Indicatesthat dataisbeinginput.
OUTPUT : Indicatesthat dataisbeingoutput.
SRCH : Indicatesthat asearchisbeingperformed.
EDIT : Indicatesthat another editingoperationisbeingperformed
(insertion, modification, etc.)
COMPARE : Indicatesthat theprogramisbeingcollated.
LSK : Indicatesthat labelsareskippedwhendataisinput.
RSTR : Indicatesthat theprogramisbeingrestarted
BUF : Indicatesthat theblock tobeexecutednext isbeingread.
NOT READY : Indicatesthat thesystemisintheemergency stopstate.
Theactual spindlespeedisdisplayedafter S. (Thethreadingfunctionor
synchronousfeedfunctionisrequired.)
ThespecifiedT codeisdisplayed.
Todisplay theactual spindlespeed andT code, bit 2of parameter 0014
must bespecifiedaccordingly.
11.7.2
DisplayingtheStatus
andWarningfor Data
Setting
Explanations
D Descriptionof each
display
1. Currentmode
2. Alarmstatus
3. Currenttime
4. Other status display
5. Actual spindlespeed(S)
6. T code
OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION B--61394E/08
586
12
GRAPHICS FUNCTION
The graphic function indicates how the tool moves during automatic
operationor manual operation.
OPERATION B--61394E/08 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION
587
It ispossibletodrawtheprogrammedtool pathonthe9--inchor 14--inch
CRT screen, whichmakesitpossibletocheck theprogressof machining,
whileobservingthepathontheCRT screen.
Inaddition, it isalsopossibletoenlarge/reducethescreen.
Thedrawingcoordinates(parameter) andgraphic parametersmust beset
beforeatool pathcanbedisplayed.
With0--TTC, thetool pathsof twotool postsaredisplayedon thesame
screen, oneontheright andtheother ontheleft.
Graphics displayprocedure
Setthedrawingcoordinateswithparameter No.0123beforestartingdrawing.
SeeDrawingCoordinateSystemfor thesettingsandcoresponding
coordinates.
1 Pressfunctionkey
AUX
GRAPH
.
Thegraphic parameter screenshownbelowappears.
GRAPHI C PARAMETER O0001 N0022
WORK LENGTH W= 250000
WORK DI AMETER D = 250000
PROGRAMSTOP N = 0
AUTO ERASE A = 0
LI MI T L = 0
GRAPHI C CENTER X = 59479
Z = 175019
SCALE S = 33
GRAPHI C MODE4 M= 0
NO. N = S 0 T0101
21: 43: 29 AUTO
[ GRAPH ] [ ] [ ZOOM ] [ ] [ AUX ]
2 For the0--TTC, detreminefor which tool post thedataisspecified,
usingatool post select signal.
Specify the PROGRAM STOP (N), AUTO ERASE (A), and
GRAPHICCENTER(X,Y) parametersseparately for eachtool post.
The other parameters are common to both tool posts. It does not
matter for whichtool post they arespecifiedfirst.
3 Movethecursor withthecursor keystoaparameter toset.
4 Enter data, thenpressthe INPUT key.
5 Repeat steps3and4until all requiredparametersarespecified.
6 Presssoft key [GRAPH].
7 Automatic or manual operation isstarted andmachinemovement is
drawnonthescreen.
12.1
GRAPHICSDISPLAY
Procedure
588
S 0. 33 O0001 N0022
X200. 000
Z 220. 000
C 0. 000
Y 0. 000
S 0 T0101
21: 46: 31 AUTO
X
Z
0--TC
HEAD2 : O0210N2930
S 0 T
15: 33: 55 BUF AUTO
X
Z
0--TTC
589
Part of adrawingonthescreencanbemagnified.
8 Press the
AUX
GRAPH
functionkey, thenthe[ZOOM] soft key to display a
magnified drawing. The magnified--drawing screen contains two
zoomcursors(J )
S 0. 33 O0001 N0022
X200. 000
W 250000 Z 220. 000
D 250000 C 0. 000
Y 0. 000
S 0 T0101
21: 53: 49 AUTO
[ GRAPH ] [ G. PRM] [ ZOOM ] [ ACT ] [ HI / LO ]
X
Z
A rectanglethat has one of its diagonals defined by the two zoom
cursorsismagnifiedtothefull sizeof thescreen.
9 Using the numerical keys
2 8 6 4
, move thezoom
cursorstospecifyadiagonal forthenewscreen. Pressingthe[HI /LO]
soft key togglesthezoomcursor tobemoved.
10 Tomaketheoriginal drawingdisappear, press[EXEC].
11 Resumetheprevious operation. Thepart of the drawing specified
with the zoom cursors will be
magnified.
S 0. 56 O0001 N0022
X200. 000
Z 220. 000
C 0. 000
Y 0. 000
S 0 T0101
21: 49: 53 AUTO
X
Z
12 Todisplay theoriginal drawing, pressthe[NORMAL] soft key, then
start automatic operation.
D Magnifyingdrawings
590
Explanation
Parameter No. 0123isusedtoset adrawingcoordinatesystemfor using
the graphic function. The relationships between setting values and
drawingcoordinatesystemsareindicatedbelow. With0--TTC, adifferent
drawingcoordinatesystemcanbeselectedfor eachtool post.
Setting value=0 Setting value=1 Setting value=2 Setting value=3
Setting value=4 Setting value=5 Setting value=6 Setting value=7
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
WORKLENGTH(W), WORKDIAMETER(D)
Specify work lengthandwork diameter. Thetablebelowliststhe
input unit andvaliddatarange.
W
D
X
Z
W
D
Z
X
Table12.1 UnitandRangeof DrawingData
Incrementsystem
Unit
Validrange Incrementsystem
mminput Inchinput
Validrange
IS--B 0.001mm 0.0001inch
0to 99999999
IS--C 0.0001mm 0,00001inch
0to 99999999
D Settingdrawing
coordinatesystems
D Graphics parameter
591
GRAPHIC CENTER(X, Z), SCALE (S)
A screencenter coordinateanddrawingscalearedisplayed. A scale
screencenter coordinateareautomaticallycalculatedsothatafigureset
inWORK LENGTH (a) andWORK DIAMETER (b) canbefully
displayedonthescreen. So, theuser neednot set theseparameters
usually.
A screencenter coordinateisdefinedintheworkpiececoordinate
system. Table12. 3. 2indicatestheunitandrange. Theunitof SCALE
is0.001%.
PROGRAMSTOP(N)
Set thesequencenumber of anendblock whenpart of theprogramis
tobedrawn. A valueset inthisparameter isautomatically cancelled
(clearedto0) onceadrawingisprovided.
AUTOERASE (A)
If 1isset, thepreviousdrawingisautomaticallyerasedwhenautomatic
operationisstatedfromthereset state. Then, drawingisstarted.
LIMIT(L)
If 1isset, theareaof storedstrokelimitl isdrawnwithdouble--dot--and
--dashlines.
NOTE
The parameter values for drawing are preserved even if
power is turned off.
Since the graphic drawing is done when coordinate value is renewed
duringautomatic operation, etc., it isnecessary tostart theprogramby
automatic operation. To executedrawing without moving themachine,
therefore, enter themachinelock state.
Pressingthe[GRAPH] soft key after graphic parameter is modifiedthen
tool paths aredeleted. Setting thegraphic parameter as AUTOERASE
(A) =1 specifies that when MEMORY operation is started at reset,
program execution begins after the previous drawing is erased
automatically (AUTOERASE =1).
Whennecessary todisplay apart of aprogram, searchthestartingblock
tobedrawnbythesequenceNo. search, andsetthesequenceNo. of the
endblock tothePROGRAM STOP N=of thegraphic parameter before
startingtheprogramunder cycleoperationmode.
Thetool pathisshown withadashedline( ) for rapid traverseand
withasolidline( ) for cuttingfeed.
Thedisplayeddrawingisindicatedwithcoordinatesinaworkcoordinate
system.
Even if the screen is switched to a non--drawing screen, drawing
continues. When the drawing screen is displayed again, the entire
drawingappears(nopartsaremissing).
D Executingdrawingonly
D Deletingtheprevious
drawing
D Drawingapartof a
program
D Drawingusingdashed
lines andsolidlines
D Displayingcoordinates
D Switchingfroma
drawingscreento
another screen
592
For the 0--TTC, bit 1 of parameter No.0047 can be used to determine
whether thetool pathfor eachtool postistobedrawnonaseparatescreen
or whether thetool pathsfor bothtool postsaretobedrawnonthesame
screen.
HEAD2 : O0210N2930
S 0 T
15: 33: 55 BUF AUTO
X
Z
When the tool paths of the both tool posts areto bedisplayed on one
screen, parameterNo. 123for tool post1isusedtosetacoordinatesystem
for drawing.
Incasethefeedrateisconsiderably high, drawing may not beexecuted
correctly, decreasethespeedby dry--run, etc. toexecutedrawing.
If theWORK andDIAMETER graphic parameters arenot set correctly,
thedrawingcannotbemagnified. Toreduceadrawing, specifyanegative
value for the SCALE graphic parameter. The machine zero point is
indicatedwithaquestionmark.
D Drawingfor tool posts 1
and2(0--TTC)
Restrictions
D Feedrate
D Zoomingdrawings
13. DISPLAY ANDOPERATION OF
00--TC/00--GCC
593
13
DISPLAYANDOPERATIONOF00---TC/00---GCC
TheCRT/MDI panel of 00--TC/00--GCC consistsof aCRT display (14
color) andkeyboard. Contentsof display andoperation by key input are
completely different depending on whether the CNC screen or MMC
screenisdisplayedontheCRT/MDI panel. Inthismanual, theoperation
whenonlytheCNCscreenisdisplayedisdescribed. Refer tothemanual
of machinetool builder for MMC screen.
Reset key
MMC/CNC switch key
Shift key
Start/output key
Programedit key
Input key
Function key
Fig. 13 CRT/MDI for 00--TC
OPERATION
00--TC/00--GCC B--61394E/08
594
PressCNCkeyontheCRT/MDI panel todisplaytheCNCscreenwhen
theMMCscreenisdisplayedontheCRT display of theCRT/MDI panel.
TheCNC screen consists of avariablesection and afixed section. The
variablesectionisthepart that issurroundedby theframeat thebottom
right, and its display contents arethesameas displayed onthe9 CRT
displayof 0--TC. Therefore, thescreenselectedbyfunctionkey, pagekey,
cursor key, andsoft key isdisplayed. Thefixed sectionis therest of the
above variable section, and its display contents are position data,
operationtime(optional), modal data, andS, T commandvalue, asshown
on the screen in theFig. 13.1. Display items of this section cannot be
changedby thescreenselectionoperation. However, itsdisplaycontents
arealwaysrenewed.
PARAMETER
NO. DATA NO. DATA
0001 00000000 0011 00000000
0002 00000001 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
0004 01110111 0014 00000100
0005 01110111 0015 00000000
0006 01110111 0016 00000000
0007 01110111 0017 11111111
0008 00000000 0018 00000000
0009 00000000 0019 10000000
0010 11100000 0020 00000000
NO. 0001
AUTO
PART COUNT 0
RUN TI ME 3H30M
CYCLE TI ME 0H 2M14S
X 0. 000 O0009
Z 0. 000 N0009
( MODAL)
G98 F 0. 3000
G00 M 003
G97 S 00550
G69 T 0101
G99
G21 WX 0. 000
G40 WZ 0. 000
G25 SRPM 0
G22 SSPM 0
G98 SMAX 32767
G98 SACT 0
APS PEL ALL PARAM DGNOS
Fig. 13.1
13.1
DISPLAY
00--TC/00--GCC
595
KeyoperationcanonlybedonewhentheCNCscreenisdisplayedonthe
CRT displayof theCRT/MDI panel. Addresskeysandnumerical keysare
independentlyarrangedon00--TC. However, inputtingdataisexactlythe
same as that of 00--TC/00--GCC. The page key , cursor key
,andselectionkey onthesoftwareoperatorspanel
areof combinedusewiththefunctionkey. Pressthecorrespondingkey
for use as a page key, cursor key, and selection key on the software
operators panel. Press the corresponding key whilepressing the
FUNC
key asthefunctionkey.
Fivekeysontheright half tenkeysareeffectivefor thevariablesection,
andtheother fivekeysontheleft half areeffectivefor selectingposition
display datainthefixedsection.
Whenanumber isspecifiedwithaparameter display andsoforth, please
usethecursor key insteadof NO. key.
13.2
OPERATION
IV. MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE B--61394E/08 1. METHODOF REPLACING BATTERY
599
1
METHODOFREPLACINGBATTERY
Thischapter describesthemethodof replacingbatteriesasfollows.
1.1 REPLACINGCNCBATTERYFORMEMORYBACK--UP
1.2 REPLACINGBATTERIESFORABSOLUTEPULSECODER
MAINTENANCE 1. METHODOF REPLACING BATTERY B--61394E/08
600
WhenthemessageBATappearsatthebottomof thescreen, replacethe
backup batteries for the CNC memory according to the procedure
describedbelow.
Procedurefor replacingCNC batteryfor memoryback--up
1 Havethreecommercially availablefresh alkalineR20 (D) batteries
handy.
2 Switchonthemachine(CNC). (When replacingthebatteries, keep
the CNC switched on. If you replace the batteries with the CNC
switchedoff, thememory contentswill belost.)
3 Loosenthescrewsfor thebattery casecover andremoveit. For the
location of the battery case, refer to therelevant operating manual
issuedby themachinebuilder.
4 Replacethebatteriesinthebatterycasewiththefreshonesyouhave
handy. Becareful for theorientation of thebatteries. Of thethree
batteries, the middleone is in theorientation oppositeto theother
two.
5 After replacingthebatteries, putthebatterycasecover back inplace.
6 Pressthe
RESET
key andensurethemessageBAT disappears.
+
+
+
---
---
---
Screw
Cover
1.1
REPLACINGCNC
BATTERYFOR
MEMORYBACK--UP
MAINTENANCE B--61394E/08 1. METHODOF REPLACING BATTERY
601
If absolutepulse coder alarm3n7 (where n is an axis number) occurs,
replacethebatteries (alkaline) for theabsolutepulsecoder accordingto
theproceduredescribedbelow.
Procedurefor replacingbatteries for absolutepulsecoder
1 Havethreecommercially availablefresh alkalineR20 (D) batteries
handy.
2 Switchonthemachine(CNC). (When replacingthebatteries, keep
the CNC switched on. If you replace the batteries with the CNC
switchedoff, thememory contentswill belost.)
3 Loosenthescrewsfor thebattery casecover andremoveit. For the
location of the battery case, refer to therelevant operating manual
issuedby themachinebuilder.
4 Replacethebatteriesinthebatterycasewiththefreshonesyouhave
handy. Becareful for theorientationof thebatteries. (Placethetwo
batteriesintheorientationoppositetotheother twoasshownbelow.)
5 After replacingthebatteries, putthebatterycasecover back inplace.
6 Switch themachine(CNC) off and on again, andensurethat alarm
3n7doesnot occur.
Screw
Cover
1.2
REPLACING
BATTERIESFOR
ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER
Procedure
APPENDIX
APPENDIX B--61394E/08 A. TAPE CODE LIST
605
A
TAPE CODE LIST
ISO code EIA code Meaning
Charac-
ter
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Charac-
ter
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Without cus-
tommacro B
Withcustom
macro B
0 f f f 0 f f Number 0
1 f f f f f 1 f f Number 1
3 f f f f f 3 f f f f Number 3
7 f f f f f f f 7 f f f f Number 7
A f f f a f f f f Address A
B f f f b f f f f Address B
C f f f f f c f f f f f f Address C
D f f f d f f f f Address D
E f f f f f e f f f f f f Address E
F f f f f f f f f f f f f Address F
G f f f f f g f f f f f f Address G
H f f f h f f f f Address H
I f f f f f i f f f f f f Address I
J f f f f f j f f f f f Address J
K f f f f f k f f f f Address K
L f f f f f l f f f f Address L
M f f f f f m f f f f Address M
N f f f f f n f f f f Address N
O f f f f f f f o f f f f Address O
P f f f p f f f f f f Address P
Q f f f f f q f f f f Address Q
R f f f f f r f f f f Address R
S f f f f f s f f f f Address S
T f f f f f t f f f f Address T
U f f f f f u f f f f Address U
V f f f f f v f f f f Address V
W f f f f f f f w f f f f Address W
X f f f f f x f f f f f f Address X
Y f f f f f y f f f f Address Y
Z f f f f f z f f f f Address Z
APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE LIST B--61394E/08
606
ISO code EIA code Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Without cus-
tommacro B
Withcustom
macro B
DEL f f f f f f f f f Del f f f f f f f f
NUL f Blank f
BS f f f BS f f f f
HT f f f Tab f f f f f f
LF or NL f f f CR or
EOB
f f
CR f f f f f ___
SP f f f SP f f j j
% f f f f f ER f f f f
( f f f (2--4--5) f f f f
) f f f f f (2--4--7) f f f f
+ f f f f f + f f f f
--- f f f f f --- f f
: f f f f f ___
/ f f f f f f f / f f f f
. f f f f f . f f f f f f
# f f f f f Parame-
ter
(No.0044)
$ f f f ___ D f
& f f f f f & f f f f D f
B
f f f f f ___ D f
* f f f f f Parame-
ter
(No.0042)
D
, f f f f f , f f f f f f
; f f f f f f f ___ D D
< f f f f f ___ D D
= f f f f f f f Parame-
ter
(No.0043)
D
> f f f f f f f ___ D D
? f f f f f f f ___ D f
@ f f f ___ D f
f f ___ D D
[ f f f f f f f Parame-
ter
(No.0053)
D
] f f f f f f f Parame-
ter
(No.0054)
D
APPENDIX B--61394E/08 A. TAPE CODE LIST
607
NOTE
1 The symbols used in the remark column have the
following meanings.
(Space): The character will be registered in
memory and has a specific meaning.
If it is used incorrectly in a statement other than a
comment, an alarmoccurs.
: The character will not be registered in memory and
will be ignored.
n : The character will be registered in memory, but
will be ignored during programexecution.
: The character will be registered in memory. If itis
used in a statement other than a comment, an
alarmoccurs.
j : If it is used in a statement other than a comment,
the character will not be registered in memory. If
it is used in a comment, it will be registered in
memory.
2 Codes notinthis tableare ignoredif their parity is correct.
3 Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm. But they
are ignored without generating the TH alarmwhen they
are in the comment section.
4 A character with all eight holes punched is ignored and
does not generate TH alarmin EIA code.
APPENDIX
B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND
TAPE FORMAT B--61394E/08
608
B
LISTOFFUNCTIONS ANDTAPE FORMAT
Somefunctionscannot beaddedasoptionsdependingonthemodel.
In the tables below,
P I
_:presents a combination of arbitrary axis
addressesusingX andZ.
x =1st basic axis(X usually)
z =2ndbasic axis(Zusually)
Functions Illustration Tapeformat
Positioning(G00) P I
Start point
G00 _ ; P I
Linear interpolation(G01) P I
Start point
G01 _ F_; P I
Circular interpolation
(G02, G03)
(x, z)
G03 (x, z)
I
R
K
G02
Start point
R
K
I
Start point
G02
G03
X_ Z_
R_
I_ K_
F_ ;
Dwell (G04)
G04
X_
;
P_
Change of offsetvalue by
program(G10)
Tool geometry offset value
G10P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P=1000+Geometry offset number
Tool wear offset value
G10P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P=Wear offset number
Inch/metric conversion
(G20, G21)
Inchinput : G20
Metric input : G21
Expanded stored stroke
check (G22, G23)
(X, Z)
(I, K)
X
Z
G22X_ Z_ I_ K_ ;
G23; Cancel
Spindle speedfluctuation
detection(G25, G26)
G25;
G26P_ Q_ R_ ;
APPENDIX B--61394E/08
TAPE FORMAT
609
Functions Tapeformat Illustration
check (G27)
P I
Start position
G27 _ ; P I
(G28)
2nd, reference positionre-
turn(G30)
P I
Reference position
(G28)
2ndreference
position(G30)
Start position
G28 _ ; P I
G30 _ ; P I
Skipfubction(G31) P I
Start
position
Skip
signal
G31 _ F_; P I
Threadcutting(G32) F Equal leadthreadcutting
G32 _ F_; P I
Variable lead thread cut-
ting (G34)
G34 _ F_ K_;
IP
Automatic tool compensa-
tion(G36, G37)
Start
position
Measurementt
position
Measurementt
positionarrival
signal
Compensation
value
G36X ;
G37Z;
Cutter compensation
(G40, G41, G42) G41
G42
G40
G41
G42
_ ;
G40: Cancel
IP
Coordinate systemsetting
Spindle speedsetting
(G50)
X
Z
G50 _ ; Coordinate system
setting
G50S_ ; Spindle speed
setting
IP
Local coordinate system
setting (G52)
x
y
Local coordinate
system
Workpiece
coordinate system
P I
G52 ; P_ I
Machine coordinate
systemselection (G53)
G53 ; P_ I
APPENDIX
TAPE FORMAT B--61394E/08
610
Workpiece coordinate
systemselection
(G54to G59)
Workpiece
coordinate system
Workpiece
zero point
offset
P I
Machine coordinate system
G54
:
G59
P_ ; I
Custommacro
(G65, G66, G67)
G65P_ ;
O_ ;
M99;
Macro One ---shot call
G65P_<argument>;
P : Programnumber
Modal call
G66P_<argument>
G67; cancel
Balance cut
(G68, G69)
G68; Balance cut mode
G69; Mode is canceled
Cannedcycles for drilling
(G80to G89)
Refer to the sectionof cannedcycles
for drillingof OPERATORS MANUAL
G80; Cancel
G83
G84
G85
G87
G88
G89
x_ z_ C_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ K_ ;
Mirror image for double
turret (G68, G69)
G68;
Mirror image for double turret on
G69; Mirror image cancel
Feedper minute (G98)
Feedper revolution(G99)
mm/min inch/min
mm/rev inch/rev
G98F_ ;
G99F_ ;
Constant surface speed
control (G96/G97)
m/minor feet/min
N (rpm)
G96S_ ;
G97; Cancel
Chamfering, Corner R k
i
R
C(K) k
R_
P_ ; X_ ;
C(I) i
R_
P_ ;
Z_ ;
TAPE FORMAT
611
Cannedcycle
(G71to G76)
(G90, G92, G94)
Refer to II.14. FUNCTIONS TO SIM-
PLIFY PROGRAMMING
N_ G70P_ Q_ ;
G71U_ R_ ;
G71P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72W_ R_ ;
G72P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G73U_ W_ R_ ;
G73P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G74R_ ;
G74X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G75R_ ;
G75X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G76P_ Q_ R_ ;
G76X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G94X_ Z_ K_ F_ ;
G90
G92
X_ Z_ I_ F_ ;
tool offset _ T_ P I
APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMANDVALUE B--61394E/08
612
C
RANGE OFCOMMANDVALUE
Incrementsystem
IS--B IS--C
Least input increment 0.001mm 0.0001mm
Least commandincre-
ment
0.001mm 0.0001mm
Max. programmable di-
mension
99999.999mm 9999.9999mm
Max. rapidtraverse
Notes
100000mm/min 24000mm/min
Feedrate
range Notes
Per min 1to 100000mm/min 1to 12000mm/min
range Notes
Per rev 0.0001to 500.0000mm/
rev
0.0001to 500.0000mm/
rev
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/
step
0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
mm/step
Tool compensation 0to 999.999mm 0to 999.9999mm
Dwell time 0to 99999.999sec 0to 9999.9999sec
Incrementsystem
IS--B IS--C
Least input increment 0.0001inch 0.00001inch
Least commandincre-
ment
0.001mm 0.0001mm
mension
9999.9999inch 393.70078inch
Max. rapidtraverse
Notes
100000mm/min 24000mm/min
Feedrate
range Notes
Per min 0.01to 4000inch/min 0.01to 12000inch/min
range Notes
Per rev 0.000001to 9.999999
inch/rev
0.000001to 9.999999
inch/rev
Incremental feed 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
inch/step
0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
0.01inch/step
Tool compensation 0to 99.9999inch 0to 99.99999inch
Linear axis
D Incaseof millimeter
input, feedscrewis
millimeter
D Incaseof inchinput,
feedscrewis millimeter
APPENDIX B--61394E/05 C. RANGE OF COMMANDVALUE
613
Incrementsystem
IS--B IS--C
Least input increment 0.0001inch 0.00001inch
Least commandincre-
ment
0.0001inch 0.00001inch
mension
9999.9999inch 999.99999inch
Max. rapidtraverse
Notes
4000inch/min 960inch/min
Feedrate
range Notes
Per min 0.01to 4000inch/min 0.01to 480inch/min
range Notes
Per rev 0.000001to 9.999999
inch/rev
0.000001to 9.999999
inch/rev
Incremental feed 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
inch/step
0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
0.01
inch/step
Tool compensation 0to 99.9999inch 0to 99.99999inch
Incrementsystem
IS--B IS--C
Least input increment 0.001mm 0.0001mm
Least commandincre-
ment
0.0001inch 0.00001inch
mension
99999.999mm 9999.9999mm
Max. rapidtraverse
Notes
4000inch/min 960inch/min
Feedrate
range Notes
Per min 1to 100000mm/min 1to 12000mm/min
range Notes
Per rev 0.0001to 500.0000mm/
rev
0.0001to 500.0000mm/
rev
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/
step
0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
mm/step
Tool compensation 0to 999.999mm 0to 999.9999mm
D Incaseof inchinput,
feedscrewis inch
D Incaseof millimeter
input, feedscrewis inch
APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMANDVALUE B--61394E/08
614
Incrementsystem
IS--B IS--C
Least input incre-
ment
0.001deg 0.0001deg
Least commandin-
crement
0.001deg 0.0001deg
Max. program-
mable dimension
99999.999deg 9999.9999deg
Max. rapidtraverse
Notes
240000deg/min 100000deg/min
Feedrate range
(metric input)
Notes
1to 100000deg/min 1to 24000deg/min
Feedrate range
(inchinput) Notes
1to 6000deg/min 1to 600deg/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1deg/
step
0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1deg/
step
NOTE
The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity. As a whole system,
limitations depending on servo system must also be
considered.
Rotationaxis
APPENDIX B--61394E/08 D. NOMOGRAPHS
615
D
NOMOGRAPHS
APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS B--61394E/08
616
Theleadsof athreadaregenerallyincorrectind
1
andd
2
, asshownin Fig.
D.1(a), duetoautomatic acceleration and deceleration.
Thusdistanceallowancesmust bemadetotheextent of d
1
andd
2
inthe
program.
d
2
d
1
Fig. D.1(a) Incorrectthreadposition
Explanations

2
T
1
V
V
1
60
RL
T
1
: Time constant of servo system(sec)
V : Cuttingspeed(mm/sec)
R : Spindle speed(rpm)
L : Threadfeed(mm)
Time constant T
1
(sec) of
the servo system: Usually
0.033s.
(1) . . . . . . .
(mm)

1
{tT
1
T
1
exp(
t
T
1
)}V
aexp(
t
T
1
)
(2) . . . . . . .
(3) . . . . . . .
T
1
: Time constant of servo system(sec)
V : Cuttingspeed(mm/sec)
Time constant T
1
(sec) of
the servo system: Usually
0.033s.
Thelead at thebeginning of thread cutting is shorter than thespecified
leadL, andtheallowableleaderror is DL. Thenasfollows.
a
L
L
When the value of a is determined, the time lapse until the thread
accuracy is attained. ThetimeHtI is substitutedin (2) to determined
1
:
ConstantsV andT
1
aredeterminedinthesameway asfor d
2
. Sincethe
calculation of d
1
is rather complex, a nomography is provided on the
followingpages.
D.1
INCORRECT
THREADEDLENGTH
D Howtodetermined
2
D Howtodetermined
1
617
Firstspecifytheclassandtheleadof athread. Thethreadaccuracy, a, will
be obtained at , and depending on thetime constant of cutting feed
acceleration/ deceleration, the d
1
value when V =10mm / s will be
obtained at . Then, depending on thespeed of thread cutting, d
1
for
speedother than10mm/ scanbeobtainedat .
Time constant of
servo system
V=40mm/sec
V=20mm/sec
0
d
1
a
L
L
d
1
(V=10mm/sec)
T
1
T
2
See the graph in reference later in
the manual for an actual example.
Fig. D.1(b) Nomograph
NOTE
The equations for d
1
, and d
2
are for when the
acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed is 0.
D Howtousenomograph
618
d
2
d
1
Fig. D.2 Incorrectthreadedportion
L : Threadlead(mm)
* Whentime constant T of the
servo systemis 0.033s.

2

LR
1800* (mm)

1

LR
1800*
(1lna)

2
(1lna)
Followinga is a permitedvalue of thread.
a --1--lna
0.005 4.298
0.01
0.015
0.02
3.605
3.200
2.912
(mm)
(mm)
L : Threadlead(mm)
* Whentime constant T of the
servo systemis 0.033s.
Examples
R=350rpm
L=1mm
a=0.01 then

2

350 1
1800
0.194

1

2
3.6050.701
(mm)
(mm)
D.2
SIMPLE
CALCULATIONOF
INCORRECTTHREAD
LENGTH
Explanations
D Howtodetermined
2
D Howtodetermined
1
619
Nomographfor obtainingapproachdistance d
1
Reference
620
When servo systemdelay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at
cuttingor causedby thepositioningsystemwhenaservomotor isused)
isaccompaniedby cornering, aslight deviationisproduced betweenthe
tool path(tool center path) andtheprogrammedpathasshowninFig. D.3
(a).
Timeconstant T
1
of theexponential acceleration/decelerationis fixedto
0.

V
1
V
2
Tool path
Programmed path
Fig. D.3(a) Slightdeviationbetweenthetool pathand
theprogrammedpath
Thistool pathisdeterminedby thefollowingparameters:
DFeedrate(V
1
, V
2
)
DCorner angle( )
DExponential acceleration/ decelerationtimeconstant (T
1
) at cutting
(T
1
=0)
DPresenceor absenceof buffer register.
Theaboveparametersareusedtotheoreticallyanalyzethetool pathwith
theparameter whichisset asanexample.
When actually programming, the above items must be considered and
programming must be performed carefully so that the shape of the
workpieceiswithinthedesiredprecision.
In other words, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the
theoretical precision, thecommands of thenext block must not beread
until thespecifiedfeedratebecomeszero. Thedwell functionisthenused
tostopthemachinefor theappropriateperiod.
D.3
TOOL PATHAT
CORNER
621
Analysis
Thetool path shown in Fig. D.3(b) is analyzed based on thefollowing
conditions:
Feedrateisconstant at bothblocksbeforeandafter cornering.
Thecontroller has abuffer register. (Theerror differswith thereading
speedof thetapereader, number of charactersof thenext block, etc.)

V
V
Z1
V
X1
f
1
V
X2
V
Z2
f
2
V
X
Z
0
Fig. D.3(b) Exampleof tool path
V
X1
Vsin
1
V
Z1
Vcos
1
V
X2
Vsin
2
V
Z2
Vcos
2
V : Feedrate at bothblocks before andafter cornering
V
X1
: X--axis component of feedrate of precedingblock
V
Z1
: Z--axis component of feedrate of precedingblock
V
X2
: X--axis component of feedrate of followingblock
V
Z2
: Z--axis component of feedrate of followingblock
: Corner angle
f
1
: Angle formedby specifiedpathdirectionof precedingblock
andZ--axis
f
2
: Angle formedby specifiedpathdirectionof followingblock
andZ--axis
D Descriptionof conditions
andsymbols
622
X
0
Z
0
V
0
Fig. D.3(c) Initial value
Theinitial valuewhencorneringbegins, that is, theZandY coordinates
attheendof commanddistributionbythecontroller, isdeterminedbythe
feedrateandthepositioningsystemtimeconstant of theservomotor.
X
0
V
X1
(T
1
T
2
)
Z
0
V
Z1
(T
1
T
2
)
T
1
:Exponential acceleration/ decelerationtime constant. (T=0)
T
2
:Time constant of positioningsystem(Inverse of positionloopgain)
The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner section in
X--axisdirectionandZ--axisdirection.
V
X
(t)
V
X1
V
X2
T
1
T
2
{T
1
exp(
t
T
1
)T
2
exp(
t
T
2
)} V
X2
V
Z
(t)
V
Z1
V
Z2
T
1
T
2
{T
1
exp(
t
T
1
)T
2
exp(
t
T
2
)} V
Z2
Therefore, thecoordinatesof thetool pathattimetarecalculatedfromthe
followingequations:
X(t)
t
0
V
X
(t)dtX
0
V
X2
V
X1
T
1
T
2
{T
1
2
exp(
t
T
1
)T
2
2
exp(
t
T
2
)}V
X2
(T
1
T
2
t)
Z(t)
t
0
V
Z
(t)dtZ
0
V
Z2
V
Z1
T
1
T
2
{T
1
2
exp(
t
T
1
)T
2
2
exp(
t
T
2
)}V
Z2
(T
1
T
2
t)
D Initial valuecalculation
D Analysis of corner tool
path
623
When a servo motor is used, the positioning systemcauses an error
between input commands and output results. Since the tool advances
along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear
interpolation. In circular interpolation, however, radial errors may be
produced, sepecially for circular cuttingat highspeeds.
Thiserror canbeobtainedasfollows:
r
1
2
(T
1
2
T
2
2
)
V
2
r
r
X
Z
(1) . . . . . . .
Command path
Actual path
r : Maximum radius error (mm)
v : Feedrate (mm/s)
r : Circle radius (mm)
T
1
: Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant (sec) at cutting (T=0)
T
2
: Time constant of positoning system(sec). (Inverse of positon loop gain)
r
Sincethemachiningradiusr (mm) and allowableerror r (mm) of the
workpiece is given in actual machining, the allowablelimit feedratev
(mm/sec) isdeterminedby equation(1).
Sincetheacceleration/deceleration timeconstant at cutting which isset
bythisequipmentvarieswiththemachinetool, refer tothemanual issued
by themachinetool builder.
D.4
RADIUSDIRECTION
ERRORATCIRCLE
CUTTING
APPENDIX
E. STATUS WHEN TURNING
POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
ANDWHEN RESET B--61394E/08
624
E
STATUS WHENTURNINGPOWERON, WHENCLEAR
ANDWHENRESET
Parameter 045#6isusedtoselect whether resettingtheCNC placesit in
theclearedstateor inthereset state(0: reset state/1: clearedstate).
Thesymbolsinthetablesbelowmeanthefollowing:
f : Thestatusisnot changedor themovement iscontinued.
: Thestatusiscancelledor themovement isinterrupted.
Item Whenturningpower on Cleared Reset
Setting
data
Offset value f f f
data
Data set by the
MDI settingopera-
tion
f f f
Parameter f f f
Various
data
Programs in
memory
f f f
Contents inthe
buffer storage
f : MDI mode
: Other mode
Display of se-
quence number
f f (Note 1) f (Note 1)
One shot G code
Modal G code Initial G codes.
(The G20andG21codes returnto the
same state they were inwhenthe pow-
er was last turnedoff.)
Initial G codes.
(G20/G21are not
changed.)
f
F Zero Zero f
S, T, M f f
K (Number of re-
peats)

Work coordinate value Zero f f
E.STATUS WHEN TURNING
POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR
ANDWHEN RESET
625
Item Reset Cleared Whenturningpower on
Actionin Movement
opera-
tion
Dwell
tion
Issuance of M, S and
T codes

Tool compensation Depending on parameter
(No.0001#3)
f : MDI mode
Other modes depend on
parameter (No.0001#3).
Tool nose rudius
compensation
f : MDI mode
: Other modes
Storing called subpro-
gramnumber
(Note 2) f : MDI mode
: Other modes (Note 2)
Output
signals
CNC alarmsignal
AL
Extinguish if there is no cause for the alarm Extinguish if there is no
cause for the alarm
Extinguish if there is no
cause for the alarm
Reference position
returncompletion
LED
f ( : Emergency
stop)
f ( : Emergency
stop)
S, T andB codes f f
Mcode
M, S andT strobe
signals

Spindle revolution
signal (S analog
signal)
f f
CNC ready signal
MA
ON f f
Servo ready signal
SA
ON (When other than servo alarm) ON (When other than
servo alarm)
ON (When other than
servo alarm)
Cycle start LED(STL)
FeedholdLED
(SPL)

NOTE
1 When heading is performed, the main programnumber
is displayed as sequence number.
2 When a reset is performed during execution of a
subprogram, control returns main program.
Execution cannot be started from the middle of the
subprogram.
APPENDIX
F. CHARACTER--TO--CODE
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE B--61394E/08
626
F
CHARACTER---TO---CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
Char-
acter
Code
Comment Char-
acter
Code
Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation
mark
G 071 034 Quotationmark
H 072 # 035 Hashsign
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 039 Apostrophe
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthe-
sis
O 079 * 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 Plus sign
Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 -- 045 Minus sign
S 083 . 046 Period
T 084 / 047 Slash
U 085 : 058 Colon
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle brack-
et
X 088 = 061 Equal sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle
bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Questionmark
0 048 @ 064 HAtI mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square
bracket
2 050 ^ 092
3 051 093 Yensign
4 052 ] 094 Right square
bracket
5 053 _ 095 Underscore
APPENDIX B--61394E/08 G. ALARM LIST
627
G
ALARMLIST
1) Programerrors (P/S alarm)
Number Meaning Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter whichrequires the power off was input, turnoff power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm(A character withincorrect parity was input).
Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm(The number of characters ina block is odd). This alarmwill
be generatedonly whenthe TV check is effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceedingthe maximumallowable number of digits was input.
(Refer to the itemof max. programmable dimensions.)
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign-- was input without anaddress at the begin-
ningof a block. Modify the program.
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followedby the appropriate data but was fol-
lowedby another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Sign-- input error (Sign-- was input after anaddress withwhich
it cannot be used. Or two or more -- signs were input.)
Modify the program.
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT Decimal point . input error (A decimal point was input after anad-
dress withwhichit cannot be used. Or two decimal points were in-
put.)
Modify the program.
008 PROGRAMHAS AN ERROR AT
THE END
The programdoes not endwithM02/M30/M99andthe executionof
EOR (%) was attemptedinstead. Correct the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input insignificant area.
Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER G--CODE Anunusable G code or G code correspondingto the functionnot
providedis specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commandedto a cuttingfeedor the feedrate was
inadequate. Modify the program.
014 ILLEGAL LEADCOMMAND Invariable leadthreading, the leadincremental anddecremental out-
puttedby address K exceedthe maximumcommandvalue or a com-
mandsuchthat the leadbecomes a negative value is given.
Modify the program.
015 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED Anattempt was made to move the machine alongthe axes, but the
number of the axes exceededthe specifiednumber of axes con-
trolledsimultaneously. Alternatively, ina block where where the skip
functionactivatedby the torque--limit reachedsignal (G31P99/P98)
was specified, either movingthe machine alonganaxis was not spe-
cified, or movingthe machine alongmultiple axes was specified.
Specify movement only alongone axis.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS Incircular interpolation(G02or G03), difference of the distance be-
tweenthe start point andthe center of anarc andthat betweenthe
endpoint andthe center of the arc exceededthe value specifiedin
parameter No. 0876.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMAN-
DED
Anaxis not includedinthe selectedplane (by usingG17, G18, G19)
was commandedincircular interpolation. Modify the program.
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND Incircular interpolationby radius designation, negative value was
commandedfor address R. Modify the program.
APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST B--61394E/08
628
Number Contents Meaning
028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT Inthe plane selectioncommand, two or more axes inthe same direc-
tionare commanded.
Modify the program.
029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specifiedby T code is too large.
Modify the program.
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number inT functionspecifiedfor tool offset is tool large.
Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMANDIN G10 Insettinganoffset amount by G10, the offset number followingad-
dress P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 Insettinganoffset amount by G10or inwritinganoffset amount by
systemvariables, the offset amount was excessive.
033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersectioncannot be determinedfor tool nose radius
compensation. Modify the program.
034 NO CIRC ALLOWEDIN ST--UP /
EXT BLK
The start upor cancel was goingto be performedinthe G02or G03
mode intool nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
035 CAN NOT COMMANDEDG31 Skipcutting(G31) was specifiedintool nose radius compensation
mode. Modify the program.
037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN NRC The offset plane is switchedintool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR
BLOCK
Overcuttingwill occur intool nose radius compensationbecause the
arc start point or endpoint coincides withthe arc center.
Modify the program.
039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWEDIN NRC Chamferingor corner R was specifiedwitha start--up, a cancel, or
switchingbetweenG41andG42intool nose radius compensation.
The programmay cause overcuttingto occur inchamferingor corner
R. Modify the program.
040 INTERFERENCE IN G90/G94
BLOCK
Overcuttingwill occur intool nose radius compensationincanned
cycle G90or G94. Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN NRC Overcuttingwill occur intool nose radius compensation.
Modify the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN
COMMAND
Other thanP2, P3andP4are commandedfor 2nd, 3rdand4threfer-
ence positionreturncommand.
050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWEDIN THRD
BLK
Chamferingor corner R is commandedinthe threadcuttingblock.
Modify the program.
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specifiedinthe block
next to the chamferingor corner R block.
Modify the program.
052 CODE IS NOT G01AFTER CHF/
CNR
The block next to the chamferingor corner R block is not vertical line.
Modify the program.
053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COM-
MANDS
Inthe chamferingandcorner R commands, two or more of I, K andR
are specified. Otherwise, the character after a comma(,) is not C or
R indirect drawingdimensions programming. Modify the program.
054 NO TAPER ALLOWEDAFTER CHF/
CNR
A block inwhichchamferinginthe specifiedangle or the corner R
was specifiedincludes a taper command. Modify the program.
055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/
CNR
Inchamferingor corner R block, the move distance is less than
chamfer or corner R amount.
056 NO ENDPOINT &ANGLE IN CHF/
CNR
Neither the endpoint nor angle is specifiedinthe commandfor the
block next to that for whichonly the angle is specified(A). Inthe
chamferingcomman, I(K) is commandedfor the X(Z) axis.
057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block endpoint is not calculatedcorrectly indirect dimensiondrawing
programming.
629
058 ENDPOINT NOT FOUND Block endpoint is not foundindirect dimensiondrawingprogram-
ming.
059 PROGRAMNUMBER NOT FOUND Inanexternal programnumber search, a specifiedprogramnumber
was not found. Otherwise, a programspecifiedfor searchingis being
editedinbackgroundprocessing. Check the programnumber and
external signal. Or discontinue the backgroundeiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commandedsequence number was not foundinthe sequence num-
ber search. Check the sequence number.
061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT FOUNDIN
G70--G73
Address P or Q is not specifiedinG70, G71, G72, or G73command.
Modify the program.
062 ILLEGAL COMMANDIN G71--G76 1 The depthof cut inG71or G72is zero or negative value.
2 The repetitive count inG73is zero or negative value.
3 the negative value is specifiedto Di or Dk is zero inG74or G75.
4 A value other thanzero is specifiedto address U or W, thoughDi or
Dk is zero inG74or G75.
5 A negative value is specifiedto Dd, thoughthe relief directioninG74
or G75is determined.
6. Zero or a negative value is specifiedto the height of threador depth
of cut of first time inG76.
7 The specifiedminimumdepthof cutinG76is greaterthantheheight
of thread.
8 Anunusable angle of tool tipis specifiedinG76.
Modify the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The sequence number specifiedby address P inG70, G71, G72, or
G73commandcannot be searched. Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAMNOT MONOTO-
NOUSLY
A target shape whichcannot be made by monotonic machiningwas
specifiedina repetitive cannedcycle (G71or G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMANDIN G71--G73 1 G00or G01is not commandedat the block withthe sequence
number whichis specifiedby address P inG71, G72, or G73com-
mand.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commandedinthe block witha se-
quence number whichis specifiedby address P inG71or G72, re-
spectively.
Modify the program.
066 IMPROPER G--CODE IN G71--G73 Anunallowable G code was commandedbeweentwo blocks speci-
fiedby address P inG71, G72, or G73. Modify the program.
067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE G70, G71, G72, or G73commandwithaddress P andQ.
Modify the program.
068 TEN OR MORE POCKETS The number of pockets is greater thanor equal to tenfor G71or G72
of type II.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN G70--G73 the final move commandinthe blocks specifiedby P andQ of G70,
G71, G72, andG73endedwithchamferingor corner R. Modify the
program.
070 NO PROGRAMSPACE IN
MEMORY
The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, thenretry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searchedwas not found. Or the programwith
specifiedprogramnumber was not foundinprogramnumber search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be storedexceeded63(basic), 125(op-
tion), 200(option). Delete unnecessary programs andexecute pro-
gramregisterationagain.
073 PROGRAMNUMBER ALREADY IN
USE
The commandedprogramnumber has already beenused.
Change the programnumber or delete unnecessary programs and
execute programregisterationagain.
630
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAMNUMBER The programnumber is other than1to 9999.
Modify the programnumber.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (programnumber) was not commandedinthe block which
includes anM98, G65, or G66command. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAMNESTING ERROR The number of subprograms calledexceededthe limit.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A programnumber or a sequence number whichwas specifiedby
address P inthe block whichincludes anM98, M99, M65or G66was
not found. The sequence number specifiedby a GOTO statement
was not found. Otherwise, a calledprogramis beingeditedinback-
groundprocessing. Correct the program, or discontinue the back-
groundediting.
079 PROGRAMVERIFY ERROR Inmemory or programcollation,a programinmemory does not agree
withthat readfromanexternal I/O device. Check boththe programs
inmemory andthose fromthe external device.
080 G37ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT AS-
SERTED
Inthe automatic tool compensationfunction(G36, G37), the mea-
surement positionreachsignal (XAE or ZAE) is not turnedonwithin
anarea specifiedinparameter (value e).
This is due to a settingor operator error.
081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUNDIN
G37
Automatic tool compensation(G36, G37) was specifiedwithout a T
code. (Automatic tool compensationfunction) Modify the program.
082 T--CODE NOT ALLOWEDIN G37 T code andautomatic tool compensation(G36, G37) were specified
inthe same block. (Automatic tool compensationfunction)
Modify the program.
083 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMANDIN G37 Inautomatic tool compensation(G36, G37), aninvalidaxis was spe-
cifiedor the commandis incremental. Modify the program.
085 COMMUNICATION ERROR Whenenteringdata inthe memory by usingReader / Puncher inter-
face, anoverrun, parity or framingerror was generated. The number
of bits of input data or settingof baudrate or specificationNo. of I/O
unit is incorrect.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF Whenenteringdata inthe memory by usingReader / Puncher inter-
face, the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turnedoff.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connectedor a P.C.B. is
defective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW Whenenteringdata inthe memory by usingReader / Puncher inter-
face, thoughthe readterminate commandis specified, input is not
interruptedafter 10characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective.
090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOM-
PLETE
The reference positionreturncannot be performednormally because
the reference positionreturnstart point is too close to the reference
positionor the speedis too slow. Separate the start point far enough
fromthe reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speedfor
reference positionreturn. Check the programcontents.
091 MANUAL RETURN TO THE REF-
ERENCE POSITION IS IMPOSSI-
BLE BECAUSE OF A TEMPORARY
STOP.
A manual returnto the reference positioncannot be made because
the systemis inthe temporary stopstate. After pressingthe RESET
key, execute manual returnto the reference position.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE
POINT
Automatic reference positionreturn(G28) or the commandedaxis by
G27(Reference positionreturncheck) didnot returnto the reference
position.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED(COORD
CHG)
P type cannot be specifiedwhenthe programis restarted. (After the
automatic operationwas interrupted, the coordinate systemsetting
operationwas performed.)
Performthe correct operationaccordingto thoperators manual.
631
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED(EXT OFS
CHG)
automatic operationwas interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.)
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED(WRK OFS
CHG)
automatic operationwas interrupted, the workpiece offset amount
changed.)
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED(AUTO
EXEC)
P type cannot be directedwhenthe programis restarted. (After pow-
er ON, after emergency stopor P / S 94to 97reset, no automatic
operationis performed.) Performautomatic operation.
098 G28FOUNDIN SEQUENCE RE-
TURN
A commandof the programrestart was specifiedwithout the refer-
ence positionreturnoperationafter power ON or emergency stop,
andG28was foundduringsearch.
Performthe reference positionreturn.
099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWEDAFT.
SEARCH
After completionof searchinprogramrestart, a move commandis
givenwithMDI.
100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE Onthe PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writingen-
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, thenreset the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power was turnedoff while memory was beingrewrittenby pro-
gramedit operation. Whenthis alarmis issued, clear the programby
settingthe settingparameter (PWE) to 1, thenturningonthe power
againwhile holdingdownthe <DELETE>key.
109 P/S ALARM A value other than0or 1was specifiedafter P inthe G08code, or no
value was specified.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixeddecimal point display data exceeds the
allowable range. Modify the program.
111 CALCULATEDDATA OVERFLOW The result of calculationturns out to be invalid, analarmNo.111is
issued.
--10
47
to --10
-- 29
, 0, 10
-- 29
to 10
47
Modify the program.
112 DIVIDEDBY ZERO Divisionby zero was specified. (includingtan90)
Modify the program.
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A functionwhichcannot be usedincustommacro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Custommacro A contains anundefinedH code ina G65block. Cus-
tommacro B contains anerror ina format other than<expression>.
Correct the program.
632
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not definedas a variable number is designatedinthe custom
macro or inhigh--speedcycle machining.
The header contents are improper. This alarmis giveninthe follow-
ingcases:
Highspeedcycle machining
1 The header correspondingto the specifiedmachiningcycle number
calledis not found.
2 The cycle connectiondata value is out of the allowable range
(0to 999).
3 The number of data inthe header is out of the allowable range
(0to 32767).
4 The start data variable number of executable format data is out of
the allowable range (#20000to #85535).
5 The last storing data variable number of executable format data is
out of the allowable range (#85535).
6 The storing start data variable number of executable format datais
overlappedwiththe variable number usedinthe header.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTEDVARIABLE The left side of substitutionstatement is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nestingof bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCDargument is negative, and
other values than0to 9are present oneachline of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 DUPLICATE MACRO MODAL--CALL The macro modal call is specifiedindouble.
Modify the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND
IN DNC
Macro control commandis usedduringDNC operation.
Modify the program.
124 MISSING ENDSTATEMENT DO -- ENDdoes not correspondto 1: 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Custommacro A contains anaddress that cannot be specifiedina
G65block.
Custommacro B contains a format error in<expression>.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER InDOn, 1 n 3is not established. Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME
BLOCK
NC andcustommacro commands coexist.
Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE
NUMBER
The sequence number specifiedinthe branchcommandwas not 0to
9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS Anaddress whichis not allowedin<Argument Designation>is used.
Modify the program.
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION Anaxis control commandwas givenby PMC to anaxis controlledby
CNC. Or anaxis control commandwas givenby CNC to anaxis
controlledby PMC. Modify the program.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM
MESSAGES
Five or more alarms have generatedinexternal alarmmessage.
Consult the PMC ladder diagramto findthe cause.
132 ALARMNUMBER NOT FOUND No alarmNo. concernedexists inexternal alarmmessage clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.
133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM
MSG
Small sectiondata is erroneous inexternal alarmmessage or exter-
nal operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram.
135 SPINDLE ORIENTATION PLEASE Without any spindle orientation, anattept was made for spindle in-
dexing. Performspindle orientation.
136 C/H--CODE &MOVE CMDIN SAME
BLK.
A move commandof other axes was specifiedto the same block as
spindle indexingaddresses C, H. Modify the program.
633
137 M--CODE &MOVE CMDIN SAME
BLK.
A move commandof other axes was specifiedto the same block as
M--code relatedto spindle indexing. Modify the program.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC CON-
TROL AXIS
Anaxis is selectedincommandingby PMC axis control.
Modify the program.
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
The conditions are incorrect whenthe polar coordinate interpolation
starts or it is canceled.
1) Inmodes other thanG40, G12.1/G13.1was specified.
2) Anerror is foundinthe plane selection.
Modify the value of programor parameter.
146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes whichcannot be specifiedinthe polar coordinate interpola-
tionmode was specified. See sectionII--4.4andmodify the program.
147 MOVE COMMANDTOO LARGE The tool passes the coordinate origin, causingthe amount of travel
about the rotationaxis to be too great.
Modify the programor set bit 2of parameter No. 399accordingly.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Tool GroupNo. of tool life management exceeds the maximumallow-
able value.
Modify the program. Alternatively, modify the tool life data.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT
FOUND
The tool groupof tool life management commandedinthe machining
programis not set.
Modify the value of programor parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY The number of tools withinone groupof tool life management ex-
ceeds the maximumvalue registerable. Modify the number of tools.
153 T--CODE NOT FOUND Intool life data registration, a T code was not specifiedwhere one
shouldbe. Correct the program.
155 ILLEGAL T--CODE IN M06 Inthe machiningprogram, M06andT code inthe same block do not
correspondto the groupof tool life management inuse. Correct the
program.
156 P/L COMMANDNOT FOUND P andL commands are missingat the headof programinwhichthe
tool groupof tool life management is set. Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups of tool life management to be set exceeds
the maximumallowable value.
Modify the program.
158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the settingvalue.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING INCOM-
PLETE
Duringexecutinga life data settingprogramof tool life management,
power was turnedoff.
Set again.
160 MISMATCH WATING M--CODE
(TT only)
Diffrent Mcode is commandedinheads 1and2as waitingMcode.
Modify the program.
161 COMMANDG68/G69INDEPEN-
DENTLY (TT only)
G68andG69are not independently commandedinbalance cut.
Modify the program.
169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA
(TT only)
Incorrect tool figure data ininterference check.
175 ILLEGAL G107COMMAND Conditions whenperformingcircular interpolationstart or cancel not
correct. Modify the program.
176 IMPROPER G--CODE IN G107 Any of the followingG codes whichcannot be specifiedinthe cylin-
drical interpolationmode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning: G28, G76, G81to G89,
includingthe codes specifyingthe rapidtraverse cycle
2) G codes for settinga coordinate system: G50, G52
3) G code for selectingcoordinate system: G53G54to G59
Modify the program.
177 CHECK SUMERROR
(G05MODE)
Check sumerror
Modify the program.
634
178 G05COMMANDEDIN G41/G42
MODE
G05was commandedinthe G41/G42mode.
179 PARAM. SETTING ERROR The number of controlledaxes set by the parameter 597exceeds the
maximumnumber. Modify the parameter settingvalue.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR
(REMOTE BUF)
Remote buffer connectionalarmhas generated. Confirmthe number
of cables, parameters andI/O device.
194 SPINDLE COMMANDIN SYN-
CHRO--MODE
A contour control mode, spindle positioning(Cs--axis control) mode,
or rigidtappingmode was specifiedduringthe serial spindle
synchronous control mode. Correct the programso that the serial
spindle synchronous control mode is releasedinadvance.
195 MODE CHANGE ERROR The control mode of the serial spindle cannot be changed. Check
the Ladder diagramof the PMC.
197 C--AXIS COMMANDEDIN SPINDLE
MODE
The programspecifieda movement alongthe Cf--axis whenthe sig-
nal CON was off. Correct the program, or consult the PMC ladder
diagramto findthe reasonthe signal is not turnedon.
199 MACRO WORDUNDEFINED Undefinedmacro wordwas used. Modify the custommacro.
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND Inthe rigidtap, anS value is out of the range or is not specified.
The range for S values whichcanbe specifiedinrigidtappingis set
inparameter 5243. Change the settinginthe parameter or modify the
program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUNDIN RIGID
TAP
Inthe rigidtap, no F value is specified.
202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW Inthe rigidtap, spindle distributionvalue is too large.
203 PROGRAMMISS AT RIGIDTAP-
PING
Inthe rigidtap, positionfor a rigidMcode (M29) or anS commandis
incorrect. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION Inthe rigidtap, anaxis movement is specifiedbetweenthe rigidM
code (M29) block andG84(G74) block. Modify the program.
205 RIGIDMODE DI SIGNAL OFF Rigidmode DI signal is not ON whenG84(G74) is executedthough
the rigidMcode (M29) is specified.Consult the PMC ladder diagram
to findthe reasonthe DI signal is not turnedon.
210 CAN NOT COMANDM198/M199 M198andM199are executedinthe schedule operation. M198is
executedinthe DNC operation. Modify the program.
211 G31(HIGH) NOT ALLOWEDIN G99 G31is commandedinthe per revolutioncommandwhenthe high--
speedskipoptionis provided. Modify the program.
212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawingdimensions programmingis commandedfor the
plane other thanthe Z--X plane. Correct the program.
213 ILLEGAL COMMANDIN SYN-
CHRO--MODE
Movement is commandedfor the axis to be synchronously controlled.
CHRO--MODE
Coordinate systemis set or tool compensationof the shift type is
executedinthe synchronous control. Correct the program.
217 DUPLICATE G251(COMMANDS) G251is further commandedinthe G251mode. Modify the program.
218 NOT FOUNDP/Q COMMANDIN
G251
P or Q is not commandedinthe G251block, or the commandvalue
is out of the range. Modify the program.
219 COMMANDG250/G251INDEPEN-
DENTLY
G251andG250are not independent blocks.
220 ILLEGAL COMMANDIN SYNCHR--
MODE
Inthe synchronous operation, movement is commandedby the NC
programor PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis.
221 ILLEGAL COMMANDIN SYNCHR--
MODE
Polygonmachiningoperationandaxis control or balance cuttingare
executedat a time. Modify the program.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Not returnedto reference point before cycle start.
635
225 SYNCHRONOUS/MIXEDCONTROL
ERROR
(TT only)
This alarmis generatedinthe followingcircumstances. (Searchedfor
duringsynchronous andmixedcontrol command.
1 Whenthere is a mistake inaxis number parameter setting.
2 Whenthere is a mistake incontrol commanded.
Modify the programor the parameter.
CHRO--MODE (TT only)
A travel commandhas beensent to the axis beingsynchronizedin
synchronous mode. Modify the programor the parameter.
229 CAN NOT KEEP SYNCHRO--STATE
(TT only)
This alarmis generatedinthe followingcircumstances.
1 Whenthesynchro/mixedstatecouldnotbekeptduetosystemover-
load.
2 The above conditionoccurredinCMC devices (hardware) andsyn-
chro--state couldnot be kept.
(This alarmis not generatedinnormal use conditions.)
233 P/S ALARM Inthe skipfunctionactivatedby the torque limit signal, the number of
accumulatederroneous pulses exceed32767before the signal was
input. Therefore, the pulses cannot be correctedwithone distribution.
Change the conditions, suchas federates alongaxes andtorque
limit, andtry again.
245 T--CODE NOT ALOWEE IN THIS
BLOCK
One of the G codes, G50, G10, andG04, whichcannot be specified
inthe same block as a T code, was specifiedwitha T code.
636
2) Backgroundeditalarm
??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarmoccurs inthe same number as the P/S alarmthat occurs
inordinary programedit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074085,086,087etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attemptedto select or delete inthe backgrounda programbe-
ingselectedinthe foreground. (Note)
Use backgroundeditingcorrectly.
NOTE
Because it uses the background editing function, a
background editing alarm may be issued during MDI
operation B.
3) Absolutepulsecoder (APC) alarm
3n0 nth--axis originreturn Manual reference positionreturnis requiredfor the nth--axis (n=1to
8).
3n1 APC alarm: nth--axis communication nth--axis APC communicationerror. Failure indata transmission
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.
3n2 APC alarm: nth--axis over time nth--axis APC overtime error.
Failure indata transmission.
ule.
3n3 APC alarm: nth--axis framing nth--axis APC framingerror. Failure indata transmission.
ule.
3n4 APC alarm: nth--axis parity nth--axis APC parity error.
Failure indata transmission.
ule.
3n5 APC alarm: nth--axis pulse error nth--axis APC pulse error alarm.
APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty.
3n6 APC alarm: nth--axis battery voltage
0
nth--axis APC battery voltage has decreasedto a lowlevel so that the
data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty.
3n7 APC alarm: nth--axis battery low1 nth--axis axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where the battery
must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.
3n8 APC alarm: nth--axis battery low2 nth--axis APC battery voltage has reacheda level where the battery
must be renewed(includingwhenpower is OFF).
APC alarm.
637
4) Serial pulsecoder (SPC) alarms
Wheneither of thefollowingalarmsisissued, apossiblecauseisafaulty serial pulsecoder or cable.
3n9 SPC ALARM: nAXIS PULSE COD-
ER
The naxis pulse coder has a fault.
3n5 ZRN Impossible: nAXIS PULSE
CODER
A reference positionhas not beenestablishedfor the nth--axis serial
pulse coder. Move the tool alongthe nthaxis by more thana single
rotationof the motor.
The details of serial pulse coder alarmNo. 3n9 are displayed in the
diagnosisdisplay (No.760to767, 770to777) asshownbelow.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH 760 --- 767
CSA : Theserial pulsecoder isdefective. Replaceit.
BLA: Thebattery voltageislow. Replacethebatteries. Thisalarm
hasnothingtodowithalarm(serial pulsecoder alarm).
PHA: Theserial pulsecoder or feedback cableisdefective. Replace
theserial pulsecoder or cable.
RCA: Theserial pulsecoder isdefective. Replaceit.
BZA: Thepulsecoder wassuppliedwithpower for thefirst time.
Makesurethat thebatteriesareconnected.
Turnthepower off, thenturnit onagainandperforma
referencepositionreturn. Thisalarmhasnothingtodowith
alarm(serial pulsecoder alarm).
CKA: Theserial pulsecoder isdefective. Replaceit.
SPH : Theserial pulsecoder or feedback cableisdefective. Replace
theserial pulsecoder or cable.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DTE CRC STB 770 --- 777
DTE : Theserial pulsecoder encounteredacommunicationerror.
Thepulsecoder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit
isdefective. Replacethepulsecoder, feedback cable, or
NC--axisboard
CRC: Theserial pulsecoder encounteredacommunicationerror.
Thepulsecoder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit
isdefective. Replacethepulsecoder, feedback cable, or
NC--axisboard.
STB : theserial pulsecoder encounteredacommunicationerror.
Thepulsecoder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit
isdefective.
D Thedetails of serial
pulsecoder alarm
No.3n9
638
5) Servoalarms
Number Meaning Contents andactions
400 SERVO ALARM: 1, 2TH AXIS
OVERLOAD
1--axis, 2--axis overloadsignal is on. Refer to diagnosis display No.
720or 721for details.
401 SERVO ALARM: 1, 2TH AXIS VRDY
OFF
1--axis, 2--axis servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
402 SERVO ALARM: 3, 4TH AXIS
OVERLOAD
OFF
404 SERVO ALARM: n--TH AXIS VRDY
ON
Eventhoughthe n--thaxis (axis 1to 8) READY signal (MCON) went
off, the servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, whenthe
power was turnedon, DRDY went oneventhoughMCON was off.
Check that the axis cardandservo amplifierr are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: ZERO POINT RE-
TURN FAULT
Positioncontrol systemfault. Due to anNC or servo systemfault in
the reference positionreturn, there is the possibility that reference
positionreturncouldnot be executedcorrectly. Try againfromthe
manual reference positionreturn.
406 SERVO ALARM:
7, 8TH AXIS OVER LOAD
7, 8TH AXIS VRDY OFF
4n0 SERVO ALARM: n--TH AXIS -- EX-
CESS ERROR
The positiondeviationvalue whenthe n--thaxis stops is larger than
the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter for eachaxis.
CESS ERROR
The positiondeviationvalue whenthe n--thaxis moves is larger than
the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter for eachaxis.
4n3 SERVO ALARM: n--thAXIS -- LSI
OVERFLOW
The contents of the error register for the n--thaxis exceeded^2
31
power. This error usually occurs as the result of animproperly set
parameters.
4n4 SERVO ALARM: n--TH AXIS --
DETECTION RELATEDERROR
N--thaxis digital servo systemfault. Refer to diagnosis display No.
720andNo.727for details.
CESS SHIFT
A speedhigher than4000000units/s was attemptedto be set inthe
n--thaxis. This error occurs as the result of improperly set CMR.
4n6 SERVO ALARM: n--TH AXIS -- DIS-
CONNECTION
Positiondetectionsystemfault inthe n--thaxis pulse coder (discon-
nectionalarm).
4n7 SERVO ALARM: n--TH AXIS -- PA-
RAMETER INCORRECT
This alarmoccurs whenthe n--thaxis is inone of the conditions listed
below. (Digital servo systemalarm)
1) The value set inParameter No. 8n20(motor form) is out of the
specifiedlimit.
2) A proper value (111or --111) is not set inparameter No. 8n22
(motor revolutiondirection).
3) Illegal data (a value below0, etc.) was set inparameter No. 8n23
(number of speedfeedback pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below0, etc.) was set inparameter No. 8n24
(number of positionfeedback pulses per motor revolution).
5) Parameters No. 8n84andNo. 8n85(flexible fieldgear rate) have
not beenset.
6) Anaxis selectionparameter (fromNo. 269to 274) is incorrect.
7) Anoverflowoccurredduringparameter computation.
490 SERVO ALARM: 5TH AXIS OVER
LOAD
491 SERVO ALARM: 5, 6TH VRDY OFF 5--axis, 6--axis servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
639
Number Contents andactions Meaning
ON
The axis cardready signal (MCON) for axes 5and6is off, but the
servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) is not. Alternatively, whenthe
power is applied, the DRDY is on, but the MCON is not. Ensure that
the axis cardandservo amplifier are connected.
495 SERVO ALARM: 5, 6TH AXIS ZERO
POINT RETURN
This is a positioncontrol circuit error. It is likely that a returnto the
reference positionfailedbecause of anerror inthe NC or the servo
system. Retry a returnto the reference position.
NOTE
If an excessive spindle error alarm occurs during rigid
tapping, the relevant alarmnumber for the tapping feedaxis
is displayed.
Thedetaileddescriptions of servo alarmnumber 4n4aredisplayedwith
diagnosisnumbers720to727inthesequenceof axisnumbers.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OVL LV OVC HCAL HVA DCAL FBAL OFAL 720 -- 727
OVL : Anoverloadalarmisbeinggenerated.
(Thisbit causesservoalarmNo. 400, 402, 406, 490).
LV : A lowvoltagealarmisbeinggeneratedinservoamp.
Check LED.
OVC: A overcurrent alarmisbeinggeneratedinsideof digital
servo.
HCAL : Anabnormal current alarmisbeinggeneratedinservoamp.
Check LED.
HVAL : Anovervoltagealarmisbeinggeneratedinservoamp.
Check LED.
DCAL : A regenerativedischargecircuit alarmisbeinggeneratedin
servoamp. Check LED.
FBAL : A disconnectionalarmisbeinggenerated.
(Thisbit causesservoalarmNo.4n6.)
OFAL : Anoverflowalarmisbeinggeneratedinsideof digital servo.
D Details of servo
alarmNo.4n4
640
6) Spindlealarms
Number Meaning Contents andremedy
408 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START
FAULT
This alarmis generatedwhenthe spindle control unit is not ready for
startingcorrectly whenthe power is turnedoninthe systemwiththe
serial spindle.
The four reasons canbe consideredas follows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control units
power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under alarmconditions other
than SU--01 or AL--24 which are shown on the LED display of the
spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform
startupagain.
3) Other reasons (improper combinationof hardware)
This alarmdoes notoccurafterthesystemincludingthespindlecon-
trol unit is activated.
409 SPINDLE ALARMDETECTION A spindle amplifier alarmoccurredina systemwitha serial spindle.
The alarmis indicatedas AL--XX(where XX is a number) onthe
display of the spindle amplifier. For details, see Section14. Setting
bit 7of parameter No. 0397causes the spindle amplifier alarmnum-
ber to appear onthe screen.
7) Over travel alarms
5n0 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceededthe n--thaxis +side storedstroke check 1/2.
5n1 OVER TRAVEL : --n Exceededthe n--thaxis -- side storedstroke check 1/2.
5n2 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceededthe n--thaxis +side storedstroke check 3.
5n3 OVER TRAVEL : --n Exceededthe n--thaxis -- side storedstroke check 3.
5n4 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceededthe n--thaxis +side storedstroke check 4.
5n5 OVER TRAVEL : --n Exceededthe n--thaxis -- side storedstroke check 4.
520 OVER TRAVEL : +Z A hardware overtravel occurredinthe positive directionof the Z--axis.
590 Tool post interference alarm:+X--axis A tool post interference alarmoccurredduringtravelinginthe positive
directiononthe X--axis.
591 Tool post interference alarm:--X--axis A tool post interference alarmoccurredduringtravelinginthe nega-
tive directiononthe X--axis.
592 Tool post interference alarm:+Z--axis A tool post interference alarmoccurredduringtravelinginthe positive
directiononthe Z--axis.
593 Tool post interference alarm:--Z--axis A tool post interference alarmoccurredduringtravelinginthe nega-
tive directiononthe Z--axis.
8) Macroalarms
500to
599
MACRO ALARM This alarmis relatedto the custommacro, macro executor, or order--
made macro (includingconversational programinputs). Refer to the
relevant manual for details. (The macro alarmnumber may coincide
withanovertravel alarmnumber. However, they canbe distin-
guishedfromeachother because the overtravel alarmnumber is
accompaniedwiththe descriptionof the alarm.
641
9) PMC alarms
600 PMC ALARM: INVALIDINSTRUC-
TION
Aninvalid--instructioninterrupt occurredinthe PMC.
601 PMC ALARM: RAMPARITY A PMC RAMparity error occurred.
602 PMC ALARM: SERIAL TRANSFER A PMC serial transfer error occurred.
603 PMC ALARM: WATCHDOG A PMC watchdogtimer alarmoccurred.
604 PMC ALARM: ROMPARITY A PMC ROMparity error occurred.
605 PMC ALARM: OVER STEP The maximumallowable number of PMC ladder programsteps was
exceeded.
606 PMC ALARM: I/O MODULE AS-
SIGNMENT
The assignment of I/O module signals is incorrect.
607 PMC ALARM: I/O LINK AnI/O link error occurred. The details are listedbelow.
Number Details of PMC alarm(No. 607)
010 * Communicationerror (SLC (master) internal register error)
020 * AnSLC RAMbit error occurred(verificationerror).
030 * AnSLC RAMbit error occurred(verificationerror).
040 No I/O unit has beenconnected.
050 32or more I/O units are connected.
060 * Data transmissionerror (no response fromthe slave)
070 * Communicationerror (no response fromthe slave)
080 * Communicationerror (no response fromthe slave)
090 AnNMI (for other thanalarmcodes 110to 160) occurred.
130 * AnSLC (master) RAMparity error occurred(detectedby hardware).
140 * AnSLC (slave) RAMparity error occurred(detectedby hardware).
160 * SLC (slave) communicationerror
* AL0: Watchdogtimer
DO clear signal received
* IR1: CRC or framingerror
Watchdogtimer alarm
Parity error
Hardwareerrorsareindicatedwithanasterisk (*).
10) Overheatalarms
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT Control unit overheat
Check that the fanmotor operates normally, andcleanthe air filter.
704
Overheat: Spindle
The spindle overheatedduringspindle variationdetection. Check the
cuttingconditions.
642
11) M--NET alarm
899 M--NET INTERFACE ALARM This alarmis relatedto a serial interface for anexternal PLC. The
details are listedbelow.
Number Details of M--NETalarm(No. 899)
0001 Abnormal character (character other thantransmissioncodes) received
0002 EXTcode error
0003 Connectiontime monitor error (parameter No. 0464)
0004 Pollingtime monitor error (parameter No. 0465)
0005 Vertical parity or framingerror detected
0257 Transmissiontime--out error (parameter No. 0466)
0258 ROMparity error
0259 Overrunerror detected
Others CPU interrupt detected
12) Systemalarms
(Thesealarmscannot bereset withreset key.)
910 MAIN RAMPARITY This RAMparity error is relatedto low--order bytes. Replace the
memory PC board.
911 MAIN RAMPARITY This RAMparity error is relatedto high--order bytes. Replace the
memory PC board.
912 SHAREDRAMPARITY This parity error is relatedto low--order bytes of RAMsharedwiththe
digital servo circuit. Replace the axis control PC board.
913 SHAREDRAMPARITY This parity error is relatedto high--order bytes of RAMsharedwiththe
digital servo circuit. Replace the axis control PC board.
914 SERVO RAMPARITY This is a local RAMparity error inthe digital servo circuit.
Replace the axis control PC board.
915 LADDER EDITING CASSETTE RAM
PARITY
This RAMparity error is relatedto low--order bytes of the ladder edit-
ingcassette. Replace the ladder editingcassette.
916 LADDER EDITING CASSETTE RAM
PARITY
This RAMparity error is relatedto high--order bytes of the ladder edit-
ingcassette. Replace the ladder editingcassette.
920 WATCHDOG ALARM This is a watchdogtimer alarmor a servo systemalarmfor axis 1to
4. Replace the master or axis control PC board.
921 SUB CPU WATCHDOG ALARM This is a watchdogtimer alarmrelatedto the sub--CPU boardor a
servo systemalarmfor axis 5or 6. Replace the sub--CPU boardor
the axis--5/6control PC board.
922 7/8AXIS SERVO SYSTEMALARM This is a servo systemalarmrelatedto axis 7or 8. Replace the
axis--7/8control PC board.
930 CPU ERROR This is a CPU error. Replace the master PC board.
940 PC BOARDINSTALLATION ERROR PC boardinstallationis incorrect. Check the specificationof the PC
board.
941 MEMORY PC BOARDCONNEC-
TION ERROR
The memory PC boardis not connectedsecurely. Ensure that the
PC boardis connectedsecurely.
643
945 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICA-
TION ERROR
The hardware configurationis incorrect for the serial spindle, or a
communicationalarmoccurred. Check the hardware configurationof
the spindle. Also ensure that the hardware for the serial spindle is
connectedsecurely.
946 SECONDSERIAL SPINDLE COM-
MUNICATION ERROR
Communicationis impossible withthe secondserial spindle. Ensure
that the secondserial spindle is connectedsecurely.
950 FUSE BLOWN ALARM A fuse has blown. Replace the fuse (+24E; F14).
960 SUB CPU ERROR This is a sub--CPU error. Replace the sub--CPU PC board.
998 ROMPARITY This is a ROMparity error. Replace the ROMboardinwhichthe er-
ror occurred.
13) External alarm
1000 EXTERNAL ALARM This alarmwas detectedby the PMC ladder program. Refer to the
relevant manual fromthe machine builder for details.
14) Alarms DisplayedonspindleServoUnit
Alarm
No.
Meaning Description Remedy
A
display
ProgramROMabnormality
(not installed)
Detects that control programis not started(due to
programROMnot installed, etc.)
Install normal program
ROM
AL01 Motor
overheat
Detects motor speedexceedingspecifiedspeed
excessively.
Check loadstatus.
Cool motor thenreset
alarm.
AL02 Excessive speeddeviation Detects motor speedexceedingspecifiedspeed
excessively.
Check loadstatus.
Reset alarm.
AL03 DC link sectionfuse blown Detects that fuse F4inDC link sectionis blown
(models 30S and40S).
Check power transistors,
andso forth.
Replace fuse.
AL04 Input fuse blown.
Input power openphase.
Detects blownfuse (F1to F3), openphase or mo-
mentary failure of power (models 30S and40S).
Replace fuse.
Check openphase and
power supply refenerative
circuit operation.
AL05 Control power supply fuse
blown
Detects that control power supply fuse AF2or AF3
is blown(models 30S and40S).
Check for control power
supply short circuit .
Replace fuse.
AL--07 Excessive speed Detects that motor rotationhas exceeded115%of
its ratedspeed.
Reset alarm.
AL--08 Highinput voltage Detects that switchis flippedto 200VAC when
input voltage is 230VAC or higher (models 30S
and40S).
Flipswitchto 230VAC.
AL--09 Excessive loadonmaincir-
cuit section
Detects abnormal temperature rise of power tran-
sistor radiator.
Cool radiator thenreset
alarm.
AL--10 Lowinput voltage Detects dropininput power supply voltage. Remove cause, thenreset
alarm.
AL--11 Overvoltage inDC link sec-
tion
Detects abnormally highdirect current power sup-
ply voltage inpower circuit section.
Remove cause, thenreset
alarm.
AL--12 Overcurrent inDC link section Detects flowof abnormally large current indirect
current sectionof power cirtcuit
alarm.
AL--13 CPU internal data memory
abnormality
Detects abnormality inCPU internal data memory.
This check is made only whenpower is turnedon.
alarm.
AL--15 Spindle switch/output switch
alarm
Detects incorrect switchsequence inspindle
switch/output switchoperation.
Check sequence.
644
Alarm
No.
Remedy Description Meaning
AL--16 RAMabnormality Detects abnormality inRAMfor external data. This
check is made only whenpower is turnedon.
alarm.
AL--18 ProgramROMsumcheck er-
ror
Detects programROMdata error.This check is
made only whenpower is turnedon.
alarm.
AL--19 Excessive U phase current
detectioncircuit offset
Detects excessive U phase current detectionciu-
cuit offset.
alarm.
AL--20 Excessive V phase current
detectioncircuit offset
Detects excessive V phase current detectioncir-
cuit offset.
alarm.
AL--24 Serial transfer data error Detects serial transfer data error (suchas NC pow-
er supply turnedoff, etc.)
alarm.
AL--25 Serial data transfer stopped Detects that serial data transfer has stopped. Remove cause, thenreset
alarm.
AL--26 Disconnectionof speed
detectionsignal for Cs con-
touringcontrol
Detects abnormality inpositioncoder signal(such
as unconnectedcable andparameter settinger-
ror).
alarm.
AL--27 Positioncoder signal discon-
nection
Detects abnormality inpositioncoder signal (such
as unconnectedcable andadjustment error).
alarm.
AL--28 Disconnectionof position
detectionsignal for Cs con-
touringcontrol
Detects abnormality inpositiondetectionsignal for
Cs contouringcontrol (suchas unconnectedcable
andadjustment error).
alarm.
AL--29 Short--time overload Detects that overloadhas beencontinuously ap-
pliedfor some periodof time (suchas restraining
motor shaft inpositioning).
alarm.
AL--30 Input circuit overcurrent Detects overcurrent flowingininput circuit. Remove cause, thenreset
alarm.
AL--31 Speeddetectionsignal dis-
connectionmotor restraint
alarmor motor is clamped.
Detects that motor cannot rotate at specified
speedor it is detectedthat the motor is clamped.
(but rotates at very slowspeedor has stopped).
(This includes checkingof speeddetectionsignal
cable.)
alarm.
AL--32 Abnormality inRAMinternal
to LSI for serial data transfer.
This check is made only
whenpower is turnedon.
Detects abnormality inRAMinternalto LSI for seri-
al data transfer. This check is made only when
power is turnedon.
alarm.
AL--33 Insufficient DC link section
charging
Detects insuffieient chargingof direct current pow-
er supply voltage inpower circuit sectionwhen
magnetic contactor inamplifier is turnedon(such
as openphase anddefectifve chargingresistor).
alarm.
AL--34 Parameter data settingbe-
yondallowable range of val-
ues
Detects parameter data set beyondallowable
range of values.
Set correct data.
AL--35 Excesive gear ratio data set-
ting
Detects gear ratio data set beyondallowable
range of values.
Set correct data.
AL--36 Error counter over flow Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, thenreset
alarm.
AL--37 Speeddetector parameter
settingerror
Detects incorrect settingof parameter for number
of speeddetectionpulses.
Set correct data.
645
Alarm
No.
Remedy Description Meaning
AL--39 Alarmfor indicatingfailure in
detecting1--rotationsignal for
Cs contouringcontrol
Detects 1--rotaionsignal detectionfailure inCs
contouringcontorl.
Make 1--rotaionsignal ad-
justment.
Check cable shieldstatus.
AL--40 Alarmfor indicating1--rotation
signal for Cs contouringcon-
trol not detected
Detects that 1--rotationsignal has not occurredin
Cs contouringcontrol.
Make 1--rotaionsignal ad-
justment.
detectingpositioncoder 1--ro-
taionsignal.
Detects failure indetectingpositioncoder 1--rota-
tionsignal.
Make signal adjustment
for signal conversioncir-
cuit.
AL--42 Alarmfor indicatingposition
coder 1--rotationsignal not
detected
Detects that positioncoder 1--rotationsignal has
not issued.
Make 1--rotationsignal ad-
justment for signal conver-
sioncircuit.
AL--43 Alarmfor indicatingdiscon-
nectionof positioncoder sig-
nal for differential speed
mode
Detects that mainspindle positioncoder signal
usedfor differential speedmode is not connected
yet (or is disconnected).
Check that mainspindle
positioncoder signal is
connectedto connector
CN12.
detectingpositioncoder
1--rotationsignal inthread
cuttingoperation.
Detects failure indetectingpositioncoder 1--rota-
tionsignasl inthreadcuttingoperation.
sioncircuit
AL--47 Positioncoder signal ab-
normality
Detects incorrect positioncoder signal count op-
eration.
Make signal adjustment
for signal conversioncir-
cuit.
AL--48 Positioncoder 1--rotationsig-
nal abnormailty
Detects that occurrence of positioncoder 1--rota-
tionsignal has stopped.
sioncircuit.
AL--49 The converteddifferential
speedis too high.
Detects that speedof other spindle convertedto
speedof local spindle has exceededallowable
limit indifferential mode.
Check the positioncoder
state of the other side.
AL--50 Excessive speedcommand
calculationvalue inspindle
synchronizationcontrol
Detects that speedcommandcalculationvalue
exceededallowable range inspindle synchroniza-
tioncontrol.
Check parameters such
as a positiongain.
AL--51 Undervoltage at DC link sec-
tion
Detects that DC power supply voltage of power
ciucuit has dropped(due to momentary power fail-
ure or loose contact of magnetic contactor).
alarm.
AL--52 ITP signal abnormality I Detects abnormality insynchronizationsignal (ITP
signal )withCNC (suchas loss of ITP signal).
alarm.
AL--53 ITP signal abnormality II Detects abnormality insynchronizationsignal (ITP
signal) withCNC (suchas loss of ITP signal).
alarm.
AL--54 Overloadcurrent alarm Detects that excessive current flowedinmotor for
longtime.
Check if overloadopera-
tionor frequent accelera-
tion/decelerationis per-
formed.
AL--55 Power line abnormality in
spindle switching/output
switching
Detects that switchrequest signal does not match
power line status check signal.
Check operationof mag-
netic contractor for power
line switching.
Check if power line status
check signal is processed
normally.
APPENDIX
H. OPERATION OF
THE PORTABLE TAPE READER B--61394E/08
646
H
OPERATIONOFPORTABLE TAPE READER
Portabletapereader isthedevicewhich inputstheNC programandthe
dataonthepaper tapetoCNC.
2. Optical
reader
12. Photoamplifier
13. Reader/punch
interface adapter
11. Cable storage
6. Handle
3. Capstanroller
4. Control switch
1. Light source
5. Tape box
10. Lowering
Lock lever
9. Cover lock
7. Winder
8. Metal A
D Names anddescriptions
of eachsection
H. OPERATION OF
THE PORTABLE TAPE READER
647
TableH Descriptionof EachSection
No. Name Descriptions
1 Light Sources
AnLED(Light emittingdiode) is mountedfor eachchannel andfor the
feedhole (9diodes intotal). A built--inStopShoe functions to decelerate
the tape. The light source is attractedto the optical reader by a magnet so
that the tape will be heldinthe correct position. This unit canbe opened
upward, by turningthe tape reader control switchto the RELEASE posi-
tion(this turns off the magnet).
2 Optical Reader
Reads data punchedonthe tape, througha glass window. Dust or
scratches onthe glass windowcanresult inreadingerrors. Keepthis win-
dowclean.
3 CapstanRoller Controls the feedingof tape as specifiedby the control unit.
4
Tape Reader
Control Switch
A 3--positionswitchusedto control the Tape Reader.
RELEASE The tape is allowedto be free, or usedto openthe light-
source.
Whenloadingor unloadingthe tape, select this position.
AUTO The tape is set to fixedpositionby the StopShoe. The feedand
stopof the tape is controlledby the CNC. To input data fromtape, the
Light Source must be closedandthis positionmust be selected.
MANUAL The tape canbe fedinthe
forwardreadingdirection. if another positionis selected, the tape feedis
stopped.
5 Tape Box
A Tape Box is locatedbelowthe Tape Reader. A belt usedto drawout a
paper tape is locatedinside the box. The paper tape caneasily be pulled
out usingthis belt. The tape box accomodates 15meters of tape.
6 Handle Usedto carry the tape reader.
7 Winder Usedto advance or rewindthe tape.
8
Metal A
Fastener
(usually kept open)
Whenremovingthe rolledtape, reduce the
internal diameter by pushingthe fastener.
Push
Paper tape
Paper tape
Insert
9 Cover lock
Be sure to use the lock for fasteningthe cover before carryingthe tape
reader.
APPENDIX
H. OPERATION OF
648
TableH Descriptionof EachSection
No. Descriptions Name
10 Loweringlock lever
Whenthe tape reader is raised, the latchmechanismis activatedto fix the
tape reader. Thus, the tape reader is not lowered. The latchis locked
withthe loweringlock lever. The latchis therefore not unlockedeven
whenthe tape reader is raisedwiththe handle.
Whenthe latchis locked, the lever is horizontal. To store the tape reader
inthe box, pushthe lever to release the lock, thenraise the tape reader
withthe handle to unlock the latch.
Whenthe latchis unlocked, the tape reader canbe storedinthe box.
Whenstoringthe tape reader, secure it withthe cover lock.
11 Cable storage Usedto store rolledpower andsignal cables. The cable lengthis 1.5m.
12 Photoamplifier For the tape reader
13
Reader/punch
interface adapter
200VAC input and5VDC output power andreader/punchinterface
adapter PCB
H. OPERATION OF
THE PORTABLE TAPE READER
649
Procedurefor OperatingthePortableTapeReader
1 Unlockthecover locks9. Raisethetapereaderwiththehandle6until
itclicks, thenlower thetapereader. Thetapereader thenappearsand
issecured. Check that theloweringlock levers10arehorizontal.
2 Takeout thesignal and power cables fromthecablestorage11and
connect the signal cable with the CNC reader/punch interfaceport
andthepower cablewiththepower supply.
3 Turnthecontrol switchtotheRELEASE position.
4 Lift theLight SourceUnit, and insert an NC tapebetween thegap.
The tape must be positioned as shown in thefigure, when viewed
lookingdownward.
Directioninwhichthe tape advances
Feedholes
5 Pull thetapeuntil thetopof thetapegoespast theCapstanroller.
6 Check that theNC tapeiscorrectly positionedby theTapeGuide.
7 Lower theLight Source.
8 TurntheswitchtotheAUTO position.
9 Suspendthetopandrear--endof thetapeintheTapeBox.
Removingthetape
10 TurntheswitchtotheRELEASE position.
11 Lift theLight Sourceandremovethetape.
12 Lower theLight Source
Storage
13 Storethecablesinthecablestorage11.
14 Pushtheloweringlock lever 10at bothsidesdown.
15 Raisethetapereader withthehandle6tounlockthelatch, thengently
lower it.
Preparations
Settingthetape
APPENDIX
H. OPERATION OF
650
16 Lock thecover lock 9andcarry thetapereader withthehandle6.
CAUTION
DISCONNECTIONANDCONNECTIONOF APORTABLE
TAPE READERCONNECTIONCABLE
Dont disconnect or connect CNC tape reader connection
cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNC power
supply, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader and master
PCB of CNC controller may be broken.Turn off the CNC
power supply before disconnecting or connecting the
connection cable, accordingly.
NOTE
SETTINGOF ATAPE
When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function
activates to read but skip data until first End of Block code
(CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading
an NC tape, the location within the tape, from which data
reading should bestarted mustproperly beselected andthe
NC tape should be set as shown in the figure below.
; ;
Set the tape so that this sectionis
under the glass window.
The programwhich
shouldbe read
Actually, the endof block code
(;) is CR inEIA code or is LF
inISO code.
APPENDIX B--61394E/08 I. Series 0--DSPECIFICATIONS
651
I
Series 0--DSPECIFICATIONS
Controlledaxis
Item Specification 0--TD
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Number of controlled axes 2 axes f -- -- f -- f
3 axes -- f f l f l
4 axes -- -- -- l -- l
Simultaneous controllable
axes
2 axes f f f f f f
axes
3 axes -- -- -- l -- l
4 axes -- -- -- l -- l
Axis control by PMC MAX. 2 axes -- -- -- f f f
Cs--axis contouring control -- -- -- f -- f
Cf--axis control -- f f f -- f
Y--axis control -- -- -- f -- f
Simple synchronous control -- -- -- f -- f
Angular axis control -- -- -- -- f f
Least input increment 0.001mm,0.001deg,
0.0001inch
f f f f f f
Incremental system1/10 0.0001mm,0.0001deg
,0.00001inch
-- -- -- f f f
Inch/metric conversion f f f f f f
Interlock All axes f f f f f f
Machine lock All axes f f f f f f
Emergency stop f f f f f f
Overtravel signal Z--axis f f f f f f
Stored stroke check 1 f f f f f f
Stored stroke check 2 f f f f f f
Stored stroke check 3/4 G22/G23 -- -- -- f -- f
Mirror image each axis f f f f -- --
Followup f f f f f f
Servo off f f f f f f
Mechanical handle feed f f f f f f
Chamfering on/off f f f f f f
Backlash compensation f f f f f f
Stored pitch error compensa-
tion
f f f f f f
Position switch -- -- -- f -- f
f : Basic F : Basic option l : option : : Function included in other option
APPENDIX I. Series 0--DSPECIFICATIONS B--61394E/08
652
Operation
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Automatic operation (Memory) f f f f f f
DNC operation included in Reader/
puncher interface
f f f f f f
MDI operation f f f f f f
MDI operation B -- -- -- f -- f
Scheduling function Directory display of
floppy cassette is
need.
-- -- -- f -- f
Programnumber search f f f f f f
Sequence number search f f f f f f
Sequence number compari-
son and stop
-- -- -- f -- f
Programrestart -- -- -- f -- f
Buffer register f f f f f f
Dry run f f f f f f
Single block f f f f f f
Manual continuous feed
(J OG)
f f f f f f
Manual reference position re-
turn
f f f f f f
Setting the reference position
without DOGs
f f f f f f
Reference position setting
with mechanical stopper
-- -- -- f -- f
Manual handle feed 1 unit f f f f f f
2 units -- -- -- l -- l
Manual handle feed rate x1, x10, xm, xn
m:Up to 127,
n:Up to 1000
f f f f f f
Handle interruption -- -- -- f -- f
Incremental feed x1, x10, x100, x1000 f f f f f f
J og and handle simultaneous
mode
f f f f f f
Interpolationfunction
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Positioning G00 f f f f f f
Linear interpolation f f f f f f
Circular interpolation Multi quadrant is pos-
sible.
f f f f f f
Dwell (per sec.) f f f f f f
Polar coordinate interpolation -- -- -- f -- f
Cylindrical interpolation -- -- -- f -- f
Thread cutting / synchronous
feed
f f f f f f
653
Item 0--GCDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--TDII 0--TD
Package3
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package1
Specification
Thread cutting retract -- f f f -- --
Continuous threading cutting -- -- -- f f f
Variable lead thread cutting -- -- -- f -- f
Polygon turning -- -- -- f -- f
Skip function G31 -- -- -- f -- f
High--speed skip function -- -- -- f -- f
Multi--step skip function -- -- -- -- f f
Torque limit skip -- -- -- f -- f
Reference position return G28 f f f f f f
Reference position return
check
G27 f f f f f f
2nd reference position return f f f f f f
3rd/4th reference position re-
turn
-- -- -- f -- f
Rapid traverse rate 100m/min f f f f f f
Rapid traverse override Fo,25,50,100% f f f f f f
Feed per minute mm/min. f f f f f f
Feed par revolution mm/rev f f f f f f
Tangential speed constant
control
f f f f f f
Cutting feedrate clamp f f f f f f
Automatic acceleration / de-
celeration
Rapid traverse : linear
Cutting feed : expo-
nential
f f f f f f
Linear acceleration / decelera-
tion after cutting feed inter-
polation
-- -- -- f -- f
Feedrate override 0 to 150% f f f f f f
Override cancel f f f f f f
Manual synchronous feed f f f f f f
External deceleration -- -- -- f -- f
Programming
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Tape code EIA/ISO automatic
recognition
f f f f f f
Label skip f f f f f f
Parity check Parity H, Parity V f f f f f f
Control in / out f f f f f f
Optional block skip 1 piece f f f f f f
9 pieces -- -- -- f -- f
Max. programmable dimen-
sion
8 digits f f f f f f
Programnumber O4 digits f f f f f f
Sequence number N4 digits f f f f f f
654
Package1
0--TDII 0--TD
Package3
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package1
Specification
Absolute / Incremental pro-
gramming
It is possible to use in
the same block.
f f f f f f
Decimal point input / Pocket
calculator type decimal point
input programming
f f f f f f
Diameter / radius program-
ming (X axis)
f f f f f f
Plane selection G17,G18,G19 f f f f f f
Rotary axis designation only added axes f f f f f f
Rotary axis roll--over function only added axes f f f f f f
Coordinate systemsetting f f f f f f
Automatic coordinate system
setting
f f f f f f
Coordinate systemshift f f f f f f
Direct input of coordinate sys-
temshift
f f f f f f
Workpiece coordinate system G52,G53,G54 to G59
Note)
f f f f -- f
Manual absolute on and off f f f f f f
Direct drawing dimension pro-
gramming
f f f f f f
G code systemA f f f f f f
G code systemB/C -- f f f f f
Programmable data input G10 (Programmable
input of offset)
-- f f f f f
Sub programcall two--fold nested f f f f f f
Custommacro A f f f f f f
Custommacro B Editing is not avail-
able.
-- -- -- f -- f
Addition of custommacro
common variables
only custommacro B -- -- -- f -- f
Pattern data input -- -- -- f -- f
Interruption type custommac-
ro
-- -- -- f -- f
Canned cycles f f f f f f
Multiple repetitive cycle f f f f -- --
Multiple repetitive cycle 2 pocket figure
Note)
-- -- -- f -- --
Canned cycles for drilling -- -- -- f -- --
Canned cycles for grinding -- -- -- -- f f
Circular interpolation by R
programming
f f f f f f
Mirror image for double turret -- -- -- f -- --
Tape format for FS10/11 -- -- -- f -- f
Menu programming -- -- -- f -- f
655
Miscellaneous function/ spindlefunction
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Auxiliary function M3 digit f f f f f f
2nd auxiliary function B8 digit -- -- -- f -- f
Auxiliary function lock f f f f f f
High speed M/S/T interface f f f f f f
Multiple command of auxiliary
function
3 pieces (M code
only)
f f f f f f
Spindle function S analog/ serial out-
put
f f f f f f
Constant surface speed con-
trol
f f f f f f
Spindle speed override 0 to 120% f f f f f f
Actual spindle speed output -- -- -- f -- f
Spindle speed fluctuation
detection
-- -- -- f -- f
Analog voltage control by
PMC
f f f f f f
1st spindle orientation f f f f -- f
1st spindle speed range
switch
-- -- -- f -- f
2nd spindle orientation -- -- -- f -- f
2nd spindle speed range
switch
-- -- -- f -- f
Spindle synchronous control -- -- -- f -- f
Simple spindle synchronous
control
-- -- -- f -- f
Spindle positioning -- -- -- f -- f
Multi spindle control -- -- -- f -- f
Rigid tapping Note) -- -- -- f -- --
Tool function/ tool offsetfunction
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Tool function T2/T4 f f f f f f
Tool offset memory 6 digits 9/16 pairs -- -- -- -- f --
6 digits 32 pairs f f f f -- f
Tool offset f f f f f f
Y axis offset -- -- -- f -- f
Tool nose radius compensa-
tion
f f f f f f
Tool geometry / wear offset f f f f -- f
Tool life management Note) -- -- -- f -- f
Tool offset value counter input f f f f f f
Automatic tool offset -- -- -- f -- f
656
Package1
0--TDII 0--TD
Package3
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package1
Specification
Direct input of offset value
measured A
f f f f f f
Direct input of offset value
measured B
-- -- -- f -- --
Editingoperation
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Part programstorage length 80m f f f -- f --
320m -- -- -- f -- f
Registered programs 63 pieces f f f -- f --
200 pieces -- -- -- f -- f
Tape editing f f f f f f
Programprotect f f f f f f
Background editing -- f f f -- f
Extended part programediting -- -- -- f -- f
Play back -- -- -- f -- f
Setting/ display
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Status display f f f f f f
Clock function -- -- -- f -- f
Current position display f f f f f f
Programdisplay Programname : 31
characters
f f f f f f
Parameter setting and display f f f f f f
Self--diagnosis function f f f f f f
Alarmdisplay f f f f f f
Run hour and parts count dis-
play
-- f f f -- f
Actual cutting feed display f f f f f f
Display of spindle speed and
T code at all screens
f f f f f f
Directory display of floppy
cassette
-- -- -- f -- f
Axis name alternation -- -- -- -- -- f
Graphic function -- -- -- l -- l
Servo setting screen f f f f f f
Spindle setting screen f f f f f f
Servo waveformdisplay -- -- -- : -- :
Software operators panel -- f f f -- f
Software operators panel
general purpose switch
-- f f f -- f
English display f f f f f f
657
Package1
0--TDII 0--TD
Package3
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package1
Specification
J apanese (Chinese charac-
ters) display
-- -- f f -- f
German / French display -- -- f f -- f
Italian display -- -- f f -- f
Chinese display f f f f f f
Spanish display -- -- f f -- f
Korean display -- l -- l -- l
Data protection key f f f f f f
Datainput/ output
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Reader / puncher interface Reader/puncher
(Ch.1) interface
f f f f f f
Reader/puncher
(Ch.2) interface
-- -- -- f -- f
DNC2 -- -- -- l -- l
External I/O device control -- -- f f -- f
External data input f f f f f f
External key input -- -- -- f -- f
External work number search 15 pieces f f f f f f
External programnumber
search
1 to 9999 f f f f f f
Others
Package1
0--TD
Package2
0--TD
Package3
0--TDII 0--GCD
Package1
0--GCDII
Status output signals f f f f f f
9monochrome CRT f f f f f f
PMC--L Basic com-
mand:6.0ms Max.
steps: 5000
f f -- F f F
PMC--M Basic com-
mand:2.0ms Max.
steps: 8000
-- -- f F -- F
Internal I/O card DI/DO: 80/56, 104/72
points, source/sink
f f f F f F
I/O Unit--MODEL A DI/DO
Max.1024/1024
points
-- -- -- l -- l
NOTE
Part programstorage length is decreased by 9.75m.
APPENDIX
J . CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN
ENGLISH KEY ANDSYMBOLIC KEY B--61394E/08
658
J
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEENENGLISHKEY AND
SYMBOLIC KEY
Table: CorrespondencebetweenEnglishkeyandSymbolic key(Series 0)
Name Englishkey Symbolic key Name Englishkey Symbolic key
RESET key RESET
OPRATION/
ALARMkey
OPR
ALARM
PAGE UP key
PAGE
AUXILIARY/
GRAPHIC key
AUX
GRAPH
PAGE DOWN key
PAGE
MACRO key MACRO
SHIFT key SHIFT ALTER key ALTER
POSITION key POS INSERT key INSRT
PROGRAMkey PRGRM INPUT key INPUT
MENU key MENU
OUTPUT/START
key
OUTPT
START
OFFSET key OFSET DELETE key DELET
MENU/OFFSET
key
MENU
OFSET
CANCEL key CAN
DIAGNOS/PA-
RAMkey
DGNOS
PARAM
Index
B--61394E/08
i- 1
[Numbers]
2SystemsControl Function(FunctionsSpecificto
0--TTC), 340
[A]
AbsoluteandIncremental Programming(G90, G91),
90
Actual FeedrateDisplay, 532
AddressesandSpecifiableValueRangefor Series
10/11TapeFormat, 319
AlarmandSelf--DiagnosisFunctions, 448
AlarmDisplay, 449
AlarmDisplay(SeeSectionIII--7.1), 373
AlarmList, 625
AlteringaWord, 484
Angular AxisControl (0--GCC/00--GCC), 338
ArithmeticandLogicOperation, 268
AutomaticInsertionof SequenceNumbers, 506
AutomaticOperation, 364, 405
AutomaticTool Offset (G36, G37), 241
AuxiliaryFunction, 115
AuxiliaryFunction(M Function), 116
[B]
BackgroundEditing, 501
BalanceCut (G68, G69), 355
BranchandRepetition, 273
[C]
CancelingSpindlePositioning, 105
CannedCycle, 322
CannedCycle(G90, G92, G94), 137
CannedCyclefor Drilling(G80toG89), 164
CannedCyclefor DrillingCancel (G80), 173
CannedGrindingCycle(0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/
II), 178
ChamferingandCorner R, 182
Changingof Tool Offset Value, 240
ChangingWorkpieceCoordinateSystem, 83
Character--to--CodesCorrespondenceTable, 624
Charactersandcodestobeusedfor thepatterndata
input function, 315
Check byRunningtheMachine, 366
CheckingbySelf--DiagnosticScreen, 451
Circular Interpolation(G02,G03), 44
Commandfor MachineOperations-- Miscellaneous
Function, 25
CompensationAppliedtoAProgrammedT code,109
CompensationFunction, 191
Conditional Branch(IF Statement), 273
Conditionsfor MakingaTool Post Interference
Check, 350
Configurationof HighSpeedCycleCuttingData,327
Constant LeadThreading(G32), 55
Constant SurfaceSpeedControl (G96, G97), 96
ContinuousThreadCutting, 60
ControlledAxes, 31, 32
Conversational ProgrammingwithGraphicFunction,
513
CoordinateSystem, 78
CoordinateSystemonPart DrawingandCoordinate
SystemSpecifiedbyCNC-- CoordinateSystem,17
CoordinateValueandDimension, 89
CopyinganEntireProgram, 492
CopyingPart of aProgram, 493
CorrectioninChamferingandCorner Arcs, 235
CorrespondenceBetweenEnglishKeyandSymbolic
Key, 656
Counter Input of Offset value, 552
Counter RigidTapping, 177
CountingaTool Life, 113
CreatingPrograms, 504
CreatingProgramsinTeachinMode, 508
CreatingProgramsUsingtheMDI Panel, 505
CRT/MDI Panels, 378
Current Block DisplayScreen, 537
Current PositionDisplay(SeeSectionIII--11.1.1to
11.1.3), 373
CustomMacroA, 244
CustomMacroB, 259
CustomMacroBody, 247
CustomMacroCommand, 245
CustomMacroVariablesCommontoTool Posts, 356
CuttingFeed, 70
CuttingSpeed-- SpindleSpeedFunction, 23
Cylindrical Interpolation(G107), 52
Index B--61394E/08
i- 2
[D]
DataInput/Output, 453
DataOutput, 376
DataSettingfor theTool Post InterferenceCheck
Function, 345
Decimal Point Programming, 92
DeletingaBlock, 486
DeletingaWord, 485
DeletingAll Programs, 489
DeletingBlocks, 486
DeletingFiles, 474
DeletingMorethanOneProgrambySpecifyinga
Range, 490
DeletingMultipleBlocks, 487
DeletingOneProgram, 489
DeletingPrograms, 489
Detailsof Functions, 298
Detailsof Tool NoseRadiusCompensation, 210
Diameter andRadiusProgramming, 94
Direct DrawingDimensionsProgramming, 186
Direct Input of Tool Offset measuredB, 550
Direct Input of Tool Offset Value, 548
Direct MeasuredValueInput for Work Coordinate
SystemShift, 555
Directionof ImaginaryTool Nose, 199
Display, 372, 592
DisplayandOperationof 00--TC, 591
Displayof RunTimeandPartsCount, 533
Displaying Directoryof FloppyDisk, 469
DisplayingandEnteringSettingData, 565
DisplayingandSettingCustomMacroCommonVari-
ables, 560
DisplayingandSettingData, 369
DisplayingandSettingParameters, 572
DisplayingandSettingPitchError Compensation
Data, 574
DisplayingandSettingRunTime, PartsCount, and
Time, 570
DisplayingandSettingtheSoftwareOperatorsPanel,
580
DisplayingandSettingtheWorkpieceOriginOffset
Value, 559
DisplayingandSettingTool LifeManagement Data,
561
DisplayingMemoryUsedandaListof Programs,541
DisplayingOperator Message, 579
DisplayingtheDirectory, 470
Displayingthepatternmenu, 307
DisplayingtheProgramNumberandSequenceNum-
ber, 582
DisplayingtheProgramNumber, SequenceNumber,
andStatus,andWarningMessagesforDataSetting,
582
DisplayingtheStatusandWarningfor DataSetting,
583
DNCOperation, 414
DryRun, 437
Dwell (G04), 73
Dwell byTurningTimesof Spindle, 74
[E]
EditingaPart Program, 368
Editingof CustomMacrosB, 500
EditingPrograms, 477
EmergencyStop, 442
EndFacePeck DrillingCycle(G74), 157
EndFaceTurningCycle(G94), 142
Equal--LeadThreading, 320
Exampleof MakingaTool Post InterferenceCheck,
353
Executionof Tool Post InterferenceChecking, 351
ExtendedPart ProgramEditingFunction, 491
External I/ODevices, 385
External Output Commands, 292
[F]
FANUCFA Card, 388
FANUCFloppyCassette, 387
FANUCHandyFile, 387
FANUCPPR, 388
FeedFunctions, 66
Feed--FeedFunction, 15
FeedrateOverride, 435
FileDeletion, 457
FileSearch, 456
Files, 454
FinishingCycle(G70), 153
Front BoringCycle(G85) / SideBoringCycle(G89),
172
B--61394E/08 Index
i- 3
Front DrillingCycle(G83) / SideDrillingCycle
(G87), 167
Front TappingCycle(G84) / SideTappingCycle
(G88), 170
FunctionKeys, 381, 382
FunctionstoSimplifyProgramming, 136
[G]
General Flowof Operationof CNCMachineTool, 5
General Precautionsfor Offset Operations, 238
General ScreenOperations, 381
GraphicDisplay(SeeSectionIII--12), 374
GraphicsDisplay, 585
GraphicsFunction, 584
[H]
Header, 327
HeadingaProgram, 482
HighSpeedCycleCutting, 325
HowtoIndicateCommandDimensionsfor Moving
theTool -- Absolute, Incremental Commands, 20
HowtoUseCannedCycles(G90, G92, G94), 145
HowtoViewthePositionDisplayChangewithout
RunningtheMachine, 367
[I]
ImaginaryTool Nose, 197
Inch/MetricConversion(G20,G21), 91
Incorrect ThreadedLength, 614
Increment System, 34
Incremental Feed, 397
Input CommandfromMDI, 237
InputtingaProgram, 458
InputtingandOutputtingParametersandPitchError
CompensationData, 465
InputtingCustomMacroBCommonVariables, 467
InputtingOffset Data, 463
InputtingParameters, 465
Inputting/OutputtingCustomMacroBCommonVari-
ables, 467
InsertingaWord, 483
Inserting, AlteringandDeletingaWord, 478
InterferenceCheck, 229
InterpolationFunctions, 40
InterruptionTypeCustomMacro, 296
[J ]
J ogFeed, 395
[K]
KeyInput andInput Buffer, 383
Kindof Variables, 248
[L]
Limitations, 291
Linear Interpolation(G01), 43
List of FunctionsandTapeFormat, 606
Local CoordinateSystem, 86
[M]
M98(Singlecall), 245
MachineCoordinateSystem, 79
MachineLock andAuxiliaryFunctionLock, 434
MacroCall, 277
MacroCall UsinganM Code, 284
MacroCall UsingGCode, 283
MacroStatementsandNCStatements, 272
Manual AbsoluteONandOFF, 400
Manual HandleFeed, 398
Manual HandleInterruption, 429
Manual Operation, 360, 392
Manual ReferencePositionReturn, 393
MaximumStrokes, 35
MDI Operation, 409
MemoryOperation, 406
MemoryOperationbySeries10/11TapeFormat,318
MenuProgramming, 511
MergingaProgram, 495
Methodof ReplacingBattery, 597
Mirror Image, 432
Mirror Imagefor DoubleTurret (G68, G69), 185
Modal Call (G66), 281
MovingPart of aProgram, 494
Index B--61394E/08
i- 4
Multi--step(0--GCC, 00--GCC, 0--GCD/II), 63
Multiple M CommandsinaSingleBlock, 117
MultipleRepetitiveCannedTurningCycle, 323
MultipleRepetitiveCycle(G70TOG76), 147
MultipleThreadCuttingCycle(G76), 159
[N]
Namesof Axes, 33
Next Block DisplayScreen, 538
Nomographs, 613
NotesonCustomMacro, 258
NotesonMultipleRepetitiveCycle(G70toG76),163
NotesonReadingThisManual, 7
NotesonTool NoseRadiusCompensation, 207
Number of Control Axes, 326
Number of RegisteredCycles, 327
[O]
Offset, 194
Offset DataInput andOutput, 463
Offset Number, 193
Offset Number andOffset Value, 200
OperatingMonitor Display, 535
Operation, 593
OperationInstructionandBranchInstruction(G65),
253
Operationof PortableTapeReader, 644
Operational Devices, 377
OscillationDirect Fixed--DimensionGrindingCycle
(G74), 181
OscillationGrindingCycle(G73), 180
Outer Ddiameter / Internal Diameter DrillingCycle
(G75), 158
Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter CuttingCycle
(G90), 137
Outputting Parameters, 466
OutputtingaProgram, 460
OutputtingCustomMacroBCommonVariable, 468
OutputtingOffset Data, 464
OutputtingPrograms, 473
OutputtingSignal Near EndPoint, 119
Overall PositionDisplay, 530
OvercuttingbyTool NoseRadiusCompensation,234
Overtravel, 443
Overviewof Tool NoseRadiusCompensation, 197
[P]
Part DrawingandTool Movement, 16
PartsCount Display, RunTimeDisplay(SeeSection
III--11.5.3), 374
Patterndatadisplay, 311
Patterndatainput function, 306
PatternRepeating(G73), 152
PlaneSelection, 88
Polar CoordinateInterpolation(G112,G113), 48
Polygonal Turning, 330
PortableTapeReader, 389
PositionDisplayintheRelativeCoordinateSystem,
528
PositionDisplayintheWorkpieceCoordinateSystem,
527
Positioning(G00), 41
Power Disconnection, 391
Power ON/OFF, 390
PrecautionstobeTakenbyOperator, 173
PreparatoryFunction(GFunction), 36
ProcessingMacroStatements, 288
ProgramCheck Screen, 539
ProgramComponentsOther thanProgramSections,
123
ProgramConfiguration, 26, 121
ProgramContentsDisplay, 536
ProgramDisplay(SeeSectionIII--11.2.1), 372
ProgramInput/Output, 458
ProgramNumber Search, 488
Programof Tool LifeData, 111
ProgramRestart, 417
ProgramScreenfor MDI Operation, 540
ProgramSectionConfiguration, 126
ProgrammableParameter Entry(G10), 317
PulseDistribution, 326
[R]
RadiusDirectionError at CircleCutting, 621
Rangeof CommandValue, 610
RapidTraverse, 69
RapidTraverseOverride, 436
B--61394E/08 Index
i- 5
ReadingFiles, 472
ReferencePosition, 75
ReferencePosition(Machine--SpecificPosition), 16
RegisteringCustomMacroPrograms, 290
ReorganigingMemory, 503
Repetition(WhileStatement), 274
Replacement of WordsandAddresses, 498
Replacing Batteriesfor AbsolutePulseCoder, 599
ReplacingCNCBatteryfor MemoryBack--Up, 598
RigidTapping, 174
RotaryAxisRoll--Over, 337
[S]
SafetyFunctions, 441
SampleProgram, 286
SchedulingFunction, 422
ScreensDisplayedbyFunctionKey
DGNOS
PARAM
, 564
MENU
OFSET
, 544
OPR
ALARM , 579
POS
, 526
PRGRM
(inAuto
Modeor MDI Mode), 536
PRGRM
(intheEdit
Mode), 541
SelectingaWorkpieceCoordinateSystem, 82
Selectionof Tool Usedfor VariousMachining-- Tool
Function, 24
SequenceNumber ComparisonandStop, 568
SequenceNumber Search, 415
Series0--DSpecifications, 649
SettingaWorkpieceCoordinateSystem, 80
SettingandDisplayof InterferenceForbiddenAreas
for Tool Post InterferenceChecking, 348
SettingandDisplayingData, 517
SettingandDisplayingtheTool Offset Value, 545
SettingtheWorkpieceCoordinateSystemShifting
Amount, 553
SimpleCalculationof Incorrect ThreadLength, 616
SimpleCall (G65), 277
SimplifiedTool LifeManagement, 108
SingleBlock, 438
SkipFunction(G31), 61
SkipFunctionbyTorqueLimit Arrival Signal, 64
Soft Keys, 381
SpecificationMethod, 297
SpecifyingaTool GroupinaMachiningProgram,114
SpecifyingtheSpindleSpeedValueDirectly
(S5--Digit Command), 96
SpecifyingtheSpindleSpeedwithaBinaryCode,96
SpindleOrientation, 103
SpindlePositioning, 103
SpindlePositioningFunction, 103
SpindleSpeedFluctuationDetectionFunction(G25,
G26), 100
SpindleSpeedFunction, 95
StatuswhenTurningPowerOn, whenClear andwhen
Reset, 622
Stock Removal inFacing(G72), 151
Stock Removal inTurning(G71), 147
StrokeCheck, 444
Subprogram, 132
SubprogramCall Function, 427
SubprogramCall UsinganM Code, 285
SubprogramCall UsingM Code, 245
SubprogramCall UsingT code, 246
SubprogramCalling, 321
SubprogramCallsUsingaT Code, 286
SupplementaryExplanationforCopying,Movingand
Merging, 496
SystemVariables, 263
[T]
T codefor Tool Offset, 193
TapeCodeList, 603
Test Operation, 433
TestingaProgram, 366
TheSecondAuxiliaryFunctions(BCodes), 118
ThreadCuttingCycle(G92), 139
Tool CompensationandNumber of Tool Compensa-
tion, 239
Tool CompensationValues,Numberof Compensation
Values, andEnteringValuesfromtheProgram
(G10), 239
Tool FigureandTool MotionbyProgram, 29
Tool Function(T Function), 106
Index B--61394E/08
i- 6
Tool GeometryOffset, 192
Tool LifeManagement, 111
Tool MovementAlongWorkpiecePartsFigure--inter-
polation, 12
Tool Movement byPrograming-- AutomaticOpera-
tion, 362
Tool Movement inOffset Mode, 214
Tool Movement inOffset ModeCancel, 226
Tool Movement inStart--Up, 212
Tool Movement Range-- Stroke, 30
Tool Offset, 192
Tool Pathat Corner, 618
Tool Post InterfaceCheck, 345
Tool Selection, 107, 193
Tool Wear Offset, 192
TraverseDirect Fixed--DimensionGrindingCycle
(G72), 179
TraverseGrindingCycle(G71), 178
TurningonthePower, 390
[U]
Unconditional Branch(GOTOStatement), 273
[V]
Variable--leadThreadCutting(G34), 59
Variables, 247, 260
[W]
Waitingfor Tool Posts, 343
WordSearch, 480
Work PositionandMoveCommand, 202
WorkpieceCoordinateSystem, 80
WorkpieceCoordinateSystemShift, 85
[Y]
Y AxisOffset, 557
R
e
v
i
s
i
o
n
R
e
c
o
r
d
F
A
N
U
C
S
e
r
i
e
s
0
/
0
0
/
0
-
M
a
t
e
F
O
R
L
A
T
H
E
O
P
E
R
A
T
O
R
S
M
A
N
U
A
L
(
B
-
6
1
3
9
4
E
)
0
5
D
e
c
.
,
9
4
A
l
l
p
a
g
e
s
a
r
e
r
e
v
i
s
e
d
.
0
4
S
e
p
.
,
9
2
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
T
o
o
l
l
i
f
e
M
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
C
o
m
m
o
n
V
a
r
i
a
b
l
e
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
P
a
r
a
m
e
t
e
r
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
E
r
r
o
r
c
o
d
e
l
i
s
t
A
l
t
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
R
S
--
2
3
2
--
C
/
R
S
--
4
2
2
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
0
3
O
c
t
.
,
9
0
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
R
S
--
2
3
2
--
C
/
R
S
--
4
2
2
i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
0
8
J
u
n
.
,
9
8
C
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
E
r
r
o
r
s
0
2
M
a
r
.
,
8
9
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
0
--
M
a
t
e
T
C
0
7
A
u
g
.
,
9
7
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
S
a
f
e
t
y
P
r
e
c
a
u
t
i
o
n
s
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
P
a
t
t
e
r
n
d
a
t
a
I
n
p
u
t
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
S
e
r
i
e
s
0
--
D
/
0
--
D
I
I
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
S
e
r
i
e
s
0
--
D
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
E
r
r
o
r
s
0
1
O
c
t
.
,
8
8
0
6
S
e
p
.
,
9
5
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
S
k
i
p
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
b
y
T
o
r
q
u
e
L
i
m
i
t
A
r
r
i
v
a
l
S
i
g
n
a
l
(
S
e
c
.
4
.
1
1
)
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
D
w
e
l
l
b
y
T
u
r
n
i
n
g
T
i
m
e
s
o
f
S
p
i
n
d
l
e
(
S
e
c
.
5
.
5
)
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
O
u
t
p
u
t
t
i
n
g
S
i
g
n
a
l
n
e
a
r
E
n
d
p
o
i
n
t
(
S
e
c
.
1
1
.
4
)
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
C
o
u
n
t
e
r
R
i
g
i
d
T
a
p
p
i
n
g
(
S
u
b
s
e
.
1
3
.
3
.
7
)
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g
M
o
n
i
t
o
r
D
i
s
p
l
a
y
(
S
u
b
s
e
.
1
1
.
1
.
6
)
C
o
r
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
E
r
r
o
r
s
R
e
v
i
s
i
o
n
D
a
t
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
R
e
v
i
s
i
o
n
D
a
t
e
C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs
are subject to change without
notice.

Fanuc Series 0T Operator S Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Fanuc Series 0T Operator S Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Thefeedrateincircular interpolationisequal tothefeedratespecifiedby

Fig. 13.2.7(b) Detail of cutting

(j) Absolute value #i =|#j|

, , and indicate the order of operations.

to indicate the order of operations.

S-ar putea să vă placă și